Micro Process Flow

Warning
This article contains outdated status icons. For the latest icons, see Object Display Components – Object Status.

Intro

The micro process flow control enables you to visualize the state of individual items in a linear workflow, and is suitable for embedding into a list or a table.

Micro process flow in a responsive table
Micro process flow in a responsive table

Usage

Use the micro process flow if:

  • You need to show the state of each step in a linear, multi-step process.
  • Users need to see the progress of multiple items displayed in a list or table at a glance.

Do not use the micro process flow if:

Responsiveness

The micro process flow is responsive and adapts to the size of its parent container. If the micro process flow is too long for the parent container’s width, you can choose how it should behave:

  • Simple wrap: Steps that don’t fit into the width of the parent container wrap to a new line.
Simple wrap behaviour of micro process flow
Simple wrap behaviour of micro process flow
  • Overflow: Navigation arrows appear on both sides of the micro process flow, with the number of hidden steps indicated next to each arrow. By clicking the navigation arrows, users can scroll horizontally through all of the steps in the micro process flow.
Overflow behaviour of micro process flow
Overflow behaviour of micro process flow

The micro process flow control supports cozy and compact form factors.

Micro process flow in compact mode
Micro process flow in compact mode
Micro process flow in cozy mode
Micro process flow in cozy mode

Layout

The micro process flow acts as a generic container in which process steps are laid out linearly along the horizontal axis. The control provides the following layout options:

  • Default: The process steps appear as icons with a circular background, which use semantic colors and provide click events. You can choose from different icons provided by the SAP icon font.
Default layout with a circular background
Default layout with a circular background
Custom layout using Status Indicator control
Custom layout using Status Indicator control
Custom layout using Micro Chart control
Custom layout using Micro Chart control
Warning
Make sure that you replace the default tooltip texts from the original icons or controls with the names of individual steps in the process. For example, Payment, Shipping, Delivery. For more information, see Using Tooltips.

Types

Micro process flow with dependent steps (default)

A connector line appears between the process step and the step that follows it. Use this type when the completion of a step is a precondition for the subsequent step.

Micro process flow with dependent steps
Micro process flow with dependent steps
Information
When customizing the width of the connector lines, the minimum width must not be less than the default width, and the maximum width must not exceed the step width or step height (whichever is greater).

You can also indicate the state of the transition between two steps with a suitable icon.

Micro process flow with transition state
Micro process flow with transition state
Information
The width of the icon must not exceed 60% of the connector line’s width. The height of the icon must not exceed the size of the step node.

Micro process flow with independent steps

Steps are not connected and can be processed in arbitrary order. Connector lines and transition states are not required.

Micro process flow with independent steps
Micro process flow with independent steps

Behavior and Interaction

Popover

We recommend adding an on-click popover for each step to provide more details.

Information
Use the standard Popover control. For each step, add a click event that will invoke the popover.
Micro process flow with on-click popover
Micro process flow with on-click popover

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Generic Tag

The generic tag control displays complementary information that relates to the current page, such as key performance indicators (KPI) and situations.

Usage

Use the generic tag:

Do not use the generic tag:

  • For decorative purposes.
  • For navigation.

Structure

A – Status Indicator / Criticality Indicator – Mandatory

The indicator displays the status/criticality of the tag. Only use it with the available semantic colors.

 

B – Message Icon – Optional

The message icon can help visualize the status/criticality of the tag. The color of the icon is always the same as the color of the status indicator. Always use the correct message icon for the respective status/criticality.

 

C – Title – Mandatory

Always use a meaningful title. Keep it simple and try to use no more than 3 words.

 

D – Value and Unit of Measure – Optional

The value represents the numeric (key) attribute and its unit. The value has a semantic color, and the unit inherits the color from the value. The color of the value must be the same as the color of the status indicator. For more information, see Object Number.

 

Generic Tag for KPIs

To display KPIs, use the following structure:

  • A – Status indicator / criticality indicator
  • C – Title
  • D – Value and unit of measure
Structure of the generic tag
Structure of the generic tag
KPI as a generic tag
KPI as a generic tag

Responsiveness

The generic tag itself is not responsive. To enable responsiveness, use the overflow toolbar.

Generic tag overflow in the analytical list page - Size S
Generic tag overflow in the analytical list page - Size S

Behavior and Interaction

The generic tag has a press event. Use this event only to open a popover or analytical card containing relevant information, using the progressive disclosure technique.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Message Box

The message box (sap.m.MessageBox) is a special dialog that allows you to display messages to the user. Compared to the message popover (sap.m.MessagePopover), you can use the message box to display messages that are not related to a field on the UI, such as technical errors.

Formulate messages in plain language (no code), describe the issue precisely, and suggest a constructive solution. Always help your user to recognize, diagnose, and recover from messages. Bear in mind that no message is always preferable to even a good message. When you design your apps, aim to prevent problems from occurring in the first place.

Usage

Use the message box if:

  • You want to display non-field-related messages.
  • You want to interrupt the user while he or she performs an action.
  • You want to display error, warning, success, confirmation, or information messages.
  • You need to interrupt the user for some other reason.
  • You need the user to acknowledge the message.
  • You need the user to make a decision.

Do not use the message box if:

  • You want to display a short success message. (Use a toast instead. For more information, see message toast.)
  • You can show the message directly in a form field.

Responsiveness

The sap.m.MessageBox control has the same responsive behavior as the sap.m.Dialog control. The message box should only be opened in modal mode. Its basic width is 25 em. For more information, see dialog.

Types

The following categories of messages are available:

  • Error
  • Warning
  • Success
  • Information
  • Confirmation

Error Message

Error messages can be triggered after the user has entered incorrect data or a system error has occurred. They should interrupt the user by displaying a dialog. A final action such as Submit cannot be carried out until the user has rectified the error.

Control: sap.m.MessageBox
Icon: sap-icon://message-error
Title: Error
Stretch: False (no full screen on all devices)

Error message with one action
Error message with one action
Error message with two actions
Error message with two actions

Text guidelines for an error message:

  • Do not just describe the problem; tell the user how to resolve it.
  • In the short text, speak the language of the end user. Do not include system or configuration details.
  • If the solution is more involved or technical, add a long text.
  • Do not repeat the short text in the long text. They both appear together on the screen.

Warning Message

Warning messages highlight potential issues, but the user can still continue. This includes unintended data loss scenarios.

Control: sap.m.MessageBox
Icon: sap-icon://message-warning
Title: Warning
Stretch: False (no full screen on all devices)

Use cases for warnings

a) No decision required: Formulate the message as a statement.
Button(s): OK

Warning message with 'OK' button
Warning message with 'OK' button

b) Decision to continue required: Formulate the message as a statement.

Button(s): OK, Cancel

Warning message with 'OK' and 'Cancel' buttons
Warning message with 'OK' and 'Cancel' buttons

c) Specific decision required, with one action

Use a relevant action button. The message may also be formulated as a question.
Button(s): Leave Page, Cancel

Warning message with action and 'Cancel' buttons
Warning message with action and 'Cancel' buttons

Success Message

Success messages give feedback to the user that an action has been executed. The user needs to acknowledge the message.

Control: sap.m.MessageBox
Icon: sap-icon://message-success
Title: Success
Stretch: False (no full screen on all devices)
Button(s): OK

Success message
Success message
Information
You should generally use a message toast (sap.m.MessageToast) to display success messages instead of a dialog (sap.m.Dialog).

Information Message

Information messages provide information the user needs to acknowledge, but which does not involve a decision. The message provides information that is useful and relevant, but never critical.

Control: sap.m.MessageBox
Icon: sap-icon://message-information
Title: Information
Stretch: False (no full screen on all devices)

Button(s): OK

Information message
Information message

Confirmation Message

Confirmation messages prompt users to confirm an action that they have triggered. The title of the message box already includes the action that has to be confirmed, such as an intended deletion or an approval.

Control: sap.m.MessageBox
Icon: sap-icon://question-mark
Title:  (such as “Approve”, “Reject”, or “Delete”)
Stretch: False (no full screen on all devices)

Button(s): Approve, Cancel

Confirmation message
Confirmation message

Confirmation Message with “Note” Section

Warning
The image belows shows a “Note” section which allows the user to add notes, for example in a “Reject” process. This feature is not provided by the sap.m.MessageBox. Instead, you can use a normal sap.m.Dialog and place those controls inside the confirmation message.

Confirmation messages prompt users to confirm an action that they have triggered. The title of the message box already includes the action that needs to be confirmed, such as an intended deletion or an approval.

Control: sap.m.Dialog
Type: Message
Icon: sap-icon://question-mark
Title:  Such as “Approve” or “Reject”
Stretch: False (no full screen on all devices)

Button(s): ApproveCancel

Confirmation message with note
Confirmation message with note

Confirmation for “Delete”

If the user clicks Delete, display a “Delete” dialog that confirms the delete action.

Control: sap.m.MessageBox
Icon: sap-icon://message-warning
Title: Delete
Stretch: False (no full screen on all devices)

Button(s): Delete, Cancel

Confirmation for 'Delete' action
Confirmation for 'Delete' action

Components

Show Details button

The message displayed for the user should provide sufficient information to ensure that the user knows what has happened. A message box without an explicit details section should be sufficient. Therefore, the Show Details link is only shown if detailed information is available that differs from the message text and is important for the user.

If details are available, the application has three options to display the text. Text can be displayed as:

  • Plain
  • Formatted
  • The original code format
Message details - Plain text
Message details - Plain text
Message details - Formatted text
Message details - Formatted text
Message details with code excerpt
Message details with code excerpt

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Dialog

The dialog control (sap.m.Dialog) interrupts the current app process to prompt the user for information or for a response. It forces a decision or a confirmation that needs to be signed off by the user.

Usage

Use the dialog if:

  • You want to display complex content (that is not a floorplan), but don’t want the user to navigate away from the current page.
  • You want to display an additional step or process that needs to be confirmed by a user action.
  • You want to enable the user to create an object with a small number of fields (up to 8 fields).

Do not use the dialog if:

  • You want to display a simple message. Use the message box instead.
  • You just want to confirm a successful action.
  • You do not want to interrupt the user.
  • You want to enable users to create an object with more than 8 fields. Use an object page instead.
  • You want to display a floorplan. Floorplans are not meant to be displayed inside a dialog.

Responsiveness

The dialog provides different behavior on a smartphone than on a tablet or desktop. We distinguish between “cozy” and “compact” dialogs. For more information, see content density.

The buttons in the toolbar are aligned differently on the various devices. On a smartphone, they extend across the entire footer toolbar, but on a tablet or desktop device, they are right-aligned.

Size S (Smartphone)

Full Screen Dialog

We recommend displaying dialogs in S size in full screen mode to help users focus on the content of the dialog (property stretch = “true”). The toolbar containing the actions is positioned at the bottom of the dialog.

Position of the Action Buttons

On smartphones, a dialog can have one or two actions, which are located in the footer and right-aligned.

Full screen dialog - Size S
Full screen dialog - Size S

When to Open Full Screen or Modal

Always display message dialogs as modals. There is no need to display a simple message in a full screen dialog. If you want to display a simple message, use the message box instead.

If you use standard dialogs, such as value help, open them in full screen mode to help the user can focus on the content of the message. The dialog control offers a stretch property for full screen behavior.

Size M (Tablet)

By default, the dialog can have up to two action buttons in the footer. The action buttons in the toolbar are right-aligned. Use cozy mode on tablet devices.

If the content height increases or is set to more than the screen height, the dialog height stops at 4 rem from the top and bottom. The user can then scroll through the content area.

Size L (Desktop)

By default, the dialog can have one or two actions. The action buttons on a desktop device are right-aligned. Use compact mode to ensure that the padding and margins are optimized for desktop devices.

If the content height increases or is set to more than the screen height, the dialog height stops at 4 rem from the top and bottom. The user can then scroll through the content area.

Dialog in compact mode - Size L
Dialog in compact mode - Size L

Layout

Position on the Screen

The dialog is positioned in the center of the screen. It opens in a modal window to ensure that it attracts the user’s attention when it displays emergency states.

On a smartphone, the stretch property allows you to achieve full screen behavior.

Behavior and Interaction

Navigation in a Dialog

You can let users navigate to another page within the dialog. On the second page, an arrow at the top of the dialog allows users to navigate back to the first page.

Navigation pattern list - Size L
Navigation pattern list - Size L
Navigation pattern details - Size L
Navigation pattern details - Size L

 

Resizable

You can let users change the size of the dialog (property resizable = “true). The resizable indicator then shows in the bottom-right corner of the dialog.

Resizable indicator in the bottom right-hand corner - Size L
Resizable indicator in the bottom right-hand corner - Size L

Draggable

By clicking and holding on the heading, users can drag the dialog to another position (property draggable = “true”).

Dialog can be moved by dragging the title - Size L
Dialog can be moved by dragging the title - Size L

 

Messaging Within a Dialog

Do not show message popovers within dialogs. Use highlighting to show issues with content fields. For more information, see form field validation.

 

Editing and Saving Content

If a dialog is used for editing, keep it simple. If you need more than 8 editable fields, consider other solutions instead, such as navigation to a detail page.

The data in the dialog is only saved when the user clicks Create or Save. Use form field validation within the dialog to make users aware of any errors.

The data in the dialog is lost if the page is refreshed during the editing process (also in the draft scenario), or if the user chooses Cancel.

Highlighted form fields in a dialog - Size S
Highlighted form fields in a dialog - Size S

 

Types

Standard Dialog

Use the standard dialog unless you need one of the specialized dialogs below. The standard dialog has a header with a grey background, and no icon.

Message Box

The message box is a special type of dialog that is used to display messages quickly. For each type of message, you can decide when to use a dialog. Use the message toast (sap.m.MessageToast) for success messages. For more information, see Message Box.

Components

The dialog contains the following sections and options:

Title: Title text appears in the dialog header.

Subheader (optional): Subheaders appear below the main header. Since the subheader is not part of the content area, it is not scrollable.

Content: This area contains the actual content of the dialog.

Footer with actions: The footer can contain up to two buttons (optional). If no buttons are defined, the default Close button is shown.

Example of a dialog structure (Cozy)
Example of a dialog structure (Cozy)

Emphasized Buttons in a Dialog

Always use an emphasized button for the the standard action. Emphasizing the main action in the dialog toolbar helps users to focus on the most likely choice. This saves users time and gives new users a sense of orientation.

Never use an emphasized button for Cancel.

Emphasized button in the dialog footer
Emphasized button in the dialog footer

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

 

 

 

 

 

 

Value Help Dialog

The value help dialog is a UI pattern that helps the user find and select single and multiple values. The user can also define and select multiple ranges. The value help dialog is generally called from an input field or a multi-input field by clicking the selection icon (value help icon) of the input field.

Usage

Use the value help dialog if:

  • The user needs to use different attributes (such as city, company name, and so on) to find an object.
  • The user is searching within a dataset containing more than 200 items.
  • The user needs to define and select ranges and exclusions.

Do not use the value help dialog if:

  • There is a simpler control that fits the use case. Always start with the least complex control (for example, use select instead of value help if the user needs to select only one item from a short list). For more information on when to use which control, see Selection Controls – Overview.
Information
For more information on which selection control to choose, see the selection control overview.

Responsiveness

The behavior of the value help dialog on a phone differs from its behavior on a tablet or desktop device. Both the navigation and the positioning of the selection area differ depending on the device.

Value help dialog - Size S
Value help dialog - Size S
Value help dialog - Size M
Value help dialog - Size M
Value help dialog - Size L
Value help dialog - Size L

Components

The value help dialog contains the following components:

1) Header bar
2) Icon tab bar / list control (phone)
3) Search template (optional)
4) Basic search
5) Advanced search
6) Result list
7) Items row (selected items, excluded items)
8) Footer toolbar
9) Include/exclude areas for range selection

Header Bar (1)

The header bar contains the dialog title. For guidelines on the dialog title, see the Guidelines section of this article.

Icon Tab Bar on Tablet/Desktop and List Control on Phone (2)

Depending on the device, the following controls are used to display the content of the value help dialog:

  • Smartphones: The start dialog provides a list (sap.m.List) with the standard list items (sap.m.StandardListItemSelect from List and
    Define Conditions to navigate between the different dialogs.
  • Tablet and desktop devices: The value help dialog contains an icon tab bar (sap.m.IconTabBar) to navigate between the Select from List and the Define Conditions tab.

Search Template (3)

Search templates allow the user to display different or additional fields in the advanced search field and the results list. Depending on the use case, the user can switch between the different search templates in order to use different fields when searching. For example, the search template “Customer (by company code)” displays the additional field “Company code” in the advanced search and result list.

Basic Search (4)

The basic search finds all results that are somehow related to the input. For example, the search term “A” returns all the results containing the letter “A”.

Always offer the basic search in the value help dialog. Position the basic search to the right of the search template control. If there is no search template control, left-align the basic search.

Advanced Search (5)

The advanced search offers a search field for each column in the result list.

Value help dialog - Advanced search
Value help dialog - Advanced search

For implementation of the basic and advanced search, the filter bar (sap.ui.comp.filterbar.FilterBar) is used in advanced mode. Advanced mode differs from basic mode in the following ways:

  • There is no Filters link or a dialog to make additional filter fields visible. All filter fields/advanced search fields are added automatically to the advanced search area.
  • There is a toggle link to show and hide the advanced search.
  • In each of the filter fields, users can use operators like “between” or “lower than” to define ranges.

Always collapse the advanced search by default.

Note that the value help icon of the business object ID field and description field for the business object that opened the current value help dialog will open only the Define Conditions screen. The entire value help dialog is not shown in order to prevent endless loops. For example, the value help icon of the customer ID or description field in a Select: Customer value help dialog will navigate directly to the Define Conditions screen.

How the Advanced Search Works

The user can include operators (such as “=“) to define the ranges directly within the field without moving to the fields of the Define Conditions tab.

The user must type the following to get results:

Operator Input Notation Example
between valuevalue 000100
equal to =value =0001
contains *value* *1*
starts with value* 001*
ends with *value *5
less than <value <100
less than or equal to <=value <=200
greater than >value >0300
greater than or equal to >=value >=0500
not equal to* !(=value) !(=0)

* Note that there isn’t an explicit “not equal to” operator. Instead, you need to use “Exclude” (!) in conjunction with the “equal to” operator (=).

Advanced search using operator
Advanced search using operator

Result List (6)

  • You can prefill the result list of the value help dialog by default.
  • If you transferred values from the input field to the basic search field of the value help dialog, the results are filtered accordingly.
  • If available, display the ID and description of the business object in the first and second columns. Display additional information in the next columns.
  • We recommend a maximum of five columns in the results list.

Selected/Excluded Items Row (7)

The row for Selected Items / Excluded Items is displayed in the panel container (see panel for more information). Each item or range that is selected or excluded is displayed as a token in the selected or excluded item row.

  • On desktops, the selection area with the selected and excluded items row is initially expanded.
  • On tablets and phones, the selection area with the selected and excluded item row is initially collapsed.

Footer Toolbar (8)

The footer bar offers the OK and Cancel buttons.

Include/Exclude Areas for Range Selection (9)

In the Include and Exclude areas of the Define Conditions tab, you can define single and multiple ranges with the following operators:

  • equal to
  • between
  • less than
  • less than or equal to
  • greater than
  • greater than or equal to

Each range is displayed as a token in the selected or excluded item row.

Developer Hint
For information on how to manage whitespace characters (blanks) when users copy and paste text into input controls, see Removing Leading and Trailing Whitespace.

Behavior and Interaction

Basic and Advanced Search

  • The basic search (mandatory) and advanced search (optional) are triggered by clicking the Go button. The search results are shown in the result list.
  • If the input field where the user is coming from contains data, this data is transferred to the basic search of the value help dialog and the results are then filtered accordingly.
  • The basic search performs a search across all fields that are displayed in the advanced search and the result list.

Item and Range Selection

Depending on your use case, the value help dialog can offer different selection options:

  • Select a single item
  • Select a single range
  • Select multiple items
  • Select/exclude multiple ranges

Users open the value help dialog by clicking the value help icon of the input field. The next steps depend on the use case and form factor (smartphone or desktop/tablet).

The different use cases are described in the sections below.

Select a Single Item (Smartphone)

Tapping the value help icon opens the Select from List tab. As soon as an item is selected, the value help dialog closes automatically.

Single item selection on a smartphone
Single item selection on a smartphone

Select a Single Item (Desktop/Tablet)

Clicking the value help icon opens the Select: [Object]  screen (for example, Select: Company). The icon tab bar and the Selected Items / Excluded Items row are hidden. As soon as an item is selected, the value help dialog closes automatically.

Single item selection on a desktop/tablet device
Single item selection on a desktop/tablet device

Select a Single Range (Smartphone)

Tapping the value help icon opens the Define Condition tab.

Single range selection on a smartphone
Single range selection on a smartphone

Select a Single Range (Desktop/Tablet)

Clicking the value help icon opens the Define Condition: [Object] tab (for example, Define Condition: Company).

The icon tab bar and the Selected Items / Excluded Items row are hidden. The Add and Delete icons for adding and deleting ranges are also hidden.

Single range selection on a desktop/tablet device
Single range selection on a desktop/tablet device

Select Multiple Items | Select/Exclude Multiple Ranges (Smartphone)

Tapping the value help icon displays the start dialog.

  • The Select from List tab is used to select multiple items
  • The Define Conditions tab is used to select and exclude ranges.

Both are added as tokens to the Selected Items / Excluded Items row at the bottom of the start dialog.

Start dialog for multi-item and multi-range selection on a smartphone
Start dialog for multi-item and multi-range selection on a smartphone
Multi-range selection on a smartphone
Multi-range selection on a smartphone
Multi-item selection on a smartphone
Multi-item selection on a smartphone
Advanced search on a smartphone
Advanced search on a smartphone

Select Multiple Items | Select/Exclude Multiple Ranges (Desktop/Tablet)

Clicking the value help icon displays the icon tab bar with the Select from List and Define Conditions tabs.

  • The Select from List tab is used to select multiple items
  • The Define Conditions tab is used to select and exclude ranges.

Both are added as tokens to the Selected Items / Excluded Items row at the bottom of the screen.

Multi-item and multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device
Multi-item and multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device
Multi-item and multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device
Multi-item and multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device

Select/Exclude Multiple Ranges (Smartphone)

Tapping the value help icon opens the start dialog with the Define Conditions tab.

The selected values are added as tokens to the Selected Items / Excluded Items row at the bottom of the start dialog.

Start dialog for multi-range selection on a smartphone
Start dialog for multi-range selection on a smartphone
Multi-range selection on a smartphone
Multi-range selection on a smartphone

Select/Exclude Multiple Ranges (Desktop/Tablet)

Clicking the value help icon opens the Define Conditions: [Object] tab (for example, Define Conditions: Company). The icon tab bar is hidden and the Selected Items / Excluded Items row is displayed.

Multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device
Multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device

Selected Items / Excluded Items

  • Each item that is selected from the result list on the Select from List tab is displayed as a token in the Selected Items row.
  • Each range that is selected or excluded on the Define Conditions tab is displayed as a token in the Selected Items / Excluded Items row.

Copying and Pasting Multiple Values

The Include and Exclude areas on the Define Conditions tab allow the user to enter multiple values at once (copied from the clipboard) .

In both areas, users can paste more than one value into the value input field. In this case, the condition row repeats with the previously selected condition and shows one value per row.

If there are more than 10 rows of conditions in either the Include or Exclude area, pagination is added to top of the respective area. A token appears next to each pasted value on the Selected Items / Excluded Items row at the bottom of the value help dialog.

Copying and pasting multiple values
Copying and pasting multiple values
Copying and pasting multiple values
Copying and pasting multiple values

Guidelines

Dialog Title

The dialog title differs depending on the device and whether multiple or single selection is used.

For smartphones:

  • Starting dialog: [Object] (for example, Company)
  • Select from list dialog: Select from List
  • Advanced search dialog: Advanced Search
  • Single range selection: Define Condition
  • Multiple range selection: Define Conditions

For tablet and desktop devices:

  • Multiple items combined with selection of multiple ranges: [Object] (for example, Company)
  • Single item selection: Select: [Object] (for example, Select: Company)
  • Single range selection: Define Condition: [Object] (for example, Define Condition: Company)
  • Multiple range selection: Define Conditions: [Object] (for example, Define Conditions: Company)

Advanced Search

If necessary, also provide value help for fields offered in the advanced search. However, do not provide the full value help dialog for the ID and description fields of the business object that is being selected. For these two fields, make sure that the value help icon opens only the Define Conditions screen (range selection).

For example, in a value help dialog for selecting the customer, do not offer full value help for the Customer ID and Customer Name fields. Instead, try to use the value help in combination with a helpful suggestion.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

 

Tree Table

A tree table contains a hierarchical set of data structured in rows and columns and grouped into nodes. The analytical table (also know as ALV) can provide additional details in several non-hierarchical columns per line item. 

Usage

Trees are used to display and work with large amounts of hierarchical data. They have a high data density and therefore convey an immediate feeling of complexity. Ideally, you should only show trees with a lot of hierarchical data as a last resort. Try the following instead:

  • Break down the data into manageable chunks and allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Responsiveness

A tree table is available for desktops and tablets, but not in smartphone sizes. It supports touch devices, but is not optimized for small screens.

If you use a tree table, note that you have to implement a fallback solution for small screens. This fallback solution does not need to support all use cases.

Possible fallback solutions are as follows:

  • Use navigation to different pages instead of a tree structure. This works well for structures that are no more than four levels deep.
  • Remove levels until only one or two remain. Replace a single-level tree by a table, and a two-level tree by a grouped table or a split-screen layout.
  • Use filtering instead of a tree structure.

You can try to create a fallback based on these ideas, but a completely different solution, such as showing charts in a read-only case, might be more appropriate.

Tree table shown on a desktop
Tree table shown on a desktop
Tree table shown on a tablet
Tree table shown on a tablet

Types

Like all SAP Fiori controls, the tree table is shown in compact mode on a desktop and in cozy mode on tablets.

For a desktop, you can also display even more rows on the same screen height by adding the condensed mode in addition to the compact mode. This renders less white space for each item.

Note that the condensed content density has always to be set in addition to compact. Do not use condensed on its own. Do not mix condensed with cozy. Doing so could lead to unpredictable and / or unwanted results, e.g. cozy sized controls in condensed sized containers, missing padings, etc.

Note that neither compact mode nor condensed mode can be interacted with via touch. Even on a desktop with a touch screen, users will have difficulty selecting rows or using controls inside the cells when using their fingers.

Furthermore, condensed mode is not available for Internet Explorer 9. If condensed mode is to be used, please provide a fallback.

For more information on cozy and compact modes, see content density.

Compact Mode

Tree table - Compact mode
Tree table - Compact mode

Condensed Mode

Tree table - Condensed mode
Tree table - Condensed mode

Components

Column Header

The column header provides the label for the corresponding column and access to the column header menu.

Resizing columns works in the following ways:

  • Mouse interaction: Dragging the separator line between two columns (sap.ui.table. Column, property: Resizable). Double-clicking optimizes the column according to the length of the currently visible data and the label of the column header (sap.ui.table.Column, property: Autoresizable).
  • Touch interaction: The user taps the column header to reveal two buttons: one for showing the column header menu and one for resizing. Drag the latter to resize the column.

After resizing a column, the adaptation of the column widths depends on how the column width is set:

  • If column widths are set in pixel-based units (px, em, rem), the corresponding column is adapted and following columns are moved accordingly. The width of all other columns is not affected.
    If all the columns together take up less width than the table control, an empty space is added. If all the columns together take up more width than the table control, a scrollbar appears.
  • If all column widths are set in percentage or “auto”, resizing one column might also lead to the automatic resizing of some or all other columns. The position of the resized column might also be affected. This is done to ensure that the whole table width is used and no white space is added. A scrollbar appears only, if all or most of the columns get very small. To avoid the unintended side effect of undersized columns, a minimum width can be set per column. Please be aware that this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users are still able to reduce the column width below the provided minimum. (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: width, minWidth)

Columns can be rearranged by dragging the column header to another position (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, property: enableColumnReordering).

Tree table – Column header
Tree table – Column header
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Less columns than space available
Less columns than space available

Line Item

A line item contains a set of cells and provides options for selecting the item.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, property: rowHeight).

Tree table – Line item
Tree table – Line item

In rare cases, show actions within the line item. An example would be an Add to Cart button in a shopping application. Since these actions are repeated in every line and thus use a lot of screen real estate, only do this for one or two actions at most. In this case, show the action trigger near the content to which it belongs. Do not add a specific column for actions, but instead use transparent-style buttons. An exception to this is if the action trigger belongs to a link.

Tree Column

The first colum (tree column) provides the hierarchical structure.

Tree table – Tree column
Tree table – Tree column

Expand/Collapse Button

The expand/collapse button is offered on container nodes to allow the child items of the corresponding container to be shown or hidden.

Tree table – Expand/collapse
Tree table – Expand/collapse

Container Node

A container node is a line item that contains child elements.

Tree table – Container node
Tree table – Container node

Leaf Node

A leaf node is a line item that does not contain child elements.

Tree table – Leave node
Tree table – Leave node

Cell

Each cell provides one data point. It can contain one of the following controls to display the data point:

While it is technically possible to also use other controls, doing so could lead to issues in regards to alignment, condensed mode, screen reader support, and keyboard support.

If you use text, use only single-line text to keep the same row height. Truncate if necessary as this prevents adverse side effects when scrolling vertically (sap.m.Text, property: wrapping, value: false).

Tree table – Cell
Tree table – Cell

Tree Cell

A tree cell is a cell inside the tree column. Besides its data point, it provides a collapse/expand button on container nodes, and it indents the different hierarchy levels.

Tree table – Tree cell
Tree table – Tree cell

Column Header Menu

For the tree column, the column header menu can contain the menu item Freeze and a Filter field, in which the user enters free text.
For all other columns, only the free text filter is available.

Tree table – Tree column header menu
Tree table – Tree column header menu

Selection Cells

For multiselection tree tables, the first column contains checkboxes for selecting line items. Besides multiselection, the tree table offers a single-selection mode and also a read-only mode, in which line items are not selectable.

Tree table – Selection cells
Tree table – Selection cells

Select All

For multiselection tree tables, the column header can contain a checkbox above the selection cells for selecting or deselecting all line items.

Tree table – Select all
Tree table – Select all

Scrollbar

The tree table allows horizontal and vertical scrolling. You can add any number of line items to the tree table, which uses “lazy loading”.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, property: rowHeight).

The tree table is optimized to allow faster scrolling within the first 1000 items.

Tree table – Vertical scroll bar
Tree table – Vertical scroll bar

Behavior and Interaction

Selection

The tree provides the following possibilities:

No selection: Items cannot be selected. (property: selectionMode = None)

Tree table – No selection
Tree table – No selection

Single selection: One item in the tree table can be selected. A row selector column is shown. (property: selectionMode = Single)

Tree table – Single selection
Tree table – Single selection

Multiple selection: One or more items can be selected. The tree table provides a column with checkboxes on the left-hand side. Clicking a checkbox toggles the state of the corresponding row from deselected to selected and back. The Shift key can be used to select a range.

For multiple selection, you can choose between two variants.

  • Multi-toggle mode (property: selectionMode = MultiToggle)
  • Multi-selection plug-in (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin)

These variants behave differently when the user selects more items than are currently loaded in the front end.

Multi-toggle

In multi-toggle mode, you can offer a Select All checkbox to the left of the column header (property: enableSelectAll). Selecting this checkbox selects or deselects all items that are currently loaded in the front end. All other items are not selected/deselected. If the application data is stored in the back end, scrolling down further can reveal additional unselected items. The same can happen with range selections if not all items in the selected range have been loaded to the front end.

Multi-selection plug-in

If you use this plug-in instead of the multi-toggle selection mode, the behavior for range selection and Select All changes:

  • By default, a dedicated Deselect All button replaces the Select All checkbox. There is no default UI element for selecting all items.
  • You can set a limit for the number of items that can be selected (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin, property: limit). This limit has the following effect:
    • The range that can be selected using the Shift key is limited to the specified number of items (default = 200). The table automatically scrolls back to the last selected item and a message can appear (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin, property: enableNotification). Users can select more items by selecting additional ranges (the specified limit applies each time).
    • If the selection limit is set to 0, a Select All checkbox is shown. There is also no limit on the number of items that can be selected in a range. All selected items are loaded, which can lead to performance issues for large data sets.
  • If selected items are not already available in the front end, they are loaded automatically by the plug-in and set as selected.
Information
When setting a limit for the number of items that can be selected, keep the following boundaries in mind:

  • The performance of your service: How many items can be loaded at once in a reasonable time? Does this also apply if an end-user shows all available columns?
  • The “minimum limit”: Internally, the grid table loads blocks of items as the user scrolls down. Because this block size (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, property: threshold) is usually also based on the performance of the service, it should be safe to assume that the minimum selection limit is twice this size. In this case, loading the data would take as long as scrolling down and loading exactly one more block. Nevertheless, we recommend using larger limits if your service allows.

Tree table – Multiple selection
Tree table – Multiple selection
Using the multi-selection plug-in with a limit
Using the multi-selection plug-in with a limit

Selection Behavior

An item can be selected in different ways, depending on the configuration of the tree table (sap.ui.table.Table, property: selectionBehavior):

  • Row: An item is selected by clicking the checkbox or the row. Use this option for multi-selection tree tables if clicking a row or a cell is not used for anything else.
  • RowSelector: An item is selected only by clicking the checkbox in the selector cell. Use this option if clicking the row (or a cell inside the row) is used for something else, such as navigation.
  • RowOnly: An item is selected only by clicking the row, and not using checkboxes in the selector cells. Use this for single-selection tree tables if clicking a row or a cell is not used for another purpose, such as navigation.

Set the property collapseRecursive to “false” in order to keep the selection on subnodes even after collapsing and expanding the root node.

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a table or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position  (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and Drop
Drag and Drop

Column Header Menu

Sort

The column header menu can provide two sort options (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: sortProperty, showSortMenuEntry):

  • Sort Ascending
  • Sort Descending

The user selects one of these options to sort the corresponding column accordingly (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

Sort settings in column header menu
Sort settings in column header menu

Filter

The column header menu can provide a search field for entering free text. If the user enters a term in the input field and triggers the search by pressing Enter, the tree is filtered by the tree column and the corresponding value. If no items match the filter values, the filtered tree table may be empty.

Tree table – Filter
Tree table – Filter

Freeze Columns

The Freeze/Unfreeze option is provided in the column header menu of all columns. Using Freeze on one column freezes all columns from the first one to the selected one.

Tree table–- Freeze
Tree table–- Freeze

Column Handling

Show/Hide Columns

Columns can be shown and hidden. If the tree column is hidden, the following column is the tree column.

Rearrange Columns

The user rearranges columns by dragging and dropping the corresponding column header. The tree column is always the first column and cannot be dragged.

Resize Columns

Columns are resized as follows:

  • Mouse interaction: The user drags the separator line between two columns (sap.ui.table. Column, property: Resizable). Double-clicking the line optimizes the column according to the length of the currently visible data and the label of the column header (sap.ui.table.Column, property: Autoresizable). Note that auto-resizing works only if the cells in this column contain one of the following controls: text, label, link, or input.
  • Touch interaction: The user clicks or taps the column header to reveal two buttons: One to show the column header menu, and one for resizing. The user drags the latter to resize the column.

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a table. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

When opened, the context menu gets the row and column context, except for special columns (such as the selection column) or special rows (like group headers). Context menus can be implemented for a specific table, row, or cell (not recommended for editable cells).

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a table is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Tree table with context menu
Tree table with context menu

Cell Content

The tree is traditional in that each cell can contain only one data point in one single line.

Apart from plain read-only text, cells can contain the following:

While it is technically possible to also use other controls, doing so could lead to issues in regards to alignment, condensed mode, screen reader support, and keyboard support.

If you use text, use only single-line text to keep the same row height. Truncate if necessary as this prevents adverse side effects when scrolling vertically (sap.m.Text, property: wrapping, value: false).

Guidelines

Filtering

What exactly needs to stay or be removed is highly dependent on the kind of structure and data your tree table displays. For many trees, the following approach works well if you want to apply filters only to the leaves of a tree:

  • Remove all leaves that don’t fit the filter criteria
  • Remove empty nodes

Where nodes need to be filtered, keep the following in mind:

  • A node may or may not fit the filter criteria.
  • A node can contain items (nodes and/or leaves) that fit the filter criteria.

Because of this, the results might contain more nodes than those that are relevant for the filter criteria.

Developer Hint
The tree table itself has no influence on the filter result. It sends a filter request and displays whatever comes back. Make sure that the result set is meaningful.

Sorting

First of all: Is sorting meaningful in your tree? If so, decide on a meaningful default sort order.

If sorting is meaningful, is it meaningful on all levels? Or does the tree structure need to be stable? In the latter case, sort only leaves, but not nodes.

To display the current sort state, an icon is shown in the column header of the most recently sorted column. This icon indicates the sort direction (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order. For each column, provide a meaningful sort order. For example:

  • Sort text alphabetically
  • Sort numbers by their value
  • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
    • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
    • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
    • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
    • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.

Loading Data

To indicate that the table is currently loading items, use the busy state (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data has been loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Initital Display

Think of the initial expand / collapse state of a tree: If your structure contains many items on the root level, it might make sense to collapse the whole tree in the beginning.

In contrast, if the main items to work with are displayed on a deeper level (e.g. the parent nodes are just some kind of categorization), the tree should be expanded up to the first level where the needed items appear.

Selection

  • We strongly recommend using the multi-selection plug-in. This ensures that all items selected using Select All or as part of a range are included – even if some items were not initially loaded in the front end. This is not the case if you use the multi-toggle option.
  • Do not limit the range selection for the multi-selection plug-in unless you have to.
    • If the dataset is small and/or completely available in the front-end, set the limit property to 0 to enable the Select All option and allow users to select any range.
    • If you have a large dataset, set a limit on the number of selected items to avoid performance issues. Also bear in mind that some actions won’t be helpful if the dataset is too big (for example, a delete operation on 2 million database entries).
  • When setting a limit, also display the corresponding message when the user selects more items at once than the limit allows (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin, property: enableNotification).
  • In multiple selection mode, do not show checkboxes in the first data column in the default delivery to avoid confusion.

Empty Table

Try to avoid empty tables. If necessary, provide instructions on how to fill the tree table with data.

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items.

Add Items

For adding items, place an Add or Create text button on the table toolbar.

  • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
  • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.

Show new items as the first item of the tree table or node:

  • If nothing is selected, add the new item to the root.
  • If a single node is selected, add the new item to the selected node.
  • If a single leaf is selected, add the new item as child of this leaf. The original selected item becomes a node.

If your tree doesn’t support adding items to the root, selected node, or selected leaf, disable Create or Add for the corresponding levels.

Disable Create or Add if more than one item is selected.

For more details, see the guidelines for managing objects (including subarticles).

Enabling/Disabling Actions

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection:

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user how many items will be affected. Let the user choose whether to apply the action anyway or cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

If the action was applied and the items are still available, keep them selected.

Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection
Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection

Columns

Minimize the number of columns. Avoid the need to scroll horizontally in the default delivery. In the first column, show the hierarchical data, which should identify the line item. Choose the name over the ID, but if both are needed, show the name first, then the ID.

The tree table assigns the same width to each column by default. It is recommended that you overwrite this default to provide optimal space for your content (sap.ui.table.Column, property: width).

If you define the column width in pixels or rems, resizing a column affects only the width of this specific column. Reducing the browser window size results in a scrollbar. After resizing a column, a scrollbar appears if the width of the table is not enough to show all columns. If the columns use less space than is available, white space appears on the right side of the last column.

If you define the column width as a percentage, resizing one column affects the width of several or all columns. Text becomes truncated when the browser window size is reduced. This is done to make sure that all columns together fill the space of the table. A scrollbar appears only in case the automatic change of the column widths is not enough to display all columns. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, a minimum width can be set per column. Please be aware that this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users are still able to reduce the column width below the provided minimum. (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: width, minWidth)

If you define the column width as “auto”, the behavior is the same as for “percentage”. In contrast to percentage, “auto” distributes the columns equally.

To decide on how to set the column width (pixel/rem/em vs. percent/auto), keep the following tips in mind:

  • For tables with only 2 to 3 columns, use pixel-based units. This ensures that on wide screens the values in the columns are not spread over the whole screen, which improves readability of line items.
  • For tables with many columns, where a horizontal scrollbar is usually needed, use pixel-based units. This avoids unintended side effects when resizing columns.
  • For all other tables, use whatever fits your case better.

Be cautious with mixing columns with pixel-based and percentage-based widths. While this can be helpful in some cases, it could also cause even more unintended side effects when resizing a column. When using percentage-based widths for one or more columns, think of the possibility to not allow end users to resize columns at all.

Alignment of Cell Content

Align column headers according to their cell content:

  • Texts are left-aligned.
  • Numbers (except for IDs), dates, and times are right-aligned.
  • Icons are centered.
  • Micro charts are left-aligned.

In addition, align amounts with currencies to the decimal point. You can do this with the sap.ui.unified.Currency control.

Note that most currencies have two digits after the decimal point, but there are exceptions, for example:

  • The Tunisian dinar has three digits.
  • The Japanese yen has no digits.

In tree tables with mixed currencies, all amounts still have to be aligned to the decimal point.

To enable positive and negative values to be identified more easily, position the minus sign to the right of the number. It is placed in the same position in every row.

For more information, see currency.

Formatting Cell Content

  • Note that there are different locale formats, so show dates, times, and numbers in the correct format for the user’s language/country.
  • If you show both a a text and an ID, consider the requirements for sorting, grouping and filtering:
    • If users need to sort, group, and/or filter by both text and ID, show the text and ID in two separate columns.
    • If users only need to sort, group, and/or filter by either text or ID, show the ID in parentheses after the corresponding text.
  • If the unit of measurement is the same for all rows, show the unit of measurement in the column header. Otherwise, show the unit of measurement within the row.
  • If you want to let users sort, filter, or group by amount and by unit of measure independently, put both in different columns. If you combine them in one column, offer only sorting, filtering, and grouping by amount.

Tree vs. Table

Trees are more complex than tables due to their hierarchical view. Users tend to have more problems finding items in hierarchical views than in flat lists, except where the hierarchical view is natural. By natural we mean that every child node should be part of only one parent, and this relationship between the child and parent is clear and well known.

Do
Example of an acceptable use of tree tables
Example of an acceptable use of tree tables
Do
A clear parent-child relationship
A clear parent-child relationship

When you use trees, you should choose broad hierarchies over deep hierarchies. Deep hierarchies make finding items more complicated. So try to reduce hierarchical levels where possible, especially if the hierarchy is not natural. Ideally, a tree should have a maximum of four levels, the first two of which should contain the most important items.

Don't
Avoid unnecessary depth in the hierarchy
Avoid unnecessary depth in the hierarchy
Do
Favor breadth over depth in the hierarchy
Favor breadth over depth in the hierarchy

You can use the following methods to reduce hierarchy levels:

  • Avoid single root nodes. A single root node is often used to provide a Select All feature. Since the tree control provides an extra space for a Select All feature, the root node is not usually needed.
  • When you use only two levels, choose a grouped table or grouped ALV over a tree table control. Expand all groups for the default delivery.
  • Container nodes at the top level can usually be replaced by tabs or value pickers.
  • Eliminate unnecessary mid-level containers, for example, by combining redundant ones.
  • Exercise care when using a tree due to its overall complexity. The hierarchical structure of the data does not necessarily mean that a tree control is required.

Design Concepts

The tree table can be used to display large amounts of hierarchical data. Unfortunately, tree tables have a high data density and therefore convey an immediate feeling of complexity. Ideally, tree tables with large amounts of data should only be shown if there is no other option. You should instead try the following:

  • Flatten the data. A list, table, or ALV is still complex, but less so than a tree table.
  • Break down the data into manageable chunks. Allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Try to avoid horizontal scrolling in the default delivery.

Navigation

To trigger navigation on line item level, choose one of the following options:

  • Use a link for the attribute that identifies the row. Clicking the link triggers the navigation. This is the preferred option.
  • Add the RowActions column and show the navigation arrow (  ) at the end of the row. No column header text is required. The navigation column is fixed and will not scroll away. Users also cannot personalize this column. The navigation arrow triggers the navigation.
    Do not use the RowActions column for actions other than navigation and deletion.

Special case: Multi-selection in a master-detail scenario
When a multi-selection table is used in a master-detail scenario, it is not clear which item was last opened (for example, which item is currently shown in the second column of a flexible column layout). In this case, you can display a “navigated” indicator to show which item is currently open.

Examples of Incorrect and Correct Usage

When you use trees:

  • Choose breadth over depth.
  • Emphasize important values. Do not let the user run into a wall of text without guidance. You can use bold text for this.
  • Try to minimize the number of columns, especially if there is a large number of rows.
  • Optimize column width for its initial visible content. Do not automatically adjust column width based on content changes.
  • Do not wrap content, truncate it. End users can easily change the column width to see the full text.
Don't
Avoid: The initial visible content should not be truncated in the default delivery
Avoid: The initial visible content should not be truncated in the default delivery
Don't
Never wrap texts
Never wrap texts
  • Maintain a fixed layout, except when the user wants to change it.
  • In the default layout, use the tree column for the item name or data that identifies the row. This helps the user to choose between different items.
  • Create a clear and immediately understandable hierarchy. Use clear parent-child relationships. If this is not possible, add a child in different nodes to help the user find the element.
Do
Acceptable: repeat entries to optimize finding items
Acceptable: repeat entries to optimize finding items
  • Consider persisting the layout settings. When a user reopens the app, show the tree table with the same column sizes, column order, and view settings as last defined by this user.
  • Use the Select All feature only if it makes sense. Note that selecting a lot of data also takes time and might not be appropriate for all use cases. For example, a delete operation on two million database entries might not be very helpful in many cases.
  • Set the property collapseRecursive to “false” in order to keep the selection on subnodes even after collapsing and expanding the root node.

Empty Tree Tables

Avoid empty tree tables. If necessary, provide instructions on how to fill the tree table with data (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, properties: noDataText, showNoData).

Examples:

  • If a tree table is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the tree table with data.
  • If a tree table is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    No filters set. To start, enter your search and filter settings and run the search.
  • If a tree table is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No items found. Check the search and filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, no search is offered, only the search is offered).
  • You are using the live search (no Go button in the filter bar). In this case, leave out “run the search”.
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of search and filter settings).

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, you can display a highlight indicator in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to show:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry-specific or process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”.

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users exactly what is wrong. Make sure that you provide this information within the table row, ideally in the same color.

For details on the use of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.ui.table.TreeTable, aggregation: rowSettingsTemplate)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. Also, because there is no generic keyboard interaction, drag and drop isn’t accessible. Moreover, drag and drop is not available on all browsers. For these reasons, offer drag and drop only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within a tree table, use the following options:

  • For dropping items as a child, use whole nodes as drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.On).
  • For dropping items on the same level, use the space between items as drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between).
  • If you want to allow users to drop items as a child or sibling, offer both drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.OnOrBetween).

This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Drop target on an Item
Drop target on an Item

Do not combine rearranging items within one level and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

Moving items from one node to another can be combined with sorting without any issues.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items on the same level with sorting
Do not combine rearranging items on the same level with sorting

Visible Alternatives to Drag and Drop

Depending on the functionality you need, use one or more of the following alternatives:

  • To move items up or down within a node:
    Use the  Move Up and  Move Down buttons on the toolbar. These buttons move the selected items until the first selected item can’t be moved up / the last selected item can’t be moved down any further.
    Depending on your tree, this can make sense for both leaves and nodes, only for leaves, or only for nodes. When moving a node, move the whole node and (if applicable) all its children up or down to the next position within the parent node.
    Always make sure that when the user moves an item in one direction and then moves it back, the order is the same as it was before.
    Do not combine the option to move items up and down with sorting.
  • To move items to another node:
    Use Copy and Paste buttons on the toolbar.
    Alternatively, offer a Move To button. Clicking Move To opens a dialog that shows all the nodes of the tree, but no leaves. Selecting an item in this dialog closes the dialog and moves the corresponding items to the selected node.
  • To change the level of an item:
    In some trees, such as document structures, users can change the level of an item without affecting the level of parent or child items. In this case, use left and right arrow buttons (   ).

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar). Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

The context menu can be triggered for the table, row, or cell. However, we do not recommend using context menus for cells: because the content of a cell is a different touch target than the cell itself, opening a cell context menu via touch is quite hard, even in cozy mode.

Do not combine context menus with condensed mode: editable controls fill the entire space inside a cell. Because of this, context menus cannot be opened at all with touch or mouse interaction.

Tables in Object Pages

In the object page, we advise against using analytical, grid, and tree tables. Instead, use a responsive table and offer navigation to a list report with the table types mentioned above.

For more information on the use of tables within the object page, see the Tables section of the Object Page article.

Export to Spreadsheet

On the table toolbar, apps can provide a menu button for exporting table data to a spreadsheet. For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button
'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Tree

Within SAP Fiori, we distinguish between tree tables and trees. Both usually allow the user to display and work with a hierarchical set of items. While tree tables are usually used for more complex data, trees are generally used for rather basic data. Trees are mostly used in the master list for a master-detail scenario using the flexible column layout and in popovers or dialogs. In certain use cases, they can also be used in the dynamic page layout.

In the case of tree tables and trees, items that contain additional items are called nodes, while items that do not contain any other items are called leaves. If available, a single topmost node is called a root node. Apart from the hierarchical structure of its nodes and leaves, a tree is quite similar to a list.

Usage

Use the tree if:

  • You need to display the key identifier of hierarchically structured items (for example in the first column of the flexible column layout).
  • Selecting one or more items out of a set of hierarchically structured items is a main use case.
  • The hierarchy has a restricted number of levels (up to about 12, depending on the content) and items (around 200).
  • You want to have only one implementation for all devices.

Do not use the tree if:

  • The main use case is to select one item from a very small number of non-hierarchical items, without viewing additional details. In this case, a select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • Items are not structured hierarchically. Use a list instead.
  • The hierarchy turns out to have only two levels. In this case, use a grouped list.
  • The hierarchy turns out to be just a categorization based on several details of the item. In this case, an analytical table provides multi-level grouping. Note that the analytical table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You need to display very deep hierarchies with additional data per item. In this case, use a tree table. Note that the tree table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • The structure contains more than around 200 items. In this case, use the tree table. It is optimized for large item sets and provides better performance. Note that the tree table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use a chart.

Check out the table overview to decide which SAP Fiori table is most suitable for your needs.

Responsiveness

The tree is like a list containing hierarchical data. It acts as a container for items, with the possibility to expand and collapse nodes. When reducing the width, item texts wrap to ensure that the tree adapts to the new size.

In addition, the tree changes the indentation per level dynamically when the user expands a node, based on number of levels currently showing.

Tree displaying 2 levels
Tree displaying 2 levels
Tree displaying 3 levels
Tree displaying 3 levels
Tree displaying 4 levels
Tree displaying 4 levels

Layout

The title bar (optional) contains the title of the tree. In addition, an item counter and toolbar items can be placed on the title bar.
The collection of hierarchical items occupies the main part of the tree.

Schematic visualization of the tree
Schematic visualization of the tree

Components

The title bar consists of a toolbar. The toolbar can contain a title, an item count, and other toolbar items such as actions or view settings, for example.

The standard tree item consists of:

  • A highlight indicator (optional)
  • An expand/collapse button for nodes
  • A selector in form of a checkbox or a radio button (optional)
  • An icon (optional)
  • text
  • A counter (optional)
  • Additional buttons with actions such as Edit, Navigate, or Delete (optional)

If additional controls are needed, use a custom tree item. The custom tree item allows you to use any combination of controls inside the tree.

Standard tree item
Standard tree item

Behavior and Interaction (incl. Gestures)

Tree Level

Scrolling

The height of the tree is defined by the number of items it contains. It does not have its own scroll container, but is scrolled together with the app.

Same tree, with different expand state
Same tree, with different expand state

When the user scrolls, the title and the filter info bar can stick to the top of the surrounding layout container (sap.m.Tree, property: sticky).

Information
The “sticky” feature comes with some limitations:

  • It is not available on all browsers. In non-supporting browsers, the corresponding areas are not fixed on top of the surrounding layout container while scrolling.
  • Certain layout containers suppress the sticky behavior, such as the grid layout. The same happens if the table is placed within the object page.
  • If focus is set to a sticky area, the tree is automatically scrolled to top.

Sticky title
Sticky title

Selection Modes

A tree can have one of the following selection modes (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, property: mode):

None: Items cannot be selected (sap.m.ListMode.None).
Beware: Items can, nevertheless, use the sap.m.ListType “navigation” which allows click-handling on specific items. This should only be used when the click triggers a navigation to a corresponding item details page.

Tree without selectable items
Tree without selectable items

Single select master: One item of the tree can be selected. To select an item, click anywhere on the item. Single select master does not add any visual indication to the tree and therefore cannot be differentiated from trees without selection if no item is selected. Therefore, always keep one item selected. For single selection, this is the preferred mode. (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectMaster)

Single selection: only one item is selected.
Single selection: only one item is selected.

Single select left: One item of the tree can be selected. For this, the tree provides radio buttons on the left side of each line item. Use this selection mode only if clicking on the item triggers something else, such as a navigation. Ideally, always keep one item selected, even in initial state (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectLeft).

Single selection with radio buttons. Use only if row clicks are used for something else, such as for navigation.
Single selection with radio buttons. Use only if row clicks are used for something else, such as for navigation.

Multiple selection: Allows the selection of one or more items. For this, the tree provides checkboxes on the left side of each line item. Each item is selected independently of the others. The Shift key can be used to select a range (sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).

Developer Hint
In multiple selection mode, users can (de)select all items using the shortcut CTRL+A. This only affects items that have already been loaded to the front-end server. All other items are not (de)selected before they are loaded (for example, items added via lazy loading with growingScrollToLoad). This conflicts with the guideline that all items the user can reach by scrolling must be (de)selected.

Also note that CTRL+A only (de)selects items within expanded nodes.

To process all items, listen to the selectionChange event and to its flag selectAll. This indicates whether CTRL+A was triggered. As soon as an action is triggered, process the items accordingly. Depending on the number of items, consider processing them in the back end.

Multiple selection
Multiple selection

Deleting

To delete single items, use the tree in “delete” mode (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This adds a Delete   button to each item. Clicking or tapping this button triggers the deletion of the corresponding item. Do not use this mode if deleting multiple items at once is the preferred use case. Delete is a mode of the tree and  therefore cannot be used together with single selection or multi selection.

Tree in “delete” mode
Tree in “delete” mode

Line Item Level

Expandable and Collapsible Nodes

An Expand/Collapse button is provided automatically for each node.

Expand/collapse button
Expand/collapse button

Highlight an Item

To highlight an item, use the “highlight” indicator (sap.m.TreeItemBase, properties: highlight).

Highlighted item
Highlighted item

Navigating

To allow navigation from an item, set type to “navigation” within the corresponding item (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This will create an indicator at the end of the line (“>”) and the entire item will become selectable. Clicking or tapping the line triggers the navigation event. However, clicking or tapping a selectable area or an expandable/collapse node does not. Use the navigation event to navigate to a new page containing item details.
If no navigation is possible, set type to “inactive”.
Navigation is an item type and therefore cannot be used together with “edit” or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).

Tree items with navigation indicator
Tree items with navigation indicator
Navigation indicators can be set per item
Navigation indicators can be set per item

Indicate Navigated Item

When multi-selection is used in a master-detail scenario, it is not clear which item was last opened (for example, which item is currently shown in the second column of a flexible column layout). In this case only (multi-selection tree with navigable items), you can display a “navigated” indicator to mark the item that is currently open (sap.m.TreeItemBase, property: navigated).

Navigated item
Navigated item

Editing Items

To allow the user to edit an item, set type to “detail” within the corresponding item (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive). This will create an edit  button at the end of the line. Clicking the button triggers the edit event. Use this event to either open a dialog or a details page where the item can be edited.
Edit is an item type and therefore cannot be used together with “navigation” or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).

Edit button
Edit button

Clicking an Item

Items as a whole can be clickable. An event is fired by clicking on the item (anywhere except when triggering a selection or when expanding/collapsing a node). Apps can react to the event, such as by opening a dialog (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive).
Active elements do not have a visual indication and therefore cannot be differentiated from non-active elements.
“Active” is an item type and  therefore cannot be used together with “navigation” or “edit”. In addition, “active” uses the entire item as a clickable area and thus cannot be used together with single select master.

Active items
Active items

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a tree. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

The context menu can be triggered for the tree or per item.

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a tree is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Tree - context menu
Tree - context menu

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a tree or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.m.ListBase, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Guidelines

Tree vs. List

Trees are more complex than lists due to their hierarchical view. Users tend to have more problems finding items in hierarchical views than in flat lists, except where the hierarchical view is natural. By natural we mean that every child node should be part of only one parent, and this relationship between the child and parent is clear and well known.

Example of an acceptable use of trees
Example of an acceptable use of trees
Do
A clear parent-child relationship
A clear parent-child relationship

Broad vs. Deep Hierarchies

When you use trees, you should choose broad hierarchies over deep hierarchies. Deep hierarchies make finding items more complicated. So try to reduce hierarchical levels where possible, especially if the hierarchy is not natural. Ideally, a tree should have a maximum of four levels, the first two of which should contain the most important items.

Don't
Avoid unnecessary depth in the hierarchy
Avoid unnecessary depth in the hierarchy
Do
Favor breadth over depth in a hierarchy
Favor breadth over depth in a hierarchy

You can use the following methods to reduce hierarchy levels:

  • Avoid a single root node. It is usually not needed.
  • Container nodes at the top level can usually be replaced by tabs or value pickers.
  • Eliminate unnecessary mid-level containers, for example, by combining redundant ones.
  • Exercise care when using a tree due to its overall complexity. The hierarchical structure of the data does not necessarily mean that a tree control is required.
Acceptable: repeat entries to optimize finding items
Acceptable: repeat entries to optimize finding items

Design Concepts

The tree can be used to display hierarchical data. Unfortunately, trees convey an immediate feeling of complexity. Ideally, show trees only if there is no other option. You should instead try the following:

  • Flatten the data. A list is still complex, but less so than a tree. A combo box might also fit in some use cases.
  • When only two levels are needed, a grouped list control can be used. This works well, where group nodes are used for categorizing their children and where the group nodes themselves do not need to be selectable.
  • Break down the data into manageable chunks. Allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Design for Performance

To optimize performance, we recommend showing no more than 200 items at once in the tree. For larger datasets (up to 1,000 items), use the “growing” mechanism to limit the number of displayed items, and make sure that users can filter the data.

Warning
The limits above are only recommendations. For a specific app context, the number of manageable items might be far higher or lower.

The actual limits depend on your concrete scenario, including:

  • The number of rows in the table
  • The number of displayed columns
  • The complexity of the cell content (for example, simple text vs. complex charts)
  • Other elements on the page (for example, multiple pages in a flexible column layout, or several tables/elements with more complex rendering on one page)
  • The browser being used

Title

Use a title only if the title of the tree is not indicated in the surrounding area. If needed, implement the title text by adding a title to a toolbar. Place the toolbar above the tree.

Do not use a title if it simply repeats text that is already above the tree. For example:

  • Beverages tree is the only control on a tab labeled Beverages.
  • A section or subsection on an object page contains only one tree.

Use a title if you need the item count, toolbar, or variant management. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a title, such as Items.
Exception: If the surrounding area contains the title, and both the item count and toolbar can be added to the surrounding area, no additional title is needed.
Example: An object page (sub-)section contains only one tree. In this case, add the item count and the table toolbar to the (sub-)section header.

If you use a title, be sure to include the following:

  • A title text for the tree.
  • An (optional) item count using the following format: Title (Number of Items). For example, Items (17). Depending on the use case, either count all items or only leaves (for example, if nodes are mainly used for categorization).

Remove the item count in the title if there are zero items.

If possible, keep the toolbar sticky (sap.m.Tree, property: sticky).

Developer Hint
Assistive technologies (such as screen readers) use the title to create a hierarchical site map for faster navigation. In addition, screen readers use the title as the label for the tree.

If you don’t use a title (for example, to avoid repetition), make sure that the tree is connected to another meaningful on-screen text that can be used as a label for assistive technologies. You can do this using the method addAriaLabelledBy.

Title
Title
Title with item count
Title with item count

Loading Data

To indicate that the tree is currently loading items, use the busy state (sap.m.Tree, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Tree in busy state while loading data
Tree in busy state while loading data

Initial Display

Think of the initial expandable/collapsible state of a tree. If your structure contains many items on the root level, it might make sense to collapse the whole tree in its initial state.

In contrast, if the most important items are displayed on a deeper level (if, for example, the parent nodes are simply a kind of categorization), the tree should be expanded up to the first level where the most important items immediately appear.

Content Formatting

To display object names with an ID, show the ID in brackets after the corresponding object name.

Place the ID in brackets after the corresponding object name
Place the ID in brackets after the corresponding object name

Try not to display an empty tree. If there is no way around this, provide instructions on how to fill the tree with data (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, properties: showNoData, noDataText).

 

Examples:

  • If a tree is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the tree with data.
  • If a tree is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    No filters set. To start, enter your search and filter settings and run the search.
  • If a tree is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No items found. Check the search and filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, no search is offered, only the search is offered).
  • You are using the live search (no Go button in the filter bar). In this case, leave out “run the search”.
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of search and filter settings).
Provide meaningful instructions within an empty tree
Provide meaningful instructions within an empty tree

Highlighting Items

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, you can display a highlight indicator in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to show:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry-specific or process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”.

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users exactly what is wrong. Make sure that you provide this information within the table row, ideally in the same color.

For details on the use of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.m.ListItemBase, property: highlight)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Item States

To show that an item has been modified, for example within the global edit flow, add the string (Modified) to the text of the item.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error, for example within the global edit flow, add the string (Contains errors) to the text of the item and highlight the row accordingly.

A modified item with an error
A modified item with an error

To show that an item is locked, add the string (Locked by [name]) to the text of the item.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in a draft state, add the string (Draft) to the text of the item.

Item in draft state
Item in draft state

Show only one state at any one time.

Actions

To trigger actions on items, show the actions on a toolbar above the tree. Do not offer action triggering on multiple items if the tree is expected to have fewer than 10 items in most cases.
The following actions on single items must always be in-line:

Delete: Use “Delete” mode (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This places a delete  button at the end of each item.

Items with Delete button
Items with Delete button

Navigation: Use the “Navigation” item type (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This places a navigation indicator at the end of the corresponding items. Use this to navigate to a new page containing item details.

Items with navigation indicator
Items with navigation indicator

Edit: Use the “Detail” item type (sap.m.TreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail). This places an edit   icon at the end of the corresponding items.

Edit button
Edit button

From these three actions (delete, navigation, and edit), you can combine delete and edit, or delete and navigation. Edit and navigation cannot be combined.

To trigger actions that are independent of the selection, show the actions on a toolbar above the tree. For example: AddCollapse AllExpand All, …

To trigger a default action on the entire item, use the “Active” or “DetailAndActive” item type (sap.m.TreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active). Active items trigger an event when clicked, which can be handled by apps, for example, to open a dialog. Selection and expanding/collapsing a node does not trigger the event, but are handled by the tree. Do not use this for navigation, to switch the line item to an edit state, or to delete the item.
Active can be combined with edit and delete, but not with navigation. Do not combine active with single selection master.

Add Items

For adding items, place an Add or Create text button on the toolbar.

  • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
  • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.

Show new items as the first item of the tree or node:

  • If nothing is selected, add the new item to the root.
  • If a single node is selected, add the new item to the selected node.
  • If a single leaf is selected, add the new item as a child of this leaf. The original selected item becomes a node.

If your tree doesn’t support adding items to the root, selected node, or selected leaf, disable Create or Add for the corresponding levels.

Disable Create or Add if more than one item is selected.

For more details, see guidelines for managing objects (including subarticles).

Enabling/Disabling Actions

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection:

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that tells the user how many items will be affected. Let users choose whether to apply the action anyway or cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

If the action was applied and the items are still available, keep them selected.

Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection
Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection

Editing Items

To edit items, add an Edit button either in-line on the toolbar above the tree. Triggering the button either opens a dialog or navigates to an editable details page.

For mass editing:

  • Provide multiselection (sap.m.Tree/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).
  • Provide an Edit button on the toolbar above the tree.
  • If several items are selected, triggering the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

For more details, see mass editing.

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar).

Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. Also, because there is no generic keyboard interaction, drag and drop isn’t accessible. Moreover, drag and drop is not available on all browsers. For these reasons, offer drag and drop only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within a tree, use the following options:

  • For dropping items as a child, use whole nodes as drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.On).
  • For dropping items on the same level, use the space between items as drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between).
  • If you want to allow users to drop items as a child or sibling, offer both drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.OnOrBetween).

This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Do not combine rearranging items within one level and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

Moving items from one node to another can be combined with sorting without any issues.

Drop targets in between items
Drop targets in between items

Visible Alternatives to Drag and Drop

Depending on the functionality you need, use one or more of the following alternatives:

  • To move items up or down within a node:
    Use the  Move Up and  Move Down buttons on the toolbar. These buttons move the selected items until the first selected item can’t be moved up or the last selected item can’t be moved down any further.
    Depending on your tree, this can make sense for both leaves and nodes, only for leaves, or only for nodes. When moving a node, move the whole node and (if applicable) all its children up or down to the next position within the parent node.
    Always make sure that when the user moves an item in one direction and then moves it back, the order is the same as it was before.
    Do not combine the option to move items up and down with sorting.
  • To move items to another node:
    Use Copy and Paste buttons on the toolbar.
    Alternatively, offer a Move To button. Clicking Move To opens a dialog that shows all the nodes of the tree, but no leaves. Selecting an item in this dialog closes the dialog and moves the corresponding items to the selected node.
  • To change the level of an item:
    In some trees, such as document structures, users can change the level of an item without affecting the level of parent or child items. In this case, use left and right arrow buttons (   ).

Filtering

What exactly needs to stay or be removed is highly dependent on the kind of structure and data your tree displays. For many trees, the following approach works well if you want to apply filters only to the leaves of a tree:

  • Remove all leaves that don’t fit the filter criteria
  • Remove empty nodes

If you also apply filters to nodes, keep the following in mind:

  • A node may or may not fit the filter criteria.
  • A node can contain items (nodes and/or leaves) that fit the filter criteria.

Because of this, the results might contain more nodes than those that are relevant for the filter criteria.

Developer Hint
The tree control itself has no influence on the filter result. It sends a filter request and displays whatever comes back. Make sure that the result set is meaningful.
[/vc_row_inner]

Sorting

Before you start, ask yourself if sorting is meaningful in your tree. If so, decide on a meaningful default sort order.

If sorting is meaningful, is it meaningful on all levels? Or does the tree structure need to be stable? In the latter case, sort only leaves, but not nodes.

The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order. Use a meaningful sort order. For example:

  • Sort text alphabetically
  • Sort numbers by their value
  • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
    • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
    • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
    • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
    • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.

Export to Spreadsheet

On the table toolbar, apps can provide a menu button for exporting the tree data to a spreadsheet. For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button
'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Responsive Table

The responsive table is the default table in SAP Fiori. It contains a set of line items and is fully responsive. Depending on the scenario, users can also navigate from the line items to further details.

A line item contains several data points sorted into columns. A data point refers to a unit of information, such as a number, a text, a unit of measurement, and so on, which can be used to form the content of a tableform or other control. One data point is usually displayed by a control, such as a text, object status, or input field. A control can display more than one data point, for example, by concatenating text.

In contrast to traditional tables, a “cell” of the responsive table is not limited to displaying only one control, and therefore a single cell can present far more than one data point.

Responsive table
Responsive table

Usage

Use the responsive table if:

  • You need a table. The responsive table is the default table in SAP Fiori.
  • You need to use various controls inside a line item, such as micro charts. By contrast, the analytical table supports only a very limited set of controls.
  • The focus is on line items, not on cells. The responsive table is optimized for viewing complete items on all devices.
  • Selecting one or more items is a main use case and details are needed to choose the correct item.
  • Line items are independent of each other and no operation across columns is needed.
  • You want to have only one implementation for all devices. As the name suggests, the responsive table is responsive.

Do not use the responsive table if:

  • The main use case is to select one item from a very small number of items, without viewing additional details. In this case, a select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • The main use case is to select one item from several items, with the possibility of viewing only a few details per item. In this case, a list might be more appropriate. Pay attention to the layout of the list item to ensure that it has a pleasant appearance.
  • The cell level and the spatial relationship between cells is more important than the line item. In this case, use the analytical table or grid table. Examples include spreadsheet analyses and waterfall charts. Note that neither the analytical table nor the grid table are fully responsive. Both are only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You expect the table to contain more than around 1,000 rows. Try using the analytical table or grid table instead; they are easier to handle, perform better, and are optimized for handling large numbers of items.
    Note that neither the analytical table nor the grid table are fully responsive. Both are only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • Comparing items is a major use case. In this case, the analytical table or grid table might be more appropriate because each cell contains only one data point. By contrast, the responsive table offers greater flexibility within line items, including the ability to add more data points per cell and the pop-in function. Both make comparisons more difficult. Note that neither the analytical table nor the grid table are fully responsive. Both are only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • Data needs to be structured in a hierarchical manner. In this case, a tree table might be more appropriate. Although the analytical table can have several grouping levels, it is not as flexible when nodes at several levels contain child nodes. Note that neither the analytical table nor the grid table are fully responsive. Both are only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use a chart.
  • You just need it for layout reasons. In this case, use a layout container such as a horizontal layout or a vertical layout instead.
  • You need read-only or editable field-value pairs. In this case, use a form instead. The responsive table is not optimized for form-like input navigation.
Don't
Do not use a responsive table as a form
Do not use a responsive table as a form

See the table overview to decide which SAP Fiori table is most suitable for your needs.

Responsiveness

The responsive table is optimized for viewing one line item at a time with no scrolling or only vertical scrolling, irrespective of the display width.

On smartphones, only the most important data remains in the one-column or two-column table, while all other data is moved to the space between two item rows, known as the “pop-in area”.

In this area, data for the corresponding cell is provided as a label/value pair. The label is defined by the column header, and the value is taken from the corresponding cell. Labels can be displayed next to the value or above the value.

Within the pop-in area, the label/value pairs can be displayed in the following ways (sap.m.Table, property: PopinLayout):

  • Block: Label/value pairs are listed one below the other.
  • GridSmall: Label/value pairs are displayed next to each other in equally spaced grid cells. An additional column is shown for each 13 rem of available width (208 px with default browser settings). If the number of grid cells exceeds the available width, the grid cells wrap. On S size, this layout transforms automatically to a block layout.
  • GridLarge: The display logic is the same as for GridSmall,, but grid columns come with a larger minimum width (26 rem instead of 13 rem).

In all layouts, you can show the labels next to or above (recommended) the corresponding data.

The responsive table uses all the available space, and does not provide any padding. If there is space around the table, it comes from the spacing defined for the surrounding layout container.

Information
The GridSmall and GridLarge layouts are not available in all browsers. If the chosen layout is not available, it is automatically changed to Block layout.
The responsive table displayed on a smartphone (size S)
The responsive table displayed on a smartphone (size S)
The responsive table displayed on a tablet (size M)
The responsive table displayed on a tablet (size M)
The responsive table displayed in compact mode on a desktop computer (size L)
The responsive table displayed in compact mode on a desktop computer (size L)

To ensure responsiveness, you must configure each column. Depending on the width of the table (in pixels), the column needs to know which of the following responses is required:

  • Stay in the table layout.
  • Move to the pop-in (sap.m.Column, with the properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth, popinHAlign, popinDisplay).
  • Hide.

By default, the width provided is interpreted as the screen width. If the table does not use the full width of the screen, app developers have to configure the table accordingly (sap.m.Table, property: contextualWidth).

Since you have to define this for each column, you can also handle more than one column at a single breakpoint, such as moving three columns to the pop-in area at once.

Each of the three device types has a predefined value for the screen width. However, you will get better results if you offer more breakpoints by using pixel values instead of the predefined values.

For the smallest screen width, keep the following information in the table layout:

  • The identifier of the line item
  • The key attribute

The responsive table ensures that at least one column always remains in the table layout.

Example for Block Layout

A typical responsive table.

A typical responsive table
A typical responsive table

Hide the information column for a width smaller than 570 px.

Hiding the information column
Hiding the information column

Move the column “vendor” to the pop-in area for a width smaller than 460 px (sap.m.Column, properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth).

Moving the vendor column to the pop-in area
Moving the vendor column to the pop-in area

Move the column “limit” to the pop-in for a width smaller than 350 px (sap.m.Column, properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth).

Moving the limit column to the pop-in area
Moving the limit column to the pop-in area

Move the column “price” to the pop-in area for a width smaller than 270 px (sap.m.Column, properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth).

Moving the price column to the pop-in area
Moving the price column to the pop-in area

If you still need to support smaller screens, values can be moved below the corresponding labels inside the pop-in area. In these examples, this happens for a width smaller than 220 px (sap.m.Column, property: popinDisplay).

Pop-in area: moving the data below the labels
Pop-in area: moving the data below the labels

Example for GridLarge Layout

A more complex responsive table.

A more complex responsive table (full screen without pop-in)
A more complex responsive table (full screen without pop-in)

In this example, the Average Occupancy Rate and Available In columns move to the pop-in area if the screen width is less than 1900 pixels.

GridLarge layout - 'Average Occupancy Rate' and 'Available In' columns move to the pop-in area
GridLarge layout - 'Average Occupancy Rate' and 'Available In' columns move to the pop-in area

If the width is less than 1500 pixels, the Average Stay column moves to the pop-in area.

GridLarge layout - 'Average Stay' column moves to the pop-in area
GridLarge layout - 'Average Stay' column moves to the pop-in area

If the width is less than 1100 pixels, the Description column moves to the pop-in area. Since all four columns in the pop-in area do not fit into one row, the pop-in wraps.

GridLarge layout - 'Description' column moves to the pop-in area
GridLarge layout - 'Description' column moves to the pop-in area

If the width is reduced even further, the Details column moves to the pop-in area. On this narrow screen, only one column fits into one pop-in row, so it looks exactly like the block layout.

GridLarge layout - 'Details' column moves to the pop-in area
GridLarge layout - 'Details' column moves to the pop-in area

Layout

The optional title bar consists of the title of the responsive table, an item counter, variant management, and the toolbar.

The filter info bar appears when the responsive table is filtered, and shows information on the filter settings.

The column header shows the label for each column.

The collection of items, or rows, occupies the main part of the responsive table.

You can add aggregation information (such as totals) on the table footer.

A More button can be shown if you do not want all items to be loaded at the start (known as “lazy loading”). Ideally, you should use scrolling to load more items instead of choosing the More button.

Schematic visualization of the responsive table
Schematic visualization of the responsive table

Components

The title bar contains the title of the responsive table, an item counter, variant management, and the toolbar.

The toolbar can contain entry points for the view settings dialog and the table personalization dialog, as well as view switches in the form of a segmented button, and buttons for AddEdit, and other actions.
Beneath the toolbar, display a filter info bar (which itself is a special toolbar) if the responsive table is filtered.
To format within items, apply the guidelines for formatting data. Controls commonly used inside items are the object identifier and the object number. For more information about these controls, see object display components.
You can use the table footer to display additional static information relating to the table content.
The More button loads more items to the front end if not all items have yet been loaded.
Components of the responsive table
Components of the responsive table

Behavior and Interaction

The responsive table is quite flexible with regard to its content.

Table Level

Scroll

The height of the table is defined by the number of items it contains. It does not have a scroll container on its own, but is scrolled together with the app (in contrast to the grid table and the analytical table).

If the table works in a “growing” mode, it only loads a few items at first. Additional items are only loaded (and rendered) on request. The “request” can either be triggered by scrolling (preferred), or by clicking the More button.

Same table, different number of items
Same table, different number of items

When the user scrolls, the title bar, column headers, and filter info bar can stick to the top of the surrounding layout container (sap.m.Table, property: sticky).

Information
The “sticky” feature comes with some limitations:

  • It is not available on all browsers. In non-supporting browsers, the corresponding areas (title bar, column headers, filter info bar) are not fixed on top of the surrounding layout container while scrolling.
  • Certain layout containers suppress the sticky behavior, such as the grid layout. The same happens if the table is placed within the object page.
  • If focus is set to a fixed column header, the table is automatically scrolled to top.

Sticky table title and sticky column header
Sticky table title and sticky column header

Merge Duplicates

To simulate the behavior of row spanning, you can merge cells of consecutive rows inside one or more columns automatically if they contain the same value (sap.m.Column, properties: mergeDuplicates, mergeFunctionName).

Use the merge feature if you expect the column to contain duplicate entries, and it makes sense to group them. In the example screenshot, the Supplier, Product, and Dimensions columns reflect a hierarchical structure: Suppliers have products, which in turn have dimensions. Because suppliers typically have multiple products, merging duplicate entries for the supplier column makes the table easier to read. Note, however, that when the user sorts the table by another field, the hierarchy changes and the merged items are regrouped accordingly.

Do not use the merge feature:

  • If duplicate entries are not part of the design. If consecutive table rows happen to have the same values at runtime, this alone isn’t a valid reason to group them.
  • If the corresponding column can contain blank cells. Otherwise, it is cumbersome to differentiate between blank values and merged values.
Supplier column merges duplicates in consecutive rows
Supplier column merges duplicates in consecutive rows
Merged columns with multiselection
Merged columns with multiselection

Select

A responsive table can have one of the following selection modes (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode):

  • None: Items cannot be selected (sap.m.ListMode.None).
    Beware: Line items can still use the sap.m.ListType “navigation”, which allows click handling on specific line items. Only use this option if the click triggers navigation to a corresponding line item details page.
  • Single selection master: One item in the responsive table can be selected. Items are selected by clicking or tapping the whole row. The single select master mode has no obvious visual cues, such as checkboxes or radio buttons. It only provides a light blue background for the selected state. Because of this, it can barely be differentiated from tables without selection (mode: None). Single select master is the preferred mode for single selection (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectMaster).
  • Single selection left: One item in the responsive table can be selected. For this, the responsive table provides radio buttons on the left side of each line item. Only use this mode if row clicks are being used for something else, such as navigation. (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectLeft).
  • Multiple selection: Users can select one or more items using the checkboxes on the left side of each line item. The Shift key can be used to select a range. Users can (de)select all items using the Select All checkbox to the left of the column header. Select All should (de)select all items that the user can reach by scrolling.  (sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).
Responsive table without selectable items
Responsive table without selectable items
Single selection master
Single selection master
SIngle selection left, with radio buttons. Use only if row clicks are used for something else.
SIngle selection left, with radio buttons. Use only if row clicks are used for something else.
Multiple selection
Multiple selection

Group

For grouping items, a group header is displayed (sap.m.GroupHeaderListItem). The group header is not interactive.

Group headers
Group headers

Show Aggregations

Show aggregations (such as totals) on the table footer (sap.m.Column, aggregation: footer).

Do not show aggregations in “growing” mode. It is not clear, if an aggregation will only aggregate the items loaded into the front end, or all items.

Table footer displays aggregated total
Table footer displays aggregated total

Load Items

To show more than 200 items, use the “growing” mode (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, properties: growing, growingThreshold, growingScrollToLoad, growingTriggerText). The growing mode allows the user to load only the first few items. Additional items are only loaded (and rendered) on request, which improves performance. The “request” can either be done via scrolling (preferred), or by clicking the More button.

If using the More button, show the number of items already loaded and the total number items below the text More, if possible.

Do not show more than 1,000 items overall, even in growing mode. Use the grid table instead.

Do not show aggregations in growing mode. Also, do not display an item count on the table toolbar if growing mode is used. Use the count on the More button instead.

Load on scroll
Load on scroll

Line Item Level

Delete Single Item Rows

To delete single item rows, use the table in the mode “delete” (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This adds Delete buttons to each line item. Clicking this button triggers the deletion of the corresponding line item.

Do not use this mode if deleting multiple lines at once is the preferred use case.

Delete is a mode of the responsive table and therefore cannot be used together with single selection or multiselection.

Responsive table in 'delete' mode
Responsive table in 'delete' mode

Highlight an Item

To highlight an item, use the “highlight” indicator (sap.m.ColumnListItem, properties: highlight).

Highlighted item
Highlighted item

Navigate

To allow navigation from a line item, use an item with the type “navigation” (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This creates an indicator at the end of the line (“>”) and the entire line item becomes clickable. If the user clicks or taps on the line, navigate to a new page containing line item details. In rare cases, you can also use the navigation mode for category navigation, without navigating to another page.

By contrast, clicking an interactive control within a line item does not trigger the navigation event. Instead, the corresponding control handles the click event.

If no navigation is possible, set sap.m.ListType to “inactive”.

“Navigation” is a list item type and therefore cannot be used together with “edit”, or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).

Navigation indicator
Navigation indicator

Indicate Navigated Item

When multi-selection is used in a master-detail scenario, it is not clear which item was last opened (for example, which item is currently shown in the second column of a flexible column layout). In this case only (multi-selection table with navigable items), you can display a “navigated” indicator to mark the item that is currently open (sap.m.ColumnListItem, property: navigated).

Navigated item
Navigated item

Edit Line Items

To allow editing for a line item, set sap.m.ListType to “detail” within the corresponding item (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive). This will create an Edit button at the end of the line. Clicking the button triggers the edit event. Use this event to switch the corresponding line item to edit mode.

Edit is a list item type and therefore cannot be used together with “navigation” or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).

Edit button
Edit button

Click an Item

Items as a whole can be clickable. An event is fired by clicking on the item (anywhere where there is no interactive control inside the item). Apps can react on the event, for example, by opening a dialog (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive).

Active elements do not have a visual indication and can therefore not be differentiated from non-active elements.

Active is a list item type and can therefore not be used together with “navigation” or “edit”. In addition, “active” uses the whole item as a clickable area and therefore cannot be used together with a single-selection table.

Active element
Active element

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a table or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.m.ListBase, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a table. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

When opened, the context menu gets the row and column context, except for special columns (such as the selection column). Context menus can be implemented for a specific table or row.

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a table is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Responsive table with a context menu
Responsive table with a context menu

Cell Level

Showing Information

In contrast to traditional tables (such as the analytical table or the tree table), a cell can contain more than just one line of text.

Several lines of text within one cell
Several lines of text within one cell

Add Controls

Alongside textual elements, you can also add any control to a table cell, such as input fields, microcharts, buttons, and so on.

Controls inside cells
Controls inside cells
Any control can be placed inside cells
Any control can be placed inside cells

A cell can contain more than one control and more than one data point.

With the View Settings dialog, users can sort, filter, and group by each of these data points.

Several controls per cell
Several controls per cell

You can also have different controls in different rows in the same column. This could be the case if one item is locked, but another item is in edit mode, for example.

Different controls per column
Different controls per column

Guidelines

Responsiveness

While the pop-in layouts GridLarge and GridSmall make better use of the available width, they also only look good with content that is specifically designed for pop-in behavior. If you have text-only tables with only one value per column, use the Block layout (sap.m.Table, property: popinLayout).

Place the column header labels in the pop-in area above the corresponding values (sap.m.Column, property: popinDisplay, value: Block). This avoids alignment issues with different content. Be aware that the labels get top-aligned with the adjacent content.
Only place the label next to the corresponding value under the following conditions (sap.m.Column, property: popinDisplay, value: Inline):

  • The values are text-only (no input fields, icons, images, micro charts, and so on)
  • The available space is at least the double the width of size S.

This avoids truncation or “over-wrapping” of the labels and content.

If a column does not have a column header text (for example, if it always contains the same button with its own label), do not show the header text as a label in the pop-in area either (sap.m.Column, property: popinDisplay, value: withoutHeader). If you forget this setting, you will see an empty space followed by a colon (“:”).

Information
The GridSmall and GridLarge layouts are not available in all browsers. If the chosen layout is not available, it is automatically changed to Block layout.

Design for Performance

To optimize performance, we recommend showing no more than 200 items at once in the responsive table. For larger datasets (up to 1,000 items), use the “growing” mechanism to limit the number of displayed items, and make sure that users can filter the data.

Warning
The limits above are only recommendations. For a specific app context, the number of manageable items might be far higher or lower.

The actual limits depend on your concrete scenario, including:

  • The number of rows in the table
  • The number of displayed columns
  • The complexity of the cell content (for example, simple text vs. complex charts)
  • Other elements on the page (for example, multiple pages in a flexible column layout, or several tables/elements with more complex rendering on one page)
  • The browser being used

Table Title

Implement the table title by using a title control in a toolbar.

Use a table title only if the title of the table is not indicated in the surrounding area. Do not use a table title if it simply repeats text that is already above the table. For example:

  • A pricing conditions table is the only control on a tab labeled Pricing Conditions.
  • A section or subsection on an object page contains only one table.

Use a table title if you need the item count, table toolbar, or variant management. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a table title, such as Items.
Exception: If the surrounding area contains the table title, and both the item count and toolbar can be added to the surrounding area, no additional table title is needed.
Example: An object page (sub-)section contains only one table. In this case, add the item count and the table toolbar to the (sub-)section header.

Developer Hint
Assistive technologies (such as screen readers) use the title to create a hierarchical site map for faster navigation. In addition, screen readers use the title as the label for the table.

If you don’t use a title (for example, to avoid repetition), make sure that the table is connected to another meaningful on-screen text that can be used as a label for assistive technologies. You can do this using the method addAriaLabelledBy.

If you use a table title, show either a title for the table, with or without variant management, or an item count in the following format:

Items (2,534)

The item count in the table title includes all the visible items that a user can reach by scrolling. Group headers are not included.

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items. Do not use an item count together with “growing mode”.

If possible, keep the title bar sticky (sap.m.Table, property: sticky).

Table title with item count
Table title with item count

Selection

If the click area for the row is being used for another purpose (such as navigation), it cannot be used for selecting the row. In this case, use the “single select left” selection mode, which offers a radio button as an additional click area for each row. To avoid confusion, make sure that the first data column does not contain radio buttons in default delivery.

In all other single selection cases, use the selection mode “single select master”.

For all single selection modes, make sure that one item is initially selected. Otherwise, the user cannot return to the initial state. A selected item can only be deselected by selecting another item.

In multiple selection mode, do not show checkboxes in the first data column in the default delivery to avoid confusion. Offer the Select All checkbox for (de)selecting all items the user can reach by scrolling.

Don't
Single selection left - Do not show radio buttons in the first column in the default delivery
Single selection left - Do not show radio buttons in the first column in the default delivery
Don't
Multiple selection - Do not show checkboxes in the first column in the default delivery
Multiple selection - Do not show checkboxes in the first column in the default delivery
Do
Use the selection mode
Use the selection mode "single select left" if clicking the row is used for something else (such as navigation)
Do
Use the selection mode
Use the selection mode "single select master" in all other single-selection cases
Developer Hint
Select All is only applied to items that have already been loaded to the front-end server. All other items are not (de)selected before they are loaded, such as items added via lazy loading with growingScrollToLoad. This conflicts with the guideline that all items the user can reach by scrolling must be (de)selected.

To process all items, listen to the selectionChange event and to its selectAll flag. This indicates whether the Select All checkbox was triggered. As soon as an action is triggered, process the items accordingly. Depending on the number of items, consider processing them in the back end.

Loading Data

To indicate that the table is currently loading items, use the busy state. (sap.m.Table, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Table in busy state while loading data
Table in busy state while loading data

Columns – Best Practices

Minimize the number of columns:

  • On a smartphone, use only one or two columns, depending on the content.
  • On a tablet or desktop, use three to five columns if the responsive table is shown within the flexible column layout. Use about eight columns if using the full screen width, depending on the content.

If the responsive table does not fit into the width provided:

  • Hide columns to reduce the width of the table.
  • Use pop-in areas to show the whole content by increasing the height of the line items (sap.m.Column, properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth).

At the smallest size, keep the following information in the table layout:

  • The column that identifies the line item.
  • The column that contains the key attribute.

If both of these do not fit into the width provided, keep just the column with the line item identifier in the tabular layout.

The responsive table assigns the same width to each column by default. It is recommended that you overwrite this default to provide optimal space for your content (sap.m.Column, property: width).

Optimize column width for its initial content (sap.m.Column, property: width). If the content is dynamic, optimize column width for typical content.

If you need more columns than those that fit on a tablet screen (usually five) to fulfill 80% of your main use cases, offer an option to add, remove, and rearrange columns via the table personalization dialog. Before doing so, try to reduce the number of columns, for example, by using several lines per column or by utilizing the pop-in function. See the cheat sheet for an example.

Column Headers – Best Practices

Within the column header, provide a label for each column (sap.m.Column, aggregation: header). The column header label is reused as a label in the pop-in area.

Exception: If the column does not pop in, no column header label is needed as long as at least one column still has a column header label.

Use controls that wrap and support wrapping with hyphenation, such as text (with wrapping and hyphenation enabled). Do not use controls that truncate.

Keep column headers sticky.

Do
Wrap column headers
Wrap column headers
Don't
Do not truncate column headers
Do not truncate column headers

Column headers (sap.m.Column, aggregation: header) usually contain links or text-based controls.

Column headers can also contain other kinds of SAP Fiori controls. However, the column header cannot be aligned vertically, making it difficult to use many controls in the column header. Using other kinds of controls also creates problems with pop-in behavior and could thus lead to accessibility issues. Therefore, exercise caution when using them in a column header.

Accepted: Link as column header text (rarely used)
Accepted: Link as column header text (rarely used)
Accepted if responsiveness is taken into account: Text plus search field
Accepted if responsiveness is taken into account: Text plus search field

If a column cell contains several fields, use an umbrella term in the column header (such as Address for fields like Street, ZIP Code, and City).

For text and ID fields, use a generic label (for example, Employee for Name and ID).

If none of these are possible, separate the labels with “/” (for example, Name / Status).

For boolean values, such as checkboxes, find a descriptive text for the column header.

Content Alignment

For alignment of cell content, follow the guidelines below (sap.m.Column, properties: halgin, valign, sap.m.ColumnListItem, property: VAlign). Align the column header horizontally according to the content of the cell.

Exception: Secondary information in a column always follows the alignment of the main information.

Left-align: text, IDs, phone numbers, URLs, passwords, and email addresses.

Left-alignment of text
Left-alignment of text

Right-align: numbers and amounts, except IDs, to ensure comparability of such figures.

Right-alignment of numbers
Right-alignment of numbers

Right-align: dates and times (to ensure comparability for most formats and locales).

Right-alignment of dates
Right-alignment of dates

Left-align status information.

Left-align status information
Left-align status information

Center-align icons.

Vertical alignment:

Top-align where possible to facilitate reading the content on one line.

Do not use top-alignment if it results in a peculiar layout. This usually happens when controls that need more vertical space are combined with text-only controls, such as input fields. In this case, try center-alignment instead and fine tune it until the layout fits.

Do
Use top-alignment where possible
Use top-alignment where possible
Don't
Do not use top alignment if it doesn't make sense
Do not use top alignment if it doesn't make sense

Content Formatting

The responsive table provides flexibility, including multiline cells, by enabling every control to be put into a cell.

As a key identifier of an item, use an object identifier. Show the key identifier in the first column. For more information, see object display components.

If the table width is small, do not hide this column or move it to the pop-in area.

Object identifier
Object identifier

Strings with IDs: If the responsive table contains more single-line data, show the ID in brackets after the corresponding string.

This minimizes the line height.

For items with a small line height, place the ID in brackets after the corresponding string
For items with a small line height, place the ID in brackets after the corresponding string
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link

Strings with IDs: If line height is already large, show the ID below the corresponding string. Use the object identifier to do so.

For items with a large line height, place the ID below the corresponding string
For items with a large line height, place the ID below the corresponding string
Is displayed as a link, use only the first line as the link
Is displayed as a link, use only the first line as the link

If there is more than one key identifier (for example, First Name and Last Name), display these columns first and show the values in bold text.

Several key identifiers
Several key identifiers

For status information, use semantic colors on the foreground elements.

For status information on text: If the status is actionable, add a transparent icon button next to the text.

Semantic colors on text
Semantic colors on text

Avoid truncation. Use controls that wrap the text and support hyphenation.

For example, use text.

Do
Do: wrap text
Do: wrap text
Don't
Do not: truncate text
Do not: truncate text

For editable content, use input fields and other interactive controls within the table cells. If you need to offer edit mode, change your text controls (labels, text, and links, to input fields or other appropriate controls) as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before.

You can do this by changing the control or, in more complex cases, by exchanging the whole responsive table.

Interactive controls – Inline
Interactive controls – Inline

If there is no value for a cell, leave it blank. Do not display text as N/A.

Leave empty fields blank
Leave empty fields blank

Numbering Items

  • If the item number has four digits/letters or less and is equally important as the corresponding description, concatenate the item number with the description and show it in one column.
  • If the item number has five digits/letters or more, or if it is more important than the corresponding description, for example, when no description is available, use a separate column for the item number.
  • If the item number is more like an ID in regards to its description, use ID formatting, like Description (ID).
For short numbers, add the item number to the description
For short numbers, add the item number to the description

Flag and Favorite

Place the flag or favorite marker in the first column (in the default delivery). To change the settings, users need to drill down into the object itself.

Item marked as a favorite
Item marked as a favorite

Empty Tables

Try not to display an empty responsive table. If there is no way around this, provide instructions on how to fill the table with data (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, properties: showNoData, noDataText).

Examples:

  • If a table is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the table with data.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    To start, set the relevant filters.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No data found. Try adjusting the filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, a search is also offered, or only the search is offered).
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of filter settings).

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items.

Provide meaningful instructions
Provide meaningful instructions

Item States

To show that an item is unread, use the corresponding flag (sap.m.Table, property: showUnread, sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: unread). This shows most of the content in bold font.

An unread item
An unread item

To show that an item has been modified, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string (Modified) at the bottom of the column that identifies the line item.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error (for example, within the global edit flow), add the string (Contains errors) at the bottom of the column that identifies the line item. To do this, use an object status control with the error state (sap.m.ObjectStatus, property: state, value: sap.ui.core.ValueState.Error).

In addition, highlight the row accordingly (sap.m.ListItemBase, property: highlight).

A modified item with an error
A modified item with an error

To show that an item is locked, use a transparent button with the corresponding icon and the text Locked by [Name] at the bottom of the identifying column. The user can click or tap the button to open a quick view of the person.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in a draft state, use a transparent-style button with the text Draft at the bottom of the identifying column. The user can click or tap the button to open a popover showing the timestamp of the last change.

Item in draft state
Item in draft state

Show only one state at any one time.

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, a highlight indicator can be shown in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to indicate:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry-specific or process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”.

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users exactly what is wrong. Make sure that you provide this information within the table row, ideally in the same color.

For details on the use of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.m.ListItemBase, property: highlight)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Numbers and Units

If the following conditions all apply, show the unit of measurement in the column header:

  • The unit of measurement is the same for all rows
  • A single cell contains only one amount with the unit of measurement
  • The column header does not scroll away

In all other cases, show the unit of measurement together with the corresponding amount within the row.

Show the unit of measurement in the same column as the corresponding amount.

For numbers with units, show the correct formatting by using the object number control.

Object number
Object number

For the most important number with its unit, show the correct formatting by using the object number control and the emphasized flag.
Exception: If all numbers are of equal importance, emphasize none of them.

If the table width is narrow, do not hide this column or move it to the pop-in area.
Exception: If the column containing the object identifier and the column containing the key attribute do not fit together on the screen, move the column containing the key attribute to the pop-in area.

Object number (emphasized)
Object number (emphasized)

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, it is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within the table, use drop targets that are between items (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between). This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Drop targets in between items
Drop targets in between items

Do not combine rearranging items and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure that there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

When combining rearranging items with grouping, be aware that moving items to another group also means that a value of the dropped item changes: because grouping is based on values in a column, the dropped item needs to take on the value of the target group for the corresponding column. If this is not wanted, do not allow users to rearrange items in grouped tables.

Example:
A table is grouped by availability. An item is moved from the group “Not Available” to the group “In Stock”. In this case, the moved item needs to change its availability to “In Stock” to match the target group. If changing the value doesn’t make sense, only allow users to rearrange the items within the same group, or don’t allow rearranging at all.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing.
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing.

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar).

Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

The context menu can be triggered for the whole table or per row.

Actions

To trigger actions on multiple items, use a multiselection table (sap.m.Table, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect), and offer the corresponding actions on the table toolbar. Keep the table toolbar sticky (sap.m.Table, property: sticky).

Do not offer actions for multiple items if the table is expected to have fewer than 10 items in most cases.

To trigger actions on a single item only (sap.m.Table, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectMaster):

  • Offer the corresponding actions in the footer toolbar if the responsive table is the only area on the screen to which actions can be applied. This has the advantage that the actions on the footer toolbar are fixed on the screen and cannot be scrolled away.
  • In other cases, show the actions on the table toolbar.
  • In rare cases, show the actions within the line item. One example would be an Add to Cart button in a shopping application. Since these actions are repeated in every line and thus use a lot of screen real estate, only do this for one or two actions at most. In this case, show the action trigger near the content to which it belongs. Do not add a specific column for actions. An exception to this is if the action trigger belongs to a link.
Inline actions
Inline actions

Enabling/Disabling Actions

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection:

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user how many items will be affected. Give users the option to apply the action anyway or to cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

If the action was applied, and if the items are still available, keep them selected.

Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection
Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection
Place actions near to the objects to which they belong
Place actions near to the objects to which they belong

The following actions on single items must always be in-line:

Delete: Use “Delete” table mode (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This places a Delete button at the end of each row.

Delete button
Delete button

Navigation: Use the “Navigation” column list item type (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This places a Navigation indicator at the end of each row.

Use this to navigate to a new page containing line item details. In rare cases, you can also use this for navigation within the table without navigating to another page.

Navigation indicator
Navigation indicator

Edit: Use the “Detail” column list item type (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail). This places an Edit icon at the end of each row.

Edit button
Edit button

From these three actions (delete, navigation, and edit), you can combine delete and edit, or delete and navigation.

Edit and navigation cannot be combined.

To trigger actions that are independent of the selection, show the actions on the table toolbar. Examples of such actions are add, edit (in the sense of changing the whole table to edit mode), sort, filter, group (or view settings), and table personalization.

To trigger a default action on the whole line item, use the “Active” or “DetailAndActive” column list item type (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active).

Active items trigger an event when clicked, which can be handled by apps (for example, to open a dialog). Clicks on interactive controls within the item do not trigger the event, but are handled by the interactive control. Do not use this for navigation, to switch the line item to an edit state, or to delete the item.

Active can be combined with edit and delete, but not with navigation. Do not combine active with single selection.

Add Items

For adding items, place an Add or Create text button on the table toolbar.

  • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
  • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.

Show new items as the first item of the table, with a visual highlight at the beginning of the row.

There are three options for adding an item after the Add button is pressed. In order of priority (most recommended first), these are:

  1. Add the item inline. Create an empty, editable row as the first item of the table. Show the Save button on the table toolbar. This option is recommended for simple scenarios with just a few columns and no option to hide columns.
  2. Open a dialog for larger tables with up to 8 editable columns. Save the new item at the dialog level.
  3. Navigate to a new page. This behavior should only be used for very complex scenarios that cannot be handled by a dialog (for example, tables with more than 8 columns). When the user presses Save in the footer toolbar of the create page, navigate back to the table.

A new item can have three different states:

  1. New: The item was just created and is in edit mode. It is highlighted with a visual indicator.
  2. Recent: The item was saved, but is still highlighted and displayed as the first item of the table. Current filter, sort and group criteria are ignored to keep the item visible.
  3. As soon as the responsive table is sorted, filtered, or grouped again, the action is also applied to the new item. It then also loses the visual highlight.

In the context of the draft handling new items are not saved on table level, but rather with the entire draft.

For more details, see the guidelines for managing objects (including subarticles).

Add button in table toolbar
Add button in table toolbar
New item as first row in edit mode
New item as first row in edit mode
Saved new item, still highlighted, still the first item
Saved new item, still highlighted, still the first item

Editable Content

For editable content, use input fields and any other interactive controls within the table cells that meet your input needs.

All SAPUI5 controls can be used.

If you need edit mode, change your text controls, such as label, text, and link, to input fields, or other appropriate controls as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before.

You can do this by exchanging the control or, in more complex cases, by exchanging the entire responsive table.

For mass editing items:

  • Provide multiselection (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).
  • Provide an Edit button.
  • If several items are selected, choosing the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

For details, see mass editing.

View Settings: Sort, Filter, and Group

Sort, filter, and/or group settings are handled in the view settings dialog. This dialog can provide any combination of these three settings, including just one setting, such as sort only.

  • If sorting, filtering, and/or grouping are a common use case in your app, offer one, two, or all three of the corresponding features in one or more view settings dialogs. Note: Do not offer these features if the table is expected to have only a small number of entries (up to 20 in most cases).
  • If filtering is a main use case, do not offer filtering in the view settings dialog. Use the filter bar instead.

To trigger the view settings dialog, provide several buttons, one for each of these view settings. Each button opens a view settings dialog that contains only the relevant page.

You should always use only the view settings you really need. For example, do not offer grouping if it does not support your use case well.

Using the view settings dialog allows you to define several sort, filter, and/or group settings per column. Therefore, you can sort, filter, and/or group a column with several data points independently by each data point.

Several triggers for the different view settings (sort, filter, group)
Several triggers for the different view settings (sort, filter, group)

Sort

For the default sort settings, sort by the column that identifies the row, which is usually the first column in default delivery. From this column, use the primary data point.

If you offer sorting, offer it for each data point. In other words, allow sorting by both the primary and secondary information in a column. Allow sorting in both directions, ascending and descending. The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order.

For each data point, provide a meaningful sort order. For example:

  • Sort text alphabetically
  • Sort numbers by their value
  • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
    • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
    • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
    • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
    • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first

Filter

To display the current filter state, use the info bar below the table title. Clicking or tapping the info bar opens the view settings dialog on the filter page.

Show the info bar only if the filter settings are not shown somewhere else. For example, do not show the info bar for settings taken in the filter bar or in a select placed in the table toolbar.

If the info bar is shown, provide an option to reset all corresponding filters on the info bar.

Keep the info bar sticky (sap.m.Table, property: sticky).

Developer Hint
To display the current filter settings on the info bar, consider using the list formatter (sap.ui.core.format.ListFormat).
Filtered table
Filtered table

Group

To display the current group state, group headers are shown.

On the group header, show the following text (sap.m.GroupHeaderListItem, property: title):

[Label of the grouped column]: [Grouping Value]

Do not use several values on the group header.

Grouped table
Grouped table

If there is no grouping value, show the following text:
[Label of the grouped column]: (Not Available)

This is the case if you have a group of items that don’t have a value for the grouped column.

Grouped table, with missing grouping value
Grouped table, with missing grouping value

Persist the view settings. When a user reopens the app, show the responsive table with the same sort, filter, and group settings as last defined by this user.

Personalization

To add, remove, or rearrange columns, use the table personalization dialog. Trigger the dialog via a button in the table toolbar.

Offer personalization if you need more columns than those that fit on a tablet screen, which is usually five, to fulfill 80% of your main use cases. Before doing so, try to reduce the number of columns, for example, by using several lines per column or by utilizing the pop-in function. See the cheat sheet for an example.

If all columns are hidden, the table shows a corresponding “no data” text.

View settings and table personalization icons
View settings and table personalization icons

Persist the column layout settings. When a user reopens the app, show the responsive table with the same column layout as last defined by this user.

Tables in Object Pages

To show a table in the object page content area, use the responsive table.

A responsive table with up to 20 expected items can be displayed right away, without lazy loading.
If you expect the table to have more than 20 items, use one of the following 3 options:

  1. Lazy loading (More button): Use this option if you expect to have up to 100 items.
  2. Tab navigation: If you expect to have more than 50 to 100 items, but less than 400, use the object page with tab navigation instead of anchor navigation. Put the table on a dedicated tab.
  3. Navigation to a list report: If you expect the table to have more than 400 items, or if the tab approach is unsuitable, restrict the number of items in the table itself to a reasonable amount. To provide the user with a way to work with the entire table, offer navigation to a separate list report containing the full table.

For all of the three options mentioned above, we recommend providing a search, and if feasible, sort and filter capabilities for the table in the object page. Grouping should be avoided.

For more information on the use of tables within the object page, see the Tables section of the Object Page article.

Export to Spreadsheet

On the table toolbar, apps can provide a menu button for exporting table data to a spreadsheet. For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button
'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button

Paste

To paste data from the clipboard to the table, the browser functionality for paste can be used (CTRL + V or browser context menu).

  • If the focus is on row level, the app has to take the data from the clipboard and add it to the corresponding controls within the table.
  • If the focus is on an editable control within the table, the control gets the data automatically.

Pasting via context menu does not work if a custom context menu is used.

Properties

sap.m.Table

The following additional properties are available for the responsive table:

  • The property: fixedLayout defines the algorithm the control uses to define column width. Setting it to “false” would perform automatic calculations for the column width, based on the longest non-breakable content. You should always set it to “true” for performance reasons. Exceptions are permissible if the table has only a few columns for a large width and fewer than 10 rows are displayed.
  • The property: backgroundDesign defines the background on which items are rendered. Use the default value.
  • The property: showOverlay provides an overlay on the whole table, which prevents use of the responsive table. This is used within the list report floorplan to mark the table as outdated after filter settings have been changed but the new filter settings have not yet been applied. Do not use it in other cases.
  • The property: inset adds a margin on all sides of the responsive table.
  • The property: headerText is a simple way to set the table title if you just need a title. However, do not use any of the following:
    • A separate toolbar
    • variantManagement
    • headerToolbar aggregation
  • The property: headerDesign affects the appearance of the header if the theme supports it. Leave the default value as it is.
  • The property: footerText adds a small additional row below the table footer or last item. This row can contain text only. Do not use this property.
  • The property: width defines the width of the whole table.
  • The property: includeItemInSelection uses a click on the whole line item to select the corresponding item if the responsive table is in a selection mode. This competes with other settings like “Navigation” or “Active” and should therefore not be used.
  • The property: enableBusyIndicator automatically shows a busy indicator while data is loaded. (In contrast to the property: busy, where the application can control when the table is set to busy state)
  • The property: modeAnimationOn does not have any effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: showSeparators allows you to show all, none, or some separators. The default setting, which is to show all separators, is to be used.
  • The property: swipeDirection allows you to define the direction in which to swipe if additional actions are hidden behind a table row. This works only on touch devices. Do not use this property.
  • The property: rememberSelections leaves items selected even if they are not currently visible, for example, through filtering. If this behavior is not wanted, set the flag to “false”, but you should do so only in exceptional cases.
  • The property: busy sets the table to a busy state. While in busy state, the whole table cannot be used and items cannot be read due to an overlay.
  • The property: busyIndicatorDelay defines the time after which a busy state is shown after the responsive table has been set to this state. Use the default value.
  • The property: visible shows the table (“true”) or hides it (“false”).
  • The property: tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: alternateRowColors displays the rows with alternating background colors (“banded rows”). Do not use it.

sap.m.Column

The following additional properties are available for sap.m.Column:

  • The property: width defines the width of the column in all units allowed by HTML, such as em, rem, %, and px.
  • The property: styleClass is used if you need to change the visual design of a column. Do not use this, but use the default style instead.
  • The property: visible shows or hides the column.
  • The property: tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.

sap.m.ColumnListItem

The following additional properties are available for sap.m.ColumnListItem:

  • The property: selected allows an item to be selected programmatically.
  • The property: counter does not have any effect. Do not use it.
  • Do not use the property: busy.
  • Do not use the property: busyIndicatorDelay.
  • The property: visible shows or hides the item.
  • The property: tooltip adds a tooltip to a whole row. The tooltip is only shown on mouse interaction. It will not work on tablets or smartphones. Do not use it.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

List

In SAP Fiori, we distinguish between tables and lists. Both usually contain homogeneous data, but lists generally have rather basic data, whereas the data in tables tends to be more complex. Lists are mostly used in the master list for a master-detail scenario using the flexible column layout, as well as in popovers or dialogs. For certain use cases, lists can also be used in the dynamic page layout.

Usage

Use the list if:

  • You want to display a homogeneous set of basic data.
  • You need to sort, group, or filter simple datasets.
  • You need to display a single-level hierarchy rather than using a complex tree table to support this simple use case.

Do not use the list if:

  • You want to manage complex datasets that need to be extensively sorted, grouped, filtered, or edited. In this case, use a table.
  • You work with complex hierarchies. In this case, use a tree.

Responsiveness

The list is like a layout container. You can change its width, but you must also ensure that the items contained in the list adapt whenever the list is resized.

All list item variants available in SAP Fiori already adapt to the respective screen size.

List Item Variants

The list contains various list items. These items can be of various types depending on the use case and on the content they have. SAPUI5 already provides the most common list items in SAP Fiori in the form of controls, although custom list items can also be created if necessary.

All the available list item types behave responsively and adapt to changing screen sizes out of the box. Most of them use truncation if size becomes too limited, since they are usually used to navigate to the item details. For custom list items, you can also wrap the texts, if required.

Object List Item

The object list item is the list item variant used most frequently in SAP Fiori applications. Consisting of a title, key figure, attributes, and a status, it contains the most important information about an object.

The space available for the attributes and status is limited as it should only show crucial information that allows the user to decide which items should be dealt with first.

All essential information about an object is usually provided when the user navigates to the item details.

For more information, see object list item.

Object list items
Object list items

Standard List Item

The standard list item is used for less complex entries, such as when the user selects an item in a dialog. This list item contains an optional image, a title, description, and a single info text (which can contain semantic information).

For more information, see standard list item.

Standard list items
Standard list items

Display List Item

The display list item is the simplest form of a list item and is only capable of showing a label and values. It is seldom used.

For more information, see display list item.

Display list items
Display list items

Action List Item

The action list item allows various actions to be triggered in a dialog. The action list item is not used in the content area.

For more information, see action list item.

Action list item
Action list item

Feed List Item

The feed list item is mainly used in feeds and notes.

For more information, see feed list item.

Feed with feed list items
Feed with feed list items

Input List Item

The input list item allows the user to enter data in a list item. It is seldom used in SAP Fiori apps as forms are usually the preferable method for entering data.

For more information, see input list item.

Input list item
Input list item

Components

The list control comes with the following main properties:

Header

The header text contains the title of the list. It is usually only used when the list is in the content area.

Footer

The footer text is the last entry in the list, and as such, it scrolls away with the content. Therefore, this property is also seldom used.

Lazy Loading

Like the table, the list also allows lazy loading. The “growing” list property is used for this purpose.

List with header and footer
List with header and footer

Empty List

Avoid empty lists. If necessary, provide instructions on how to fill the list with data (sap.m.List/ sap.m.ListBase, properties: noDataText, showNoData).

Examples:

  • If a list is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the list with data.
  • If a list is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    No filters set. To start, enter your search and filter settings and run the search.
  • If a list is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No items found. Check the search and filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, no search is offered, only the search is offered).
  • You are using the live search (no Go button in the filter bar). In this case, leave out “run the search”.
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of search and filter settings).
Empty list
Empty list

Count

List items can have a count, which is located on the far right of a row. You can use the count in simple lists, such as those that contain standard list items, to indicate how many subitems the user can expect when navigating to the item.

Standard list items with counter
Standard list items with counter

Read/Unread

You can set an indicator to highlight unread items, making it easier for the user to discover them (property: showUnread = true). If you set this indicator, all texts for the unread items are shown in bold font.

By default, this indicator is switched off, and all list items are displayed in normal font.

Display list item with read and unread items
Display list item with read and unread items

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, you can display a highlight indicator in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to show:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry-specific or process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”.

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users exactly what is wrong. Make sure that you provide this information within the table row, ideally in the same color.

For details on the use of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.m.ListItemBase, property: highlight)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Behavior and Interaction

There are several ways to interact with the list and its list items:

List Level

Scroll

The height of the list is defined by the number of items it contains. It does not have its own scroll container, but is scrolled together with the app.

If the list works in a “growing” mode, it only loads a few items at first. Additional items are only loaded (and rendered) on request. The “request” can either be triggered by scrolling (preferred), or by clicking the More button.

When the user scrolls, the title and the filter info bar can stick to the top of the surrounding layout container (sap.m.List, property: sticky).

Information
The “sticky” feature comes with some limitations:

  • It is not available on all browsers. In non-supporting browsers, the corresponding areas are not fixed on top of the surrounding layout container while scrolling.
  • Certain layout containers suppress the sticky behavior, such as the grid layout. The same happens if the list is placed within the object page.
  • If the focus is set to a sticky area, the list is automatically scrolled to top.

Sticky title
Sticky title

Mode

The list can have several modes. The respective property (Mode) allows the following selection methods:

  • None
  • SingleSelectMaster (used to pick one item with no additional indicator, as in the master list for a master-detail scenario with the flexible column layout)
  • SingleSelectLeft (used to pick one item using a radio button on the far left)
  • MultiSelect (used to pick several items from the list using checkboxes on the far left). The Shift key can be used to select a range.
  • Delete (used to delete items from the list using a delete indicator on the far right)
Developer Hint
In multiple selection mode, users can (de)select all items using the shortcut CTRL+A. This only affects items that have already been loaded to the front-end server. All other items are not (de)selected before they are loaded (for example, items added via lazy loading with growingScrollToLoad). This conflicts with the guideline that all items the user can reach by scrolling must be (de)selected.

To process all items, listen to the selectionChange event and to its flag selectAll. This indicates whether CTRL+A was triggered. As soon as an action is triggered, process the items accordingly. Depending on the number of items, consider processing them in the back end.

List with explicit single selection
List with explicit single selection
List with multiple selection
List with multiple selection
List with delete mode
List with delete mode

Grouping

List items can be grouped. The group header is a visually separate line at the top of the items it groups. It does not currently provide an interaction of its own.

Grouped list
Grouped list

Line Item Level

Type

The list item type defines the interaction of the list item, which is accompanied by a visual cue.

The items can be one of the following:

  • Active (click event; cursor changes to indicate that)
  • Inactive (no click event; cursor does not change)
  • Navigation (a small arrow appears on the far right, indicating that clicking would navigate)
  • Detail (a pencil appears on the far right, indicating that something can be changed. The user can only click on the pencil.)
  • Detail and active (same as “detail”, but the item itself is also clickable)

The example shows how all these types are visualized.

All list item types: inactive, detail, navigation, active, detail and active
All list item types: inactive, detail, navigation, active, detail and active

Indicate Navigated Item

When multi-selection is used in a master-detail scenario, it is not clear which item was last opened (for example, which item is currently shown in the second column of a flexible column layout). In this case only (multi-selection list with navigable items), you can display a “navigated” indicator to mark the item that is currently open (sap.m.ListItemBase, property: navigated).

Navigated item
Navigated item

Swipe

You can provide a swipe feature (sap.m.List, properties: swipeDirection, swipeContent) for approving or deleting items quickly without having to look at the details. Swiping is possible in both directions (left to right / right to left). You can provide different actions for each direction. Because swiping is only available on touch devices, only offer it as an additional feature. Swiping should never be the only way to perform the action.

List with swipe action
List with swipe action

Context Menu

The context menu can be triggered for the list or per item.

It gives users an alternative way of modifying the focused elements by giving access to context-specific functions.

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

List - context menu
List - context menu

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a list or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.m.ListBase, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Styles

The list items can have a header when they are used in a content area. It is also technically possible to change the background of the header and of the list itself. Depending on the use case, the lines between the list items and around the list can be shown or hidden.

The property Show Separators (All, Inner, None) allows only the outer lines (Inner) or all the lines (None) to be hidden when the list is used as a more structural element within a content area.

List without separators
List without separators

Guidelines

Text Length

When you use the list in the first column of the flexible column layout, keep the texts as short as possible and only as long as necessary. If you expect large numbers, use formatting instead.

Design for Performance

To optimize performance, we recommend showing no more than 200 items at once in the list. For larger datasets (up to 1,000 items), use the “growing” mechanism to limit the number of displayed items, and make sure that users can filter the data.

Warning
The limits above are only recommendations. For a specific app context, the number of manageable items might be far higher or lower.

The actual limits depend on your concrete scenario, including:

  • The number of rows in the table
  • The number of displayed columns
  • The complexity of the cell content (for example, simple text vs. complex charts)
  • Other elements on the page (for example, multiple pages in a flexible column layout, or several tables/elements with more complex rendering on one page)
  • The browser being used

Custom List Items

If none of the list items provided suits the requirements of your app, you can also create a custom list. If you choose this option, ensure that your custom list item is responsive when resized.

When creating custom list items, take the following guidelines into account, as needed:

Radio Button

Only use radio buttons if they are absolutely necessary. One example would be if you want to distinguish single selection from navigation. This is a rare case in which visible radio buttons for single selection are allowed.

Actions

To trigger actions on single items, show the actions on a toolbar above the list. Do not offer actions on multiple items if the list is expected to have fewer than 10 items in most cases.

The following actions on single items must always be inline:

  • Delete: Use “Delete” mode (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This places a Delete  button at the end of each item.
  • Navigation: Use the “Navigation” item type (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This places a navigation indicator at the end of the corresponding items. Use this to navigate to a new page containing item details.
  • Edit: Use the “Detail” item type (sap.m.TreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail). This places an Edit   icon at the end of the corresponding items.

You can combine delete and edit actions, or delete and navigation actions. However, edit and navigation actions cannot be combined.

To trigger actions that are independent of the selection, show the actions on a toolbar above the list. For example: AddCollapse AllExpand All, … .

To trigger a default action on the entire item, use the “Active” or “DetailAndActive” item type (sap.m.TreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active). When clicked, active items trigger an event that can be handled by the app (for example, to open a dialog). Selection of items and expanding/collapsing a node do not trigger the event, and are handled by the tree. Do not use the active item type for navigation, to switch the line item to an edit state, or to delete the item.

Active can be combined with edit and delete, but not with navigation. Do not combine active with the single selection master.

Add Items

For adding items, place an Add or Create text button on the table toolbar.

  • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
  • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.

Show new items as the first item of the table, with a visual highlight at the beginning of the row.

For more information, see the guidelines for managing objects (including subarticles).

Enabling/Disabling Actions

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection:

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user how many items will be affected. Let users choose whether to apply the action anyway or cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

If the action was applied and the items are still available, keep them selected.

Message for action which applies to a part of a selection
Message for action which applies to a part of a selection

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar).

Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, it is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within the list, use drop targets that are between items (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between). This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Drop targets in between items
Drop targets in between items

Do not combine rearranging items and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure that there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

When combining rearranging items with grouping, be aware that moving items to another group also means that a value of the dropped item changes: because grouping is based on values, the dropped item needs to take on the corresponding value of the target group. If this is not wanted, do not allow users to rearrange items in grouped lists.

 

Example:

A list is grouped by availability. An item is moved from the group “Not Available” to the group “In Stock”. In this case, the moved item needs to change its availability to “In Stock” to match the target group. If changing the value doesn’t make sense, only allow users to rearrange the items within the same group, or don’t allow rearranging at all.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing

Export to Spreadsheet

Apps can provide a menu button for exporting list data to a spreadsheet (for example, on the relevant toolbar). For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button
'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Grid List

As with the list and the responsive table, the grid list displays a set of items. In contrast to both controls, the grid list displays the items not in rows, but in a grid.

The grid list is usually used as an alternative view for a list or table. It is ideal for displaying images, charts, object cards, and other content, which profit from more height (but less width).

Grid List
Grid List

Usage

Use the grid list if:

  • Your content is “visual” and profits from the rectangular format of the items. This is true for e.g. images, charts, and object cards.
  • The focus is on items, not on cells. The grid list shows complete items.
  • You want to display a homogeneous set of basic data.
  • You need to sort, group, or filter simple data sets.
  • As an alternative view for tables or lists, if the content profits from the different format.

Do not use the grid list if:

  • Your content is not appropriate for a card-like format. For example, do not use the grid list for displaying a wall of text. Use a table instead.
  • The main use case is to select one item from a very small number of items, without viewing additional details. In this case, a select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • Data needs to be structured in a hierarchical manner. In this case, a tree might be more appropriate.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use a chart.
  • You just need it for layout reasons. In this case, use a layout container such as the CSSGrid.
  • You want to manage complex datasets that need to be extensively sorted, grouped, filtered, or edited. In this case, use a table.

Responsiveness

The responsiveness of the grid list results from the underlying grid. The underlying grid is defined by rows and columns. Columns can have a minimum and maximum or a fixed size. Whenever an additional column fits on the screen, it will be added. If a column does not fit on the screen anymore, it will be removed. Items are re-layouted accordingly.

Optionally, there can be different configurations for the underlying grid based on breakpoints, for example based on the device types.

To define the grid layout and behavior, you can use one of the pre-defined layouts:

  • Grid box layout: Adds a variable number of columns depending on the available screen width. Columns have either a fixed width or can “breathe” slightly. All rows have the same height, and all items are the same size.
  • Responsive column layout: The number of columns depends on breakpoints (4 columns for size S, 8 for size M, 12 for size L, and 16 for size XL). The width of the columns grows or shrinks with the available screen space until the next breakpoint is reached. The row height of the grid is determined by the height of the highest item in the row. The number of rows and columns taken up by an item can differ.

Alternatively, you can define your own grid. This gives you much greater flexibility to influence both the layout and the (responsive) behavior of the grid.

The underlying grid defines the available space per item. The width can differ pending on the screen width (“breathing”) or be fixed. The height can differ pending on the content of the item or be fixed. “Breathing” items make better use of the available screen space and is therefore recommended. Make sure, that the item adapts to the resulting width / height, for example by

  • Re-layouting the item content
  • Hiding less important information
  • Re-sizing content, such as images or charts.

Items can use one ore more grid cells. Items can also be different sizes (for example, to allow for varying text lengths/wrapping in different items).

Size S
Size S
Size M
Size M
Size L
Size L

Components

  • The title bar holds the title and, an item counter. Instead of a title bar you can use a toolbar, including title, counter, variant management and actions.
  • Optionally, a filter info bar should appear when the grid list is filtered and shows information on the filter settings.
  • The collection of grid list items, layouted on a grid, occupies the main part of the grid list.
  • A More button can be shown if you do not want all items to be loaded at the start (known as “lazy loading”). Ideally, you should use scrolling to load more items instead of choosing the More button. Use More only, if content is shown below the grid list.
  • The footer can contain additional static text information.
Schematic visualization of the grid list
Schematic visualization of the grid list

Title Bar

The title bar contains the title of the grid list and an item counter

Title Bar
Title Bar

Instead of the title bar, a toolbar can be used instead. If done so, use a title control to display the title and item count. Variant management and actions can be added in this case. The toolbar can contain entry points for the view settings dialog, as well as view switches in the form of a segmented button, and buttons for actions like for example Add, or Edit.

Toolbar instead of title bar
Toolbar instead of title bar

For the title, keep the following in mind:

  • Use a title if you need the item count, toolbar actions, or variant management. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a title, such as Items.
  • Do not show the title bar at all, if all elements (title, item count, variant management, toolbar) are available in the surrounding area.
    Example: An object page (sub-)section contains only one grid list. In this case, add the item count and the toolbar to the (sub-)section header.
Developer Hint
Assistive technologies (such as screen readers) use the title to create a hierarchical site map for faster navigation. In addition, screen readers use the title as the label for the table. If you don’t use a title (for example, to avoid repetition), make sure that the table is connected to another meaningful on-screen text that can be used as a label for assistive technologies. You can do this using the method addAriaLabelledBy.

For displaying the item count, use the following format:

[title text] ([count])

for example:

Items (2,534)

For the item count, keep the following in mind:

  • include all the items that a user can reach by scrolling except group headers.
  • Remove the item count if there are zero items.
  • Do not show a count on the title bar, if a More button is used. Show the count on the more button instead.

If possible, keep the title bar sticky (sap.m.GridList, property: sticky).

Filter Info Bar

Beneath the toolbar, display a filter info bar (which itself is a special toolbar) if the grid list is filtered.

Filter Info Bar
Filter Info Bar

Items

The items (sap.f.GridListItem) are placed on a grid. To specify the design of items, it is recommend (but not mandatory) to follow the guidelines for object cards. Be aware that the item itself is responsible for its own responsiveness.

Use the grid list only, if your content profits from the format. This can apply to images, charts, but also to object cards or quick views. Another option is to mimick the format (but not the visual) of existing objects (e.g. business cards).

A grid list item can contain any content. This includes single controls, or a combination of controls (e.g. by using layout containers).

When designing an item,

  • Use the grid list item as starting point and make sure that the content adapts responsively to a changing item width / height.
  • Although the grid list can technically work with other list items (e.g. the standard list item), do not use them. They are not responsive enough for being used in a grid. In addition, selectors, navigation indicators and other elements are layouted differently (optimized for the list, not for the grid list).
  • Take care that an item can be identified, e.g. by adding a title, and if needed a sub title.
  • To show a string with an ID as identifier, use the title for the string, and the subtitle for the ID.
  • For status information, use semantic colors on foreground elements.
  • Avoid truncation. Use controls that wrap the text and configure them accordingly.
  • If an edit mode is needed, change your text controls (labels, text, and links) to input fields or other appropriate editable controls, as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before.
    You can do this by changing the control or, in more complex cases, by exchanging the whole item.

Not all items have to follow the same structure. This could be the case if one item is locked, but another item is in edit mode. Another example is to show a set of objects of different types in the same grid list.

Example for a grid list item
Example for a grid list item
Another example for a grid list item
Another example for a grid list item

Highlight

To show that an item needs attention, a highlight indicator can be shown in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to indicate:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry- / process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users what exactly is wrong. Therefore, make sure to provide this information within the item, ideally in the same color.

For details on the usage of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.m.ListItemBase, property: highlight)

Highlighted item
Highlighted item

States

To show that an item is unread, use the corresponding flag (sap.m.GridList, property: showUnread, sap.f.GridListItem, property: unread). This shows most of the content in bold font.

Unread item next to a read item
Unread item next to a read item

To show that an item has been modified, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string (Modified) near the item identifier.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error (for example, within the global edit flow), add the string (Contains errors) near the item identifier. To do this, use an object status control with the error state (sap.m.ObjectStatus, property: state, value: sap.ui.core.ValueState.Error). In addition, highlight the item accordingly (sap.f.GridListItem, property: highlight).

An item with an error
An item with an error

To show that an item is locked, use a transparent button with the corresponding icon and the text Locked by [Name] near the item identifier. The user can click or tap the button to open a quick view of the person.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in a draft state, use a transparent-style button with the text Draft near the item identifier. The user can click or tap the button to open a popover showing the timestamp of the last change.

An item with draft state
An item with draft state

Show only one state at any one time.

“More” Button

The More button loads more items to the front end if not all items have yet been loaded.

"More" button

Footer

The footer can be used to display additional static information relating to the content.

Grid list footer
Grid list footer

Behavior and Interaction

Scroll

The height of the grid list is defined by the number of items it contains. It does not have a scroll container on its own but is scrolled together with the page. When the user scrolls the page, the title bar and filter info bar can stick to the top of the surrounding layout container (sap.m.GridList, property: sticky).

Information
The “sticky” feature comes with some limitations:

  • It is not available on all browsers. In non-supporting browsers, the corresponding areas (title bar, filter info bar) are not fixed on top of the surrounding layout container while scrolling.
  • Certain layout containers suppress the sticky behavior, such as the grid layout. The same happens if the grid list is placed within the object page.
  • If focus is set to a fixed column header, the grid list is automatically scrolled to top.

Sticky toolbar
Sticky toolbar

Showing more items

If the grid list works in a “growing” mode, it only loads a few items at first. Additional items are only loaded (and rendered) on request. This request can either be triggered by scrolling (preferred), or by clicking the More button. Use the latter one only if content follows below the grid list. Use the “growing mode”, if more than 200 items are expected to be displayed.

If using the “More” button,

  • show the number of items already loaded and (if possible) the total number items below the text More.
  • do not show an item count on the title bar. Use the count on the More button instead.

In any case, if the “growing mode” is used, do not show more than 1,000 items overall.

Select

A grid list can have one of the following selection modes (sap.m.GridList/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode):

  • None: Items cannot be selected (sap.m.ListMode.None).
    Beware: Items can still use the sap.m.ListType “navigation”, which allows click handling on specific items. Only use this option if the click triggers navigation to a corresponding item details page.
  • Single selection master: One item in the grid list can be selected. Items are selected by clicking or tapping the whole row. The single select master mode has no obvious visual cues, such as checkboxes or radio buttons. It only provides a light blue background for the selected state. Because of this, it can barely be differentiated from grid lists without selection (mode: None). Single select master is the preferred mode for single selection. (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectMaster).
Selected item in
Selected item in "single selection master"
  • Single selection left: One item in the grid list can be selected. For this, the grid list provides radio buttons on the left side of each item. Only use this mode if a click on the whole item is being used for something else, such as navigation. (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectLeft). Even in this case, prefer single select master and synchronize the selection with the navigation, so that the navigated item is also the selected item.
  • Multi selection: Users can select one or more items. For this, the grid list provides checkboxes on the left side of each item. (sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect). The Shift key can be used to select a range. Try to avoid combining multi selection with navigation.
An unselected and a selected item in
An unselected and a selected item in "multi selection"

For all single selection modes, make sure that one item is initially selected. Otherwise, the user cannot return to the initial state. A selected item can only be deselected by selecting another item.

Click an Item

The whole item can be clickable. An event is fired by clicking on the item (anywhere where there is no interactive control inside the item). Apps can react on the event, for example, by opening a dialog (sap.f.GridListItem, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive).

Active elements do not have a visual indication and can therefore not be differentiated from non-active elements.

Active is a list item type and can therefore not be used together with “navigation” or “edit”. In addition, “active” uses the whole item as a clickable area and therefore cannot be used together with a grid list in “single select master” mode.

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a grid list or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.m.ListBase, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

When using drag and drop, keep the following in mind:

  • Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, it is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.
  • If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within the grid list, use drop targets that are between items (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between). This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).
  • Be aware that due to the re-arrangement of the items which happens after an item is dropped, it is not always clear where the item will finally be placed.
  • When dropping items from outside the grid list, adapt the size of the drop indicator to match the target layout of the item (sap.f.dnd.GridDropInfo, property: dropIndicatorSize).
  • Do not combine rearranging items and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure that there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.
  • When combining rearranging items with grouping, be aware that moving items to another group also means that a value of the dropped item changes: because grouping is based on a specific data point, the dropped item needs to take on the value of the target group for the corresponding data point. If this is not wanted, do not allow users to rearrange items in grouped grid lists. Example:
    A grid list is grouped by availability. An item is moved from the group “Not Available” to the group “In Stock”. In this case, the moved item needs to change its availability to “In Stock” to match the target group. If changing the value doesn’t make sense, only allow users to rearrange the items within the same group, or don’t allow rearranging at all.

Loading Data

To indicate that the grid list is currently loading items, use the busy state. (sap.m.GridList, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Empty Grid Lists

Try not to display an empty grid list. If there is no way around this, provide instructions on how to fill the grid list with data (sap.m.ListBase, properties: showNoData, noDataText).

Examples:

  • If a grid list is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the grid list with data.
  • If a grid list is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    To start, set the relevant filters.
  • If a grid list is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No data found. Try adjusting the filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, a search is also offered, or only the search is offered).
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of filter settings).

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu to a grid list. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the whole grid list or an individual item by providing access to context-specific actions. A context menu is opened by right-clicking (mouse), long press (touch devices), or via keyboard using the context menu key or SHIFT+F10. If a control inside a grid list is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar). Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browsers context menu, which can no longer be opened.

Group

If grouped, a group header is displayed (sap.m.GroupHeaderListItem) above all items which belong to the corresponding group. The group header is not interactive.

A grouped grid list
A grouped grid list

Guidelines

Actions

To trigger actions on multiple items, use a multi-selection grid list (sap.m.GridList, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect), and offer the corresponding actions on the toolbar of the grid list. Keep the toolbar sticky (sap.m.GridList, property: sticky).

In rare cases, you can also offer the corresponding actions in the footer toolbar. Do this only if the grid list is the only area on the screen to which actions can be applied and if the actions are finalizing.

Do not offer actions for multiple items if the grid list is expected to have fewer than 10 items in most cases.

To trigger actions on a single item only (sap.m.GridList, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectMaster), the action can also be shown within the item. One example would be an Add to Cart button in a shopping application. Since these actions are repeated in every item and thus use a lot of screen real estate, only do this for one or two actions at most. In this case, show the action trigger near the content to which it belongs.

The following actions on single items must always be in-line:

  • Delete: Use the “Delete” mode of the grid list (sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This places a Delete button at the right side of an item. Clicking this button triggers the deletion of the corresponding item. Do not use this mode if deleting multiple items at once is the preferred use case.
    Delete is a mode of the grid list and therefore cannot be used together with single selection or multi-selection.
Delete button
Delete button
  • Navigation: Use the “Navigation” item type (sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This places a Navigation indicator at the right side of an item and the entire item becomes clickable. Use this to navigate to a new page containing item details. In rare cases, you can also use this for the category navigation pattern without navigating to another page. By contrast, clicking an interactive control within an item does not trigger the navigation event. Instead, the corresponding control handles the click event.
    “Navigation” is an item type and therefore cannot be used together with “edit”, or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).
Navigation Indicator
Navigation Indicator
  • Edit: Use the “Detail” list item type (sap.f.GridListItem, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail). This places an Edit icon at the right side of an item. Clicking the button triggers the edit event. Use this event to switch the corresponding item to edit mode.
    Edit is a list item type and therefore cannot be used together with “navigation” or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).
Edit button
Edit button

From these three actions (delete, navigation, and edit), you can combine delete and edit, or delete and navigation. Edit and navigation cannot be combined.

Design for Performance

To optimize performance, we recommend showing no more than 200 items at once in the responsive table. For larger datasets (up to 1,000 items), use the “growing” mechanism to limit the number of displayed items, and make sure that users can filter the data.

Warning
The limits above are only recommendations. For a specific app context, the number of manageable items might be far higher or lower.

The actual limits depend on your concrete scenario, including:

  • The number of rows in the table
  • The number of displayed columns
  • The complexity of the cell content (for example, simple text vs. complex charts)
  • Other elements on the page (for example, multiple pages in a flexible column layout, or several tables/elements with more complex rendering on one page)
  • The browser being used

Add Items

  • Place the Add or Create text button on the toolbar of the grid list.
    • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
    • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.
  • Place new items always as the first item of the grid list.
  • Use highlight (information state) on the new item.

After pressing the Add button, there are three possibilities for adding an item, which should be considered in the following priority:

  • Add the item inline. Create an empty, editable item as the first item of the grid list. Show the Save button on the toolbar of the grid list. This option is recommended for simple scenarios where just a few input fields have to be filled.
  • Open a dialog for items where up to 8 input fields need to be filled. Save the new item at the dialog level.
  • Navigate to a new page. This behavior should only be used for very complex scenarios that cannot be handled by a dialog (for example, creating complex objects). When the user presses Save in the footer toolbar of the create page, navigate back to the grid list.

There are three different states of a new item:

  • New: The item was just created and is still in edit mode. It is highlighted with a visual indicator (information state).
  • Recent: The item was saved but is still highlighted and displayed as the first item of the grid list. Current filter, sort and group criteria are ignored since the item should remain visible.
  • As soon as the grid list is sorted, filtered, or grouped again, the new item is handled accordingly and loses the visual highlight, but not before.

In the context of the draft handling new items are not saved on grid list level, but rather with the entire draft.

Export to Spreadsheet

Mass Editing

  • Provide multiselection (sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).
  • Provide an Edit button.
  • If several items are selected, choosing the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

For details, see mass editing.

Paste

To paste data from the clipboard to the grid list, the browser functionality for paste can be used (CTRL + V or browser context menu).

If the focus is on item level, the app has to take the data from the clipboard and add it to the corresponding controls within the items.

If the focus is on an editable control within an item, the control gets the data automatically.

Pasting via context menu does not work if a custom context menu is used.

View Settings

  • Provide individual buttons for each of the following settings on the toolbar of the grid list: sort, filter, group.
  • Clicking one of these buttons opens the view settings dialog or P13nDialog dialog with just the relevant page inside.
  • When closed, apply the settings to the grid list accordingly.

Keep the following in mind:

  • Do not offer any of these features if the grid list is expected to have only a small number of entries (up to 20 in most cases).
  • If filtering is a main use case, do not offer filtering on the toolbar of the grid list. Use the filter bar instead.
  • Always use only the view settings which are really needed. For example, do not offer grouping if it does not support your use case well.
  • Persist the view settings. When a user reopens the app, show the grid list with the same sort, filter, and group settings as last defined by this user.

Sort

  • For the default sort settings, sort by the item title, which is usually the identifier of an item.
  • If you offer sorting, offer it for each data point available in the item. Allow sorting in both directions, ascending and descending. The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order.
  • For each data point, provide a meaningful sort order. For example:
    • Sort text alphabetically
    • Sort numbers by their value
    • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
      • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
      • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
      • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
      • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.

Filter

  • To display the current filter state, use the info bar below the title. Clicking or tapping the info bar opens the filter page of the corresponding dialog.
  • Show the info bar only if the filter settings are not shown somewhere else. For example, do not show the info bar for settings taken in the filter bar or in a select placed in the toolbar of the grid list.
  • If the info bar is shown, provide an option to reset all corresponding filters on the info bar.
  • Keep the info bar sticky (sap.m.GridList, property: sticky).
Developer Hint
To display the current filter settings on the info bar, consider using the list formatter (sap.ui.core.format.ListFormat).

Group

  • To display the current group state, group headers are shown.
  • On the group header, show the following text (sap.m.GroupHeaderListItem, property: title):
    [Label of the grouped data point]: [Grouping Value]
  • If there is no grouping value, show the following text:
    [Label of the grouped data point]: (Not Available)
    This is the case if you have a group of items that don’t have a value for the grouped data point.

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection,

  • Enable the action, if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action, if it can be applied to a part of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user about how many items will be affected. Provide the choice to apply the action anyway or to cancel the action.
  • Disable the action only, if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

Message for action which applies to a part of a selection
Message for action which applies to a part of a selection

If the items are still available after the action was applied, keep them selected.

To trigger actions that are independent of the selection, show the actions on the toolbar of the grid list. Examples of such actions are add, edit (in the sense of changing the whole table to edit mode), sort, filter, and group.

To trigger a default action on the whole item, use the “Active” or “DetailAndActive” list item type (sap.f.GridListItem, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active).
Active items trigger an event when clicked, which can be handled by apps (for example, to open a dialog). Clicks on interactive controls within the item do not trigger the event but are handled by the interactive control. Do not use Active for navigation, to switch the line item to an edit state, or to delete the item.

Active can be combined with edit and delete, but not with navigation. Do not combine active with single selection.

Grid Lists in Object Pages

A grid list with up to 20 expected items can be displayed right away, without lazy loading.

If you expect the grid list to have more than 20 items, use one of the following 3 options:

  • Lazy loading (More button): Use this option if you expect to have up to 100 items.
  • Tab navigation: If you expect to have more than 50 to 100 items, but less than 400, use the object page with tab navigation instead of anchor navigation. Put the grid list on a dedicated tab.
  • Navigation to a list report: If you expect the grid list to have more than 400 items, or if the tab approach is unsuitable, restrict the number of items in the grid list itself to a reasonable amount. To provide the user with a way to work with the entire grid list, offer navigation to a separate list report containing all items.

For all of the three options mentioned above, we recommend providing a search, and if feasible, sort and filter capabilities for the grid list in the object page. Grouping should be avoided.

For more information on the use of grid lists within the object page, see Object Page – Tables.

Properties

sap.f.GridList

The following additional properties are available for the grid list:

  • The property: inset adds a margin on all sides of the grid list.
  • The property: headerText is a simple way to set the title for the grid list. However, this excludes the following:
    • A separate toolbar
    • variantManagement
  • The property: headerDesign affects the appearance of the header if the theme supports it. Leave the default value as it is.
  • The property: footerText adds a small additional row below the table footer or last item. This row can contain text only. Do not use this property.
  • The property: width defines the width of the whole grid list.
  • The property: includeItemInSelection uses a click on the whole item to select the corresponding item if the grid list is in a selection mode. This competes with other settings like “Navigation” or “Active” and should therefore not be used in combination with these two settings.
  • The property: enableBusyIndicator automatically shows a busy indicator while data is loaded. (In contrast to the property: busy, where the application can control when the grid list is set to busy state)
  • The property: modeAnimationOn does not have any effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: showSeparators does not have any effect. Do not use this property.
  • The property: swipeDirection does not have any effect. Do not use this property.
  • The property: rememberSelections leaves items selected even if they are currently not visible, for example, through filtering. If this behavior is not wanted, set the flag to “false”, but you should do so only in exceptional cases.
  • The property: busy sets the grid list to a busy state. While in busy state, the whole grid list cannot be used and items cannot be read due to an overlay.
  • The property: busyIndicatorDelay defines the time after which a busy state is shown after the grid list has been set to this state. Use the default value.
  • The property: visible shows the grid list (“true”) or hides it (“false”).
  • The property: tooltip provides a tooltip for the whole grid list. Do not use it.

sap.f.GridListItem

The following additional properties are available for sap.m.ColumnListItem:

  • The property: selected allows an item to be selected programmatically.
  • The property: counter shows a number on the right side of an item. This is used in cases like showing the number of subitems.
  • Do not use the property: busy.
  • Do not use the property: busyIndicatorDelay.
  • The property: visible shows or hides the item.
  • The property: tooltip adds a tooltip to a whole item. The tooltip is only shown on mouse interaction. It will not work on tablets or smartphones. Do not use it.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Analytical Table (ALV)

An analytical table contains a set of data that is structured in rows and columns. It provides several powerful possibilities for working with the data, including advanced grouping and aggregations.

In contrast to other tables, the analytical data binding used by the analytical table allows an aggregated number to be shown automatically in a cell. This means that a number in such a summarized cell is a total sum of several lines in the database.

Usage

Use the analytical table (ALV) if:

  • The cell level and the spatial relationship between cells are more important than the line item. Examples include spreadsheet analyses and waterfall charts. Note that an analytical table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You have to work on more than 1,000 rows. In this case, the analytical table is easier to handle. In contrast to the responsive table, the architecture of the analytical table is optimized for handling large numbers of items. Note that an analytical table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • Comparing items is a major use case. In this case, an analytical table might be more appropriate than a responsive table. In the analytical table, each cell contains only one data point. In contrast, the responsive table is more flexible regarding line items, including the ability to add more data points per cell and also the pop-in function. Both make comparisons more difficult. Note that an analytical table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.

Do not use the analytical table (ALV) if:

  • You need a table. The responsive table is the default table in SAP Fiori. Additional use cases where you might need the responsive table include:
    • You need to provide a total sum for one column. You can also add totals to the responsive table.
    • The focus is on working on line items, not on cells. The responsive table is optimized for displaying complete items on all devices (such as purchase orders and purchase requisitions).
    • Selecting one or more items is a main use case and details are needed to choose the correct item.
    • Line items are independent of each other and no operation across columns is needed.
    • You want to have only one implementation for all devices.
  • The main use case is choosing one item from a very small number of items with no additional details. A select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • The main use case is choosing one out of several items with only a few details per item. A list might be more appropriate. Pay attention to the layout of the list item to ensure that it has a pleasant appearance. Examples include the master list and the attachment list.
  • You cannot provide an analytical binding on the technical side. In this case, a grid table will do the work. Note that the grid table provides only one level of grouping, no aggregation options, and is also not responsive.
  • Data needs to be structured in a hierarchical manner. In this case, a tree table might be more appropriate. Although the analytical table can have several grouping levels, it is not as flexible when nodes at several levels contain children. Note that neither the tree table nor the analytical table are responsive. You will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones and tablets.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use charts.
  • You just need it for layout reasons. In this case, use a layout container like HBox or VBox.
  • You need read-only or editable field-value pairs. Use a form instead. The analytical table is not optimized for form-like input navigation.

Responsiveness

The analytical table is available for desktops and tablets, but not in smartphone sizes. It supports touch devices, but is not optimized for small screens.

If you use an analytical table for desktop use cases, note that you must implement a fallback solution for mobile and touch devices. This fallback solution does not need to support all use cases.

You could create a fallback by using a responsive table. However, a completely different solution, such as showing charts in a read-only case, might be more suitable.

Analytical table (ALV) shown on a desktop
Analytical table (ALV) shown on a desktop
Analytical table (ALV) shown on a tablet
Analytical table (ALV) shown on a tablet

Components

An analytical table does not consist of other elements. However, it is common to use a toolbar above the analytical table.

The toolbar can contain entry points for the view settings dialog and the table personalization dialog or for the p13n dialog, as well as for view switches in the form of a segmented button, and buttons for Add, Edit, and other actions.

Behavior and Interaction

An analytical table is quite restricted in terms of its content, although it provides powerful features for working with the content.

Table Level

Scroll

An analytical table allows horizontal and vertical scrolling (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: navigationMode, value: Scrollbar).

You can add any number of line items to the analytical table, which is known as “lazy loading”.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: rowHeight).

The analytical table is optimized to allow faster scrolling within the first 1000 items.

Scroll bar
Scroll bar

Select

Selection for an analytical table depends on the chosen selection mode. The following options are available:

No selection: Items cannot be selected. (property: selectionMode = None)

Analytical table without item selection
Analytical table without item selection

Single selection: One item in the analytical table can be selected. A row selector column is shown. (property: selectionMode = Single)

Analytical table with single selection
Analytical table with single selection
  • Multiple selection: One or more items can be selected. The analytical table provides a column with checkboxes on the left-hand side. Clicking a checkbox toggles the state of the corresponding row from deselected to selected and back. The Shift key can be used to select a range. For multiple selection, you can choose between two variants.
    • Multi-toggle mode (property: selectionMode = MultiToggle)
    • Multi-selection plug-in (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin)

    These variants behave differently when the user selects more items than are currently loaded in the front end.

    Multi-toggle

    In multi-toggle mode, you can offer a Select All checkbox to the left of the column header (property: enableSelectAll). Selecting this checkbox selects or deselects all items that are currently loaded in the front end. All other items are not selected/deselected. If the application data is stored in the back end, scrolling down further can reveal additional unselected items. The same can happen with range selections if not all items in the selected range have been loaded to the front end.

    Multi-selection plug-in

    If you use this plug-in instead of the multi-toggle selection mode, the behavior for range selection and Select All changes:

    • By default, a dedicated Deselect All button replaces the Select All checkbox. There is no default UI element for selecting all items.
    • You can set a limit for the number of items that can be selected (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin, property: limit). This limit has the following effect:
      • The range that can be selected using the Shift key is limited to the specified number of items (default = 200). The table automatically scrolls back to the last selected item and a message can appear (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin, property: enableNotification). Users can select more items by selecting additional ranges (the specified limit applies each time).
      • If the selection limit is set to 0, a Select All checkbox is shown. There is also no limit on the number of items that can be selected in a range. All selected items are loaded, which can lead to performance issues for large data sets.
    • If selected items are not already available in the front end, they are loaded automatically by the plug-in and set as selected.
Information
When setting a limit for the number of items that can be selected, keep the following boundaries in mind:

  • The performance of your service: How many items can be loaded at once in a reasonable time? Does this also apply if an end-user shows all available columns?
  • The “minimum limit”: Internally, the analytcial table loads blocks of items as the user scrolls down. Because this block size (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: threshold) is usually also based on the performance of the service, it should be safe to assume that the minimum selection limit is twice this size. In this case, loading the data would take as long as scrolling down and loading exactly one more block. Nevertheless, we recommend using larger limits if your service allows.

Analytical table with multiple selection
Analytical table with multiple selection
Using the multi-selection plug-in with a limit
Using the multi-selection plug-in with a limit

Selection Behavior

An item can be selected in different ways, depending on the configuration of the analytical table (sap.ui.table.Table, property: selectionBehavior):

  • Row: An item is selected by clicking the checkbox or the row. Use this option for multi-selection tables if clicking a row or a cell is not used for anything else.
  • RowSelector: An item is selected only by clicking the checkbox in the selector cell. Use this option if clicking the row (or a cell inside the row) is used for something else, such as navigation.
  • RowOnly: An item is selected only by clicking the row, and not using checkboxes in the selector cells. Use this for single-selection tables if clicking a row or a cell is not used for another purpose, such as navigation.

Compact, Cozy, and Condensed

Like all SAP Fiori controls, the analytical table is shown in compact mode on a desktop and in cozy mode on tablets.

For desktop devices, you can fit even more rows onto the screen by using the condensed mode together with the compact mode. This renders less white space for each item.

Note that the condensed content density must always be set in addition to the compact mode. Do not use the condensed mode on its own. Do not mix condensed with cozy. Doing so could lead to unpredictable or unwanted results, such as cozy-sized controls in condensed-sized containers, missing padding, and so on.

Note that neither compact mode nor condensed mode support touch interaction. Even on a desktop with a touch screen, users will have difficulty selecting rows or using controls inside the cells with their fingers.

For more information on cozy and compact modes, see content density.

 

 

 

 

Analytical table in compact mode
Analytical table in compact mode
Analytical table in condensed mode - more items on the same screen real estate
Analytical table in condensed mode - more items on the same screen real estate

Column Header

The column header provides the label for the corresponding column and access to the column header menu.

Columns are resized as follows:

  • Mouse interaction: The user drags the separator line between two columns (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: Resizable). Double-clicking the line optimizes the column according to the length of the data currently visible and the label of the column header (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: Autoresizable).
  • Touch interaction: The user clicks or taps the column header to reveal two buttons: one to show the column header menu and one for resizing. The user drags the latter to resize the column.

When the user resizes a column, the adaptation of the column width depends on how the column widths are set:

  • If column widths are set in pixel-based units (px, em, rem), the resized column is adapted and subsequent columns are moved accordingly. The width of all other columns is not affected.
    If all the columns together do not use up the full width of the table control, empty space is added. If all the columns together exceed the width of the table control, a scrollbar appears.
  • If all column widths are set as percentages or “auto”, resizing one column automatically resizes one or more other columns. Resizing can also affect the position of the resized column. This option utilizes the full width of the table and ensures that no white space is added. A scrollbar appears only if all or most of the columns become to narrow. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, you can set a minimum width per column. However, this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are resized automatically. End users can still reduce the column width to below the defined minimum (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: width, minWidth).

Users can rearrange columns by dragging the column header to another position (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: enableColumnReordering).

Column header
Column header
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Columns do not use up the available space
Columns do not use up the available space

Column Header Menu

For each column, a menu can contain the following menu items (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumnMenu, property: Visible):

  • Sort Ascending/Descending (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: showSortMenuEntries)
  • Free text filter (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: showFilterMenuEntries)
  • Group
  • Totals
  • Freeze from the first to the last specified column (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: enableColumnFreeze)

For each column, the menu can be replaced by an app-specific menu.

Column header menu
Column header menu

Sort

The column header menu can provide two sort options (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: sortProperty, showSortMenuEntry):

  • Sort Ascending
  • Sort Descending

The user selects one of these options to sort the corresponding column accordingly (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

Sort settings in column header menu
Sort settings in column header menu

Filter

The column header menu can provide a search field for entering free text (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: filterProperty, showFilterMenuEntries).

If the user enters a term in the input field and triggers the search by pressing ENTER when the focus is on the filter input field, the analytical table is filtered by the corresponding column and value (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, properties: filtered, filterProperty, filterValue, filterOperator, sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: filterType).

Note that the filter may return zero results, in which case, the table might be empty.

General recommendations for filtering:

  • If filtering is a main use case, choose the filter bar or any other filtering UI over the built-in free text filter.
  • Only use the free text filter if filtering is a secondary use case and if the filter bar is too heavy.
Free text filter in column header menu
Free text filter in column header menu

Group

The column header menu can provide the option to group by this column (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: sortProperty).

One group collects all items with the same value within the corresponding column.

Group setting in column header menu
Group setting in column header menu

If line items are grouped in a column, every group is provided with a collapsible or expandable group header (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: grouped). The header text consists of the column name and the value for the corresponding group (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: groupHeaderFormatter). Several grouping levels are possible.

The corresponding column can be hidden to avoid duplicates (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: showIfGrouped). Exercise caution when using this option since hiding the column changes the table layout and may lead to confusion.

Group headers and the corresponding columns are shown – The relevant data is duplicated
Group headers and the corresponding columns are shown – The relevant data is duplicated
Group headers shown, the corresponding column hidden – No duplicates
Group headers shown, the corresponding column hidden – No duplicates

Aggregation

The column header menu can provide the option to show or hide aggregation totals for this column.

Aggregation in column header menu
Aggregation in column header menu

Intermediate aggregations are shown at group level for the corresponding columns if the group contains more than one line item (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: summed).

Group total
Group total

The overall aggregation is shown at the bottom of the analytical table.

Overal aggregation
Overal aggregation

Freeze Columns

The column header menu can provide the option to freeze columns (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: enableColumnFreeze). Selecting Freeze freezes all columns up to the one in which the operation was triggered (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: fixedColumnCount).

When Freeze is triggered, the menu item changes to Unfreeze for the corresponding column.

Freeze setting in column header menu
Freeze setting in column header menu

Line Item Level

A line item contains a set of cells and provides options for selecting the item.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height.

(sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: rowHeight)

Line item
Line item

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Cell Level

A cell provides one data point.

It can contain one of the following controls to display this data point:

While it is technically possible to also use other controls, doing so could lead to issues with alignment, condensed mode, screen reader support, and keyboard support.

If you use text, use only single-line text to keep the same row height. Truncate if necessary as this prevents adverse side effects when scrolling vertically (sap.m.Text, property: wrapping, value: false). Do not wrap.

Cell
Cell

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a table. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

When opened, the context menu gets the row and column context, except for special columns (such as the selection column) or special rows (like group headers). Context menus can be implemented for a specific table, row, or cell (not recommended for editable cells).

By default, the analytical table provides a context menu on the group headers (for example, Expand, Collapse, …). Otherwise, no default context menus are provided.

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a table is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Analytical table with context menu
Analytical table with context menu

Guidelines

Data Density vs. Complexity

The analytical table can be used to display and work with large amounts of data. Unfortunately, the analytical table has a high data density and therefore conveys an immediate feeling of complexity.

Only show tables with a lot of data as a last resort. To make the data easier to read, you should instead try the following:

  • Break down the data into manageable chunks and allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Try to avoid horizontal scrolling in the default delivery.

Try to minimize the number of columns, especially if there is a large number of rows.

Table Title

Implement the table title by using a title control in a toolbar.

Use a table title only if the title of the table is not indicated in the surrounding area.

Do not use a table title if it simply repeats text that is already above the table. For example:

  • A pricing conditions table is the only control on a tab labeled Pricing Conditions.
  • A section or subsection on an object page contains only one table.

Use a table title if you need the item count, table toolbar, or variant management. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a table title, such as Items.
Exception: If the surrounding area contains the table title, and both the item count and toolbar can be added to the surrounding area, no additional table title is needed.
Example: An object page (sub-)section contains only one table. In this case, add the item count and the table toolbar to the (sub-)section header.

If you use a table title, show either a title for the table, with or without variant management, or an item count in the following format:

Items (2,534).

The item count in the table title includes all the visible items that a user can reach by scrolling or expanding groups. Group headers are not included.

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items.

Developer Hint
Assistive technologies (such as screen readers) use the title to create a hierarchical site map for faster navigation. In addition, screen readers use the title as the label for the table.

If you don’t use a title (for example, to avoid repetition), make sure that the table is connected to another meaningful on-screen text that can be used as a label for assistive technologies. You can do this using the method addAriaLabelledBy.

Multiple Selection

  • We strongly recommend using the multi-selection plug-in. This ensures that all items selected using Select All or as part of a range are included – even if some items were not initially loaded in the front end. This is not the case if you use the multi-toggle option.
  • Do not limit the range selection for the multi-selection plug-in unless you have to.
    • If the dataset is small and/or completely available in the front-end, set the limit property to 0 to enable the Select All option and allow users to select any range.
    • If you have a large dataset, set a limit on the number of selected items to avoid performance issues. Also bear in mind that some actions won’t be helpful if the dataset is too big (for example, a delete operation on 2 million database entries).
  • When setting a limit, also display the corresponding message when the user selects more items at once than the limit allows (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin, property: enableNotification).

In multiple selection mode (multi toggle), do not show checkboxes in the first data column in the default delivery to avoid confusion.

Don't
Do not add checkboxes to the first column
Do not add checkboxes to the first column

Loading Data

To indicate that the table is currently loading items, use the busy state (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Columns – Best Practices

Minimize the number of columns. Avoid the need to scroll horizontally in the default delivery.

By default, the analytical table assigns the same width to each column. We recommend overwriting this default to provide optimal space for your content (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: width).

If you define the column width in pixels or rems, resizing a column affects only the width of this specific column. Reducing the size of the browser window results in a scrollbar. If the user resizes a column, and the total width of all columns exceeds the table width, a scrollbar appears. If the columns do not take up the full table width, white space appears to the right of the last column.

If you define the column width as a percentage, resizing one column affects the width of several or all columns. Reducing the size of the browser window truncates the texts. This ensures that the columns fill up all the available space. A scrollbar appears only if width of all the columns still exceeds the table width after the automatic width adjustments. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, you can set a minimum width per column. However, this this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users can still reduce the column width to below the defined minimum (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: width, minWidth).

If you set the column width to “auto”, the behavior is the same as for “percentage”. However, unlike “percentage”, “auto” distributes the columns equally.

To decide on how to set the column width (pixel/rem/em vs. percent/auto), keep the following in mind:

  • For tables with only 2 to 3 columns, use pixel-based units. This ensures that the values in the columns are not spread over the whole screen on wide screens, which improves the readability of the line items.
  • For tables with many columns, where a horizontal scrollbar is usually needed, use pixel based units. This avoids unintended side effects when resizing columns.
  • For all other tables, use whatever fits your case better.

Be cautious when mixing columns with pixel-based and percentage-based widths. While this can be helpful in some cases, it can also cause even more side effects when resizing a column. If you are using percentage-based widths for one or more columns, consider not allowing end users to resize columns at all.

Optimize the column width for its initial visible content, including the column header texts. If this is not possible (for example, if showing the full texts would result in extremely wide columns), let the texts truncate. End users can change the width of the column to read the full text, as needed.

Maintain a constant column width and avoid adjusting it automatically when the content changes.

Always keep to one line of text. Do not wrap.

Don't
In the default delivery, the initial visible content should not be truncated
In the default delivery, the initial visible content should not be truncated
Don't
Never wrap texts
Never wrap texts

Column Headers – Best Practices

For each column, provide a label in the column header. In the default delivery, do not truncate the column header texts. Only let the text truncate if showing the full text would make the column too wide. Never wrap the text.

Content Alignment

For alignment of cell content, follow the guidelines below.

Left-align: text, IDs, phone numbers, URLs, passwords, and email addresses.

Left-alignment of text
Left-alignment of text

Right-align: numbers, except IDs, to ensure comparability of numbers and amounts.

Right-alignment of numbers
Right-alignment of numbers

Right-align amounts with currencies to the cell and align them in terms of their respective decimal points.

This ensures that amounts with different currencies are shown correctly, whether these currencies have 0, 2, or 3 decimals.

For aligning to the decimal point, use the sap.ui.uinified.Currency control.

Alignment to decimal point
Alignment to decimal point

Right-align dates and times.

This ensures comparability for most formats and locales.

Right-alignment of dates
Right-alignment of dates

Left-align status information.

Left-align status information
Left-align status information

Center-align icons.

Left-align micro charts.

XS micro charts in condensed mode
XS micro charts in condensed mode

Content Formatting

Key Identifier

Use a bold label or an emphasized link as the key identifier of an item. In the default delivery, show the key identifier in the first column.

Emphasized link
Emphasized link

For strings with IDs, use one of the following:

  • Show the ID in a separate column. Use this format if users need to sort, group, or filter by both the string and the ID.
  • Show the ID in brackets after the corresponding string. In this case, sorting, filtering and grouping is available for either the string or the ID. Use this format only if users don’t need to sort, filter, and group by both values.
Text and ID in two columns – Allows sorting, filtering, and grouping for both
Text and ID in two columns – Allows sorting, filtering, and grouping for both
If displayed as a link, use only the string as the link, not the ID
If displayed as a link, use only the string as the link, not the ID
Text and ID in one column – Sorting, filtering, and grouping only by the text
Text and ID in one column – Sorting, filtering, and grouping only by the text
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link

Truncation

Avoid truncation of typical content in the default delivery (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: width). However, since the columns are resizable, do not worry too much if truncation occurs as columns can still be enlarged if necessary.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must also have the same height. If you need to decide between truncation and different row heights, choose truncation. Do not wrap.

Optimize column width for typical content, not all content
Optimize column width for typical content, not all content

Number of Links

Are there too many links? Use subtle links to avoid a wall of links. Standard links are also emphasized more if they are surrounded by subtle links.

For example, a financial table consists of several columns with summarized cells. A summarized cell shows the total sum of several database entries. Each sum should be a link to a report that shows details about which database entries produce the total sum. The line item identifier should also be a link that provides more detail about the line item itself. Use a standard or emphasized link for the item identifier, and subtle links for the summarized cells.

Emphasized links, links, subtle links, and text
Emphasized links, links, subtle links, and text

Missing Value

If there is no value for a cell, leave it blank. Do not display text as N/A.

Leave empty fields blank
Leave empty fields blank

Numbering Items

In terms of numbering items:

  • If the item number is more like an ID with regard to its description, use ID formatting as described above.
  • In all other cases, use a separate column for the item number.
Add a separate column for the item number
Add a separate column for the item number

Status

For status information, use semantic colors on the foreground elements.

For status information on text, use an object status.

Semantic colors on text
Semantic colors on text

Micro Charts

Use only the following micro charts: Bullet, comparison, stacked bar. When using micro charts, use them in size XS.

Micro charts in an analytical table
Micro charts in an analytical table

Empty Tables

Avoid empty analytical tables. If necessary, provide instructions on how to fill the analytical table with data (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, properties: noDataText, showNoData).

Examples:

  • If a table is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the table with data.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    To start, set the relevant filters.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No data found. Try adjusting the filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, a search is also offered, or only the search is offered).
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of filter settings).
Provide meaningful instructions
Provide meaningful instructions

Invalid State

To show an invalid state of the analytical table within the list report floorplan, show an overlay on the analytical table and the corresponding toolbar (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: showOverlay). The overlay prevents user interactions.

Use this within the list report floorplan if filter settings have been changed but the analytical table has not yet been updated.

Analytical table with invalid data
Analytical table with invalid data

Item States

To show that an item has been modified, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string (Modified) in an additional column with the label Editing Status.

In the default delivery, add a column directly behind the key identifier.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string Contains errors in the Editing Status column and highlight the row accordingly. This string replaces the Modified string.

A modified item with an error
A modified item with an error

To show that an item is locked, add a transparent-style button with the corresponding icon and the text Locked by [name] in the Editing Status column.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in draft state, add a transparent-style button with the text Draft in the Editing Status column.

Item in draft state
Item in draft state

Show only one state at a time.

Numbers and Units

Show the unit of measurement in one of the following ways:

The number and unit are in the same cell. Do this if sorting, filtering, or grouping by the unit of measurement are not needed.

Use a currency control to display the concatenated string.

Number and unit of measurement in one cell
Number and unit of measurement in one cell

The number and unit are in separate columns. Do this if sorting, filtering, or grouping by the unit of measurement are a common use case.

Note that this column can be hidden or moved independently of the column containing the corresponding number. Therefore, be sure to have clear labels for both columns to communicate the dependency.

Number and unit of measurement in two columns
Number and unit of measurement in two columns

If the unit of measurement is the same for all rows, show the unit of measurement in the column header. Otherwise, show the unit of measurement within the row.

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, drag and drop is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose, such as (toolbar) buttons.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

Do not use drag and drop for rearranging items in the analytical table. The analytical table is mainly used for grouping items and for calculating the totals per group and column. Moving items to another group also means that a value of the dropped item changes: because grouping is based on values in a column, the dropped item needs to take on the value of the target group for the corresponding column.

Example:
A table is grouped by availability. An item is moved from the group “Not Available” to the group “In Stock”. In this case, the moved item needs to change its availability to “In Stock” to match the target group. Because changing the value in this way doesn’t make sense, rearranging items is not permitted in analytical tables.

Don't
Do not use drag and drop for rearranging items in the analytical table
Do not use drag and drop for rearranging items in the analytical table

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar). Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

The context menu can be triggered for the table, row, or cell. However, we do not recommend using context menus for cells: because the content of a cell is a different touch target than the cell itself, opening a cell context menu via touch is quite hard, even in cozy mode.

Do not combine context menus with condensed mode: editable controls fill the entire space inside a cell. Because of this, context menus cannot be opened at all with touch or mouse interaction.

Actions

Multiple Items

To trigger actions on multiple items, use a multiselection analytical table (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: selectionMode, value: MultiToggle). Offer the corresponding actions in the table toolbar.

Do not offer action triggering on multiple items if the table is generally expected to have fewer than 10 items. In this case, try to use the responsive table instead of the analytical table.

Single Item

To trigger actions on a single item (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: selectionMode, value: Single):

  • Show the actions on the table toolbar.
  • In rare cases, show the actions within the line item. One example would be an Add to Cart button in a shopping application. Since these actions are repeated in every line and thus use a lot of screen real estate, do this only for a maximum of one or two actions. Provide a separate column per action. Use a button, unless the action trigger belongs to a link.

Single Cell

To trigger actions on a single cell, create the corresponding click event. Do not use the cell click event if the cell contains interactive controls, such as links.

To trigger navigation on line item level choose one of the following options:

  • Use a link for the attribute that identifies the row. Clicking the link triggers the navigation.
  • Add the RowActions column and show the navigation indicator (  ) at the end of the row. The navigation arrow triggers the navigation.

Special case: Multi-selection in a master-detail scenario
When a multi-selection table is used in a master-detail scenario, it is not clear which item was last opened (for example, which item is currently shown in the second column of a flexible column layout). In this case, you can display a “navigated” indicator to show which item is currently open.

Use the RowActions column only for one or both of the following actions:

  • Navigate to details page ( )
  • Delete ( )

The RowActions column does not provide a column header text. It is fixed and will not scroll away. Users also cannot personalize this column.

Navigate to details page
Navigate to details page

Single Cell

For triggering actions on a single cell, create the corresponding click event. Do not use the cell click event if the cell contains interactive controls, such as links.

Add Items

For adding items, place an Add or Create text button on the table toolbar.

  • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
  • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.

Show new items as the first item of the table, with a visual highlight at the beginning of the row.

For more details, see the guidelines for managing objects (including subarticles).

Enabling/Disabling Actions

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection:

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user how many items will be affected. Let users choose whether to apply the action anyway or cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

If the action was applied and the items are still available, keep them selected.

Message for action which applies to a part of a selection
Message for action which applies to a part of a selection

Editable Content

For editable content, only use the following controls, and only one control per cell:

Only these controls are optimized for all viewing modes of the analytical table.

If you need edit mode, change your text controls, such as label, text, link, object status, icons, and currencies, to editable controls as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before. You can do this by exchanging the controls, for example, from sap.m.Text to sap.m.Input.

For mass editing items:

  • Provide multiselection.
  • Provide an Edit button.
  • If several items are selected, clicking the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

This is similar to mass editing in the split-screen layout floorplan.

Warning
Do not offer editing for summarized cells. A summarized cell shows the total sum of several database entries. Changing the total sum does not make sense since it is unclear how this sum is divided between the different database entries.
Interactive controls – Inline
Interactive controls – Inline

View Settings

There are several ways to show Sort, Filter, and/or Group settings:

  • Column header menu: In all cases, show the corresponding settings in the column header menu.
  • View settings dialog: Simple and more flexible with regard to filter settings. No advantage for sorting. Allows the user to ungroup grouped columns.tables with a medium amount of items.
  • Table personalization dialog: Provides complex options for sorting items by several levels and allows the user to ungroup grouped columns. It also provides a query-builder-like approach for filter settings. The complexity of the options is also its downside. Use the table personalization dialog for tables with a large number of items.
  • If filtering is a main use case, use the filter bar. In this case, avoid offering additional filter settings on the table. If you do, the filter settings on the table work only on the result set provided by the filter bar.

Always be careful when synchronizing the settings in the dialog with the settings from the column header menu.

Trigger the dialogs in one of the following ways:

  • View settings dialog: Provide several buttons, one for each of these view settings. Each button opens the view settings dialog on the corresponding page.
  • Table personalization dialog: Provide a settings button, which opens the table personalization dialog containing all pages.

Use only the view settings you really need. For example, do not offer grouping if it does not support your use case.

 

Column header menu with view settings
Column header menu with view settings
Table toolbar with triggers for view settings dialog
Table toolbar with triggers for view settings dialog
Table toolbar with trigger for table personalization dialog
Table toolbar with trigger for table personalization dialog

Persist the view settings. When a user reopens the app, show the analytical table with the same sort, filter, group, and aggregation settings as last defined by this user.

Sort

To display the current sort state, an icon is shown in the column header of the last sorted column. This icon indicates the sort direction (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

For the default sort setting, sort by the column that identifies the row, which is usually the first column in default delivery. Use a meaningful sort order, such as alphabetical order for text, numeric order for numbers, or chronological order for dates.

Column, sorted ascending
Column, sorted ascending
Column, sorted descending
Column, sorted descending

The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order.

For each column, provide a meaningful sort order. For example:

  • Sort text alphabetically
  • Sort numbers by their value
  • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
    • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
    • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
    • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
    • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first

Filter

To display the current filter state, an icon is shown in the column header of the filtered column (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: filtered, filterProperty, filterValue, filterOperator, defaultFilterOperator, filterType).

Column, filtered
Column, filtered

Group

To display the current group state, group headers are shown. Show the following text in the group header (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: grouped, showIfGrouped, groupHeaderFormatter):

[Label of the grouped column]: [Grouping value]

If there is no grouping value, show the following text:
[Label of the grouped column]: (Not Available)

This is the case if you have a group of items that don’t have a value for the grouped column.

 

Set the property collapseRecursive to “false” to keep subgroups expanded even after collapsing and expanding the parent group.

Group headers, several levels
Group headers, several levels

On non-touch devices, right-clicking a group header opens the group header menu. On touch devices, the same menu is opened by using the menu icon on the right side of a group header.

The group header menu provides several options:

  • Show/Hide: Shows or hides the column in the table layout, although it is grouped.
  • Ungroup: When the user ungroups a column, the corresponding group headers disappear. If the column was hidden, it is shown again as a separate column.
  • Ungroup All: The columns are shown again.
  • Move Up: Rearranges the grouping levels hierarchy by moving the selected group above the group that is one level higher up in the hierarchy.
  • Move Down: Rearranges the grouping levels hierarchy by moving the selected group below the group that is one level lower down in the hierarchy.
  • Collapse Level: Collapses all groups on the corresponding grouping level.
  • Collapse All: All groups are collapsed.
Group header menu
Group header menu
Group header on touch devices
Group header on touch devices

In general:

  • Offer grouping on objects and attributes.
  • Do not offer grouping on measures.
  • If appropriate, offer reasonable grouping by default, but do not exaggerate. As a rule of thumb, use up to three group levels.
  • Provide more space for the first column. Grouping needs an indent per group level. Extra space in the first column prevents truncated text.

Aggregate

To display the current aggregation state, the total sum of the corresponding column is shown at the bottom of the table.

If items are grouped, an intermediate sum is shown:

  • At the bottom of each group if the group is expanded.
  • In the group header if the group is collapsed.

(sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: summed)

When aggregating amounts with different units of measurement, show an asterisk (*) in the aggregation rows.

When sorting an aggregated column, only the leaf nodes of a group are included by default. If each measure column currently displays a single unit of measurement, the order of the groups can also be affected.

For example:
Let’s assume that table items are grouped by Country/Region and aggregated by Total Net Amount. If you sort the Total Net Amount column in descending order, the largest total net amount is shown first.

Warning
Only enable sorting by totals if each column has a single unit of measurement. This prevents inconsistencies in the sorting behavior, which depends on user settings, such as filter settings or the columns currently displayed.
Developer Hint
To allow sorting by totals, the following conditions must be met:

  1. For each measure column, multiple units must not occur in the displayed data, regardless of whether or not totals are shown.
  2. The autoExpandMode of the AnalyticalBinding must be set to Sequential. Note that the default is Bundled.

In general:

  • Offer aggregation on measures, but not on objects or attributes.
  • Avoid aggregations on the first three columns for the default delivery. As soon as grouping is used together with aggregations, collapsing a group shows the aggregation on the group header. This conflicts with the group name.
  • Where appropriate, offer reasonable aggregation by default.
Aggregation and groups
Aggregation and groups

Personalization

Only offer personalization if you need more columns than a tablet screen can display at any one time, which is usually five.

Persist the column layout. When a user reopens the app, show the analytical table with the same column layout settings as last defined by this user.

Add, Remove, and Rearrange Columns

To add, remove, or rearrange columns, use one of the following:

  • The table personalization dialog: It offers some simple settings for column layout. Use this if you have only a few columns to choose from and/or you use the view settings dialog.
  • The p13n dialog: Besides various complex view settings, it also provides settings for column layout. Use this if you have a large number of columns to choose from and/or you use this dialog anyway for view settings.

In both cases, trigger the dialog via the settings button in the table toolbar.

You can also use drag and drop to rearrange columns (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnReordering). If you allow rearranging via drag and drop as well as via a dialog, keep both places in sync.

Resize Columns

Resizing columns works differently on touch and non-touch devices.

  • Non-touch devices: Drag and drop the column separator on the right side of the column. Double-clicking the column separator optimizes the width of the column for the data currently loaded into the front end, which is usually about 100 rows.
  • Touch devices: Clicking the column header reveals two buttons: one for opening the column header menu, another one for resizing the column. Drag and drop this second button to resize the column.

Freeze Columns

For freezing columns, offer the setting in the column header menu (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: enableColumnFreeze).

Selecting Freeze on a column freezes all columns from the first one to the one where Freeze is selected. On this column, the menu entry changes from Freeze to Unfreeze.

Frozen column
Frozen column

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, you can display a highlight indicator in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to show:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry-specific or process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”.

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users exactly what is wrong. Make sure that you provide this information within the table row, ideally in the same color.

For details on the use of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, aggregation: rowSettingsTemplate)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Tables in Object Pages

In the object page, we advise against using analytical, grid, and tree tables. Instead, use a responsive table and offer navigation to a list report with the table types mentioned above.

For more information on the use of tables within the object page, see the Tables section of the Object Page article.

Export to Spreadsheet

On the table toolbar, apps can provide a menu button for exporting table data to a spreadsheet. For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button
'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button

Properties

sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable

The following additional properties are available for the analytical table:

  • The property: width defines the width of the analytical table.
  • The property: rowHeight defines the height of each row in the analytical table. Since the height required is calculated automatically by the analytical table, this property is only needed rarely.
  • The property: columnHeaderHeight defines the height of the column headers. Since the height required is calculated automatically by the analytical table, this property is only needed rarely.
  • The property: columnHeaderVisible can be used to hide the column headers. Always show the column headers.
  • The property: showColumnVisibilityMenu provides an additional entry in the column header menu that allows columns to be shown or hidden. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Do not use this property.
  • The property: columnVisibilityMenuSorter is used for sorting the columns inside the column header menu if showing and hiding columns is provided in the menu. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Do not use this property.
  • The property: visibleRowCount defines the height of the analytical table. Show as many rows as fit on the screen.
  • The property: visibleRowCountMode defines whether the height of the analytical table is fixed or automatically calculated based on the space provided by the underlying container. For automatic calculation, make sure that all rows have the same height.
  • The property: minimumAutoRowCount defines the minimum number of rows that must be shown if the property: visibleRowCountMode is set to “auto”. Show at least three to five rows.
  • The property: firstVisibleRow defines the first row shown in the visible area of the analytical table. The analytical table is scrolled accordingly.
  • The property: allowColumnReordering is deprecated. Use the property: enableColumnReordering instead.
  • The property: editable does not have a visible effect. Please do not use it.
  • The property: threshold is used for optimizing lazy loading of items. In most cases, the default value is appropriate.
  • The property: enableGrouping is experimental and does not have a meaningful effect on the analytical table. Do not use it.
  • The property: sumOnTop shows additional aggregation values on the group header, even if the group is expanded. Do not use it.
  • The property: enableCustomFilter changes the filter entry in the column header menu from an edit box to Filter…. Selecting this entry throws an event that apps can react to, for example, by opening a dialog. In general, you should choose the built-in filter over your own implementation. Specifically, keep filtering via the column header menu simple, while offering more advanced options via the table personalization dialog.
  • The property: enableBusyIndicator has not yet been fully implemented. Do not use it.
  • The property: title adds a line of text on top of the analytical table. Do not use it. To add a title to the table, use a toolbar.
  • The property: footer adds a short text at the bottom of the table.
  • The property: Busy sets the analytical table to busy state. While in busy state, the whole table cannot be used and items cannot be read due to an overlay.
  • The property: Tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: alternateRowColors displays the rows with alternating background colors (“banded rows”). Do not use it.

sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn

The following additional properties are available for the analytical column:

  • The property: leadingProperty is used for data binding.
  • The property: inResult is used for data binding.
  • The property: visible defines whether a column is shown or hidden.
  • The property: name defines the name shown in the column header menu for showing and hiding columns. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Please do not use this property.
  • The property: headerSpan defines whether one column header is used for one or several columns. To prevent adverse side effects, always use one column header for only one single column. Please do not use this property.
  • The property: Tooltip does not have an effect. Please do not use it.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Grid Table

A grid table contains a set of data that is structured in rows and columns. It allows the user to scroll in both directions and can handle large numbers of items and columns.

Usage

Use the grid table if:

  • The cell level and the spatial relationship between cells are more important than the line item. Examples include spreadsheet analyses and waterfall charts. Note that a grid table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You have to work on more than 1,000 rows. In this case, the grid table is easier to handle. In contrast to the responsive table, the architecture of the grid table is optimized for handling large numbers of items. Note that a grid table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktop and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • Comparing items is a major use case. In this case, a grid table might be more appropriate than a responsive table. In the grid table, each cell contains only one data point. In contrast, the responsive table is more flexible regarding line items, including the ability to add more data points per cell and also the pop-in function. Both make comparisons more difficult. Note that a grid table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You need an analytical table, but you cannot provide an analytical binding on the technical side. In this case, a grid table will do the work. Note that the grid table provides only one level of grouping, no aggregation options, and is also not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.

Do not use the grid table if:

  • You need a table. The responsive table is the default table in SAP Fiori. Additional use cases where you might need the responsive table include:
    • The focus is on working on line items, not on cells. The responsive table is optimized for displaying complete items on all devices, such as file browsing and a list of documents you want to act on, like purchase orders and purchase requisitions.
    • Selecting one or several items is the main use case and details are needed to choose the correct item.
    • Line items are independent of each other and no operation across columns is needed.
    • You want to have only one implementation for all devices.
  • The main use case is choosing one item from a very small number of items with no additional details. A select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • The main use case is choosing one out of several items with only a few details per item. A list might be more appropriate. Pay attention to the layout of the list item to ensure that it has a pleasant appearance.
  • Data needs to be structured in a hierarchical manner. Use a tree table instead. Note that neither the tree table nor the grid table are responsive. You will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones and tablets.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use charts.
  • You just need it for layout reasons. In this case, use a layout container such as HBox or VBox.
  • You need read-only or editable field-value pairs. Use a form instead. The grid table is not optimized for form-like input navigation.

Responsiveness

A grid table is available for desktops and tablets, but not in smartphone sizes. It supports touch devices, but is not optimized for small screens.

If you use a grid table, note that you have to implement a fallback solution for small screens. This fallback solution does not need to support all use cases.

You could create a fallback by using a responsive table, but a completely different solution, such as showing charts in a read-only case, might be more appropriate.

Grid table shown on a desktop
Grid table shown on a desktop
Grid table shown on a tablet
Grid table shown on a tablet

Layout

The column header allows the user to resize and rearrange columns. It also provides access to a menu with column-specific commands.

The collection of items, or rows, occupies the main part of the grid table.

The selector cells allow the user to select one or more items.

The Select All button selects or deselects all items.

Schematic visualization of the grid table
Schematic visualization of the grid table

Components

A grid table does not consist of other elements. However, it is common to use a toolbar above the grid table.

The toolbar can contain entry points for the view settings dialog and the table personalization dialog or for the p13n dialog, as well as view switches in the form of a segmented button, and buttons for Add, Edit, and other actions.

Behavior and Interaction

A grid table is quite restricted in terms of its content.

Table Level

Scroll

A grid table allows horizontal and vertical scrolling (sap.ui.table.Table, property: navigationMode, value: Scrollbar).

You can add any number of line items to the grid table, which uses “lazy loading”.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.Table, property: rowHeight).

The grid table is optimized to allow faster scrolling within the first 1000 items.

Scroll bar
Scroll bar

Select

Selection Mode

Selection for a grid table depends on the chosen selection mode. The following options are available:

No selection: Items cannot be selected. (property: selectionMode = None)

A non-selection grid table
A non-selection grid table

Single selection: One item in the grid table can be selected. A row selector column is shown. (property: selectionMode = Single)

A single-selection grid table
A single-selection grid table

Multiple selection: One or more items can be selected. The grid table provides a column with checkboxes on the left-hand side. Clicking a checkbox toggles the state of the corresponding row from deselected to selected and back. The Shift key can be used to select a range.

For multiple selection, you can choose between two variants.

  • Multi-toggle mode (property: selectionMode = MultiToggle)
  • Multi-selection plug-in (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin)

These variants behave differently when the user selects more items than are currently loaded in the front end.

Multi-toggle

In multi-toggle mode, you can offer a Select All checkbox to the left of the column header (property: enableSelectAll). Selecting this checkbox selects or deselects all items that are currently loaded in the front end. All other items are not selected/deselected. If the application data is stored in the back end, scrolling down further can reveal additional unselected items. The same can happen with range selections if not all items in the selected range have been loaded to the front end.

Multi-selection plug-in

If you use this plug-in instead of the multi-toggle selection mode, the behavior for range selection and Select All changes:

  • By default, a dedicated Deselect All button replaces the Select All checkbox. There is no default UI element for selecting all items.
  • You can set a limit for the number of items that can be selected (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin, property: limit). This limit has the following effect:
    • The range that can be selected using the Shift key is limited to the specified number of items (default = 200). The table automatically scrolls back to the last selected item and you can display a corresponding message (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin, property: enableNotification). Users can select more items by selecting additional ranges (the specified limit applies each time).
    • If the selection limit is set to 0, a Select All checkbox is shown. There is also no limit on the number of items that can be selected in a range. All selected items are loaded, which can lead to performance issues for large data sets.
  • If selected items are not already available in the front end, they are loaded automatically by the plug-in and set as selected.
Information
When setting a limit for the number of items that can be selected, keep the following boundaries in mind:

  • The performance of your service: How many items can be loaded at once in a reasonable time? Does this also apply if an end-user shows all available columns?
  • The “minimum limit”: Internally, the grid table loads blocks of items as the user scrolls down. Because this block size (sap.ui.table.Table, property: threshold) is usually also based on the performance of the service, it should be safe to assume that the minimum selection limit is twice this size. In this case, loading the data would take as long as scrolling down and loading exactly one more block. Nevertheless, we recommend using larger limits if your service allows.

A multiselection grid table
A multiselection grid table
Using the multi-selection plug-in with a limit
Using the multi-selection plug-in with a limit

Selection Behavior

An item can be selected in different ways, depending on the configuration of the grid table (sap.ui.table.Table, property: selectionBehavior):

  • Row: An item is selected by clicking the checkbox or the row. Use this option for multi-selection grid tables if clicking a row or a cell is not used for anything else.
  • RowSelector: An item is selected only by clicking the checkbox in the selector cell. Use this option if clicking the row (or a cell inside the row) is used for something else, such as navigation.
  • RowOnly: An item is selected only by clicking the row, and not using checkboxes in the selector cells. Use this for single-selection grid tables if clicking a row or a cell is not used for another purpose, such as navigation.

Compact, Cozy, and Condensed

Like all SAP Fiori controls, the grid table is shown in compact mode on a desktop and in cozy mode on tablets.

For a desktop, you can also display even more rows on the same screen height by adding the condensed mode in addition to the compact mode. This renders less white space for each item.

Note that the condensed content density has always to be set in addition to compact. Do not use condensed on its own. Do not mix condensed with cozy. Doing so could lead to unpredictable and / or unwanted results, e.g. cozy sized controls in condensed sized containers, missing padings, etc.

Note that neither compact mode nor condensed mode can be interacted with via touch. Even on a desktop with a touch screen, users will have difficulty selecting rows or using controls inside the cells when using their fingers.

Furthermore, condensed mode is not available for Internet Explorer 9. If condensed mode is to be used, please provide a fallback.

For more information on cozy and compact modes, see content density.

Column Header

The column header provides the label for the corresponding column and access to the column header menu.

Columns are resized as follows:

  • Mouse interaction: The user drags the separator line between two columns (sap.ui.table.Column, property: Resizable). Double-clicking the line optimizes the column according to the length of the currently visible data and the label of the column header (sap.ui.table.Column, property: Autoresizable).
  • Touch interaction: The user taps the column header to reveal two buttons – one to show the column header menu, and one for resizing. The user drags the latter to resize the column.

After resizing a column, the adaptation of the column widths depends on how the column width is set:

  • If column widths are set in pixel-based units (px, em, rem), the corresponding column is adapted and the columns that follow are moved accordingly. The width of all other columns is not affected.
    If all the columns together take up less width than the table control, an empty space is added. In case all columns together take up more width than the table control, a scrollbar appears. (sap.ui.table.Column, property: width)
  • If all column widths are set in percentage or “auto”, resizing one column might also lead to the automatic resizing of some or all other columns. The position of the resized column might also be affected. This is done to ensure that the whole table width is used and no white space is added. A scrollbar appears only if all or most of the columns shrink significantly. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, a minimum width can be set per column. Please be aware that this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users are still able to reduce the column width below the provided minimum. (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: width, minWidth)

Columns can be rearranged by dragging the column header to another position (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnReordering).

Column header
Column header
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Less columns than space available
Less columns than space available

Column Header Menu

For each column, a menu can contain the following menu items (sap.ui.table.ColumnMenu, property: visible):

  • Sort Ascending/Descending (sap.ui.table.Column, property: showSortMenuEntries)
  • Free text filter (sap.ui.table.Column, property: showFilterMenuEntries)
  • Group (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableGrouping)
  • Freeze from the first to the last specified column (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnFreeze)

For each column, the menu can be replaced by an app-specific menu.

Column header menu
Column header menu

Sort

The column header menu can provide two sort options (sap.ui.table. Column, properties: sortProperty, showSortMenuEntry):

  • Sort Ascending
  • Sort Descending

The user selects one of these options to sort the corresponding column accordingly (sap.ui.table. Column, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

Sort settings in column header menu
Sort settings in column header menu

Filter

The column header menu can provide a search field for entering free text (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: filterProperty, showFilterMenuEntries).

If the user enters a term in the input field and triggers the search by pressing Enter when the focus is on the filter input field, the grid table is filtered by the corresponding column and value (sap.ui.table.Table, properties: filtered, filterProperty, filterValue, filterOperator, sap.ui.table.Column, property: filterType).

Note that the filter may return zero results, in which case, the table might be empty.

General recommendations for filtering:

  • If filtering is a main use case, choose the filter bar or any other filtering UI over the built-in free text filter.
  • Only use the free text filter if filtering is a secondary use case and if the filter bar is too heavy.
Free text filter in column header menu
Free text filter in column header menu

Group

The column header menu can provide the option to group by this column (sap.ui.table.Column, property: enableGrouping).

One group collects all items with the same value within the corresponding column.

Group setting in column header menu
Group setting in column header menu

If line items are grouped in a column, every group is provided with a collapsible or expandable group header. The header text consists of the name of the value and the number of items in the specific group. Only one grouping level is possible.

Group header
Group header

Once line items have been grouped, the corresponding column is hidden. There is no built-in possibility to ungroup the grid table again. Therefore, provide a view settings dialog or table presonalization dialog to offer an additional way to group by a column and a way to ungroup the complete table.

An exception to this is when the table is grouped from the start and should not be ungrouped at all.

Group headers shown, the corresponding column hidden: no duplicates, but a confusing change
Group headers shown, the corresponding column hidden: no duplicates, but a confusing change
Warning
Note that grouping the grid table is experimental and currently works only on items loaded to the front end. Thus, scrolling down the table leads to data not being grouped as expected.

Only use this feature if you have just a few line items, all of which are loaded to the front end. If this is the case, consider using a responsive table first instead of a grid table.

Freeze Columns

The column header menu can provide the option to freeze columns (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnFreeze). Selecting Freeze freezes all columns up to the one in which the operation was triggered (sap.ui.table. Table, property: fixedColumnCount).

When Freeze is triggered, the menu item changes to Unfreeze for the corresponding column.

Freeze setting in column header menu
Freeze setting in column header menu

Line Item Level

A line item contains a set of cells and provides options for selecting the item.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.Table, property: rowHeight).

Line item
Line item

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a table or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.ui.table.Table, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a table. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

When opened, the context menu gets the row and column context, except for special columns (such as the selection column) or special rows (like group headers). Context menus can be implemented for a specific table, row, or cell (not recommended for editable cells).

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a table is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Grid table with a context menu
Grid table with a context menu

Cell Level

A cell provides one data point.

It can contain one of the following controls to display this data point:

While it is technically possible to also use other controls, doing so could lead to issues in regards to alignment, condensed mode, screen reader support, and keyboard support.

If you use text, use only single-line text to keep the same row height. Truncate if necessary as this prevents adverse side effects when scrolling vertically (sap.m.Text, property: wrapping, value: false). Do not wrap.

Cell
Cell

Guidelines

Data Density vs. Complexity

The grid table can be used to display large amounts of data. Unfortunately, the grid table has a high data density and therefore conveys an immediate feeling of complexity.

Only show tables with a lot of data as a last resort. Try the following instead:

  • Break down the data into manageable chunks and allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Try to avoid horizontal scrolling in the default delivery.

Try to minimize the number of columns, especially if there is a large number of rows.

Table Title

Implement the table title by using a title control in a toolbar.

Use a table title only if the title of the table is not indicated in the surrounding area.

Do not use a table title if it simply repeats text that is already above the table. For example:

  • A pricing conditions table is the only control on a tab labeled Pricing Conditions.
  • A section or subsection on an object page contains only one table.

Use a table title if you need the item count, table toolbar, or variant management. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a table title, such as Items.
Exception: If the surrounding area contains the table title, and both the item count and toolbar can be added to the surrounding area, no additional table title is needed.
Example: An object page (sub-)section contains only one table. In this case, add the item count and the table toolbar to the (sub-)section header.

If you use a table title, show either a title for the table, with or without variant management, or an item count in the following format:

Items (2,534).

The item count in the table title includes all the visible items that a user can reach by scrolling or expanding groups. Group headers are not included.

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items.

Developer Hint
Assistive technologies (such as screen readers) use the title to create a hierarchical site map for faster navigation. In addition, screen readers use the title as the label for the table.

If you don’t use a title (for example, to avoid repetition), make sure that the table is connected to another meaningful on-screen text that can be used as a label for assistive technologies. You can do this using the method addAriaLabelledBy.

Multiple Selection

  • We strongly recommend using the multi-selection plug-in. This ensures that all items selected using Select All or as part of a range are included – even if some items were not initially loaded in the front end. This is not the case if you use the multi-toggle option.
  • Do not limit the range selection for the multi-selection plug-in unless you have to.
    • If the dataset is small and/or completely available in the front-end, set the limit property to 0 to enable the Select All option and allow users to select any range.
    • If you have a large dataset, set a limit on the number of selected items to avoid performance issues. Also bear in mind that some actions won’t be helpful if the dataset is too big (for example, a delete operation on 2 million database entries).
  • If you set a limit, also display the corresponding message when the user selects more items at once than the limit allows (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin, property: enableNotification).
Information
When setting a limit for the number of items that can be selected, keep the following boundaries in mind:

  • The performance of your service: How many items can be loaded at once in a reasonable time? Does this also apply if an end-user shows all available columns?
  • The “minimum limit”: Internally, the grid table loads blocks of items as the user scrolls down. Because this block size is usually also based on the performance of the service, it should be safe to assume that the minimum selection limit is twice this size. In this case, loading the data would take as long as scrolling down and loading exactly one more block. Nevertheless, we recommend using larger limits if your service allows.

  • In multiple selection mode (multi toggle), do not show checkboxes in the first data column in the default delivery to avoid confusion.
Don't
Do not add checkboxes to the first data column in the default delivery
Do not add checkboxes to the first data column in the default delivery

Loading Data

To indicate that the table is currently loading items, use the busy state. (sap.ui.table.Table, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Grid table in busy state while loading data
Grid table in busy state while loading data

Columns – Best Practices

Minimize the number of columns. Avoid the need to scroll horizontally in the default delivery.

The grid table assigns the same width to each column by default. It is recommended that you overwrite this default to provide optimal space for your content (sap.ui.table.Column, property: width).

If you define the column width in pixels or rems, resizing a column affects only the width of this specific column. Reducing the browser window size results in a scrollbar. After resizing a column, a scroll bar appears if the width of the table is not enough to show all columns. If the columns use less space than available, white space appears on the right side of the last column.

If you define the column width as a percentage, resizing one column affects the width of several or all columns. Text becomes truncated when the browser window size is reduced. This is done to make sure that all columns together fill the space of the table. A scrollbar appears only in case the automatic change of the column widths is not enough for showing all columns. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, a minimum width can be set per column. Please be aware that this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users are still able to reduce the column width below the provided minimum.

If you define the column width as “auto”, the behavior is the same as for “percentage”. In contrast to percentage, “auto” distributes the columns equally.

To decide on how to set the column width (pixel / rem / em vs. percent / auto), keep the following in mind:

  • For tables with only 2 to 3 columns, use pixel-based units. This ensures that on wide screens the values in the columns are not spread over the whole screen, which improves the readability of line items.
  • For tables with many columns, where a horizontal scrollbar is usually needed, use pixel-based units. This avoids unintended side effects when resizing columns.
  • For all other tables, use whatever fits your case better.

Be cautious with mixing columns with pixel-based and percentage-based widths. While this can be helpful in some cases, it could also cause even more unexpected side effects when resizing a column. When using percentage-based widths for one or more columns, think of the possibility to not allow end users to resize columns at all.

Optimize the column width for its initial visible content, including the column header texts. If this is not possible (for example, if showing the full texts would result in extremely wide columns), let the texts truncate. End users can change the width of the column to read the full text, as needed.

Maintain a constant column width and avoid adjusting it automatically when the content changes.

Always keep to one line of text. Do not wrap.

Don't
In the default delivery, the initial visible content should not be truncated
In the default delivery, the initial visible content should not be truncated
Don't
Never wrap texts
Never wrap texts

Column Headers – Best Practices

For each column, provide a label in the column header. In the default delivery, do not truncate the column header texts. Only let the text truncate if showing the full text would make the column too wide. Never wrap the text.

Content Alignment

For alignment of cell content, follow the guidelines below.

Left-align the following: text, IDs, phone numbers, URLs, passwords, and email addresses.

Left-alignment of text
Left-alignment of text

Right-align numbers (except IDs).

This ensures comparability of numbers and amounts.

Right-alignment of numbers
Right-alignment of numbers

Right-align amounts with currencies to the cell and align them in terms of their respective decimal points.

This ensures that amounts with different currencies are shown correctly, whether these currencies have 0, 2, or 3 decimals.

For aligning to the decimal point, use the sap.ui.uinified.Currency control.

Alignment to decimal point
Alignment to decimal point

Right-align dates and times.

This ensures comparability for most formats and locales.

Right-alignment of dates
Right-alignment of dates

Left-align status information.

Left-align status information
Left-align status information

Center-align icons.

Left-align micro charts.

XS micro charts in condensed mode
XS micro charts in condensed mode

Content Formatting

Locale Settings

Be locale-aware: show dates, times, numbers, and so on in the format corresponding to the user’s locale settings.

Key Identifier

Use a bold label or an emphasized link as the key identifier of an item. In the default delivery, show the key identifier in the first column.

Emphasized link
Emphasized link

For strings with IDs, use one of the following options:

  • Show the ID in a separate column. Use this format if users need to sort, group, or filter by both the string and the ID.
  • Show the ID in brackets after the corresponding string. In this case, sorting, filtering and grouping is available for either the string or the ID. Use this format only if users don’t need to sort, filter, and group by both values.
Text and ID in two columns – Allows sorting, filtering, and grouping on both
Text and ID in two columns – Allows sorting, filtering, and grouping on both
If displayed as a link, use only the text as the link, not the ID
If displayed as a link, use only the text as the link, not the ID
Text and ID in one column – Sorting, filtering, and grouping only on the text
Text and ID in one column – Sorting, filtering, and grouping only on the text
Text and ID in one column - If displaying a link, show the whole string as the link (text and ID)
Text and ID in one column - If displaying a link, show the whole string as the link (text and ID)

Truncation

Avoid truncation of typical content in the default delivery (sap.ui.table.Column, property: width). However, since the columns are resizable, do not worry too much if truncation occurs as columns can still be enlarged if necessary.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must also have the same height. If you need to decide between truncation and different row heights, choose truncation. Do not wrap.

Optimize column width for typical content, not all content
Optimize column width for typical content, not all content

Number of Links

Are there too many links? Use subtle links to avoid a wall of links. Standard links are also emphasized more if they are surrounded by subtle links.

Emphasized links, links, subtle links, and text
Emphasized links, links, subtle links, and text

Missing Value

If there is no value for a cell, leave it blank. Do not display text as N/A.

Leave empty fields blank
Leave empty fields blank

Numbering Items

In terms of numbering items:

  • If the item number is more like an ID with regard to its description, use ID formatting as described above.
  • In all other cases, use a separate column for the item number.
Add a separate column for the item number
Add a separate column for the item number

Status

For status information, use semantic colors on the foreground elements.

For status information on text, use an object status.

Semantic colors on text
Semantic colors on text

Micro Charts

Use only the following micro charts: Bulletcomparisonstacked bar. When using micro charts, use them in size XS.

Micro charts in a grid table
Micro charts in a grid table

Empty Tables

Avoid empty grid tables. If necessary, provide instructions on how to fill the grid table with data (sap.ui.table.Table, properties: noDataText, showNoData).

Examples:

  • If a table is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the table with data.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    To start, set the relevant filters.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No data found. Try adjusting the filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, a search is also offered, or only the search is offered).
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of filter settings).
Provide meaningful instructions
Provide meaningful instructions

Invalid State

To show an invalid state of the grid table within the list report floorplan, show an overlay on the grid table and the corresponding toolbar (sap.ui.table.Table, property: showOverlay). The overlay prevents user interactions.

Use this within the list report floorplan if filter settings have been changed but the grid table is has not yet been updated.

Grid table with invalid data
Grid table with invalid data

Item States

To show that an item has been modified, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string Modified in an additional column with the label Editing Status.

In the default delivery, add a column directly behind the key identifier.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string Contains errors in the Editing Status column and highlight the row accordingly. This string replaces the Modified string.

A modified item with an error
A modified item with an error

To show that an item is locked, add a transparent-style button with the corresponding icon and the text Locked by [name] in the Editing Status column.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in draft state, add a transparent-style button with the text Draft in the Editing Status column.

Item in draft state
Item in draft state

Show only one state at a time.

Numbers and Units

Show the unit of measurement in one of the following ways:

Number and Unit in Same Cell

The number and the unit are in the same cell. Do this if sorting, filtering, or grouping by the unit of measurement are not needed.

Use a currency control to display the concatenated string.

Number and unit of measurement in one cell
Number and unit of measurement in one cell

Number and Unit in Separate Columns

The number and unit are in separate columns. Do this if sorting, filtering, or grouping by the unit of measurement are a common use case.

Note that this column can be hidden or moved independently of the column containing the corresponding number. Therefore, be sure to have clear labels for both columns to communicate the dependency.

Number and unit of measurement in two columns
Number and unit of measurement in two columns

Show the unit of measurment on the column header, if the unit of measurement is the same for all rows. If not, show the unit of measurement within the row.

Drag and Drop

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within the table, use drop targets that are between items (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between). This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Drop targets in between items
Drop targets in between items

Do not combine rearranging items and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure that there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items with sorting
Do not combine rearranging items with sorting

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, it is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

When combining rearranging items with grouping, be aware that moving items to another group also means that a value of the dropped item changes: because grouping is based on values in a column, the dropped item needs to take on the value of the target group for the corresponding column. If this is not wanted, do not allow users to rearrange items in grouped tables.

Example:
A table is grouped by availability. An item is moved from the group “Not Available” to the group “In Stock”. In this case, the moved item needs to change its availability to “In Stock” to match the target group. If changing the value doesn’t make sense make sense, only allow users to rearrange the items within the same group, or don’t allow rearranging at all.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing.
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing.

Context Menu

Use the context menu only as a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar). Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

The context menu can be triggered for the table, row, or cell. However, we do not recommend using context menus for cells: because the content of a cell is a different touch target than the cell itself, opening a cell context menu via touch is quite hard, even in cozy mode.

Do not combine context menus with condensed mode: editable controls fill the entire space inside a cell. Because of this, context menus cannot be opened at all with touch or mouse interaction.

Actions

Multiple Items

To trigger actions on multiple items, use a mutliselection grid table (sap.ui.table.Table, property: selectionMode, value: MultiToggle). Offer the corresponding actions in the table toolbar.

Do not offer action triggering on multiple items if the table is generally expected to have fewer than 10 items. In this case, try to use the responsive table instead of the grid table.

Single Item

To trigger actions on a single item (sap.ui.table. Table, property: selectionMode, value: Single):

  • Show the actions on the table toolbar.
  • In rare cases, show the actions within the line item. One example would be an Add to Cart button in a shopping application. Since these actions are repeated in every line and thus use a lot of screen real estate, do this only for a maximum of one or two actions. Provide a separate column per action. Use a button, unless the action trigger belongs to a link.

To trigger navigation on line item level, choose one of the following options:

  • Use a link for the attribute that identifies the row. Clicking the link triggers the navigation.
  • Add the RowActions column and show the navigation indicator (  ) at the end of the row. The navigation arrow triggers the navigation.

Special case: Multi-selection in a master-detail scenario
When a multi-selection table is used in a master-detail scenario, it is not clear which item was last opened (for example, which item is currently shown in the second column of a flexible column layout). In this case, you can display a “navigated” indicator to show which item is currently open.

Use the RowActions column only for one or both of the following actions:

  • Navigate to details page ( )
  • Delete ( )

The RowActions column does not provide a column header text. It is fixed and will not scroll away. Users also cannot personalize this column.

Navigate to details page
Navigate to details page

Single Cell

To trigger actions on a single cell, create the corresponding click event. Do not use the cell click event if the cell contains interactive controls, such as links.

Add Items

For adding items, place an Add or Create text button on the table toolbar.

  • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
  • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.

Show new items as the first item of the table, with a visual highlight at the beginning of the row.

For more details, see the guidelines for managing objects (including subarticles).

Enabling/Disabling Actions

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection:

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user how many items will be affected. Let the user choose whether to apply the action anyway or cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

If the action was applied, and if the items are still available, keep them selected.

Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection
Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection

Editable Content

For editable content, only use the following controls, and only one control per cell:

Only these controls are optimized for all viewing modes of the grid table.

If you need edit mode, change your text controls, such as label, text, link, object status, icons, and currencies, to editable controls as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before. You can do this by exchanging the controls, for example, from sap.m.Text to sap.m.Input.

For mass editing items:

  • Provide multiselection.
  • Provide an Edit button.
  • If several items are selected, clicking the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

For more information, see Mass Editing.

Interactive controls – In line
Interactive controls – In line

View Settings

There are several ways to show Sort, Filter, and/or Group settings:

  • Column header menu: In all cases, show the corresponding settings in the column header menu.
  • View settings dialog: Simple and more flexible with regard to filter settings. No advantage for sorting. Allows the user to ungroup grouped columns.tables with a medium amount of items.
  • Table personalization dialog: Provides complex options for sorting items by several levels and allows the user to ungroup grouped columns. It also provides a query-builder-like approach for filter settings. The complexity of the options is also its downside. Use the table personalization dialog for tables with a large number of items.
  • If filtering is a main use case, use the filter bar. In this case, avoid offering additional filter settings on the table. If you do, the filter settings on the grid table work only on the result set provided by the filter bar.

Always be careful when synchronizing the settings in the dialog with the settings from the column header menu.

Trigger the dialogs in one of the following ways:

  • View settings dialog: Provide several buttons, one for each of these view settings. Each button opens the view settings dialog on the corresponding page.
  • Table personalization dialog: Provide a settings button, which opens the table personalization dialog containing all pages.

Use only the view settings you really need. For example, do not offer grouping if it does not support your use case.

Column header menu with view settings
Column header menu with view settings
Table toolbar with triggers for view settings dialog
Table toolbar with triggers for view settings dialog
Table toolbar with trigger for table personalization dialog
Table toolbar with trigger for table personalization dialog

Be persistent. When reopening the app, show the analytical table in the same view settings (sort/ filter/ group/ aggregation settings) as last defined by this user.

Sort

To display the current sort state, an icon is shown in the column header of the most recently sorted column. This icon indicates the sort direction (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

For the default sort settings, sort by the column that identifies the row, which is usually the first column in default delivery.

Column, sorted ascending
Column, sorted ascending
Column, sorted descending
Column, sorted descending

The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order. For each column, provide a meaningful sort order. For example:

  • Sort text alphabetically
  • Sort numbers by their value
  • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
    • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
    • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
    • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
    • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first

Filter

To display the current filter state, an icon is shown in the column header of the filtered column (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: filtered, filterProperty, filterValue, filterOperator, defaultFilterOperator, filterType).

Column, filtered
Column, filtered

Group

To display the current group state, group headers are shown. Show the following text in the group header:

[Grouping value] – [Item count for the group]

Group headers
Group headers

In general, offer reasonable grouping by default if appropriate. Enable the user to ungroup via the view settings dialog or via the table personalization dialog.

Personalization

Only offer personalization if you need more columns than those that fit on a tablet screen, which is usually five, to fulfill 80% of your main use cases.

Persist the column layout. When a user reopens the app, show the grid table with the same column layout settings as last defined by this user.

Add, Remove, and Rearrange Columns

To add, remove, or rearrange columns, use one of the following:

  • The table personalization dialog: It offers some simple settings for column layout. Use this if you have only a few columns to choose from and/or you use the view settings dialog.
  • The p13n dialog: Besides various complex view settings, it also provides settings for column layout. Use this if you have a large number of columns to choose from and/or you use this dialog anyway for view settings.

In both cases, trigger the dialog via the settings button in the table toolbar.

You can also use drag and drop to rearrange columns (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnReordering). If you allow rearranging via drag and drop as well as via a dialog, keep both places in sync.

Resize Columns

Resizing columns works differently on touch and non-touch devices.

  • Non-touch devices: Drag and drop the column separator on the right side of the column. Double-clicking the column separator optimizes the width of the column to the data currently loaded into the front end, which is usually about 100 rows.
  • Touch devices: Clicking the column header reveals two buttons: one for opening the column header menu, another one for resizing the column. Drag and drop this second button to resize the column.

Freeze Columns

To freeze columns, offer the setting in the column header menu (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnFreeze). Selecing Freeze on a column freezes all columns from the first one to the one where Freeze is selected. On this column, the menu entry changes from Freeze to Unfreeze.

Frozen column
Frozen column

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, a highlight indicator can be shown in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to indicate:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry-specific or process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”.

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users exactly what is wrong. Make sure that you provide this information within the table row, ideally in the same color.

For details on the use of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.ui.table.Table, aggregation: rowSettingsTemplate)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Tables in Object Pages

In the object page, we advise against using the analytical, grid, and tree tables. Instead, use a responsive table and offer navigation to a list report with the table types mentioned above.

For more information on the use of tables within the object page, see the Tables section of the Object Page article.

Export to Spreadsheet

On the table toolbar, apps can provide a menu button for exporting table data to a spreadsheet. For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button
'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button

Paste

The browser paste function can be used to paste data from the clipboard to the table (CTRL+V or browser context menu).

  • If the focus is on row level, the app has to take the data from the clipboard and add it to the corresponding controls within the table.
  • If the focus is on an editable control within the table, the control gets the data automatically.

Pasting via the context menu does not work if a custom context menu is used.

Properties

sap.ui.table.Table

The following additional properties are available for the grid table:

  • The property: width defines the width of the grid table.
  • The property: rowHeight defines the height of each row in the grid table. Since the height required is calculated automatically by the grid table, this property is only needed rarely.
  • The property: columnHeaderHeight defines the height of the column headers. Since the height required is calculated automatically by the grid table, this property is only needed rarely.
  • The property: columnHeaderVisible can be used to hide the column headers. Always show the column headers.
  • The property: showColumnVisibilityMenu provides an additional entry in the column header menu that allows columns to be shown or hidden. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Do not use this property.
  • The property: visibleRowCount defines the height of the grid table. Show as many rows as fit on the screen.
  • The property: visibleRowCountMode defines whether the height of the grid table is fixed or automatically calculated based on the space provided by the underlying container. For automatic calculation, make sure that all rows have the same height.
  • The property: minAutoRowCount defines the minimum number of rows that must be shown if the property: visibleRowCountMode is set to “auto”. Show at least three to five rows.
  • The property: firstVisibleRow defines the first row shown in the visible area of the grid table. The grid table is scrolled accordingly.
  • The property: allowColumnReordering is deprecated. Do not use it. Use the property: enableColumnReordering instead.
  • The property: editable does not have a visible effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: enableGrouping turns the experimental grouping on or off. Handle with care.
  • The property: enableCustomFilter changes the filter entry in the column header menu from an edit box to Filter…. Selecting this entry throws an event to which apps can react, for example, by opening a dialog. In general, you should choose the built-in filter over your own implementation. Specifically, keep filtering via the column header menu simple, while offering more advanced options via the table personalization dialog.
  • The property: enableBusyIndicator has not yet been fully implemented. Do not use it.
  • The property: title adds a line of text on top of the grid table. Do not use this. To add a title to the table, use a toolbar.
  • The property: footer adds a short text at the bottom of the table.
  • The property: Busy sets the grid table to busy state. While in busy state, the whole table cannot be used and items cannot be read due to an overlay.
  • The property: Tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: alternateRowColors displays the rows with alternating background colors (“banded rows”). Do not use it.

sap.ui.table.Column

The following additional properties are available for the column:

  • The property: visible defines whether a column is shown or hidden.
  • The property: name defines the name shown in the column header menu for showing and hiding columns. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Do not use this property.
  • The property: headerSpan defines whether one column header is used for one or several columns. To prevent adverse side effects, always use one column header for only one single column. Do not use this property.
  • The property: Tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Avatar Group

The avatar group displays a number of avatars, which act as a digital representation of a user. This control is useful for visualizing a team, project team members, or a group of employees, for example.

Avatar group - Group type
Avatar group - Group type
Avatar group - Individual type
Avatar group - Individual type

When to Use

Use the avatar group if:

  • You want to display a group of at least 2 people.
  • You want to display several people who have something in common (for example, people who are in the same team, project, or company).

Do not use the avatar group if:

  • You want to display a gallery for simple images. Use the carousel instead.
  • You want to display a single avatar.
  • You want to show visual content other than avatars.

Types

There are two types of avatar groups: group and individual.

Guidelines
For both types, always provide a distinct description, such as a label.

Group Type – Focus on the Sum of People

The group type displays overlapping avatars. Use this type if it’s important to display the sum of people at first sight, rather than the individuals. Examples for the group type include overviews in cards and organization charts, as well as cases where you need to display a large number of people (100+).

This is the default type.

Variants for the group type (user's image, initials, placeholders)
Variants for the group type (user's image, initials, placeholders)

Individual Type – Focus on Each Person

The avatars are displayed next to each other and don’t overlap. Use this type if each person is as important as the group as a whole, and the user’s main focus is to get more information about some individuals in the group. The user can find out more about a person by interacting with the avatar to access secondary information, such as a business card.

This type is useful for a smaller group of avatars, such as a project team or teams in a line organization.

Variants for the individual type (user's image, initials, placeholders)
Variants for the individual type (user's image, initials, placeholders)

Components

Avatars

The avatar group consists of at least two avatars and can display as many avatars as you need.

Order

You can set the order of the avatars in the group freely. For example, the order can be alphabetical, history-based, or random.

Guidelines
Once you’ve decided on the order that best fits your use case, use it consistently within your app.

Content

The avatar group reuses the avatar control and its logic: if a person’s image is available, the avatar displays the image. If no image is available, it displays the person’s initials on a colored background. If there are more than 3 initials or the language system doesn’t support initials, the avatar displays a gender-neutral person icon. You can also adapt this placeholder icon to meet your own requirements.

Size

The avatar group supports the different sizes of the avatar control.

Guidelines
Use size S as a default. If the avatar group is the main element in your app, consider using a bigger size such as M or L to better support the user.
Avatar groups
Avatar groups

Overflow Button

If an avatar group has too many members to display, an overflow button is displayed at the end of the group.

Overflow button with 99
Overflow button with 99 "overflowed" avatars

Color Options

The overflow button has different color options:

  • Neutral default color
  • Random color – The color of the overflow button is a random color from the accent color palette.
  • Specific accent color – The color of the overflow button is selected from the accent color palette.

All the colors mentioned are themeable.

Overflow button in the neutral and all available accent colors
Overflow button in the neutral and all available accent colors

Overflow (Popover) Content

When users interact with the overflow shape, they expect information about the “overflowed” avatars. By default, an overview of all “overflowed” avatars is displayed directly in a popover. Adapt the content in the popover to your individual app needs.

Guidelines

  • If the group contains less than 100 avatars, ensure that all overflowed avatars are visible in the popover. This is the minimum visualization for overflowed avatars.
  • Recommended: Provide primary or secondary information in the overflow to offer additional value for the user.
  • If you have more than 100 “overflowed” avatars, we recommend navigating to another page that displays all avatars properly. For example, you can display them in a grid list together with primary or even secondary information. Ensure that the avatars in the list display in the same order as in the avatar group control on the page before.

Minimum version: overflow popover with simple avatars
Minimum version: overflow popover with simple avatars
Recommended version: overflow popover with context-specific information
Recommended version: overflow popover with context-specific information

Behavior and Interaction

The group and individual types have different behavior and interactions.

Group Type

The group type is one big active area. In other words, the entire control is basically the active area. When the user interacts with the avatar group, an overview of ALL visible AND “overflowed” avatars appears. You can display the full avatar group in an overflow popover, or on a details page.

Active area for the group type (schematic visualization)
Active area for the group type (schematic visualization)
Group type with overflow popover using the grid list control
Group type with overflow popover using the grid list control

Individual Type

The individual avatars and the overflow button have their own active areas.

Active areas for the individual type (schematic visualization)
Active areas for the individual type (schematic visualization)

Interact with Avatar

When the user activates the avatar, a popover opens. The user expects to find more details about the person behind the avatar.

Possible content in popover (popover content is use case dependent)
Possible content in popover (popover content is use case dependent)

Interact with Avatar in Overflow Popover

When an avatar is in the overflow popover, the user should have the access to the same detailed information as for avatars displayed in the visible group outside the overflow. Choosing the avatar either triggers navigation within the popover or navigation to another page (for example, with a person’s profile).

Guidelines
To show the details for an avatar in the overflow popover, use the same method as you are using for avatars in the visible group (outside of the overflow popover).
Navigation within popover to avatar's details
Navigation within popover to avatar's details

Open Full List

You can add an optional Open Full List link to the overflow popover. The link should lead to a page that displays the full set people of the group. An example might be a page with a grid list and simple filtering options.

 Popover with 'overflowed' avatars and 'Open Full List' link
Popover with 'overflowed' avatars and 'Open Full List' link

Responsiveness

The avatar group is responsive. If there is not sufficient space to display all the avatars in a group, the overflow button appears and one or more avatars move into the overflow popover. The circular overflow button indicates the exact number of avatars that can’t be displayed on the screen. The size of the overflow button adapts to fit the number of items in the overflow.

Avatar groups with a different number of avatars inside
Avatar groups with a different number of avatars inside

Top Tips

Carefully select the primary and secondary information you want to display for the avatars. Base the content on your user research findings.

Related Topics

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Icon Tab Bar

The icon tab bar comprises a series of tabs that each link to a different content area or view. You can use it for navigation within an object, or as a filter.

There are two key use cases:

  • You want to let users navigate between different object facets in the object details area.
  • You want to let users filter lists, and give them the option of calling up the entire list, or only items with a specific attribute.

In both cases, the user switches between tab pages by clicking or tapping the respective tab.

Usage

Use the icon tab bar if:

  • Your business objects need to show multiple facets at the same time.
  • You want to allow the user to browse through these facets.
  • You need a prominent or very visual filter on top of a list.
  • You have clear-cut process steps that need to be visualized.

Do not use the icon tab bar if:

  • You plan to use only one single tab.

Responsiveness

The icon tab bar stretches horizontally, and soon runs out of space on small screens. It responds to limited space by offering a scrolling mechanism.

Responsiveness – Text tabs
Responsiveness – Text tabs
Responsiveness – Icon tabs
Responsiveness – Icon tabs

In addition to the responsive overflow behavior, the icon tab bar can be forced into compact mode or even react dynamically to the application’s global density setting. See the Tab Density section for details.

Layout

The horizontal layout of the icon tab bar never changes. The tabs always appear side by side. However, there are several types of tab bar to choose from. These are described in detail below.

Types

You can use the icon tab bar control to build the following types of tab bars:

  • Text only
  • Icon tabs
  • Tabs as filters
  • Tabs as process steps

Text Only

The text-only variant is one of the most common types. It allows longer labels, and can also display counters next to the text to indicate the number of items on the tab page.

Unlike all other tab variants, the labels do not get truncated. The full text is always shown. As a result, you need to ensure that your labels do not become too long. They should still be easy to read on smaller screens.

If you use text-only tabs, make sure that the UpperCase property is disabled and that you enter the labels in title case (for example: Approval Flow).

Types – Text-only without counters
Types – Text-only without counters
Types – Text-only with inline counters
Types – Text-only with inline counters

Counters and Text Tabs

If counters are used, set the property HeaderMode to “Inline” so the counters appear in brackets after the labels.

Do not use the old layout that shows the counters on top of the labels (Headermode = “Standard”).

Do
Counters – Inline layout ('HeaderMode' set to 'Inline')
Counters – Inline layout ('HeaderMode' set to 'Inline')
Don't
Counters – Old layout ('HeaderMode' set to 'Standard')
Counters – Old layout ('HeaderMode' set to 'Standard')

Icon Tabs

Icon tabs are also common tab types. These round tabs can be populated with any icon from the SAP icon font.

Labels are optional. If you decide to use labels, use them for all tabs. You can use counters as needed.

Types – Icons with counters
Types – Icons with counters

Please note that starting with SAPUI5 version 1.40, you should only use the horizontal type of label (icon and label side by side).

If your labels get truncated, consider using shorter labels or text tabs (without icons), since text tabs cannot get truncated.

Types – Icons with counters and labels
Types – Icons with counters and labels
Types – Icon-only
Types – Icon-only

Tabs as Filters

If you build the tab bar as a filter, it can comprise two parts:

  • An “all” tab on the left (optional)
    This tab shows the total number of items, and describes the type of item (for example, 189 Products).
  • Tabs for specific filters
    Use the tab text to indicate the filter attribute.
    We strongly recommend showing a counter on every tab.
Types – Filter
Types – Filter

Tabs as Process Steps

You can also use the tab bar to depict a process. In this case, each tab stands for one step.

To connect the steps, use the triple-chevron icon ( ) from the SAP icon font (technical name: process).

Types – Process
Types – Process
Developer Hint
When using icons with labels, add a comment in the properties file to make editors and translators aware that space is limited.
Example: Label for icon tab on detail screen. Max 14-16 characters (depending on character width).

Test whether your labels and their translations are displayed in full, and do not get truncated.

Behavior and Interaction

Clicking/Tapping on a Tab

To navigate through the views, the user clicks or taps the tabs.

Optional behavior: If the user clicks or taps a tab that’s already open, the container collapses. It opens again when the user clicks any tab.

Use the expandable property to specify whether users can collapse the tab container (default = “true”):

  • Let users collapse the container if there is additional content below the container, and the information inside the container is not always needed.
  • If there is no content below the tab container, set the expandable property to “false”.

The expandable property controls the initial state of the container. Do not change the default state (“true”).

Changing the Order of Tabs

Applications can allow users to rearrange the tab order when working in a desktop environment (property: enableTabReordering). If this feature is enabled, users can use drag and drop to reorder tabs, either directly on the tab bar or inside the overflow menu. It is also possible to drag and drop tabs from the tab bar to the overflow menu and vice versa.

Please note that this feature is not available for tabs as process steps to ensure that consecutive steps do not get mixed up.

Interaction – Rearranging tabs
Interaction – Rearranging tabs
Interaction – Rearranging tabs in the overflow menu
Interaction – Rearranging tabs in the overflow menu
Interaction – Rearranging tabs between bar and overflow menu
Interaction – Rearranging tabs between bar and overflow menu

Styles

Tab Density

The default responsive design of the icon tab bar applies to both compact and cozy modes. However, in addition to this responsive behavior, the control can be forced into a compact mode, or even react dynamically to the application’s global density setting. This feature can be used to:

  • Save vertical space on the page (applies to both text and icon tabs)
  • Save horizontal space (icon tabs only; this is especially helpful when there are many tabs)
  • Generally use less space on mobile devices
  • Reduce noise when there are already more important visual elements on the screen (primarily icon tabs)

The property for the override is called tabDensityMode, which can be set to “Cozy”, “Compact”, or “Inherit”. “Cozy” is the default setting that renders the control in its regular dimensions. “Compact” reduces the control’s height and icon sizes (if applicable), even if there would be enough space for the cozy design. “Inherit” instructs the control to follow the global density mode defined for the application. For backward compatibility, the default setting is “Cozy”.

The following image shows some types of tabs with their default style (cozy, left) and the reduced density mode (compact, right).

Style – Tab density
Style – Tab density

Colors

The two different styles (round tabs and text only) are discussed in the Types section. In both cases, you can use semantic colors to give users additional orientation.

Only use semantic colors if it is important for users to know that they need to take action (for example, to indicate errors or critical situations requiring action). Otherwise, use the neutral default colors. For more information, see How to Use Semantic Colors.

Developer Hint
To apply semantic colors to the icons and the text-only tabs, you can use the property for sap.ui.core.IconColor.

Example

In the example below, one step in the process is indicating an error. Since the other tabs have neutral colors, it is clear that they do not contain errors. Coloring them green to show that they are OK is unnecessary, and would reduce the severity of the red tab.

Styles – Colors
Styles – Colors

Guidelines

Apply the styles as follows:

  • If you have only a few tabs that can easily be visualized with icons, use the icon-only tabs. If a short description is needed, use icons and labels.
  • If the content cannot easily be identified by an icon, use the text-only tabs. They also allow for longer labels.
  • If you are using the icon tab bar in the object view floorplan, use either icon-only or text-only tabs.
    Icons only:
    Use this option if you have only 4-5 tabs that can be very clearly identified by their icon.
    Text only:
    Use this option if you have more than 4-5 tabs, or if there are no clear icons to represent the content. Set the property HeaderMode to “Inline”.
Do
Counters – Inline layout ('HeaderMode' set to 'Inline')
Counters – Inline layout ('HeaderMode' set to 'Inline')
Don't
Counters – Old layout ('HeaderMode' set to 'Standard')
Counters – Old layout ('HeaderMode' set to 'Standard')

If you use icon tabs, ensure the following:

  • The icons clearly identify the content on the tab pages.
  • Each tab has a unique icon. Do not use the same icon more than once.
  • The icons are easily distinguishable.
  • Any icons between tabs (for example, as separators or connectors) are visually very different from the icons on the tabs.
  • Either all or none of the icons have labels.

Implement the focus as follows:

  • By default, show the first tab as open. This is the initial setting provided by the control.
    Note: Technically, you can also override the initial selection. However, this is not recommended.
  • Later on, you can show the tab last selected by the user.

Additional guidelines:

  • Do not display a loading indicator above the tab while the number for the item count is loading.
  • Handle empty tabs as follows:
    • Hide tabs that do not contain any information, and do not allow the user to create content..
    • Show empty tabs that allow users to create content, such as notes or attachments.
  • Only use the tab bars to navigate between tabs. Do not use any other navigation links. For example, do not let users click an item in tab A that takes them to tab B. This type of cross-navigation inside a container is confusing, and cannot be handled by the back navigation.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Value Help Dialog

The value help dialog is a UI pattern that helps the user find and select single and multiple values. The user can also define and select multiple ranges. The value help dialog is generally called from an input field or a multi-input field by clicking the selection icon (value help icon) of the input field.

Usage

Use the value help dialog if:

  • The user needs to use different attributes (such as city, company name, and so on) to find an object.
  • The user is searching within a dataset containing more than 200 items.
  • The user needs to define and select ranges and exclusions.

Do not use the value help dialog if:

  • There is a simpler control that fits the use case. Always start with the least complex control (for example, use select instead of value help if the user needs to select only one item from a short list). For more information on when to use which control, see Selection Controls – Overview.
Information
For more information on which selection control to choose, see the selection control overview.

Responsiveness

The behavior of the value help dialog on a phone differs from its behavior on a tablet or desktop device. Both the navigation and the positioning of the selection area differ depending on the device.

Value help dialog - Size S
Value help dialog - Size S
Value help dialog - Size M
Value help dialog - Size M
Value help dialog - Size L
Value help dialog - Size L

Components

The value help dialog contains the following components:

1) Header bar
2) Icon tab bar / list control (phone)
3) Search template (optional)
4) Basic search
5) Advanced search
6) Result list
7) Items row (selected items, excluded items)
8) Footer toolbar
9) Include/exclude areas for range selection

Header Bar (1)

The header bar contains the dialog title. For guidelines on the dialog title, see the Guidelines section of this article.

Icon Tab Bar on Tablet/Desktop and List Control on Phone (2)

Depending on the device, the following controls are used to display the content of the value help dialog:

  • Smartphones: The start dialog provides a list (sap.m.List) with the standard list items (sap.m.StandardListItemSelect from List and
    Define Conditions to navigate between the different dialogs.
  • Tablet and desktop devices: The value help dialog contains an icon tab bar (sap.m.IconTabBar) to navigate between the Select from List and the Define Conditions tab.

Search Template (3)

Search templates allow the user to display different or additional fields in the advanced search field and the results list. Depending on the use case, the user can switch between the different search templates in order to use different fields when searching. For example, the search template “Customer (by company code)” displays the additional field “Company code” in the advanced search and result list.

Basic Search (4)

The basic search finds all results that are somehow related to the input. For example, the search term “A” returns all the results containing the letter “A”.

Always offer the basic search in the value help dialog. Position the basic search to the right of the search template control. If there is no search template control, left-align the basic search.

Advanced Search (5)

The advanced search offers a search field for each column in the result list.

Value help dialog - Advanced search
Value help dialog - Advanced search

For implementation of the basic and advanced search, the filter bar (sap.ui.comp.filterbar.FilterBar) is used in advanced mode. Advanced mode differs from basic mode in the following ways:

  • There is no Filters link or a dialog to make additional filter fields visible. All filter fields/advanced search fields are added automatically to the advanced search area.
  • There is a toggle link to show and hide the advanced search.
  • In each of the filter fields, users can use operators like “between” or “lower than” to define ranges.

Always collapse the advanced search by default.

Note that the value help icon of the business object ID field and description field for the business object that opened the current value help dialog will open only the Define Conditions screen. The entire value help dialog is not shown in order to prevent endless loops. For example, the value help icon of the customer ID or description field in a Select: Customer value help dialog will navigate directly to the Define Conditions screen.

How the Advanced Search Works

The user can include operators (such as “=“) to define the ranges directly within the field without moving to the fields of the Define Conditions tab.

The user must type the following to get results:

Operator Input Notation Example
between valuevalue 000100
equal to =value =0001
contains *value* *1*
starts with value* 001*
ends with *value *5
less than <value <100
less than or equal to <=value <=200
greater than >value >0300
greater than or equal to >=value >=0500
not equal to* !(=value) !(=0)

* Note that there isn’t an explicit “not equal to” operator. Instead, you need to use “Exclude” (!) in conjunction with the “equal to” operator (=).

Advanced search using operator
Advanced search using operator

Result List (6)

  • You can prefill the result list of the value help dialog by default.
  • If you transferred values from the input field to the basic search field of the value help dialog, the results are filtered accordingly.
  • If available, display the ID and description of the business object in the first and second columns. Display additional information in the next columns.
  • We recommend a maximum of five columns in the results list.

Selected/Excluded Items Row (7)

The row for Selected Items / Excluded Items is displayed in the panel container (see panel for more information). Each item or range that is selected or excluded is displayed as a token in the selected or excluded item row.

  • On desktops, the selection area with the selected and excluded items row is initially expanded.
  • On tablets and phones, the selection area with the selected and excluded item row is initially collapsed.

Footer Toolbar (8)

The footer bar offers the OK and Cancel buttons.

Include/Exclude Areas for Range Selection (9)

In the Include and Exclude areas of the Define Conditions tab, you can define single and multiple ranges with the following operators:

  • equal to
  • between
  • less than
  • less than or equal to
  • greater than
  • greater than or equal to

Each range is displayed as a token in the selected or excluded item row.

Developer Hint
For information on how to manage whitespace characters (blanks) when users copy and paste text into input controls, see Removing Leading and Trailing Whitespace.

Behavior and Interaction

Basic and Advanced Search

  • The basic search (mandatory) and advanced search (optional) are triggered by clicking or tapping the Go button. The search results are shown in the result list.
  • If the input field where the user is coming from contains data, this data is transferred to the basic search of the value help dialog and the results are then filtered accordingly.
  • The basic search performs a search across all fields that are displayed in the advanced search and the result list.

Item and Range Selection

Depending on your use case, the value help dialog can offer different selection options:

  • Select a single item
  • Select a single range
  • Select multiple items, select/exclude multiple ranges
  • Select/exclude multiple ranges

Users open the value help dialog by clicking or tapping the value help icon of the input field. The next steps depend on the use case and form factor (smartphone or desktop/tablet).

The different use cases are described in the sections below.

Select a Single Item (Smartphone)

Tapping the value help icon opens the Select from List tab. As soon as an item is selected, the value help dialog closes automatically.

Single item selection on a smartphone
Single item selection on a smartphone

Select a Single Item (Desktop/Tablet)

Clicking the value help icon opens the Select: [Object]  screen (for example, Select: Company). The icon tab bar and the Selected Items / Excluded Items row are hidden. As soon as an item is selected, the value help dialog closes automatically.

Single item selection on a desktop/tablet device
Single item selection on a desktop/tablet device

Select a Single Range (Smartphone)

Tapping the value help icon opens the Define Condition tab.

Single range selection on a smartphone
Single range selection on a smartphone

Select a Single Range (Desktop/Tablet)

Clicking the value help icon opens the Define Condition: [Object] tab (for example, Define Condition: Company).

The icon tab bar and the Selected Items / Excluded Items row are hidden. The Add and Delete icons for adding and deleting ranges are also hidden.

Single range selection on a desktop/tablet device
Single range selection on a desktop/tablet device

Select Multiple Items | Select/Exclude Multiple Ranges (Smartphone)

Tapping the value help icon displays the start dialog.

  • The Select from List tab is used to select multiple items
  • The Define Conditions tab is used to select and exclude ranges.

Both are added as tokens to the Selected Items / Excluded Items row at the bottom of the start dialog.

Start dialog for multi-item and multi-range selection on a smartphone
Start dialog for multi-item and multi-range selection on a smartphone
Multi-range selection on a smartphone
Multi-range selection on a smartphone
Multi-item selection on a smartphone
Multi-item selection on a smartphone
Advanced search on a smartphone
Advanced search on a smartphone

Select Multiple Items | Select/Exclude Multiple Ranges (Desktop/Tablet)

Clicking the value help icon displays the icon tab bar with the Select from List and Define Conditions tabs.

  • The Select from List tab is used to select multiple items
  • The Define Conditions tab is used to select and exclude ranges.

Both are added as tokens to the Selected Items / Excluded Items row at the bottom of the screen.

Multi-item and multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device
Multi-item and multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device
Multi-item and multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device
Multi-item and multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device

Select/Exclude Multiple Ranges (Smartphone)

Tapping the value help icon opens the start dialog with the Define Conditions tab.

The selected values are added as tokens to the Selected Items / Excluded Items row at the bottom of the start dialog.

Start dialog for multi-range selection on a smartphone
Start dialog for multi-range selection on a smartphone
Multi-range selection on a smartphone
Multi-range selection on a smartphone

Select/Exclude Multiple Ranges (Desktop/Tablet)

Clicking the value help icon opens the Define Conditions: [Object] tab (for example, Define Conditions: Company). The icon tab bar is hidden and the Selected Items / Excluded Items row is displayed.

Multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device
Multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device

Selected Items / Excluded Items

  • Each item that is selected from the result list on the Select from List tab is displayed as a token in the Selected Items row.
  • Each range that is selected or excluded on the Define Conditions tab is displayed as a token in the Selected Items / Excluded Items row.

Copying and Pasting Multiple Values

The Include and Exclude areas on the Define Conditions tab allow the user to enter multiple values at once (copied from the clipboard) .

In both areas, users can paste more than one value into the value input field. In this case, the condition row repeats with the previously selected condition and shows one value per row.

If there are more than 10 rows of conditions in either the Include or Exclude area, pagination is added to top of the respective area. A token appears next to each pasted value on the Selected Items / Excluded Items row at the bottom of the value help dialog.

Copying and pasting multiple values
Copying and pasting multiple values
Copying and pasting multiple values
Copying and pasting multiple values

Guidelines

Dialog Title

The dialog title differs depending on the device and whether multiple or single selection is used.

For smartphones:

  • Starting dialog: [Object] (for example, Company)
  • Select from list dialog: Select from List
  • Advanced search dialog: Advanced Search
  • Single range selection: Define Condition
  • Multiple range selection: Define Conditions

For tablet and desktop devices:

  • Multiple items combined with selection of multiple ranges: [Object] (for example, Company)
  • Single item selection: Select: [Object] (for example, Select: Company)
  • Single range selection: Define Condition: [Object] (for example, Define Condition: Company)
  • Multiple range selection: Define Conditions: [Object] (for example, Define Conditions: Company)

Advanced Search

If necessary, also provide value help for fields offered in the advanced search. However, do not provide the full value help dialog for the ID and description fields of the business object that is being selected. For these two fields, make sure that the value help icon opens only the Define Conditions screen (range selection).

For example, in a value help dialog for selecting the customer, do not offer full value help for the Customer ID and Customer Name fields. Instead, try to use the value help in combination with a helpful suggestion.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

 

Select Dialog

The select dialog enables users to select one or more items from a comprehensive list. The select dialog comes with a list of entries and a search field to filter the list.

A more enhanced dialog for single selection and multiselection is the value help dialog as it offers range selection and excluding functions.

Usage

Use the select dialog if:

  • Users need to select one or more entries from a comprehensive list that contains multiple attributes or values.

Do not use the select dialog if:

  • Users need to pick one item from a predefined set of options that contains one attribute or value only such as languages. In this case, consider using the combo box or select instead.
  • Your use case requires more enhanced functionalities such as a selection based on ranges. For the selection of values, consider using the value help dialog instead.
  • Your use case requires tabs, filters, or an Add New functionality in the select dialog. In this case, use a standard dialog instead.
Information
For more information on which selection control to choose, see the selection control overview.

Responsiveness

The display of the select control depends on the device. On phones, the selection list takes up the whole screen. On desktop and tablet devices it appears as a popover.

Size S

Single select dialog in full screen on smartphone
Single select dialog in full screen on smartphone
Multi-select dialog in full screen on smartphone
Multi-select dialog in full screen on smartphone

Size M

Single select dialog on tablet
Single select dialog on tablet
Multi-select dialog on tablet
Multi-select dialog on tablet

Size L

Single select dialog on desktop
Single select dialog on desktop
Multi-select dialog on desktop
Multi-select dialog on desktop

Components

Dialog Header

You need to set the title of the dialog header (1). We recommend the following form:

Single selection

Select

Example: Select Product

Multi-selection

Select

Example: Select Products

Search

The first element in the dialog is a standard search field (2).

Info Toolbar

The info toolbar (3) is only available in multi-selection mode. It shows the number of selected items in the following form:

Selected :

Example: Selected Products: 2

Content

The content area (4) can be filled with any list content inherited from the list item base, such as standard list items, display list items, and feed list items. You can set the content to be displayed as grouped.

Button Toolbar

The button toolbar (5) contains two buttonsSelect and Cancel. Select takes over the selection, while Cancel resets the selection to the state it was in when the dialog was opened.

Components of the select dialog. Left: single select, right: multi select
Components of the select dialog. Left: single select, right: multi select

Behavior and Interaction

The select dialog can be called up from any control. The most common trigger is an input field with selection icon, also known as a “value help field”, or F4. Alternative triggers are buttons or icons, which add items to an existing list or the infobar in the master list in order to apply a contextual filter.

Single Select

Once users select an entry, the select dialog is closed and the selected entry is taken over. If applicable, the entry is displayed in the field from which the dialog was triggered.

Multi-Select

In the multi-select version of the select dialog, checkboxes are provided for choosing multiple entries. The selection is taken over when the user closes the dialog via OK. Cancel closes the dialog without taking over the selected values. An infobar indicates the number of selected items.

Search

The user can search items.

Resize and Drag Dialog

You can make the select dialog resizable and draggable by setting the corresponding properties (also called resizable and draggable) to “true”.

A resizable dialog makes sense if the items inside have long names or descriptions.

A draggable dialog allows users to see the app content behind the dialog.

Guidelines
Both features are optional. However, even if you only need one, always set both of them to “true” to ensure consistency.

Guidelines

List Options

If you need to indicate that none of the selection options are selected, or you need to allow the user not to select an option, provide (None) as an option and place it at the beginning of the list.

If you need to indicate that all items apply (for example, as a list filter), provide All as an option and place it at the beginning of the list.

Select list with '(None)'
Select list with '(None)'

Search Behavior

Two types of search behavior are available:

(1) A live search, also known as “search-as-you-type” (property: liveChange), which is triggered by each character that the user enters or deletes.

(2) A manual search, which is triggered explicitly after the user enters text in the search field and clicks the Search icon or presses the ENTER key.

Although app developers need to decide themselves which search to use, we recommend implementing the live search whenever possible. Use the manual search only if the amount of data is too large and your app would otherwise run into performance issues. For more information, check out the article on search.

Reset/Remember Selections

By default, the selection is reset when the dialog is closed. This allows users to make a new selection when they reopen the dialog and makes sense when users need to add multiple items to a table.

Selection is reset after the dialog is closed
Selection is reset after the dialog is closed

However, if your use case requires selections in a dialog to be remembered so that the user can make corrections, you can set the rememberSelections function in the select dialog to “true”. When users exit the dialog by clicking Cancel, the selection is then restored to the state it was in when the dialog was opened.

Selection is remembered after the dialog is reopened
Selection is remembered after the dialog is reopened

This also works in single-select dialogs. There, if users click the remembered item again, the dialog closes and they do not have to explicitly click Cancel.

Infobar

In multi-selection mode, an infobar shows the number of selected items. Use the following format:

Selected: [Business Objects] Selected: [Number of Items]
Example: Products Selected: 2

Note that the infobar is not “sticky”. When the user scrolls down the list, the infobar scrolls off the screen.

“Clear” Button

The Clear button allows users to clear all the selected items. By default, the button is not shown. To display the button, set the showClearButton property to “true”.

Select dialog with 'Clear' button
Select dialog with 'Clear' button

Content

By default, the select dialog comes with a growing feature (property: growing = “true”). We recommend disabling the growing feature and setting this property to “false”. This ensures that all items in the table are loaded at once, and that the “Items selected” count, the search, and select/deselect features all work properly.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

  • No links

Date Range Selection

The control for selecting the date range is a single-field input control. Users can enter a localized date range using touch, mouse, or keyboard input, or by selecting a date range in the calendar. They can also navigate directly from one month or year to another.

Usage

Use the date range selection if:

  • You need a time range and know that your user is a power user who has to input lots of data. If the keyboard is the primary device used for navigating the app, use two input fields. This allows the user to quickly jump from field to field. By selecting a date in one of the fields, the other field should recognize the information and jump to the same selection.

Do not use the date range selection if:

  • You want to enter a date and a time. In this case, use the date picker or time picker instead.
  • The user’s primary goal is not to select ranges. If this is the case, use the simple date picker.

Responsiveness

The date range selection is fully responsive. It is smaller in compact mode and provides a touch-friendly size in cozy mode. For more information about cozy and compact modes, see the article on content density.

Date range selection (size S)
Date range selection (size S)
Date range selection (size L)
Date range selection (size L)

Components

The date range selection consists of two components: the date range input field and the date range picker.

The two clickable areas of the date range selection on all devices
The two clickable areas of the date range selection on all devices

Date Range Input Field

The user can type the date directly into the input field, or use the date picker. You can also show a prompt text in the field (property: placeholder). The system validates the date and gives the user feedback.

The dates June 7–16 are selected, and June 23 is shown as the current day
The dates June 7–16 are selected, and June 23 is shown as the current day

Date Range Picker

With the date range picker, the user can see a day view, month view, or year view. The current day and the selected date are highlighted. The calendar week is also visible in the day view. The calendar closes when a final day is selected. The user can click the arrows to view the previous and next days, months, or years (depending on the current view).

The selected date is shown with a blue background. The current day is indicated with a purple border in the calendar.

Clickable areas of the date range selection
Clickable areas of the date range selection

Optionally, you can offer a footer with OK and Cancel buttons. This gives users an alternative way of confirming the selected date range.

Date ranger picker with 'OK' and 'Cancel'
Date ranger picker with 'OK' and 'Cancel'

Behavior and Interaction

Selecting a Date Range

The user can type two dates into the date range input field or click the calendar icon to open the calendar and select a date. These two possibilities work for all devices – desktops, tablets, and smartphones.

Switch View

Clicking an arrow shows the next or previous day, month, or year.

Navigating to the next month
Navigating to the next month

Clicking the month shows an overview of all months.

Opening the month picker
Opening the month picker

If the current month is clicked, the user can change the month. When the user selects a month, the view changes to the day view.

Changing the month navigates back to the date picker. The focus is on the last selected start date.
Changing the month navigates back to the date picker. The focus is on the last selected start date.

By clicking the current year, the view changes to the year view. When the user selects a year, the view changes to the day view.

Opening the month picker
Opening the month picker

Selecting a Range

After the user selects a start date, the dates being hovered over turn light blue to provide visual feedback that a range is being selected. When the user selects an end date, the calendar closes. The range appears in the date input field.

Selecting the start date
Selecting the start date
Selecting the end date
Selecting the end date

Entering Single Dates

The date range selection also allows the user to input single dates. The user can type one date into the input field, or select the same day as a start and end date in the calendar.

Styles

Delimiter

The delimiter visualizes the start and end date. If no delimiter is given, the app uses the one defined for the used locale.

Placeholder

If no range is selected, show a placeholder text to indicate the correct format. If no placeholder is defined, the control shows the default locale placeholder format. You can define your own placeholder, but you must also take localized versions into account.

Date range selection with default placeholder
Date range selection with default placeholder

Validation

Use inline validation to give the user feedback, especially for errors and warnings. Possible validation states are warning, error, success, and information. The date range input field in question is highlighted by a frame in the corresponding color. If the focus is inside the field, an explanation is shown. Ensure that this explanation is as specific as possible.

For more information on how to use the different semantic states, see How to Use Semantic Colors.

Visible frame that shows an error when the field is out of focus
Visible frame that shows an error when the field is out of focus
Error state with meaningful text; the date range input field is focused
Error state with meaningful text; the date range input field is focused
Visible frame that shows a warning when the field is out of focus
Visible frame that shows a warning when the field is out of focus
Warning state with meaningful text; the date range input field is focused
Warning state with meaningful text; the date range input field is focused
Visible frame that shows additional information is available
Visible frame that shows additional information is available
Information state with additional information, such as a recommendation
Information state with additional information, such as a recommendation

Guidelines

Display Format

You can choose whether the displayed texts are to be shown in short, medium, or long format, or in another date format like dd–MM–yyyy. However, other date formats (besides short, medium, and long) should be used carefully due to local dependencies.

Long display format
Long display format
Medium display format
Medium display format
Short display format
Short display format

Input Types

The following input types are available. (Note: these examples show German date formats for January 14, 2014.)

  • Unicode CLDR short format: 14.01.14
  • Unicode CLDR medium format: 14.01.2014
  • ISO date format: 2014-01-14
  • ISO date format without delimiters: 20140114
  • Unicode CLDR short format without delimiters: 140114
  • Unicode CLDR medium format: 14012014

Date Formats

Long Date Format

Use the long date format for master list/object list item/title and object header/title. Here are some examples:

  • English (US): January 16, 2022
  • German (DE): 16. Januar 2022
  • Danish (DK): 16. Jan. 2022

Short Date Format

Use the short date format for master list/object list item/list of object attributes if space is a concern. For example, you might need to save space if there is a label with the date. Here are some examples of the short date format:

  • English (US): 1/16/22
  • German (DE): 16.01.22
  • Japanese (JP): 22/01/16

Relative and Medium Date Format

If appropriate, use a relative format for master list/object list item/list of object status. For example: today, 1 day ago, 2 days ago, and so on up to 6 days ago. After 6 days, use an absolute date with the medium format.

Use the absolute date with medium format in the corresponding object header in the details area. Do not use the relative format here.

If screen space is at a premium (for example, if there are too many columns), use the short date format within table cells. Otherwise, use the medium format.

If you need to display the weekday, use the full format. For example:

  • English (US): Sunday, January 16, 2022
  • German (DE): Sonntag, 16. Januar 2022
  • French (FR): dimanche 16 janvier 2022

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Multi-Input Field

A multi-input field allows the user to enter multiple values, which are displayed as tokens. To help the user enter a valid value, you can enable the suggestions feature and the value help option.

Usage

Use the multi-input field if:

  • You want the user to select multiple ranges (with the value help option and the value help dialog).
  • The dataset to choose from is expected to increase over time (for example, to more than 200 values).
  • You need to provide the value help option to help users select or search multiple business objects.
  • You want to enable users to add custom values.

Do not use the multi-input field if:

  • You want the user to select one entry only. In this case, use the input field or combo box instead.
  • You want the user to select from a pre-defined set of options only. In this case, use the multi-combo box instead.
Information
For more information on which selection control to choose, see the selection control overview.

Responsiveness

Size S

  • Cozy mode.
  • When the user taps the multi-input field, a new full screen dialog opens. After tapping in the input field and typing, the suggestions can be selected. When the user makes a selection, the dialog closes and the token is displayed.
  • The user can review the tokens by swiping them to the left or right.
Suggestions on a smartphone (size S)
Suggestions on a smartphone (size S)
Users can review tokens by swiping left and right on touch devices
Users can review tokens by swiping left and right on touch devices

Size M

  • Cozy mode.
  • The suggestions appear below or above the multi-input field.
  • The user can review tokens by swiping them to the left or right.
Suggestions on a tablet (size M)
Suggestions on a tablet (size M)

Size L

  • Compact mode.
  • The suggestions appear below or above the multi-input field.
  • The user can review tokens by pressing the right or left arrows on the keyboard.
Suggestions on a desktop (size L)
Suggestions on a desktop (size L)

Types

The input types of the multi-input field are identical to those of the input field.

Behavior and Interaction

Adding a Token

A token can be added using suggestions or value help. As the user types, the first suggestion item that matches the characters entered is autocompleted in the input field. The typed characters are matched against the beginning of the suggestion items, based on the “starts with” filter. The user can accept the autocompleted value  by pressing ENTER. The autocomplete property is set by default if suggestions are available, but can also be switched off.

When an item is selected from the suggestions dropdown, the corresponding token is created, and the input field is ready for the next entry. Tokens are placed next to each other on one line.

Developer Hint
Values that are entered can also be tokenized when the user presses ENTER. The app development team can perform a custom validation of the entered data and decide whether a token should be created.
Adding tokens
Adding tokens
Adding a second token
Adding a second token
Information
For information on how to manage leading and treading whitespace (blanks) when copying and pasting text into input controls, please see removing leading and trailing whitespace.

Reviewing Tokens

If tokens have been selected, and the input field is not in focus, the input field displays as many tokens as possible in the available space. If more tokens have been selected, an [n] More label indicates the number of hidden tokens. The tokens in the input field appear in the order in which they were selected.

Clicking or tapping the [n] More label opens a popover below the input field, in which all selected items are shown. The user can deselect an item by clicking or tapping its delete icon.

Multi-input field - n More (desktop)
Multi-input field - n More (desktop)
Multi-input field - n More (phone)
Multi-input field - n More (phone)

If the length of the last selected token exceeds the width of the input field, a label [n] Item/s is shown when the field is not in focus.

Clicking or tapping the [n] Item/s label opens a popover below the input field, in which all selected items are shown. The user can deselect an item by clicking or tapping its delete icon.

Multi-input field - '1 Item' label (desktop)
Multi-input field - '1 Item' label (desktop)
Multi-input field - 'n Items' label (desktop)
Multi-input field - 'n Items' label (desktop)

In the input field itself, the user can review tokens by using the left or right cursor keys on a desktop, or by swiping to the left or right on a smartphone or tablet.

Left/right keyboard cursor
Left/right keyboard cursor
Swiping left and right on a touch device
Swiping left and right on a touch device

Deleting Tokens

The user can delete tokens by pressing the Backspace or Del button (when selected) on a desktop’s keyboard, or by tapping the Delete icon on a mobile device.

Deleting tokens
Deleting tokens

Using Value Help

You can enable the value help option to provide a more advanced dialog for finding the relevant business object. Two dialogs can be used at present:

Value help with select dialog
Value help with select dialog
Value help with value help dialog
Value help with value help dialog

Filtering

When the user starts typing in the input field, the list is filtered. Only items that match the character or characters entered are shown in the dropdown list. The default filtering method is “starts with per term”, which matches the beginning of each word in an item’s text.

In addition, application developers can set a custom filtering method “starts with” or “contains” (method: setFilterFunction). The “starts with” approach filters only for items where the beginning of the label matches the query entered. The “contains” approach searches the full label for a match.

As a visual hint for the user, the matched characters are highlighted (bold) in the option list items. The highlighting works on the basis of “starts with per term”, regardless of the filtering method.

Multi-input field - Default filtering, autocomplete in the input field is switched off
Multi-input field - Default filtering, autocomplete in the input field is switched off

Copying and Pasting Data from a Spreadsheet or Text File

The multi-input field can handle paste actions containing multiple items, such as items that have been selected in a column of a spreadsheet or text file. The user simply selects a whole column in the spreadsheet, copies it, and then pastes it from the clipboard into the multi-input field. Each item is represented as a token. If a single value is copied and pasted into the field, it is shown as a text value, as further editing might be required before it is converted into a token.

Grouping

You can group the items items in a suggestion list by a specific attribute and separate each group visually with a group header. This feature is also available for tabular suggestion lists.

The group headers are not interactive.

Multi-input with grouped suggestions
Multi-input with grouped suggestions
Multi-input with grouped tabular suggestions
Multi-input with grouped tabular suggestions

Due to a technical limitation, the group headers are not visible when clicking on the n More text. 

Group headers not shown when clicking on n More items
Group headers not shown when clicking on n More items

Styles

The following images show how the states of the multi-input field are styled.

Unselected
Unselected
Unselected with predefined placeholder
Unselected with predefined placeholder
Unselected on hover
Unselected on hover
In focus
In focus
Selected items shown as tokens
Selected items shown as tokens
Expanded multi-selection
Expanded multi-selection
Error
Error
Warning
Warning
Success
Success
Information
Information

For details on the different states, see UI Element States.

For more information on semantic colors for value states, see How to Use Semantic Colors.

Guidelines

  • Give the control a width that is appropriate for the range of values that are going to be entered. Try to avoid setting a fixed width on this control. Instead, embed it in a proper layout (such as a form, simple form, or grid layout) and work with the layout data property.
  • Provide meaningful labels for all input fields. Do not use the placeholder as a replacement for the label. The placeholder should only provide an additional hint.
  • The multi-input field can currently contain tokens and one free text value. If you allow only validated values, display an error or warning when the user tries to leave the field to indicate that the value entered is invalid, or remove the value.
  • If users try to select an item that has been selected before, we recommend setting an error state and providing a meaningful message.
Multi-input - Error state for an item that has already been selected
Multi-input - Error state for an item that has already been selected
  • You can use the layout options of the form to add the unit of measurement (UoM) after the multi-input control. Apps can use the label-field ratio to show the UoM after the field. However, you must make sure that the UoM is properly visualized and doesn’t wrap to the next row.
Developer Hint

For accessibility purposes, you can use “ariaDescribedBy” from the input control.

  • The multi-input field can be used in the grid tableanalytical table and tree table as well, as condensed mode is already supported, both for desktop and mobile (tablets).
Multi-input field in the grid table in condensed mode
Multi-input field in the grid table in condensed mode

Properties

Since the multi-input field is derived from the input field, refer to the properties in the input field article.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Dialog

The dialog control (sap.m.dialog) interrupts the current app process to prompt the user for information or for a response. It forces a decision or a confirmation that needs to be signed off by the user.

Usage

Use the dialog if:

  • You want to display complex content (that is not a floorplan), but don’t want the user to navigate away from the current page.
  • You want to display an additional step or process that needs to be confirmed by a user action.
  • You want to enable the user to create an object with a small number of fields (up to 8 fields).

Do not use the dialog if:

  • You want to display a simple message. Use the message box instead.
  • You just want to confirm a successful action.
  • You do not want to interrupt the user.
  • You want to enable users to create an object with more than 8 fields. Use an object page instead.
  • You want to display a floorplan. Floorplans are not meant to be displayed inside a dialog.

Responsiveness

The dialog provides different behavior on a smartphone than on a tablet or desktop. We distinguish between “cozy” and “compact” dialogs. For more information, see content density.

The buttons in the toolbar are aligned differently on the various devices. On a smartphone, they extend across the entire footer toolbar, but on a tablet or desktop device, they are right-aligned.

Size S (Smartphone)

Full Screen Dialog

We recommend displaying dialogs in S size in full screen mode to help users focus on the content of the dialog (property stretch = “true”). The toolbar containing the actions is positioned at the bottom of the dialog.

Position of the Action Buttons

On smartphones, a dialog can have one or two actions, which are located in the footer and right-aligned.

Full screen dialog - Size S
Full screen dialog - Size S

When to Open Full Screen or Modal

Always display message dialogs as modals. There is no need to display a simple message in a full screen dialog. If you want to display a simple message, use the message box instead.

If you use standard dialogs, such as value help, open them in full screen mode to help the user can focus on the content of the message. The dialog control offers a stretch property for full screen behavior.

Size M (Tablet)

By default, the dialog can have up to two action buttons in the footer. The action buttons in the toolbar are right-aligned. Use cozy mode on tablet devices.

If the content height increases or is set to more than the screen height, the dialog height stops at 4 rem from the top and bottom. The user can then scroll through the content area.

Size L (Desktop)

By default, the dialog can have one or two actions. The action buttons on a desktop device are right-aligned. Use compact mode to ensure that the padding and margins are optimized for desktop devices.

If the content height increases or is set to more than the screen height, the dialog height stops at 4 rem from the top and bottom. The user can then scroll through the content area.

Dialog in compact mode - Size L
Dialog in compact mode - Size L

Layout

Position on the Screen

The dialog is positioned in the center of the screen. It opens in a modal window to ensure that it attracts the user’s attention when it displays emergency states.

On a smartphone, the stretch property allows you to achieve full screen behavior.

Behavior and Interaction

Navigation in a Dialog

You can let users navigate to another page within the dialog. On the second page, an arrow at the top of the dialog allows users to navigate back to the first page.

Navigation pattern list - Size L
Navigation pattern list - Size L
Navigation pattern details - Size L
Navigation pattern details - Size L

 

Resizable

You can let users change the size of the dialog (property resizable = “true). The resizable indicator then shows in the bottom-right corner of the dialog.

Resizable indicator in the bottom right-hand corner - Size L
Resizable indicator in the bottom right-hand corner - Size L

Draggable

By clicking and holding on the heading, users can drag the dialog to another position (property draggable = “true”).

Dialog can be moved by dragging the title - Size L
Dialog can be moved by dragging the title - Size L

 

Messaging Within a Dialog

Do not show message popovers within dialogs. Use highlighting to show issues with content fields. For more information, see form field validation.

 

Editing and Saving Content

If a dialog is used for editing, keep it simple. If you need more than 8 editable fields, consider other solutions instead, such as navigation to a detail page.

The data in the dialog is only saved when the user click or taps Create or Save. Use form field validation within the dialog to make users aware of any errors.

The data in the dialog is lost if the page is refreshed during the editing process (also in the draft scenario), or if the user chooses Cancel.

Highlighted form fields in a dialog - Size S
Highlighted form fields in a dialog - Size S

 

Types

Standard Dialog

Use the standard dialog unless you need one of the specialized dialogs below. The standard dialog has a header with a grey background, and no icon.

Message Box

The message box is a special type of dialog that is used to display messages quickly. For each type of message, you can decide when to use a dialog. Use the message toast (sap.m.MessageToast) for success messages. For more information, see Message Box.

Components

The dialog contains the following sections and options:

Title: Title text appears in the dialog header.

Subheader (optional): Subheaders appear below the main header. Since the subheader is not part of the content area, it is not scrollable.

Content: This area contains the actual content of the dialog.

Footer with actions: The footer can contain up to two buttons (optional). If no buttons are defined, the default Close button is shown.

Example of a dialog structure (Cozy)
Example of a dialog structure (Cozy)

Emphasized Buttons in a Dialog

Always use an emphasized button for the the standard action. Emphasizing the main action in the dialog toolbar helps users to focus on the most likely choice. This saves users time and gives new users a sense of orientation.

Never use an emphasized button for Cancel.

Emphasized button in the dialog footer
Emphasized button in the dialog footer

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

 

 

 

 

 

 

Color Picker

The color picker allows users to choose any color and provides different input options for selecting colors.

Color picker
Color picker

Usage

Use the color picker if:

  • Selecting any color freely is the typical use case.

Do not use the color picker if:

  • Users need to select one color from a predefined set of colors. Use the color palette instead.
  • Selecting a color from a predefined palette is the typical case, but users should still be able to define their own colors. Use the color palette popover instead.

Responsiveness

The color picker supports cozy and compact content densities.

Size S: Color picker opens in responsive popover
Size S: Color picker opens in responsive popover
Size M – Cozy form density
Size M – Cozy form density
Size L – Compact form density
Size L – Compact form density

Layout

The color picker consists of the following elements:

  • The color picker box for setting lightness and saturation
  • Sliders for setting the hue and transparency (“alpha channel”)
  • Form elements for:
    • Displaying the current and new color settings
    • Setting the color as a hexadecimal value
    • Setting the color as red/green/blue (RGB) value (0 to 255 each) (optional)
    • Setting the color as hue/saturation/lightness (HSL) value (hue: 0 to 360 degrees, saturation: 0% to 100%, lightness: 0% to 100%) (optional)
    • Switching between RGB and HSL values (if applicable)
    • Setting the transparency (“alpha channel”) value of the color (0.00 for full transparency to 1.00 for opaque)
Schematic visualization of the color picker
Schematic visualization of the color picker

Types

The color picker comes in 3 flavors:

  • Simplified: The simplified color picker offers settings for hue, saturation, and lightness, but not for the alpha channel. It shows the current and new color. Text input is only possible for hex values.
'Simplified' color picker
'Simplified' color picker
  • Default: The default color picker allows all settings. It displays input fields either for red / green / blue / alpha or for hue / saturation / lightness / alpha. End users can switch between both sets of input fields.
'Default' color picker
'Default' color picker
  • Large: The large color picker allows all settings and displays all fields at the same time.
'Large' color picker
'Large' color picker

Behavior and Interaction

  • Mouse/touch: Users select a combination of saturation and lightness in the color picker box (left click, tap, click and drag, tap and drag). Hue and alpha values are selected with sliders.
  • Keyboard: The tab key is used to set the focus on the sliders and input fields. Values are entered using the corresponding input controls. The sliders react on arrow keys, page up / page down keys, as well as on home and end keys. The color picker box is not keyboard-enabled.

Guidelines

  • Do not place the color picker directly on a page. Always offer the picker in a popover or dialog.
  • Use the simplest color picker type that does the job.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Date/Time Picker

The date/time picker allows users to select date and time values in a combined input.

Usage

Use the date/time picker if:

  • You need a combined date and time input control.

Do not use the date time picker if:

  • You want to use either a date or a time value. In this case, use the date picker or the time picker instead.

Responsiveness

The date/time picker runs on all form factors and fully adapts to all devices.

The date/time picker opens in a popover for sizes M and L (tablet or desktop device)
The date/time picker opens in a popover for sizes M and L (tablet or desktop device)
The date/time picker opens in a dialog for size S (smartphone)
The date/time picker opens in a dialog for size S (smartphone)

Behavior and Interaction

Selecting Date and Time Values

Sizes M and L/XL

The date/time picker appears as a popover when the user clicks a date (input field) on the calendar. The user can then select the desired date from the calendar, and the time from the rotating wheel. For the time, it’s possible to select hours, minutes, and even seconds.

When the user clicks the OK button, the popover closes and the selected date and time appear in the input field. When the user selects Cancel, the action is aborted and the input field remains unchanged.

Date/time picker – Open
Date/time picker – Open
Date/time picker – Closed
Date/time picker – Closed

Size S and Mobile Size

On smaller devices, the user can choose the date and time value in arbitrary order by tapping the segmented button on top of the screen. Be aware that the popover is superimposed on the input field during the selection process for mobile/S sizes.

The user can select the desired date from the calendar, and the time from the rotating time wheel. For the time, it’s possible to select hours, minutes, and even seconds. Clicking a date in the calendar automatically takes the user to the time selection screen.

When the user selects OK, the popover closes and the selected date and time appear in the input field. When the user selects Cancel, the action is aborted and the input field remains unchanged.

Size S - Date/time picker opens with the 'Date' view
Size S - Date/time picker opens with the 'Date' view
Size S - Selecting a date opens the 'Time' view
Size S - Selecting a date opens the 'Time' view

Styles

Value States

The date/time picker supports the following value states: error, warning, success, neutral, and information. You can display a value state text for error, warning, and information states to provide hints for the user.

For more information on how to use the different semantic states, see How to Use Semantic Colors.

Error state with error value state text
Error state with error value state text
Warning state with warning value state text
Warning state with warning value state text
Information state with information value state text (for example, to indicate a recommendation)
Information state with information value state text (for example, to indicate a recommendation)

Guidelines

Date Picker and Time Picker

In general, we recommend separating the date/time picker controls as the time picker supports the mask input function and the date picker allows the user to enter date in different formats. This makes it easier and more convenient for the user to enter the desired values. For additional guidelines and information on the individual controls, see the resources section below.

Default Values

Independently of the chosen control, set the default values of the date/time picker carefully to avoid unnecessary scrolling. It often makes sense to set the default for the time to the full or half hour, setting the minutes to 00 or 30. Sometimes, it may also make sense to use the current time and date.

Formatting Dates and Times

For guidelines and information on the SAPUI5 date formatters, see formatting dates.

For guidelines and information on the SAPUI5 time formatters, see formatting times.

Setting Steps

You can set intervals for the minutes and seconds on the slider (properties: minutesStep and/or secondsStep). For example, if you set the seconds step to “5”, the slider offers “00”, “05”, “10”, “15”, and so on.

Time Zone

If the user has to set a time that is time zone-sensitive, offer a select control next to the date/time picker control to choose the appropriate time zone.

Properties

AM and PM are locale-dependent. The locale can be set using the property localeId.

You can set the display format (property: displayFormat) to define the format in which the time input field and the time picker dropdown display the time.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Time Picker

The time picker allows the user to select a localized time. It can be used with touch, mouse, or keyboard input.

Usage

Use the time picker if:

  • You want the user to select a time.
  • You want the user to select a time range. In this case, one time picker can be used to set the starting time and a second one to set the end time.
  • You want the user to select a detailed duration, such as 1 minute and 30 seconds.

Do not use the time picker if:

  • You want the user to select a duration such as 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, or 2 hours. In this case, use the select control instead.

Responsiveness

The time picker comes with a cozy mode and a compact mode. In the compact mode, the time input field and the button are smaller than in the cozy mode. In the compact mode, there are also arrows that the user can click to set hours, minutes, and so on. For more information, see the article on content density.

On desktop (size L/XL) and tablet (size M) devices, the user can enter a time in the input field of the time picker, or set a time via the time picker dropdown which opens when the user clicks the time picker button.

For mobile (size S) devices, the tap area is the same as for a tablet, and the user can type a time in the time input field. Unlike on a tablet or desktop, the time picker dropdown does not open below the time input field, but rather in a subview.

Comparison of cozy mode (left) and compact mode (right)
Comparison of cozy mode (left) and compact mode (right)

Components

The time picker consists of a time input field and a time picker button. On desktop, tablet, and mobile devices, both elements have their own click area. Clicking the time picker button opens the time picker dropdown.

You can set a predefined time, which shows as the initial value in the time input field and the time picker dropdown. Users can overwrite the initial value manually at any time.

Time picker input
Time picker input

Time Input Field

The time input field allows the user to enter a time directly in the field, or select it using the time picker dropdown. The input is validated and feedback is given to the user.

The time input field can also contain a placeholder (input prompt).

Time Picker Button

When the user clicks the time picker button, the time picker dropdown opens to allow the user to choose a time.

Time Picker Dropdown

In the time picker dropdown, the user can select a time by setting hours, minutes, seconds and AM/PM or a subset of these (with hours and minutes only).

Dropdown with hours and minutes
Dropdown with hours and minutes
Dropdown with hours, minutes, seconds, and AM/PM
Dropdown with hours, minutes, seconds, and AM/PM

Behaviour and Interaction

Selecting a Time (Desktop Device)

The user clicks the time picker button, which opens the time picker dropdown. In the time picker dropdown, the user can set the time either with the mouse or by using the keyboard arrows. The Page Up and Page Down keys can also be used to set the current selection to the lowest or highest value, and the Home and End keys can be used to go to the first or last element of the picker.

When the desired time has been selected, the user can confirm this selection by clicking the OK button. If the user wants to close the dropdown without changing the time to the selected time, this can be done by clicking the Cancel button or by clicking outside the dropdown.

Preventing Errors

The user can also select a time by clicking the time picker input field and typing the desired time in the field. You can prevent users from making incorrect entries by not allowing them to type in certain characters (see mask input). If the user enters a time that has the correct format but is invalid (such as 12:60:85), the time picker displays a validation error.

You can switch off the integrated mask input feature, but we strongly advice against doing so. Only deactivate the mask input if you need to make an exception for your use case (for example, if a variable length is required for a specific locale).

Time picker dropdown and input field
Time picker dropdown and input field

Selecting a Time (Tablet or Mobile Device)

On tablets and mobile devices, users can select the time by tapping the time picker button. The timer picker dropdown opens beneath the input field (a subview is opened on mobile devices). The user sets the hour by touching the hour element and then swiping up or down. To set the minutes, seconds, and AM/PM, the user also touches the corresponding element and swipes up or down to set the right value.

To confirm the selected time, the user taps the OK button. Tapping the Cancel button cancels the selection. On tablets, the selection can also be cancelled by tapping outside the time picker dropdown.

Set the time by swiping up and down (tablet)
Set the time by swiping up and down (tablet)

Style

“Information” Value State

In the information state, the time picker input gets a blue border. When the user clicks in the box, additional information is displayed (such as a recommendation).
In the information state, the time picker input gets a blue border. When the user clicks in the box, additional information is displayed (such as a recommendation).

“Error” Value State

If the user enters an invalid time, the border of the time picker turns red and an error message appears.
If the user enters an invalid time, the border of the time picker turns red and an error message appears.

Disabled Time Picker

In the disabled state, the time picker input is grayed out and the button becomes invisible.
In the disabled state, the time picker input is grayed out and the button becomes invisible.

Guidelines

Time Formats

Seconds

Only let the user select time in seconds if this information is really necessary.

Time Zone

If the user has to set a time that is time zone-sensitive, offer a select control next to the time picker control to choose the appropriate time zone.

12-Hour System

In the 12-hour system, the date picker can contain selections for hours, minutes, seconds, and AM/PM.

24-Hour System

In the 24-hour system, the date picker can contain selections for hours, minutes, and seconds. AM/PM is not available in this mode.

 

For more information, see formatting time.

Properties

AM and PM are locale-dependent. Therefore, the locale can be set using the property “localeId”.

You can set the display format (property: displayFormat) to define the format in which the time input field and the time picker dropdown display the time. For more information about time formats, see the article on formatting dates.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Color Palette

You can use the color palette to let users choose a color from a predefined set of colors. The colors are fixed and do not change with the theme.

Color palette
Color palette

Usage

Use the color palette if:

  • The user needs to select one color from a predefined set of colors.
  • The color set contains between 2 and 15 predefined colors.
  • There is no need to offer additional colors.

Do not use the color palette if:

Responsiveness

The color palette supports cozy and compact content densities.

Size S
Size S
Size M
Size M
Size L
Size L

Components

  • A link to select the default color (optional).
  • The color palette, consisting of 2 to 15 color buttons.
  • Recent colors (optional). Users can see the last 5 colors they have recently picked. This function helps users to select colors that they have already chosen from the color picker. By default, this feature is visible.
Color palette with all optional features
Color palette with all optional features
Color palette with 7 colors and just one recent color
Color palette with 7 colors and just one recent color

Behavior and Interaction

Users can select a color with the left mouse button, the tap gesture, or by pressing SPACE or ENTER on a keyboard. The selected color is not indicated in the control itself.

Hovering over a color provides a visual feedback.

To navigate between different colors on a keyboard, use the arrow keys.

Visual feedback on hover
Visual feedback on hover

Guidelines

  • Show the selected color in another place. The color palette does not visualize the selected color.
  • Label the color palette.
  • If you do not want to show the color palette in-place, consider the color palette popover instead.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Color Palette Popover

The color palette popover encapsulates the color palette and the color picker within a popover. You can use it to offer color selectors on toolbars (for example, triggered by a button). The popover allows users to select one of up to predefined 15 colors, or define any other color in a second step if none of the predefined colors fit.

The color palette popover is also used inside the rich text editor for changing text and background colors.

Color palette popover
Color palette popover

Usage

Use the color palette popover if:

  • Selecting a color from a predefined palette is the typical case.
  • Users may sometimes need to define their own colors, but in most cases a predefined color or default color is sufficient.
  • Selecting a color is needed as a toolbar action. In this case, use a button or menu button to trigger the color palette popover.

Do not use the color palette popover if:

  • You want to let users select a color directly on the page (for example, inside a form). Use the color palette or the color picker instead.
  • Users will nearly always define a color of their own, and rarely use the predefined palette. In this case, use the color picker popover instead.

Responsiveness

The color palette popover supports cozy and compact content densities. On a phone, the color palette popover turns into a full-screen dialog.

Size S
Size S
Size M
Size M
Size L
Size L

Components

The color palette popover consists of:

  • A link to select the default color (optional)
Color palette popover with default color selection
Color palette popover with default color selection
Color palette popover containing only a color palette
Color palette popover containing only a color palette
  • A link that opens a color picker in a dialog (optional). The color picker popover comes in three flavors: simplified, default, and large (property: displayMode). For more information on the three display options, see color picker popover types.
Color palette popover with the option to set any color
Color palette popover with the option to set any color
'More Colors...' opens a color picker dialog
'More Colors...' opens a color picker dialog
You can also display a simplified version of the color picker.
You can also display a simplified version of the color picker.
  • Recent colors (optional). Users can see the last 5 colors they have recently picked. This function helps users to select colors that they have already chosen from the color picker. By default, this feature is visible.
Color palette popover with 5 recent colors
Color palette popover with 5 recent colors
Color palette popover with just one recent color
Color palette popover with just one recent color

Behavior and Interaction

To select a color, users can:

  • Click the Default Color link.
  • Select a color in the predefined color palette or from the recent colors.
  • Click More Colors… to select any other color. This opens the color picker.

On a keyboard, users can navigate within the color palette popover using the arrow keys. Pressing SPACE or ENTER selects a color or triggers a link.

As soon as a color has been selected, the color palette popover closes automatically.

Guidelines

  • To trigger the color palette popover, use a button or a value help icon from an input field.
  • Show the selected color in another place (for example, as a color value inside the triggering input field). The color palette popover closes as soon as a color is selected.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Standard List Item

The standard list item is used for less complex datasets (for example, when the user selects an item in a dialog). It consists of an optional image, a title, description, and a single info text, which can contain semantic information.

Standard list item
Standard list item

Usage

Use the standard list item if:

  • You want to display a simple set of data within a select dialog.
  • You want to display a simple set of data in the master list which does not involve objects. (For objects, use the object list item.)

Responsiveness

By default, the title font is larger if the description is empty. If you have list items with and without a description, this results in differently sized titles that are harder to read. In this case, switch off the title size adaptation (AdaptTitleSize).

While the title and description can wrap, the semantic info text does not wrap or truncate.

Standard list item with image and adapted title
Standard list item with image and adapted title

Components

The standard list item can contain an icon (in the form of an image or from the SAP icon font), a title (left-aligned), a short description (left-aligned below the title), and a semantic info text (right-aligned next to the description).

If the infoState property is set to true, the information text gets inverted. Use this setting for object statuses only.

Standard list item with semantic colored information text
Standard list item with semantic colored information text
Standard list item with inverted semantic colored information text
Standard list item with inverted semantic colored information text

Behavior and Interaction

List item behavior and interaction is similar for all list item variants and is therefore described in the list overview article.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Text Area

The text area is an input control that allows the user to enter several lines of text.

Usage

Use the text area if you want users to enter multiple lines of text. If you only want them to enter a single line of text, use the text control instead.

Responsiveness

You can set the maximum number of lines to be shown. The amount of text depends on the size of the screen. On smaller screens, the user can scroll down the text area to see the entire text. To indicate that the text continues, the control shows only half of the last line. This also applies for mobile devices.

Components

The text area allows the user to enter multiple lines of text.

Text area – Default
Text area – Default
Text area – Active state
Text area – Active state

You can also set a placeholder (input prompt), which is inherited from sap.m.InputBase; property: placeholder. The prompt text is displayed when the input field is empty.

Text area – With placeholder (input prompt)
Text area – With placeholder (input prompt)
Text area – Selected state
Text area – Selected state
Information
For information on how to manage leading and trailing white space (blanks) when copying and pasting text into input controls, see removing leading and trailing white space.

Behavior and Interaction

Entering and Removing Text

As soon as the user starts typing, the placeholder disappears. It appears again when the user removes all the content from the text area.

You can also limit the number of characters a user can enter. In this case, the text area prevents the user from adding more characters than the maximum value defined (property: maxLength).

Text area – Limited
Text area – Limited

Making Text Non-Editable

You can set the text area to non-editable (property: editable). This mode still allows the user to scroll to the text that is currently hidden.

Text area – Read-only
Text area – Read-only

Disabling Text

You can also set the text area to disabled. In this case, the user cannot edit or scroll (property: enabled).

Text area – Disabled state
Text area – Disabled state

Growing Behavior

The text area control offers a growing property. It gives the control the ability to automatically grow and shrink with its content while the user is typing.

The maximum height of the text area is configurable. Define the height to reflect the space where the control will be located.

Growing text area: The text is aligned to the top of the text area. A new line is added to the bottom of the text area.
Growing text area: The text is aligned to the top of the text area. A new line is added to the bottom of the text area.

Text Area Counter

General Information

If you have set a character limit for the text box (property: maxLength), you can use the text area counter to show a character count (remaining characters, characters over the limit).

To turn on the counter, set the property showExceededText to true. The user can then see all inserted characters, including those that are over the limit.

Basic Interactions

The number of characters allowed is displayed below the text area, aligned to the right. A label indicates how many characters are left.

When the characters are over the limit:

  • Тhe user can continue typing and the text area changes to a warning state.
  • The value of the counter changes.

When the user pastes copied text, characters that are over the limit are selected automatically. The user can delete any excess characters by pressing Delete or Back on the keyboard (or virtual keyboard for phones and tablets).

Text area counter - Default state (within the limit)
Text area counter - Default state (within the limit)
Text area counter components
Text area counter components
Developer Hint
The counter comes with a preset value state for the text area, which controls the appearance of the text area when the text exceeds the character limit. This preset helps the app developer to define the target behavior of the control.

The predefined value state is a warning state.

If the app developer sets additional value states, and the text exceeds the limit, the value states are displayed in the following order (highest to lowest priority):

  • Additional error state available: This results in a higher priority (error + warning = error). If an error state is set, the text area is shown in an error state. When the error is fixed, the text area returns to the warning state until the character count is within the limit.
  • Additional warning state available: An additional warning state has the same priority as the counter warning state (warning + warning = warning). The text area stays in the warning state until all of the issues are fixed. The warning state set by the developer has the higher priority.
  • Additional success state available: In this case, the warning state has higher priority (success + warning = warning). Once the text count is within the limit, the text area shows the success state.

Styles

As with any other input control, you can validate the fields and show the result as a value state of the control (property: valueState). Possible value states are error, warning, success, information, or neutral (none).

For more information, see How To Use Semantic Colors and Form Field Validation.

Text area – Warning state
Text area – Warning state
Text area – Error state
Text area – Error state
Text area - Success state
Text area - Success state
Text area - Information state
Text area - Information state

Guidelines

  • As with other input fields, use a label. For exceptions regarding label usage, see the Exceptions section of the Label article.
  • The placeholder does not substitute a label. It can be used to give an additional hint, but should not repeat the label in long format.
  • If you want to use the text area with a fixed text length (property: maxLength), for example, inside a form, use text beside the text area to count down the number of remaining characters while the user is typing.
  • If you are applying the growing behavior of the text area, bear in mind that its maximum height should not exceed the height of the screen.

Saving Forms with a Text Area Counter

If a text exceeds the limit for the text area, there are two options for saving the form:

  • The form can be saved, but only contains the text within the character limit. If you follow this approach, inform the user that only part of the text will be saved. In this case, we strongly recommend setting the text area state to “warning” to indicate that there is a problem with the text.
  • The form cannot be saved until the user edits the text and the character count is within the limit. In this case, we strongly recommend setting the text area state to “error”.

Properties

  • You can provide a width by specifying the average character width (property: cols).
  • You can define the height of the text area by specifying the number of lines of text (property: rows). You can also set the height of the text area (property: height), which overrides the rows property.
  • You can define the type of wrapping for the text area (property: wrapping) as soft, hard, or off.
  • sap.m.TextArea has a growing property that enables the height of the text area to change dynamically while the user is typing.
  • sap.m.TextArea can show a count for the number of permitted characters, and allow users to type/paste text over the limit (property: showExceededText). This property determines whether characters that exceed the character limit are visible.
    • If this property is set to false, the user is not allowed to exceed the number of characters set in the maxLength property.
    • If this property is set to true, characters exceeding the maxLength value are selected on paste, and the counter below the input field displays the number of characters that are over the limit.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Terminology for Common Actions

SAP has defined naming conventions for the most common core actions that are used across all applications and lines of business. By standardizing the main action names, we avoid ambiguity and ensure a consistent user experience.

When to Use

Use the standard action labels listed below for the specified generic and business actions across all products.

For more information about the different types of action, see Action Placement.

List of Standard Action Labels

General Information

  • Typically, action buttons in SAP Fiori use a verb in the imperative (with the exception of universal labels, such as Settings).
  • The action labels listed below define the common actions (for example, Create ). In many cases, this will be sufficient in the context. However, if your use case requires it, you may also add a qualifier (for example, Create Product ).

Standard Action Labels

Action Definition Opposite Action
Accept Accept invitations, contracts. Decline
Add Add an existing object or item to a list. Remove
Approve Grant permission (for example, for budget or vacation). Reject
Back Go back to the previous screen.
Cancel Abort an action without saving any changes.
Close Close the dialog or window.
Copy Create a new object or item based on an existing one. In this case, the user adapts the core data copied from an existing object.Note: The finalizing action is still Create.
Create Create a new object or item. Delete
Create and New Finalizing action: Create an object from scratch and return to the create screen to add another new object.
Decline Refuse an invitation. Accept
Delete Delete the object or item itself. Use Delete if the object or item has already been actively saved. Create
Discard Discard a draft for a new object, or a draft version containing changes to an existing object, without saving. Use Discard if the object or item has not yet been actively saved by the user.
Edit Make changes to an existing object.
Filter Set a filter.
Note: Typically a tooltip label for a filter icon.
Finish Trigger the completion of a workflow or process. Other labels may be used when finishing a workflow or process kicks off a subsequent workflow.
Forward Forward a request to a manager or decision-maker.
Next Continue to the next screen (in a workflow with a sequence of activities).
OK Confirm settings that may or may not have been changed (for example, filter settings for a table).Note: In most cases, a specific action verb is preferable.
Reject Refuse permission. Approve
Remove Remove the reference to an item (for example, remove a person from a distribution list). Add
Save Save changes to existing objects.
Note: If the action triggers a workflow, use Submit instead.
Save and Next Finalizing action for editing a series of existing objects: Save the current object and open the next object in the series in edit mode.
Save As Save a copy of an existing object or setting within the app, using the current state. Example: Save changes to a filter variant under another name.

By contrast, the Copy action involves an intermediate editing step.

Note: The finalizing action for Save As is Save.

Share Tooltip text for the share icon  . Opens a menu with sharing actions.
Show Less
Also: Show [n] less
Collapse a list or screen area within the current page or dialog.
Show More
Also: Show [n] more
Expand a list or screen area within the current page or dialog.
Sign In Log on to SAP Fiori.
Sign Out Log off SAP Fiori.
Submit Submit to a worfklow (for example, for manager approval).

Top Tips

For other actions not covered above, apply the following:

  • Use a verb in the imperative for action buttons.
    Exception: If there is a standard, industry-wide convention for an action label, follow the standard convention (examples: Settings , Full Screen ).
    Note: The grammatical form for actions can differ for other languages. For example, German action labels use the infinitive (Speichern, Abbrechen, Bearbeiten).
  • Use the same action consistently throughout the interaction. Typically, triggering and finalizing actions are the same (for example, an Export button in a table toolbar, and the Export action in the follow-on dialog).
  • Keep action labels as short as possible. Consider the limited space on smaller screens. Also keep in mind that other languages often require more space than English.

Related Topics

Action Placement

Header Toolbar

The header toolbar always appears in the header of the page. One main advantage of the header bar is that this bar is always visible and will not scroll away. It contains actions that are relevant for the entire page.

Our general guideline is to use only icon buttons or text buttons. Icon and text should not be combined into one button. Buttons are always right-aligned.

Buttons are sorted from frequently-used to seldom-used. This ensures that the most important buttons go into the overflow last.

Usage

Use the header toolbar if:

  • Your page contains several controls, and the actions are valid for the entire page.

Do not use the header toolbar if:

  • You have closing or finalizing actions for the whole page. Place them in the footer toolbar instead.
  • You have actions that belong to a specific UI element. Place them as close as possible to the corresponding object (for example, in a table or chart toolbar).

Responsiveness

To enable responsiveness, use the OverflowToolbar control. For more information, see the corresponding section in the Toolbar Overview article.

The height of the toolbar changes on desktops (compact mode), tablets, and smartphones (cozy mode). For more information about cozy and compact modes, see Content Density.

Header toolbar on the object page – Size S
Header toolbar on the object page – Size S
Header toolbar on the object page – Size M
Header toolbar on the object page – Size M
Header toolbar on the object page – Size L
Header toolbar on the object page – Size L

Components

The header toolbar can contain the following components:

  • App-specific business actions
  • Generic actions

 

The following actions count as generic:

  • Flag and Favorite
  • Share menu
  • Overflow
  • Paging

Behavior and Interaction

App-Specific Actions

If needed, the app team can define their own actions for the app. In this case, the text buttons should contain a short, unambiguous text that explains what action the button performs. A button text is usually a single-word verb (for example, Synchronize). Note that translated UIs may increase the length of the text string.

Text vs. Icon Buttons

Use text-only buttons for all business actions (such as Edit and Create).
Use icon buttons only for generic actions (such as  for Share). For icons, always provide a suitable text label as a tooltip.

App-specific icon button in header toolbar
App-specific icon button in header toolbar

Add / Create

Place the Add or Create (item or row) action as close to the content as possible.

Add as icon button (+) in full screen mode
Add as icon button (+) in full screen mode

If the Add or Create action is a main function, the action should never be moved into the overflow.

Edit and Delete

If you want to perform a global edit action, use the Edit button.

If you want to perform a global delete action, use the Delete button.

Edit and Delete in header toolbar
Edit and Delete in header toolbar

Favorite and Flag (Generic)

Users can mark objects as a favorite or flag objects for quick subsequent retrieval. The user does this by clicking or tapping the relevant generic Favorite or Flag button in the header toolbar. For more information, see Flag and Favorite.

Favorite action in header toolbar
Favorite action in header toolbar

Share (Generic)

The Share menu allows users to work with content outside the app they are currently using. It can include a variety of actions. All the buttons contain either text only or a combination of an icon and text. The following actions can be used and complemented by each app:

  • Send Email (icon: email  )
  • Discuss in SAP Jam (icon: discussion-2  )
  • Share in SAP Jam (icon: share-2  )
  • Send Message (icon: post  )
  • Save as Tile (icon: add favorite  )
  • Print (icon: print  )
  • Export as Excel (icon: Excel attachment  )
  • Export as PDF (icon: pdf attachment  )
  • Export As…
  • Open In…

If you expect the user to use the Open In… functionality frequently, place it directly in the header toolbar.

The Share action can appear on the full screen or the details screen, and is never moved into the overflow menu. It is always right-aligned. The overflow starts to the right side of the Share icon.

Possible actions in the Share menu
Possible actions in the Share menu
Share in Header Toolbar
Share in Header Toolbar

Overflow (Generic)

If apps use the overflow toolbar, the overflow is generated automatically. The overflow is activated if there is not enough space for all the actions on the toolbar, or if some actions are considered less important than others. In this case, the app team decides that only certain actions appear in the overflow.

The app team also decides whether some actions are so important that they should never move into the overflow.

Since release 1.30, new features have been added to the overflow toolbar. The  “” (overflow) button is now a toggle button and can be used to switch the overflow menu on and off.

The user clicks or taps the overflow button to open a popover. In this action sheet, all icon buttons are labeled with text and the user can overflow the following controls:

  • sap.m.SegmentedButton – when in the overflow, the segmented button is in select mode and looks like a select button, although it is technically still a segmented button
  • sap.m.Select – when in the overflow, it is always in default mode to take advantage of the extra space, even if it was set to icon-only mode in the toolbar
  • sap.m.ToggleButton
  • sap.m.Checkbox
  • sap.m.Input
  • sap.m.SearchField
  • sap.m.ComboBox
  • sap.m.DateTimeInput

Split-screen layouts have their own overflow menus.

All buttons go into the overflow from right to left. This ensures that the most important buttons are the last to be moved into the overflow menu.

Header toolbar on desktop with open overflow
Header toolbar on desktop with open overflow

Paging (Generic)

Use the Paging button if you want to navigate to the previous or next object.

If you are using the Share button, place paging buttons to the right of the Share button.

Paging buttons in header toolbar
Paging buttons in header toolbar

Styles

  • Use button styles only if they help the user, and not for decoration.
  • Use them for primary actions, such as Edit and Create.
  • Use a positive/negative style (property: type = accept or rejector an emphasized style (property: type emphasized).
  • Use only one emphasized button per toolbar and never mix emphasized and semantic buttons.
    Exception 1: Messaging button appears
    Exception 2: Object has been flagged or marked as a favorite

For more information, see Button.

Guidelines

Please see the Guidelines section in the toolbar overview article.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Formatted Text

The formatted text control displays HTML text. You can format the text using HTML tags or embed formatted text.

Example
Example

When to Use

Use the formatted text control to:

  • Embed formatted HTML text.
  • Display longer texts, such as descriptions, legal texts, or manuals.
  • Display simple lists with bullet points or numbers.
  • Display code.

Do not use the formatted text control to:

  • Display In-app help or explanations on how to use your app. Use the Web Assistant instead.
  • Display a simple and short text. Use the text control instead.
  • Display a semantically-colored text or a status. Use the object status instead
  • Display an object name with or brief additional information. Use the object identifier instead.
  • Display a number or sum. Use the object number instead.
  • Display a currency. Use the currency control instead.
  • Display a label. Use the label control instead.
  • Display a single headline. Use the title control instead.
  • Let the user to type in longer texts and format them. Use the rich text editor instead.

Components

By default, the control uses the standard font and headlines. It supports the following HTML tags:

Text Styling

HTML Tag Effect
a Link or anchor
abbr Abbreviation
blockquote Quote
cite Short quote
code Code style
em Italic text
pre Preformatted text
strong Bold text

List

HTML Tag Effect
dl Description list
dt Description term
(of a description list)
ul Unordered list
ol Ordered list
li List item
(of an unordered or ordered list)

Structure

HTML Tag Effect
br New line
h1-h6 Headlines 1-6
p Paragraph
span Generic inline container

Behavior and Interaction

The formatted text control itself is not interactive. However, it can contain interactive elements, such as links and anchors.

Responsiveness

The text automatically adapts to the screen size unless you set a fixed width and/or height.

Examples

Here are some examples that use the various HTML tags.

Formatted text - Numbered List
Formatted text - Numbered List
Formatted text - Bulleted list
Formatted text - Bulleted list
Formatted text with code
Formatted text with code
Formatted text - Quote
Formatted text - Quote

Top Tips

  • Use the different styling options carefully and not for decoration only.
  • Consider accessibility, such as color contrast.
  • SAP Fiori uses theming. Be aware that if you make custom changes to the HTML (such as changing colors), you need to take care of the theming part as well.

Related Topics

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Single Planning Calendar

The single planning calendar is a scheduling control that displays the calendar of a single person or resource over a day, work week, or week. Users can view appointments, create new appointments, and delete appointments.

Single planning calendar
Single planning calendar

Usage

Use the single planning calendar if:

  • You want to enable users to schedule or monitor the calendar of a single person or resource.
  • You want to offer multiple calendar views (day, work week, week).

Do not use the single planning calendar if:

  • You want to compare objects of the same type over a given period (for example, appointments for multiple persons or resources). In this case, use the planning calendar.
  • The main use case is to schedule all-day appointments, and you don’t need to see an hour axis. In this case, use the planning calendar.
  • You need a complex graphical representation or planning application involving activities, resources, hierarchical project structures, relationships, and so on. In this case, use the Gantt chart.

Responsiveness

The single planning calendar is responsive and supports the cozy and compact density modes.

Overflow Behavior

On smaller screens, the custom toolbar utilizes the overflow behavior of the standard SAP Fiori toolbar.

If the available actions do not all fit into the available space on the toolbar, an overflow menu button appears on the right of the toolbar. The rightmost actions move into the overflow menu first.

Single planning calendar - Size L
Single planning calendar - Size L
Single planning calendar - Size M
Single planning calendar - Size M
Single planning calendar - Size S
Single planning calendar - Size S

Components

The single planning calendar consists of the following components:

  1. Header
  2. Toolbar
  3. View switch
  4. Navigation
  5. Date strip
  6. All-day appointment
  7. Timeline
  8. Appointment
  9. Calendar grid
  10. Now marker
Components of the single planning calendar
Components of the single planning calendar
Developer Hint
To prevent waiting time, app developers should load the sap.ui.unified library.

1. Header

The header contains the toolbar and the navigation.

2. Toolbar

The toolbar consists of the calendar title (optional) and the toolbar actions, including a default view switch. You can add other app-specific actions that are relevant for your use case (such as adding an appointment, search, filter, settings, showing the calendar legend, and so on). Always place actions that affect the entire calendar in the toolbar.

3. View switch

The view switch allows the user to switch between different time intervals. The default views are day, work week, week, and month. The app developer can choose which views to include, depending on the use case.

In the month view, all appointments for the respective day have the same width and height. Each grid cell can hold 4 appointments in compact mode and 3 appointments in cozy mode. The remaining appointments can be accessed with a # More link. In month view, all-day appointments look and behave like regular appointments.

Month view
Month view

You can also create custom views by setting a different number of visible columns in the grid. We only recommend doing this if your use case really requires it. You must also ensure that any custom views are responsive. For anything over 7 days, provide an alternative view for size S.

Custom view 10 days - size L
Custom view 10 days - size L
Custom view 3 days - size S
Custom view 3 days - size S
Developer Hint
If no view is set by the application developer, the single planning calendar renders the week view. If the application developer sets only the day view, the week view is not visible.

4. Navigation

The navigation area contains back and forward arrows, the Today button, a date interval link, and the date strip. Clicking the Today button takes the user to the period containing the current day.

5. Date strip

The date strip is the horizontal axis of the calendar grid, showing the currently visible day or days. Non-working days are a darker color.

6. All-day appointment

All-day appointments are appointments that take up 24 hours. They are located in a dedicated area below the date strip and above the first hour of the timeline.

The option to create all-day appointments must be added at application level. Consider using a switch or checkbox that automatically sets the start and end time of the appointment to 00:00. We recommend reflecting this in the UI for creating the appointment as well. For example, offer a date picker instead of a date/time picker for selecting the start and end of the appointment (as shown in the sample dialog).

There is no limit of the height of the all-day appointments area. However, if your use case involves a lot of all-day appointments (and their area takes up most of the screen), consider using the planning calendar instead.

7. Timeline

The timeline is the vertical axis of the calendar grid, showing the hours.

8. Appointment

Each appointment can have an icon or image, a title, and a subtitle. If there is not enough horizontal space for the text, it is truncated. If an appointment has an icon, the icon remains visible as long as there is space for it, even if that does not leave enough space for the title. If there is not enough vertical space, the subtitle is not shown.

Appointments vary in height, depending on their duration, and in width, depending on how many appointments take place simultaneously. The minimum height of an appointment corresponds to a 30-minute appointment.

The app can set up to 20 types of appointments. Each type has its assigned color. Always choose appointment types with contrasting colors. Make sure that each type is also represented as a text, and not only by the color.

9. Calendar grid

The calendar contains the appointments and all-day appointments, and is controlled by the currently selected view. Non-working days have a darker background color in the calendar grid.

10. Now marker

The now marker is a horizontal line through the calendar grid, which indicates the current time. The current time is visible on the timeline. If the current time falls within 15 minutes of a full hour, it replaces the full hour.

Appointment structure
Appointment structure
Now marker - Current time replaces the full hour
Now marker - Current time replaces the full hour

Behavior and Interaction

Date Picker

The visible period is indicated with the date interval link in the navigation. Clicking the link opens a date picker, which helps the user to navigate quickly to a specific day or week.

Creating an Appointment

We recommend offering a Create action in the toolbar. Use the generic   icon button.

The UI for creating the appointment must be implemented at app level. The control provides only the underlying functionality for creating appointments. For most use cases, a dialog works best and is recommended (see sample dialog below).

Viewing Appointment Details

The UI for viewing appointment details must be implemented at app level. The control provides only the underlying functionality for displaying appointment details. We recommend using a popover to keep the context for the user (see sample popover below).

Working Hours

You can opt to set working hours in the single planning calendar (properties: startHourendHour). The non-working hours then have a different background and can be hidden (property: fullDay). You can also give the user the option to toggle between working and non-working hours. We recommend offering a toggle button in the toolbar (the button must be added by the app team).

Sticky Header

To keep the context when the user scrolls down the calendar, the header area of the single planning calendar can remain fixed at the top of the screen (property: stickyMode).

At app level, you can choose to have the entire header area sticky (value: All) or only the Navigation area (value: NavBarAndColHeaders).

Drag and drop

You can enable drag and drop for moving appointments (property: enableAppointmentDragAndDrop). Moving an appointment changes its start and end times (for example, if an appointment is scheduled from 1:00-2:00 PM, the user can drag it and change the time slot to 2:00-3:00 PM). When dragged, the appointment is shown as a ghost element on the mouse cursor. A placeholder indicates the target drop area.

Appointments can also be dragged from or to the area for all-day appointments. When the user drags an all-day appointment to the planning area, a placeholder shows the duration of the appointment after dropping (default = 1 hour). Similarly, dragging a regular appointment to the all-day appointments area transforms it into an all-day appointment (default = 1 day).

For desktop devices, you can also enable the following options:

  • Allow users to create new appointments by clicking, dragging, and releasing on an empty space in the content area (property: enableAppointmentsCreate).
  • Allow users to change the duration of an appointment by clicking and dragging one side of the appointment (property: enableAppointmentsResize).
Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Drag and drop into the all-day appointments area
Drag and drop into the all-day appointments area
Drag and drop from the all-day appointments area
Drag and drop from the all-day appointments area

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Message Popover

The message popover control can display multiple messages of different types in one list. For example, it might show several messages related to entries in a form, or messages triggered by a finalizing action, such as Save.

The message popover is used in conjunction with a technical message manager, which populates the message list. If an error occurs at a validation point, the corresponding message is added to message popover automatically, without interrupting the user.

Users can browse messages by type and navigate to the message details. In some cases, they can also jump directly from the message to the affected field on the UI.

Message popover
Message popover

When to Use

Use the message popover if:

  • You want to display multiple messages to the user.
  • You do not want to interrupt users while they are performing an action.

Do not use the message popover if:

  • You need to interrupt the user. In this case, use a message box.
    (Typically, interrupting the user is only necessary for technical problems, such as network errors and connection issues.)

Components

Components of the message popover
Components of the message popover

(1) Filter bar
(2) Message short text
(3) Message subtitle
(4) Section/subsection on the UI
(5) Message button
(6) Navigation to message details
(7) Counter for aggregated messages

Filter Bar

Initially, the filter bar shows all the different message types in the list (1).

Segmented buttons at the top of the message popover allow the user to filter the messages by type (error, warning, success, and information).

List

Short Description

The short message text (2) provides a simple and helpful short message. It’s the same message as the one attached to the UI control where the issue occurred.

Subtitle

You can use the subtitle (3) to give your message an identifier. If the message relates to a specific field, show the label of the field where the error occurred. Based on the subtitle, the user should be able to identify the corresponding UI control on the UI (for example, the input field in a form).

Section/Subsection

Messages in the list are grouped by the section and subsection on the UI (4). This helps the user to find the part of the UI that triggered the message.

Navigation to Message Details

If message details are provided, the message popover automatically provides a chevron on the right-hand side for navigating to the message details page (6).

Aggregated Messages

If your app team wants to aggregate messages, they can use the counter property of each list item (7). Note that the message popover only provides the counter property. The aggregation itself must be implemented by the app team.

Message Button

If there are messages to display, the message button indicates the most critical message status in the list (5). For example, if the list contains an error message, the message button inherits the error icon and semantic color. If the most critical message in the list is a warning, the message button shows the warning icon and corresponding semantic color, and so on.

Message button types
Message button types

If there are no messages to display, there is no message button. In this case, the footer toolbar contains only the “normal” actions for the task.

Message Details

The message details page shows:

  • The message short text (1).
  • A more detailed message text to explain the issue and propose a solution (2).
  • An optional link to more information, such as app documentation (3).
Detail page of the message popover
Detail page of the message popover

Behavior and Interaction

When Does the Message Popover Open?

Form Field Validation

If one or more errors occur when the user fills out a form, the message button appears, indicating the message type of the most critical message. The message popover does not open automatically. For more information on the different validation points, see Form Field Validation.

Form field validation behavior
Form field validation behavior

Finalizing Actions

If the user activates a finalizing action (such as Create, Save, or Submit), the message popover opens automatically to inform the user about the errors on the UI that need to be resolved first.

Message popover triggered by a finalizing 'Save' action
Message popover triggered by a finalizing 'Save' action

Navigation to the Second Page

If the message provides a long text from the back-end system, the user can navigate to a second page within the message popover. There, the user will typically find more information and help.

Navigation to the detail page of the message popover
Navigation to the detail page of the message popover

Navigation to the Relevant Field

The navigation link takes users directly to the field on the UI that triggered the message. This can be a field in the visible area, a field somewhere else on the same page, or a field on another tab or screen.

Guidelines
Always add a navigation link, where possible.

For more information about the navigation, see Navigating to the Corresponding Field on the UI in the Message Handling article.

Developer Hint
Set the navigation link with the activeTitlePress event. This allows users to click the message text in both the first and second page of the message popover.
Navigation from the message text to a field on the UI
Navigation from the message text to a field on the UI

Responsiveness

Size S (Smartphone)

On smartphones, the message popover is automatically shown in full screen mode.

Full screen message popover on a smartphone
Full screen message popover on a smartphone

Top Tips

  • Whenever possible, provide a navigation link from the message to the relevant field on the UI.
  • Use the message subtitle to indicate the field label.
  • In forms, also highlight the individual fields, and change their value state according to the type of message. For more information, see Form Field Validation.

Related Topics

Elements and Controls

Implementation

P13n Dialog

The p13n dialog control provides a dialog for tables that allows the user to personalize one or more of the following attributes:

  • Columns (visibility and order of columns)
  • Sort (sorting of table values)
  • Filter (filtering of table values)
  • Group (grouping for specific attributes)

These tabs can be shown in any combination, as the use case requires.

The P13n dialog is intended for complex tables with a large number of columns and the need for complex queries for sorting, grouping, and filtering.
For simple tables, see view settings dialog and table personalization dialog.

The P13n dialog can be triggered in the table toolbar using the corresponding buttons in the top right-hand corner of the table.

The dialog is shown centered, either as a dialog (on desktop and tablet devices) or as a full-screen dialog (on mobile devices).

Dialog buttons within the table toolbar
Dialog buttons within the table toolbar

Usage

Use the P13n dialog if:

  • The user is able to personalize more than 20 or so columns.
  • You need several functions for sorting, grouping, and so on.
  • You are using the analytical table.
  • Complex queries have to be built for the relevant table.

Do not use the P13n dialog if:

  • The user is able to personalize fewer than about 20 columns.
  • You only need a simple column show/hide feature.

Responsiveness

The P13n dialog is available for all display sizes. For sizes L/XL (desktop) and M (tablet), the dialog is shown as a dialog. For size S (smartphones), the P13n dialog is displayed as a full-screen dialog.

Size S – Columns
Size S – Columns
Size M
Size M
Size L
Size L

Components

The P13n dialog consists of four different tabs that can be used separately or combined, as required by the use case:

  • Sort
  • Filter
  • Group
  • Columns

App developers can add more tabs manually.

Behavior and Interaction

Columns

The first tab is the Columns tab. It allows the user to change the table columns that are shown and the order in which they are displayed.

The list contains all of the table’s possible columns in the form of list items with checkboxes. The checkboxes of the currently displayed columns are selected.

Another button next to the search field in the table toolbar allows the user to toggle between showing all columns and only those that are currently selected in the list.

Show/Hide

To show or hide a column, select or deselect the appropriate checkbox.

Reorder

To change the order of the columns, simply mark one list item and use the buttons on the right-hand side of the table toolbar to move them up or down. The order of the columns from top to bottom corresponds to the order on the table from left to right.

Search

If the table has numerous columns, the user can use the search field in the table toolbar to find a specific column more quickly. As soon as the user enters the first letter, the resulting columns are displayed instantly.

Column settings in the P13n dialog
Column settings in the P13n dialog

Sort

The second tab is the Sort tab, which allows the user to sort the table content according to the chosen attributes, and also in either ascending or descending order.

The sort criterion consists of two input fields. In the first field, the user can choose a column by which the table is to be sorted. In the second field, the user chooses the sort order (ascending or descending).

For more complex sorting needs, the user can add the required number of criteria by clicking the plus “ ” sign at the end of the line.

The order of the criteria is exactly the same as the order in which sorting is applied to the table.

Sort settings in the P13n dialog
Sort settings in the P13n dialog
Information
Using the sort feature on column headers replaces ALL sort options in the dialog!

Filter

The third tab is the Filter tab, which allows the user to filter the table information according to specific criteria.

The filter criteria can be included or excluded in the relevant section of the filter.

Column

In the first input field, the user selects the column to be filtered. Any of the columns can be selected; even those that are not currently visible.

Option

The second field offers an operator for specifying the filter in more detail. The operators that are available depends on the data type of the selected column.

Filter tab in the P13n dialog
Filter tab in the P13n dialog

String (Text)

  • between
  • contains
  • equal to
  • begins with
  • ends with
  • greater than
  • greater than or equal to
  • less than
  • less than or equal to

Number

  • between
  • equal to
  • greater than
  • greater than or equal to
  • less than
  • less than or equal to

Date

  • between
  • equal to
  • after
  • on or after
  • before
  • before or on

Boolean (true / false)

  • equal to

The only available operator for excluding values from the filter results is equal to.

Value

The last field contains the value by which the selected column is filtered. The kind of input field that is provided depends on the data type of the selected column.

Two or even more fields can be provided as required by the use case.

For more complex cases, the user can add filters by clicking the plus “ ” button or remove them by clicking the Remove button at the end of each filter item.

Information
If there is a filter bar, use its filter functionality and deactivate the filter feature of the P13n dialog.

Group

The last tab is the Group tab, which enables the user to group the table data by one or more columns.

In the first selection field, all columns are provided for selection. The user can select a checkbox on the right of the column selection field if the selected field is to be displayed as a column anyway.

For more complex grouping scenarios, the user can add more grouping options by clicking the plus “ ” button on the right-hand side of each grouping line. This option only works with the analytical table.

The grouped table shows the selected field as the group header, which can be expanded or collapsed.

Under the group headers, all subgroup headers and all applicable table entries are displayed.

Group tab in the P13n dialog
Group tab in the P13n dialog
Information
To group by a specific column, that particular column must be marked as visible on the Columns tab!

Guidelines

For opening the dialog from a table toolbar, use different buttons for each function (sort, filter, group, column settings). With each button, open the P13n dialog with just the corresponding tab. Do not display the other tabs.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Busy Dialog

The busy dialog informs the user about an ongoing operation. During the operation, the entire screen is blocked.

Usage

Use the busy dialog if:

  • The user should not be able to start any other activity during an operation, and the screen needs to be blocked while the operation is ongoing.
  • The operation lasts more than one second.
  • You want to indicate loading in a page-to-page navigation.

Do not use the busy dialog if:

  • The operation lasts less than one second.
  • The screen is not supposed to be blocked. In this case, use the busy indicator or busy state of the control instead.

Responsiveness

The busy dialog is fully responsive and can be shown in compact and cozy mode.

Busy dialog - Compact mode
Busy dialog - Compact mode
Busy dialog - Cozy mode
Busy dialog - Cozy mode
Busy dialog on smartphone
Busy dialog on smartphone
Developer Hint
To switch to compact mode for a dialog, you need to use:

jQuery.sap.syncStyleClass(“sapUiSizeCompact”, this.getView(), this._oDialog);

For more information, see the SAPUI5 Demo Kit.

Components

The busy dialog can consist of several components and is configurable. The following properties can be set:

  • Title: By default, it has no title. Define a title if you need to provide more context.
  • Text: Additional text can be added above the busy animation.
  • Cancel:(Property:showCancelButton) A Cancel button is displayed. There is no Cancel button by default. The label is also configurable via Property.cancelButtonText.
  • Icon: A custom animation icon can be set via Property:customIcon.

If no title, text, or Cancel button is set, the busy dialog displays only the busy icon (busy dialog, lightweight version).

Busy dialog with title and 'Cancel' button
Busy dialog with title and 'Cancel' button
Busy dialog without title and 'Cancel' button
Busy dialog without title and 'Cancel' button
Busy dialog - Lightweight version
Busy dialog - Lightweight version

Guidelines

Lightweight Version (No Title, Text, or Cancel Button)

  • Use the lightweight version for page navigation (see live example).
  • If you do not show a title or text, use the invisible text control (sap.ui.core.InvisibleText) to provide the reason for the busy state to users with assistive technologies.

Developer Hint

The additional text should be associated to the busy dialog using ariaLabelledBy association.

Busy Dialog with Text

  • Do not use the title of the busy dialog.
  • If a busy dialog is triggered directly by the user, provide a precise text describing the operation. The text can be as short as one verb:
    • Loading…
    • Refreshing…
    • Sending…
  • If the busy dialog is not directly initiated by the end user, use at least one sentence to describe the operation. Start either the first or the last sentence with Please wait. For example: The system is busy searching data. Please wait until data is loaded.
  • Recommendation: Do not use the invisible text control when you show text in the busy dialog.

Busy Dialog with Text and Cancel Button

  • Offer Cancel if you expect the process to run more than 10 seconds. In addition, always display text that precisely describes the ongoing operation.
  • Do not change the mouse cursor to indicate the ongoing operation.
  • Recommendation: Do not use the invisible text control when you show text in the busy dialog.

Timing and Duration

We recommend displaying the busy dialog one second after the process has been triggered and for a minimum time of 500 ms to avoid flickering. For processes that last less then one second, a busy dialog is not displayed at all.

Example: A process takes 1.3 s in total. After one second, the busy dialog is displayed. The process finishes in 1.3 seconds. To avoid flickering, you should display the busy dialog for at least 500 ms, so you will need to add 200 ms to avoid flickering.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Filter Bar

The filter bar filters item lists and tables according to various filter criteria. You can use it for both simple and complex lists, regardless of their size. To handle complex lists with multiple filters, the filter bar provides predefined, customizable filter sets (variants).

Filter bar within the dynamic page
Filter bar within the dynamic page
Information
The filter bar now supports the dynamic page. Do not use the filter bar in the sap.m.Page for new SAP Fiori apps. For more information on the differences, see the filter bar guideline for version 1.52.

Responsiveness

Because tables appear in many apps, from simple to complex ones, the filter bar needs to run on all form factors. While the main concept of the filter bar remains stable across the devices, its responsive design adapts the control’s behavior to match the ability of each device.

Size S (Smartphones)

Expanded filter bar (size S)
Expanded filter bar (size S)
Collapsed filter bar (size S)
Collapsed filter bar (size S)
Filter dialog (size S)
Filter dialog (size S)

Size M (Tablet)

Expanded filter bar (size M)
Expanded filter bar (size M)
Collapsed filter bar (size M)
Collapsed filter bar (size M)
Filter dialog (size M)
Filter dialog (size M)

Size L/XL (Desktops)

Expanded filter bar (size L/XL)
Expanded filter bar (size L/XL)
Collapsed filter bar (size L/XL)
Collapsed filter bar (size L/XL)
Filter dialog (size L/XL)
Filter dialog (size L/XL)

Layout

Filter Dialog

The filters inside the filter dialog are arranged in a vertical linear layout. If filter groups are maintained, the filters are visually grouped in sections, with the filter group name at the top. A link at the end of each group allows the user to add or remove filters from that group. The link text is Change Filters if at least one filter is activated, indicating that filters can be added or removed. If no filters have been set for the group, the link text is More Filters, indicating that more filters can be added.
The first group is called “Basic” and contains the preset filters that come with the app. A checkbox next to each filter enables the user to show the corresponding filter on the expanded filter bar. If the checkbox is selected, the filter is shown on the expanded filter bar. If the checkbox is not selected, the filter is only visible within the filter dialog. In both cases, the filter is active if a value is entered.
The vertical layout of the filter dialog remains stable across all devices. To ensure a clean grid layout appearance, the size of the widest input field is inherited by all other filters.
Filter dialog (size L)
Filter dialog (size L)
Filter dialog (size S)
Filter dialog (size S)

Expanded Filter Bar

The expanded filter bar arranges the input fields in a simple horizontal linear layout. If the browser’s window size is reduced or the filters exceed the first line, a simple mechanism opens a new line of filters. The height of the expanded filter bar is not limited and adjusts to accommodate the filters that need to be shown. The label is always above the input field. As in the filter dialog, the size of the widest input field is inherited by all other filters. This avoids having unstable and busy-looking grid layouts.
Filter bar (size L) with one row of filters
Filter bar (size L) with one row of filters
Filter Bar (Size L) with more than one row of filters
Filter Bar (Size L) with more than one row of filters
Filter bar (size S) with vertical filters
Filter bar (size S) with vertical filters

Components

Collapsed Filter Bar

The collapsed filter bar takes up very little space, leaving the bulk of the screen to display the actual results. However, the variant selector in the upper left corner is still available for switching between variants. The user can expand or collapse the filter bar by clicking on the header. If required by the use case, the filter bar can be expanded by default.
On desktop and tablet devices, the collapsed filter bar shows a summary of the filters currently applied. It shows Filtered By (x):, where “x” stands for the number of applied filters. This is followed by a comma-separated list of the filters currently applied. Up to 5 filters are listed. If more filters have been applied, an ellipsis (…) shows at the end of the string. If no filters have been applied, the summary text is Filtered By: None.
Collapsed filter bar
Collapsed filter bar

Expanded Filter Bar

Developer Hint
In addition to the collapsed filter bar, the expanded filter bar shows a user-defined filter subset of the currently selected variant.
The Adapt Filters (x) link opens the filter dialog, and allows the user to add filters or hide them. The Go button triggers the filter. The Go button is only shown in manual mode.
Expanded filter bar
Expanded filter bar

Filter Dialog

Developer Hint

The filter dialog is the central component that shows all filters of the selected variant, allowing the user to add filters to the variant or remove them. Filters are arranged into their respective filter groups. The user can search for a specific filter by name in the search bar at the top.

The footer toolbar at the bottom of the dialog provides the following functions:

  • Save: Saves your modified variant filter set (Save and Save As can be provided)
  • Cancel: Closes the dialog and undoes all changes
  • Restore: Restores the initial variant values (you can hide this button if it does not fit the app’s use case)
  • Go: Executes the selected filter set
  • Clear (optional): Clears all input fields/filters (this button should only be used if it fits the app’s use case)

The user can choose to hide filters on the expanded filter bar by deselecting the relevant checkbox next to the filter in the filter dialog (for example, if a filter is rarely edited, or unimportant).

Filter dialog
Filter dialog

Variant Selector

The variant selector is used to select the current variant, and also provides access to variant management.
Variant selector
Variant selector

Filter/Input Controls

Filter/input controls
Filter/input controls

When designing the filter bar, pick the simplest input control that works for your use case. Avoid unnecessary complexity in the filter bar.

If there is a predefined list for single or multiple selection, use the select control or combo box control. For temporal information, you can use the date picker or date range selector. To help the user enter a valid value for multi-input fields, you can enable suggestions.

For a comprehensive overview of when to use which input field, see Selection Controls – Overview.

Use the value help control only as a last resort. It is especially beneficial if you want to offer an advanced function for selecting single or multiple items either inline (by entering text) or by means of a dialog.

Developer Hint
For development information, see data types for the smart filter bar.

Behavior and Interaction

The filter bar contains the following actions:

Selecting a Variant

The main use case for the filter bar is to select and execute variants that influence the list of items. In this example, the variant applies its filter set automatically. The item list is filtered without the user needing to click Go.

Personalizing the Expanded Filter Bar

Users can hide a filter on the expanded filter bar by deselecting the checkbox next to the relevant filter in the filter dialog. This allows the user to hide filters that are rarely changed from the extended filter bar, giving complex filters a more lightweight appearance.

Adding Filters to a Variant

In the filter dialog the user can access more filters for every filter group. Filters can then be added or removed in a separate dialog. Once a filter has been added or removed, it appears or disappears from the filter dialog. If the user selects the checkbox next to the filter, the filter is displayed on the extended filter bar.

Saving a New Variant

You can save new filter variants either in the variant selector or in the filter dialog.

Once you have changed an existing variant, an asterisk (*) is displayed next to the current variant name, indicating its “dirty state”.

You can either save the adapted variant with the current name (overwrite), or save it under a new name.

Option 1 – Variant Selector

Open the variant selector and choose Save As. Type your desired variant name into the input field and select OK.

Save new variant in variant selector
Save new variant in variant selector

Option 2 – Filter Dialog

Choose Adapt Filters to open the filter dialog. Choose Save from the footer toolbar and type your desired variant name into the input field. Select OK.

Save new variant in filter dialog
Save new variant in filter dialog

Guidelines

Default Variant Filters

For all filter bars, provide a set of predefined default filters that come with the app (“Basic” group in the filter dialog). Include filters that are:
  • Mandatory / crucial to the use case
  • Frequently used
  • Vital for reducing the number of items in the list
Users can hide filters in the “Basic” group, but cannot remove them from the filter dialog.
Default variant
Default variant "Basic"

Default Values

Provide a meaningful default value for as many filters as possible. Meaningful default values depend on your use case.

A default value for date ranges, for example, should reflect the time frame the user would normally apply. App designers need to decide which time frame is appropriate.

Appropriate default values are particularly crucial for filter sets and list reports that operate on large datasets. In this case, consider making certain default filters mandatory to help the user avoid loading very large datasets unnecessarily.

For list reports and overview pages, ensure that mandatory filter fields always have default values. Otherwise, users will see error messages when the page loads.

Filter without default value
Filter without default value
Filter with available values
Filter with available values
Filter with a default value
Filter with a default value

Table Filtering and Table Searching

Provide the user with a central location filtering and searching. If you use a filter bar, do not provide filter options or search options for the control below (for example, a table, chart, or list.). Avoiding multiple filter locations also helps to prevent confusing or contradictory entries (for example between the filter bar and a table filter).
Do
Table without filtering option
Table without filtering option
Don't
Table with filtering option
Table with filtering option

Initial State

The filter bar can initially be collapsed or expanded, depending on the use case:

Initial State Collapsed

If the app has a default variant that is executed on loading, the table is prefilled, and the user seldom changes the filters, the app can start with a collapsed filter bar.

Initial State Expanded

If the app does not use a default variant and the user has to set a filter to obtain a first result set for the table, start with an expanded filter bar. Also, if a vast number of items are expected, include some mandatory filters with default values. Since the user first has to enter values for these filters, start with an expanded filter bar. If you are in any doubt, start the app with an expanded filter bar.

Note: At least one filter must be defined to begin with. This filter is set within the basic group by app designers. If the use case allows, and depending on the size of the result set, provide a table that is initially filled.

Initial state collapsed
Initial state collapsed
Initial state expanded
Initial state expanded

Basic Search Field

The basic search field allows the user to filter the results by a given keyword. In contrast to the other input fields, the basic search field has a placeholder text instead of a label.
Note: If you need to provide a search field, use the basic search field. The search field within the table must be deactivated.
Filter bar with basic search field
Filter bar with basic search field

Live Update / Manual Update

The filter bar is available in two separate modes: Live update mode and manual update mode.

Live Update

The live update mode is the default mode. The filter bar reacts instantly to every input change. The result table is updated every time the user changes a filter field or the search field. Therefore, a Go button is not necessary and is not shown if live update mode is used.

The search is triggered with every letter that is entered, starting with the first letter the user types. The table is updated with the results that match all set filters and include the search term.

Manual Update

In the manual update mode, the filter results are only updated when the user clicks or taps Go. A Go button is therefore mandatory in manual update mode. Pressing ENTER on the keyboard also triggers the filter.

Which Mode Should I Use?

We recommend using live update mode, which is more convenient for the user. However, if the user has to configure multiple filters to obtain a useful result set, or if the resulting traffic is expected to be excessively high, consider using manual update mode instead.

Filter bar in live update mode
Filter bar in live update mode
Filter bar in manual update mode
Filter bar in manual update mode

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Button

Buttons allow users to trigger an action. There are 4 button types:

  • Simple button for one action
  • Toggle button to switch between different states
  • Segmented button with a group of options
  • Menu button with a group of actions
Common button types
Common button types

Usage

Use the button types as follows:

  • Use simple buttons for specific actions, such as:
    • Create, Edit, Save
    • Approve, Reject
    • Accept, Decline
    • OK, Cancel
  • Use toggle buttons in a toolbar to activate or deactivate an object or element. You can also use toggle buttons to switch between different states.
  • If you want the user to select one option from a small group, offer a segmented button in the toolbar. For example:
    • Year, Month, Day
    • Small, Medium, Large
  • Use the menu button if you need a menu that provides more than one option.

Do not use buttons if:

  • You want to link to a different page or object. Use the link instead.
  • You want to let users upload content. Use the upload collection control instead.

Responsiveness

The button usually grows to fit the size of the text. If you set a fixed size for the button, the text truncates.

If the button is used in a responsive container or toolbar, it follows the responsive behavior defined for that element. For example, the button can move to another line.

Buttons with different lengths
Buttons with different lengths

Menu Button

The maximum width of the menu button is 12 rem (192 px). If the button text exceeds the maximum or fixed width, it truncates.

On smartphones (size S), the menu opens in a full screen dialog, and the button label becomes the title of the dialog. The footer contains a Cancel button. Items with submenus become navigable. Navigation is similar to that used in a popover, with a Back button.

On tablet and desktop devices (sizes M and L), the menu button triggers a cascading dropdown menu.

Open menu button
Open menu button
Menu button popover on size S
Menu button popover on size S

Types

Button

Buttons can trigger primary, secondary, semantic, and negative path actions. These different action types are explained in more detail in the action placement guideline.

Header and Footer Toolbars

Use the following button styling for the different action types in the header and footer toolbar:

  • Primary action: Use the emphasized button style.
  • Secondary action: Use the ghost button style. 
  • Semantic action: Use the semantic buttons for positive and negative actions. Use the “accept” style for positive actions, and “reject” for negative actions. Semantic actions must always be text buttons.
  • Negative path action: Use the transparent button style.

Content Toolbars

Use the following button styling for the different action types in content toolbars (for example, in tables, forms, or charts):

  • Primary action: Use the emphasized button style. Usually, the primary action is positioned in the header or footer toolbar. Note that there can only be one primary action per page. If a page already has a primary action, but you also need to highlight the most important action in a content toolbar, use the ghost styling for this one button in the content toolbar.
  • Secondary action: Use the transparent button style.

The different button styles are designed to give appropriate feedback to users. Don’t use them for decoration purposes.

Button with different styles
Button with different styles

Toggle Button

A toggle button switches between two actions. One of the actions is always active, one is inactive. Use the toggle button for secondary actions.

Apply the following button styles for the different toolbars:

  • Header and footer toolbars: Use the ghost button style.
  • Content toolbars: Use the transparent button style.
Toggle buttons
Toggle buttons

Segmented Button

A segmented button shows a group of options. Only one of the options can be active, the others remain or become inactive. Pressing an option activates it. By default, the control for segmented buttons calculates the button width and applies it to all buttons within the group. You can change this by setting the width for individual buttons.

The segmented button is comparable to a radio button group control.

Segmented buttons
Segmented buttons

Menu Button

There are two different types of menu buttons. Both can contain items with submenus.

Regular Menu Button

When the user activates the button, the menu opens. This is the default type.

Split Menu Button

The split menu button is separated into two areas: the text label and the icon. The separator between them signals that the two areas result in different actions. The user has two choices: activating the text label on the button triggers the action. Activating the arrow opens the menu. The split button consolidates a variety of commands, especially when one of the commands is used more often.

In split mode, the text label depends on the default action. If the default action is displayed as an icon only, all the menu items must contain icons.

Split Menu Button Behaviors

The split menu button can have two different behaviors:

  1. The button always triggers the default action set by the app developer. If no default action has been defined, the first item in the menu list becomes the default.
  2. The button triggers the last action chosen by the user. Initially, it also triggers the default action. However, when the user selects a different action, this user action becomes the default, and the button text label changes accordingly. The button has a fixed size and the text truncates if the menu item exceeds the available width (as with the combo box).

Toolbars

Apply the following menu button styles for the different toolbars:

  • Header and footer toolbars: Use the ghost style.
  • Content toolbars: Use the transparent button style.

Do not use any other styling types.

Menu buttons
Menu buttons

Components

A button can contain an icon OR a text.

Always use a text button for primary, secondary, semantic and negative path actions.

Use icon buttons only if the icon metaphor is easily recognizable. Ideally, it should have same meaning worldwide.  For more information about icons in general, check out the article on iconography.

Behavior and Interaction

To trigger the action, the user clicks the button, toggle button, or segmented button using a keyboard, touchscreen or screen reader. The button provides visual feedback for “hover”, “press-down”, and “focused” states.

  • A toggle button remains in the pressed state until it is pressed again.
  • In a segmented button, the chosen option stays active until the user presses one of the other options.
  • menu button displays a dropdown menu on activation.
  • In a split button, selecting the button text triggers that action directly. Activating the arrow opens a dropdown menu. If the user selects a menu item, the action is triggered and the menu closes.

If an action cannot be triggered, or is temporarily unavailable, use the disabled state for the corresponding button.

All three button types support the cozy and compact form factors. For more information, check out the article on content density.

Regular state
Regular state
Hover state
Hover state
Press-down state
Press-down state
Disabled state
Disabled state
Focused state
Focused state
Opening a menu button with subitems
Opening a menu button with subitems

Guidelines

Button Text

  • Choose a button text that is short and meaningful. Check out the UI text guidelines for more information.
  • Use a verb in the imperative for all actions (for example: SaveCancel, Edit).
    Note: The grammatical form for actions can differ for other languages. For example, German action labels use the infinitive (Speichern, Abbrechen, Bearbeiten).
  • Keep in mind that the text can be up to 300% longer in other languages.
  • If you need to show the number of items that will be affected by the action of the button, you can add the number in parentheses. For example, Edit (3).

Icon Buttons

  • Make sure the default accessibility text for the icon is correct for your use case. If the text is not ideal, define an app-specific accessibility text.
  • Offer a tooltip to show the label for icon buttons.
  • Don’t use the icon control for buttons. Use the icon property for the button instead.

Examples

Header toolbar with primary action (emphasized styling) and secondary actions (ghost styling)
Header toolbar with primary action (emphasized styling) and secondary actions (ghost styling)
Table toolbar with search field, text buttons (ghost and transparent styling), icon buttons (transparent styling), and segmented button
Table toolbar with search field, text buttons (ghost and transparent styling), icon buttons (transparent styling), and segmented button
Footer toolbar with standard actions: 'Save' (emphasized) and 'Cancel' (transparent)
Footer toolbar with standard actions: 'Save' (emphasized) and 'Cancel' (transparent)

Related Links

Elements and Controls

Implementation


  • No links

Label

A label is the name or title of a control or group of related controls.

Label
Label "Name" in a form

Usage

Use the label control if:

  • You need a label for a control. We recommend that you always use labels for form controls.

Do not use the label control if:

  • You want to insert a heading in the column header of a table.
  • You want to use it as an alternative for the text control. Do not use the label control to display the data (for example, in display-only forms).

Types

There are two types of labels:

  • Required
  • Optional

To indicate that a field is required, set the required property to true. An asterisk is then added automatically in front of the label.

Required label in an editable environment (horizontal layout)
Required label in an editable environment (horizontal layout)
Result of a required label in a display-only environment
Result of a required label in a display-only environment
Optional label in an editable environment (vertical layout)
Optional label in an editable environment (vertical layout)
Result of an optional label in a display-only environment
Result of an optional label in a display-only environment

Styles

For better differentiation of labels and values, labels are displayed differently in a display-only environment than in an editable environment.

Wrapping

Automatic wrap only applies to labels within forms to avoid truncation.

Do not use wrapping to enable long labels. Instead, keep your labels short: a label is not a help text. It must be meaningful, succinct, short, and descriptive. For more information about the responsive behavior of text, see Wrapping and Truncating Text.

Developer Hint

The boolean wrapping property for the sap.m.Label control determines whether or not the text wraps .
Note: Only use this property in forms.

Hyphenation

The label control also supports hyphenation for wrapped texts (property: wrappingtype = Hyphenated). Switching on hyphenation activates it for all languages that have hyphenation support.

Wrapping label
Wrapping label

Guidelines

  • Always use a label for form controls.
  • Always set the vertical alignment for labels that display outside a form and flex box (property: VAlign). You can set the vertical alignment in tables and object page header facets, for example.
  • Use title case for labels.
  • Do not use a placeholder (input prompt) instead of a label.
  • Do not use bold labels.
  • A label is not a help text: it must be meaningful, succinct, short, and descriptive.

Exceptions

The layout can sometimes be simplified by using a placeholder instead of the label control. This exception can be applied in the following cases:

  • When the form pattern is easily understood, such as on a login screen. Since this screen consists of only two input controls (User Name and Password), the labels do not have to be used.
  • When the form is extremely small and has fewer than three input fields. This can be the case for messages or small feedback forms.
  • In search fields. For more information, see Search.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Tree Table

A tree table contains a hierarchical set of data structured in rows and columns and grouped into nodes. The analytical table (also know as ALV) can provide additional details in several non-hierarchical columns per line item. 

Usage

Trees are used to display and work with large amounts of hierarchical data. They have a high data density and therefore convey an immediate feeling of complexity. Ideally, you should only show trees with a lot of hierarchical data as a last resort. Try the following instead:

  • Break down the data into manageable chunks and allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Responsiveness

A tree table is available for desktops and tablets, but not in smartphone sizes. It supports touch devices, but is not optimized for small screens.

If you use a tree table, note that you have to implement a fallback solution for small screens. This fallback solution does not need to support all use cases.

Possible fallback solutions are as follows:

  • Use navigation to different pages instead of a tree structure. This works well for structures that are no more than four levels deep.
  • Remove levels until only one or two remain. Replace a single-level tree by a table, and a two-level tree by a grouped table or a split-screen layout.
  • Use filtering instead of a tree structure.

You can try to create a fallback based on these ideas, but a completely different solution, such as showing charts in a read-only case, might be more appropriate.

Tree table shown on a desktop
Tree table shown on a desktop
Tree table shown on a tablet
Tree table shown on a tablet

Types

Like all SAP Fiori controls, the tree table is shown in compact mode on a desktop and in cozy mode on tablets.

For a desktop, you can also display even more rows on the same screen height by adding the condensed mode in addition to the compact mode. This renders less white space for each item.

Note that the condensed content density has always to be set in addition to compact. Do not use condensed on its own. Do not mix condensed with cozy. Doing so could lead to unpredictable and / or unwanted results, e.g. cozy sized controls in condensed sized containers, missing padings, etc.

Note that neither compact mode nor condensed mode can be interacted with via touch. Even on a desktop with a touch screen, users will have difficulty selecting rows or using controls inside the cells when using their fingers.

Furthermore, condensed mode is not available for Internet Explorer 9. If condensed mode is to be used, please provide a fallback.

For more information on cozy and compact modes, see content density.

Compact Mode

Tree table - Compact mode
Tree table - Compact mode

Condensed Mode

Tree table - Condensed mode
Tree table - Condensed mode

Components

Column Header

The column header provides the label for the corresponding column and access to the column header menu.

Resizing columns works in the following ways:

  • Mouse interaction: Dragging the separator line between two columns (sap.ui.table. Column, property: Resizable). Double-clicking optimizes the column according to the length of the currently visible data and the label of the column header (sap.ui.table.Column, property: Autoresizable).
  • Touch interaction: The user taps the column header to reveal two buttons: one for showing the column header menu and one for resizing. Drag the latter to resize the column.

After resizing a column, the adaptation of the column widths depends on how the column width is set:

  • If column widths are set in pixel-based units (px, em, rem), the corresponding column is adapted and following columns are moved accordingly. The width of all other columns is not affected.
    If all the columns together take up less width than the table control, an empty space is added. If all the columns together take up more width than the table control, a scrollbar appears.
  • If all column widths are set in percentage or “auto”, resizing one column might also lead to the automatic resizing of some or all other columns. The position of the resized column might also be affected. This is done to ensure that the whole table width is used and no white space is added. A scrollbar appears only, if all or most of the columns get very small. To avoid the unintended side effect of undersized columns, a minimum width can be set per column. Please be aware that this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users are still able to reduce the column width below the provided minimum. (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: width, minWidth)

Columns can be rearranged by dragging the column header to another position (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, property: enableColumnReordering).

Tree table – Column header
Tree table – Column header
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Less columns than space available
Less columns than space available

Line Item

A line item contains a set of cells and provides options for selecting the item.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, property: rowHeight).

Tree table – Line item
Tree table – Line item

In rare cases, show actions within the line item. An example would be an Add to Cart button in a shopping application. Since these actions are repeated in every line and thus use a lot of screen real estate, only do this for one or two actions at most. In this case, show the action trigger near the content to which it belongs. Do not add a specific column for actions, but instead use transparent-style buttons. An exception to this is if the action trigger belongs to a link.

Tree Column

The first colum (tree column) provides the hierarchical structure.

Tree table – Tree column
Tree table – Tree column

Expand/Collapse Button

The expand/collapse button is offered on container nodes to allow the child items of the corresponding container to be shown or hidden.

Tree table – Expand/collapse
Tree table – Expand/collapse

Container Node

A container node is a line item that contains child elements.

Tree table – Container node
Tree table – Container node

Leaf Node

A leaf node is a line item that does not contain child elements.

Tree table – Leave node
Tree table – Leave node

Cell

Each cell provides one data point. It can contain one of the following controls to display the data point:

While it is technically possible to also use other controls, doing so could lead to issues in regards to alignment, condensed mode, screen reader support, and keyboard support.

If you use text, use only single-line text to keep the same row height. Truncate if necessary as this prevents adverse side effects when scrolling vertically (sap.m.Text, property: wrapping, value: false).

Tree table – Cell
Tree table – Cell

Tree Cell

A tree cell is a cell inside the tree column. Besides its data point, it provides a collapse/expand button on container nodes, and it indents the different hierarchy levels.

Tree table – Tree cell
Tree table – Tree cell

Column Header Menu

For the tree column, the column header menu can contain the menu item Freeze and a Filter field, in which the user enters free text.
For all other columns, only the free text filter is available.

Tree table – Tree column header menu
Tree table – Tree column header menu

Selection Cells

For multiselection tree tables, the first column contains checkboxes for selecting line items. Besides multiselection, the tree table offers a single-selection mode and also a read-only mode, in which line items are not selectable.

Tree table – Selection cells
Tree table – Selection cells

Select All

For multiselection tree tables, the column header can contain a checkbox above the selection cells for selecting or deselecting all line items.

Tree table – Select all
Tree table – Select all

Scrollbar

The tree table allows horizontal and vertical scrolling. You can add any number of line items to the tree table, which uses “lazy loading”.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, property: rowHeight).

The tree table is optimized to allow faster scrolling within the first 1000 items.

Tree table – Vertical scroll bar
Tree table – Vertical scroll bar

Behavior and Interaction

Selection

The tree provides the following possibilities:

No selection: Items cannot be selected. (property: selectionMode = None)

Tree table – No selection
Tree table – No selection

Single selection: One item in the tree table can be selected. A row selector column is shown. (property: selectionMode = Single)

Tree table – Single selection
Tree table – Single selection

Multiple selection: One or more items can be selected. The tree table provides a column with checkboxes on the left-hand side. Clicking a checkbox toggles the state of the corresponding row from deselected to selected and back. The Shift key can be used to select a range.

For multiple selection, you can choose between two variants.

  • Multi-toggle mode (property: selectionMode = MultiToggle)
  • Multi-selection plug-in (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin)

These variants behave differently when the user selects more items than are currently loaded in the front end.

Multi-toggle

In multi-toggle mode, you can offer a Select All checkbox to the left of the column header (property: enableSelectAll). Selecting this checkbox selects or deselects all items that are currently loaded in the front end. All other items are not selected/deselected. If the application data is stored in the back end, scrolling down further can reveal additional unselected items. The same can happen with range selections if not all items in the selected range have been loaded to the front end.

Multi-selection plug-in

If you use this plug-in instead of the multi-toggle selection mode, the behavior for range selection and Select All changes:

  • By default, a dedicated Deselect All button replaces the Select All checkbox. There is no default UI element for selecting all items.
  • You can set a limit for the number of items that can be selected (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin, property: limit). This limit has the following effect:
    • The range that can be selected using the Shift key is limited to the specified number of items (default = 200). The table automatically scrolls back to the last selected item. Users can select more items by selecting additional ranges (the specified limit applies each time).
    • If the selection limit is set to 0, a Select All checkbox is shown. There is also no limit on the number of items that can be selected in a range. All selected items are loaded, which can lead to performance issues for large data sets.
  • If selected items are not already available in the front end, they are loaded automatically by the plug-in and set as selected.
Information
When setting a limit for the number of items that can be selected, keep the following boundaries in mind:

  • The performance of your service: How many items can be loaded at once in a reasonable time? Does this also apply if an end-user shows all available columns?
  • The “minimum limit”: Internally, the grid table loads blocks of items as the user scrolls down. Because this block size (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, property: threshold) is usually also based on the performance of the service, it should be safe to assume that the minimum selection limit is twice this size. In this case, loading the data would take as long as scrolling down and loading exactly one more block. Nevertheless, we recommend using larger limits if your service allows.

Tree table – Multiple selection
Tree table – Multiple selection
Using the multi-selection plug-in with a limit
Using the multi-selection plug-in with a limit

Selection Behavior

An item can be selected in different ways, depending on the configuration of the tree table (sap.ui.table.Table, property: selectionBehavior):

  • Row: An item is selected by clicking the checkbox or the row. Use this option for multi-selection tree tables if clicking a row or a cell is not used for anything else.
  • RowSelector: An item is selected only by clicking the checkbox in the selector cell. Use this option if clicking the row (or a cell inside the row) is used for something else, such as navigation.
  • RowOnly: An item is selected only by clicking the row, and not using checkboxes in the selector cells. Use this for single-selection tree tables if clicking a row or a cell is not used for another purpose, such as navigation.

Set the property collapseRecursive to “false” in order to keep the selection on subnodes even after collapsing and expanding the root node.

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a table or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position  (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and Drop
Drag and Drop

Column Header Menu

Sort

The column header menu can provide two sort options (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: sortProperty, showSortMenuEntry):

  • Sort Ascending
  • Sort Descending

The user selects one of these options to sort the corresponding column accordingly (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

Sort settings in column header menu
Sort settings in column header menu

Filter

The column header menu can provide a search field for entering free text. If the user enters a term in the input field and triggers the search by pressing Enter, the tree is filtered by the tree column and the corresponding value. If no items match the filter values, the filtered tree table may be empty.

Tree table – Filter
Tree table – Filter

Freeze Columns

The Freeze/Unfreeze option is provided in the column header menu of all columns. Using Freeze on one column freezes all columns from the first one to the selected one.

Tree table–- Freeze
Tree table–- Freeze

Column Handling

Show/Hide Columns

Columns can be shown and hidden. If the tree column is hidden, the following column is the tree column.

Rearrange Columns

The user rearranges columns by dragging and dropping the corresponding column header. The tree column is always the first column and cannot be dragged.

Resize Columns

Columns are resized as follows:

  • Mouse interaction: The user drags the separator line between two columns (sap.ui.table. Column, property: Resizable). Double-clicking the line optimizes the column according to the length of the currently visible data and the label of the column header (sap.ui.table.Column, property: Autoresizable). Note that auto-resizing works only if the cells in this column contain one of the following controls: text, label, link, or input.
  • Touch interaction: The user clicks or taps the column header to reveal two buttons: One to show the column header menu, and one for resizing. The user drags the latter to resize the column.

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a table. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

When opened, the context menu gets the row and column context, except for special columns (such as the selection column) or special rows (like group headers). Context menus can be implemented for a specific table, row, or cell (not recommended for editable cells).

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a table is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Tree table with context menu
Tree table with context menu

Cell Content

The tree is traditional in that each cell can contain only one data point in one single line.

Apart from plain read-only text, cells can contain the following:

While it is technically possible to also use other controls, doing so could lead to issues in regards to alignment, condensed mode, screen reader support, and keyboard support.

If you use text, use only single-line text to keep the same row height. Truncate if necessary as this prevents adverse side effects when scrolling vertically (sap.m.Text, property: wrapping, value: false).

Guidelines

Filtering

What exactly needs to stay or be removed is highly dependent on the kind of structure and data your tree table displays. For many trees, the following approach works well if you want to apply filters only to the leaves of a tree:

  • Remove all leaves that don’t fit the filter criteria
  • Remove empty nodes

Where nodes need to be filtered, keep the following in mind:

  • A node may or may not fit the filter criteria.
  • A node can contain items (nodes and/or leaves) that fit the filter criteria.

Because of this, the results might contain more nodes than those that are relevant for the filter criteria.

Developer Hint
The tree table itself has no influence on the filter result. It sends a filter request and displays whatever comes back. Make sure that the result set is meaningful.

Sorting

First of all: Is sorting meaningful in your tree? If so, decide on a meaningful default sort order.

If sorting is meaningful, is it meaningful on all levels? Or does the tree structure need to be stable? In the latter case, sort only leaves, but not nodes.

To display the current sort state, an icon is shown in the column header of the most recently sorted column. This icon indicates the sort direction (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order. For each column, provide a meaningful sort order. For example:

  • Sort text alphabetically
  • Sort numbers by their value
  • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
    • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
    • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
    • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
    • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.

Loading Data

To indicate that the table is currently loading items, use the busy state (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data has been loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Initital Display

Think of the initial expand / collapse state of a tree: If your structure contains many items on the root level, it might make sense to collapse the whole tree in the beginning.

In contrast, if the main items to work with are displayed on a deeper level (e.g. the parent nodes are just some kind of categorization), the tree should be expanded up to the first level where the needed items appear.

Selection

  • We strongly recommend using the multi-selection plug-in. This ensures that all items selected using Select All or as part of a range are included – even if some items were not initially loaded in the front end. This is not the case if you use the multi-toggle option.
  • Do not limit the range selection for the multi-selection plug-in unless you have to.
    • If the dataset is small and/or completely available in the front-end, set the limit property to 0 to enable the Select All option and allow users to select any range.
    • If you have a large dataset, set a limit on the number of selected items to avoid performance issues. Also bear in mind that some actions won’t be helpful if the dataset is too big (for example, a delete operation on 2 million database entries).
  • In multiple selection mode, do not show checkboxes in the first data column in the default delivery to avoid confusion.

Empty Table

Try to avoid empty tables. If necessary, provide instructions on how to fill the tree table with data.

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items.

Add Items

For adding items, place an Add or Create text button on the table toolbar.

  • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
  • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.

Show new items as the first item of the tree table or node:

  • If nothing is selected, add the new item to the root.
  • If a single node is selected, add the new item to the selected node.
  • If a single leaf is selected, add the new item as child of this leaf. The original selected item becomes a node.

If your tree doesn’t support adding items to the root, selected node, or selected leaf, disable Create or Add for the corresponding levels.

Disable Create or Add if more than one item is selected.

For more details, see the guidelines for managing objects (including subarticles).

Enabling/Disabling Actions

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection:

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user how many items will be affected. Let the user choose whether to apply the action anyway or cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

If the action was applied and the items are still available, keep them selected.

Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection
Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection

Columns

Minimize the number of columns. Avoid the need to scroll horizontally in the default delivery. In the first column, show the hierarchical data, which should identify the line item. Choose the name over the ID, but if both are needed, show the name first, then the ID.

The tree table assigns the same width to each column by default. It is recommended that you overwrite this default to provide optimal space for your content (sap.ui.table.Column, property: width).

If you define the column width in pixels or rems, resizing a column affects only the width of this specific column. Reducing the browser window size results in a scrollbar. After resizing a column, a scrollbar appears if the width of the table is not enough to show all columns. If the columns use less space than is available, white space appears on the right side of the last column.

If you define the column width as a percentage, resizing one column affects the width of several or all columns. Text becomes truncated when the browser window size is reduced. This is done to make sure that all columns together fill the space of the table. A scrollbar appears only in case the automatic change of the column widths is not enough to display all columns. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, a minimum width can be set per column. Please be aware that this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users are still able to reduce the column width below the provided minimum. (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: width, minWidth)

If you define the column width as “auto”, the behavior is the same as for “percentage”. In contrast to percentage, “auto” distributes the columns equally.

To decide on how to set the column width (pixel/rem/em vs. percent/auto), keep the following tips in mind:

  • For tables with only 2 to 3 columns, use pixel-based units. This ensures that on wide screens the values in the columns are not spread over the whole screen, which improves readability of line items.
  • For tables with many columns, where a horizontal scrollbar is usually needed, use pixel-based units. This avoids unintended side effects when resizing columns.
  • For all other tables, use whatever fits your case better.

Be cautious with mixing columns with pixel-based and percentage-based widths. While this can be helpful in some cases, it could also cause even more unintended side effects when resizing a column. When using percentage-based widths for one or more columns, think of the possibility to not allow end users to resize columns at all.

Alignment of Cell Content

Align column headers according to their cell content:

  • Texts are left-aligned.
  • Numbers (except for IDs), dates, and times are right-aligned.
  • Icons are centered.
  • Micro charts are left-aligned.

In addition, align amounts with currencies to the decimal point. You can do this with the sap.ui.unified.Currency control.

Note that most currencies have two digits after the decimal point, but there are exceptions, for example:

  • The Tunisian dinar has three digits.
  • The Japanese yen has no digits.

In tree tables with mixed currencies, all amounts still have to be aligned to the decimal point.

To enable positive and negative values to be identified more easily, position the minus sign to the right of the number. It is placed in the same position in every row.

For more information, see currency.

Formatting Cell Content

  • Note that there are different locale formats, so show dates, times, and numbers in the format corresponding to the user’s language.
  • If text and an ID are to be shown, show the ID in brackets after the corresponding text.
  • If the unit of measurement is the same for all rows, show the unit of measurement in the column header. Otherwise, show the unit of measurement within the row.
  • If you want to let users sort, filter, or group by amount and by unit of measure independently, put both in different columns. If you combine them in one column, offer only sorting, filtering, and grouping by amount.

Tree vs. Table

Trees are more complex than tables due to their hierarchical view. Users tend to have more problems finding items in hierarchical views than in flat lists, except where the hierarchical view is natural. By natural we mean that every child node should be part of only one parent, and this relationship between the child and parent is clear and well known.

Do
Example of an acceptable use of tree tables
Example of an acceptable use of tree tables
Do
A clear parent-child relationship
A clear parent-child relationship

When you use trees, you should choose broad hierarchies over deep hierarchies. Deep hierarchies make finding items more complicated. So try to reduce hierarchical levels where possible, especially if the hierarchy is not natural. Ideally, a tree should have a maximum of four levels, the first two of which should contain the most important items.

Don't
Avoid unnecessary depth in the hierarchy
Avoid unnecessary depth in the hierarchy
Do
Favor breadth over depth in the hierarchy
Favor breadth over depth in the hierarchy

You can use the following methods to reduce hierarchy levels:

  • Avoid single root nodes. A single root node is often used to provide a Select All feature. Since the tree control provides an extra space for a Select All feature, the root node is not usually needed.
  • When you use only two levels, choose a grouped table or grouped ALV over a tree table control. Expand all groups for the default delivery.
  • Container nodes at the top level can usually be replaced by tabs or value pickers.
  • Eliminate unnecessary mid-level containers, for example, by combining redundant ones.
  • Exercise care when using a tree due to its overall complexity. The hierarchical structure of the data does not necessarily mean that a tree control is required.

Design Concepts

The tree table can be used to display large amounts of hierarchical data. Unfortunately, tree tables have a high data density and therefore convey an immediate feeling of complexity. Ideally, tree tables with large amounts of data should only be shown if there is no other option. You should instead try the following:

  • Flatten the data. A list, table, or ALV is still complex, but less so than a tree table.
  • Break down the data into manageable chunks. Allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Try to avoid horizontal scrolling in the default delivery.

Navigation

To trigger navigation on line item level, choose one of the following options:

  • Use a link for the attribute that identifies the row. Clicking the link triggers the navigation. This is the preferred option.
  • Add the RowActions column and show the navigation arrow (  ) at the end of the row. No column header text is required. The navigation column is fixed and will not scroll away. Users also cannot personalize this column. The navigation arrow triggers the navigation.
    Do not use the RowActions column for actions other than navigation and deletion.

Examples of Incorrect and Correct Usage

When you use trees:

  • Choose breadth over depth.
  • Emphasize important values. Do not let the user run into a wall of text without guidance. You can use bold text for this.
  • Try to minimize the number of columns, especially if there is a large number of rows.
  • Optimize column width for its initial visible content. Do not automatically adjust column width based on content changes.
  • Do not wrap content, truncate it. End users can easily change the column width to see the full text.
Don't
Avoid: The initial visible content should not be truncated in the default delivery
Avoid: The initial visible content should not be truncated in the default delivery
Don't
Never wrap texts
Never wrap texts
  • Maintain a fixed layout, except when the user wants to change it.
  • In the default layout, use the tree column for the item name or data that identifies the row. This helps the user to choose between different items.
  • Create a clear and immediately understandable hierarchy. Use clear parent-child relationships. If this is not possible, add a child in different nodes to help the user find the element.
Do
Acceptable: repeat entries to optimize finding items
Acceptable: repeat entries to optimize finding items
  • Consider persisting the layout settings. When a user reopens the app, show the tree table with the same column sizes, column order, and view settings as last defined by this user.
  • Use the Select All feature only if it makes sense. Note that selecting a lot of data also takes time and might not be appropriate for all use cases. For example, a delete operation on two million database entries might not be very helpful in many cases.
  • Set the property collapseRecursive to “false” in order to keep the selection on subnodes even after collapsing and expanding the root node.

Empty Tree Tables

Avoid empty tree tables. If necessary, provide instructions on how to fill the tree table with data (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, properties: noDataText, showNoData).

Examples:

  • If a tree table is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the tree table with data.
  • If a tree table is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    No filters set. To start, enter your search and filter settings and run the search.
  • If a tree table is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No items found. Check the search and filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, no search is offered, only the search is offered).
  • You are using the live search (no Go button in the filter bar). In this case, leave out “run the search”.
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of search and filter settings).

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, you can display a highlight indicator in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to show:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry-specific or process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”.

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users exactly what is wrong. Make sure that you provide this information within the table row, ideally in the same color.

For details on the use of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.ui.table.TreeTable, aggregation: rowSettingsTemplate)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. Also, because there is no generic keyboard interaction, drag and drop isn’t accessible. Moreover, drag and drop is not available on all browsers. For these reasons, offer drag and drop only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within a tree table, use the following options:

  • For dropping items as a child, use whole nodes as drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.On).
  • For dropping items on the same level, use the space between items as drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between).
  • If you want to allow users to drop items as a child or sibling, offer both drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.OnOrBetween).

This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Drop target on an Item
Drop target on an Item

Do not combine rearranging items within one level and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

Moving items from one node to another can be combined with sorting without any issues.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items on the same level with sorting
Do not combine rearranging items on the same level with sorting

Visible Alternatives to Drag and Drop

Depending on the functionality you need, use one or more of the following alternatives:

  • To move items up or down within a node:
    Use the  Move Up and  Move Down buttons on the toolbar. These buttons move the selected items until the first selected item can’t be moved up / the last selected item can’t be moved down any further.
    Depending on your tree, this can make sense for both leaves and nodes, only for leaves, or only for nodes. When moving a node, move the whole node and (if applicable) all its children up or down to the next position within the parent node.
    Always make sure that when the user moves an item in one direction and then moves it back, the order is the same as it was before.
    Do not combine the option to move items up and down with sorting.
  • To move items to another node:
    Use Copy and Paste buttons on the toolbar.
    Alternatively, offer a Move To button. Clicking Move To opens a dialog that shows all the nodes of the tree, but no leaves. Selecting an item in this dialog closes the dialog and moves the corresponding items to the selected node.
  • To change the level of an item:
    In some trees, such as document structures, users can change the level of an item without affecting the level of parent or child items. In this case, use left and right arrow buttons (   ).

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar). Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

The context menu can be triggered for the table, row, or cell. However, we do not recommend using context menus for cells: because the content of a cell is a different touch target than the cell itself, opening a cell context menu via touch is quite hard, even in cozy mode.

Do not combine context menus with condensed mode: editable controls fill the entire space inside a cell. Because of this, context menus cannot be opened at all with touch or mouse interaction.

Tables in Object Pages

In the object page, we advise against using analytical, grid, and tree tables. Instead, use a responsive table and offer navigation to a list report with the table types mentioned above.

For more information on the use of tables within the object page, see the Tables section of the Object Page article.

Export to Spreadsheet

On the table toolbar, apps can provide a menu button for exporting table data to a spreadsheet. For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button
'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Analytical Table (ALV)

An analytical table contains a set of data that is structured in rows and columns. It provides several powerful possibilities for working with the data, including advanced grouping and aggregations.

In contrast to other tables, the analytical data binding used by the analytical table allows an aggregated number to be shown automatically in a cell. This means that a number in such a summarized cell is a total sum of several lines in the database.

Usage

Use the analytical table (ALV) if:

  • The cell level and the spatial relationship between cells are more important than the line item. Examples include spreadsheet analyses and waterfall charts. Note that an analytical table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You have to work on more than 1,000 rows. In this case, the analytical table is easier to handle. In contrast to the responsive table, the architecture of the analytical table is optimized for handling large numbers of items. Note that an analytical table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • Comparing items is a major use case. In this case, an analytical table might be more appropriate than a responsive table. In the analytical table, each cell contains only one data point. In contrast, the responsive table is more flexible regarding line items, including the ability to add more data points per cell and also the pop-in function. Both make comparisons more difficult. Note that an analytical table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.

Do not use the analytical table (ALV) if:

  • You need a table. The responsive table is the default table in SAP Fiori. Additional use cases where you might need the responsive table include:
    • You need to provide a total sum for one column. You can also add totals to the responsive table.
    • The focus is on working on line items, not on cells. The responsive table is optimized for displaying complete items on all devices (such as purchase orders and purchase requisitions).
    • Selecting one or more items is a main use case and details are needed to choose the correct item.
    • Line items are independent of each other and no operation across columns is needed.
    • You want to have only one implementation for all devices.
  • The main use case is choosing one item from a very small number of items with no additional details. A select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • The main use case is choosing one out of several items with only a few details per item. A list might be more appropriate. Pay attention to the layout of the list item to ensure that it has a pleasant appearance. Examples include the master list and the attachment list.
  • You cannot provide an analytical binding on the technical side. In this case, a grid table will do the work. Note that the grid table provides only one level of grouping, no aggregation options, and is also not responsive.
  • Data needs to be structured in a hierarchical manner. In this case, a tree table might be more appropriate. Although the analytical table can have several grouping levels, it is not as flexible when nodes at several levels contain children. Note that neither the tree table nor the analytical table are responsive. You will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones and tablets.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use charts.
  • You just need it for layout reasons. In this case, use a layout container like HBox or VBox.
  • You need read-only or editable field-value pairs. Use a form instead. The analytical table is not optimized for form-like input navigation.

Responsiveness

The analytical table is available for desktops and tablets, but not in smartphone sizes. It supports touch devices, but is not optimized for small screens.

If you use an analytical table for desktop use cases, note that you must implement a fallback solution for mobile and touch devices. This fallback solution does not need to support all use cases.

You could create a fallback by using a responsive table. However, a completely different solution, such as showing charts in a read-only case, might be more suitable.

Analytical table (ALV) shown on a desktop
Analytical table (ALV) shown on a desktop
Analytical table (ALV) shown on a tablet
Analytical table (ALV) shown on a tablet

Components

An analytical table does not consist of other elements. However, it is common to use a toolbar above the analytical table.

The toolbar can contain entry points for the view settings dialog and the table personalization dialog or for the p13n dialog, as well as for view switches in the form of a segmented button, and buttons for Add, Edit, and other actions.

Behavior and Interaction

An analytical table is quite restricted in terms of its content, although it provides powerful features for working with the content.

Table Level

Scroll

An analytical table allows horizontal and vertical scrolling (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: navigationMode, value: Scrollbar).

You can add any number of line items to the analytical table, which is known as “lazy loading”.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: rowHeight).

The analytical table is optimized to allow faster scrolling within the first 1000 items.

Scroll bar
Scroll bar

Select

Selection for an analytical table depends on the chosen selection mode. The following options are available:

No selection: Items cannot be selected. (property: selectionMode = None)

Analytical table without item selection
Analytical table without item selection

Single selection: One item in the analytical table can be selected. A row selector column is shown. (property: selectionMode = Single)

Analytical table with single selection
Analytical table with single selection
  • Multiple selection: One or more items can be selected. The analytical table provides a column with checkboxes on the left-hand side. Clicking a checkbox toggles the state of the corresponding row from deselected to selected and back. The Shift key can be used to select a range. For multiple selection, you can choose between two variants.
    • Multi-toggle mode (property: selectionMode = MultiToggle)
    • Multi-selection plug-in (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin)

    These variants behave differently when the user selects more items than are currently loaded in the front end.

    Multi-toggle

    In multi-toggle mode, you can offer a Select All checkbox to the left of the column header (property: enableSelectAll). Selecting this checkbox selects or deselects all items that are currently loaded in the front end. All other items are not selected/deselected. If the application data is stored in the back end, scrolling down further can reveal additional unselected items. The same can happen with range selections if not all items in the selected range have been loaded to the front end.

    Multi-selection plug-in

    If you use this plug-in instead of the multi-toggle selection mode, the behavior for range selection and Select All changes:

    • By default, a dedicated Deselect All button replaces the Select All checkbox. There is no default UI element for selecting all items.
    • You can set a limit for the number of items that can be selected (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin, property: limit). This limit has the following effect:
      • The range that can be selected using the Shift key is limited to the specified number of items (default = 200). The table automatically scrolls back to the last selected item. Users can select more items by selecting additional ranges (the specified limit applies each time).
      • If the selection limit is set to 0, a Select All checkbox is shown. There is also no limit on the number of items that can be selected in a range. All selected items are loaded, which can lead to performance issues for large data sets.
    • If selected items are not already available in the front end, they are loaded automatically by the plug-in and set as selected.
Information
When setting a limit for the number of items that can be selected, keep the following boundaries in mind:

  • The performance of your service: How many items can be loaded at once in a reasonable time? Does this also apply if an end-user shows all available columns?
  • The “minimum limit”: Internally, the analytcial table loads blocks of items as the user scrolls down. Because this block size (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: threshold) is usually also based on the performance of the service, it should be safe to assume that the minimum selection limit is twice this size. In this case, loading the data would take as long as scrolling down and loading exactly one more block. Nevertheless, we recommend using larger limits if your service allows.

Analytical table with multiple selection
Analytical table with multiple selection
Using the multi-selection plug-in with a limit
Using the multi-selection plug-in with a limit

Selection Behavior

An item can be selected in different ways, depending on the configuration of the analytical table (sap.ui.table.Table, property: selectionBehavior):

  • Row: An item is selected by clicking the checkbox or the row. Use this option for multi-selection tables if clicking a row or a cell is not used for anything else.
  • RowSelector: An item is selected only by clicking the checkbox in the selector cell. Use this option if clicking the row (or a cell inside the row) is used for something else, such as navigation.
  • RowOnly: An item is selected only by clicking the row, and not using checkboxes in the selector cells. Use this for single-selection tables if clicking a row or a cell is not used for another purpose, such as navigation.

Compact, Cozy, and Condensed

Like all SAP Fiori controls, the analytical table is shown in compact mode on a desktop and in cozy mode on tablets.

For desktop devices, you can fit even more rows onto the screen by using the condensed mode together with the compact mode. This renders less white space for each item.

Note that the condensed content density must always be set in addition to the compact mode. Do not use the condensed mode on its own. Do not mix condensed with cozy. Doing so could lead to unpredictable or unwanted results, such as cozy-sized controls in condensed-sized containers, missing padding, and so on.

Note that neither compact mode nor condensed mode support touch interaction. Even on a desktop with a touch screen, users will have difficulty selecting rows or using controls inside the cells with their fingers.

For more information on cozy and compact modes, see content density.

 

 

 

 

Analytical table in compact mode
Analytical table in compact mode
Analytical table in condensed mode - more items on the same screen real estate
Analytical table in condensed mode - more items on the same screen real estate

Column Header

The column header provides the label for the corresponding column and access to the column header menu.

Columns are resized as follows:

  • Mouse interaction: The user drags the separator line between two columns (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: Resizable). Double-clicking the line optimizes the column according to the length of the data currently visible and the label of the column header (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: Autoresizable).
  • Touch interaction: The user clicks or taps the column header to reveal two buttons: one to show the column header menu and one for resizing. The user drags the latter to resize the column.

When the user resizes a column, the adaptation of the column width depends on how the column widths are set:

  • If column widths are set in pixel-based units (px, em, rem), the resized column is adapted and subsequent columns are moved accordingly. The width of all other columns is not affected.
    If all the columns together do not use up the full width of the table control, empty space is added. If all the columns together exceed the width of the table control, a scrollbar appears.
  • If all column widths are set as percentages or “auto”, resizing one column automatically resizes one or more other columns. Resizing can also affect the position of the resized column. This option utilizes the full width of the table and ensures that no white space is added. A scrollbar appears only if all or most of the columns become to narrow. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, you can set a minimum width per column. However, this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are resized automatically. End users can still reduce the column width to below the defined minimum (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: width, minWidth).

Users can rearrange columns by dragging the column header to another position (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: enableColumnReordering).

Column header
Column header
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Columns do not use up the available space
Columns do not use up the available space

Column Header Menu

For each column, a menu can contain the following menu items (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumnMenu, property: Visible):

  • Sort Ascending/Descending (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: showSortMenuEntries)
  • Free text filter (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: showFilterMenuEntries)
  • Group
  • Totals
  • Freeze from the first to the last specified column (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: enableColumnFreeze)

For each column, the menu can be replaced by an app-specific menu.

Column header menu
Column header menu

Sort

The column header menu can provide two sort options (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: sortProperty, showSortMenuEntry):

  • Sort Ascending
  • Sort Descending

The user selects one of these options to sort the corresponding column accordingly (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

Sort settings in column header menu
Sort settings in column header menu

Filter

The column header menu can provide a search field for entering free text (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: filterProperty, showFilterMenuEntries).

If the user enters a term in the input field and triggers the search by pressing ENTER when the focus is on the filter input field, the analytical table is filtered by the corresponding column and value (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, properties: filtered, filterProperty, filterValue, filterOperator, sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: filterType).

Note that the filter may return zero results, in which case, the table might be empty.

General recommendations for filtering:

  • If filtering is a main use case, choose the filter bar or any other filtering UI over the built-in free text filter.
  • Only use the free text filter if filtering is a secondary use case and if the filter bar is too heavy.
Free text filter in column header menu
Free text filter in column header menu

Group

The column header menu can provide the option to group by this column (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: sortProperty).

One group collects all items with the same value within the corresponding column.

Group setting in column header menu
Group setting in column header menu

If line items are grouped in a column, every group is provided with a collapsible or expandable group header (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: grouped). The header text consists of the column name and the value for the corresponding group (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: groupHeaderFormatter). Several grouping levels are possible.

The corresponding column can be hidden to avoid duplicates (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: showIfGrouped). Exercise caution when using this option since hiding the column changes the table layout and may lead to confusion.

Group headers and the corresponding columns are shown – The relevant data is duplicated
Group headers and the corresponding columns are shown – The relevant data is duplicated
Group headers shown, the corresponding column hidden – No duplicates
Group headers shown, the corresponding column hidden – No duplicates

Aggregation

The column header menu can provide the option to show or hide aggregation totals for this column.

Aggregation in column header menu
Aggregation in column header menu

Intermediate aggregations are shown at group level for the corresponding columns if the group contains more than one line item (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: summed).

Group total
Group total

The overall aggregation is shown at the bottom of the analytical table.

Overal aggregation
Overal aggregation

Freeze Columns

The column header menu can provide the option to freeze columns (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: enableColumnFreeze). Selecting Freeze freezes all columns up to the one in which the operation was triggered (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: fixedColumnCount).

When Freeze is triggered, the menu item changes to Unfreeze for the corresponding column.

Freeze setting in column header menu
Freeze setting in column header menu

Line Item Level

A line item contains a set of cells and provides options for selecting the item.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height.

(sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: rowHeight)

Line item
Line item

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Cell Level

A cell provides one data point.

It can contain one of the following controls to display this data point:

While it is technically possible to also use other controls, doing so could lead to issues with alignment, condensed mode, screen reader support, and keyboard support.

If you use text, use only single-line text to keep the same row height. Truncate if necessary as this prevents adverse side effects when scrolling vertically (sap.m.Text, property: wrapping, value: false). Do not wrap.

Cell
Cell

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a table. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

When opened, the context menu gets the row and column context, except for special columns (such as the selection column) or special rows (like group headers). Context menus can be implemented for a specific table, row, or cell (not recommended for editable cells).

By default, the analytical table provides a context menu on the group headers (for example, Expand, Collapse, …). Otherwise, no default context menus are provided.

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a table is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Analytical table with context menu
Analytical table with context menu

Guidelines

Data Density vs. Complexity

The analytical table can be used to display and work with large amounts of data. Unfortunately, the analytical table has a high data density and therefore conveys an immediate feeling of complexity.

Only show tables with a lot of data as a last resort. To make the data easier to read, you should instead try the following:

  • Break down the data into manageable chunks and allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Try to avoid horizontal scrolling in the default delivery.

Try to minimize the number of columns, especially if there is a large number of rows.

Table Title

Implement the table title by using a title control in a toolbar.

Use a table title only if the title of the table is not indicated in the surrounding area.

Do not use a table title if it simply repeats text that is already above the table. For example:

  • A pricing conditions table is the only control on a tab labeled Pricing Conditions.
  • A section or subsection on an object page contains only one table.

Use a table title if you need the item count, table toolbar, or variant management. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a table title, such as Items.
Exception: If the surrounding area contains the table title, and both the item count and toolbar can be added to the surrounding area, no additional table title is needed.
Example: An object page (sub-)section contains only one table. In this case, add the item count and the table toolbar to the (sub-)section header.

If you use a table title, show either a title for the table, with or without variant management, or an item count in the following format:

Items (2,534).

The item count in the table title includes all the visible items that a user can reach by scrolling or expanding groups. Group headers are not included.

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items.

Developer Hint
Assistive technologies (such as screen readers) use the title to create a hierarchical site map for faster navigation. In addition, screen readers use the title as the label for the table.

If you don’t use a title (for example, to avoid repetition), make sure that the table is connected to another meaningful on-screen text that can be used as a label for assistive technologies. You can do this using the method addAriaLabelledBy.

Multiple Selection

  • We strongly recommend using the multi-selection plug-in. This ensures that all items selected using Select All or as part of a range are included – even if some items were not initially loaded in the front end. This is not the case if you use the multi-toggle option.
  • Do not limit the range selection for the multi-selection plug-in unless you have to.
    • If the dataset is small and/or completely available in the front-end, set the limit property to 0 to enable the Select All option and allow users to select any range.
    • If you have a large dataset, set a limit on the number of selected items to avoid performance issues. Also bear in mind that some actions won’t be helpful if the dataset is too big (for example, a delete operation on 2 million database entries).

In multiple selection mode (multi toggle), do not show checkboxes in the first data column in the default delivery to avoid confusion.

Don't
Do not add checkboxes to the first column
Do not add checkboxes to the first column

Loading Data

To indicate that the table is currently loading items, use the busy state (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Columns – Best Practices

Minimize the number of columns. Avoid the need to scroll horizontally in the default delivery.

By default, the analytical table assigns the same width to each column. We recommend overwriting this default to provide optimal space for your content (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: width).

If you define the column width in pixels or rems, resizing a column affects only the width of this specific column. Reducing the size of the browser window results in a scrollbar. If the user resizes a column, and the total width of all columns exceeds the table width, a scrollbar appears. If the columns do not take up the full table width, white space appears to the right of the last column.

If you define the column width as a percentage, resizing one column affects the width of several or all columns. Reducing the size of the browser window truncates the texts. This ensures that the columns fill up all the available space. A scrollbar appears only if width of all the columns still exceeds the table width after the automatic width adjustments. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, you can set a minimum width per column. However, this this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users can still reduce the column width to below the defined minimum (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: width, minWidth).

If you set the column width to “auto”, the behavior is the same as for “percentage”. However, unlike “percentage”, “auto” distributes the columns equally.

To decide on how to set the column width (pixel/rem/em vs. percent/auto), keep the following in mind:

  • For tables with only 2 to 3 columns, use pixel-based units. This ensures that the values in the columns are not spread over the whole screen on wide screens, which improves the readability of the line items.
  • For tables with many columns, where a horizontal scrollbar is usually needed, use pixel based units. This avoids unintended side effects when resizing columns.
  • For all other tables, use whatever fits your case better.

Be cautious when mixing columns with pixel-based and percentage-based widths. While this can be helpful in some cases, it can also cause even more side effects when resizing a column. If you are using percentage-based widths for one or more columns, consider not allowing end users to resize columns at all.

Optimize the column width for its initial visible content, including the column header texts. If this is not possible (for example, if showing the full texts would result in extremely wide columns), let the texts truncate. End users can change the width of the column to read the full text, as needed.

Maintain a constant column width and avoid adjusting it automatically when the content changes.

Always keep to one line of text. Do not wrap.

Don't
In the default delivery, the initial visible content should not be truncated
In the default delivery, the initial visible content should not be truncated
Don't
Never wrap texts
Never wrap texts

Column Headers – Best Practices

For each column, provide a label in the column header. In the default delivery, do not truncate the column header texts. Only let the text truncate if showing the full text would make the column too wide. Never wrap the text.

Content Alignment

For alignment of cell content, follow the guidelines below.

Left-align: text, IDs, phone numbers, URLs, passwords, and email addresses.

Left-alignment of text
Left-alignment of text

Right-align: numbers, except IDs, to ensure comparability of numbers and amounts.

Right-alignment of numbers
Right-alignment of numbers

Right-align amounts with currencies to the cell and align them in terms of their respective decimal points.

This ensures that amounts with different currencies are shown correctly, whether these currencies have 0, 2, or 3 decimals.

For aligning to the decimal point, use the sap.ui.uinified.Currency control.

Alignment to decimal point
Alignment to decimal point

Right-align dates and times.

This ensures comparability for most formats and locales.

Right-alignment of dates
Right-alignment of dates

Left-align status information.

Left-align status information
Left-align status information

Center-align icons.

Left-align micro charts.

XS micro charts in condensed mode
XS micro charts in condensed mode

Content Formatting

Key Identifier

Use a bold label or an emphasized link as the key identifier of an item. In the default delivery, show the key identifier in the first column.

Emphasized link
Emphasized link

For strings with IDs, use one of the following:

  • Show the ID in brackets after the corresponding string. Use this format if sorting, grouping, or filtering is only needed on the string, but not on the ID.
  • Show the ID in a separate column. Use this format if sorting, grouping, or filtering on the string and the ID is needed.
Text and ID in one column – Sorting, filtering, and grouping only on the text
Text and ID in one column – Sorting, filtering, and grouping only on the text
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link
Text and ID in two columns – Allows sorting, filtering, and grouping on both
Text and ID in two columns – Allows sorting, filtering, and grouping on both
If displayed as a link, use only the string as the link, not the ID
If displayed as a link, use only the string as the link, not the ID

Truncation

Avoid truncation of typical content in the default delivery (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: width). However, since the columns are resizable, do not worry too much if truncation occurs as columns can still be enlarged if necessary.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must also have the same height. If you need to decide between truncation and different row heights, choose truncation. Do not wrap.

Optimize column width for typical content, not all content
Optimize column width for typical content, not all content

Number of Links

Are there too many links? Use subtle links to avoid a wall of links. Standard links are also emphasized more if they are surrounded by subtle links.

For example, a financial table consists of several columns with summarized cells. A summarized cell shows the total sum of several database entries. Each sum should be a link to a report that shows details about which database entries produce the total sum. The line item identifier should also be a link that provides more detail about the line item itself. Use a standard or emphasized link for the item identifier, and subtle links for the summarized cells.

Emphasized links, links, subtle links, and text
Emphasized links, links, subtle links, and text

Missing Value

If there is no value for a cell, leave it blank. Do not display text as N/A.

Leave empty fields blank
Leave empty fields blank

Numbering Items

In terms of numbering items:

  • If the item number is more like an ID with regard to its description, use ID formatting as described above.
  • In all other cases, use a separate column for the item number.
Add a separate column for the item number
Add a separate column for the item number

Status

For status information, use semantic colors on the foreground elements.

For status information on text, use an object status.

Semantic colors on text
Semantic colors on text

Micro Charts

Use only the following micro charts: Bullet, comparison, stacked bar. When using micro charts, use them in size XS.

Micro charts in an analytical table
Micro charts in an analytical table

Empty Tables

Avoid empty analytical tables. If necessary, provide instructions on how to fill the analytical table with data (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, properties: noDataText, showNoData).

Examples:

  • If a table is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the table with data.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    To start, set the relevant filters.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No data found. Try adjusting the filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, a search is also offered, or only the search is offered).
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of filter settings).
Provide meaningful instructions
Provide meaningful instructions

Invalid State

To show an invalid state of the analytical table within the list report floorplan, show an overlay on the analytical table and the corresponding toolbar (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: showOverlay). The overlay prevents user interactions.

Use this within the list report floorplan if filter settings have been changed but the analytical table has not yet been updated.

Analytical table with invalid data
Analytical table with invalid data

Item States

To show that an item has been modified, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string (Modified) in an additional column with the label Editing Status.

In the default delivery, add a column directly behind the key identifier.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string Contains errors in the Editing Status column and highlight the row accordingly. This string replaces the Modified string.

A modified item with an error
A modified item with an error

To show that an item is locked, add a transparent-style button with the corresponding icon and the text Locked by [name] in the Editing Status column.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in draft state, add a transparent-style button with the text Draft in the Editing Status column.

Item in draft state
Item in draft state

Show only one state at a time.

Numbers and Units

Show the unit of measurement in one of the following ways:

The number and unit are in the same cell. Do this if sorting, filtering, or grouping by the unit of measurement are not needed.

Use a currency control to display the concatenated string.

Number and unit of measurement in one cell
Number and unit of measurement in one cell

The number and unit are in separate columns. Do this if sorting, filtering, or grouping by the unit of measurement are a common use case.

Note that this column can be hidden or moved independently of the column containing the corresponding number. Therefore, be sure to have clear labels for both columns to communicate the dependency.

Number and unit of measurement in two columns
Number and unit of measurement in two columns

If the unit of measurement is the same for all rows, show the unit of measurement in the column header. Otherwise, show the unit of measurement within the row.

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, drag and drop is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose, such as (toolbar) buttons.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

Do not use drag and drop for rearranging items in the analytical table. The analytical table is mainly used for grouping items and for calculating the totals per group and column. Moving items to another group also means that a value of the dropped item changes: because grouping is based on values in a column, the dropped item needs to take on the value of the target group for the corresponding column.

Example:
A table is grouped by availability. An item is moved from the group “Not Available” to the group “In Stock”. In this case, the moved item needs to change its availability to “In Stock” to match the target group. Because changing the value in this way doesn’t make sense, rearranging items is not permitted in analytical tables.

Don't
Do not use drag and drop for rearranging items in the analytical table
Do not use drag and drop for rearranging items in the analytical table

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar). Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

The context menu can be triggered for the table, row, or cell. However, we do not recommend using context menus for cells: because the content of a cell is a different touch target than the cell itself, opening a cell context menu via touch is quite hard, even in cozy mode.

Do not combine context menus with condensed mode: editable controls fill the entire space inside a cell. Because of this, context menus cannot be opened at all with touch or mouse interaction.

Actions

Multiple Items

To trigger actions on multiple items, use a multiselection analytical table (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: selectionMode, value: MultiToggle). Offer the corresponding actions in the table toolbar.

Do not offer action triggering on multiple items if the table is generally expected to have fewer than 10 items. In this case, try to use the responsive table instead of the analytical table.

Single Item

To trigger actions on a single item (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: selectionMode, value: Single):

  • Show the actions on the table toolbar.
  • In rare cases, show the actions within the line item. One example would be an Add to Cart button in a shopping application. Since these actions are repeated in every line and thus use a lot of screen real estate, do this only for a maximum of one or two actions. Provide a separate column per action. Use a button, unless the action trigger belongs to a link.

To trigger navigation on line item level choose one of the following options:

  • Use a link for the attribute that identifies the row. Clicking the link triggers the navigation.
  • Add the RowActions column and show the navigation indicator (  ) at the end of the row. The navigation arrow triggers the navigation.

Use the RowActions column only for one or both of the following actions:

  • Navigate to details page ( )
  • Delete ( )

The RowActions column does not provide a column header text. It is fixed and will not scroll away. Users also cannot personalize this column.

Single Cell

For triggering actions on a single cell, create the corresponding click event. Do not use the cell click event if the cell contains interactive controls, such as links.

Add Items

For adding items, place an Add or Create text button on the table toolbar.

  • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
  • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.

Show new items as the first item of the table, with a visual highlight at the beginning of the row.

For more details, see the guidelines for managing objects (including subarticles).

Enabling/Disabling Actions

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection:

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user how many items will be affected. Let users choose whether to apply the action anyway or cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

If the action was applied and the items are still available, keep them selected.

Message for action which applies to a part of a selection
Message for action which applies to a part of a selection

Editable Content

For editable content, only use the following controls, and only one control per cell:

Only these controls are optimized for all viewing modes of the analytical table.

If you need edit mode, change your text controls, such as label, text, link, object status, icons, and currencies, to editable controls as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before. You can do this by exchanging the controls, for example, from sap.m.Text to sap.m.Input.

For mass editing items:

  • Provide multiselection.
  • Provide an Edit button.
  • If several items are selected, clicking the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

This is similar to mass editing in the split-screen layout floorplan.

Warning
Do not offer editing for summarized cells. A summarized cell shows the total sum of several database entries. Changing the total sum does not make sense since it is unclear how this sum is divided between the different database entries.
Interactive controls – Inline
Interactive controls – Inline

View Settings

There are several ways to show Sort, Filter, and/or Group settings:

  • Column header menu: In all cases, show the corresponding settings in the column header menu.
  • View settings dialog: Simple and more flexible with regard to filter settings. No advantage for sorting. Allows the user to ungroup grouped columns.tables with a medium amount of items.
  • Table personalization dialog: Provides complex options for sorting items by several levels and allows the user to ungroup grouped columns. It also provides a query-builder-like approach for filter settings. The complexity of the options is also its downside. Use the table personalization dialog for tables with a large number of items.
  • If filtering is a main use case, use the filter bar. In this case, avoid offering additional filter settings on the table. If you do, the filter settings on the table work only on the result set provided by the filter bar.

Always be careful when synchronizing the settings in the dialog with the settings from the column header menu.

Trigger the dialogs in one of the following ways:

  • View settings dialog: Provide several buttons, one for each of these view settings. Each button opens the view settings dialog on the corresponding page.
  • Table personalization dialog: Provide a settings button, which opens the table personalization dialog containing all pages.

Use only the view settings you really need. For example, do not offer grouping if it does not support your use case.

 

Column header menu with view settings
Column header menu with view settings
Table toolbar with triggers for view settings dialog
Table toolbar with triggers for view settings dialog
Table toolbar with trigger for table personalization dialog
Table toolbar with trigger for table personalization dialog

Persist the view settings. When a user reopens the app, show the analytical table with the same sort, filter, group, and aggregation settings as last defined by this user.

Sort

To display the current sort state, an icon is shown in the column header of the last sorted column. This icon indicates the sort direction (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

For the default sort setting, sort by the column that identifies the row, which is usually the first column in default delivery. Use a meaningful sort order, such as alphabetical order for text, numeric order for numbers, or chronological order for dates.

Column, sorted ascending
Column, sorted ascending
Column, sorted descending
Column, sorted descending

The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order.

For each column, provide a meaningful sort order. For example:

  • Sort text alphabetically
  • Sort numbers by their value
  • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
    • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
    • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
    • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
    • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first

Filter

To display the current filter state, an icon is shown in the column header of the filtered column (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: filtered, filterProperty, filterValue, filterOperator, defaultFilterOperator, filterType).

Column, filtered
Column, filtered

Group

To display the current group state, group headers are shown. Show the following text in the group header (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: grouped, showIfGrouped, groupHeaderFormatter):

[Label of the grouped column]: [Grouping value]

If there is no grouping value, show the following text:
[Label of the grouped column]: (Not Available)

This is the case if you have a group of items that don’t have a value for the grouped column.

 

Set the property collapseRecursive to “false” to keep subgroups expanded even after collapsing and expanding the parent group.

Group headers, several levels
Group headers, several levels

On non-touch devices, right-clicking a group header opens the group header menu. On touch devices, the same menu is opened by using the menu icon on the right side of a group header.

The group header menu provides several options:

  • Show/Hide: Shows or hides the column in the table layout, although it is grouped.
  • Ungroup: When the user ungroups a column, the corresponding group headers disappear. If the column was hidden, it is shown again as a separate column.
  • Ungroup All: The columns are shown again.
  • Move Up: Rearranges the grouping levels hierarchy by moving the selected group above the group that is one level higher up in the hierarchy.
  • Move Down: Rearranges the grouping levels hierarchy by moving the selected group below the group that is one level lower down in the hierarchy.
  • Collapse Level: Collapses all groups on the corresponding grouping level.
  • Collapse All: All groups are collapsed.
Group header menu
Group header menu
Group header on touch devices
Group header on touch devices

In general:

  • Offer grouping on objects and attributes.
  • Do not offer grouping on measures.
  • If appropriate, offer reasonable grouping by default, but do not exaggerate. As a rule of thumb, use up to three group levels.
  • Provide more space for the first column. Grouping needs an indent per group level. Extra space in the first column prevents truncated text.

Aggregate

To display the current aggregation state, the total sum of the corresponding column is shown at the bottom of the table.

If items are grouped, an intermediate sum is shown:

  • At the bottom of each group if the group is expanded.
  • In the group header if the group is collapsed.

(sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: summed)

When aggregating amounts with different units of measurement, show an asterisk (*) in the aggregation rows.

When sorting an aggregated column, only the leaf nodes of a group are included by default. If each measure column currently displays a single unit of measurement, the order of the groups can also be affected.

For example:
Let’s assume that table items are grouped by Country/Region and aggregated by Total Net Amount. If you sort the Total Net Amount column in descending order, the largest total net amount is shown first.

Warning
Only enable sorting by totals if each column has a single unit of measurement. This prevents inconsistencies in the sorting behavior, which depends on user settings, such as filter settings or the columns currently displayed.
Developer Hint
To allow sorting by totals, the following conditions must be met:

  1. For each measure column, multiple units must not occur in the displayed data, regardless of whether or not totals are shown.
  2. The autoExpandMode of the AnalyticalBinding must be set to Sequential. Note that the default is Bundled.

In general:

  • Offer aggregation on measures, but not on objects or attributes.
  • Avoid aggregations on the first three columns for the default delivery. As soon as grouping is used together with aggregations, collapsing a group shows the aggregation on the group header. This conflicts with the group name.
  • Where appropriate, offer reasonable aggregation by default.
Aggregation and groups
Aggregation and groups

Personalization

Only offer personalization if you need more columns than a tablet screen can display at any one time, which is usually five.

Persist the column layout. When a user reopens the app, show the analytical table with the same column layout settings as last defined by this user.

Add, Remove, and Rearrange Columns

To add, remove, or rearrange columns, use one of the following:

  • The table personalization dialog: It offers some simple settings for column layout. Use this if you have only a few columns to choose from and/or you use the view settings dialog.
  • The p13n dialog: Besides various complex view settings, it also provides settings for column layout. Use this if you have a large number of columns to choose from and/or you use this dialog anyway for view settings.

In both cases, trigger the dialog via the settings button in the table toolbar.

You can also use drag and drop to rearrange columns (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnReordering). If you allow rearranging via drag and drop as well as via a dialog, keep both places in sync.

Resize Columns

Resizing columns works differently on touch and non-touch devices.

  • Non-touch devices: Drag and drop the column separator on the right side of the column. Double-clicking the column separator optimizes the width of the column for the data currently loaded into the front end, which is usually about 100 rows.
  • Touch devices: Clicking the column header reveals two buttons: one for opening the column header menu, another one for resizing the column. Drag and drop this second button to resize the column.

Freeze Columns

For freezing columns, offer the setting in the column header menu (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: enableColumnFreeze).

Selecting Freeze on a column freezes all columns from the first one to the one where Freeze is selected. On this column, the menu entry changes from Freeze to Unfreeze.

Frozen column
Frozen column

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, you can display a highlight indicator in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to show:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry-specific or process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”.

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users exactly what is wrong. Make sure that you provide this information within the table row, ideally in the same color.

For details on the use of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, aggregation: rowSettingsTemplate)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Tables in Object Pages

In the object page, we advise against using analytical, grid, and tree tables. Instead, use a responsive table and offer navigation to a list report with the table types mentioned above.

For more information on the use of tables within the object page, see the Tables section of the Object Page article.

Export to Spreadsheet

On the table toolbar, apps can provide a menu button for exporting table data to a spreadsheet. For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button
'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button

Properties

sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable

The following additional properties are available for the analytical table:

  • The property: width defines the width of the analytical table.
  • The property: rowHeight defines the height of each row in the analytical table. Since the height required is calculated automatically by the analytical table, this property is only needed rarely.
  • The property: columnHeaderHeight defines the height of the column headers. Since the height required is calculated automatically by the analytical table, this property is only needed rarely.
  • The property: columnHeaderVisible can be used to hide the column headers. Always show the column headers.
  • The property: showColumnVisibilityMenu provides an additional entry in the column header menu that allows columns to be shown or hidden. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Do not use this property.
  • The property: columnVisibilityMenuSorter is used for sorting the columns inside the column header menu if showing and hiding columns is provided in the menu. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Do not use this property.
  • The property: visibleRowCount defines the height of the analytical table. Show as many rows as fit on the screen.
  • The property: visibleRowCountMode defines whether the height of the analytical table is fixed or automatically calculated based on the space provided by the underlying container. For automatic calculation, make sure that all rows have the same height.
  • The property: minimumAutoRowCount defines the minimum number of rows that must be shown if the property: visibleRowCountMode is set to “auto”. Show at least three to five rows.
  • The property: firstVisibleRow defines the first row shown in the visible area of the analytical table. The analytical table is scrolled accordingly.
  • The property: allowColumnReordering is deprecated. Use the property: enableColumnReordering instead.
  • The property: editable does not have a visible effect. Please do not use it.
  • The property: threshold is used for optimizing lazy loading of items. In most cases, the default value is appropriate.
  • The property: enableGrouping is experimental and does not have a meaningful effect on the analytical table. Do not use it.
  • The property: sumOnTop shows additional aggregation values on the group header, even if the group is expanded. Do not use it.
  • The property: enableCustomFilter changes the filter entry in the column header menu from an edit box to Filter…. Selecting this entry throws an event that apps can react to, for example, by opening a dialog. In general, you should choose the built-in filter over your own implementation. Specifically, keep filtering via the column header menu simple, while offering more advanced options via the table personalization dialog.
  • The property: enableBusyIndicator has not yet been fully implemented. Do not use it.
  • The property: title adds a line of text on top of the analytical table. Do not use it. To add a title to the table, use a toolbar.
  • The property: footer adds a short text at the bottom of the table.
  • The property: Busy sets the analytical table to busy state. While in busy state, the whole table cannot be used and items cannot be read due to an overlay.
  • The property: Tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: alternateRowColors displays the rows with alternating background colors (“banded rows”). Do not use it.

sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn

The following additional properties are available for the analytical column:

  • The property: leadingProperty is used for data binding.
  • The property: inResult is used for data binding.
  • The property: visible defines whether a column is shown or hidden.
  • The property: name defines the name shown in the column header menu for showing and hiding columns. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Please do not use this property.
  • The property: headerSpan defines whether one column header is used for one or several columns. To prevent adverse side effects, always use one column header for only one single column. Please do not use this property.
  • The property: Tooltip does not have an effect. Please do not use it.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Grid Table

A grid table contains a set of data that is structured in rows and columns. It allows the user to scroll in both directions and can handle large numbers of items and columns.

Usage

Use the grid table if:

  • The cell level and the spatial relationship between cells are more important than the line item. Examples include spreadsheet analyses and waterfall charts. Note that a grid table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You have to work on more than 1,000 rows. In this case, the grid table is easier to handle. In contrast to the responsive table, the architecture of the grid table is optimized for handling large numbers of items. Note that a grid table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktop and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • Comparing items is a major use case. In this case, a grid table might be more appropriate than a responsive table. In the grid table, each cell contains only one data point. In contrast, the responsive table is more flexible regarding line items, including the ability to add more data points per cell and also the pop-in function. Both make comparisons more difficult. Note that a grid table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You need an analytical table, but you cannot provide an analytical binding on the technical side. In this case, a grid table will do the work. Note that the grid table provides only one level of grouping, no aggregation options, and is also not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.

Do not use the grid table if:

  • You need a table. The responsive table is the default table in SAP Fiori. Additional use cases where you might need the responsive table include:
    • The focus is on working on line items, not on cells. The responsive table is optimized for displaying complete items on all devices, such as file browsing and a list of documents you want to act on, like purchase orders and purchase requisitions.
    • Selecting one or several items is the main use case and details are needed to choose the correct item.
    • Line items are independent of each other and no operation across columns is needed.
    • You want to have only one implementation for all devices.
  • The main use case is choosing one item from a very small number of items with no additional details. A select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • The main use case is choosing one out of several items with only a few details per item. A list might be more appropriate. Pay attention to the layout of the list item to ensure that it has a pleasant appearance.
  • Data needs to be structured in a hierarchical manner. Use a tree table instead. Note that neither the tree table nor the grid table are responsive. You will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones and tablets.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use charts.
  • You just need it for layout reasons. In this case, use a layout container such as HBox or VBox.
  • You need read-only or editable field-value pairs. Use a form instead. The grid table is not optimized for form-like input navigation.

Responsiveness

A grid table is available for desktops and tablets, but not in smartphone sizes. It supports touch devices, but is not optimized for small screens.

If you use a grid table, note that you have to implement a fallback solution for small screens. This fallback solution does not need to support all use cases.

You could create a fallback by using a responsive table, but a completely different solution, such as showing charts in a read-only case, might be more appropriate.

Grid table shown on a desktop
Grid table shown on a desktop
Grid table shown on a tablet
Grid table shown on a tablet

Layout

The column header allows the user to resize and rearrange columns. It also provides access to a menu with column-specific commands.

The collection of items, or rows, occupies the main part of the grid table.

The selector cells allow the user to select one or more items.

The Select All button selects or deselects all items.

Schematic visualization of the grid table
Schematic visualization of the grid table

Components

A grid table does not consist of other elements. However, it is common to use a toolbar above the grid table.

The toolbar can contain entry points for the view settings dialog and the table personalization dialog or for the p13n dialog, as well as view switches in the form of a segmented button, and buttons for Add, Edit, and other actions.

Behavior and Interaction

A grid table is quite restricted in terms of its content.

Table Level

Scroll

A grid table allows horizontal and vertical scrolling (sap.ui.table.Table, property: navigationMode, value: Scrollbar).

You can add any number of line items to the grid table, which uses “lazy loading”.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.Table, property: rowHeight).

The grid table is optimized to allow faster scrolling within the first 1000 items.

Scroll bar
Scroll bar

Select

Selection Mode

Selection for a grid table depends on the chosen selection mode. The following options are available:

No selection: Items cannot be selected. (property: selectionMode = None)

A non-selection grid table
A non-selection grid table

Single selection: One item in the grid table can be selected. A row selector column is shown. (property: selectionMode = Single)

A single-selection grid table
A single-selection grid table

Multiple selection: One or more items can be selected. The grid table provides a column with checkboxes on the left-hand side. Clicking a checkbox toggles the state of the corresponding row from deselected to selected and back. The Shift key can be used to select a range.

For multiple selection, you can choose between two variants.

  • Multi-toggle mode (property: selectionMode = MultiToggle)
  • Multi-selection plug-in (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin)

These variants behave differently when the user selects more items than are currently loaded in the front end.

Multi-toggle

In multi-toggle mode, you can offer a Select All checkbox to the left of the column header (property: enableSelectAll). Selecting this checkbox selects or deselects all items that are currently loaded in the front end. All other items are not selected/deselected. If the application data is stored in the back end, scrolling down further can reveal additional unselected items. The same can happen with range selections if not all items in the selected range have been loaded to the front end.

Multi-selection plug-in

If you use this plug-in instead of the multi-toggle selection mode, the behavior for range selection and Select All changes:

  • By default, a dedicated Deselect All button replaces the Select All checkbox. There is no default UI element for selecting all items.
  • You can set a limit for the number of items that can be selected (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin, property: limit). This limit has the following effect:
    • The range that can be selected using the Shift key is limited to the specified number of items (default = 200). The table automatically scrolls back to the last selected item. Users can select more items by selecting additional ranges (the specified limit applies each time).
    • If the selection limit is set to 0, a Select All checkbox is shown. There is also no limit on the number of items that can be selected in a range. All selected items are loaded, which can lead to performance issues for large data sets.
  • If selected items are not already available in the front end, they are loaded automatically by the plug-in and set as selected.
Information
When setting a limit for the number of items that can be selected, keep the following boundaries in mind:

  • The performance of your service: How many items can be loaded at once in a reasonable time? Does this also apply if an end-user shows all available columns?
  • The “minimum limit”: Internally, the grid table loads blocks of items as the user scrolls down. Because this block size (sap.ui.table.Table, property: threshold) is usually also based on the performance of the service, it should be safe to assume that the minimum selection limit is twice this size. In this case, loading the data would take as long as scrolling down and loading exactly one more block. Nevertheless, we recommend using larger limits if your service allows.

A multiselection grid table
A multiselection grid table
Using the multi-selection plug-in with a limit
Using the multi-selection plug-in with a limit

Selection Behavior

An item can be selected in different ways, depending on the configuration of the grid table (sap.ui.table.Table, property: selectionBehavior):

  • Row: An item is selected by clicking the checkbox or the row. Use this option for multi-selection grid tables if clicking a row or a cell is not used for anything else.
  • RowSelector: An item is selected only by clicking the checkbox in the selector cell. Use this option if clicking the row (or a cell inside the row) is used for something else, such as navigation.
  • RowOnly: An item is selected only by clicking the row, and not using checkboxes in the selector cells. Use this for single-selection grid tables if clicking a row or a cell is not used for another purpose, such as navigation.

Compact, Cozy, and Condensed

Like all SAP Fiori controls, the grid table is shown in compact mode on a desktop and in cozy mode on tablets.

For a desktop, you can also display even more rows on the same screen height by adding the condensed mode in addition to the compact mode. This renders less white space for each item.

Note that the condensed content density has always to be set in addition to compact. Do not use condensed on its own. Do not mix condensed with cozy. Doing so could lead to unpredictable and / or unwanted results, e.g. cozy sized controls in condensed sized containers, missing padings, etc.

Note that neither compact mode nor condensed mode can be interacted with via touch. Even on a desktop with a touch screen, users will have difficulty selecting rows or using controls inside the cells when using their fingers.

Furthermore, condensed mode is not available for Internet Explorer 9. If condensed mode is to be used, please provide a fallback.

For more information on cozy and compact modes, see content density.

Column Header

The column header provides the label for the corresponding column and access to the column header menu.

Columns are resized as follows:

  • Mouse interaction: The user drags the separator line between two columns (sap.ui.table.Column, property: Resizable). Double-clicking the line optimizes the column according to the length of the currently visible data and the label of the column header (sap.ui.table.Column, property: Autoresizable).
  • Touch interaction: The user taps the column header to reveal two buttons – one to show the column header menu, and one for resizing. The user drags the latter to resize the column.

After resizing a column, the adaptation of the column widths depends on how the column width is set:

  • If column widths are set in pixel-based units (px, em, rem), the corresponding column is adapted and the columns that follow are moved accordingly. The width of all other columns is not affected.
    If all the columns together take up less width than the table control, an empty space is added. In case all columns together take up more width than the table control, a scrollbar appears. (sap.ui.table.Column, property: width)
  • If all column widths are set in percentage or “auto”, resizing one column might also lead to the automatic resizing of some or all other columns. The position of the resized column might also be affected. This is done to ensure that the whole table width is used and no white space is added. A scrollbar appears only if all or most of the columns shrink significantly. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, a minimum width can be set per column. Please be aware that this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users are still able to reduce the column width below the provided minimum. (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: width, minWidth)

Columns can be rearranged by dragging the column header to another position (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnReordering).

Column header
Column header
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Less columns than space available
Less columns than space available

Column Header Menu

For each column, a menu can contain the following menu items (sap.ui.table.ColumnMenu, property: visible):

  • Sort Ascending/Descending (sap.ui.table.Column, property: showSortMenuEntries)
  • Free text filter (sap.ui.table.Column, property: showFilterMenuEntries)
  • Group (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableGrouping)
  • Freeze from the first to the last specified column (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnFreeze)

For each column, the menu can be replaced by an app-specific menu.

Column header menu
Column header menu

Sort

The column header menu can provide two sort options (sap.ui.table. Column, properties: sortProperty, showSortMenuEntry):

  • Sort Ascending
  • Sort Descending

The user selects one of these options to sort the corresponding column accordingly (sap.ui.table. Column, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

Sort settings in column header menu
Sort settings in column header menu

Filter

The column header menu can provide a search field for entering free text (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: filterProperty, showFilterMenuEntries).

If the user enters a term in the input field and triggers the search by pressing Enter when the focus is on the filter input field, the grid table is filtered by the corresponding column and value (sap.ui.table.Table, properties: filtered, filterProperty, filterValue, filterOperator, sap.ui.table.Column, property: filterType).

Note that the filter may return zero results, in which case, the table might be empty.

General recommendations for filtering:

  • If filtering is a main use case, choose the filter bar or any other filtering UI over the built-in free text filter.
  • Only use the free text filter if filtering is a secondary use case and if the filter bar is too heavy.
Free text filter in column header menu
Free text filter in column header menu

Group

The column header menu can provide the option to group by this column (sap.ui.table.Column, property: enableGrouping).

One group collects all items with the same value within the corresponding column.

Group setting in column header menu
Group setting in column header menu

If line items are grouped in a column, every group is provided with a collapsible or expandable group header. The header text consists of the name of the value and the number of items in the specific group. Only one grouping level is possible.

Group header
Group header

Once line items have been grouped, the corresponding column is hidden. There is no built-in possibility to ungroup the grid table again. Therefore, provide a view settings dialog or table presonalization dialog to offer an additional way to group by a column and a way to ungroup the complete table.

An exception to this is when the table is grouped from the start and should not be ungrouped at all.

Group headers shown, the corresponding column hidden: no duplicates, but a confusing change
Group headers shown, the corresponding column hidden: no duplicates, but a confusing change
Warning
Note that grouping the grid table is experimental and currently works only on items loaded to the front end. Thus, scrolling down the table leads to data not being grouped as expected.

Only use this feature if you have just a few line items, all of which are loaded to the front end. If this is the case, consider using a responsive table first instead of a grid table.

Freeze Columns

The column header menu can provide the option to freeze columns (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnFreeze). Selecting Freeze freezes all columns up to the one in which the operation was triggered (sap.ui.table. Table, property: fixedColumnCount).

When Freeze is triggered, the menu item changes to Unfreeze for the corresponding column.

Freeze setting in column header menu
Freeze setting in column header menu

Line Item Level

A line item contains a set of cells and provides options for selecting the item.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.Table, property: rowHeight).

Line item
Line item

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a table or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.ui.table.Table, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a table. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

When opened, the context menu gets the row and column context, except for special columns (such as the selection column) or special rows (like group headers). Context menus can be implemented for a specific table, row, or cell (not recommended for editable cells).

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a table is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Grid table with a context menu
Grid table with a context menu

Cell Level

A cell provides one data point.

It can contain one of the following controls to display this data point:

While it is technically possible to also use other controls, doing so could lead to issues in regards to alignment, condensed mode, screen reader support, and keyboard support.

If you use text, use only single-line text to keep the same row height. Truncate if necessary as this prevents adverse side effects when scrolling vertically (sap.m.Text, property: wrapping, value: false). Do not wrap.

Cell
Cell

Guidelines

Data Density vs. Complexity

The grid table can be used to display large amounts of data. Unfortunately, the grid table has a high data density and therefore conveys an immediate feeling of complexity.

Only show tables with a lot of data as a last resort. Try the following instead:

  • Break down the data into manageable chunks and allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Try to avoid horizontal scrolling in the default delivery.

Try to minimize the number of columns, especially if there is a large number of rows.

Table Title

Implement the table title by using a title control in a toolbar.

Use a table title only if the title of the table is not indicated in the surrounding area.

Do not use a table title if it simply repeats text that is already above the table. For example:

  • A pricing conditions table is the only control on a tab labeled Pricing Conditions.
  • A section or subsection on an object page contains only one table.

Use a table title if you need the item count, table toolbar, or variant management. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a table title, such as Items.
Exception: If the surrounding area contains the table title, and both the item count and toolbar can be added to the surrounding area, no additional table title is needed.
Example: An object page (sub-)section contains only one table. In this case, add the item count and the table toolbar to the (sub-)section header.

If you use a table title, show either a title for the table, with or without variant management, or an item count in the following format:

Items (2,534).

The item count in the table title includes all the visible items that a user can reach by scrolling or expanding groups. Group headers are not included.

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items.

Developer Hint
Assistive technologies (such as screen readers) use the title to create a hierarchical site map for faster navigation. In addition, screen readers use the title as the label for the table.

If you don’t use a title (for example, to avoid repetition), make sure that the table is connected to another meaningful on-screen text that can be used as a label for assistive technologies. You can do this using the method addAriaLabelledBy.

Multiple Selection

  • We strongly recommend using the multi-selection plug-in. This ensures that all items selected using Select All or as part of a range are included – even if some items were not initially loaded in the front end. This is not the case if you use the multi-toggle option.
  • Do not limit the range selection for the multi-selection plug-in unless you have to.
    • If the dataset is small and/or completely available in the front-end, set the limit property to 0 to enable the Select All option and allow users to select any range.
    • If you have a large dataset, set a limit on the number of selected items to avoid performance issues. Also bear in mind that some actions won’t be helpful if the dataset is too big (for example, a delete operation on 2 million database entries).
Information
When setting a limit for the number of items that can be selected, keep the following boundaries in mind:

  • The performance of your service: How many items can be loaded at once in a reasonable time? Does this also apply if an end-user shows all available columns?
  • The “minimum limit”: Internally, the grid table loads blocks of items as the user scrolls down. Because this block size is usually also based on the performance of the service, it should be safe to assume that the minimum selection limit is twice this size. In this case, loading the data would take as long as scrolling down and loading exactly one more block. Nevertheless, we recommend using larger limits if your service allows.

  • In multiple selection mode (multi toggle), do not show checkboxes in the first data column in the default delivery to avoid confusion.
Don't
Do not add checkboxes to the first data column in the default delivery
Do not add checkboxes to the first data column in the default delivery

Loading Data

To indicate that the table is currently loading items, use the busy state. (sap.ui.table.Table, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Grid table in busy state while loading data
Grid table in busy state while loading data

Columns – Best Practices

Minimize the number of columns. Avoid the need to scroll horizontally in the default delivery.

The grid table assigns the same width to each column by default. It is recommended that you overwrite this default to provide optimal space for your content (sap.ui.table.Column, property: width).

If you define the column width in pixels or rems, resizing a column affects only the width of this specific column. Reducing the browser window size results in a scrollbar. After resizing a column, a scroll bar appears if the width of the table is not enough to show all columns. If the columns use less space than available, white space appears on the right side of the last column.

If you define the column width as a percentage, resizing one column affects the width of several or all columns. Text becomes truncated when the browser window size is reduced. This is done to make sure that all columns together fill the space of the table. A scrollbar appears only in case the automatic change of the column widths is not enough for showing all columns. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, a minimum width can be set per column. Please be aware that this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users are still able to reduce the column width below the provided minimum.

If you define the column width as “auto”, the behavior is the same as for “percentage”. In contrast to percentage, “auto” distributes the columns equally.

To decide on how to set the column width (pixel / rem / em vs. percent / auto), keep the following in mind:

  • For tables with only 2 to 3 columns, use pixel-based units. This ensures that on wide screens the values in the columns are not spread over the whole screen, which improves the readability of line items.
  • For tables with many columns, where a horizontal scrollbar is usually needed, use pixel-based units. This avoids unintended side effects when resizing columns.
  • For all other tables, use whatever fits your case better.

Be cautious with mixing columns with pixel-based and percentage-based widths. While this can be helpful in some cases, it could also cause even more unexpected side effects when resizing a column. When using percentage-based widths for one or more columns, think of the possibility to not allow end users to resize columns at all.

Optimize the column width for its initial visible content, including the column header texts. If this is not possible (for example, if showing the full texts would result in extremely wide columns), let the texts truncate. End users can change the width of the column to read the full text, as needed.

Maintain a constant column width and avoid adjusting it automatically when the content changes.

Always keep to one line of text. Do not wrap.

Don't
In the default delivery, the initial visible content should not be truncated
In the default delivery, the initial visible content should not be truncated
Don't
Never wrap texts
Never wrap texts

Column Headers – Best Practices

For each column, provide a label in the column header. In the default delivery, do not truncate the column header texts. Only let the text truncate if showing the full text would make the column too wide. Never wrap the text.

Content Alignment

For alignment of cell content, follow the guidelines below.

Left-align the following: text, IDs, phone numbers, URLs, passwords, and email addresses.

Left-alignment of text
Left-alignment of text

Right-align numbers (except IDs).

This ensures comparability of numbers and amounts.

Right-alignment of numbers
Right-alignment of numbers

Right-align amounts with currencies to the cell and align them in terms of their respective decimal points.

This ensures that amounts with different currencies are shown correctly, whether these currencies have 0, 2, or 3 decimals.

For aligning to the decimal point, use the sap.ui.uinified.Currency control.

Alignment to decimal point
Alignment to decimal point

Right-align dates and times.

This ensures comparability for most formats and locales.

Right-alignment of dates
Right-alignment of dates

Left-align status information.

Left-align status information
Left-align status information

Center-align icons.

Left-align micro charts.

XS micro charts in condensed mode
XS micro charts in condensed mode

Content Formatting

Locale Settings

Be locale-aware: show dates, times, numbers, and so on in the format corresponding to the user’s locale settings.

Key Identifier

Use a bold label or an emphasized link as the key identifier of an item. In the default delivery, show the key identifier in the first column.

Emphasized link
Emphasized link

For strings with IDs, use one of the following:

  • Show the ID in brackets after the corresponding string. Use this formatting if sorting, grouping, or filtering is only needed on the string, but not on the ID.
  • Show the ID in a separate column. Use this format if sorting, grouping, or filtering on the string and the ID is needed.
Text and ID in one column – Sorting, filtering, and grouping only on the text
Text and ID in one column – Sorting, filtering, and grouping only on the text
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link
Text and ID in two columns – Allows sorting, filtering, and grouping on both
Text and ID in two columns – Allows sorting, filtering, and grouping on both
If displayed as a link, use only the string as the link, not the ID
If displayed as a link, use only the string as the link, not the ID

Truncation

Avoid truncation of typical content in the default delivery (sap.ui.table.Column, property: width). However, since the columns are resizable, do not worry too much if truncation occurs as columns can still be enlarged if necessary.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must also have the same height. If you need to decide between truncation and different row heights, choose truncation. Do not wrap.

Optimize column width for typical content, not all content
Optimize column width for typical content, not all content

Number of Links

Are there too many links? Use subtle links to avoid a wall of links. Standard links are also emphasized more if they are surrounded by subtle links.

Emphasized links, links, subtle links, and text
Emphasized links, links, subtle links, and text

Missing Value

If there is no value for a cell, leave it blank. Do not display text as N/A.

Leave empty fields blank
Leave empty fields blank

Numbering Items

In terms of numbering items:

  • If the item number is more like an ID with regard to its description, use ID formatting as described above.
  • In all other cases, use a separate column for the item number.
Add a separate column for the item number
Add a separate column for the item number

Status

For status information, use semantic colors on the foreground elements.

For status information on text, use an object status.

Semantic colors on text
Semantic colors on text

Micro Charts

Use only the following micro charts: Bulletcomparisonstacked bar. When using micro charts, use them in size XS.

Micro charts in a grid table
Micro charts in a grid table

Empty Tables

Avoid empty grid tables. If necessary, provide instructions on how to fill the grid table with data (sap.ui.table.Table, properties: noDataText, showNoData).

Examples:

  • If a table is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the table with data.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    To start, set the relevant filters.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No data found. Try adjusting the filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, a search is also offered, or only the search is offered).
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of filter settings).
Provide meaningful instructions
Provide meaningful instructions

Invalid State

To show an invalid state of the grid table within the list report floorplan, show an overlay on the grid table and the corresponding toolbar (sap.ui.table.Table, property: showOverlay). The overlay prevents user interactions.

Use this within the list report floorplan if filter settings have been changed but the grid table is has not yet been updated.

Grid table with invalid data
Grid table with invalid data

Item States

To show that an item has been modified, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string Modified in an additional column with the label Editing Status.

In the default delivery, add a column directly behind the key identifier.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string Contains errors in the Editing Status column and highlight the row accordingly. This string replaces the Modified string.

A modified item with an error
A modified item with an error

To show that an item is locked, add a transparent-style button with the corresponding icon and the text Locked by [name] in the Editing Status column.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in draft state, add a transparent-style button with the text Draft in the Editing Status column.

Item in draft state
Item in draft state

Show only one state at a time.

Numbers and Units

Show the unit of measurement in one of the following ways:

Number and Unit in Same Cell

The number and the unit are in the same cell. Do this if sorting, filtering, or grouping by the unit of measurement are not needed.

Use a currency control to display the concatenated string.

Number and unit of measurement in one cell
Number and unit of measurement in one cell

Number and Unit in Separate Columns

The number and unit are in separate columns. Do this if sorting, filtering, or grouping by the unit of measurement are a common use case.

Note that this column can be hidden or moved independently of the column containing the corresponding number. Therefore, be sure to have clear labels for both columns to communicate the dependency.

Number and unit of measurement in two columns
Number and unit of measurement in two columns

Show the unit of measurment on the column header, if the unit of measurement is the same for all rows. If not, show the unit of measurement within the row.

Drag and Drop

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within the table, use drop targets that are between items (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between). This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Drop targets in between items
Drop targets in between items

Do not combine rearranging items and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure that there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items with sorting
Do not combine rearranging items with sorting

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, it is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

When combining rearranging items with grouping, be aware that moving items to another group also means that a value of the dropped item changes: because grouping is based on values in a column, the dropped item needs to take on the value of the target group for the corresponding column. If this is not wanted, do not allow users to rearrange items in grouped tables.

Example:
A table is grouped by availability. An item is moved from the group “Not Available” to the group “In Stock”. In this case, the moved item needs to change its availability to “In Stock” to match the target group. If changing the value doesn’t make sense make sense, only allow users to rearrange the items within the same group, or don’t allow rearranging at all.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing.
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing.

Context Menu

Use the context menu only as a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar). Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

The context menu can be triggered for the table, row, or cell. However, we do not recommend using context menus for cells: because the content of a cell is a different touch target than the cell itself, opening a cell context menu via touch is quite hard, even in cozy mode.

Do not combine context menus with condensed mode: editable controls fill the entire space inside a cell. Because of this, context menus cannot be opened at all with touch or mouse interaction.

Actions

Multiple Items

To trigger actions on multiple items, use a mutliselection grid table (sap.ui.table.Table, property: selectionMode, value: MultiToggle). Offer the corresponding actions in the table toolbar.

Do not offer action triggering on multiple items if the table is generally expected to have fewer than 10 items. In this case, try to use the responsive table instead of the grid table.

Single Item

To trigger actions on a single item (sap.ui.table. Table, property: selectionMode, value: Single):

  • Show the actions on the table toolbar.
  • In rare cases, show the actions within the line item. One example would be an Add to Cart button in a shopping application. Since these actions are repeated in every line and thus use a lot of screen real estate, do this only for a maximum of one or two actions. Provide a separate column per action. Use a button, unless the action trigger belongs to a link.

To trigger navigation on line item level, choose one of the following options:

  • Use a link for the attribute that identifies the row. Clicking the link triggers the navigation.
  • Add the RowActions column and show the navigation indicator (  ) at the end of the row. The navigation arrow triggers the navigation.

Use the RowActions column only for one or both of the following actions:

  • Navigate to details page ( )
  • Delete ( )

The RowActions column does not provide a column header text. It is fixed and will not scroll away. Users also cannot personalize this column.

Single Cell

To trigger actions on a single cell, create the corresponding click event. Do not use the cell click event if the cell contains interactive controls, such as links.

Add Items

For adding items, place an Add or Create text button on the table toolbar.

  • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
  • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.

Show new items as the first item of the table, with a visual highlight at the beginning of the row.

For more details, see the guidelines for managing objects (including subarticles).

Enabling/Disabling Actions

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection:

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user how many items will be affected. Let the user choose whether to apply the action anyway or cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

If the action was applied, and if the items are still available, keep them selected.

Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection
Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection

Editable Content

For editable content, only use the following controls, and only one control per cell:

Only these controls are optimized for all viewing modes of the grid table.

If you need edit mode, change your text controls, such as label, text, link, object status, icons, and currencies, to editable controls as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before. You can do this by exchanging the controls, for example, from sap.m.Text to sap.m.Input.

For mass editing items:

  • Provide multiselection.
  • Provide an Edit button.
  • If several items are selected, clicking the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

For more information, see Mass Editing.

Interactive controls – In line
Interactive controls – In line

View Settings

There are several ways to show Sort, Filter, and/or Group settings:

  • Column header menu: In all cases, show the corresponding settings in the column header menu.
  • View settings dialog: Simple and more flexible with regard to filter settings. No advantage for sorting. Allows the user to ungroup grouped columns.tables with a medium amount of items.
  • Table personalization dialog: Provides complex options for sorting items by several levels and allows the user to ungroup grouped columns. It also provides a query-builder-like approach for filter settings. The complexity of the options is also its downside. Use the table personalization dialog for tables with a large number of items.
  • If filtering is a main use case, use the filter bar. In this case, avoid offering additional filter settings on the table. If you do, the filter settings on the grid table work only on the result set provided by the filter bar.

Always be careful when synchronizing the settings in the dialog with the settings from the column header menu.

Trigger the dialogs in one of the following ways:

  • View settings dialog: Provide several buttons, one for each of these view settings. Each button opens the view settings dialog on the corresponding page.
  • Table personalization dialog: Provide a settings button, which opens the table personalization dialog containing all pages.

Use only the view settings you really need. For example, do not offer grouping if it does not support your use case.

Column header menu with view settings
Column header menu with view settings
Table toolbar with triggers for view settings dialog
Table toolbar with triggers for view settings dialog
Table toolbar with trigger for table personalization dialog
Table toolbar with trigger for table personalization dialog

Be persistent. When reopening the app, show the analytical table in the same view settings (sort/ filter/ group/ aggregation settings) as last defined by this user.

Sort

To display the current sort state, an icon is shown in the column header of the most recently sorted column. This icon indicates the sort direction (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

For the default sort settings, sort by the column that identifies the row, which is usually the first column in default delivery.

Column, sorted ascending
Column, sorted ascending
Column, sorted descending
Column, sorted descending

The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order. For each column, provide a meaningful sort order. For example:

  • Sort text alphabetically
  • Sort numbers by their value
  • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
    • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
    • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
    • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
    • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first

Filter

To display the current filter state, an icon is shown in the column header of the filtered column (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: filtered, filterProperty, filterValue, filterOperator, defaultFilterOperator, filterType).

Column, filtered
Column, filtered

Group

To display the current group state, group headers are shown. Show the following text in the group header:

[Grouping value] – [Item count for the group]

Group headers
Group headers

In general, offer reasonable grouping by default if appropriate. Enable the user to ungroup via the view settings dialog or via the table personalization dialog.

Personalization

Only offer personalization if you need more columns than those that fit on a tablet screen, which is usually five, to fulfill 80% of your main use cases.

Persist the column layout. When a user reopens the app, show the grid table with the same column layout settings as last defined by this user.

Add, Remove, and Rearrange Columns

To add, remove, or rearrange columns, use one of the following:

  • The table personalization dialog: It offers some simple settings for column layout. Use this if you have only a few columns to choose from and/or you use the view settings dialog.
  • The p13n dialog: Besides various complex view settings, it also provides settings for column layout. Use this if you have a large number of columns to choose from and/or you use this dialog anyway for view settings.

In both cases, trigger the dialog via the settings button in the table toolbar.

You can also use drag and drop to rearrange columns (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnReordering). If you allow rearranging via drag and drop as well as via a dialog, keep both places in sync.

Resize Columns

Resizing columns works differently on touch and non-touch devices.

  • Non-touch devices: Drag and drop the column separator on the right side of the column. Double-clicking the column separator optimizes the width of the column to the data currently loaded into the front end, which is usually about 100 rows.
  • Touch devices: Clicking the column header reveals two buttons: one for opening the column header menu, another one for resizing the column. Drag and drop this second button to resize the column.

Freeze Columns

To freeze columns, offer the setting in the column header menu (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnFreeze). Selecing Freeze on a column freezes all columns from the first one to the one where Freeze is selected. On this column, the menu entry changes from Freeze to Unfreeze.

Frozen column
Frozen column

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, a highlight indicator can be shown in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to indicate:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry-specific or process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”.

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users exactly what is wrong. Make sure that you provide this information within the table row, ideally in the same color.

For details on the use of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.ui.table.Table, aggregation: rowSettingsTemplate)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Tables in Object Pages

In the object page, we advise against using the analytical, grid, and tree tables. Instead, use a responsive table and offer navigation to a list report with the table types mentioned above.

For more information on the use of tables within the object page, see the Tables section of the Object Page article.

Export to Spreadsheet

On the table toolbar, apps can provide a menu button for exporting table data to a spreadsheet. For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button
'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button

Paste

The browser paste function can be used to paste data from the clipboard to the table (CTRL+V or browser context menu).

  • If the focus is on row level, the app has to take the data from the clipboard and add it to the corresponding controls within the table.
  • If the focus is on an editable control within the table, the control gets the data automatically.

Pasting via the context menu does not work if a custom context menu is used.

Properties

sap.ui.table.Table

The following additional properties are available for the grid table:

  • The property: width defines the width of the grid table.
  • The property: rowHeight defines the height of each row in the grid table. Since the height required is calculated automatically by the grid table, this property is only needed rarely.
  • The property: columnHeaderHeight defines the height of the column headers. Since the height required is calculated automatically by the grid table, this property is only needed rarely.
  • The property: columnHeaderVisible can be used to hide the column headers. Always show the column headers.
  • The property: showColumnVisibilityMenu provides an additional entry in the column header menu that allows columns to be shown or hidden. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Do not use this property.
  • The property: visibleRowCount defines the height of the grid table. Show as many rows as fit on the screen.
  • The property: visibleRowCountMode defines whether the height of the grid table is fixed or automatically calculated based on the space provided by the underlying container. For automatic calculation, make sure that all rows have the same height.
  • The property: minAutoRowCount defines the minimum number of rows that must be shown if the property: visibleRowCountMode is set to “auto”. Show at least three to five rows.
  • The property: firstVisibleRow defines the first row shown in the visible area of the grid table. The grid table is scrolled accordingly.
  • The property: allowColumnReordering is deprecated. Do not use it. Use the property: enableColumnReordering instead.
  • The property: editable does not have a visible effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: enableGrouping turns the experimental grouping on or off. Handle with care.
  • The property: enableCustomFilter changes the filter entry in the column header menu from an edit box to Filter…. Selecting this entry throws an event to which apps can react, for example, by opening a dialog. In general, you should choose the built-in filter over your own implementation. Specifically, keep filtering via the column header menu simple, while offering more advanced options via the table personalization dialog.
  • The property: enableBusyIndicator has not yet been fully implemented. Do not use it.
  • The property: title adds a line of text on top of the grid table. Do not use this. To add a title to the table, use a toolbar.
  • The property: footer adds a short text at the bottom of the table.
  • The property: Busy sets the grid table to busy state. While in busy state, the whole table cannot be used and items cannot be read due to an overlay.
  • The property: Tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: alternateRowColors displays the rows with alternating background colors (“banded rows”). Do not use it.

sap.ui.table.Column

The following additional properties are available for the column:

  • The property: visible defines whether a column is shown or hidden.
  • The property: name defines the name shown in the column header menu for showing and hiding columns. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Do not use this property.
  • The property: headerSpan defines whether one column header is used for one or several columns. To prevent adverse side effects, always use one column header for only one single column. Do not use this property.
  • The property: Tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Grid List

As with the list and the responsive table, the grid list displays a set of items. In contrast to both controls, the grid list displays the items not in rows, but in a grid.

The grid list is usually used as an alternative view for a list or table. It is ideal for displaying images, charts, object cards, and other content, which profit from more height (but less width).

Grid List
Grid List

Usage

Use the grid list if:

  • Your content is “visual” and profits from the rectangular format of the items. This is true for e.g. images, charts, and object cards.
  • The focus is on items, not on cells. The grid list shows complete items.
  • You want to display a homogeneous set of basic data.
  • You need to sort, group, or filter simple data sets.
  • As an alternative view for tables or lists, if the content profits from the different format.

Do not use the grid list if:

  • Your content is not appropriate for a card-like format. For example, do not use the grid list for displaying a wall of text. Use a table instead.
  • The main use case is to select one item from a very small number of items, without viewing additional details. In this case, a select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • Data needs to be structured in a hierarchical manner. In this case, a tree might be more appropriate.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use a chart.
  • You just need it for layout reasons. In this case, use a layout container such as the CSSGrid.
  • You want to manage complex datasets that need to be extensively sorted, grouped, filtered, or edited. In this case, use a table.

Responsiveness

The responsiveness of the grid list results from the underlying grid. The underlying grid is defined by rows and columns. Columns can have a minimum and maximum or a fixed size. Whenever an additional column fits on the screen, it will be added. If a column does not fit on the screen anymore, it will be removed. Items are re-layouted accordingly.

Optionally, there can be different configurations for the underlying grid based on breakpoints, for example based on the device types.

To define the grid layout and behavior, you can use one of the pre-defined layouts:

  • Grid box layout: Adds a variable number of columns depending on the available screen width. Columns have either a fixed width or can “breathe” slightly. All rows have the same height, and all items are the same size.
  • Responsive column layout: The number of columns depends on breakpoints (4 columns for size S, 8 for size M, 12 for size L, and 16 for size XL). The width of the columns grows or shrinks with the available screen space until the next breakpoint is reached. The row height of the grid is determined by the height of the highest item in the row. The number of rows and columns taken up by an item can differ.

Alternatively, you can define your own grid. This gives you much greater flexibility to influence both the layout and the (responsive) behavior of the grid.

The underlying grid defines the available space per item. The width can differ pending on the screen width (“breathing”) or be fixed. The height can differ pending on the content of the item or be fixed. “Breathing” items make better use of the available screen space and is therefore recommended. Make sure, that the item adapts to the resulting width / height, for example by

  • Re-layouting the item content
  • Hiding less important information
  • Re-sizing content, such as images or charts.

Items can use one ore more grid cells. Items can also be different sizes (for example, to allow for varying text lengths/wrapping in different items).

Size S
Size S
Size M
Size M
Size L
Size L

Components

  • The title bar holds the title and, an item counter. Instead of a title bar you can use a toolbar, including title, counter, variant management and actions.
  • Optionally, a filter info bar should appear when the grid list is filtered and shows information on the filter settings.
  • The collection of grid list items, layouted on a grid, occupies the main part of the grid list.
  • A More button can be shown if you do not want all items to be loaded at the start (known as “lazy loading”). Ideally, you should use scrolling to load more items instead of choosing the More button. Use More only, if content is shown below the grid list.
  • The footer can contain additional static text information.
Schematic visualization of the grid list
Schematic visualization of the grid list

Title Bar

The title bar contains the title of the grid list and an item counter

Title Bar
Title Bar

Instead of the title bar, a toolbar can be used instead. If done so, use a title control to display the title and item count. Variant management and actions can be added in this case. The toolbar can contain entry points for the view settings dialog, as well as view switches in the form of a segmented button, and buttons for actions like for example Add, or Edit.

Toolbar instead of title bar
Toolbar instead of title bar

For the title, keep the following in mind:

  • Use a title if you need the item count, toolbar actions, or variant management. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a title, such as Items.
  • Do not show the title bar at all, if all elements (title, item count, variant management, toolbar) are available in the surrounding area.
    Example: An object page (sub-)section contains only one grid list. In this case, add the item count and the toolbar to the (sub-)section header.
Developer Hint
Assistive technologies (such as screen readers) use the title to create a hierarchical site map for faster navigation. In addition, screen readers use the title as the label for the table. If you don’t use a title (for example, to avoid repetition), make sure that the table is connected to another meaningful on-screen text that can be used as a label for assistive technologies. You can do this using the method addAriaLabelledBy.

For displaying the item count, use the following format:

[title text] ([count])

for example:

Items (2,534)

For the item count, keep the following in mind:

  • include all the items that a user can reach by scrolling except group headers.
  • Remove the item count if there are zero items.
  • Do not show a count on the title bar, if a More button is used. Show the count on the more button instead.

If possible, keep the title bar sticky (sap.m.GridList, property: sticky).

Filter Info Bar

Beneath the toolbar, display a filter info bar (which itself is a special toolbar) if the grid list is filtered.

Filter Info Bar
Filter Info Bar

Items

The items (sap.f.GridListItem) are placed on a grid. To specify the design of items, it is recommend (but not mandatory) to follow the guidelines for object cards. Be aware that the item itself is responsible for its own responsiveness.

Use the grid list only, if your content profits from the format. This can apply to images, charts, but also to object cards or quick views. Another option is to mimick the format (but not the visual) of existing objects (e.g. business cards).

A grid list item can contain any content. This includes single controls, or a combination of controls (e.g. by using layout containers).

When designing an item,

  • Use the grid list item as starting point and make sure that the content adapts responsively to a changing item width / height.
  • Although the grid list can technically work with other list items (e.g. the standard list item), do not use them. They are not responsive enough for being used in a grid. In addition, selectors, navigation indicators and other elements are layouted differently (optimized for the list, not for the grid list).
  • Take care that an item can be identified, e.g. by adding a title, and if needed a sub title.
  • To show a string with an ID as identifier, use the title for the string, and the subtitle for the ID.
  • For status information, use semantic colors on foreground elements.
  • Avoid truncation. Use controls that wrap the text and configure them accordingly.
  • If an edit mode is needed, change your text controls (labels, text, and links) to input fields or other appropriate editable controls, as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before.
    You can do this by changing the control or, in more complex cases, by exchanging the whole item.

Not all items have to follow the same structure. This could be the case if one item is locked, but another item is in edit mode. Another example is to show a set of objects of different types in the same grid list.

Example for a grid list item
Example for a grid list item
Another example for a grid list item
Another example for a grid list item

Highlight

To show that an item needs attention, a highlight indicator can be shown in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to indicate:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry- / process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users what exactly is wrong. Therefore, make sure to provide this information within the item, ideally in the same color.

For details on the usage of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.m.ListItemBase, property: highlight)

Highlighted item
Highlighted item

States

To show that an item is unread, use the corresponding flag (sap.m.GridList, property: showUnread, sap.f.GridListItem, property: unread). This shows most of the content in bold font.

Unread item next to a read item
Unread item next to a read item

To show that an item has been modified, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string (Modified) near the item identifier.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error (for example, within the global edit flow), add the string (Contains errors) near the item identifier. To do this, use an object status control with the error state (sap.m.ObjectStatus, property: state, value: sap.ui.core.ValueState.Error). In addition, highlight the item accordingly (sap.f.GridListItem, property: highlight).

An item with an error
An item with an error

To show that an item is locked, use a transparent button with the corresponding icon and the text Locked by [Name] near the item identifier. The user can click or tap the button to open a quick view of the person.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in a draft state, use a transparent-style button with the text Draft near the item identifier. The user can click or tap the button to open a popover showing the timestamp of the last change.

An item with draft state
An item with draft state

Show only one state at any one time.

“More” Button

The More button loads more items to the front end if not all items have yet been loaded.

"More" button

Footer

The footer can be used to display additional static information relating to the content.

Grid list footer
Grid list footer

Behavior and Interaction

Scroll

The height of the grid list is defined by the number of items it contains. It does not have a scroll container on its own but is scrolled together with the page. When the user scrolls the page, the title bar and filter info bar can stick to the top of the surrounding layout container (sap.m.GridList, property: sticky).

Information
The “sticky” feature comes with some limitations:

  • It is not available on all browsers. In non-supporting browsers, the corresponding areas (title bar, filter info bar) are not fixed on top of the surrounding layout container while scrolling.
  • Certain layout containers suppress the sticky behavior, such as the grid layout. The same happens if the grid list is placed within the object page.
  • If focus is set to a fixed column header, the grid list is automatically scrolled to top.

Sticky toolbar
Sticky toolbar

Showing more items

If the grid list works in a “growing” mode, it only loads a few items at first. Additional items are only loaded (and rendered) on request. This request can either be triggered by scrolling (preferred), or by clicking the More button. Use the latter one only if content follows below the grid list. Use the “growing mode”, if more than 200 items are expected to be displayed.

If using the “More” button,

  • show the number of items already loaded and (if possible) the total number items below the text More.
  • do not show an item count on the title bar. Use the count on the More button instead.

In any case, if the “growing mode” is used, do not show more than 1,000 items overall.

Select

A grid list can have one of the following selection modes (sap.m.GridList/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode):

  • None: Items cannot be selected (sap.m.ListMode.None).
    Beware: Items can still use the sap.m.ListType “navigation”, which allows click handling on specific items. Only use this option if the click triggers navigation to a corresponding item details page.
  • Single selection master: One item in the grid list can be selected. Items are selected by clicking or tapping the whole row. The single select master mode has no obvious visual cues, such as checkboxes or radio buttons. It only provides a light blue background for the selected state. Because of this, it can barely be differentiated from grid lists without selection (mode: None). Single select master is the preferred mode for single selection. (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectMaster).
Selected item in
Selected item in "single selection master"
  • Single selection left: One item in the grid list can be selected. For this, the grid list provides radio buttons on the left side of each item. Only use this mode if a click on the whole item is being used for something else, such as navigation. (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectLeft). Even in this case, prefer single select master and synchronize the selection with the navigation, so that the navigated item is also the selected item.
  • Multi selection: Users can select one or more items. For this, the grid list provides checkboxes on the left side of each item. (sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect). The Shift key can be used to select a range. Try to avoid combining multi selection with navigation.
An unselected and a selected item in
An unselected and a selected item in "multi selection"

For all single selection modes, make sure that one item is initially selected. Otherwise, the user cannot return to the initial state. A selected item can only be deselected by selecting another item.

Click an Item

The whole item can be clickable. An event is fired by clicking on the item (anywhere where there is no interactive control inside the item). Apps can react on the event, for example, by opening a dialog (sap.f.GridListItem, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive).

Active elements do not have a visual indication and can therefore not be differentiated from non-active elements.

Active is a list item type and can therefore not be used together with “navigation” or “edit”. In addition, “active” uses the whole item as a clickable area and therefore cannot be used together with a grid list in “single select master” mode.

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a grid list or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.m.ListBase, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

When using drag and drop, keep the following in mind:

  • Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, it is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.
  • If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within the grid list, use drop targets that are between items (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between). This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).
  • Be aware that due to the re-arrangement of the items which happens after an item is dropped, it is not always clear where the item will finally be placed.
  • When dropping items from outside the grid list, adapt the size of the drop indicator to match the target layout of the item (sap.f.dnd.GridDropInfo, property: dropIndicatorSize).
  • Do not combine rearranging items and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure that there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.
  • When combining rearranging items with grouping, be aware that moving items to another group also means that a value of the dropped item changes: because grouping is based on a specific data point, the dropped item needs to take on the value of the target group for the corresponding data point. If this is not wanted, do not allow users to rearrange items in grouped grid lists. Example:
    A grid list is grouped by availability. An item is moved from the group “Not Available” to the group “In Stock”. In this case, the moved item needs to change its availability to “In Stock” to match the target group. If changing the value doesn’t make sense, only allow users to rearrange the items within the same group, or don’t allow rearranging at all.

Loading Data

To indicate that the grid list is currently loading items, use the busy state. (sap.m.GridList, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Empty Grid Lists

Try not to display an empty grid list. If there is no way around this, provide instructions on how to fill the grid list with data (sap.m.ListBase, properties: showNoData, noDataText).

Examples:

  • If a grid list is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the grid list with data.
  • If a grid list is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    To start, set the relevant filters.
  • If a grid list is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No data found. Try adjusting the filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, a search is also offered, or only the search is offered).
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of filter settings).

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu to a grid list. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the whole grid list or an individual item by providing access to context-specific actions. A context menu is opened by right-clicking (mouse), long press (touch devices), or via keyboard using the context menu key or SHIFT+F10. If a control inside a grid list is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar). Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browsers context menu, which can no longer be opened.

Group

If grouped, a group header is displayed (sap.m.GroupHeaderListItem) above all items which belong to the corresponding group. The group header is not interactive.

A grouped grid list
A grouped grid list

Guidelines

Actions

To trigger actions on multiple items, use a multi-selection grid list (sap.m.GridList, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect), and offer the corresponding actions on the toolbar of the grid list. Keep the toolbar sticky (sap.m.GridList, property: sticky).

In rare cases, you can also offer the corresponding actions in the footer toolbar. Do this only if the grid list is the only area on the screen to which actions can be applied and if the actions are finalizing.

Do not offer actions for multiple items if the grid list is expected to have fewer than 10 items in most cases.

To trigger actions on a single item only (sap.m.GridList, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectMaster), the action can also be shown within the item. One example would be an Add to Cart button in a shopping application. Since these actions are repeated in every item and thus use a lot of screen real estate, only do this for one or two actions at most. In this case, show the action trigger near the content to which it belongs.

The following actions on single items must always be in-line:

  • Delete: Use the “Delete” mode of the grid list (sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This places a Delete button at the right side of an item. Clicking this button triggers the deletion of the corresponding item. Do not use this mode if deleting multiple items at once is the preferred use case.
    Delete is a mode of the grid list and therefore cannot be used together with single selection or multi-selection.
Delete button
Delete button
  • Navigation: Use the “Navigation” item type (sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This places a Navigation indicator at the right side of an item and the entire item becomes clickable. Use this to navigate to a new page containing item details. In rare cases, you can also use this for the category navigation pattern without navigating to another page. By contrast, clicking an interactive control within an item does not trigger the navigation event. Instead, the corresponding control handles the click event.
    “Navigation” is an item type and therefore cannot be used together with “edit”, or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).
Navigation Indicator
Navigation Indicator
  • Edit: Use the “Detail” list item type (sap.f.GridListItem, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail). This places an Edit icon at the right side of an item. Clicking the button triggers the edit event. Use this event to switch the corresponding item to edit mode.
    Edit is a list item type and therefore cannot be used together with “navigation” or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).
Edit button
Edit button

From these three actions (delete, navigation, and edit), you can combine delete and edit, or delete and navigation. Edit and navigation cannot be combined.

Design for Performance

To optimize performance, we recommend showing no more than 200 items at once in the responsive table. For larger datasets (up to 1,000 items), use the “growing” mechanism to limit the number of displayed items, and make sure that users can filter the data.

Warning
The limits above are only recommendations. For a specific app context, the number of manageable items might be far higher or lower.

The actual limits depend on your concrete scenario, including:

  • The number of rows in the table
  • The number of displayed columns
  • The complexity of the cell content (for example, simple text vs. complex charts)
  • Other elements on the page (for example, multiple pages in a flexible column layout, or several tables/elements with more complex rendering on one page)
  • The browser being used

Add Items

  • Place the Add or Create text button on the toolbar of the grid list.
    • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
    • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.
  • Place new items always as the first item of the grid list.
  • Use highlight (information state) on the new item.

After pressing the Add button, there are three possibilities for adding an item, which should be considered in the following priority:

  • Add the item inline. Create an empty, editable item as the first item of the grid list. Show the Save button on the toolbar of the grid list. This option is recommended for simple scenarios where just a few input fields have to be filled.
  • Open a dialog for items where up to 8 input fields need to be filled. Save the new item at the dialog level.
  • Navigate to a new page. This behavior should only be used for very complex scenarios that cannot be handled by a dialog (for example, creating complex objects). When the user presses Save in the footer toolbar of the create page, navigate back to the grid list.

There are three different states of a new item:

  • New: The item was just created and is still in edit mode. It is highlighted with a visual indicator (information state).
  • Recent: The item was saved but is still highlighted and displayed as the first item of the grid list. Current filter, sort and group criteria are ignored since the item should remain visible.
  • As soon as the grid list is sorted, filtered, or grouped again, the new item is handled accordingly and loses the visual highlight, but not before.

In the context of the draft handling new items are not saved on grid list level, but rather with the entire draft.

Export to Spreadsheet

Mass Editing

  • Provide multiselection (sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).
  • Provide an Edit button.
  • If several items are selected, choosing the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

For details, see mass editing.

Grid Lists in Object Pages

A grid list with up to 20 expected items can be displayed right away, without lazy loading.

If you expect the grid list to have more than 20 items, use one of the following 3 options:

  • Lazy loading (More button): Use this option if you expect to have up to 100 items.
  • Tab navigation: If you expect to have more than 50 to 100 items, but less than 400, use the object page with tab navigation instead of anchor navigation. Put the grid list on a dedicated tab.
  • Navigation to a list report: If you expect the grid list to have more than 400 items, or if the tab approach is unsuitable, restrict the number of items in the grid list itself to a reasonable amount. To provide the user with a way to work with the entire grid list, offer navigation to a separate list report containing all items.

For all of the three options mentioned above, we recommend providing a search, and if feasible, sort and filter capabilities for the grid list in the object page. Grouping should be avoided.

For more information on the use of grid lists within the object page, see the Table section of the Object Page article.

Paste

To paste data from the clipboard to the grid list, the browser functionality for paste can be used (CTRL + V or browser context menu).

If the focus is on item level, the app has to take the data from the clipboard and add it to the corresponding controls within the items.

If the focus is on an editable control within an item, the control gets the data automatically.

Pasting via context menu does not work if a custom context menu is used.

View Settings

  • Provide individual buttons for each of the following settings on the toolbar of the grid list: sort, filter, group.
  • Clicking one of these buttons opens the view settings dialog or P13nDialog dialog with just the relevant page inside.
  • When closed, apply the settings to the grid list accordingly.

Keep the following in mind:

  • Do not offer any of these features if the grid list is expected to have only a small number of entries (up to 20 in most cases).
  • If filtering is a main use case, do not offer filtering on the toolbar of the grid list. Use the filter bar instead.
  • Always use only the view settings which are really needed. For example, do not offer grouping if it does not support your use case well.
  • Persist the view settings. When a user reopens the app, show the grid list with the same sort, filter, and group settings as last defined by this user.

Sort

  • For the default sort settings, sort by the item title, which is usually the identifier of an item.
  • If you offer sorting, offer it for each data point available in the item. Allow sorting in both directions, ascending and descending. The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order.
  • For each data point, provide a meaningful sort order. For example:
    • Sort text alphabetically
    • Sort numbers by their value
    • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
      • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
      • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
      • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
      • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.

Filter

  • To display the current filter state, use the info bar below the title. Clicking or tapping the info bar opens the filter page of the corresponding dialog.
  • Show the info bar only if the filter settings are not shown somewhere else. For example, do not show the info bar for settings taken in the filter bar or in a select placed in the toolbar of the grid list.
  • If the info bar is shown, provide an option to reset all corresponding filters on the info bar.
  • Keep the info bar sticky (sap.m.GridList, property: sticky).
Developer Hint
To display the current filter settings on the info bar, consider using the list formatter (sap.ui.core.format.ListFormat).

Group

  • To display the current group state, group headers are shown.
  • On the group header, show the following text (sap.m.GroupHeaderListItem, property: title):
    [Label of the grouped data point]: [Grouping Value]
  • If there is no grouping value, show the following text:
    [Label of the grouped data point]: (Not Available)
    This is the case if you have a group of items that don’t have a value for the grouped data point.

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection,

  • Enable the action, if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action, if it can be applied to a part of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user about how many items will be affected. Provide the choice to apply the action anyway or to cancel the action.
  • Disable the action only, if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

Message for action which applies to a part of a selection
Message for action which applies to a part of a selection

If the items are still available after the action was applied, keep them selected.

To trigger actions that are independent of the selection, show the actions on the toolbar of the grid list. Examples of such actions are add, edit (in the sense of changing the whole table to edit mode), sort, filter, and group.

To trigger a default action on the whole item, use the “Active” or “DetailAndActive” list item type (sap.f.GridListItem, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active).
Active items trigger an event when clicked, which can be handled by apps (for example, to open a dialog). Clicks on interactive controls within the item do not trigger the event but are handled by the interactive control. Do not use Active for navigation, to switch the line item to an edit state, or to delete the item.

Active can be combined with edit and delete, but not with navigation. Do not combine active with single selection.

Properties

sap.f.GridList

The following additional properties are available for the grid list:

  • The property: inset adds a margin on all sides of the grid list.
  • The property: headerText is a simple way to set the title for the grid list. However, this excludes the following:
    • A separate toolbar
    • variantManagement
  • The property: headerDesign affects the appearance of the header if the theme supports it. Leave the default value as it is.
  • The property: footerText adds a small additional row below the table footer or last item. This row can contain text only. Do not use this property.
  • The property: width defines the width of the whole grid list.
  • The property: includeItemInSelection uses a click on the whole item to select the corresponding item if the grid list is in a selection mode. This competes with other settings like “Navigation” or “Active” and should therefore not be used in combination with these two settings.
  • The property: enableBusyIndicator automatically shows a busy indicator while data is loaded. (In contrast to the property: busy, where the application can control when the grid list is set to busy state)
  • The property: modeAnimationOn does not have any effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: showSeparators does not have any effect. Do not use this property.
  • The property: swipeDirection does not have any effect. Do not use this property.
  • The property: rememberSelections leaves items selected even if they are currently not visible, for example, through filtering. If this behavior is not wanted, set the flag to “false”, but you should do so only in exceptional cases.
  • The property: busy sets the grid list to a busy state. While in busy state, the whole grid list cannot be used and items cannot be read due to an overlay.
  • The property: busyIndicatorDelay defines the time after which a busy state is shown after the grid list has been set to this state. Use the default value.
  • The property: visible shows the grid list (“true”) or hides it (“false”).
  • The property: tooltip provides a tooltip for the whole grid list. Do not use it.

sap.f.GridListItem

The following additional properties are available for sap.m.ColumnListItem:

  • The property: selected allows an item to be selected programmatically.
  • The property: counter shows a number on the right side of an item. This is used in cases like showing the number of subitems.
  • Do not use the property: busy.
  • Do not use the property: busyIndicatorDelay.
  • The property: visible shows or hides the item.
  • The property: tooltip adds a tooltip to a whole item. The tooltip is only shown on mouse interaction. It will not work on tablets or smartphones. Do not use it.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Table Toolbar

The table toolbar always appears above the table and has a transparent background. The control is used for key actions that impact the entire table.

Usage

Use the table toolbar if:

  • There are multiple objects on your page and you need to edit only the table.
  • You want to show actions as close to their corresponding controls as possible.
  • You need a title for your table.

Do not use the table toolbar if:

  • You are using single selection and only one or two actions. In this case, place the actions on each line.

Responsiveness

To enable responsiveness, use the OverflowToolbar control. For more information, please refer to the corresponding section in the toolbar overview article.

Components

All of the components are optional. The table toolbar can contain the following actions:

  • App-specific actions
  • Generic actions

The following actions count as generic:

  • Title
  • Variant management
  • Switch
  • Search
  • Edit
  • View switch
  • Create (for new items)
  • Add (for existing items)
  • Sort, Filter, and Group (view settings)
  • Personalize
  • Export to spreadsheet
  • Print
  • Overflow
Example of possible components
Example of possible components

Behavior and Interaction

App-Specific Actions

If needed, the app team can define their own actions for the app. In this case, the text buttons should contain a short, unambiguous text that explains what action the button performs. A button text is usually a single-word verb (for example, Share). Note that translated UIs may increase the length of the text string.

Only use icon buttons if you are sure that the user will be able to interpret the meaning of the icon easily and without the aid of a tooltip.  Use standard and easily recognizable icons, such as a paper clip for an attachment.

Table toolbar with app-specific icon buttons
Table toolbar with app-specific icon buttons

Title (Generic)

A title provides a short, meaningful summary of the content, mostly by using a single word. The title bar is a toolbar property that supports consistently-sized text and titles with the same height in cozy and compact form factors.

Consider the following when using a title:

  • Use the sap.m.Title control.
  • The toolbar height must be set to 3 rem.
  • The title must have the label class sapMH4Fontsize.

Use a table title if you need the table toolbar, and if the title of the table is not indicated in the surrounding area. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a table title, such as Items. Note that the title becomes truncated if there is not enough space.

Title in the table toolbar
Title in the table toolbar

Variant Management (Generic)

Variants store settings that have been defined, for example, for layout, column visibility, sorting, and grouping. The variant management control enables the user to load, save, and change variants.

In the context of tables, the variant management control  is used to save, manage, and load table settings which include layout, column visibility, sorting, and grouping.

For this, the variant management control can be used independently of the filter settings.

Always place this control in the table toolbar next to the title.

If you place the variant management control inside a toolbar, you need to apply the following styles:

  • The toolbar height must be set to 3 rem.
  • The title must have the class sapMH4Fontsize.

The examples below show where to place this control:

Variant in the table toolbar
Variant in the table toolbar

Title and Variant Management (Generic)

In exceptional cases, both the title and variant management have to be used. However, we do not recommend this because it results in a crowded toolbar and problems with responsiveness may occur. Variant management alone is generally sufficient.

The title and variant management are both left-aligned. The title is placed first, followed by a separator and the variant management.

Title with variant management
Title with variant management

Content Switch (Generic)

When apps need to switch between different content in a table, use a select control (also known as a dropdown) or a segmented button. The select control and the segmented button are displayed left-aligned in the table toolbar and allow the user to show different views.

These views could be very specific. For example, AllMine, and Others. However, you should ensure that there is no interference with the filters in the filter bar. Alternatively, the views might be made up of specific groupings or configurations, such as By X or By Y.

We strongly recommend that you use the segmented button and the select control as follows:

  • A limited set of views (2-3) can be represented by a segmented button (sap.m.SegmentedButton), which should collapse into a dropdown on a smartphone.
  • If the number of views can change or is larger than 3, they should be represented by a select (m.Select) control.

For more information about using multiple predefined views, see the list report floorplan (under Content Area: Multiple Views)

You can also include counters on your segmented buttons or your dropdown to indicate, for example, the number of products in each specific content view. For example, All Products (115), Hardware (60), Software (55).

Segmented button with a counter included
Segmented button with a counter included

If you use a content switch, you no longer need a title. In very rare use cases, both a title and a content switch must be visible. In this case, the title and the content view are left-aligned.

Segmented text button to switch content
Segmented text button to switch content
Select to switch content
Select to switch content

You can also use the icon tab bar as a filter. At the front, there can be an All tab (optional) stating the overall number and type of items, such as 14 Products.

If you use the icon tab bar as a filter, we strongly recommend that you show a counter on every tab. If you need a counter, use the icon tab bar instead of the content switch inside the table. Also use the icon tab bar if you need different actions for your different table views. Use the content switch instead of tabs if there are multiple table variants.

Search (Generic)

If a dataset is too large for users to find items by scanning through them, we recommend that you offer a search functionality. Do not place a search function in the table toolbar if there is a filter bar above.

If you want to provide a search for your table, place it on the right side of the toolbar. Note that this control cannot be moved into the overflow menu. We therefore recommend that you define a minimum width.

For more information, see search.

Search in the table toolbar
Search in the table toolbar

Edit (Generic)

Sometimes the user will need to edit a table. In this case, you have two options: You must decide whether the user needs to edit more than one element, or whether the main use case is to edit only one element.

Option 1: Editing Line Items

To allow the user to edit a line item details page, set sap.m.ListType to “detail” in the corresponding item (sap.m.ColumnListItem/sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive). This creates an Edit button at the end of the line. The user can click or tap the button to trigger the edit event. Use this event to switch the corresponding line item to edit mode.

Edit is a list item type and therefore cannot be used together with navigation or with the use of click events on the whole item (active).

Option 1: Editing an individual line
Option 1: Editing an individual line

Option 2: Editing the Whole Table

To edit a whole table, use the table toolbar. The edit function is a text button. Triggering this action results in the Edit button being replaced by Save and Cancel, and the user can then make any necessary changes in the table. All actions that control the UI of the table remain visible, and all other actions are hidden.

 Table in display mode
Table in display mode
Table in edit mode
Table in edit mode

View Switch (Generic)

View switches are right-aligned in the toolbar and allow the user to switch between different chart types or table layouts. You must provide the view switch if the chart relies on subtle color differences or gradients of color. In these cases, users with visual impairments can switch to the table view.

Switches are optional and do not have to be available if there is no need to switch between different charts or tables.

The number of chart types and switches must be used with caution. Each app team must decide what kinds of chart types make sense to visualize the respective data to assist the user in the best possible way.

We do not recommend using more than three types of visualization. The sequence of chart type switches is not fixed; however, you must sort them in terms of their importance and frequency of usage.

The chart type currently in use is highlighted. For this purpose, use a segmented control with icons. For more information about the icons and the chart types they represent, see chart toolbar.

Create / Add (Generic)

Use a text button for Create or Add actions. Place the action as close to the content as possible.

If the Create or Add action is a main function, never move it into the overflow.

Table toolbar with 'Create' button
Table toolbar with 'Create' button

Sort, Filter, and Group (Generic)

Sort, Filter, and Group can appear in any combination or as single actions. If you use more than one of these actions, we recommend keeping them in the following order: Sort, Filter, and Group.

When the user chooses one of these actions, the view settings dialog appears. This dialog can provide any combination of these three settings, including only one setting, such as Sort.

  • If sorting, filtering, and/or grouping is a common use case in your app, offer one, two, or all three of the corresponding features in one or more view settings dialogs. Do not provide these features if the table is expected to have only a small number of entries (up to 20 in most cases).
  • If filtering is a main use case, do not offer filtering in the view settings dialog; use the filter bar instead.

There are two ways to trigger the view settings dialog:

  1. The user clicks or taps a button on the table toolbar. Offer all relevant functionality (Sort, Filter, and/or Group) in this dialog.
  2. The user clicks or taps one of several buttons for each of these view settings. Each button opens a view settings dialog which contains only the corresponding page.

Use one of the two options listed above based on the following guidelines:

  • If sorting, filtering, and/or grouping are a secondary use case, use option 1.
  • If there are several additional actions and the table toolbar becomes overloaded with buttons, use option 1.
  • If sorting, filtering, and/or grouping are a primary use case, use option 2 to allow faster access to these settings.
  • If screen real estate is not an issue, use option 2.
  • If there is only one view setting (Sort, Filter, or Group), use option 2.

Always use only the view settings you really need. For example, do not offer grouping if it does not support your use case.

Using the view settings dialog allows you to define several Sort, Filter, and/or Group settings per column. Thus, a column with several data points can be sorted, filtered, and/or grouped independently by each data point.

Ensure a consistent user experience. When a user reopens the app, show the table with the same view settings that were last defined by this user.

Option 1: One trigger for all view settings (sort, filter, and group)
Option 1: One trigger for all view settings (sort, filter, and group)
Option 2: Multiple triggers for the different view settings (sort, filter, and group)
Option 2: Multiple triggers for the different view settings (sort, filter, and group)

Personalization (Generic)

Use the table personalization dialog for adding, removing, and rearranging columns. The user triggers the dialog by clicking a button on the table toolbar.

Offer personalization if you need more columns than those that fit on a tablet screen (which is usually five) to fulfill 80% of your main use cases. Before you do this, try to reduce the number of columns, for example, by using several lines per column or by using the pop-in.

Ensure a consistent user experience. When a user reopens the app, show the table with the same settings that were last defined by this user.

Table toolbar with personalization icon
Table toolbar with personalization icon

Export to Spreadsheet (Generic)

The Export to Spreadsheet action allows the user to export table rows and can be represented by a generic icon button. Place the action as close to the content as possible.

Example of a table toolbar with the 'Export to Spreadsheet' icon
Example of a table toolbar with the 'Export to Spreadsheet' icon

Print (Generic)

The action for printing table items can be represented by a generic Print icon ( ).

Example of table toolbar with Print icon
Example of table toolbar with Print icon

Overflow (Generic)

Please see the section on overflow in the Behavior and Interaction section of the toolbar overview article.

Styles

The table toolbar is always transparent and and has transparent-style buttons. Do not use semantic or emphasized button styles. These are reserved for key actions in the footer toolbar. For more information, see Button.

Guidelines

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection,

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user how many items will be affected. Let the user choose whether to apply the action anyway or cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection
Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection

If the items are still available after the action was applied, keep them selected.

For further guidelines, see Toolbar Overview – Guidelines.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Tree

Within SAP Fiori, we distinguish between tree tables and trees. Both usually allow the user to display and work with a hierarchical set of items. While tree tables are usually used for more complex data, trees are generally used for rather basic data. Trees are mostly used in the master list for a master-detail scenario using the flexible column layout and in popovers or dialogs. In certain use cases, they can also be used in the dynamic page layout.

In the case of tree tables and trees, items that contain additional items are called nodes, while items that do not contain any other items are called leaves. If available, a single topmost node is called a root node. Apart from the hierarchical structure of its nodes and leaves, a tree is quite similar to a list.

Usage

Use the tree if:

  • You need to display the key identifier of hierarchically structured items (for example in the first column of the flexible column layout).
  • Selecting one or more items out of a set of hierarchically structured items is a main use case.
  • The hierarchy has a restricted number of levels (up to about 12, depending on the content) and items (around 200).
  • You want to have only one implementation for all devices.

Do not use the tree if:

  • The main use case is to select one item from a very small number of non-hierarchical items, without viewing additional details. In this case, a select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • Items are not structured hierarchically. Use a list instead.
  • The hierarchy turns out to have only two levels. In this case, use a grouped list.
  • The hierarchy turns out to be just a categorization based on several details of the item. In this case, an analytical table provides multi-level grouping. Note that the analytical table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You need to display very deep hierarchies with additional data per item. In this case, use a tree table. Note that the tree table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • The structure contains more than around 200 items. In this case, use the tree table. It is optimized for large item sets and provides better performance. Note that the tree table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use a chart.

Check out the table overview to decide which SAP Fiori table is most suitable for your needs.

Responsiveness

The tree is like a list containing hierarchical data. It acts as a container for items, with the possibility to expand and collapse nodes. When reducing the width, item texts wrap to ensure that the tree adapts to the new size.

In addition, the tree changes the indentation per level dynamically when the user expands a node, based on number of levels currently showing.

Tree displaying 2 levels
Tree displaying 2 levels
Tree displaying 3 levels
Tree displaying 3 levels
Tree displaying 4 levels
Tree displaying 4 levels

Layout

The title bar (optional) contains the title of the tree. In addition, an item counter and toolbar items can be placed on the title bar.
The collection of hierarchical items occupies the main part of the tree.

Schematic visualization of the tree
Schematic visualization of the tree

Components

The title bar consists of a toolbar. The toolbar can contain a title, an item count, and other toolbar items such as actions or view settings, for example.

The standard tree item consists of:

  • A highlight indicator (optional)
  • An expand/collapse button for nodes
  • A selector in form of a checkbox or a radio button (optional)
  • An icon (optional)
  • text
  • A counter (optional)
  • Additional buttons with actions such as Edit, Navigate, or Delete (optional)

If additional controls are needed, use a custom tree item. The custom tree item allows you to use any combination of controls inside the tree.

Standard tree item
Standard tree item

Behavior and Interaction (incl. Gestures)

Tree Level

Scrolling

The height of the tree is defined by the number of items it contains. It does not have its own scroll container, but is scrolled together with the app.

Same tree, with different expand state
Same tree, with different expand state

When the user scrolls, the title and the filter info bar can stick to the top of the surrounding layout container (sap.m.Tree, property: sticky).

Information
The “sticky” feature comes with some limitations:

  • It is not available on all browsers. In non-supporting browsers, the corresponding areas are not fixed on top of the surrounding layout container while scrolling.
  • Certain layout containers suppress the sticky behavior, such as the grid layout. The same happens if the table is placed within the object page.
  • If focus is set to a sticky area, the tree is automatically scrolled to top.

Sticky title
Sticky title

Selection Modes

A tree can have one of the following selection modes (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, property: mode):

None: Items cannot be selected (sap.m.ListMode.None).
Beware: Items can, nevertheless, use the sap.m.ListType “navigation” which allows click-handling on specific items. This should only be used when the click triggers a navigation to a corresponding item details page.

Tree without selectable items
Tree without selectable items

Single select master: One item of the tree can be selected. To select an item, click anywhere on the item. Single select master does not add any visual indication to the tree and therefore cannot be differentiated from trees without selection if no item is selected. Therefore, always keep one item selected. For single selection, this is the preferred mode. (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectMaster)

Single selection: only one item is selected.
Single selection: only one item is selected.

Single select left: One item of the tree can be selected. For this, the tree provides radio buttons on the left side of each line item. Use this selection mode only if clicking on the item triggers something else, such as a navigation. Ideally, always keep one item selected, even in initial state (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectLeft).

Single selection with radio buttons. Use only if row clicks are used for something else, such as for navigation.
Single selection with radio buttons. Use only if row clicks are used for something else, such as for navigation.

Multiple selection: Allows the selection of one or more items. For this, the tree provides checkboxes on the left side of each line item. Each item is selected independently of the others. The Shift key can be used to select a range (sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).

Developer Hint
In multiple selection mode, users can (de)select all items using the shortcut CTRL+A. This only affects items that have already been loaded to the front-end server. All other items are not (de)selected before they are loaded (for example, items added via lazy loading with growingScrollToLoad). This conflicts with the guideline that all items the user can reach by scrolling must be (de)selected.

Also note that CTRL+A only (de)selects items within expanded nodes.

To process all items, listen to the selectionChange event and to its flag selectAll. This indicates whether CTRL+A was triggered. As soon as an action is triggered, process the items accordingly. Depending on the number of items, consider processing them in the back end.

Multiple selection
Multiple selection

Deleting

To delete single items, use the tree in “delete” mode (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This adds a Delete   button to each item. Clicking or tapping this button triggers the deletion of the corresponding item. Do not use this mode if deleting multiple items at once is the preferred use case. Delete is a mode of the tree and  therefore cannot be used together with single selection or multi selection.

Tree in “delete” mode
Tree in “delete” mode

Line Item Level

Expandable and Collapsible Nodes

An Expand/Collapse button is provided automatically for each node.

Expand/collapse button
Expand/collapse button

Navigating

To allow navigation from an item, set type to “navigation” within the corresponding item (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This will create an indicator at the end of the line (“>”) and the entire item will become selectable. Clicking or tapping the line triggers the navigation event. However, clicking or tapping a selectable area or an expandable/collapse node does not. Use the navigation event to navigate to a new page containing item details.
If no navigation is possible, set type to “inactive”.
Navigation is an item type and therefore cannot be used together with “edit” or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).

Tree items with navigation indicator
Tree items with navigation indicator
Navigation indicators can be set per item
Navigation indicators can be set per item

Editing Items

To allow the user to edit an item, set type to “detail” within the corresponding item (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive). This will create an edit  button at the end of the line. Clicking the button triggers the edit event. Use this event to either open a dialog or a details page where the item can be edited.
Edit is an item type and therefore cannot be used together with “navigation” or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).

Edit button
Edit button

Clicking an Item

Items as a whole can be clickable. An event is fired by clicking on the item (anywhere except when triggering a selection or when expanding/collapsing a node). Apps can react to the event, such as by opening a dialog (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive).
Active elements do not have a visual indication and therefore cannot be differentiated from non-active elements.
“Active” is an item type and  therefore cannot be used together with “navigation” or “edit”. In addition, “active” uses the entire item as a clickable area and thus cannot be used together with single select master.

Active items
Active items

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a tree. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

The context menu can be triggered for the tree or per item.

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a tree is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Tree - context menu
Tree - context menu

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a tree or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.m.ListBase, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Guidelines

Tree vs. List

Trees are more complex than lists due to their hierarchical view. Users tend to have more problems finding items in hierarchical views than in flat lists, except where the hierarchical view is natural. By natural we mean that every child node should be part of only one parent, and this relationship between the child and parent is clear and well known.

Example of an acceptable use of trees
Example of an acceptable use of trees
Do
A clear parent-child relationship
A clear parent-child relationship

Broad vs. Deep Hierarchies

When you use trees, you should choose broad hierarchies over deep hierarchies. Deep hierarchies make finding items more complicated. So try to reduce hierarchical levels where possible, especially if the hierarchy is not natural. Ideally, a tree should have a maximum of four levels, the first two of which should contain the most important items.

Don't
Avoid unnecessary depth in the hierarchy
Avoid unnecessary depth in the hierarchy
Do
Favor breadth over depth in a hierarchy
Favor breadth over depth in a hierarchy

You can use the following methods to reduce hierarchy levels:

  • Avoid a single root node. It is usually not needed.
  • Container nodes at the top level can usually be replaced by tabs or value pickers.
  • Eliminate unnecessary mid-level containers, for example, by combining redundant ones.
  • Exercise care when using a tree due to its overall complexity. The hierarchical structure of the data does not necessarily mean that a tree control is required.
Acceptable: repeat entries to optimize finding items
Acceptable: repeat entries to optimize finding items

Design Concepts

The tree can be used to display hierarchical data. Unfortunately, trees convey an immediate feeling of complexity. Ideally, show trees only if there is no other option. You should instead try the following:

  • Flatten the data. A list is still complex, but less so than a tree. A combo box might also fit in some use cases.
  • When only two levels are needed, a grouped list control can be used. This works well, where group nodes are used for categorizing their children and where the group nodes themselves do not need to be selectable.
  • Break down the data into manageable chunks. Allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Design for Performance

To optimize performance, we recommend showing no more than 200 items at once in the tree. For larger datasets (up to 1,000 items), use the “growing” mechanism to limit the number of displayed items, and make sure that users can filter the data.

Warning
The limits above are only recommendations. For a specific app context, the number of manageable items might be far higher or lower.

The actual limits depend on your concrete scenario, including:

  • The number of rows in the table
  • The number of displayed columns
  • The complexity of the cell content (for example, simple text vs. complex charts)
  • Other elements on the page (for example, multiple pages in a flexible column layout, or several tables/elements with more complex rendering on one page)
  • The browser being used

Title

Use a title only if the title of the tree is not indicated in the surrounding area. If needed, implement the title text by adding a title to a toolbar. Place the toolbar above the tree.

Do not use a title if it simply repeats text that is already above the tree. For example:

  • Beverages tree is the only control on a tab labeled Beverages.
  • A section or subsection on an object page contains only one tree.

Use a title if you need the item count, toolbar, or variant management. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a title, such as Items.
Exception: If the surrounding area contains the title, and both the item count and toolbar can be added to the surrounding area, no additional title is needed.
Example: An object page (sub-)section contains only one tree. In this case, add the item count and the table toolbar to the (sub-)section header.

If you use a title, be sure to include the following:

  • A title text for the tree.
  • An (optional) item count using the following format: Title (Number of Items). For example, Items (17). Depending on the use case, either count all items or only leaves (for example, if nodes are mainly used for categorization).

Remove the item count in the title if there are zero items.

If possible, keep the toolbar sticky (sap.m.Tree, property: sticky).

Developer Hint
Assistive technologies (such as screen readers) use the title to create a hierarchical site map for faster navigation. In addition, screen readers use the title as the label for the tree.

If you don’t use a title (for example, to avoid repetition), make sure that the tree is connected to another meaningful on-screen text that can be used as a label for assistive technologies. You can do this using the method addAriaLabelledBy.

Title
Title
Title with item count
Title with item count

Loading Data

To indicate that the tree is currently loading items, use the busy state (sap.m.Tree, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Tree in busy state while loading data
Tree in busy state while loading data

Initial Display

Think of the initial expandable/collapsible state of a tree. If your structure contains many items on the root level, it might make sense to collapse the whole tree in its initial state.

In contrast, if the most important items are displayed on a deeper level (if, for example, the parent nodes are simply a kind of categorization), the tree should be expanded up to the first level where the most important items immediately appear.

Content

The standard tree item allows you to set one text per item. The text wraps, which can lead to items of different heights depending on the length of the text. An icon can be shown before the text. Try not to use the icons, and only use them if the meaning of the icons is clear and unambiguous. In addition, a counter can be placed on the right side of the item (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: counter).

The custom tree item allows you to use any combination of controls inside a tree, including editable controls (selection controls, Expand/Collapse buttons, navigation indicators, counters).

When designing a custom tree item, consider the responsive behavior. Take into account that all the controls you can add to a tree require additional width. Their position cannot be changed.

Standard tree item with all options
Standard tree item with all options

Content Formatting

To display object names with an ID, show the ID in brackets after the corresponding object name.

Place the ID in brackets after the corresponding object name
Place the ID in brackets after the corresponding object name

Try not to display an empty tree. If there is no way around this, provide instructions on how to fill the tree with data (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, properties: showNoData, noDataText).

 

Examples:

  • If a tree is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the tree with data.
  • If a tree is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    No filters set. To start, enter your search and filter settings and run the search.
  • If a tree is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No items found. Check the search and filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, no search is offered, only the search is offered).
  • You are using the live search (no Go button in the filter bar). In this case, leave out “run the search”.
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of search and filter settings).
Provide meaningful instructions within an empty tree
Provide meaningful instructions within an empty tree

Highlighting Items

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, you can display a highlight indicator in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to show:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry-specific or process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”.

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users exactly what is wrong. Make sure that you provide this information within the table row, ideally in the same color.

For details on the use of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.m.ListItemBase, property: highlight)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Item States

To show that an item has been modified, for example within the global edit flow, add the string (Modified) to the text of the item.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error, for example within the global edit flow, add the string (Contains errors) to the text of the item and highlight the row accordingly.

A modified item with an error
A modified item with an error

To show that an item is locked, add the string (Locked by [name]) to the text of the item.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in a draft state, add the string (Draft) to the text of the item.

Item in draft state
Item in draft state

Show only one state at any one time.

Actions

To trigger actions on items, show the actions on a toolbar above the tree. Do not offer action triggering on multiple items if the tree is expected to have fewer than 10 items in most cases.
The following actions on single items must always be in-line:

Delete: Use “Delete” mode (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This places a delete  button at the end of each item.

Items with Delete button
Items with Delete button

Navigation: Use the “Navigation” item type (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This places a navigation indicator at the end of the corresponding items. Use this to navigate to a new page containing item details.

Items with navigation indicator
Items with navigation indicator

Edit: Use the “Detail” item type (sap.m.TreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail). This places an edit   icon at the end of the corresponding items.

Edit button
Edit button

From these three actions (delete, navigation, and edit), you can combine delete and edit, or delete and navigation. Edit and navigation cannot be combined.

To trigger actions that are independent of the selection, show the actions on a toolbar above the tree. For example: AddCollapse AllExpand All, …

To trigger a default action on the entire item, use the “Active” or “DetailAndActive” item type (sap.m.TreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active). Active items trigger an event when clicked, which can be handled by apps, for example, to open a dialog. Selection and expanding/collapsing a node does not trigger the event, but are handled by the tree. Do not use this for navigation, to switch the line item to an edit state, or to delete the item.
Active can be combined with edit and delete, but not with navigation. Do not combine active with single selection master.

Add Items

For adding items, place an Add or Create text button on the toolbar.

  • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
  • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.

Show new items as the first item of the tree or node:

  • If nothing is selected, add the new item to the root.
  • If a single node is selected, add the new item to the selected node.
  • If a single leaf is selected, add the new item as a child of this leaf. The original selected item becomes a node.

If your tree doesn’t support adding items to the root, selected node, or selected leaf, disable Create or Add for the corresponding levels.

Disable Create or Add if more than one item is selected.

For more details, see guidelines for managing objects (including subarticles).

Enabling/Disabling Actions

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection:

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that tells the user how many items will be affected. Let users choose whether to apply the action anyway or cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

If the action was applied and the items are still available, keep them selected.

Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection
Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection

Editing Items

To edit items, add an Edit button either in-line on the toolbar above the tree. Triggering the button either opens a dialog or navigates to an editable details page.

For mass editing:

  • Provide multiselection (sap.m.Tree/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).
  • Provide an Edit button on the toolbar above the tree.
  • If several items are selected, triggering the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

For more details, see mass editing.

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar).

Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. Also, because there is no generic keyboard interaction, drag and drop isn’t accessible. Moreover, drag and drop is not available on all browsers. For these reasons, offer drag and drop only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within a tree, use the following options:

  • For dropping items as a child, use whole nodes as drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.On).
  • For dropping items on the same level, use the space between items as drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between).
  • If you want to allow users to drop items as a child or sibling, offer both drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.OnOrBetween).

This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Do not combine rearranging items within one level and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

Moving items from one node to another can be combined with sorting without any issues.

Drop targets in between items
Drop targets in between items

Visible Alternatives to Drag and Drop

Depending on the functionality you need, use one or more of the following alternatives:

  • To move items up or down within a node:
    Use the  Move Up and  Move Down buttons on the toolbar. These buttons move the selected items until the first selected item can’t be moved up or the last selected item can’t be moved down any further.
    Depending on your tree, this can make sense for both leaves and nodes, only for leaves, or only for nodes. When moving a node, move the whole node and (if applicable) all its children up or down to the next position within the parent node.
    Always make sure that when the user moves an item in one direction and then moves it back, the order is the same as it was before.
    Do not combine the option to move items up and down with sorting.
  • To move items to another node:
    Use Copy and Paste buttons on the toolbar.
    Alternatively, offer a Move To button. Clicking Move To opens a dialog that shows all the nodes of the tree, but no leaves. Selecting an item in this dialog closes the dialog and moves the corresponding items to the selected node.
  • To change the level of an item:
    In some trees, such as document structures, users can change the level of an item without affecting the level of parent or child items. In this case, use left and right arrow buttons (   ).

Filtering

What exactly needs to stay or be removed is highly dependent on the kind of structure and data your tree displays. For many trees, the following approach works well if you want to apply filters only to the leaves of a tree:

  • Remove all leaves that don’t fit the filter criteria
  • Remove empty nodes

If you also apply filters to nodes, keep the following in mind:

  • A node may or may not fit the filter criteria.
  • A node can contain items (nodes and/or leaves) that fit the filter criteria.

Because of this, the results might contain more nodes than those that are relevant for the filter criteria.

Developer Hint
The tree control itself has no influence on the filter result. It sends a filter request and displays whatever comes back. Make sure that the result set is meaningful.
[/vc_row_inner]

Sorting

Before you start, ask yourself if sorting is meaningful in your tree. If so, decide on a meaningful default sort order.

If sorting is meaningful, is it meaningful on all levels? Or does the tree structure need to be stable? In the latter case, sort only leaves, but not nodes.

The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order. Use a meaningful sort order. For example:

  • Sort text alphabetically
  • Sort numbers by their value
  • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
    • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
    • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
    • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
    • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.

Export to Spreadsheet

On the table toolbar, apps can provide a menu button for exporting the tree data to a spreadsheet. For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button
'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Responsive Table

The responsive table is the default table in SAP Fiori. It contains a set of line items and is fully responsive. Depending on the scenario, users can also navigate from the line items to further details.

A line item contains several data points sorted into columns. A data point refers to a unit of information, such as a number, a text, a unit of measurement, and so on, which can be used to form the content of a tableform or other control. One data point is usually displayed by a control, such as a text, object status, or input field. A control can display more than one data point, for example, by concatenating text.

In contrast to traditional tables, a “cell” of the responsive table is not limited to displaying only one control, and therefore a single cell can present far more than one data point.

Responsive table
Responsive table

Usage

Use the responsive table if:

  • You need a table. The responsive table is the default table in SAP Fiori.
  • You need to use various controls inside a line item, such as micro charts. By contrast, the analytical table supports only a very limited set of controls.
  • The focus is on line items, not on cells. The responsive table is optimized for viewing complete items on all devices.
  • Selecting one or more items is a main use case and details are needed to choose the correct item.
  • Line items are independent of each other and no operation across columns is needed.
  • You want to have only one implementation for all devices. As the name suggests, the responsive table is responsive.

Do not use the responsive table if:

  • The main use case is to select one item from a very small number of items, without viewing additional details. In this case, a select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • The main use case is to select one item from several items, with the possibility of viewing only a few details per item. In this case, a list might be more appropriate. Pay attention to the layout of the list item to ensure that it has a pleasant appearance.
  • The cell level and the spatial relationship between cells is more important than the line item. In this case, use the analytical table or grid table. Examples include spreadsheet analyses and waterfall charts. Note that neither the analytical table nor the grid table are fully responsive. Both are only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You expect the table to contain more than around 1,000 rows. Try using the analytical table or grid table instead; they are easier to handle, perform better, and are optimized for handling large numbers of items.
    Note that neither the analytical table nor the grid table are fully responsive. Both are only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • Comparing items is a major use case. In this case, the analytical table or grid table might be more appropriate because each cell contains only one data point. By contrast, the responsive table offers greater flexibility within line items, including the ability to add more data points per cell and the pop-in function. Both make comparisons more difficult. Note that neither the analytical table nor the grid table are fully responsive. Both are only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • Data needs to be structured in a hierarchical manner. In this case, a tree table might be more appropriate. Although the analytical table can have several grouping levels, it is not as flexible when nodes at several levels contain child nodes. Note that neither the analytical table nor the grid table are fully responsive. Both are only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use a chart.
  • You just need it for layout reasons. In this case, use a layout container such as a horizontal layout or a vertical layout instead.
  • You need read-only or editable field-value pairs. In this case, use a form instead. The responsive table is not optimized for form-like input navigation.
Don't
Do not use a responsive table as a form
Do not use a responsive table as a form

See the table overview to decide which SAP Fiori table is most suitable for your needs.

Responsiveness

The responsive table is optimized for viewing one line item at a time with no scrolling or only vertical scrolling, irrespective of the display width.

On smartphones, only the most important data remains in the one-column or two-column table, while all other data is moved to the space between two item rows, known as the “pop-in area”.

In this area, data for the corresponding cell is provided as a label/value pair. The label is defined by the column header, and the value is taken from the corresponding cell. Labels can be displayed next to the value or above the value.

Within the pop-in area, the label/value pairs can be displayed in the following ways (sap.m.Table, property: PopinLayout):

  • Block: Label/value pairs are listed one below the other.
  • GridSmall: Label/value pairs are displayed next to each other in equally spaced grid cells. An additional column is shown for each 13 rem of available width (208 px with default browser settings). If the number of grid cells exceeds the available width, the grid cells wrap. On S size, this layout transforms automatically to a block layout.
  • GridLarge: The display logic is the same as for GridSmall,, but grid columns come with a larger minimum width (26 rem instead of 13 rem).

In all layouts, you can show the labels next to or above (recommended) the corresponding data.

The responsive table uses all the available space, and does not provide any padding. If there is space around the table, it comes from the spacing defined for the surrounding layout container.

Information
The GridSmall and GridLarge layouts are not available in all browsers. If the chosen layout is not available, it is automatically changed to Block layout.
The responsive table displayed on a smartphone (size S)
The responsive table displayed on a smartphone (size S)
The responsive table displayed on a tablet (size M)
The responsive table displayed on a tablet (size M)
The responsive table displayed in compact mode on a desktop computer (size L)
The responsive table displayed in compact mode on a desktop computer (size L)

To ensure responsiveness, you must configure each column. Depending on the width of the table (in pixels), the column needs to know which of the following responses is required:

  • Stay in the table layout.
  • Move to the pop-in (sap.m.Column, with the properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth, popinHAlign, popinDisplay).
  • Hide.

By default, the width provided is interpreted as the screen width. If the table does not use the full width of the screen, app developers have to configure the table accordingly (sap.m.Table, property: contextualWidth).

Since you have to define this for each column, you can also handle more than one column at a single breakpoint, such as moving three columns to the pop-in area at once.

Each of the three device types has a predefined value for the screen width. However, you will get better results if you offer more breakpoints by using pixel values instead of the predefined values.

For the smallest screen width, keep the following information in the table layout:

  • The identifier of the line item
  • The key attribute

Example for Block Layout

A typical responsive table.

A typical responsive table
A typical responsive table

Hide the information column for a width smaller than 570 px.

Hiding the information column
Hiding the information column

Move the column “vendor” to the pop-in area for a width smaller than 460 px (sap.m.Column, properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth).

Moving the vendor column to the pop-in area
Moving the vendor column to the pop-in area

Move the column “limit” to the pop-in for a width smaller than 350 px (sap.m.Column, properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth).

Moving the limit column to the pop-in area
Moving the limit column to the pop-in area

Move the column “price” to the pop-in area for a width smaller than 270 px (sap.m.Column, properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth).

Moving the price column to the pop-in area
Moving the price column to the pop-in area

If you still need to support smaller screens, values can be moved below the corresponding labels inside the pop-in area. In these examples, this happens for a width smaller than 220 px (sap.m.Column, property: popinDisplay).

Pop-in area: moving the data below the labels
Pop-in area: moving the data below the labels

Example for GridLarge Layout

A more complex responsive table.

A more complex responsive table (full screen without pop-in)
A more complex responsive table (full screen without pop-in)

In this example, the Average Occupancy Rate and Available In columns move to the pop-in area if the screen width is less than 1900 pixels.

GridLarge layout - 'Average Occupancy Rate' and 'Available In' columns move to the pop-in area
GridLarge layout - 'Average Occupancy Rate' and 'Available In' columns move to the pop-in area

If the width is less than 1500 pixels, the Average Stay column moves to the pop-in area.

GridLarge layout - 'Average Stay' column moves to the pop-in area
GridLarge layout - 'Average Stay' column moves to the pop-in area

If the width is less than 1100 pixels, the Description column moves to the pop-in area. Since all four columns in the pop-in area do not fit into one row, the pop-in wraps.

GridLarge layout - 'Description' column moves to the pop-in area
GridLarge layout - 'Description' column moves to the pop-in area

If the width is reduced even further, the Details column moves to the pop-in area. On this narrow screen, only one column fits into one pop-in row, so it looks exactly like the block layout.

GridLarge layout - 'Details' column moves to the pop-in area
GridLarge layout - 'Details' column moves to the pop-in area

Layout

The optional title bar consists of the title of the responsive table, an item counter, variant management, and the toolbar.

The filter info bar appears when the responsive table is filtered, and shows information on the filter settings.

The column header shows the label for each column.

The collection of items, or rows, occupies the main part of the responsive table.

You can add aggregation information (such as totals) on the table footer.

A More button can be shown if you do not want all items to be loaded at the start (known as “lazy loading”). Ideally, you should use scrolling to load more items instead of choosing the More button.

Schematic visualization of the responsive table
Schematic visualization of the responsive table

Components

The title bar contains the title of the responsive table, an item counter, variant management, and the toolbar.

The toolbar can contain entry points for the view settings dialog and the table personalization dialog, as well as view switches in the form of a segmented button, and buttons for AddEdit, and other actions.
Beneath the toolbar, display a filter info bar (which itself is a special toolbar) if the responsive table is filtered.
To format within items, apply the guidelines for formatting data. Controls commonly used inside items are the object identifier and the object number. For more information about these controls, see object display components.
You can use the table footer to display additional static information relating to the table content.
The More button loads more items to the front end if not all items have yet been loaded.
Components of the responsive table
Components of the responsive table

Behavior and Interaction

The responsive table is quite flexible with regard to its content.

Table Level

Scroll

The height of the table is defined by the number of items it contains. It does not have a scroll container on its own, but is scrolled together with the app (in contrast to the grid table and the analytical table).

If the table works in a “growing” mode, it only loads a few items at first. Additional items are only loaded (and rendered) on request. The “request” can either be triggered by scrolling (preferred), or by clicking the More button.

Same table, different number of items
Same table, different number of items

When the user scrolls, the title bar, column headers, and filter info bar can stick to the top of the surrounding layout container (sap.m.Table, property: sticky).

Information
The “sticky” feature comes with some limitations:

  • It is not available on all browsers. In non-supporting browsers, the corresponding areas (title bar, column headers, filter info bar) are not fixed on top of the surrounding layout container while scrolling.
  • Certain layout containers suppress the sticky behavior, such as the grid layout. The same happens if the table is placed within the object page.
  • If focus is set to a fixed column header, the table is automatically scrolled to top.

Sticky table title and sticky column header
Sticky table title and sticky column header

Merge Duplicates

To simulate the behavior of row spanning, you can merge cells of consecutive rows inside one or more columns automatically if they contain the same value (sap.m.Column, properties: mergeDuplicates, mergeFunctionName).

Use the merge feature if you expect the column to contain duplicate entries, and it makes sense to group them. In the example screenshot, the Supplier, Product, and Dimensions columns reflect a hierarchical structure: Suppliers have products, which in turn have dimensions. Because suppliers typically have multiple products, merging duplicate entries for the supplier column makes the table easier to read. Note, however, that when the user sorts the table by another field, the hierarchy changes and the merged items are regrouped accordingly.

Do not use the merge feature if duplicate entries are not part of the design. If consecutive table rows happen to have the same values at runtime, this alone isn’t a valid reason to group them.

Supplier column merges duplicates in consecutive rows
Supplier column merges duplicates in consecutive rows
Merged columns with multiselection
Merged columns with multiselection

Select

A responsive table can have one of the following selection modes (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode):

  • None: Items cannot be selected (sap.m.ListMode.None).
    Beware: Line items can still use the sap.m.ListType “navigation”, which allows click handling on specific line items. Only use this option if the click triggers navigation to a corresponding line item details page.
  • Single selection master: One item in the responsive table can be selected. Items are selected by clicking or tapping the whole row. The single select master mode has no obvious visual cues, such as checkboxes or radio buttons. It only provides a light blue background for the selected state. Because of this, it can barely be differentiated from tables without selection (mode: None). Single select master is the preferred mode for single selection (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectMaster).
  • Single selection left: One item in the responsive table can be selected. For this, the responsive table provides radio buttons on the left side of each line item. Only use this mode if row clicks are being used for something else, such as navigation. (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectLeft).
  • Multiple selection: Users can select one or more items using the checkboxes on the left side of each line item. The Shift key can be used to select a range. Users can (de)select all items using the Select All checkbox to the left of the column header. Select All should (de)select all items that the user can reach by scrolling.  (sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).
Responsive table without selectable items
Responsive table without selectable items
Single selection master
Single selection master
SIngle selection left, with radio buttons. Use only if row clicks are used for something else.
SIngle selection left, with radio buttons. Use only if row clicks are used for something else.
Multiple selection
Multiple selection

Group

For grouping items, a group header is displayed (sap.m.GroupHeaderListItem). The group header is not interactive.

Group headers
Group headers

Show Aggregations

Show aggregations (such as totals) on the table footer (sap.m.Column, aggregation: footer).

Do not show aggregations in “growing” mode. It is not clear, if an aggregation will only aggregate the items loaded into the front end, or all items.

Table footer displays aggregated total
Table footer displays aggregated total

Load Items

To show more than 200 items, use the “growing” mode (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, properties: growing, growingThreshold, growingScrollToLoad, growingTriggerText). The growing mode allows the user to load only the first few items. Additional items are only loaded (and rendered) on request, which improves performance. The “request” can either be done via scrolling (preferred), or by clicking the More button.

If using the More button, show the number of items already loaded and the total number items below the text More, if possible.

Do not show more than 1,000 items overall, even in growing mode. Use the grid table instead.

Do not show aggregations in growing mode. Also, do not display an item count on the table toolbar if growing mode is used. Use the count on the More button instead.

Load on scroll
Load on scroll

Line Item Level

Delete Single Item Rows

To delete single item rows, use the table in the mode “delete” (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This adds Delete buttons to each line item. Clicking this button triggers the deletion of the corresponding line item.

Do not use this mode if deleting multiple lines at once is the preferred use case.

Delete is a mode of the responsive table and therefore cannot be used together with single selection or multiselection.

Responsive table in 'delete' mode
Responsive table in 'delete' mode

Navigate

To allow navigation from a line item, use an item with the type “navigation” (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This creates an indicator at the end of the line (“>”) and the entire line item becomes clickable. If the user clicks or taps on the line, navigate to a new page containing line item details. In rare cases, you can also use the navigation mode for category navigation, without navigating to another page.

By contrast, clicking an interactive control within a line item does not trigger the navigation event. Instead, the corresponding control handles the click event.

If no navigation is possible, set sap.m.ListType to “inactive”.

“Navigation” is a list item type and therefore cannot be used together with “edit”, or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).

Navigation indicator
Navigation indicator

Edit Line Items

To allow editing for a line item, set sap.m.ListType to “detail” within the corresponding item (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive). This will create an Edit button at the end of the line. Clicking the button triggers the edit event. Use this event to switch the corresponding line item to edit mode.

Edit is a list item type and therefore cannot be used together with “navigation” or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).

Edit button
Edit button

Click an Item

Items as a whole can be clickable. An event is fired by clicking on the item (anywhere where there is no interactive control inside the item). Apps can react on the event, for example, by opening a dialog (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive).

Active elements do not have a visual indication and can therefore not be differentiated from non-active elements.

Active is a list item type and can therefore not be used together with “navigation” or “edit”. In addition, “active” uses the whole item as a clickable area and therefore cannot be used together with a single-selection table.

Active element
Active element

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a table or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.m.ListBase, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a table. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

When opened, the context menu gets the row and column context, except for special columns (such as the selection column). Context menus can be implemented for a specific table or row.

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a table is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Responsive table with a context menu
Responsive table with a context menu

Cell Level

Showing Information

In contrast to traditional tables (such as the analytical table or the tree table), a cell can contain more than just one line of text.

Several lines of text within one cell
Several lines of text within one cell

Add Controls

Alongside textual elements, you can also add any control to a table cell, such as input fields, microcharts, buttons, and so on.

Controls inside cells
Controls inside cells
Any control can be placed inside cells
Any control can be placed inside cells

A cell can contain more than one control and more than one data point.

With the View Settings dialog, users can sort, filter, and group by each of these data points.

Several controls per cell
Several controls per cell

You can also have different controls in different rows in the same column. This could be the case if one item is locked, but another item is in edit mode, for example.

Different controls per column
Different controls per column

Guidelines

Responsiveness

While the pop-in layouts GridLarge and GridSmall make better use of the available width, they also only look good with content that is specifically designed for pop-in behavior. If you have text-only tables with only one value per column, use the Block layout (sap.m.Table, property: popinLayout).

Place the column header labels in the pop-in area above the corresponding values (sap.m.Column, property: popinDisplay, value: Block). This avoids alignment issues with different content. Be aware that the labels get top-aligned with the adjacent content.
Only place the label next to the corresponding value under the following conditions (sap.m.Column, property: popinDisplay, value: Inline):

  • The values are text-only (no input fields, icons, images, micro charts, and so on)
  • The available space is at least the double the width of size S.

This avoids truncation or “over-wrapping” of the labels and content.

If a column does not have a column header text (for example, if it always contains the same button with its own label), do not show the header text as a label in the pop-in area either (sap.m.Column, property: popinDisplay, value: withoutHeader). If you forget this setting, you will see an empty space followed by a colon (“:”).

Information
The GridSmall and GridLarge layouts are not available in all browsers. If the chosen layout is not available, it is automatically changed to Block layout.

Design for Performance

To optimize performance, we recommend showing no more than 200 items at once in the responsive table. For larger datasets (up to 1,000 items), use the “growing” mechanism to limit the number of displayed items, and make sure that users can filter the data.

Warning
The limits above are only recommendations. For a specific app context, the number of manageable items might be far higher or lower.

The actual limits depend on your concrete scenario, including:

  • The number of rows in the table
  • The number of displayed columns
  • The complexity of the cell content (for example, simple text vs. complex charts)
  • Other elements on the page (for example, multiple pages in a flexible column layout, or several tables/elements with more complex rendering on one page)
  • The browser being used

Table Title

Implement the table title by using a title control in a toolbar.

Use a table title only if the title of the table is not indicated in the surrounding area. Do not use a table title if it simply repeats text that is already above the table. For example:

  • A pricing conditions table is the only control on a tab labeled Pricing Conditions.
  • A section or subsection on an object page contains only one table.

Use a table title if you need the item count, table toolbar, or variant management. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a table title, such as Items.
Exception: If the surrounding area contains the table title, and both the item count and toolbar can be added to the surrounding area, no additional table title is needed.
Example: An object page (sub-)section contains only one table. In this case, add the item count and the table toolbar to the (sub-)section header.

Developer Hint
Assistive technologies (such as screen readers) use the title to create a hierarchical site map for faster navigation. In addition, screen readers use the title as the label for the table.

If you don’t use a title (for example, to avoid repetition), make sure that the table is connected to another meaningful on-screen text that can be used as a label for assistive technologies. You can do this using the method addAriaLabelledBy.

If you use a table title, show either a title for the table, with or without variant management, or an item count in the following format:

Items (2,534)

The item count in the table title includes all the visible items that a user can reach by scrolling. Group headers are not included.

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items. Do not use an item count together with “growing mode”.

If possible, keep the title bar sticky (sap.m.Table, property: sticky).

Table title with item count
Table title with item count

Selection

If the click area for the row is being used for another purpose (such as navigation), it cannot be used for selecting the row. In this case, use the “single select left” selection mode, which offers a radio button as an additional click area for each row. To avoid confusion, make sure that the first data column does not contain radio buttons in default delivery.

In all other single selection cases, use the selection mode “single select master”.

For all single selection modes, make sure that one item is initially selected. Otherwise, the user cannot return to the initial state. A selected item can only be deselected by selecting another item.

In multiple selection mode, do not show checkboxes in the first data column in the default delivery to avoid confusion. Offer the Select All checkbox for (de)selecting all items the user can reach by scrolling.

Don't
Single selection left - Do not show radio buttons in the first column in the default delivery
Single selection left - Do not show radio buttons in the first column in the default delivery
Don't
Multiple selection - Do not show checkboxes in the first column in the default delivery
Multiple selection - Do not show checkboxes in the first column in the default delivery
Do
Use the selection mode
Use the selection mode "single select left" if clicking the row is used for something else (such as navigation)
Do
Use the selection mode
Use the selection mode "single select master" in all other single-selection cases
Developer Hint
Select All is only applied to items that have already been loaded to the front-end server. All other items are not (de)selected before they are loaded, such as items added via lazy loading with growingScrollToLoad. This conflicts with the guideline that all items the user can reach by scrolling must be (de)selected.

To process all items, listen to the selectionChange event and to its selectAll flag. This indicates whether the Select All checkbox was triggered. As soon as an action is triggered, process the items accordingly. Depending on the number of items, consider processing them in the back end.

Loading Data

To indicate that the table is currently loading items, use the busy state. (sap.m.Table, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Table in busy state while loading data
Table in busy state while loading data

Columns – Best Practices

Minimize the number of columns:

  • On a smartphone, use only one or two columns, depending on the content.
  • On a tablet or desktop, use three to five columns if the responsive table is shown within the flexible column layout. Use about eight columns if using the full screen width, depending on the content.

If the responsive table does not fit into the width provided:

  • Hide columns to reduce the width of the table.
  • Use pop-in areas to show the whole content by increasing the height of the line items (sap.m.Column, properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth).

At the smallest size, keep the following information in the table layout:

  • The column that identifies the line item.
  • The column that contains the key attribute.

If both of these do not fit into the width provided, keep just the column with the line item identifier in the tabular layout.

The responsive table assigns the same width to each column by default. It is recommended that you overwrite this default to provide optimal space for your content (sap.m.Column, property: width).

Optimize column width for its initial content (sap.m.Column, property: width). If the content is dynamic, optimize column width for typical content.

If you need more columns than those that fit on a tablet screen (usually five) to fulfill 80% of your main use cases, offer an option to add, remove, and rearrange columns via the table personalization dialog. Before doing so, try to reduce the number of columns, for example, by using several lines per column or by utilizing the pop-in function. See the cheat sheet for an example.

Column Headers – Best Practices

Within the column header, provide a label for each column (sap.m.Column, aggregation: header). The column header label is reused as a label in the pop-in area.

Exception: If the column does not pop in, no column header label is needed as long as at least one column still has a column header label.

Use controls that wrap and support wrapping with hyphenation, such as text (with wrapping and hyphenation enabled). Do not use controls that truncate.

Keep column headers sticky.

Do
Wrap column headers
Wrap column headers
Don't
Do not truncate column headers
Do not truncate column headers

Column headers (sap.m.Column, aggregation: header) usually contain links or text-based controls.

Column headers can also contain other kinds of SAP Fiori controls. However, the column header cannot be aligned vertically, making it difficult to use many controls in the column header. Using other kinds of controls also creates problems with pop-in behavior and could thus lead to accessibility issues. Therefore, exercise caution when using them in a column header.

Accepted: Link as column header text (rarely used)
Accepted: Link as column header text (rarely used)
Accepted if responsiveness is taken into account: Text plus search field
Accepted if responsiveness is taken into account: Text plus search field

If a column cell contains several fields, use an umbrella term in the column header (such as Address for fields like Street, ZIP Code, and City).

For text and ID fields, use a generic label (for example, Employee for Name and ID).

If none of these are possible, separate the labels with “/” (for example, Name / Status).

For boolean values, such as checkboxes, find a descriptive text for the column header.

Content Alignment

For alignment of cell content, follow the guidelines below (sap.m.Column, properties: halgin, valign, sap.m.ColumnListItem, property: VAlign). Align the column header horizontally according to the content of the cell.

Exception: Secondary information in a column always follows the alignment of the main information.

Left-align: text, IDs, phone numbers, URLs, passwords, and email addresses.

Left-alignment of text
Left-alignment of text

Right-align: numbers and amounts, except IDs, to ensure comparability of such figures.

Right-alignment of numbers
Right-alignment of numbers

Right-align: dates and times (to ensure comparability for most formats and locales).

Right-alignment of dates
Right-alignment of dates

Left-align status information.

Left-align status information
Left-align status information

Center-align icons.

Vertical alignment:

Top-align where possible to facilitate reading the content on one line.

Do not use top-alignment if it results in a peculiar layout. This usually happens when controls that need more vertical space are combined with text-only controls, such as input fields. In this case, try center-alignment instead and fine tune it until the layout fits.

Do
Use top-alignment where possible
Use top-alignment where possible
Don't
Do not use top alignment if it doesn't make sense
Do not use top alignment if it doesn't make sense

Content Formatting

The responsive table provides flexibility, including multiline cells, by enabling every control to be put into a cell.

As a key identifier of an item, use an object identifier. Show the key identifier in the first column. For more information, see object display components.

If the table width is small, do not hide this column or move it to the pop-in area.

Object identifier
Object identifier

Strings with IDs: If the responsive table contains more single-line data, show the ID in brackets after the corresponding string.

This minimizes the line height.

For items with a small line height, place the ID in brackets after the corresponding string
For items with a small line height, place the ID in brackets after the corresponding string
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link

Strings with IDs: If line height is already large, show the ID below the corresponding string. Use the object identifier to do so.

For items with a large line height, place the ID below the corresponding string
For items with a large line height, place the ID below the corresponding string
Is displayed as a link, use only the first line as the link
Is displayed as a link, use only the first line as the link

If there is more than one key identifier (for example, First Name and Last Name), display these columns first and show the values in bold text.

Several key identifiers
Several key identifiers

For status information, use semantic colors on the foreground elements.

For status information on text: If the status is actionable, add a transparent icon button next to the text.

Semantic colors on text
Semantic colors on text

Avoid truncation. Use controls that wrap the text and support hyphenation.

For example, use text.

Do
Do: wrap text
Do: wrap text
Don't
Do not: truncate text
Do not: truncate text

For editable content, use input fields and other interactive controls within the table cells. If you need to offer edit mode, change your text controls (labels, text, and links, to input fields or other appropriate controls) as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before.

You can do this by changing the control or, in more complex cases, by exchanging the whole responsive table.

Interactive controls – Inline
Interactive controls – Inline

If there is no value for a cell, leave it blank. Do not display text as N/A.

Leave empty fields blank
Leave empty fields blank

Numbering Items

  • If the item number has four digits/letters or less and is equally important as the corresponding description, concatenate the item number with the description and show it in one column.
  • If the item number has five digits/letters or more, or if it is more important than the corresponding description, for example, when no description is available, use a separate column for the item number.
  • If the item number is more like an ID in regards to its description, use ID formatting, like Description (ID).
For short numbers, add the item number to the description
For short numbers, add the item number to the description

Flag and Favorite

Place the flag or favorite marker in the first column (in the default delivery). To change the settings, users need to drill down into the object itself.

Item marked as a favorite
Item marked as a favorite

Empty Tables

Try not to display an empty responsive table. If there is no way around this, provide instructions on how to fill the table with data (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, properties: showNoData, noDataText).

Examples:

  • If a table is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the table with data.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    To start, set the relevant filters.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No data found. Try adjusting the filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, a search is also offered, or only the search is offered).
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of filter settings).

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items.

Provide meaningful instructions
Provide meaningful instructions

Item States

To show that an item is unread, use the corresponding flag (sap.m.Table, property: showUnread, sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: unread). This shows most of the content in bold font.

An unread item
An unread item

To show that an item has been modified, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string (Modified) at the bottom of the column that identifies the line item.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error (for example, within the global edit flow), add the string (Contains errors) at the bottom of the column that identifies the line item. To do this, use an object status control with the error state (sap.m.ObjectStatus, property: state, value: sap.ui.core.ValueState.Error).

In addition, highlight the row accordingly (sap.m.ListItemBase, property: highlight).

A modified item with an error
A modified item with an error

To show that an item is locked, use a transparent button with the corresponding icon and the text Locked by [Name] at the bottom of the identifying column. The user can click or tap the button to open a quick view of the person.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in a draft state, use a transparent-style button with the text Draft at the bottom of the identifying column. The user can click or tap the button to open a popover showing the timestamp of the last change.

Item in draft state
Item in draft state

Show only one state at any one time.

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, a highlight indicator can be shown in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to indicate:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry-specific or process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”.

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users exactly what is wrong. Make sure that you provide this information within the table row, ideally in the same color.

For details on the use of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.m.ListItemBase, property: highlight)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Numbers and Units

If the following conditions all apply, show the unit of measurement in the column header:

  • The unit of measurement is the same for all rows
  • A single cell contains only one amount with the unit of measurement
  • The column header does not scroll away

In all other cases, show the unit of measurement together with the corresponding amount within the row.

Show the unit of measurement in the same column as the corresponding amount.

For numbers with units, show the correct formatting by using the object number control.

Object number
Object number

For the most important number with its unit, show the correct formatting by using the object number control and the emphasized flag.
Exception: If all numbers are of equal importance, emphasize none of them.

If the table width is narrow, do not hide this column or move it to the pop-in area.
Exception: If the column containing the object identifier and the column containing the key attribute do not fit together on the screen, move the column containing the key attribute to the pop-in area.

Object number (emphasized)
Object number (emphasized)

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, it is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within the table, use drop targets that are between items (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between). This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Drop targets in between items
Drop targets in between items

Do not combine rearranging items and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure that there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

When combining rearranging items with grouping, be aware that moving items to another group also means that a value of the dropped item changes: because grouping is based on values in a column, the dropped item needs to take on the value of the target group for the corresponding column. If this is not wanted, do not allow users to rearrange items in grouped tables.

Example:
A table is grouped by availability. An item is moved from the group “Not Available” to the group “In Stock”. In this case, the moved item needs to change its availability to “In Stock” to match the target group. If changing the value doesn’t make sense, only allow users to rearrange the items within the same group, or don’t allow rearranging at all.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing.
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing.

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar).

Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

The context menu can be triggered for the whole table or per row.

Actions

To trigger actions on multiple items, use a multiselection table (sap.m.Table, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect), and offer the corresponding actions on the table toolbar. Keep the table toolbar sticky (sap.m.Table, property: sticky).

Do not offer actions for multiple items if the table is expected to have fewer than 10 items in most cases.

To trigger actions on a single item only (sap.m.Table, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectMaster):

  • Offer the corresponding actions in the footer toolbar if the responsive table is the only area on the screen to which actions can be applied. This has the advantage that the actions on the footer toolbar are fixed on the screen and cannot be scrolled away.
  • In other cases, show the actions on the table toolbar.
  • In rare cases, show the actions within the line item. One example would be an Add to Cart button in a shopping application. Since these actions are repeated in every line and thus use a lot of screen real estate, only do this for one or two actions at most. In this case, show the action trigger near the content to which it belongs. Do not add a specific column for actions. An exception to this is if the action trigger belongs to a link.
Inline actions
Inline actions

Enabling/Disabling Actions

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection:

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user how many items will be affected. Give users the option to apply the action anyway or to cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

If the action was applied, and if the items are still available, keep them selected.

Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection
Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection
Place actions near to the objects to which they belong
Place actions near to the objects to which they belong

The following actions on single items must always be in-line:

Delete: Use “Delete” table mode (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This places a Delete button at the end of each row.

Delete button
Delete button

Navigation: Use the “Navigation” column list item type (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This places a Navigation indicator at the end of each row.

Use this to navigate to a new page containing line item details. In rare cases, you can also use this for navigation within the table without navigating to another page.

Navigation indicator
Navigation indicator

Edit: Use the “Detail” column list item type (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail). This places an Edit icon at the end of each row.

Edit button
Edit button

From these three actions (delete, navigation, and edit), you can combine delete and edit, or delete and navigation.

Edit and navigation cannot be combined.

To trigger actions that are independent of the selection, show the actions on the table toolbar. Examples of such actions are add, edit (in the sense of changing the whole table to edit mode), sort, filter, group (or view settings), and table personalization.

To trigger a default action on the whole line item, use the “Active” or “DetailAndActive” column list item type (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active).

Active items trigger an event when clicked, which can be handled by apps (for example, to open a dialog). Clicks on interactive controls within the item do not trigger the event, but are handled by the interactive control. Do not use this for navigation, to switch the line item to an edit state, or to delete the item.

Active can be combined with edit and delete, but not with navigation. Do not combine active with single selection.

Add Items

For adding items, place an Add or Create text button on the table toolbar.

  • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
  • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.

Show new items as the first item of the table, with a visual highlight at the beginning of the row.

There are three options for adding an item after the Add button is pressed. In order of priority (most recommended first), these are:

  1. Add the item inline. Create an empty, editable row as the first item of the table. Show the Save button on the table toolbar. This option is recommended for simple scenarios with just a few columns and no option to hide columns.
  2. Open a dialog for larger tables with up to 8 editable columns. Save the new item at the dialog level.
  3. Navigate to a new page. This behavior should only be used for very complex scenarios that cannot be handled by a dialog (for example, tables with more than 8 columns). When the user presses Save in the footer toolbar of the create page, navigate back to the table.

A new item can have three different states:

  1. New: The item was just created and is in edit mode. It is highlighted with a visual indicator.
  2. Recent: The item was saved, but is still highlighted and displayed as the first item of the table. Current filter, sort and group criteria are ignored to keep the item visible.
  3. As soon as the responsive table is sorted, filtered, or grouped again, the action is also applied to the new item. It then also loses the visual highlight.

In the context of the draft handling new items are not saved on table level, but rather with the entire draft.

For more details, see the guidelines for managing objects (including subarticles).

Add button in table toolbar
Add button in table toolbar
New item as first row in edit mode
New item as first row in edit mode
Saved new item, still highlighted, still the first item
Saved new item, still highlighted, still the first item

Editable Content

For editable content, use input fields and any other interactive controls within the table cells that meet your input needs.

All SAPUI5 controls can be used.

If you need edit mode, change your text controls, such as label, text, and link, to input fields, or other appropriate controls as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before.

You can do this by exchanging the control or, in more complex cases, by exchanging the entire responsive table.

For mass editing items:

  • Provide multiselection (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).
  • Provide an Edit button.
  • If several items are selected, choosing the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

For details, see mass editing.

View Settings: Sort, Filter, and Group

Sort, filter, and/or group settings are handled in the view settings dialog. This dialog can provide any combination of these three settings, including just one setting, such as sort only.

  • If sorting, filtering, and/or grouping are a common use case in your app, offer one, two, or all three of the corresponding features in one or more view settings dialogs. Note: Do not offer these features if the table is expected to have only a small number of entries (up to 20 in most cases).
  • If filtering is a main use case, do not offer filtering in the view settings dialog. Use the filter bar instead.

To trigger the view settings dialog, provide several buttons, one for each of these view settings. Each button opens a view settings dialog that contains only the relevant page.

You should always use only the view settings you really need. For example, do not offer grouping if it does not support your use case well.

Using the view settings dialog allows you to define several sort, filter, and/or group settings per column. Therefore, you can sort, filter, and/or group a column with several data points independently by each data point.

Several triggers for the different view settings (sort, filter, group)
Several triggers for the different view settings (sort, filter, group)

Sort

For the default sort settings, sort by the column that identifies the row, which is usually the first column in default delivery. From this column, use the primary data point.

If you offer sorting, offer it for each data point. In other words, allow sorting by both the primary and secondary information in a column. Allow sorting in both directions, ascending and descending. The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order.

For each data point, provide a meaningful sort order. For example:

  • Sort text alphabetically
  • Sort numbers by their value
  • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
    • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
    • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
    • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
    • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first

Filter

To display the current filter state, use the info bar below the table title. Clicking or tapping the info bar opens the view settings dialog on the filter page.

Show the info bar only if the filter settings are not shown somewhere else. For example, do not show the info bar for settings taken in the filter bar or in a select placed in the table toolbar.

If the info bar is shown, provide an option to reset all corresponding filters on the info bar.

Keep the info bar sticky (sap.m.Table, property: sticky).

Developer Hint
To display the current filter settings on the info bar, consider using the list formatter (sap.ui.core.format.ListFormat).
Filtered table
Filtered table

Group

To display the current group state, group headers are shown.

On the group header, show the following text (sap.m.GroupHeaderListItem, property: title):

[Label of the grouped column]: [Grouping Value]

Do not use several values on the group header.

Grouped table
Grouped table

If there is no grouping value, show the following text:
[Label of the grouped column]: (Not Available)

This is the case if you have a group of items that don’t have a value for the grouped column.

Grouped table, with missing grouping value
Grouped table, with missing grouping value

Persist the view settings. When a user reopens the app, show the responsive table with the same sort, filter, and group settings as last defined by this user.

Personalization

To add, remove, or rearrange columns, use the table personalization dialog. Trigger the dialog via a button in the table toolbar.

Offer personalization if you need more columns than those that fit on a tablet screen, which is usually five, to fulfill 80% of your main use cases. Before doing so, try to reduce the number of columns, for example, by using several lines per column or by utilizing the pop-in function. See the cheat sheet for an example.

View settings and table personalization icons
View settings and table personalization icons

Persist the column layout settings. When a user reopens the app, show the responsive table with the same column layout as last defined by this user.

Tables in Object Pages

To show a table in the object page content area, use the responsive table.

A responsive table with up to 20 expected items can be displayed right away, without lazy loading.
If you expect the table to have more than 20 items, use one of the following 3 options:

  1. Lazy loading (More button): Use this option if you expect to have up to 100 items.
  2. Tab navigation: If you expect to have more than 50 to 100 items, but less than 400, use the object page with tab navigation instead of anchor navigation. Put the table on a dedicated tab.
  3. Navigation to a list report: If you expect the table to have more than 400 items, or if the tab approach is unsuitable, restrict the number of items in the table itself to a reasonable amount. To provide the user with a way to work with the entire table, offer navigation to a separate list report containing the full table.

For all of the three options mentioned above, we recommend providing a search, and if feasible, sort and filter capabilities for the table in the object page. Grouping should be avoided.

For more information on the use of tables within the object page, see the Tables section of the Object Page article.

Export to Spreadsheet

On the table toolbar, apps can provide a menu button for exporting table data to a spreadsheet. For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button
'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button

Paste

To paste data from the clipboard to the table, the browser functionality for paste can be used (CTRL + V or browser context menu).

  • If the focus is on row level, the app has to take the data from the clipboard and add it to the corresponding controls within the table.
  • If the focus is on an editable control within the table, the control gets the data automatically.

Pasting via context menu does not work if a custom context menu is used.

Properties

sap.m.Table

The following additional properties are available for the responsive table:

  • The property: fixedLayout defines the algorithm the control uses to define column width. Setting it to “false” would perform automatic calculations for the column width, based on the longest non-breakable content. You should always set it to “true” for performance reasons. Exceptions are permissible if the table has only a few columns for a large width and fewer than 10 rows are displayed.
  • The property: backgroundDesign defines the background on which items are rendered. Use the default value.
  • The property: showOverlay provides an overlay on the whole table, which prevents use of the responsive table. This is used within the list report floorplan to mark the table as outdated after filter settings have been changed but the new filter settings have not yet been applied. Do not use it in other cases.
  • The property: inset adds a margin on all sides of the responsive table.
  • The property: headerText is a simple way to set the table title if you just need a title. However, do not use any of the following:
    • A separate toolbar
    • variantManagement
    • headerToolbar aggregation
  • The property: headerDesign affects the appearance of the header if the theme supports it. Leave the default value as it is.
  • The property: footerText adds a small additional row below the table footer or last item. This row can contain text only. Do not use this property.
  • The property: width defines the width of the whole table.
  • The property: includeItemInSelection uses a click on the whole line item to select the corresponding item if the responsive table is in a selection mode. This competes with other settings like “Navigation” or “Active” and should therefore not be used.
  • The property: enableBusyIndicator automatically shows a busy indicator while data is loaded. (In contrast to the property: busy, where the application can control when the table is set to busy state)
  • The property: modeAnimationOn does not have any effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: showSeparators allows you to show all, none, or some separators. The default setting, which is to show all separators, is to be used.
  • The property: swipeDirection allows you to define the direction in which to swipe if additional actions are hidden behind a table row. This works only on touch devices. Do not use this property.
  • The property: rememberSelections leaves items selected even if they are not currently visible, for example, through filtering. If this behavior is not wanted, set the flag to “false”, but you should do so only in exceptional cases.
  • The property: busy sets the table to a busy state. While in busy state, the whole table cannot be used and items cannot be read due to an overlay.
  • The property: busyIndicatorDelay defines the time after which a busy state is shown after the responsive table has been set to this state. Use the default value.
  • The property: visible shows the table (“true”) or hides it (“false”).
  • The property: tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: alternateRowColors displays the rows with alternating background colors (“banded rows”). Do not use it.

sap.m.Column

The following additional properties are available for sap.m.Column:

  • The property: width defines the width of the column in all units allowed by HTML, such as em, rem, %, and px.
  • The property: styleClass is used if you need to change the visual design of a column. Do not use this, but use the default style instead.
  • The property: visible shows or hides the column.
  • The property: tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.

sap.m.ColumnListItem

The following additional properties are available for sap.m.ColumnListItem:

  • The property: selected allows an item to be selected programmatically.
  • The property: counter does not have any effect. Do not use it.
  • Do not use the property: busy.
  • Do not use the property: busyIndicatorDelay.
  • The property: visible shows or hides the item.
  • The property: tooltip adds a tooltip to a whole row. The tooltip is only shown on mouse interaction. It will not work on tablets or smartphones. Do not use it.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Responsive Table

The responsive table is the default table in SAP Fiori. It contains a set of line items and is fully responsive. Depending on the scenario, users can also navigate from the line items to further details.

A line item contains several data points sorted into columns. A data point refers to a unit of information, such as a number, a text, a unit of measurement, and so on, which can be used to form the content of a tableform or other control. One data point is usually displayed by a control, such as a text, object status, or input field. A control can display more than one data point, for example, by concatenating text.

In contrast to traditional tables, a “cell” of the responsive table is not limited to displaying only one control, and therefore a single cell can present far more than one data point.

Responsive table
Responsive table

Usage

Use the responsive table if:

  • You need a table. The responsive table is the default table in SAP Fiori.
  • You need to use various controls inside a line item, such as micro charts. By contrast, the analytical table supports only a very limited set of controls.
  • The focus is on line items, not on cells. The responsive table is optimized for viewing complete items on all devices.
  • Selecting one or more items is a main use case and details are needed to choose the correct item.
  • Line items are independent of each other and no operation across columns is needed.
  • You want to have only one implementation for all devices. As the name suggests, the responsive table is responsive.

Do not use the responsive table if:

  • The main use case is to select one item from a very small number of items, without viewing additional details. In this case, a select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • The main use case is to select one item from several items, with the possibility of viewing only a few details per item. In this case, a list might be more appropriate. Pay attention to the layout of the list item to ensure that it has a pleasant appearance.
  • The cell level and the spatial relationship between cells is more important than the line item. In this case, use the analytical table or grid table. Examples include spreadsheet analyses and waterfall charts. Note that neither the analytical table nor the grid table are fully responsive. Both are only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You are working on more than 1,000 rows. Try using the analytical table or grid table instead; they are easier to handle, perform better, and are optimized for handling large numbers of items. Note that neither the analytical table nor the grid table are fully responsive. Both are only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • Comparing items is a major use case. In this case, the analytical table or grid table might be more appropriate because each cell contains only one data point. By contrast, the responsive table offers greater flexibility within line items, including the ability to add more data points per cell and the pop-in function. Both make comparisons more difficult. Note that neither the analytical table nor the grid table are fully responsive. Both are only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • Data needs to be structured in a hierarchical manner. In this case, a tree table might be more appropriate. Although the analytical table can have several grouping levels, it is not as flexible when nodes at several levels contain child nodes. Note that neither the analytical table nor the grid table are fully responsive. Both are only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use a chart.
  • You just need it for layout reasons. In this case, use a layout container such as a horizontal layout or a vertical layout instead.
  • You need read-only or editable field-value pairs. In this case, use a form instead. The responsive table is not optimized for form-like input navigation.
Don't
Do not use a responsive table as a form
Do not use a responsive table as a form

See the table overview to decide which SAP Fiori table is most suitable for your needs.

Responsiveness

The responsive table is optimized for viewing one line item at a time with no scrolling or only vertical scrolling, irrespective of the display width.

On smartphones, only the most important data remains in the one-column or two-column table, while all other data is moved to the space between two item rows, known as the “pop-in area”.

In this area, data for the corresponding cell is provided as a label/value pair. The label is defined by the column header, and the value is taken from the corresponding cell. Labels can be displayed next to the value or above the value.

Within the pop-in area, the label/value pairs can be displayed in the following ways (sap.m.Table, property: PopinLayout):

  • Block: Label/value pairs are listed one below the other.
  • GridSmall: Label/value pairs are displayed next to each other in equally spaced grid cells. An additional column is shown for each 13 rem of available width (208 px with default browser settings). If the number of grid cells exceeds the available width, the grid cells wrap. On S size, this layout transforms automatically to a block layout.
  • GridLarge: The display logic is the same as for GridSmall,, but grid columns come with a larger minimum width (26 rem instead of 13 rem).

In all layouts, you can show the labels next to or above (recommended) the corresponding data.

The responsive table uses all the available space, and does not provide any padding. If there is space around the table, it comes from the spacing defined for the surrounding layout container.

Information
The GridSmall and GridLarge layouts are not available in all browsers. If the chosen layout is not available, it is automatically changed to Block layout.
The responsive table displayed on a smartphone (size S)
The responsive table displayed on a smartphone (size S)
The responsive table displayed on a tablet (size M)
The responsive table displayed on a tablet (size M)
The responsive table displayed in compact mode on a desktop computer (size L)
The responsive table displayed in compact mode on a desktop computer (size L)

To ensure responsiveness, you must configure each column. Depending on the width of the table (in pixels), the column needs to know which of the following responses is required:

  • Stay in the table layout.
  • Move to the pop-in (sap.m.Column, with the properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth, popinHAlign, popinDisplay).
  • Hide.

By default, the width provided is interpreted as the screen width. If the table does not use the full width of the screen, app developers have to configure the table accordingly (sap.m.Table, property: contextualWidth).

Since you have to define this for each column, you can also handle more than one column at a single breakpoint, such as moving three columns to the pop-in area at once.

Each of the three device types has a predefined value for the screen width. However, you will get better results if you offer more breakpoints by using pixel values instead of the predefined values.

For the smallest screen width, keep the following information in the table layout:

  • The identifier of the line item
  • The key attribute

Example for Block Layout

A typical responsive table.

A typical responsive table
A typical responsive table

Hide the information column for a width smaller than 570 px.

Hiding the information column
Hiding the information column

Move the column “vendor” to the pop-in area for a width smaller than 460 px (sap.m.Column, properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth).

Moving the vendor column to the pop-in area
Moving the vendor column to the pop-in area

Move the column “limit” to the pop-in for a width smaller than 350 px (sap.m.Column, properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth).

Moving the limit column to the pop-in area
Moving the limit column to the pop-in area

Move the column “price” to the pop-in area for a width smaller than 270 px (sap.m.Column, properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth).

Moving the price column to the pop-in area
Moving the price column to the pop-in area

If you still need to support smaller screens, values can be moved below the corresponding labels inside the pop-in area. In these examples, this happens for a width smaller than 220 px (sap.m.Column, property: popinDisplay).

Pop-in area: moving the data below the labels
Pop-in area: moving the data below the labels

Example for GridLarge Layout

A more complex responsive table.

A more complex responsive table (full screen without pop-in)
A more complex responsive table (full screen without pop-in)

In this example, the Average Occupancy Rate and Available In columns move to the pop-in area if the screen width is less than 1900 pixels.

GridLarge layout - 'Average Occupancy Rate' and 'Available In' columns move to the pop-in area
GridLarge layout - 'Average Occupancy Rate' and 'Available In' columns move to the pop-in area

If the width is less than 1500 pixels, the Average Stay column moves to the pop-in area.

GridLarge layout - 'Average Stay' column moves to the pop-in area
GridLarge layout - 'Average Stay' column moves to the pop-in area

If the width is less than 1100 pixels, the Description column moves to the pop-in area. Since all four columns in the pop-in area do not fit into one row, the pop-in wraps.

GridLarge layout - 'Description' column moves to the pop-in area
GridLarge layout - 'Description' column moves to the pop-in area

If the width is reduced even further, the Details column moves to the pop-in area. On this narrow screen, only one column fits into one pop-in row, so it looks exactly like the block layout.

GridLarge layout - 'Details' column moves to the pop-in area
GridLarge layout - 'Details' column moves to the pop-in area

Layout

The optional title bar consists of the title of the responsive table, an item counter, variant management, and the toolbar.

The filter info bar appears when the responsive table is filtered, and shows information on the filter settings.

The column header shows the label for each column.

The collection of items, or rows, occupies the main part of the responsive table.

You can add aggregation information (such as totals) on the table footer.

A More button can be shown if you do not want all items to be loaded at the start (known as “lazy loading”). Ideally, you should use scrolling to load more items instead of choosing the More button.

Schematic visualization of the responsive table
Schematic visualization of the responsive table

Components

The title bar contains the title of the responsive table, an item counter, variant management, and the toolbar.

The toolbar can contain entry points for the view settings dialog and the table personalization dialog, as well as view switches in the form of a segmented button, and buttons for AddEdit, and other actions.
Beneath the toolbar, display a filter info bar (which itself is a special toolbar) if the responsive table is filtered.
To format within items, apply the guidelines for formatting data. Controls commonly used inside items are the object identifier and the object number. For more information about these controls, see object display components.
You can use the table footer to display additional static information relating to the table content.
The More button loads more items to the front end if not all items have yet been loaded.
Components of the responsive table
Components of the responsive table

Behavior and Interaction

The responsive table is quite flexible with regard to its content.

Table Level

Scroll

The height of the table is defined by the number of items it contains. It does not have a scroll container on its own, but is scrolled together with the app (in contrast to the grid table and the analytical table).

If the table works in a “growing” mode, it only loads a few items at first. Additional items are only loaded (and rendered) on request. The “request” can either be triggered by scrolling (preferred), or by clicking the More button.

Same table, different number of items
Same table, different number of items

When the user scrolls, the title bar, column headers, and filter info bar can stick to the top of the surrounding layout container (sap.m.Table, property: sticky).

Information
The “sticky” feature comes with some limitations:

  • It is not available on all browsers. In non-supporting browsers, the corresponding areas (title bar, column headers, filter info bar) are not fixed on top of the surrounding layout container while scrolling.
  • Certain layout containers suppress the sticky behavior, such as the grid layout. The same happens if the table is placed within the object page.
  • If focus is set to a fixed column header, the table is automatically scrolled to top.

Sticky table title and sticky column header
Sticky table title and sticky column header

Merge Duplicates

To simulate the behavior of row spanning, you can merge cells of consecutive rows inside one or more columns automatically if they contain the same value (sap.m.Column, properties: mergeDuplicates, mergeFunctionName).

Use the merge feature if you expect the column to contain duplicate entries, and it makes sense to group them. In the example screenshot, the Supplier, Product, and Dimensions columns reflect a hierarchical structure: Suppliers have products, which in turn have dimensions. Because suppliers typically have multiple products, merging duplicate entries for the supplier column makes the table easier to read. Note, however, that when the user sorts the table by another field, the hierarchy changes and the merged items are regrouped accordingly.

Do not use the merge feature if duplicate entries are not part of the design. If consecutive table rows happen to have the same values at runtime, this alone isn’t a valid reason to group them.

Supplier column merges duplicates in consecutive rows
Supplier column merges duplicates in consecutive rows
Merged columns with multiselection
Merged columns with multiselection

Select

A responsive table can have one of the following selection modes (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode):

  • None: Items cannot be selected (sap.m.ListMode.None).
    Beware: Line items can still use the sap.m.ListType “navigation”, which allows click handling on specific line items. Only use this option if the click triggers navigation to a corresponding line item details page.
  • Single selection master: One item in the responsive table can be selected. Items are selected by clicking or tapping the whole row. The single select master mode has no obvious visual cues, such as checkboxes or radio buttons. It only provides a light blue background for the selected state. Because of this, it can barely be differentiated from tables without selection (mode: None). Single select master is the preferred mode for single selection (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectMaster).
  • Single selection left: One item in the responsive table can be selected. For this, the responsive table provides radio buttons on the left side of each line item. Only use this mode if row clicks are being used for something else, such as navigation. (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectLeft).
  • Multiple selection: Users can select one or more items using the checkboxes on the left side of each line item. The Shift key can be used to select a range. Users can (de)select all items using the Select All checkbox to the left of the column header. Select All should (de)select all items that the user can reach by scrolling.  (sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).
Responsive table without selectable items
Responsive table without selectable items
Single selection master
Single selection master
SIngle selection left, with radio buttons. Use only if row clicks are used for something else.
SIngle selection left, with radio buttons. Use only if row clicks are used for something else.
Multiple selection
Multiple selection

Group

For grouping items, a group header is displayed (sap.m.GroupHeaderLisItem). The group header is not interactive.

Group headers
Group headers

Show Aggregations

Show aggregations (such as totals) on the table footer (sap.m.Column, aggregation: footer).

Do not show aggregations in “growing” mode. It is not clear, if an aggregation will only aggregate the items loaded into the front end, or all items.

Table footer displays aggregated total
Table footer displays aggregated total

Load Items

To show more than 200 items, use the “growing” mode (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, properties: growing, growingThreshold, growingScrollToLoad, growingTriggerText). The growing mode allows the user to load only the first few items. Additional items are only loaded (and rendered) on request, which improves performance. The “request” can either be done via scrolling (preferred), or by clicking the More button.

If using the More button, show the number of items already loaded and the total number items below the text More, if possible.

Do not show more than 1,000 items overall, even in growing mode. Use the grid table instead.

Do not show aggregations in growing mode. Also, do not display an item count on the table toolbar if growing mode is used. Use the count on the More button instead.

Load on scroll
Load on scroll

Line Item Level

Delete Single Item Rows

To delete single item rows, use the table in the mode “delete” (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This adds Delete buttons to each line item. Clicking this button triggers the deletion of the corresponding line item.

Do not use this mode if deleting multiple lines at once is the preferred use case.

Delete is a mode of the responsive table and therefore cannot be used together with single selection or multiselection.

Responsive table in 'delete' mode
Responsive table in 'delete' mode

Navigate

To allow navigation from a line item, use an item with the type “navigation” (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This creates an indicator at the end of the line (“>”) and the entire line item becomes clickable. If the user clicks or taps on the line, navigate to a new page containing line item details. In rare cases, you can also use the navigation mode for category navigation, without navigating to another page.

By contrast, clicking an interactive control within a line item does not trigger the navigation event. Instead, the corresponding control handles the click event.

If no navigation is possible, set sap.m.ListType to “inactive”.

“Navigation” is a list item type and therefore cannot be used together with “edit”, or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).

Navigation indicator
Navigation indicator

Edit Line Items

To allow editing for a line item, set sap.m.ListType to “detail” within the corresponding item (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive). This will create an Edit button at the end of the line. Clicking the button triggers the edit event. Use this event to switch the corresponding line item to edit mode.

Edit is a list item type and therefore cannot be used together with “navigation” or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).

Edit button
Edit button

Click an Item

Items as a whole can be clickable. An event is fired by clicking on the item (anywhere where there is no interactive control inside the item). Apps can react on the event, for example, by opening a dialog (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive).

Active elements do not have a visual indication and can therefore not be differentiated from non-active elements.

Active is a list item type and can therefore not be used together with “navigation” or “edit”. In addition, “active” uses the whole item as a clickable area and therefore cannot be used together with a single-selection table.

Active element
Active element

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a table or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.m.ListBase, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a table. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

When opened, the context menu gets the row and column context, except for special columns (such as the selection column). Context menus can be implemented for a specific table or row.

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a table is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Responsive table with a context menu
Responsive table with a context menu

Cell Level

Showing Information

In contrast to traditional tables (such as the analytical table or the tree table), a cell can contain more than just one line of text.

Several lines of text within one cell
Several lines of text within one cell

Add Controls

Alongside textual elements, you can also add any control to a table cell, such as input fields, microcharts, buttons, and so on.

Controls inside cells
Controls inside cells
Any control can be placed inside cells
Any control can be placed inside cells

A cell can contain more than one control and more than one data point.

With the View Settings dialog, users can sort, filter, and group by each of these data points.

Several controls per cell
Several controls per cell

You can also have different controls in different rows in the same column. This could be the case if one item is locked, but another item is in edit mode, for example.

Different controls per column
Different controls per column

Guidelines

Responsiveness

While the pop-in layouts GridLarge and GridSmall make better use of the available width, they also only look good with content that is specifically designed for pop-in behavior. If you have text-only tables with only one value per column, use the Block layout (sap.m.Table, property: popinLayout).

Place the column header labels in the pop-in area above the corresponding values (sap.m.Column, property: popinDisplay, value: Block). This avoids alignment issues with different content. Be aware that the labels get top-aligned with the adjacent content.
Only place the label next to the corresponding value under the following conditions (sap.m.Column, property: popinDisplay, value: Inline):

  • The values are text-only (no input fields, icons, images, micro charts, and so on)
  • The available space is at least the double the width of size S.

This avoids truncation or “over-wrapping” of the labels and content.

If a column does not have a column header text (for example, if it always contains the same button with its own label), do not show the header text as a label in the pop-in area either (sap.m.Column, property: popinDisplay, value: withoutHeader). If you forget this setting, you will see an empty space followed by a colon (“:”).

Information
The GridSmall and GridLarge layouts are not available in all browsers. If the chosen layout is not available, it is automatically changed to Block layout.

Table Title

Implement the table title by using a title control in a toolbar.

Use a table title only if the title of the table is not indicated in the surrounding area. Do not use a table title if it simply repeats text that is already above the table. For example:

  • A pricing conditions table is the only control on a tab labeled Pricing Conditions.
  • A section or subsection on an object page contains only one table.

Use a table title if you need the item count, table toolbar, or variant management. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a table title, such as Items.
Exception: If the surrounding area contains the table title, and both the item count and toolbar can be added to the surrounding area, no additional table title is needed.
Example: An object page (sub-)section contains only one table. In this case, add the item count and the table toolbar to the (sub-)section header.

Developer Hint
Assistive technologies (such as screen readers) use the title to create a hierarchical site map for faster navigation. In addition, screen readers use the title as the label for the table.

If you don’t use a title (for example, to avoid repetition), make sure that the table is connected to another meaningful on-screen text that can be used as a label for assistive technologies. You can do this using the method addAriaLabelledBy.

If you use a table title, show either a title for the table, with or without variant management, or an item count in the following format:

Items (2,534)

The item count in the table title includes all the visible items that a user can reach by scrolling. Group headers are not included.

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items. Do not use an item count together with “growing mode”.

If possible, keep the title bar sticky (sap.m.Table, property: sticky).

Table title with item count
Table title with item count

Selection

If the click area for the row is being used for another purpose (such as navigation), it cannot be used for selecting the row. In this case, use the “single select left” selection mode, which offers a radio button as an additional click area for each row. To avoid confusion, make sure that the first data column does not contain radio buttons in default delivery.

In all other single selection cases, use the selection mode “single select master”.

For all single selection modes, make sure that one item is initially selected. Otherwise, the user cannot return to the initial state. A selected item can only be deselected by selecting another item.

In multiple selection mode, do not show checkboxes in the first data column in the default delivery to avoid confusion. Offer the Select All checkbox for (de)selecting all items the user can reach by scrolling.

Don't
Single selection left - Do not show radio buttons in the first column in the default delivery
Single selection left - Do not show radio buttons in the first column in the default delivery
Don't
Multiple selection - Do not show checkboxes in the first column in the default delivery
Multiple selection - Do not show checkboxes in the first column in the default delivery
Do
Use the selection mode
Use the selection mode "single select left" if clicking the row is used for something else (such as navigation)
Do
Use the selection mode
Use the selection mode "single select master" in all other single-selection cases
Developer Hint
Select All is only applied to items that have already been loaded to the front-end server. All other items are not (de)selected before they are loaded, such as items added via lazy loading with growingScrollToLoad. This conflicts with the guideline that all items the user can reach by scrolling must be (de)selected.

To process all items, listen to the selectionChange event and to its selectAll flag. This indicates whether the Select All checkbox was triggered. As soon as an action is triggered, process the items accordingly. Depending on the number of items, consider processing them in the back end.

Loading Data

To indicate that the table is currently loading items, use the busy state. (sap.m.Table, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Table in busy state while loading data
Table in busy state while loading data

Columns – Best Practices

Minimize the number of columns:

  • On a smartphone, use only one or two columns, depending on the content.
  • On a tablet or desktop, use three to five columns if the responsive table is shown within the flexible column layout. Use about eight columns if using the full screen width, depending on the content.

If the responsive table does not fit into the width provided:

  • Hide columns to reduce the width of the table.
  • Use pop-in areas to show the whole content by increasing the height of the line items (sap.m.Column, properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth).

At the smallest size, keep the following information in the table layout:

  • The column that identifies the line item.
  • The column that contains the key attribute.

If both of these do not fit into the width provided, keep just the column with the line item identifier in the tabular layout.

The responsive table assigns the same width to each column by default. It is recommended that you overwrite this default to provide optimal space for your content (sap.m.Column, property: width).

Optimize column width for its initial content (sap.m.Column, property: width). If the content is dynamic, optimize column width for typical content.

If you need more columns than those that fit on a tablet screen (usually five) to fulfill 80% of your main use cases, offer an option to add, remove, and rearrange columns via the table personalization dialog. Before doing so, try to reduce the number of columns, for example, by using several lines per column or by utilizing the pop-in function. See the cheat sheet for an example.

Column Headers – Best Practices

Within the column header, provide a label for each column (sap.m.Column, aggregation: header). The column header label is reused as a label in the pop-in area.

Exception: If the column does not pop in, no column header label is needed as long as at least one column still has a column header label.

Use controls that wrap, such as text (with wrapping enabled). Do not use controls that truncate, such as labels.

Keep column headers sticky.

Do
Wrap column headers
Wrap column headers
Don't
Do not truncate column headers
Do not truncate column headers

Column headers (sap.m.Column, aggregation: header) usually contain links or text-based controls.

Column headers can also contain other kinds of SAP Fiori controls. However, the column header cannot be aligned vertically, making it difficult to use many controls in the column header. Using other kinds of controls also creates problems with pop-in behavior and could thus lead to accessibility issues. Therefore, exercise caution when using them in a column header.

Accepted: Link as column header text (rarely used)
Accepted: Link as column header text (rarely used)
Accepted if responsiveness is taken into account: Text plus search field
Accepted if responsiveness is taken into account: Text plus search field

If a column cell contains several fields, use an umbrella term in the column header (such as Address for fields like Street, ZIP Code, and City).

For text and ID fields, use a generic label (for example, Employee for Name and ID).

If none of these are possible, separate the labels with “/” (for example, Name / Status).

For boolean values, such as checkboxes, find a descriptive text for the column header.

Content Alignment

For alignment of cell content, follow the guidelines below (sap.m.Column, properties: halgin, valign, sap.m.ColumnListItem, property: VAlign). Align the column header horizontally according to the content of the cell.

Exception: Secondary information in a column always follows the alignment of the main information.

Left-align: text, IDs, phone numbers, URLs, passwords, and email addresses.

Left-alignment of text
Left-alignment of text

Right-align: numbers and amounts, except IDs, to ensure comparability of such figures.

Right-alignment of numbers
Right-alignment of numbers

Right-align: dates and times (to ensure comparability for most formats and locales).

Right-alignment of dates
Right-alignment of dates

Left-align status information.

Left-align status information
Left-align status information

Center-align icons.

Vertical alignment:

Top-align where possible to facilitate reading the content on one line.

Do not use top-alignment if it results in a peculiar layout. This usually happens when controls that need more vertical space are combined with text-only controls, such as input fields. In this case, try center-alignment instead and fine tune it until the layout fits.

Do
Use top-alignment where possible
Use top-alignment where possible
Don't
Do not use top alignment if it doesn't make sense
Do not use top alignment if it doesn't make sense

Content Formatting

The responsive table provides flexibility, including multiline cells, by enabling every control to be put into a cell.

As a key identifier of an item, use an object identifier. Show the key identifier in the first column. For more information, see object display components.

If the table width is small, do not hide this column or move it to the pop-in area.

Object identifier
Object identifier

Strings with IDs: If the responsive table contains more single-line data, show the ID in brackets after the corresponding string.

This minimizes the line height.

For items with a small line height, place the ID in brackets after the corresponding string
For items with a small line height, place the ID in brackets after the corresponding string
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link

Strings with IDs: If line height is already large, show the ID below the corresponding string. Use the object identifier to do so.

For items with a large line height, place the ID below the corresponding string
For items with a large line height, place the ID below the corresponding string
Is displayed as a link, use only the first line as the link
Is displayed as a link, use only the first line as the link

If there is more than one key identifier (for example, First Name and Last Name), display these columns first and show the values in bold text.

Several key identifiers
Several key identifiers

For status information, use semantic colors on the foreground elements.

For status information on text: If the status is actionable, add a transparent icon button next to the text.

Semantic colors on text
Semantic colors on text

Avoid truncation. Use controls that wrap the text.

For example, use text instead of a label.

Do
Do: wrap text
Do: wrap text
Don't
Do not: truncate text
Do not: truncate text

For editable content, use input fields and other interactive controls within the table cells. If you need to offer edit mode, change your text controls (labels, text, and links, to input fields or other appropriate controls) as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before.

You can do this by changing the control or, in more complex cases, by exchanging the whole responsive table.

Interactive controls – Inline
Interactive controls – Inline

If there is no value for a cell, leave it blank. Do not display text as N/A.

Leave empty fields blank
Leave empty fields blank

Numbering Items

  • If the item number has four digits/letters or less and is equally important as the corresponding description, concatenate the item number with the description and show it in one column.
  • If the item number has five digits/letters or more, or if it is more important than the corresponding description, for example, when no description is available, use a separate column for the item number.
  • If the item number is more like an ID in regards to its description, use ID formatting, like Description (ID).
For short numbers, add the item number to the description
For short numbers, add the item number to the description

Flag and Favorite

Place the flag or favorite marker in the first column (in the default delivery). To change the settings, users need to drill down into the object itself.

Item marked as a favorite
Item marked as a favorite

Empty Tables

Try not to display an empty responsive table. If there is no way around this, provide instructions on how to fill the table with data (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, properties: showNoData, noDataText).

Examples:

  • If a table is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the table with data.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    To start, set the relevant filters.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No data found. Try adjusting the filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, a search is also offered, or only the search is offered).
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of filter settings).

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items.

Provide meaningful instructions
Provide meaningful instructions

Item States

To show that an item is unread, use the corresponding flag (sap.m.Table, property: showUnread, sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: unread). This shows most of the content in bold font.

An unread item
An unread item

To show that an item has been modified, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string (Modified) at the bottom of the column that identifies the line item.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error (for example, within the global edit flow), add the string (Contains errors) at the bottom of the column that identifies the line item. To do this, use an object status control with the error state (sap.m.ObjectStatus, property: state, value: sap.ui.core.ValueState.Error).

In addition, highlight the row accordingly (sap.m.ListItemBase, property: highlight).

A modified item with an error
A modified item with an error

To show that an item is locked, use a transparent button with the corresponding icon and the text Locked by [Name] at the bottom of the identifying column. The user can click or tap the button to open a quick view of the person.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in a draft state, use a transparent-style button with the text Draft at the bottom of the identifying column. The user can click or tap the button to open a popover showing the timestamp of the last change.

Item in draft state
Item in draft state

Show only one state at any one time.

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, a highlight indicator can be shown in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to indicate:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry-specific or process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”.

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users exactly what is wrong. Make sure that you provide this information within the table row, ideally in the same color.

For details on the use of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.m.ListItemBase, property: highlight)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Numbers and Units

If the following conditions all apply, show the unit of measurement in the column header:

  • The unit of measurement is the same for all rows
  • A single cell contains only one amount with the unit of measurement
  • The column header does not scroll away

In all other cases, show the unit of measurement together with the corresponding amount within the row.

Show the unit of measurement in the same column as the corresponding amount.

For numbers with units, show the correct formatting by using the object number control.

Object number
Object number

For the most important number with its unit, show the correct formatting by using the object number control and the emphasized flag.
Exception: If all numbers are of equal importance, emphasize none of them.

If the table width is narrow, do not hide this column or move it to the pop-in area.
Exception: If the column containing the object identifier and the column containing the key attribute do not fit together on the screen, move the column containing the key attribute to the pop-in area.

Object number (emphasized)
Object number (emphasized)

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, it is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within the table, use drop targets that are between items (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between). This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Drop targets in between items
Drop targets in between items

Do not combine rearranging items and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure that there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

When combining rearranging items with grouping, be aware that moving items to another group also means that a value of the dropped item changes: because grouping is based on values in a column, the dropped item needs to take on the value of the target group for the corresponding column. If this is not wanted, do not allow users to rearrange items in grouped tables.

Example:
A table is grouped by availability. An item is moved from the group “Not Available” to the group “In Stock”. In this case, the moved item needs to change its availability to “In Stock” to match the target group. If changing the value doesn’t make sense, only allow users to rearrange the items within the same group, or don’t allow rearranging at all.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing.
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing.

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar).

Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

The context menu can be triggered for the whole table or per row.

Actions

To trigger actions on multiple items, use a multiselection table (sap.m.Table, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect), and offer the corresponding actions on the table toolbar. Keep the table toolbar sticky (sap.m.Table, property: sticky).

Do not offer actions for multiple items if the table is expected to have fewer than 10 items in most cases.

To trigger actions on a single item only (sap.m.Table, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectMaster):

  • Offer the corresponding actions in the footer toolbar if the responsive table is the only area on the screen to which actions can be applied. This has the advantage that the actions on the footer toolbar are fixed on the screen and cannot be scrolled away.
  • In other cases, show the actions on the table toolbar.
  • In rare cases, show the actions within the line item. One example would be an Add to Cart button in a shopping application. Since these actions are repeated in every line and thus use a lot of screen real estate, only do this for one or two actions at most. In this case, show the action trigger near the content to which it belongs. Do not add a specific column for actions. An exception to this is if the action trigger belongs to a link.
Inline actions
Inline actions

Enabling/Disabling Actions

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection:

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user how many items will be affected. Give users the option to apply the action anyway or to cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

If the action was applied, and if the items are still available, keep them selected.

Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection
Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection
Place actions near to the objects to which they belong
Place actions near to the objects to which they belong

The following actions on single items must always be in-line:

Delete: Use “Delete” table mode (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This places a Delete button at the end of each row.

Delete button
Delete button

Navigation: Use the “Navigation” column list item type (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This places a Navigation indicator at the end of each row.

Use this to navigate to a new page containing line item details. In rare cases, you can also use this for navigation within the table without navigating to another page.

Navigation indicator
Navigation indicator

Edit: Use the “Detail” column list item type (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail). This places an Edit icon at the end of each row.

Edit button
Edit button

From these three actions (delete, navigation, and edit), you can combine delete and edit, or delete and navigation.

Edit and navigation cannot be combined.

To trigger actions that are independent of the selection, show the actions on the table toolbar. Examples of such actions are add, edit (in the sense of changing the whole table to edit mode), sort, filter, group (or view settings), and table personalization.

To trigger a default action on the whole line item, use the “Active” or “DetailAndActive” column list item type (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active).

Active items trigger an event when clicked, which can be handled by apps (for example, to open a dialog). Clicks on interactive controls within the item do not trigger the event, but are handled by the interactive control. Do not use this for navigation, to switch the line item to an edit state, or to delete the item.

Active can be combined with edit and delete, but not with navigation. Do not combine active with single selection.

Add Items

For adding items, place an Add or Create text button on the table toolbar.

  • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
  • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.

Show new items as the first item of the table, with a visual highlight at the beginning of the row.

There are three options for adding an item after the Add button is pressed. In order of priority (most recommended first), these are:

  1. Add the item inline. Create an empty, editable row as the first item of the table. Show the Save button on the table toolbar. This option is recommended for simple scenarios with just a few columns and no option to hide columns.
  2. Open a dialog for larger tables with up to 8 editable columns. Save the new item at the dialog level.
  3. Navigate to a new page. This behavior should only be used for very complex scenarios that cannot be handled by a dialog (for example, tables with more than 8 columns). When the user presses Save in the footer toolbar of the create page, navigate back to the table.

A new item can have three different states:

  1. New: The item was just created and is in edit mode. It is highlighted with a visual indicator.
  2. Recent: The item was saved, but is still highlighted and displayed as the first item of the table. Current filter, sort and group criteria are ignored to keep the item visible.
  3. As soon as the responsive table is sorted, filtered, or grouped again, the action is also applied to the new item. It then also loses the visual highlight.

In the context of the draft handling new items are not saved on table level, but rather with the entire draft.

For more details, see the guidelines for managing objects (including subarticles).

Add button in table toolbar
Add button in table toolbar
New item as first row in edit mode
New item as first row in edit mode
Saved new item, still highlighted, still the first item
Saved new item, still highlighted, still the first item

Editable Content

For editable content, use input fields and any other interactive controls within the table cells that meet your input needs.

All SAPUI5 controls can be used.

If you need edit mode, change your text controls, such as label, text, and link, to input fields, or other appropriate controls as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before.

You can do this by exchanging the control or, in more complex cases, by exchanging the entire responsive table.

For mass editing items:

  • Provide multiselection (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).
  • Provide an Edit button.
  • If several items are selected, choosing the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

For details, see mass editing.

View Settings: Sort, Filter, and Group

Sort, filter, and/or group settings are handled in the view settings dialog. This dialog can provide any combination of these three settings, including just one setting, such as sort only.

  • If sorting, filtering, and/or grouping are a common use case in your app, offer one, two, or all three of the corresponding features in one or more view settings dialogs. Note: Do not offer these features if the table is expected to have only a small number of entries (up to 20 in most cases).
  • If filtering is a main use case, do not offer filtering in the view settings dialog. Use the filter bar instead.

To trigger the view settings dialog, provide several buttons, one for each of these view settings. Each button opens a view settings dialog that contains only the relevant page.

You should always use only the view settings you really need. For example, do not offer grouping if it does not support your use case well.

Using the view settings dialog allows you to define several sort, filter, and/or group settings per column. Therefore, you can sort, filter, and/or group a column with several data points independently by each data point.

Several triggers for the different view settings (sort, filter, group)
Several triggers for the different view settings (sort, filter, group)

Sort

For the default sort settings, sort by the column that identifies the row, which is usually the first column in default delivery. From this column, use the primary data point.

If you offer sorting, offer it for each data point. In other words, allow sorting by both the primary and secondary information in a column. Allow sorting in both directions, ascending and descending. The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order.

For each data point, provide a meaningful sort order. For example:

  • Sort text alphabetically
  • Sort numbers by their value
  • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
    • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
    • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
    • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
    • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first

Filter

To display the current filter state, use the info bar below the table title. Clicking or tapping the info bar opens the view settings dialog on the filter page.

Show the info bar only if the filter settings are not shown somewhere else. For example, do not show the info bar for settings taken in the filter bar or in a select placed in the table toolbar.

If the info bar is shown, provide an option to reset all corresponding filters on the info bar.

Keep the info bar sticky (sap.m.Table, property: sticky).

Developer Hint
To display the current filter settings on the info bar, consider using the list formatter (sap.ui.core.format.ListFormat).
Filtered table
Filtered table

Group

To display the current group state, group headers are shown.

On the group header, show the following text (sap.m.GroupHeaderListItem, property: title):

[Label of the grouped column]: [Grouping Value]

Do not use several values on the group header.

Grouped table
Grouped table

If there is no grouping value, show the following text:
[Label of the grouped column]: (Not Available)

This is the case if you have a group of items that don’t have a value for the grouped column.

Grouped table, with missing grouping value
Grouped table, with missing grouping value

Persist the view settings. When a user reopens the app, show the responsive table with the same sort, filter, and group settings as last defined by this user.

Personalization

To add, remove, or rearrange columns, use the table personalization dialog. Trigger the dialog via a button in the table toolbar.

Offer personalization if you need more columns than those that fit on a tablet screen, which is usually five, to fulfill 80% of your main use cases. Before doing so, try to reduce the number of columns, for example, by using several lines per column or by utilizing the pop-in function. See the cheat sheet for an example.

View settings and table personalization icons
View settings and table personalization icons

Persist the column layout settings. When a user reopens the app, show the responsive table with the same column layout as last defined by this user.

Tables in Object Pages

To show a table in the object page content area, use the responsive table.

A responsive table with up to 20 expected items can be displayed right away, without lazy loading.
If you expect the table to have more than 20 items, use one of the following 3 options:

  1. Lazy loading (More button): Use this option if you expect to have up to 100 items.
  2. Tab navigation: If you expect to have more than 50 to 100 items, but less than 400, use the object page with tab navigation instead of anchor navigation. Put the table on a dedicated tab.
  3. Navigation to a list report: If you expect the table to have more than 400 items, or if the tab approach is unsuitable, restrict the number of items in the table itself to a reasonable amount. To provide the user with a way to work with the entire table, offer navigation to a separate list report containing the full table.

For all of the three options mentioned above, we recommend providing a search, and if feasible, sort and filter capabilities for the table in the object page. Grouping should be avoided.

For more information on the use of tables within the object page, see the Tables section of the Object Page article.

Export to Spreadsheet

On the table toolbar, apps can provide a menu button for exporting table data to a spreadsheet. For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button
'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button

Paste

To paste data from the clipboard to the table, the browser functionality for paste can be used (CTRL + V or browser context menu).

  • If the focus is on row level, the app has to take the data from the clipboard and add it to the corresponding controls within the table.
  • If the focus is on an editable control within the table, the control gets the data automatically.

Pasting via context menu does not work if a custom context menu is used.

Properties

sap.m.Table

The following additional properties are available for the responsive table:

  • The property: fixedLayout defines the algorithm the control uses to define column width. Setting it to “false” would perform automatic calculations for the column width, based on the longest non-breakable content. You should always set it to “true” for performance reasons. Exceptions are permissible if the table has only a few columns for a large width and fewer than 10 rows are displayed.
  • The property: backgroundDesign defines the background on which items are rendered. Use the default value.
  • The property: showOverlay provides an overlay on the whole table, which prevents use of the responsive table. This is used within the list report floorplan to mark the table as outdated after filter settings have been changed but the new filter settings have not yet been applied. Do not use it in other cases.
  • The property: inset adds a margin on all sides of the responsive table.
  • The property: headerText is a simple way to set the table title if you just need a title. However, do not use any of the following:
    • A separate toolbar
    • variantManagement
    • headerToolbar aggregation
  • The property: headerDesign affects the appearance of the header if the theme supports it. Leave the default value as it is.
  • The property: footerText adds a small additional row below the table footer or last item. This row can contain text only. Do not use this property.
  • The property: width defines the width of the whole table.
  • The property: includeItemInSelection uses a click on the whole line item to select the corresponding item if the responsive table is in a selection mode. This competes with other settings like “Navigation” or “Active” and should therefore not be used.
  • The property: enableBusyIndicator automatically shows a busy indicator while data is loaded. (In contrast to the property: busy, where the application can control when the table is set to busy state)
  • The property: modeAnimationOn does not have any effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: showSeparators allows you to show all, none, or some separators. The default setting, which is to show all separators, is to be used.
  • The property: swipeDirection allows you to define the direction in which to swipe if additional actions are hidden behind a table row. This works only on touch devices. Do not use this property.
  • The property: rememberSelections leaves items selected even if they are not currently visible, for example, through filtering. If this behavior is not wanted, set the flag to “false”, but you should do so only in exceptional cases.
  • The property: busy sets the table to a busy state. While in busy state, the whole table cannot be used and items cannot be read due to an overlay.
  • The property: busyIndicatorDelay defines the time after which a busy state is shown after the responsive table has been set to this state. Use the default value.
  • The property: visible shows the table (“true”) or hides it (“false”).
  • The property: tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: alternateRowColors displays the rows with alternating background colors (“banded rows”). Do not use it.

sap.m.Column

The following additional properties are available for sap.m.Column:

  • The property: width defines the width of the column in all units allowed by HTML, such as em, rem, %, and px.
  • The property: styleClass is used if you need to change the visual design of a column. Do not use this, but use the default style instead.
  • The property: visible shows or hides the column.
  • The property: tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.

sap.m.ColumnListItem

The following additional properties are available for sap.m.ColumnListItem:

  • The property: selected allows an item to be selected programmatically.
  • The property: counter does not have any effect. Do not use it.
  • Do not use the property: busy.
  • Do not use the property: busyIndicatorDelay.
  • The property: visible shows or hides the item.
  • The property: tooltip adds a tooltip to a whole row. The tooltip is only shown on mouse interaction. It will not work on tablets or smartphones. Do not use it.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

List

In SAP Fiori, we distinguish between tables and lists. Both usually contain homogeneous data, but lists generally have rather basic data, whereas the data in tables tends to be more complex. Lists are mostly used in the master list for a master-detail scenario using the flexible column layout, as well as in popovers or dialogs. For certain use cases, lists can also be used in the dynamic page layout.

Usage

Use the list if:

  • You want to display a homogeneous set of basic data.
  • You need to sort, group, or filter simple datasets.
  • You need to display a single-level hierarchy rather than using a complex tree table to support this simple use case.

Do not use the list if:

  • You want to manage complex datasets that need to be extensively sorted, grouped, filtered, or edited. In this case, use a table.
  • You work with complex hierarchies. In this case, use a tree.

Responsiveness

The list is like a layout container. You can change its width, but you must also ensure that the items contained in the list adapt whenever the list is resized.

All list item variants available in SAP Fiori already adapt to the respective screen size.

List Item Variants

The list contains various list items. These items can be of various types depending on the use case and on the content they have. SAPUI5 already provides the most common list items in SAP Fiori in the form of controls, although custom list items can also be created if necessary.

All the available list item types behave responsively and adapt to changing screen sizes out of the box. Most of them use truncation if size becomes too limited, since they are usually used to navigate to the item details. For custom list items, you can also wrap the texts, if required.

Object List Item

The object list item is the list item variant used most frequently in SAP Fiori applications. Consisting of a title, key figure, attributes, and a status, it contains the most important information about an object.

The space available for the attributes and status is limited as it should only show crucial information that allows the user to decide which items should be dealt with first.

All essential information about an object is usually provided when the user navigates to the item details.

For more information, see object list item.

Object list items
Object list items

Standard List Item

The standard list item is used for less complex entries, such as when the user selects an item in a dialog. This list item contains an optional image, a title, description, and a single info text (which can contain semantic information).

For more information, see standard list item.

Standard list items
Standard list items

Display List Item

The display list item is the simplest form of a list item and is only capable of showing a label and values. It is seldom used.

For more information, see display list item.

Display list items
Display list items

Action List Item

The action list item allows various actions to be triggered in a dialog. The action list item is not used in the content area.

For more information, see action list item.

Action list item
Action list item

Feed List Item

The feed list item is mainly used in feeds and notes.

For more information, see feed list item.

Feed with feed list items
Feed with feed list items

Input List Item

The input list item allows the user to enter data in a list item. It is seldom used in SAP Fiori apps as forms are usually the preferable method for entering data.

For more information, see input list item.

Input list item
Input list item

Components

The list control comes with the following main properties:

Header

The header text contains the title of the list. It is usually only used when the list is in the content area.

Footer

The footer text is the last entry in the list, and as such, it scrolls away with the content. Therefore, this property is also seldom used.

Lazy Loading

Like the table, the list also allows lazy loading. The “growing” list property is used for this purpose.

List with header and footer
List with header and footer

Empty List

Avoid empty lists. If necessary, provide instructions on how to fill the list with data (sap.m.List/ sap.m.ListBase, properties: noDataText, showNoData).

Examples:

  • If a list is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the list with data.
  • If a list is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    No filters set. To start, enter your search and filter settings and run the search.
  • If a list is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No items found. Check the search and filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, no search is offered, only the search is offered).
  • You are using the live search (no Go button in the filter bar). In this case, leave out “run the search”.
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of search and filter settings).
Empty list
Empty list

Count

List items can have a count, which is located on the far right of a row. You can use the count in simple lists, such as those that contain standard list items, to indicate how many subitems the user can expect when navigating to the item.

Standard list items with counter
Standard list items with counter

Read/Unread

You can set an indicator to highlight unread items, making it easier for the user to discover them (property: showUnread = true). If you set this indicator, all texts for the unread items are shown in bold font.

By default, this indicator is switched off, and all list items are displayed in normal font.

Display list item with read and unread items
Display list item with read and unread items

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, you can display a highlight indicator in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to show:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry-specific or process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”.

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users exactly what is wrong. Make sure that you provide this information within the table row, ideally in the same color.

For details on the use of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.m.ListItemBase, property: highlight)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Behavior and Interaction

There are several ways to interact with the list and its list items:

Line Item Level

Scroll

The height of the list is defined by the number of items it contains. It does not have its own scroll container, but is scrolled together with the app.

If the list works in a “growing” mode, it only loads a few items at first. Additional items are only loaded (and rendered) on request. The “request” can either be triggered by scrolling (preferred), or by clicking the More button.

When the user scrolls, the title and the filter info bar can stick to the top of the surrounding layout container (sap.m.List, property: sticky).

Information
The “sticky” feature comes with some limitations:

  • It is not available on all browsers. In non-supporting browsers, the corresponding areas are not fixed on top of the surrounding layout container while scrolling.
  • Certain layout containers suppress the sticky behavior, such as the grid layout. The same happens if the list is placed within the object page.
  • If the focus is set to a sticky area, the list is automatically scrolled to top.

Sticky title
Sticky title

Mode

The list can have several modes. The respective property (Mode) allows the following selection methods:

  • None
  • SingleSelectMaster (used to pick one item with no additional indicator, as in the master list for a master-detail scenario with the flexible column layout)
  • SingleSelectLeft (used to pick one item using a radio button on the far left)
  • MultiSelect (used to pick several items from the list using checkboxes on the far left). The Shift key can be used to select a range.
  • Delete (used to delete items from the list using a delete indicator on the far right)
Developer Hint
In multiple selection mode, users can (de)select all items using the shortcut CTRL+A. This only affects items that have already been loaded to the front-end server. All other items are not (de)selected before they are loaded (for example, items added via lazy loading with growingScrollToLoad). This conflicts with the guideline that all items the user can reach by scrolling must be (de)selected.

To process all items, listen to the selectionChange event and to its flag selectAll. This indicates whether CTRL+A was triggered. As soon as an action is triggered, process the items accordingly. Depending on the number of items, consider processing them in the back end.

List with explicit single selection
List with explicit single selection
List with multiple selection
List with multiple selection
List with delete mode
List with delete mode

Grouping

List items can be grouped. The group header is a visually separate line at the top of the items it groups. It does not currently provide an interaction of its own.

Grouped list
Grouped list

Type

The list item type defines the interaction of the list item, which is accompanied by a visual cue.

The items can be one of the following:

  • Active (click event; cursor changes to indicate that)
  • Inactive (no click event; cursor does not change)
  • Navigation (a small arrow appears on the far right, indicating that clicking would navigate)
  • Detail (a pencil appears on the far right, indicating that something can be changed. The user can only click on the pencil.)
  • Detail and active (same as “detail”, but the item itself is also clickable)

The example shows how all these types are visualized.

All list item types: inactive, detail, navigation, active, detail and active
All list item types: inactive, detail, navigation, active, detail and active

Swipe

You can provide a swipe feature (SwipeDirection) for quickly approving or deleting items without having to look at the details. It must only be provided as an additional feature, and not be the only way of performing the action.

List with swipe action
List with swipe action

Context Menu

The context menu can be triggered for the list or per item.

It gives users an alternative way of modifying the focused elements by giving access to context-specific functions.

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

List - context menu
List - context menu

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a list or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.m.ListBase, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Styles

The list items can have a header when they are used in a content area. It is also technically possible to change the background of the header and of the list itself. Depending on the use case, the lines between the list items and around the list can be shown or hidden.

The property Show Separators (All, Inner, None) allows only the outer lines (Inner) or all the lines (None) to be hidden when the list is used as a more structural element within a content area.

List without separators
List without separators

Guidelines

Text Length

When you use the list in the first column of the flexible column layout, keep the texts as short as possible and only as long as necessary. If you expect large numbers, use formatting instead.

Design for Performance

To optimize performance, we recommend showing no more than 200 items at once in the list. For larger datasets (up to 1,000 items), use the “growing” mechanism to limit the number of displayed items, and make sure that users can filter the data.

Warning
The limits above are only recommendations. For a specific app context, the number of manageable items might be far higher or lower.

The actual limits depend on your concrete scenario, including:

  • The number of rows in the table
  • The number of displayed columns
  • The complexity of the cell content (for example, simple text vs. complex charts)
  • Other elements on the page (for example, multiple pages in a flexible column layout, or several tables/elements with more complex rendering on one page)
  • The browser being used

Custom List Items

If none of the list items provided suits the requirements of your app, you can also create a custom list. If you choose this option, ensure that your custom list item is responsive when resized.

When creating custom list items, take the following guidelines into account, as needed:

Radio Button

Only use radio buttons if they are absolutely necessary. One example would be if you want to distinguish single selection from navigation. This is a rare case in which visible radio buttons for single selection are allowed.

Actions

To trigger actions on single items, show the actions on a toolbar above the list. Do not offer actions on multiple items if the list is expected to have fewer than 10 items in most cases.

The following actions on single items must always be inline:

  • Delete: Use “Delete” mode (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This places a Delete  button at the end of each item.
  • Navigation: Use the “Navigation” item type (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This places a navigation indicator at the end of the corresponding items. Use this to navigate to a new page containing item details.
  • Edit: Use the “Detail” item type (sap.m.TreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail). This places an Edit   icon at the end of the corresponding items.

You can combine delete and edit actions, or delete and navigation actions. However, edit and navigation actions cannot be combined.

To trigger actions that are independent of the selection, show the actions on a toolbar above the list. For example: AddCollapse AllExpand All, … .

To trigger a default action on the entire item, use the “Active” or “DetailAndActive” item type (sap.m.TreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active). When clicked, active items trigger an event that can be handled by the app (for example, to open a dialog). Selection of items and expanding/collapsing a node do not trigger the event, and are handled by the tree. Do not use the active item type for navigation, to switch the line item to an edit state, or to delete the item.

Active can be combined with edit and delete, but not with navigation. Do not combine active with the single selection master.

Add Items

For adding items, place an Add or Create text button on the table toolbar.

  • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
  • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.

Show new items as the first item of the table, with a visual highlight at the beginning of the row.

For more information, see the guidelines for managing objects (including subarticles).

Enabling/Disabling Actions

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection:

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user how many items will be affected. Let users choose whether to apply the action anyway or cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

If the action was applied and the items are still available, keep them selected.

Message for action which applies to a part of a selection
Message for action which applies to a part of a selection

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar).

Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, it is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within the list, use drop targets that are between items (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between). This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Drop targets in between items
Drop targets in between items

Do not combine rearranging items and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure that there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

When combining rearranging items with grouping, be aware that moving items to another group also means that a value of the dropped item changes: because grouping is based on values, the dropped item needs to take on the corresponding value of the target group. If this is not wanted, do not allow users to rearrange items in grouped lists.

 

Example:

A list is grouped by availability. An item is moved from the group “Not Available” to the group “In Stock”. In this case, the moved item needs to change its availability to “In Stock” to match the target group. If changing the value doesn’t make sense, only allow users to rearrange the items within the same group, or don’t allow rearranging at all.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing

Export to Spreadsheet

Apps can provide a menu button for exporting list data to a spreadsheet (for example, on the relevant toolbar). For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button
'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Avatar

The avatar is a control for displaying images. These can be user profiles, user initials, placeholder images, icons, or business-related images, such as product pictures.

Usage

Use the avatar to display:

  • An image, initials, or placeholder for a user
  • Standardized images for business-related content (such as products, parts, product and company logos, ad campaign images, …)
  • Icons
  • Images with a transparent background
  • Placeholder images

Do not use the avatar if:

  • You want to include an image for any other use case. Instead, use the image control.
  • You want to display pictures in a carousel. Instead, use the carousel control.
  • You want to show an interactive icon. Instead, use the button with an icon inside.
Examples of a user image, user initials, and standard user placeholder icon
Examples of a user image, user initials, and standard user placeholder icon
Potential product image and product image placeholder
Potential product image and product image placeholder
Icon
Icon

Responsiveness

The avatar control is adaptive and has five predefined sizes. These are the same for both compact and cozy form factors:

 

Size rem Use for images in…
XS 2 rem Table list items
Card list items
S 3 rem Card headers
Card list items
M 4 rem App headers for small screen sizes
L 5 rem App headers for normal screen sizes
XL 7 rem App headers for large screen sizes

If your use case requires it, you can also set a custom size.

Predefined sizes: XS, S, M, L, XL
Predefined sizes: XS, S, M, L, XL
Predefined sizes: XS, S, M, L, XL
Predefined sizes: XS, S, M, L, XL

Image Fit

You can use the imageFitType property to specify how images fit to the avatar. There are two options: Cover (default) and Contain.

Cover

The size of the image is scaled up to completely cover the control area. As a result, parts of the image may be outside the shape.

Use the Cover fit type if the focal point is in the center of the image.

Contain

The image is scaled down to fit into the control area. The entire image is displayed, but might not fully fill the shape. In this case, the control displays a default background color. The image itself is always centered inside the shape.

Use the Contain fit type for product pictures that need to be displayed in full.

Product image with the fit type 'cover' (left) and 'contain' (right)
Product image with the fit type 'cover' (left) and 'contain' (right)

Types

Avatar – User Image, Initials, or Placeholder

An avatar is a visual representation of a user in the digital space. Usually, an avatar displays the user in one of the following ways:

  • A user photo
  • The user’s initials
  • A placeholder icon instead of the user’s personal data (photo or initials)

Always display avatars in a circle. This ensures that all users are represented equally on the user interface.

Initials

User image, user initials, and standard user placeholder icon
User image, user initials, and standard user placeholder icon

The initials stand for the first name(s) and last name(s) of a person – for example, JD for Jane Doe, or MvV for Marjolein van Veen. Which name comes first depends on the language-specific settings.

Initials can have up to three alphabetical characters (A-Z, a-z). If more than 3 initials are required for longer names (such as Anna María Agustí Suárez), the gender-neutral placeholder icon is displayed instead. The placeholder is also used if the three letters don’t fit into the circle (for example, WWW).

Some languages don’t build on an alphabet, or don’t use initials at all. In such cases, the gender-neutral person icon is displayed instead.

User initials with 1, 2, and 3 characters
User initials with 1, 2, and 3 characters

Business Images

Business images display a product, company, object, logo, or other business-related content.

Always use a square for business images.

Examples of product images
Examples of product images

Placeholder for Avatar and Business Images

Placeholder images are used for both avatar and business images when no other image is available.

  • The default placeholder for an avatar is a gender-neutral person icon inside a circle.
  • The default placeholder for a business image is a neutral product icon inside a square.
Default person and product placeholders
Default person and product placeholders

You can specify your own the default placeholder icon for business images.

Always replace the default product icon if there is a more suitable icon for your use case and industry.

Product placeholder images with custom icons
Product placeholder images with custom icons

Placeholder Background

By default, the placeholder background color is set to blue (accent color 6). However, to add more visual variety to the UI, you can change the background color using one of the following options:

  • Accent colors – You can specify one of 10 different accent colors as the placeholder background color.
  • Random color – The control automatically picks a random color from the accent color palette.

All accent colors can be themed.

User initials in all ten accent colors
User initials in all ten accent colors

Placeholder for Decorative Images in the Content Area

Use the background color ‘placeholder’ for decorative images in the content area, such as images in articles or longer descriptions. In these use cases, the primary focus is on the text and the image content is secondary.

Decorative image in the content area
Decorative image in the content area
Placeholder image for secondary content
Placeholder image for secondary content

Images with Transparent Background

You can display images with a transparent background. This can be useful for displaying descriptive illustrations and decorative pictures, for example.

Image with transparent background
Image with transparent background

Icons

You can use the avatar to display non-interactive display icons. Use the background color ‘placeholder’ to display the icon.

If you want to put an action on the icon, use the button with an icon inside instead.

Exemplary icons
Exemplary icons

Guidelines

  • If you use a custom avatar size with initials or icons:
    • Make sure that the font size is consistent with the size of the control itself.
    • If your custom size is between two predefined sizes, use the font size for the smaller predefined size.
      Example: If your avatar is 5.5 rem (between sizes L and XL), use the font size for size L (2 rem).
  • For accessibility purposes, provide an alternative text for each avatar image in case the image is not available or can’t be displayed.
  • Optimize high-resolution images to avoid unnecessarily large files. Large image files can severely impede page performance.
Do
Custom placeholder size with appropriate custom font size
Custom placeholder size with appropriate custom font size
Don't
Custom placeholder size, but icon is too small
Custom placeholder size, but icon is too small

Styles

You can add a very subtle border to the avatar (property: ShowBorder).

Images with optional borders
Images with optional borders

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Analytical Card

The analytical card is used for data visualization. It consists of two areas – a header area (either a standard header or a KPI header) and a chart area with a visual representation of the data. The analytical card is a single object card and does not contain a footer area. It can only be used in the overview page (OVP). In the resizable card layout, users can show more content/insights by resizing the card.

Responsiveness

The analytical card has a uniform horizontal width of either 20 or 25 rem, depending on the screen size. The height is flexible.

The cards can be used in both the fixed and resizable card layouts. As a general recommendation for the fixed card layout, we recommend using a limited number of data points (up to 4) or series (up to 2). For the resizable card layout, you can add more data points for larger card sizes, but still try to keep the series limited (up to 2).

The VizFrame charts within the cards are fully responsive.

Header Area

You can use two header types for the analytical card, depending on the use case:

Standard Header

  • Title (mandatory): The title provides the most important information. We recommend using a single-line text, but you can also wrap the title to two lines.
  • Subtitle (optional): The subtitle can wrap to two lines, and gets truncated at the end of the second line. If the subtitle contains multiple qualifiers, separate them with comma. Do not repeat the chart title.
Standard header
Standard header

KPI Header

  • Title (mandatory): The title provides the most important information. We recommend using a single-line text, but you can also wrap the title to two lines.
  • Subtitle (mandatory): The subtitle can wrap to two lines, and gets truncated at the end of the second line. The unit of measure is shown at the end of the subtitle. We therefore recommend keeping the subtitle short and within one line. If the subtitle contains multiple qualifiers, separate them with comma. Do not repeat the chart title.
  • KPI area, containing the following elements:
    • Trend arrow (optional)
    • KPI value (mandatory): The KPI value uses semantic colors.
    • Percentage symbol (optional)
    • Value selection information (optional): Manually-entered text to provide a better description of the key value (for example, Number of Products). Use this element if the sorting information and the filters do not provide enough information to properly describe the value. This text truncates after one line.
    • Sorting information (mandatory): Describes the KPI/value.
    • Filters (optional): Can be modified to show meaningful texts.
    • Target and deviation (both mandatory). Can be relative or absolute values.
KPI header
KPI header
KPI header
KPI header

Types

8 chart types are currently supported by the analytical card:

 

Information
For additional information about the different chart types, as well as tips for choosing the correct chart type, see the following articles:

Line Chart

In general, the line chart is the most efficient chart for showing the evolution of a trend over a period of time. You can choose between two line types: linear (default), and spline interpolation.

  • Avoid showing more than four lines on the same card.
  • When showing more than one line in the chart, do not use different units. All the lines should use the same unit, such as “EUR”.
  • You can use a line chart with both a time axis and another color dimension.

Line chart with time axis + color dimension
Line chart with time axis + color dimension

Use the line chart if…

  • You want to emphasize the evolution of a trend over a period of time.
  • You want to visualize data that has an intrinsic order, such as age, ranges, or ratings (but excluding time).

Do not use the line chart if…

  • You want to emphasize the values themselves. Use a column chart instead.
  • The data does not have an intrinsic order.

Note: For time series, we recommend using the time axis.

Analytical card with line chart and view switch
Analytical card with line chart and view switch

Bubble Chart

A bubble chart displays the correlation between three sets of numerical values. One set is represented by the horizontal axis, another set is represented by the vertical axis, and the third set is encoded in the size of the bubbles.

We recommend showing only one or two series. Because series are represented by specific bubble colors, having too many series/colors can make the chart hard to read.

The sizes of the bubbles are determined by the values in the third data series. The measure that is represented by the bubble size is defined below the chart.

Bubble charts are often used to facilitate the understanding of social, economic, medical, and scientific relationships.

Color

  • If the goal is to isolate outliers within a cloud of other bubbles, use the same color for all bubbles.
  • If the goal is to group bubbles that have the same characteristic, use one color per group. Warning: Too many colors can make the chart hard to read.
  • If the goal is to compare bubbles individually, use one color per bubble. Only use this option if there are very few bubbles.

Use the bubble chart if…

  • You need a rough approximation of the values encoded in the bubble size.
  • You want to represent data with three dimensions on a 2D chart.
  • You want to compare and show the relationships between labeled/categorized circles using positioning and proportions.
  • You want to display the correlation between three sets of numerical values.

Do not use the bubble chart if…

  • You need to represent information with only two dimensions.

Note: For time series, we recommend using the time axis.

Analytical card with bubble chart
Analytical card with bubble chart

Column Chart

Column charts are used to compare multiple values over time, or values that have an intrinsic order (such as age).

Columns are clustered side-by-side along the horizontal axis and are color-coded by series.

  • We recommend using no more than two series and a maximum of four category items.
  • If you want to show the trend over time for two series, you can use the line chart with two lines instead of two series of columns.

Use the column chart if…

  • Category items represent a time series. The natural orientation for time is from left to right.
  • Category items have an intrinsic order (such as age, range, or ranking).
  • You want to emphasize the values themselves, rather than the trend.

Do not use the column chart if…

  • Your data is not related to a time category or to a category with an intrinsic order.
  • You want to emphasize the trend. In this case, use the line chart instead.

Note: For time series, we recommend using the time axis.

For more detailed information, see column chart.

Analytical card with column chart
Analytical card with column chart

Stacked Column Chart

This type of visualization depicts items stacked on top of one other in columns, with the item categories differentiated by colored bars or strips.

This chart works only for time series and categories with an intrinsic order.

Use the stacked column chart if…

  • You want to display the variation of a sum of measures over a period of time.
  • The sum of the values is as important as the individual items.

Do not use the stacked column chart if…

  • Accuracy or comparisons are of primary importance. In this case, a line graph might be the better option.

Note: For time series, we recommend using the time axis.

Analytical card with stacked column chart
Analytical card with stacked column chart

Vertical Bullet Chart

The bullet chart is used to compare a primary value to a secondary value over time, or for a category that has an intrinsic order (such as age, range, or ranking).

The bullet chart supports primary values, secondary/comparison values, and additional values. For more information, see bullet chart.

Use the bullet chart if…

  • You want to compare a primary value to a secondary value using a reference point (for example, if you want to compare actual and planned costs per quarter).
  • The category items represent a time series. The natural orientation for time is from left to right.
  • The category items have an intrinsic order.

Do not use the bullet chart if…

  • Your data does not have an intrinsic order.
  • You have only one series of data.
  • There is no data series that can act as a reference point for the other data series.
Analytical card with bullet chart
Analytical card with bullet chart

Donut Chart

The donut chart represents parts of a whole, where the whole is always 100%. The data is displayed in rings. Each ring represents a distinct data series.

The donut chart can display absolute values (default) or relative values (%). To make the values easier to read, we recommend showing a maximum of 2 decimal places.

  • If NumberOfFractionalDigits is not specified in the annotation, the default is to display a single decimal place.
  • If NumberOfFractionalDigits is specified in the annotation, the chart shows the values with the defined number of decimal places (0, 1, 2, 3, and so on).

We recommend using a maximum of four sections in the donut chart. If there are more than four sections in the chart, you can use an Other section, which merges several sections into one. The number of sections included in the Other section is mentioned in the legend item.

Use the donut chart if…

  • You want to visualize the part as a percentage of the whole.

  • You have one or more category items that you want to plot.

Do not use the donut chart if…

  • You want to plot negative or zero values.
  • You have more than four categories or sections.
  • You want to compare data over time. You can use the column chart, line chart, stacked column chart, or bullet chart instead.

Note: If you are using donut chart in the resizable card layout, users will be able to see more of the sections that were grouped in the Other section as they increase the size of the card.

Analytical card with donut chart
Analytical card with donut chart

Combined Column and Line Chart

Combined column and line charts are used to compare two sets of values over time, or for a category that has an intrinsic order (such as age, range, or ranking).

You could also use a column chart or a line chart instead, but using a combined column and line chart is the better choice if you want to clearly distinguish between the two sets of values, or if the values represent different measures, such as revenue and profit.

Use the combined column and line chart if…

  • You want to compare values in different categories.

  • You want to give a clear view of which category is higher or lower.

  • You want to use more than one measure.

Do not use the combined column and line chart if…

  • The combination of the data shown in the line and columns is not logical.

Note: For time series, we recommend using the time axis.

Analytical card with combined column and line chart
Analytical card with combined column and line chart

Scatter Plot Chart

A scatter plot chart displays the correlation between two sets of numerical values. The data is displayed as a set of points plotted on a horizontal and vertical axis.

We recommend showing only one or two series. Because bubbles in a series are color-coded, having too many series/bubbles can make the chart hard to read.

While the scatter plot chart can support different shapes, we recommend that you only use bubbles to make the chart easier to read.

If you need to increase or decrease the size of the bubbles, you can adjust the plotArea.markerSize property. The available range is from “4” to “32”. The default value of the bubbles is “10”.

Use the scatter plot chart if…

  • You want to show the correlation between two sets of numerical values (for example, the correlation between age and income).

Do not use the scatter plot chart if…

  • You want to show the correlation between three sets of numerical values. Use the bubble chart instead.
Analytical card with scatter plot chart
Analytical card with scatter plot chart

Waterfall Chart

A waterfall chart is a form of data visualization that helps users to understand the cumulative effect of a sequence of positive or negative values.

This type of chart is helpful for a variety of different scenarios. For example, it could be used to visualize financial statements or changes in performance, or to navigate data on population, births and deaths.

We recommend showing only the subtotal and total information (up to 4 columns).

The waterfall chart can be used with categorical axis, time axis and semantic colors.

Use the waterfall chart if…

  • You want to show intermediate totals along the way before showing the final cumulative total.
  • You want to show the net value, by breaking down the cumulative effect of positive and negative contributions.

Do not use the waterfall chart if…

  • You want to compare multiple values over time, or for values that have an intrinsic order (such as age). In this case, use the column chart instead.

Note: For time series, we recommend using the time axis. Note that totals and subtotals are not supported when using a time axis.

For more information, see Waterfall Chart.

Analytical card with waterfall chart
Analytical card with waterfall chart

Behavior and Interaction

The entire header area of the card is clickable. From there, the user can navigate to the specific app or view from which the card content originates. If you need to show detailed information about a specific data point, you can use single selection mode. In this case, it is up to the app developer to provide meaningful navigation. For example, clicking a section from the donut chart could lead to an object page that provides more information.

Analytical cards support 3 navigation modes. In all modes, clicking a blank area on the chart does not trigger any actions.

No navigation

If navigation is not defined in the identification annotation, clicking the header or the chart does not trigger any actions.

Data point navigation

If data point navigation is enabled, navigation within the chart is available only for data points. This is the default behavior: users can navigate from the header and from the individual data points.

For this header and chart navigation, set the navigation property to “dataPointNav”.

Header navigation

If you only need to offer header navigation without chart navigation, set the navigation property to “headerNav”.

Guidelines

Number of Data Points

There is no technical limitation on the number of data points, but be aware that too many data points can diminish the user experience. For example, if the card is only one column wide, and there is not enough space, the labels for the horizontal axis are displayed at 45°.

With the resizable card layout, you can load more data points when the card is wider than one column.

Chart Title

The chart title is always visible for each chart type. It describes the axes of the chart, and is constructed using the measures and dimensions of the chart. For example, Revenue by Quarter indicates that the y-axis represents the revenue, and the x-axis represents the quarters. The title is truncated at the end of the line.

Time Axis

You can use the different chart types with either a time axis or a category axis. We recommend using the time axis when the category items represent a time series. The time axis is more responsive and displays information in a more user-friendly manner than the category axis. Currently, the time axis is supported for the line, column, bubble, waterfall and combination charts.

The time axis has three main advantages:

  • It allows you to display dates and times in a responsive manner.
  • All the complexity involved with formatting the axis labels is taken care of automatically.
  • The physical spacing between the data points accurately represents the time scale, as opposed to being equidistant.

The analytical cards on the overview page automatically use the time axis if the following conditions are met:

  • The chart type is “Line”, “Bubble”, “Column”, “Waterfall” or “Combination”.
  • The chart is configured with only one dimension.
  • The data type of the dimension is either “datetime” or “edm.string”. If the data type is “edm.string”, it must contain the additional annotation in the OData metadata annotation (sap:semantics = “yearmonthday”).
  • If the chart type is “Bubble”, there must be exactly 2 measures.
  • If the chart type is “Combination”, there must be at least 2 measures.

Axis Title

The axis titles are always hidden, except in the bubble and scatter plot charts. Where the axis titles are hidden, use the chart title of the analytical card to describe the chart content. For example, Revenue by Quarter indicates that the y-axis represents the revenue, and the x-axis represents the quarters.

Axis Scaling

There are 3 axis scaling options for line charts, bubble charts, and scatter charts:

  • Default: The minimum and maximum are calculated from the dataset. 0 is always visible.
  • Adjust scale: The minimum and maximum are calculated from the dataset. 0 is not always visible.
  • Min-max: Manually set by the app developer.

Axis Labels

Try to avoid displaying labels at 45°. Use abbreviations for time periods, such as Jan or Feb for months, or Q1 or Q2 for quarters.

Semantic Patterns

The analytical card supports semantic patterns, such as dashes, dots, or hatches, in order to distinguish:

  • Actual values: What values are (solid pattern).
  • Projected values: What values might be (dashed line, hatched areas).

Currently, semantic patterns are supported for the following chart types: line chart, column chart, and vertical bullet chart.

Semantic Colors Based on Values

Use semantic coloring based on values when you want to show data points that are positive, neutral, or negativeBased on the defined threshold values, the color of each data point could be red, green, or orange. For more information, see colors.

Legend

Colors are assigned automatically and cannot be customized.

View Switch

You can use the view switch to offer the user different views of the data on one card. It can be used for filtering, sorting, or grouping (for example, by supplier or material group). The view switch is optional.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Button

Buttons allow users to trigger an action. There are 3 button types:

  • Simple button for one action
  • Toggle button to switch between different states
  • Segmented button with a group of options
Common button types
Common button types

Usage

Use the button types as follows:

  • Use simple buttons for specific actions, such as:
    • Create, Edit, Save
    • Approve, Reject
    • Accept, Decline
    • OK, Cancel
  • Use toggle buttons in a toolbar to activate or deactivate an object or element. You can also use toggle buttons to switch between different states.
  • If you want the user to select one option from a small group, offer a segmented button in the toolbar. For example:
    • Year, Month, Day
    • Small, Medium, Large

Do not use buttons if:

  • You want to link to a different page or object. Use the link instead.
  • You want to display several similar actions or a group of actions at once. Use the menu button instead.
  • You want to let users upload content. Use the upload collection control instead.

Responsiveness

The button usually grows to fit the size of the text. If you set a fixed size for the button, the text truncates.

If the button is used in a responsive container or toolbar, it follows the responsive behavior defined for that element. For example, the button can move to another line.

Buttons with different lengths
Buttons with different lengths

Types

Button

Buttons can trigger primary, secondary, semantic, and negative path actions. Find out more about the different action types in the action placement article.

Header and Footer Toolbars

Use the following button styling for the different action types in the header and footer toolbar:

  • Primary action: Use the emphasized button style.
  • Secondary action: Use the ghost button style. 
  • Semantic action: Use the semantic buttons for positive and negative actions. Use the “accept” style for positive actions, and “reject” for negative actions. Semantic actions must always be text buttons.
  • Negative path action: Use the transparent button style.

Content Toolbars

Use the following button styling for the different action types in the content toolbars such as table, form, or chart toolbar:

  • Primary action: Use the emphasized button style. Please note that there can only be one primary action per page. Usually, the primary action is positioned in the header or footer toolbar. If a page already has a primary action, but you also need to highlight the most important action in a content toolbar, use the ghost styling for this one button in the content toolbar.
  • Secondary action: Use the transparent button style.

The different button styles are designed to give appropriate feedback to users. Don’t use them for decoration purposes.

Button with different styles
Button with different styles

Toggle Button

A toggle button switches between two actions. One of the actions is always active, one is inactive. Use the toggle button for secondary actions.

Apply the following button styles for the different toolbars:

  • Header and footer toolbars: Use the ghost button style.
  • Content toolbars: Use the transparent button style.
Toggle buttons
Toggle buttons

Segmented Button

A segmented button shows a group of options. Only one of the options can be active, the others remain or become inactive. Pressing an option activates it. By default, the control for segmented buttons calculates the button width and applies it to all buttons within the group. You can change this by setting the width for individual buttons.

The segmented button is comparable to a radio button group control.

Segmented buttons
Segmented buttons

Components

A button can contain an icon OR a text.

Always use a text button for primary, secondary, semantic and negative path actions.

Use icon buttons only if the icon metaphor is easily recognizable. Ideally, it should have same meaning worldwide.  For more information about icons in general, check out the article on iconography.

Behavior and Interaction

To trigger the action, the user clicks, taps, or activates the button, toggle button, or segmented button via the keyboard or screen reader. The button provides visual feedback for “hover” and “press-down” states.

The toggle button remains in the pressed state until it is pressed again. In the segmented button, the chosen option stays active until the user presses one of the other other options.

If an action cannot be triggered, disable the corresponding button.

All three button types support the cozy and compact form factors. The compact form factor is used for apps running on device operated with a keyboard and mouse. For more information, check out the article on content density.

Regular state
Regular state
Hover state
Hover state
Press-down state
Press-down state
Disabled state
Disabled state

Guidelines

Button Text

  • Choose a button text that is short and meaningful.
  • Use a verb in the imperative for all actions (for example: SaveCancel, Edit).
    Note: The grammatical form for actions can differ for other languages. For example, German action labels use the infinitive (Speichern, Abbrechen, Bearbeiten).
  • Keep in mind that the text can be up to 300% longer in other languages.
  • If you need to show the number of items that will be affected by the action of the button, you can add the number in parentheses. For example, Edit (3).

Icon Buttons

  • For icon buttons, make sure the default accessibility text for the icon is correct for your use case. If not, define an app-specific accessibility text.
  • Offer a tooltip to show the label for icon buttons.
  • Don’t use the icon control for buttons. Use the icon property for the button instead.

Temporarily Inactive Buttons

  • If an action button is temporarily inactive, use the disabled status.

Examples

Header toolbar with primary action (emphasized styling) and secondary actions (ghost styling)
Header toolbar with primary action (emphasized styling) and secondary actions (ghost styling)
Table toolbar with search field, segmented button, text buttons (ghost and transparent styling), and icon buttons (transparent styling)
Table toolbar with search field, segmented button, text buttons (ghost and transparent styling), and icon buttons (transparent styling)
Footer toolbar with standard actions: 'Save' (emphasized) and 'Cancel' (transparent)
Footer toolbar with standard actions: 'Save' (emphasized) and 'Cancel' (transparent)

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

  • No links

Implementation


  • No links

Popover

The popover displays additional information for an object in a compact way and without leaving the page. The popover can contain various UI elements such as fields, tables, images, and charts. It can also include actions in the footer.

Note: The quick view is similar to a popover, but has a predefined structure, a fixed set of UI elements, and automatic UI rendering. Check first whether the quick view is appropriate for your use case.

Usage

Use a popover if:

  • You need to define your own structure.
  • You want to show UI elements that are not available with the quick view.

Do not use a popover if:

  • The quick view is more appropriate for your use case.
  • The objects are in a master list (in this case, the details are shown in the details area).

Responsiveness

The popover can be used in the following ways:

  • Responsive and adaptive: sap.m.ResponsivePopover
    Shows a dialog on smartphones (to be closed with an X) and a popover on a tablet or desktop.
  • Non-responsive: sap.m.Popover
    Always shows a popover. Only use a non-responsive popover if it has very little content. On smartphones, the popover should not use more than a third of the phone’s real estate.

Layout

Structure of Popover

The header and footer are generally optional. The other elements are as follows:

Back (1) – optional
Needs to be implemented if the user can trigger further popovers. Always show popovers in place. Never place them on top of each other.

Title (2)
We recommend that you show an app-specific title for accessibility reasons. If you do not show a title, use the invisible text control (sap.ui.core.InvisibleText) to set a text for screen reader support.

Close function (3)
This feature closes the dialog. It is available for smartphones only and is set automatically (sap.m.ResponsivePopover).

Content (4)
Ensure that the content has a basic design and shows only the most important information. We recommend the following:

  • Use no more than two groups.
  • Limit the total number of fields to eight.
  • Use single-column tables.
  • Use micro charts.

Actions (5) – optional

Popover – General structure
Popover – General structure
Popover – Example
Popover – Example

Placement Types

The placement type defines how the popover will be positioned on the screen in relation to its trigger. The default placement is “Right”: the popover appears to the right of the object it relates to.

If you set the placement type to “Auto”, the position of the popover in relation to the reference control is determined automatically, depending on the available space.

Popover with default placement type - Right
Popover with default placement type - Right
Developer Hint
More information on the different placement types can be found here.

Modal Mode

The popover in modal mode opens in a modal window, which blocks the whole screen and attracts the user’s attention.

Use the modal mode only if you want to prompt the user to make a decision or confirm an action. Ensure that the user can close the popover, either by offering an action button in the footer or a Close button in the header.

Popover – Modal
Popover – Modal

Behavior and Interaction

Opening a Popover

The user opens a popover by clicking an object represented by a text link or an icon. To improve accessibility, we recommend using texts, such as the name or ID of an object.

Closing a Popover

The popover is closed when the user clicks outside the popover or selects an action within the popover.

Guidelines

  • Show status information as text fields in a content group. You can use semantic text colors.
  • You can define a height for the popover. If the content exceeds the height, a scroll bar is displayed.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Select Dialog

The select dialog enables users to select one or more items from a comprehensive list. The select dialog comes with a list of entries and a search field to filter the list.

A more enhanced dialog for single selection and multiselection is the value help dialog as it offers range selection and excluding functions.

Usage

Use the select dialog if:

  • Users need to select one or more entries from a comprehensive list that contains multiple attributes or values.

Do not use the select dialog if:

  • Users need to pick one item from a predefined set of options that contains one attribute or value only such as languages. In this case, consider using the combo box or select instead.
  • Your use case requires more enhanced functionalities such as a selection based on ranges. For the selection of values, consider using the value help dialog instead.
  • Your use case requires tabs, filters, or an Add New functionality in the select dialog. In this case, use a standard dialog instead.
Information
For more information on which selection control to choose, see the selection control overview.

Responsiveness

The display of the select control depends on the device. On phones, the selection list takes up the whole screen. On desktop and tablet devices it appears as a popover.

Size S

Single select dialog in full screen on smartphone
Single select dialog in full screen on smartphone
Multi-select dialog in full screen on smartphone
Multi-select dialog in full screen on smartphone

Size M

Single select dialog on tablet
Single select dialog on tablet
Multi-select dialog on tablet
Multi-select dialog on tablet

Size L

Single select dialog on desktop
Single select dialog on desktop
Multi-select dialog on desktop
Multi-select dialog on desktop

Components

Dialog Header

You need to set the title of the dialog header (1). We recommend the following form:

Single selection

Select

Example: Select Product

Multi-selection

Select

Example: Select Products

Search

The first element in the dialog is a standard search field (2).

Info Toolbar

The info toolbar (3) is only available in multi-selection mode. It shows the number of selected items in the following form:

Selected :

Example: Selected Products: 2

Content

The content area (4) can be filled with any list content inherited from the list item base, such as standard list items, display list items, and feed list items. You can set the content to be displayed as grouped.

Button Toolbar

The button toolbar (5) contains two buttonsSelect and Cancel. Select takes over the selection, while Cancel resets the selection to the state it was in when the dialog was opened.

Components of the select dialog. Left: single select, right: multi select
Components of the select dialog. Left: single select, right: multi select

Behavior and Interaction

The select dialog can be called up from any control. The most common trigger is an input field with selection icon, also known as a “value help field”, or F4. Alternative triggers are buttons or icons, which add items to an existing list or the info bar in the master list in order to apply a contextual filter.

Single Select

Once users select an entry, the select dialog is closed and the selected entry is taken over. If applicable, the entry is displayed in the field from which the dialog was triggered.

Multi-Select

In the multi-select version of the select dialog, checkboxes are provided for choosing multiple entries. The selection is taken over when the user closes the dialog via OK. Cancel closes the dialog without taking over the selected values. An info bar indicates the number of selected items.

Search

The user can search items.

Resize and Drag Dialog

You can make the select dialog resizable and draggable by setting the corresponding properties (also called resizable and draggable) to “true”.

A resizable dialog makes sense if the items inside have long names or descriptions.

A draggable dialog allows users to see the app content behind the dialog.

Guidelines
Both features are optional. However, even if you only need one, always set both of them to “true” to ensure consistency.

Guidelines

List Options

If you need to indicate that none of the selection options are selected, or you need to allow the user not to select an option, provide (None) as an option and place it at the beginning of the list.

If you need to indicate that all items apply (for example, as a list filter), provide All as an option and place it at the beginning of the list.

Select list with '(None)'
Select list with '(None)'

Search Behavior

Two types of search behavior are available:

(1) A live search, also known as “search-as-you-type” (property: liveChange), which is triggered by each character that the user enters or deletes.

(2) A manual search, which is triggered explicitly after the user enters text in the search field and clicks or taps the Search icon or presses the ENTER key.

Although app developers need to decide themselves which search to use, we recommend implementing the live search whenever possible. Use the manual search only if the amount of data is too large and your app would otherwise run into performance issues. For more information, check out the article on search.

Reset/Remember Selections

By default, the selection is reset when the dialog is closed. This allows users to make a new selection when they reopen the dialog and makes sense when users need to add multiple items to a table.

Selection is reset after the dialog is closed
Selection is reset after the dialog is closed

However, if your use case requires selections in a dialog to be remembered so that the user can make corrections, you can set the rememberSelections function in the select dialog to “true”. When users exit the dialog by clicking or tapping Cancel, the selection is then restored to the state it was in when the dialog was opened.

Selection is remembered after the dialog is reopened
Selection is remembered after the dialog is reopened

This also works in single-select dialogs. There, if users click the remembered item again, the dialog closes and they do not have to explicitly click Cancel.

Info Bar

In multi-selection mode, an info bar shows the number of selected items. Use the following format:

Selected: [Business Objects] Selected: [Number of Items]
Example: Products Selected: 2

Note that the info bar is not “sticky”. When the user scrolls down the list, the info bar scrolls off the screen.

“Clear” Button

The Clear button allows users to clear all the selected items. By default, the button is not shown. To display the button, set the showClearButton property to “true”.

Select dialog with 'Clear' button
Select dialog with 'Clear' button

Content

By default, the select dialog comes with a growing feature (property: growing = “true”). We recommend disabling the growing feature and setting this property to “false”. This ensures that all items in the table are loaded at once, and that the “Items selected” count, the search, and select/deselect features all work properly.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

  • No links

Busy Dialog

The busy dialog informs the user about an ongoing operation. During the operation, the entire screen is blocked.

Usage

Use the busy dialog if:

  • The user should not be able to start any other activity during an operation, and the screen needs to be blocked while the operation is ongoing.
  • The operation lasts more than one second.
  • You want to indicate loading in a page-to-page navigation.

Do not use the busy dialog if:

  • The operation lasts less than one second.
  • The screen is not supposed to be blocked. In this case, use the busy indicator or busy state of the control instead.

Responsiveness

The busy dialog is fully responsive and can be shown in compact and cozy mode.

Busy dialog - Compact mode
Busy dialog - Compact mode
Busy dialog - Cozy mode
Busy dialog - Cozy mode
Busy dialog on smartphone
Busy dialog on smartphone
Developer Hint
To switch to compact mode for a dialog, you need to use:

jQuery.sap.syncStyleClass(“sapUiSizeCompact”, this.getView(), this._oDialog);

For more information, see the SAPUI5 Demo Kit.

Components

The busy dialog can consist of several components and is configurable. The following properties can be set:

  • Title: By default, it has no title. Therefore, do not use this property.
  • Text: Additional text can be added above the busy animation.
  • Cancel:(Property:showCancelButton) A Cancel button is displayed. There is no Cancel button by default. The label is also configurable via Property.cancelButtonText.
  • Icon: A custom animation icon can be set via Property:customIcon.

If no title, text, or Cancel button is set, the busy dialog displays only the busy icon (busy dialog, lightweight version).

Busy dialog without title
Busy dialog without title
Busy dialog without title and Cancel
Busy dialog without title and Cancel
Busy dialog - Lightweight version
Busy dialog - Lightweight version

Guidelines

Lightweight Version (No Title, Text, or Cancel Button)

  • Use the lightweight version for page navigation (see live example).
  • If you do not show a title or text, use the invisible text control (sap.ui.core.InvisibleText) to provide the reason for the busy state to users with assistive technologies.

Developer Hint

The additional text should be associated to the busy dialog using ariaLabelledBy association.

Busy Dialog with Text

  • Do not use the title of the busy dialog.
  • If a busy dialog is triggered directly by the user, provide a precise text describing the operation. The text can be as short as one verb:
    • Loading…
    • Refreshing…
    • Sending…
  • If the busy dialog is not directly initiated by the end user, use at least one sentence to describe the operation. Start either the first or the last sentence with Please wait. For example: The system is busy searching data. Please wait until data is loaded.
  • Recommendation: Do not use the invisible text control when you show text in the busy dialog.

Busy Dialog with Text and Cancel Button

  • Offer Cancel if you expect the process to run more than 10 seconds. In addition, always display text that precisely describes the ongoing operation.
  • Do not change the mouse cursor to indicate the ongoing operation.
  • Recommendation: Do not use the invisible text control when you show text in the busy dialog.

Timing and Duration

We recommend displaying the busy dialog one second after the process has been triggered and for a minimum time of 500 ms to avoid flickering. For processes that last less then one second, a busy dialog is not displayed at all.

Example: A process takes 1.3 s in total. After one second, the busy dialog is displayed. The process finishes in 1.3 seconds. To avoid flickering, you should display the busy dialog for at least 500 ms, so you will need to add 200 ms to avoid flickering.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Input Field

A text input field allows users to enter and edit text or numeric values in one line. To help users enter a valid value, you can enable the autocomplete suggestion feature and the value help option.

Usage

Use the input field if:

  • The user needs to enter a short, single-line text or number.
  • The user needs to enter a password, URL, phone number, or email address.
  • The user needs to select a single item from a large amount of data (for example, more than 200 items).
  • The user needs to find an object by searching for more than one attribute, such as an ID, city, and customer name. Use this control in combination with the autocomplete suggestion feature and value help option. For a small set of values (for example, fewer than 20 items), consider using the select control. Otherwise, use the combo box (for 20-200 items).

Do not use the input field if:

Information
For more information on which selection control to choose, see the selection control overview.

Responsiveness

In the examples below, the input field is shown in combination with the tabular autocomplete feature for different device sizes.

Size S (Smartphones)

Cozy mode:

When the user clicks or taps the input field, a new full screen dialog opens in which suggested items can be selected. Here, the pop-in feature of the responsive table is used.

Tabular autocomplete suggestion feature on a smartphone
Tabular autocomplete suggestion feature on a smartphone

Size M (Tablets)

Cozy mode:

The pop-in feature of the responsive table is used here, and defined columns are wrapped into a new line due to the limited space available.

Tabular autocomplete suggestion feature on a tablet
Tabular autocomplete suggestion feature on a tablet

Size L (Desktops)

Compact mode:

The full table is shown by the suggest feature.

Tabular autocomplete suggestion feature on a desktop
Tabular autocomplete suggestion feature on a desktop

Types

Six input types are currently supported (API). Be sure to select the correct type for your use case. Depending on the input type, a different keyboard layout is displayed on a mobile device (see some sample input types).

Note: The control does not provide validation based on the type. The app development team must implement format validation. If binding is used, validation is carried out by the model, but error handling must still be implemented on the UI side.

Text (default)

Input type text – Keyboard layout on a smartphone
Input type text – Keyboard layout on a smartphone

Number

Input type number – Keyboard layout on a smartphone
Input type number – Keyboard layout on a smartphone

Email

Input type email – Keyboard layout on a smartphone
Input type email – Keyboard layout on a smartphone

URL

Input type URL – Keyboard layout on a smartphone
Input type URL – Keyboard layout on a smartphone

Telephone Number

Input type telephone number – Keyboard layout on a smartphone
Input type telephone number – Keyboard layout on a smartphone

Password

Input type password – Keyboard layout on a smartphone
Input type password – Keyboard layout on a smartphone

Some types, such as number or telephone number, can be used together with mask input for better guidance.

Examples of input with different number masks
Examples of input with different number masks

Behavior and Interaction

Entering Text Using the Autocomplete Feature

Have a look at the interaction flow below:

Entering Text Using the Value Help Dialog

Have a look at the interaction flow below:

Information
For information on how to manage leading and trailing white space (blanks) when copying and pasting text into input controls, see removing leading and trailing white space.

Styles

An input field can have five value states: default (neutral), warning, error, success, or information.

Default
Default
Error
Error
Information
Information
Warning
Warning
Success
Success

Properties

Value State and Value State Message

The input control offers the five value states listed below. For the error, warning, and information states you can show an additional value state text when the focus is on the input field.

  1. None (default): No value state message is shown.
  2. Warning
  3. Error
  4. Success: No value state message is shown.
  5. Information

For more guidance on when to use which state, see How to Use Semantic Colors.

Default
Default
Error
Error
Information
Information
Warning
Warning
Success
Success
Warning value state with a long, wrapping text
Warning value state with a long, wrapping text

Required

Use this property to indicate that user input is required. Set the property for the specific input field to ensure that the asterisk is shown in front of the label.

Required input field
Required input field

Maximum Length

Use this property to set the maximum number of characters allowed. There is no limit by default.

Placeholder

The placeholder, or input prompt, is a short hint (a word or short phrase) to help the user with data entry. A hint can be a sample value or a brief description of the expected format.

Placeholder
Placeholder

Description

You can provide an additional description on the input field, for example, for units or currency. The width of the input field and description is distributed equally by default. Although the default setting is 50%, you can change this with the fieldWidth property.

Input description
Input description

Width

The width of the input field is set to 100% by default. Input fields are usually used in forms, where the width is determined by the form element or container that the input field is embedded in. Instead of defining a fixed width, we recommend working with proper layout containers, like the form, simple form, and responsive grid layout, and with the layout data property, where the width is defined by the 12-column approach.

Editable and Enabled States

The input field has three states (see examples of input states):

  1. Enabled: This is the default setting.
  2. Read-only: The input field isn’t shown; only the value is shown. This is used in display-only forms.
  3. Disabled: The input field is shown with a visual indication that editing isn’t possible (for example, because the user isn’t authorized to make changes).
Editable and enabled input states
Editable and enabled input states

Text Alignment

The input field offers six types of alignment for text values (API):

  • Begin
  • Center
  • End
  • Initial (default): Browser-configured alignment is used
  • Left
  • Right

Value Help

To help the user find the correct value, you can enable the value help option (propertyshowValueHelp). By enabling this option, a small value help icon is displayed in the input field on the right-hand side. Once this option is enabled, the click event can be registered and one of the following displayed:

If you want to force the user to select only existing values, you can enable the value-help-only option (see an example). In this case, the user cannot enter text in the input field. Instead, the value must be selected from the list of suggestions, or chosen using the select dialog or value help dialog.

Value help option
Value help option

The values can also be pasted into the input field by copying and pasting, or dragging and dropping, if the user prefers. In this case, the values are automatically transformed into conditional expressions. For example: Copying values “1234” and “5678” leads to the token generation “=1234” and “=5678”. Additionally, these values are shown in the conditions tab of the value help dialog.

Input Assistance

Intelligent systems can help users by recommending appropriate content or suggesting an action or input the user may “prefer”. The system assists the user by entering data or filtering data. Typical examples might be a search phrase suggestion, an appropriate form template, or a set of suggested default values for certain fields, based on the user input and interaction history.

For more information, see Designing Intelligent Systems – Input Assistance.

Autocomplete Suggestions

The input control offers three different types of autocomplete suggestions: single, two-value, and tabular. The width of the suggestion box and the input field are set by default, but you can change them using the maxSuggestionWidth property. The position of the suggestion box depends on the space available below the control. If there is not enough space, the suggestion box is shown above the control.

As the user types, the first suggestion item that matches the characters entered is autocompleted in the input field. The typed characters are matched against the beginning of the suggestion items, based on the “starts with” filter. The user can accept the autocompleted value by pressing ENTER. The autocomplete property is set by default if suggestions are available, but can also be switched off.

Warning
The typeahead input feature is not available on Android devices

Single Value with Autocomplete

Single-value autocomplete displays a list of suggestions with one left-aligned value. As a base for the aggregation suggestionItemssap.ui.core.Item is used.

Use the single-value autocomplete feature if you want to search by only one attribute, such as an ID or a customer name.

See this live example of single-value autocomplete suggestions.

Single-value autocomplete suggestion feature
Single-value autocomplete suggestion feature

Two Values with Autocomplete

The two-value autocomplete suggestion feature displays two attributes of a business object, such as a customer and an ID.  As a base for the aggregation of suggestionItemssap.ui.core.ListItem is used.

The text property is displayed first, and is left-aligned. The additionalText property is right-aligned. The first text property is autocompleted in the input field.

Use the two-value autocomplete feature if you want to search by two attributes. This ensures that the search is carried out for both attributes.

See this live example of two-value autocomplete suggestions.

Two-value autocomplete suggestion feature
Two-value autocomplete suggestion feature

Tabular Autocomplete

This autocomplete feature displays the values in a table layout. Use the tabular autocomplete feature If you need to display more than two attributes.

For input fields in a tabular view, we recommend using a maximum of 4 columns. Focus on columns that are really relevant for the use case.

To use the tabular autocomplete feature, use the suggestionColumns aggregation to define the columns and the correct responsive behavior for the pop-in. Define appropriate responsive behavior for sizes S and M. For more information, see the article on the responsive table.

With the showTableSuggestionValueHelp property, you can offer a Show All Items button at the end of the suggest result list. Because the number of results in the suggest functionality is limited, this option helps the user find the relevant item via an alternative dialog:

The width of the columns is distributed equally by default. To avoid truncation, accurately estimate the primary attribute length and set a minimum width for this column.

See a live example of tabular autocomplete suggestions.

Tabular autocomplete
Tabular autocomplete

Grouping

You can group the items items in a suggestion list by a specific attribute and separate each group visually with a group header. This feature is also available for tabular suggestion lists.

The group headers are not interactive.

Input with grouped suggestions
Input with grouped suggestions
Input with grouped tabular suggestions
Input with grouped tabular suggestions

Guidelines

Always provide a meaningful label for any input field, and use the least complex control (such as select instead of value help). Use more intricate controls only if the use case really requires it. Where appropriate, help users by providing mask input or placeholder texts.

Maximum Columns

For input fields in a tabular view, we recommend using a maximum of 4 columns.

Maximum Length

Limit the length of the input field. For example, if you don’t want users to enter more than 5 characters, set the maximum length to 5. The maximum permissible character length is not defined by default. If the back-end system has a limit, ensure that you set this property accordingly.

Note that this parameter is not compatible with the input type sap.m.InputType.Number. If the input type is set to Number, the value of the maxLength property is ignored.

Placeholder

Avoid using the placeholder attribute as an alternative to a label. This is important because the placeholder text is overwritten as soon as the form is filled out. Labels are necessary to indicate the meaning of the form fields when the placeholders are no longer visible.

Description

The description field should be used, for example, for displaying units or currency. Do not use a description for help text or as a label replacement. Note that the description is not placed in a new line in size S. Therefore, only use the description property for small input fields with a short description.

Width

  • Avoid setting a fixed width, but rather embed it in a proper layout (such as a form, simple form, or grid layout) and use the layout data property to define the responsive behavior for sizes S, M, and L:
  • Ensure an appropriate width for the range of values to be entered for the sizes S, M, and L. Keep in mind that word length can vary between languages, so take localization into account.

Editable and Enabled States

Editable

Property settings: editable = true, enabled = true

The input control is enabled and editable by default. Set the control to editable to allow the user to enter a value.

Not Editable

Property settings: editable = false, enabled = true

Use this state, for example, to display data only.

Disabled

Property settings: editable = not relevant, enabled = false

Set the control to disabled in an edit scenario to indicate that the user cannot change the control, for example, due to missing access rights or previous conditions not having been fulfilled or selected.

Text Align

Align left if:

  • Text is used. Also use left alignment for a phone number, URL, password, and email address.

Align right if:

  • Amounts and decimal numbers are used.
  • Values need to be added and compared.

Value Help

Show the value help option to help the user select the correct value (such as a customer ID) from a large dataset via the:

Use this option in combination with the autocomplete suggestion feature.

When the user clicks or taps the value help icon, the data entered into the input field must be transferred to the processing dialog so that the user does not have to enter the search term again. Likewise, data entered in the processing dialog must be transferred back to the input field.

Creating and Editing Objects

Sometimes a new object needs to be created if the user cannot find a specific item via autocomplete or value help. In this case, we recommend that you place the New action next to the input field.

If you want the user to be able to edit a selected object directly, you should place the Edit link next to the input field.

If both actions are needed, they should be toggled based on the content of the input field. If a valid object is selected, you should display Edit. If the input field is empty or the object is not valid, you should display New. This pattern can also be applied for the multi-input fieldcombo boxmulti-combo box, and select controls.

Input field – New action
Input field – New action
Input field – Edit action
Input field – Edit action

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Select

The select control (also known as a dropdown) is commonly used to enable users to select an item from a predefined list.

Usage

Use select if:

  • Users need to select one item exclusively from a short list of options (for example, fewer than 12 items).
  • The values of the option list are of secondary importance and do not need to be displayed right away.

Do not use select if:

  • Users need to choose between two options, such as On or Off and Yes or No. In this case, consider using a switch control instead.
  • Users need to pick one item from a very large set of options. In this case, consider using the combo box instead.
  • You need to display more than one attribute. In this case, consider using the input field with a select dialog or a value help dialog instead.
  • The user needs to search on multiple attributes. In this case, consider using the input field with select dialog or value help dialog instead.
  • Your use case requires all available options to be displayed right away, without any user interaction. In this case, consider using radio buttons or a radio button group instead.
Information
For more information on which selection control to choose, see the selection control overview.

Responsiveness

The display of the select control depends on the device. On smartphones, the selection list takes up the whole screen. On desktop and tablet devices, it appears as a popover.

Size S

Select option list in full screen - Size S
Select option list in full screen - Size S

Size M

Select option list – The option list opens above the field if there is not enough space below it - Size M
Select option list – The option list opens above the field if there is not enough space below it - Size M

Size L

Select option list – The option list opens above the field if there is not enough space below it - Size L
Select option list – The option list opens above the field if there is not enough space below it - Size L

Layout

The select control can be placed in toolbars, such as chart toolbarsfooter toolbars, or header toolbars, as well as in forms or tables:

Components

Select Trigger

The trigger to open the option list is either the Select field (1), which also displays the current selection, or an icon (3).

Option List

The option list (2) displays all the items available to the user. The selection is always highlighted. Selecting another option from the list moves the highlight to the selected option.

Full Screen Title Bar for Size S

Opening the select control on a smartphone brings up the option list in full screen mode. The full screen mode can be closed using the icon on the top right corner (5).

You need to set a title for the full screen mode (4). We recommend the following format:

Single selection

Select [Entity]

Example: Select Product

Multi-selection

Select [Entities]

Example: Select Products

 

Anatomy of the select control
Anatomy of the select control
Anatomy of the select control - Size S
Anatomy of the select control - Size S

Behavior and Interaction

Clicking

The Select field always displays the current selection. The user clicks the field to display a list of options to choose from. Once the user selects an option, the list box closes and the selected option is displayed in the field. If there is no Select field but an icon, the user clicks the icon to open the list of options. The currently selected item is always highlighted in the list to help the user identify what has been selected.

Guidelines

Option List

The option list can contain either text-only values (a) or text values with an icon in front (b). Keep the text values as short as possible because the list uses single lines only. Values that are too long may be truncated. This is especially important when you use icons.

Only use icons if they help users better identify or understand the presented options. To set icons, use the icon property for each list entry.

If you need to indicate that none of the selection options are selected, or you need to allow the user not to select an option, provide (None) (1) as an option and place it at the beginning of the list.

If you need to indicate that all items apply, for example, as a list filter, provide All as an option and place it at the beginning of the list.

If your use case requires a blank input field instead of (None), use a combo box instead.

If the select control is placed in a toolbar with an icon as a trigger for sorting, grouping or filtering a set of items, consider the following guideline:

Sort, Group, and Filter:

  • (Not sorted)
    Note: In most cases, this option is not necessary; just show the default sort settings instead.
  • (Not filtered)
  • (Not grouped)

For more information about the toolbar, see toolbar overview.

Define a default selection whenever possible (2). If the selected item is not specified, the first one is selected.

(a) Text-only version; (b) icon and text
(a) Text-only version; (b) icon and text
(1) Selection option list with (None); (2) first value selected
(1) Selection option list with (None); (2) first value selected

Label

The select control can be displayed with or without a label. If the field is attached to another field, you do not need to define a second label.

Information

Do not provide a blank value to indicate that nothing is selected.

Sorting

The sort option list contains all the items that are available to the user. Choose one of the following styles to order the content:

Logical: Sort items into a meaningful order. Group related options together and show the most common options first, followed by less common options. Sort the options alphabetically if more than eight select options are available. This helps the user find the right option quickly.

Example of logical sorting
Example of logical sorting

Alphabetical: Sort currencies, names, and similar content alphabetically.

Example of alphabetical sorting
Example of alphabetical sorting

Numeric: Sort numeric values into a sequential order, with the lowest number first.

Example of numeric sorting
Example of numeric sorting

Chronological: Sort time-related information into chronological order, with the most recent first.

Example of chronological sorting
Example of chronological sorting

Width

The select control is usually used in forms, where the width is determined by the form element or container in which the select control is embedded.

If you need to restrict the width to a defined value, you can set the width accordingly. However, we do not recommend defining a fixed width. Where possible, use layout containers (such as a form, simple form, or responsive grid layout), and define the width via the layout data property.

Do not allow the control to auto-adjust based on the selection.

Information
If the text length is fixed and doesn’t require localization (for example, currency codes), consider reducing the width.

Width of the Option List

By default, the width of the option list adapts to the width of the longest entry. The maximum width of the option list is set to 600 px.

Maximum width of the option list
Maximum width of the option list

Text Wrap in the Option List

The option list doesn’t support horizontal scrolling. By default, entries that exceed the maximum width of 600 px for the dropdown are truncated. If you expect the dropdown to contain longer entries, we recommend wrapping items in the option list to enable users to read the full text, (property: wrapItemsText). If wrapping is enabled, the text can wrap to multiple lines.

Option list with wrapped text
Option list with wrapped text

Unit of Measurement

You can use the layout options of the form to can add the unit of measurement (UoM) after select. Apps can use the label-field ratio to show the UoM after the field. However, you must make sure that the UoM is properly visualized and doesn’t wrap to the next row.

Developer Hint

For accessibility purposes, you can use “ariaDescribedBy” from the input control.

Semantic Colors

Different value states or meanings can be indicated by using semantic colors. The visual states are shown below in their regular state (left) and focused (right). Note that the positive/success state does not show a message on focus.

For more details on the correct usage, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

Neutral
Neutral
Neutral (focus)
Neutral (focus)
Information
Information
Information (focus)
Information (focus)
Success
Success
Success (focus)
Success (focus)
Error
Error
Error (focus)
Error (focus)
Warning
Warning
Warning (focus)
Warning (focus)

Value State Text

The select control can display the value state text even if the dropdown is open. This ensures that the value states are shown in all situations and on all devices. When the user opens the dropdown, the value state sticks to the top and does not scroll away. The control also supports multi-line text for the value state.

Value state text displayed when the dropdown is open
Value state text displayed when the dropdown is open

Read-Only

The select control can be displayed as read-only (property: editable, default = “true”). If the editable property is set to “false”, interaction with the control is disabled. The control remains focusable, but the background and border are changed to indicate that it is read-only.

Select read-only
Select read-only

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Quick View

The quick view is similar to a popover, but has a predefined structure, a fixed set of UI elements, and automatic UI rendering.

Usage

Use the quick view if:

  • You want to display a concise overview of an object.
  • You want to display information about, for example, an employee or a company.
  • You can split your information into groups (for example, contact details and company information).

Do not use the quick view if:

  • You want to provide information in a way other than displaying it in groups.
  • You want to display complex information about an object.

Responsiveness

The quick view is based on the popover. It therefore inherits the same basic properties from it and provides the same responsiveness. For more information, see popover.

Layout

Generic Quick View

The figure on the right shows how the content is structured within the quick view. At the top of the content area, you can display an image next to the title and subtitle. Additionally, groups and fields are used to structure the information.

You can use the fallbackIcon property to define a backup icon. This icon is displayed if the initial image or icon is can’t be loaded.

Example of a generic quick view
Example of a generic quick view

Quick View Examples

You can create your own quick view element or, as with the two examples below show, there are also basic structures for displaying employee and company information in a quick view.

Example: Employee quick view
Example: Employee quick view
Example: Company quick view
Example: Company quick view

Behavior and Interaction

The quick view is based on the popover. It therefore inherits the same basic properties from it and provides the same interaction. For more information, see popover.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Select Dialog

The select dialog enables users to select one or more items from a comprehensive list. The select dialog comes with a list of entries and a search field to filter the list.

A more enhanced dialog for single selection and multiselection is the value help dialog as it offers range selection and excluding functions.

Usage

Use the select dialog if:

  • Users need to select one or more entries from a comprehensive list that contains multiple attributes or values.

Do not use the select dialog if:

  • Users need to pick one item from a predefined set of options that contains one attribute or value only such as languages. In this case, consider using the combo box or select instead.
  • Your use case requires more enhanced functionalities such as a selection based on ranges. For the selection of values, consider using the value help dialog instead.
  • Your use case requires tabs, filters, or an Add New functionality in the select dialog. In this case, use a standard dialog instead.
Information
For more information on which selection control to choose, see the selection control overview.

Responsiveness

The display of the select control depends on the device. On phones, the selection list takes up the whole screen. On desktop and tablet devices it appears as a popover.

Size S

Single select dialog in full screen on smartphone
Single select dialog in full screen on smartphone
Multi-select dialog in full screen on smartphone
Multi-select dialog in full screen on smartphone

Size M

Single select dialog on tablet
Single select dialog on tablet
Multi-select dialog on tablet
Multi-select dialog on tablet

Size L

Single select dialog on desktop
Single select dialog on desktop
Multi-select dialog on desktop
Multi-select dialog on desktop

Components

Dialog Header

You need to set the title of the dialog header (1). We recommend the following form:

Single selection

Select

Example: Select Product

Multi-selection

Select

Example: Select Products

Search

The first element in the dialog is a standard search field (2).

Info Toolbar

The info toolbar (3) is only available in multi-selection mode. It shows the number of selected items in the following form:

Selected :

Example: Selected Products: 2

Content

The content area (4) can be filled with any list content inherited from the list item base, such as standard list items, display list items, and feed list items. You can set the content to be displayed as grouped.

Button Toolbar

The button toolbar (5) contains two buttonsSelect and Cancel. Select takes over the selection, while Cancel resets the selection to the state it was in when the dialog was opened.

Components of the select dialog. Left: single select, right: multi select
Components of the select dialog. Left: single select, right: multi select

Behavior and Interaction

The select dialog can be called up from any control. The most common trigger is an input field with selection icon, also known as a “value help field”, or F4. Alternative triggers are buttons or icons, which add items to an existing list or the info bar in the master list in order to apply a contextual filter.

Single Select

Once users select an entry, the select dialog is closed and the selected entry is taken over. If applicable, the entry is displayed in the field from which the dialog was triggered.

Multi-Select

In the multi-select version of the select dialog, checkboxes are provided for choosing multiple entries. The selection is taken over when the user closes the dialog via OK. Cancel closes the dialog without taking over the selected values. An info bar indicates the number of selected items.

Search

The user can search items.

Resize and Drag Dialog

You can make the select dialog resizable and draggable by setting the corresponding properties (also called resizable and draggable) to “true”.

A resizable dialog makes sense if the items inside have long names or descriptions.

A draggable dialog allows users to see the app content behind the dialog.

Guidelines
Both features are optional. However, even if you only need one, always set both of them to “true” to ensure consistency.

Guidelines

List Options

If you need to indicate that none of the selection options are selected, or you need to allow the user not to select an option, provide (None) as an option and place it at the beginning of the list.

If you need to indicate that all items apply (for example, as a list filter), provide All as an option and place it at the beginning of the list.

Select list with '(None)'
Select list with '(None)'

Search Behavior

Two types of search behavior are available:

(1) A live search, also known as “search-as-you-type” (property: liveChange), which is triggered by each character that the user enters or deletes.

(2) A manual search, which is triggered explicitly after the user enters text in the search field and clicks or taps the Search icon or presses the ENTER key.

Although app developers need to decide themselves which search to use, we recommend implementing the live search whenever possible. Use the manual search only if the amount of data is too large and your app would otherwise run into performance issues. For more information, check out the article on search.

Reset/Remember Selections

By default, the selection is reset when the dialog is closed. This allows users to make a new selection when they reopen the dialog and makes sense when users need to add multiple items to a table.

Selection is reset after the dialog is closed
Selection is reset after the dialog is closed

However, if your use case requires selections in a dialog to be remembered so that the user can make corrections, you can set the rememberSelections function in the select dialog to “true”. When users exit the dialog by clicking or tapping Cancel, the selection is then restored to the state it was in when the dialog was opened.

Selection is remembered after the dialog is reopened
Selection is remembered after the dialog is reopened

This also works in single-select dialogs. There, if users click the remembered item again, the dialog closes and they do not have to explicitly click Cancel.

Info Bar

In multi-selection mode, an info bar shows the number of selected items. Use the following format:

Selected: [Business Objects] Selected: [Number of Items]
Example: Products Selected: 2

Note that the info bar is not “sticky”. When the user scrolls down the list, the info bar scrolls off the screen.

“Clear” Button

The Clear button allows users to clear all the selected items. By default, the button is not shown. To display the button, set the showClearButton property to “true”.

Select dialog with 'Clear' button
Select dialog with 'Clear' button

Content

By default, the select dialog comes with a growing feature (property: growing = “true”). We recommend disabling the growing feature and setting this property to “false”. This ensures that all items in the table are loaded at once, and that the “Items selected” count, the search, and select/deselect features all work properly.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

  • No links

Color Picker Popover

The color picker popover consists of a color picker within a popover. You can use it to offer color selectors on toolbars (for example, triggered by a button). The color picker popover allows users to select any color.

Color picker popover
Color picker popover

Usage

Use the color picker popover if:

  • Selecting any color freely is the typical use case (for example, for user-created content).
  • There is no need for or benefit from a predefined color palette.
  • Selecting a color is needed as a toolbar action. In this case, use a button or menu button to trigger the color picker popover.

Do not use the color picker popover if:

  • You want to let users select a color directly on the page (for example, inside a form). Use the color palette instead.
  • A predefined palette is beneficial. Use a color palette popover instead.

Responsiveness

The color picker popover supports cozy and compact content densities. On a phone, the color picker popover turns into a full-screen dialog.

Size S
Size S
Size M
Size M
Size L
Size L

Layout

The color picker popover consists of a popover containing a color picker and a toolbar.

The color picker consists of the following elements:

  • The color picker box for setting lightness and saturation
  • Sliders for setting the hue and transparency (“alpha channel”)
  • Form elements for:
    • Displaying the current and new color settings
    • Setting the color as a hexadecimal value
    • Setting the color as red/green/blue (RGB) value (0 to 255 each)
    • Setting the color as hue/saturation/lightness (HSL) value (hue: 0 to 360 degrees, saturation: 0% to 100%, lightness: 0% to 100%)
    • Setting the transparency (“alpha channel”) value of the color (0.00 for full transparency to 1.00 for opaque)

The toolbar contains two buttons: OK(emphasized) and Cancel.

Types

The color picker popover comes in 3 flavors:

  • Simplified: The simplified color picker offers settings for hue, saturation, and lightness, but not for the alpha channel. It shows the current and new color. Text input is only possible for hex values.
'Simplified' color picker popover
'Simplified' color picker popover
  • Default: The default color picker allows all settings. It displays input fields either for red / green / blue / alpha or for hue / saturation / lightness / alpha. End users can switch between both sets of input fields.
'Default' color picker popover
'Default' color picker popover
  • Large: The large color picker allows all settings and displays all fields at the same time.
'Large' color picker popover
'Large' color picker popover

Behavior and Interaction

Colors can be selected using mouse/touch or a keyboard:

  • Mouse/touch: Users select a combination of saturation and lightness in the color picker box (left click, tap, click and drag, tap and drag). Hue and alpha values are selected with sliders.
  • Keyboard: The tab key is used to set the focus on the sliders and input fields. Values are entered using the corresponding input controls. The sliders react on arrow keys, page up / page down keys, as well as on home and end keys. The color picker box is not keyboard-enabled.

The Submit button applies the new color and closes color picker popover. The Cancel button closes the color picker popover without applying the new color.

Guidelines

  • To trigger the color picker popover, use a button or a value help icon from an input field.
  • Show the selected color in another place (for example, as a color value inside the triggering input field). The color picker popover closes as soon as a color is selected.
  • Use the simplest color picker popover type that does the job.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Combo Box

The combo box control allows users to select an item from a predefined list.

The control provides an editable input field for filtering the list, and a dropdown menu with a list of the available options.

If the entries are not validated by the application, users can also enter custom values.

Usage

Use the combo box if:

  • Users need to select a single item from a long list of items (minimum 13, maximum 200 entries).
  • The values of the option list are secondary information and do not need to be displayed right away.

Do not use the combo box if:

  • Users need to select from a list of two options, where one of the options can be implied as on and off or yes and no. Consider using a switch control instead.
  • Users need to pick one item from a small set of options, such as up to 12 entries. Consider using the select control instead.
  • Users need to pick one item from a large set of options, such as more than 200 entries. Consider using the input field control with a select dialog or value help dialog instead.
  • You need to display more than one attribute. Consider using the input field with select dialog or value help dialog.
  • Searching on multiple attributes is required. Consider using the input field with select dialog or value help dialog.
  • Your use cases require that all available options should be displayed right away without any user interaction. Consider using radio buttons or a radio button group.
Information
For more information on which selection control to choose, see the selection control overview.

Responsiveness

Size S

Size S
Size S

Size M

Size M
Size M

Size L

Size L
Size L

Also see the section on mobile handling below.

Components

Title

A descriptive heading (1).

Input Field

The input field (2) displays the selected value. Users can type any character to filter the option list.

Dropdown Arrow

The dropdown menu’s arrow (3) collapses and expands the option list.

Option List

The option list (4) contains a list of values (5) that users can choose from.

Size S
Size S
Size M/L
Size M/L

Two-Column Layout

Use the combo box with a two-column layout if you need to display additional information for the selection options, such as currencies, country abbreviations, or system abbreviations.

Users can filter both columns simultaneously showing only matching entries.

Combo box with two-column layout
Combo box with two-column layout

Grouping

You can group the items in the suggestion list by a specific attribute and separate them visually with a group header.

The group headers are not interactive.

Grouped suggestion list
Grouped suggestion list
Grouped suggestion list - Size S
Grouped suggestion list - Size S

Behavior and Interaction

Select a Value

There are three ways to select an item from the list:

  1. Select the item directly from the dropdown list.
  2. Type the item into the input field.
  3. Use the up and down arrows to navigate the list.

Clicking the input field places the cursor in the field (1). Clicking the arrow opens the option list (2). When the user starts typing, the list is filtered accordingly. The first item that starts with the characters entered is highlighted in the list and autocompleted in the input field (3). Up/down moves the highlight in the list and populates the value in the field (4). Selecting a value closes the list of options (5).

Autocomplete

When the first few letters are typed in the input field, the control performs autocomplete to help users to easily select one item from the option list.

Choose from Option List

The option list displays all the available items the user can choose from. The selection is always highlighted. Selecting another option from the list moves the highlight to the newly selected option.

Clicking the arrow opens the option list below the field. If there is not enough space, the list is displayed above the input field.

Selecting a value
Selecting a value

Filtering the Option List

When the user starts typing in the input field, the option list is filtered. Only items that match the characters entered are shown in the dropdown list. The default filtering method is “starts with per term”, which matches the beginning of each word in an item’s text.

In addition, application developers can set a custom filtering method “starts with” or “contains” (method: setFilterFunction). The “starts with” approach filters only for items where the beginning of the label matches the query entered. The “Contains” approach searches the full label for a match.

As a visual hint for the user, the matched characters are highlighted in the option list items. The highlighting works on the basis of “starts with per term”, regardless of the filtering method.

If the filtered option list contains items that start with the characters entered by the user, the first matching, unselected item is autocompleted in the input field.

Combo box - Default filtering and autocomplete
Combo box - Default filtering and autocomplete
Combo box - Default filtering in both columns and autocomplete
Combo box - Default filtering in both columns and autocomplete

Auto-Resize

The width of the option list adapts to its content. The minimum width is the input field plus the dropdown arrow. The maximum width is the part of the screen furthest to the right. If the option list content requires even more width, entries become truncated.

Option list – Minimum width
Option list – Minimum width
Option list adapts to long entries
Option list adapts to long entries

Mobile Handling

The user can enter text into the input field (supported by autocompletion). Clicking or tapping on the dropdown arrow of the combo box (1) opens in a full-screen dialog (2). The user can now modify the selected entry by tapping the input field of the combo box. The mobile keyboard is then displayed, and the user can begin to enter a new term to filter the option list, also supported by autocompletion (3). The option list closes when the user clicks or taps the OK button at the bottom of the list (4) or selects an item in the list (5).

Information
For information on how to manage leading and treading whitespace (blanks) when copying and pasting text into input controls, please see removing leading and trailing whitespace.

Styles

A combo box has different styles for its different states. Here are some examples:

Unselected
Unselected
Unselected with predefined placeholder
Unselected with predefined placeholder
Unselected on hover
Unselected on hover
Arrow on hover
Arrow on hover
Focus
Focus
Expanded
Expanded
Autocomplete
Autocomplete
Error
Error
Warning
Warning
Success
Success
Information
Information
Warning message with long, wrapping text
Warning message with long, wrapping text

For more information on how to use the different semantic states of the control, see How to Use Semantic Colors.

Guidelines

Label

The combo box control can be displayed with or without a label. If the field is attached to another field, you do not need to define a second label. For more information, see the article on how to use labels in SAP Fiori.

Placeholder

Do not use the placeholder attribute as an alternative to a label. This is important because the placeholder text is overwritten as soon as the form is filled out. Labels are necessary to indicate the meaning of the form fields when the placeholders are no longer visible. Show a placeholder only if the user needs a hint on data entry. Do not repeat the content of the label. A hint could be a sample value or a brief description of the expected format. Read more about how to use placeholders.

 

Option List

The option list contains text values only. Keep the text values short because the list is represented using only single lines. Values that are too long might be truncated.

If you need to express that none of the selection options are selected, show a blank input field. Define a default selection whenever possible.

Sorting

We recommend sorting options alphabetically to help users find the right option quickly. For more sorting rules, check out the guidelines for the select control.

Width

You can adjust the width of the option list to some extent.

The combo box control is usually used in forms, where the width is determined by the form element or container in which the combo box control is embedded. Therefore, we do not recommend defining a fixed width, but rather working with proper layout containers that have a defined width, such as the following properties: “form”, “simpleform”, “responsivegridlayout”, and “layoutdata” .

If you need to restrict the width to a defined value, set the width accordingly.

Keep in mind that there is no horizontal scrolling in the option list. Entries in the list that are too long become truncated and users may not be able to read them.

If localized text is not an issue, consider using a smaller width.

Unit of Measurement

You can use the layout options of the form to add the unit of measurement (UoM) after the combo box control. Apps can use the label-field ratio to show the UoM after the field. However, you must make sure that the UoM is properly visualized and doesn’t wrap to the next row.

Developer Hint

For accessibility purposes, you can use “ariaDescribedBy” from the input control.

Properties

Selection

When you select a value, there are two events:

  • Change: Occurs when the text in the input field is changed and the focus leaves the input field or the user presses the Enter key.
  • Selection change: Occurs when the user types something that matches an item in the list; also when the user clicks a list box item, or when navigating via keyboard.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Avatar

The avatar is a control for displaying images. These can be user profiles, user initials, placeholder images, icons, or business-related images, such as product pictures.

Usage

Use the avatar to display:

  • An image, initials, or placeholder for a user
  • Standardized images for business-related content (such as products, parts, product and company logos, ad campaign images, …)
  • Icons
  • Images with a transparent background
  • Placeholder images

Do not use the avatar if:

  • You want to include an image for any other use case. Instead, use the image control.
  • You want to display pictures in a carousel. Instead, use the carousel control.
  • You want to show an interactive icon. Instead, use the button with an icon inside.
Examples of a user image, user initials, and standard user placeholder icon
Examples of a user image, user initials, and standard user placeholder icon
Potential product image and product image placeholder
Potential product image and product image placeholder
Icon
Icon

Responsiveness

The avatar control is adaptive and has five predefined sizes. These are the same for both compact and cozy form factors:

 

Size rem Use for images in…
XS 2 rem Table list items
Card list items
S 3 rem Card headers
Card list items
M 4 rem App headers for small screen sizes
L 5 rem App headers for normal screen sizes
XL 7 rem App headers for large screen sizes

If your use case requires it, you can also set a custom size.

Predefined sizes: XS, S, M, L, XL
Predefined sizes: XS, S, M, L, XL
Predefined sizes: XS, S, M, L, XL
Predefined sizes: XS, S, M, L, XL

Image Fit

You can use the imageFitType property to specify how images fit to the avatar. There are two options: Cover (default) and Contain.

Cover

The size of the image is scaled up to completely cover the control area. As a result, parts of the image may be outside the shape.

Use the Cover fit type if the focal point is in the center of the image.

Contain

The image is scaled down to fit into the control area. The entire image is displayed, but might not fully fill the shape. In this case, the control displays a default background color. The image itself is always centered inside the shape.

Use the Contain fit type for product pictures that need to be displayed in full.

Product image with the fit type 'cover' (left) and 'contain' (right)
Product image with the fit type 'cover' (left) and 'contain' (right)

Types

Avatar – User Image, Initials, or Placeholder

An avatar is a visual representation of a user in the digital space. Usually, an avatar displays the user in one of the following ways:

  • A user photo
  • The user’s initials
  • A placeholder icon instead of the user’s personal data (photo or initials)

Always display avatars in a circle. This ensures that all users are represented equally on the user interface.

Initials

User image, user initials, and standard user placeholder icon
User image, user initials, and standard user placeholder icon

The initials stand for the first name(s) and last name(s) of a person – for example, JD for Jane Doe, or MvV for Marjolein van Veen. Which name comes first depends on the language-specific settings.

Initials can have up to three alphabetical characters (A-Z, a-z). If more than 3 initials are required for longer names (such as Anna María Agustí Suárez), the gender-neutral placeholder icon is displayed instead. The placeholder is also used if the three letters don’t fit into the circle (for example, WWW).

Some languages don’t build on an alphabet, or don’t use initials at all. In such cases, the gender-neutral person icon is displayed instead.

User initials with 1, 2, and 3 characters
User initials with 1, 2, and 3 characters

Business Images

Business images display a product, company, object, logo, or other business-related content.

Always use a square for business images.

Examples of product images
Examples of product images

Placeholder for Avatar and Business Images

Placeholder images are used for both avatar and business images when no other image is available.

  • The default placeholder for an avatar is a gender-neutral person icon inside a circle.
  • The default placeholder for a business image is a neutral product icon inside a square.
Default person and product placeholders
Default person and product placeholders

You can specify your own the default placeholder icon for business images.

Always replace the default product icon if there is a more suitable icon for your use case and industry.

Product placeholder images with custom icons
Product placeholder images with custom icons

Placeholder Background

By default, the placeholder background color is set to blue (accent color 6). However, to add more visual variety to the UI, you can change the background color using one of the following options:

  • Accent colors – You can specify one of 10 different accent colors as the placeholder background color.
  • Random color – The control automatically picks a random color from the accent color palette.

All accent colors can be themed.

User initials in all ten accent colors
User initials in all ten accent colors

Placeholder for Decorative Images in the Content Area

Use the background color ‘placeholder’ for decorative images in the content area, such as images in articles or longer descriptions. In these use cases, the primary focus is on the text and the image content is secondary.

Decorative image in the content area
Decorative image in the content area
Placeholder image for secondary content
Placeholder image for secondary content

Images with Transparent Background

You can display images with a transparent background. This can be useful for displaying descriptive illustrations and decorative pictures, for example.

Image with transparent background
Image with transparent background

Icons

You can use the avatar to display non-interactive display icons. Use the background color ‘placeholder’ to display the icon.

If you want to put an action on the icon, use the button with an icon inside instead.

Exemplary icons
Exemplary icons

Guidelines

  • If you use a custom avatar size with initials or icons:
    • Make sure that the font size is consistent with the size of the control itself.
    • If your custom size is between two predefined sizes, use the font size for the smaller predefined size.
      Example: If your avatar is 5.5 rem (between sizes L and XL), use the font size for size L (2 rem).
  • For accessibility purposes, provide an alternative text for each avatar image in case the image is not available or can’t be displayed.
  • Optimize high-resolution images to avoid unnecessarily large files. Large image files can severely impede page performance.
Do
Custom placeholder size with appropriate custom font size
Custom placeholder size with appropriate custom font size
Don't
Custom placeholder size, but icon is too small
Custom placeholder size, but icon is too small

Styles

You can add a very subtle border to the avatar (property: ShowBorder).

Images with optional borders
Images with optional borders

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Table Select Dialog

Table select is a commonly-used dialog that helps users to make a selection from a comprehensive table containing multiple attributes or values. With the dialog, users are also able to access additional information about the objects in the table without needing to select them first.

The dialog provides a responsive table layout with additional search, filter, and selection functionalities in the header. A footer toolbar provides actions for canceling or confirming the process.

Usage

Use the table select dialog if:

  • You need to help users select one or more items from a comprehensive list that contains multiple attributes or values.

Do not use the table select dialog if:

  • You need to help users pick one item from a predefined set of options that contains only one value. In this case, use the dropdown box instead.
  • You need to help users with query-based range selection and enhanced filter options. In this case, use the value help dialog instead.
  • Your use case requires tabs, filters, or actions in a select dialog.In this case, use a standard dialog instead.
  • Your use case only requires filtering without selection. In this case, use the filter toolbar instead.
Information
For more information on which selection control to choose, see the selection control overview.

Responsiveness

The table inside the table select dialog behaves like the responsive table. On smaller screens, the columns wrap and build a list that shows all the information. All other elements in the control are also responsive.

On bigger screens, the table select dialog also provides columns
On bigger screens, the table select dialog also provides columns
The table in the dialog is responsive and wraps on smaller screens to show a list
The table in the dialog is responsive and wraps on smaller screens to show a list

Behavior and Interaction

The table select dialog can be called up from any control. The trigger is usually a button with a selection icon in an input field, or an Add button in a toolbar.

Triggers

Input Trigger

This trigger can be useful if users need to select, for example, one customer from a large customer register.

Example of a trigger: the selection icon in the input field
Example of a trigger: the selection icon in the input field

“Add” Button

This trigger can be useful if users need to add an item to a list. For example, the dialog could help users select the product from a large product catalog. Clicking Select in the footer toolbar of the dialog adds the selected products to the list.

“Clear” Button

The Clear button allows users to clear all the selected items.

Example of a trigger: 'Add' button in a table
Example of a trigger: 'Add' button in a table

Sticky Header

The column headers and info toolbar in the table select dialog are “sticky”, which means that they stay fixed on top when scrolling (sap.m.Table, property: sticky).

Information
The “sticky” feature has some browser limitations, and is not supported in Internet Explorer and in Microsoft Edge versions older than 41. In these browsers, the headers of the table select dialog will not be sticky.
Example of sticky headers
Example of sticky headers

 

Single Select

The single-select version does not need a Select button in the footer toolbar because the selected entry is taken over and closed as soon as a user selects an item from the table. If applicable, the entry is displayed in the field from which the dialog was triggered. Alternatively, a toast message can be shown if necessary.

Multi-Select

The multi-select version of the table select dialog provides checkboxes for users to choose multiple items. The blue infobar above the table indicates the number of selected items. The selection is taken over when the user closes the dialog via the Select button in the footer toolbar. Clicking Cancel closes the dialog without taking over the selected values.

Remembering Selections

If selections need to be memorized in order to help users make corrections, you can set the RememberSelections property to true. This restores the selection to the state it was in when the dialog was last opened as soon as users exit the dialog via Select or Cancel. The interaction flow of the RememberSelections property is shown and explained in the select dialog article.

Grouping

The list can also be displayed as grouped. Group headers divide the table into segments. A pregrouped table is useful for tables with many entries, which can be sorted by a single attribute.

Table select dialog with group headers
Table select dialog with group headers

Resize and Drag Dialog

You can allow users to resize and drag the table select dialog by setting the resizable and draggable properties to “true”.

  • A resizable dialog makes sense if the items within the dialog can have long names or descriptions.
  • A draggable dialog allows users to see the app content behind the dialog.
Guidelines
Both features are optional. However, if you only need one, always set both properties to “true” for consistency reasons.

Guidelines

Set the information provided in the table select dialog from top to bottom as follows:

Dialog Header

Use the following format for the dialog header:

  • For single selection: Select [Business Object]
    Example: Select Product
  • For multiple selection: Select [Business Objects]
    Example: Select Products.

Search

The first interactive element in the dialog is a standard search field. Two types of search behavior are available:

  • live search, also known as “search-as-you-type,” which is triggered by each character that the user enters or deletes.
  • A manual search, which is triggered explicitly after the user enters text in the search field and clicks theSearch icon or presses the ENTER key. As soon as the user hits the Search button, a Delete icon appears at the end of the input field to delete the keyword and cancel the result list.

App developers need to decide which search to use. We recommend implementing the live search whenever possible. Use the manual search only if the amount of data is too large and if your app would otherwise run into performance issues. For more information, check out the article on searching.

Infobar

In multi-selection mode, an infobar shows the number of selected items. Use the following format:

[Business Objects] Selected: [Number of Items]
Example: Products Selected: 2

“Clear” Button

The “Clear” button for clearing all the selected items is optional. By default, the button is not shown. To display the button, set the showClearButton property to “true”.

Content

The content area provides a table. This behaves like the responsive table, so the columns wrap on smaller screens and display a list.

By default, the table select comes with a growing feature (property: growing = true). We recommend disabling the growing feature and setting this property to “false”. This ensures that all items in the table are loaded at once, and that the “Items selected” count, the search, and select/deselect features all work properly.

Footer Toolbar

In the multi-select version, the footer toolbar contains the Select and Cancel buttons. Select takes over the selection, while Cancel resets the selection to the state it was in when the user opened the dialog.

In the single-select version, only provide Cancel in the footer toolbar because the dialog takes over the selection as soon as the user chooses one.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Tree

Within SAP Fiori, we distinguish between tree tables and trees. Both usually allow the user to display and work with a hierarchical set of items. While tree tables are usually used for more complex data, trees are generally used for rather basic data. Trees are mostly used in the master list for a master-detail scenario using the flexible column layout and in popovers or dialogs. In certain use cases, they can also be used in the dynamic page layout.

In the case of tree tables and trees, items that contain additional items are called nodes, while items that do not contain any other items are called leaves. If available, a single topmost node is called a root node. Apart from the hierarchical structure of its nodes and leaves, a tree is quite similar to a list.

Usage

Use the tree if:

  • You need to display the key identifier of hierarchically structured items (for example in the first column of the flexible column layout).
  • Selecting one or more items out of a set of hierarchically structured items is a main use case.
  • The hierarchy has a restricted number of levels (up to about 12, depending on the content) and items (around 200).
  • You want to have only one implementation for all devices.

Do not use the tree if:

  • The main use case is to select one item from a very small number of non-hierarchical items, without viewing additional details. In this case, a select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • Items are not structured hierarchically. Use a list instead.
  • The hierarchy turns out to have only two levels. In this case, use a grouped list.
  • The hierarchy turns out to be just a categorization based on several details of the item. In this case, an analytical table provides multi-level grouping. Note that the analytical table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You need to display very deep hierarchies with additional data per item. In this case, use a tree table. Note that the tree table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • The structure contains more than 200 items. In this case, use the tree table. It is optimized for large item sets and provides better performance. Note that the tree table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use a chart.

Check out the table overview to decide which SAP Fiori table is most suitable for your needs.

Responsiveness

The tree is like a list containing hierarchical data. It acts as a container for items, with the possibility to expand and collapse nodes. When reducing the width, item texts wrap to ensure that the tree adapts to the new size.

In addition, the tree changes the indentation per level dynamically when the user expands a node, based on number of levels currently showing.

Tree displaying 2 levels
Tree displaying 2 levels
Tree displaying 3 levels
Tree displaying 3 levels
Tree displaying 4 levels
Tree displaying 4 levels

Layout

The title bar (optional) contains the title of the tree. In addition, an item counter and toolbar items can be placed on the title bar.
The collection of hierarchical items occupies the main part of the tree.

Schematic visualization of the tree
Schematic visualization of the tree

Components

The title bar consists of a toolbar. The toolbar can contain a title, an item count, and other toolbar items such as actions or view settings, for example.

The standard tree item consists of:

  • A highlight indicator (optional)
  • An expand/collapse button for nodes
  • A selector in form of a checkbox or a radio button (optional)
  • An icon (optional)
  • text
  • A counter (optional)
  • Additional buttons with actions such as Edit, Navigate, or Delete (optional)

If additional controls are needed, use a custom tree item. The custom tree item allows you to use any combination of controls inside the tree.

Standard tree item
Standard tree item

Behavior and Interaction (incl. Gestures)

Tree Level

Scrolling

The height of the tree is defined by the number of items it contains. It does not have its own scroll container, but is scrolled together with the app.

Same tree, with different expand state
Same tree, with different expand state

When the user scrolls, the title and the filter info bar can stick to the top of the surrounding layout container (sap.m.Tree, property: sticky).

Information
The “sticky” feature comes with some limitations:

  • It is not available on all browsers. In non-supporting browsers, the corresponding areas are not fixed on top of the surrounding layout container while scrolling.
  • Certain layout containers suppress the sticky behavior, such as the grid layout. The same happens if the table is placed within the object page.
  • If focus is set to a sticky area, the tree is automatically scrolled to top.

Sticky title
Sticky title

Selection Modes

A tree can have one of the following selection modes (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, property: mode):

None: Items cannot be selected (sap.m.ListMode.None).
Beware: Items can, nevertheless, use the sap.m.ListType “navigation” which allows click-handling on specific items. This should only be used when the click triggers a navigation to a corresponding item details page.

Tree without selectable items
Tree without selectable items

Single select master: One item of the tree can be selected. To select an item, click anywhere on the item. Single select master does not add any visual indication to the tree and therefore cannot be differentiated from trees without selection if no item is selected. Therefore, always keep one item selected. For single selection, this is the preferred mode. (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectMaster)

Single selection: only one item is selected.
Single selection: only one item is selected.

Single select left: One item of the tree can be selected. For this, the tree provides radio buttons on the left side of each line item. Use this selection mode only if clicking on the item triggers something else, such as a navigation. Ideally, always keep one item selected, even in initial state (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectLeft).

Single selection with radio buttons. Use only if row clicks are used for something else, such as for navigation.
Single selection with radio buttons. Use only if row clicks are used for something else, such as for navigation.

Multiple selection: Allows the selection of one or more items. For this, the tree provides checkboxes on the left side of each line item. Each item is selected independently of the others. The Shift key can be used to select a range (sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).

Developer Hint
In multiple selection mode, users can (de)select all items using the shortcut CTRL+A. This only affects items that have already been loaded to the front-end server. All other items are not (de)selected before they are loaded (for example, items added via lazy loading with growingScrollToLoad). This conflicts with the guideline that all items the user can reach by scrolling must be (de)selected.

Also note that CTRL+A only (de)selects items within expanded nodes.

To process all items, listen to the selectionChange event and to its flag selectAll. This indicates whether CTRL+A was triggered. As soon as an action is triggered, process the items accordingly. Depending on the number of items, consider processing them in the back end.

Multiple selection
Multiple selection

Deleting

To delete single items, use the tree in “delete” mode (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This adds a Delete   button to each item. Clicking or tapping this button triggers the deletion of the corresponding item. Do not use this mode if deleting multiple items at once is the preferred use case. Delete is a mode of the tree and  therefore cannot be used together with single selection or multi selection.

Tree in “delete” mode
Tree in “delete” mode

Line Item Level

Expandable and Collapsible Nodes

An Expand/Collapse button is provided automatically for each node.

Expand/collapse button
Expand/collapse button

Navigating

To allow navigation from an item, set type to “navigation” within the corresponding item (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This will create an indicator at the end of the line (“>”) and the entire item will become selectable. Clicking or tapping the line triggers the navigation event. However, clicking or tapping a selectable area or an expandable/collapse node does not. Use the navigation event to navigate to a new page containing item details.
If no navigation is possible, set type to “inactive”.
Navigation is an item type and therefore cannot be used together with “edit” or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).

Tree items with navigation indicator
Tree items with navigation indicator
Navigation indicators can be set per item
Navigation indicators can be set per item

Editing Items

To allow the user to edit an item, set type to “detail” within the corresponding item (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive). This will create an edit  button at the end of the line. Clicking the button triggers the edit event. Use this event to either open a dialog or a details page where the item can be edited.
Edit is an item type and therefore cannot be used together with “navigation” or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).

Edit button
Edit button

Clicking an Item

Items as a whole can be clickable. An event is fired by clicking on the item (anywhere except when triggering a selection or when expanding/collapsing a node). Apps can react to the event, such as by opening a dialog (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive).
Active elements do not have a visual indication and therefore cannot be differentiated from non-active elements.
“Active” is an item type and  therefore cannot be used together with “navigation” or “edit”. In addition, “active” uses the entire item as a clickable area and thus cannot be used together with single select master.

Active items
Active items

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a tree. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

The context menu can be triggered for the tree or per item.

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a tree is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Tree - context menu
Tree - context menu

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a tree or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.m.ListBase, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Guidelines

Tree vs. List

Trees are more complex than lists due to their hierarchical view. Users tend to have more problems finding items in hierarchical views than in flat lists, except where the hierarchical view is natural. By natural we mean that every child node should be part of only one parent, and this relationship between the child and parent is clear and well known.

Example of an acceptable use of trees
Example of an acceptable use of trees
Do
A clear parent-child relationship
A clear parent-child relationship

Broad vs. Deep Hierarchies

When you use trees, you should choose broad hierarchies over deep hierarchies. Deep hierarchies make finding items more complicated. So try to reduce hierarchical levels where possible, especially if the hierarchy is not natural. Ideally, a tree should have a maximum of four levels, the first two of which should contain the most important items.

Don't
Avoid unnecessary depth in the hierarchy
Avoid unnecessary depth in the hierarchy
Do
Favor breadth over depth in a hierarchy
Favor breadth over depth in a hierarchy

You can use the following methods to reduce hierarchy levels:

  • Avoid a single root node. It is usually not needed.
  • Container nodes at the top level can usually be replaced by tabs or value pickers.
  • Eliminate unnecessary mid-level containers, for example, by combining redundant ones.
  • Exercise care when using a tree due to its overall complexity. The hierarchical structure of the data does not necessarily mean that a tree control is required.
Acceptable: repeat entries to optimize finding items
Acceptable: repeat entries to optimize finding items

Design Concepts

The tree can be used to display hierarchical data. Unfortunately, trees convey an immediate feeling of complexity. Ideally, show trees only if there is no other option. You should instead try the following:

  • Flatten the data. A list is still complex, but less so than a tree. A combo box might also fit in some use cases.
  • When only two levels are needed, a grouped list control can be used. This works well, where group nodes are used for categorizing their children and where the group nodes themselves do not need to be selectable.
  • Break down the data into manageable chunks. Allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Title

Use a title only if the title of the tree is not indicated in the surrounding area. If needed, implement the title text by adding a title to a toolbar. Place the toolbar above the tree.

Do not use a title if it simply repeats text that is already above the tree. For example:

  • Beverages tree is the only control on a tab labeled Beverages.
  • A section or subsection on an object page contains only one tree.

Use a title if you need the item count, toolbar, or variant management. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a title, such as Items.
Exception: If the surrounding area contains the title, and both the item count and toolbar can be added to the surrounding area, no additional title is needed.
Example: An object page (sub-)section contains only one tree. In this case, add the item count and the table toolbar to the (sub-)section header.

If you use a title, be sure to include the following:

  • A title text for the tree.
  • An (optional) item count using the following format: Title (Number of Items). For example, Items (17). Depending on the use case, either count all items or only leaves (for example, if nodes are mainly used for categorization).

Remove the item count in the title if there are zero items.

If possible, keep the toolbar sticky (sap.m.Tree, property: sticky).

Developer Hint
Assistive technologies (such as screen readers) use the title to create a hierarchical site map for faster navigation. In addition, screen readers use the title as the label for the tree.

If you don’t use a title (for example, to avoid repetition), make sure that the tree is connected to another meaningful on-screen text that can be used as a label for assistive technologies. You can do this using the method addAriaLabelledBy.

Title
Title
Title with item count
Title with item count

Loading Data

To indicate that the tree is currently loading items, use the busy state (sap.m.Tree, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Tree in busy state while loading data
Tree in busy state while loading data

Initial Display

Think of the initial expandable/collapsible state of a tree. If your structure contains many items on the root level, it might make sense to collapse the whole tree in its initial state.

In contrast, if the most important items are displayed on a deeper level (if, for example, the parent nodes are simply a kind of categorization), the tree should be expanded up to the first level where the most important items immediately appear.

Content

The standard tree item allows you to set one text per item. The text wraps, which can lead to items of different heights depending on the length of the text. An icon can be shown before the text. Try not to use the icons, and only use them if the meaning of the icons is clear and unambiguous. In addition, a counter can be placed on the right side of the item (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: counter).

The custom tree item allows you to use any combination of controls inside a tree, including editable controls (selection controls, Expand/Collapse buttons, navigation indicators, counters).

When designing a custom tree item, consider the responsive behavior. Take into account that all the controls you can add to a tree require additional width. Their position cannot be changed.

Standard tree item with all options
Standard tree item with all options

Content Formatting

To display object names with an ID, show the ID in brackets after the corresponding object name.

Place the ID in brackets after the corresponding object name
Place the ID in brackets after the corresponding object name

Try not to display an empty tree. If there is no way around this, provide instructions on how to fill the tree with data (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, properties: showNoData, noDataText).

 

Examples:

  • If a tree is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the tree with data.
  • If a tree is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    No filters set. To start, enter your search and filter settings and run the search.
  • If a tree is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No items found. Check the search and filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, no search is offered, only the search is offered).
  • You are using the live search (no Go button in the filter bar). In this case, leave out “run the search”.
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of search and filter settings).
Provide meaningful instructions within an empty tree
Provide meaningful instructions within an empty tree

Highlighting Items

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, you can display a highlight indicator in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to show:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry-specific or process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”.

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users exactly what is wrong. Make sure that you provide this information within the table row, ideally in the same color.

For details on the use of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.m.ListItemBase, property: highlight)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Item States

To show that an item has been modified, for example within the global edit flow, add the string (Modified) to the text of the item.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error, for example within the global edit flow, add the string (Contains errors) to the text of the item and highlight the row accordingly.

A modified item with an error
A modified item with an error

To show that an item is locked, add the string (Locked by [name]) to the text of the item.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in a draft state, add the string (Draft) to the text of the item.

Item in draft state
Item in draft state

Show only one state at any one time.

Actions

To trigger actions on items, show the actions on a toolbar above the tree. Do not offer action triggering on multiple items if the tree is expected to have fewer than 10 items in most cases.
The following actions on single items must always be in-line:

Delete: Use “Delete” mode (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This places a delete  button at the end of each item.

Items with Delete button
Items with Delete button

Navigation: Use the “Navigation” item type (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This places a navigation indicator at the end of the corresponding items. Use this to navigate to a new page containing item details.

Items with navigation indicator
Items with navigation indicator

Edit: Use the “Detail” item type (sap.m.TreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail). This places an edit   icon at the end of the corresponding items.

Edit button
Edit button

From these three actions (delete, navigation, and edit), you can combine delete and edit, or delete and navigation. Edit and navigation cannot be combined.

To trigger actions that are independent of the selection, show the actions on a toolbar above the tree. For example: AddCollapse AllExpand All, …

To trigger a default action on the entire item, use the “Active” or “DetailAndActive” item type (sap.m.TreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active). Active items trigger an event when clicked, which can be handled by apps, for example, to open a dialog. Selection and expanding/collapsing a node does not trigger the event, but are handled by the tree. Do not use this for navigation, to switch the line item to an edit state, or to delete the item.
Active can be combined with edit and delete, but not with navigation. Do not combine active with single selection master.

Add Items

For adding items, place an Add or Create text button on the toolbar.

  • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
  • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.

Show new items as the first item of the tree or node:

  • If nothing is selected, add the new item to the root.
  • If a single node is selected, add the new item to the selected node.
  • If a single leaf is selected, add the new item as a child of this leaf. The original selected item becomes a node.

If your tree doesn’t support adding items to the root, selected node, or selected leaf, disable Create or Add for the corresponding levels.

Disable Create or Add if more than one item is selected.

For more details, see guidelines for managing objects (including subarticles).

Enabling/Disabling Actions

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection:

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that tells the user how many items will be affected. Let users choose whether to apply the action anyway or cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

If the action was applied and the items are still available, keep them selected.

Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection
Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection

Editing Items

To edit items, add an Edit button either in-line on the toolbar above the tree. Triggering the button either opens a dialog or navigates to an editable details page.

For mass editing:

  • Provide multiselection (sap.m.Tree/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).
  • Provide an Edit button on the toolbar above the tree.
  • If several items are selected, triggering the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

For more details, see mass editing.

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar).

Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. Also, because there is no generic keyboard interaction, drag and drop isn’t accessible. Moreover, drag and drop is not available on all browsers. For these reasons, offer drag and drop only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within a tree, use the following options:

  • For dropping items as a child, use whole nodes as drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.On).
  • For dropping items on the same level, use the space between items as drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between).
  • If you want to allow users to drop items as a child or sibling, offer both drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.OnOrBetween).

This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Do not combine rearranging items within one level and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

Moving items from one node to another can be combined with sorting without any issues.

Drop targets in between items
Drop targets in between items

Visible Alternatives to Drag and Drop

Depending on the functionality you need, use one or more of the following alternatives:

  • To move items up or down within a node:
    Use the  Move Up and  Move Down buttons on the toolbar. These buttons move the selected items until the first selected item can’t be moved up or the last selected item can’t be moved down any further.
    Depending on your tree, this can make sense for both leaves and nodes, only for leaves, or only for nodes. When moving a node, move the whole node and (if applicable) all its children up or down to the next position within the parent node.
    Always make sure that when the user moves an item in one direction and then moves it back, the order is the same as it was before.
    Do not combine the option to move items up and down with sorting.
  • To move items to another node:
    Use Copy and Paste buttons on the toolbar.
    Alternatively, offer a Move To button. Clicking Move To opens a dialog that shows all the nodes of the tree, but no leaves. Selecting an item in this dialog closes the dialog and moves the corresponding items to the selected node.
  • To change the level of an item:
    In some trees, such as document structures, users can change the level of an item without affecting the level of parent or child items. In this case, use left and right arrow buttons (   ).

Filtering

What exactly needs to stay or be removed is highly dependent on the kind of structure and data your tree displays. For many trees, the following approach works well if you want to apply filters only to the leaves of a tree:

  • Remove all leaves that don’t fit the filter criteria
  • Remove empty nodes

If you also apply filters to nodes, keep the following in mind:

  • A node may or may not fit the filter criteria.
  • A node can contain items (nodes and/or leaves) that fit the filter criteria.

Because of this, the results might contain more nodes than those that are relevant for the filter criteria.

Developer Hint
The tree control itself has no influence on the filter result. It sends a filter request and displays whatever comes back. Make sure that the result set is meaningful.
[/vc_row_inner]

Sorting

Before you start, ask yourself if sorting is meaningful in your tree. If so, decide on a meaningful default sort order.

If sorting is meaningful, is it meaningful on all levels? Or does the tree structure need to be stable? In the latter case, sort only leaves, but not nodes.

The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order. Use a meaningful sort order. For example:

  • Sort text alphabetically
  • Sort numbers by their value
  • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
    • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
    • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
    • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
    • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.

Export to Spreadsheet

On the table toolbar, apps can provide a menu button for exporting the tree data to a spreadsheet. For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button
'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Search

A search is a means of accessing information quickly. If an amount of data is too large for users to find something just by scanning through it, you should consider providing a search function.

Search field
Search field

Usage

Use a search field (sap.m.SearchField) if you want to enable users to enter text to search for information. The search field is also the control of choice for filtering down a given amount of information.

Responsiveness

When suggestions are turned on, the suggestion list displays differently depending on the device type.

Size S (Smart Phones)

Clicking or tapping the search field opens a new full screen dialog in which items can be selected from a list of suggestions.

Size S
Size S

Size M (Tablets)

Suggestions are shown below the search field.

Size M
Size M

Size L (Desktops)

Suggestions are shown below the search field.

Size L
Size L

Types

SAP Fiori comes with two different search types.

  1. The manual search is triggered explicitly after the user enters text in the search field and clicks or taps the Search button or presses the Enter key.
  2. The live search (also known as “incremental search” or “search-as-you-type”) is triggered by each character that the user enters or deletes. There is a default delay of 400 ms before sending the search data to the back end. This ensures better performance and optimizes user experience. 

Queries that are entered are used to search the back-end data for term matches (not case-sensitive). While a live search uses a “contains” approach, a manual search uses a “starts with” approach. “Contains” means that the result needs to match the query only partly to be a valid result. “Starts with” means that full terms of the result need to start with the entered query to be visualized.

Layout

The search input field (or search box) consists of two parts:

  1. The text input, which is left-aligned. Initially, the field shows a placeholder (Search). As soon as the user enters a character, this prompt text disappears. It appears again if the user deletes the entry.
  2. If a manual search is to be implemented, a search button with a magnifier icon is placed on the right side of this input control. The user clicks or taps this button to trigger the search. In live searches, the magnifier icon is also placed here, but it functions more like an additional indicator to signify that this is a search input field. It also functions as an explicit search button if the user wants to search again for a query that has already been entered.

All item attributes defined by the app development team are searched. When the results are displayed, the items found do not necessarily have to show the attribute through which the item was found. The results are displayed in the same list that contained the original item set. Initial grouping and the order of the list are not affected by the search.

When the split screen is used, the search field appears at the top of the master list. In full screen mode, the search field is placed at the top of the page.

Behavior and Interaction

Entering a Search Term

Search terms can be entered easily into the input field. The search box then displays all full-text search terms. There is no line break and no truncation if the query is longer than the input field. Results might also be displayed that do not match the query in their title or subtitle. This might be because details can also be searched for. The user can see the matching terms in the specific details section.

Deleting a Search Term

The user can click or tap the “X” icon  ) button to remove the text from the field. In the case of the live search, this also resets the search. In a manual search, deleting the search term and then triggering the search resets the search results.

Refreshing

If the Refresh button is available, the user can update the list without triggering a new search. This is usually needed when backend data changes quickly and often.

If the currently selected item is no longer available after the list has been refreshed, the next item in the line is selected. If no next item is available, the first item in the line should be selected next.

Search field with refresh
Search field with refresh

On touch devices, the Refresh icon is not visible in the search field. In this case, Pull Down to Refresh is used instead. The Pull Down to Refresh arrow icon is animated and spins to signal that the user should release it.

Information
For information on how to manage leading and treading whitespace (blanks) when copying and pasting text into input controls, please see removing leading and trailing whitespace.

Properties

The following methods are important.

For the live search:

  • attachLiveChange(oData?fnFunctionoListener?) Attach event handler fnFunction to the ‘liveChange’ event of this sap.m.SearchField.
  • detachLiveChange(fnFunctionoListener) Detach event handler fnFunction from the ‘liveChange’ event of this sap.m.SearchField.
  • fireLiveChange(mArguments?) Fire event liveChange to attached listeners.

For the manual search:

  • attachSearch(oData?fnFunctionoListener?) Attach event handler fnFunction to the ‘search’ event of this sap.m.SearchField.
  • detachSearch(fnFunctionoListener) Detach event handler fnFunction from the ‘search’ event of this sap.m.SearchField.
  • fireSearch(mArguments?) Fire event search to attached listeners.

If a Refresh button is needed:

To show the Search button:

To ensure the focus is set to input:

Guidelines

  • Implement the live search whenever possible.
  • Use a manual search only if the amount of data is too large and if your app would otherwise run into performance issues.
  • Show an appropriate prompt text:Search if queries are sent to all connected services, or Search In: if the search is limited to a certain source or providing service.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

List

In SAP Fiori, we distinguish between tables and lists. Both usually contain homogeneous data, but lists generally have rather basic data, whereas the data in tables tends to be more complex. Lists are mostly used in the master list for a master-detail scenario using the flexible column layout, as well as in popovers or dialogs. For certain use cases, lists can also be used in the dynamic page layout.

Usage

Use the list if:

  • You want to display a homogeneous set of basic data.
  • You need to sort, group, or filter simple datasets.
  • You need to display a single-level hierarchy rather than using a complex tree table to support this simple use case.

Do not use the list if:

  • You want to manage complex datasets that need to be extensively sorted, grouped, filtered, or edited. In this case, use a table.
  • You work with complex hierarchies. In this case, use a tree.

Responsiveness

The list is like a layout container. You can change its width, but you must also ensure that the items contained in the list adapt whenever the list is resized.

All list item variants available in SAP Fiori already adapt to the respective screen size.

List Item Variants

The list contains various list items. These items can be of various types depending on the use case and on the content they have. SAPUI5 already provides the most common list items in SAP Fiori in the form of controls, although custom list items can also be created if necessary.

All the available list item types behave responsively and adapt to changing screen sizes out of the box. Most of them use truncation if size becomes too limited, since they are usually used to navigate to the item details. For custom list items, you can also wrap the texts, if required.

Object List Item

The object list item is the list item variant used most frequently in SAP Fiori applications. Consisting of a title, key figure, attributes, and a status, it contains the most important information about an object.

The space available for the attributes and status is limited as it should only show crucial information that allows the user to decide which items should be dealt with first.

All essential information about an object is usually provided when the user navigates to the item details.

For more information, see object list item.

Object list items
Object list items

Standard List Item

The standard list item is used for less complex entries, such as when the user selects an item in a dialog. This list item contains an optional image, a title, description, and a single info text (which can contain semantic information).

For more information, see standard list item.

Standard list items
Standard list items

Display List Item

The display list item is the simplest form of a list item and is only capable of showing a label and values. It is seldom used.

For more information, see display list item.

Display list items
Display list items

Action List Item

The action list item allows various actions to be triggered in a dialog. The action list item is not used in the content area.

For more information, see action list item.

Action list item
Action list item

Feed List Item

The feed list item is mainly used in feeds and notes.

For more information, see feed list item.

Feed with feed list items
Feed with feed list items

Input List Item

The input list item allows the user to enter data in a list item. It is seldom used in SAP Fiori apps as forms are usually the preferable method for entering data.

For more information, see input list item.

Input list item
Input list item

Components

The list control comes with the following main properties:

Header

The header text contains the title of the list. It is usually only used when the list is in the content area.

Footer

The footer text is the last entry in the list, and as such, it scrolls away with the content. Therefore, this property is also seldom used.

Lazy Loading

Like the table, the list also allows lazy loading. The “growing” list property is used for this purpose.

List with header and footer
List with header and footer

Empty List

Avoid empty lists. If necessary, provide instructions on how to fill the list with data (sap.m.List/ sap.m.ListBase, properties: noDataText, showNoData).

Examples:

  • If a list is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the list with data.
  • If a list is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    No filters set. To start, enter your search and filter settings and run the search.
  • If a list is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No items found. Check the search and filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, no search is offered, only the search is offered).
  • You are using the live search (no Go button in the filter bar). In this case, leave out “run the search”.
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of search and filter settings).
Empty list
Empty list

Count

List items can have a count, which is located on the far right of a row. You can use the count in simple lists, such as those that contain standard list items, to indicate how many subitems the user can expect when navigating to the item.

Standard list items with counter
Standard list items with counter

Read/Unread

You can set an indicator to highlight unread items, making it easier for the user to discover them (property: showUnread = true). If you set this indicator, all texts for the unread items are shown in bold font.

By default, this indicator is switched off, and all list items are displayed in normal font.

Display list item with read and unread items
Display list item with read and unread items

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, you can display a highlight indicator in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to show:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry-specific or process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”.

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users exactly what is wrong. Make sure that you provide this information within the table row, ideally in the same color.

For details on the use of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.m.ListItemBase, property: highlight)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Behavior and Interaction

There are several ways to interact with the list and its list items:

Line Item Level

Scroll

The height of the list is defined by the number of items it contains. It does not have its own scroll container, but is scrolled together with the app.

If the list works in a “growing” mode, it only loads a few items at first. Additional items are only loaded (and rendered) on request. The “request” can either be triggered by scrolling (preferred), or by clicking the More button.

When the user scrolls, the title and the filter info bar can stick to the top of the surrounding layout container (sap.m.List, property: sticky).

Information
The “sticky” feature comes with some limitations:

  • It is not available on all browsers. In non-supporting browsers, the corresponding areas are not fixed on top of the surrounding layout container while scrolling.
  • Certain layout containers suppress the sticky behavior, such as the grid layout. The same happens if the list is placed within the object page.
  • If the focus is set to a sticky area, the list is automatically scrolled to top.

Sticky title
Sticky title

Mode

The list can have several modes. The respective property (Mode) allows the following selection methods:

  • None
  • SingleSelectMaster (used to pick one item with no additional indicator, as in the master list for a master-detail scenario with the flexible column layout)
  • SingleSelectLeft (used to pick one item using a radio button on the far left)
  • MultiSelect (used to pick several items from the list using checkboxes on the far left). The Shift key can be used to select a range.
  • Delete (used to delete items from the list using a delete indicator on the far right)
Developer Hint
In multiple selection mode, users can (de)select all items using the shortcut CTRL+A. This only affects items that have already been loaded to the front-end server. All other items are not (de)selected before they are loaded (for example, items added via lazy loading with growingScrollToLoad). This conflicts with the guideline that all items the user can reach by scrolling must be (de)selected.

To process all items, listen to the selectionChange event and to its flag selectAll. This indicates whether CTRL+A was triggered. As soon as an action is triggered, process the items accordingly. Depending on the number of items, consider processing them in the back end.

List with explicit single selection
List with explicit single selection
List with multiple selection
List with multiple selection
List with delete mode
List with delete mode

Grouping

List items can be grouped. The group header is a visually separate line at the top of the items it groups. It does not currently provide an interaction of its own.

Grouped list
Grouped list

Type

The list item type defines the interaction of the list item, which is accompanied by a visual cue.

The items can be one of the following:

  • Active (click event; cursor changes to indicate that)
  • Inactive (no click event; cursor does not change)
  • Navigation (a small arrow appears on the far right, indicating that clicking would navigate)
  • Detail (a pencil appears on the far right, indicating that something can be changed. The user can only click on the pencil.)
  • Detail and active (same as “detail”, but the item itself is also clickable)

The example shows how all these types are visualized.

All list item types: inactive, detail, navigation, active, detail and active
All list item types: inactive, detail, navigation, active, detail and active

Swipe

You can provide a swipe feature (SwipeDirection) for quickly approving or deleting items without having to look at the details. It must only be provided as an additional feature, and not be the only way of performing the action.

List with swipe action
List with swipe action

Context Menu

The context menu can be triggered for the list or per item.

It gives users an alternative way of modifying the focused elements by giving access to context-specific functions.

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

List - context menu
List - context menu

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a list or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.m.ListBase, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Styles

The list items can have a header when they are used in a content area. It is also technically possible to change the background of the header and of the list itself. Depending on the use case, the lines between the list items and around the list can be shown or hidden.

The property Show Separators (All, Inner, None) allows only the outer lines (Inner) or all the lines (None) to be hidden when the list is used as a more structural element within a content area.

List without separators
List without separators

Guidelines

Text Length

When you use the list in the first column of the flexible column layout, keep the texts as short as possible and only as long as necessary. If you expect large numbers, use formatting instead.

Custom List Items

If none of the list items provided suits the requirements of your app, you can also create a custom list. If you choose this option, ensure that your custom list item is responsive when resized.

When creating custom list items, take the following guidelines into account, as needed:

Radio Button

Only use radio buttons if they are absolutely necessary. One example would be if you want to distinguish single selection from navigation. This is a rare case in which visible radio buttons for single selection are allowed.

Actions

To trigger actions on single items, show the actions on a toolbar above the list. Do not offer actions on multiple items if the list is expected to have fewer than 10 items in most cases.

The following actions on single items must always be inline:

  • Delete: Use “Delete” mode (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This places a Delete  button at the end of each item.
  • Navigation: Use the “Navigation” item type (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This places a navigation indicator at the end of the corresponding items. Use this to navigate to a new page containing item details.
  • Edit: Use the “Detail” item type (sap.m.TreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail). This places an Edit   icon at the end of the corresponding items.

You can combine delete and edit actions, or delete and navigation actions. However, edit and navigation actions cannot be combined.

To trigger actions that are independent of the selection, show the actions on a toolbar above the list. For example: AddCollapse AllExpand All, … .

To trigger a default action on the entire item, use the “Active” or “DetailAndActive” item type (sap.m.TreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active). When clicked, active items trigger an event that can be handled by the app (for example, to open a dialog). Selection of items and expanding/collapsing a node do not trigger the event, and are handled by the tree. Do not use the active item type for navigation, to switch the line item to an edit state, or to delete the item.

Active can be combined with edit and delete, but not with navigation. Do not combine active with the single selection master.

Add Items

For adding items, place an Add or Create text button on the table toolbar.

  • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
  • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.

Show new items as the first item of the table, with a visual highlight at the beginning of the row.

For more information, see the guidelines for managing objects (including subarticles).

Enabling/Disabling Actions

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection:

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user how many items will be affected. Let users choose whether to apply the action anyway or cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

If the action was applied and the items are still available, keep them selected.

Message for action which applies to a part of a selection
Message for action which applies to a part of a selection

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar).

Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, it is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within the list, use drop targets that are between items (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between). This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Drop targets in between items
Drop targets in between items

Do not combine rearranging items and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure that there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

When combining rearranging items with grouping, be aware that moving items to another group also means that a value of the dropped item changes: because grouping is based on values, the dropped item needs to take on the corresponding value of the target group. If this is not wanted, do not allow users to rearrange items in grouped lists.

 

Example:

A list is grouped by availability. An item is moved from the group “Not Available” to the group “In Stock”. In this case, the moved item needs to change its availability to “In Stock” to match the target group. If changing the value doesn’t make sense, only allow users to rearrange the items within the same group, or don’t allow rearranging at all.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing

Export to Spreadsheet

Apps can provide a menu button for exporting list data to a spreadsheet (for example, on the relevant toolbar). For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button
'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Color Palette Popover

The color palette popover encapsulates the color palette and the color picker within a popover. You can use it to offer color selectors on toolbars (for example, triggered by a button). The popover allows users to select one of up to predefined 15 colors, or define any other color in a second step if none of the predefined colors fit.

The color palette popover is also used inside the rich text editor for changing text and background colors.

Color Palette Popover
Color Palette Popover

Usage

Use the color palette popover if:

  • Selecting a color from a predefined palette is the typical case.
  • Users may sometimes need to define their own colors, but in most cases a predefined color or default color is sufficient.
  • Selecting a color is needed as a toolbar action. In this case, use a button or menu button to trigger the color palette popover.

Do not use the color palette popover if:

  • You want to let users select a color directly on the page (for example, inside a form). Use the color palette or the color picker instead.
  • Users will nearly always define a color of their own, and rarely use the predefined palette. In this case, use the color picker popover instead.

Responsiveness

The color palette popover supports cozy and compact content densities. On a phone, the color palette popover turns into a full-screen dialog.

Size S
Size S
Size M
Size M
Size L
Size L

Components

The color palette popover consists of:

  • A link to select the default color (optional)
Color palette popover with default color selection
Color palette popover with default color selection
Color palette popover containing only a color palette
Color palette popover containing only a color palette
  • A link that opens a color picker in a dialog (optional). The color picker popover comes in three flavors: simplified, default, and large (property: displayMode). For more information on the three display options, see color picker popover types.
Color palette popover with the option to set any color
Color palette popover with the option to set any color
'More Colors...' opens a color picker dialog
'More Colors...' opens a color picker dialog
You can also display a simplified version of the color picker.
You can also display a simplified version of the color picker.

Behavior and Interaction

To select a color, users can:

  • Click or tap the Default Color link.
  • Select a color in the predefined color palette.
  • Click or tap More Colors… to select any other color. This opens the color picker.

On a keyboard, users can navigate within the color palette popover using the arrow keys. Pressing SPACE or ENTER selects a color or triggers a link.

As soon as a color has been selected, the color palette popover closes automatically.

Guidelines

  • To trigger the color palette popover, use a button or a value help icon from an input field.
  • Show the selected color in another place (for example, as a color value inside the triggering input field). The color palette popover closes as soon as a color is selected.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Color Picker Popover

The color picker popover consists of a color picker within a popover. You can use it to offer color selectors on toolbars (for example, triggered by a button). The color picker popover allows users to select any color.

Color picker popover
Color picker popover

Usage

Use the color picker popover if:

  • Selecting any color freely is the typical use case (for example, for user-created content).
  • There is no need for or benefit from a predefined color palette.
  • Selecting a color is needed as a toolbar action. In this case, use a button or menu button to trigger the color picker popover.

Do not use the color picker popover if:

  • You want to let users select a color directly on the page (for example, inside a form). Use the color palette instead.
  • A predefined palette is beneficial. Use a color palette popover instead.

Responsiveness

The color picker popover supports cozy and compact content densities. On a phone, the color picker popover turns into a full-screen dialog.

Size S
Size S
Size M
Size M
Size L
Size L

Layout

The color picker popover consists of a popover containing a color picker and a toolbar.

The color picker consists of the following elements:

  • The color picker box for setting lightness and saturation
  • Sliders for setting the hue and transparency (“alpha channel”)
  • Form elements for:
    • Displaying the current and new color settings
    • Setting the color as a hexadecimal value
    • Setting the color as red/green/blue (RGB) value (0 to 255 each)
    • Setting the color as hue/saturation/lightness (HSL) value (hue: 0 to 360 degrees, saturation: 0% to 100%, lightness: 0% to 100%)
    • Setting the transparency (“alpha channel”) value of the color (0.00 for full transparency to 1.00 for opaque)

The toolbar contains two buttons: Submit (emphasized) and Cancel.

Schematic visualization of NAME
Schematic visualization of NAME

Types

The color picker popover comes in 3 flavors:

  • Simplified: The simplified color picker offers settings for hue, saturation, and lightness, but not for the alpha channel. It shows the current and new color. Text input is only possible for hex values.
'Simplified' color picker popover
'Simplified' color picker popover
  • Default: The default color picker allows all settings. It displays input fields either for red / green / blue / alpha or for hue / saturation / lightness / alpha. End users can switch between both sets of input fields.
'Default' color picker popover
'Default' color picker popover
  • Large: The large color picker allows all settings and displays all fields at the same time.
'Large' color picker popover
'Large' color picker popover

Behavior and Interaction

Colors can be selected using mouse/touch or a keyboard:

  • Mouse/touch: Users select a combination of saturation and lightness in the color picker box (left click, tap, click and drag, tap and drag). Hue and alpha values are selected with sliders.
  • Keyboard: The tab key is used to set the focus on the sliders and input fields. Values are entered using the corresponding input controls. The sliders react on arrow keys, page up / page down keys, as well as on home and end keys. The color picker box is not keyboard-enabled.

The Submit button applies the new color and closes color picker popover. The Cancel button closes the color picker popover without applying the new color.

Guidelines

  • To trigger the color picker popover, use a button or a value help icon from an input field.
  • Show the selected color in another place (for example, as a color value inside the triggering input field). The color picker popover closes as soon as a color is selected.
  • Use the simplest color picker popover type that does the job.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Avatar

The avatar is a control for displaying images. These can be user profiles, user initials, placeholder images, or business-related images, such as product pictures.

Usage

Use the avatar if:

  • You want to display an image, initials, or placeholder for a user.
  • You want to display standardized images for business-related content (such as products, parts, product and company logos, ad campaign images, …).
  • You want to display product placeholder images.

Do not use the avatar if:

  • You want to include an image for any other use case. Instead, use the image control.
  • You want to display pictures in a carousel. Instead, use the carousel control.
Examples of a user image, user initials, and standard user placeholder icon
Examples of a user image, user initials, and standard user placeholder icon
Potential product image and product image placeholder
Potential product image and product image placeholder

Responsiveness

The avatar control is adaptive and has five predefined sizes. These are the same for both compact and cozy form factors:

 

Size rem Use for images in…
XS 2 rem Table list items
Card list items
S 3 rem Card headers
Card list items
M 4 rem App headers for small screen sizes
L 5 rem App headers for normal screen sizes
XL 7 rem App headers for large screen sizes

If your use case requires it, you can also set a custom size.

Predefined sizes: XS, S, M, L, XL
Predefined sizes: XS, S, M, L, XL
Predefined sizes: XS, S, M, L, XL
Predefined sizes: XS, S, M, L, XL

Image Fit

You can use the imageFitType property to specify how images fit to the avatar. There are two options: Cover (default) and Contain.

Cover

The size of the image is scaled up to completely cover the control area. As a result, parts of the image may be outside the shape.

Use the Cover fit type if the focal point is in the center of the image.

Contain

The image is scaled down to fit into the control area. The entire image is displayed, but might not fully fill the shape. In this case, the control displays a default background color. The image itself is always centered inside the shape.

Use the Contain fit type for product pictures that need to be displayed in full.

Product image with the fit type 'cover' (left) and 'contain' (right)
Product image with the fit type 'cover' (left) and 'contain' (right)

Types

Avatar – User Image, Initials, or Placeholder

An avatar is a visual representation of a user in the digital space. Usually, an avatar displays the user in one of the following ways:

  • A user photo
  • The user’s initials
  • A placeholder icon instead of the user’s personal data (photo or initials)

Always display avatars in a circle. This ensures that all users are represented equally on the user interface.

Initials

User image, user initials, and standard user placeholder icon
User image, user initials, and standard user placeholder icon

The initials stand for the first name(s) and last name(s) of a person – for example, JD for Jane Doe, or MvV for Marjolein van Veen. Which name comes first depends on the language-specific settings.

Initials can have up to three alphabetical characters (A-Z, a-z). If more than 3 initials are required for longer names (such as Anna María Agustí Suárez), the gender-neutral placeholder icon is displayed instead. The placeholder is also used if the three letters don’t fit into the circle (for example, WWW).

Some languages don’t build on an alphabet, or don’t use initials at all. In such cases, the gender-neutral person icon is displayed instead.

User initials with 1, 2, and 3 characters
User initials with 1, 2, and 3 characters

Business Images

Business images display a product, company, object, logo, or other business-related content.

Always use a square for business images.

Examples of product images
Examples of product images

Placeholder Images

Placeholder images are used for both avatar and business images when no other image is available.

  • The default placeholder for an avatar is a gender-neutral person icon inside a circle.
  • The default placeholder for a business image is a neutral product icon inside a square.
Default person and product placeholders
Default person and product placeholders

You can specify your own the default placeholder icon for business images.

Always replace the default product icon if there is a more suitable icon for your use case and industry.

Product placeholder images with custom icons
Product placeholder images with custom icons

Placeholder Background

By default, the placeholder background color is set to blue (accent color 6). However, to add more visual variety to the UI, you can change the background color using one of the following options:

  • Accent colors – You can specify one of 10 different accent colors as the placeholder background color.
  • Random color – The control automatically picks a random color from the accent color palette.

All accent colors can be themed.

User initials in all ten accent colors
User initials in all ten accent colors

Guidelines

  • If you use a custom avatar size with initials or icons:
    • Make sure that the font size is consistent with the size of the control itself.
    • If your custom size is between two predefined sizes, use the font size for the smaller predefined size.
      Example: If your avatar is 5.5 rem (between sizes L and XL), use the font size for size L (2 rem).
  • For accessibility purposes, provide an alternative text for each avatar image in case the image is not available or can’t be displayed.
  • Optimize high-resolution images to avoid unnecessarily large files. Large image files can severely impede page performance.
Do
Custom placeholder size with appropriate custom font size
Custom placeholder size with appropriate custom font size
Don't
Custom placeholder size, but icon is too small
Custom placeholder size, but icon is too small

Styles

You can add a very subtle border to the avatar (property: ShowBorder).

Images with optional borders
Images with optional borders

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Panel

The panel is a container for grouping and displaying information. It can be collapsed to save space on the screen.

Usage

Use the panel if:

  • You need to group or display information.
  • You want to give users the option of hiding this information.
  • You want to show additional information on demand (for example, a panel could show optional input fields for an advanced search).

Do not use the panel if:

  • You are designing an object page. Never use panels in the object page content area.

Example

Responsiveness

If the width of the panel is set to 100% (default), the panel and its children are resized responsively, depending on its parent container.

Layout

  • The panel control is a container for controls.
  • The panel can have a solid or semi-transparent background.
  • The panel always includes a header.
  • An infobar can be added to the panel to show extra information.

Examples

Panel with a title toolbar
Panel with a title toolbar
Panel with a title toolbar and infobar
Panel with a title toolbar and infobar

Types

There are two types of panels: fixed and expandable.

Fixed Panel

Fixed panels are useful for grouping custom content. They include headers and info toolbars.

Fixed panel
Fixed panel

Expandable Panel

Expandable panels are much like fixed panels, except their content can be expanded and collapsed (including the info toolbar, if available).

Components

A panel consists of a title bar with a header text or header toolbar, an info toolbar (optional), and a content area.

The title inside the title bar can be added by using the “headerText” property. If you use the “headerToolbar” aggregation, the “headerText” property is ignored. With the “headerToolbar” aggregation, you can add a toolbar with any toolbar content inside the title bar. For example, if you need a title text on the left and some action buttons on the right, add a title to the toolbar’s content aggregation, toolbar spacer, and then your buttons.

Header toolbar of a panel
Header toolbar of a panel

Behavior and Interaction

Expand/Collapse

  • When the panel is expandable, an arrow icon (pointing to the right) appears in front of the header. Click this icon to expand the panel.
  • When the animation is activated, expand/collapse uses a smooth animation to open or close the content area.
  • When the panel expands, the arrow icon rotates 90 degrees clockwise.
  • When the panel collapses, the arrow icon rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise.
  • The buttons in the header can be clicked separately.

Overflow Scrolling (Content Area)

  • By setting the height to use the default property “auto”, the height of the content area will automatically be adjusted to match the height of its content.
  • When the height of the panel is set to a fixed size, the content area can be scrolled through.

Panel With Scrolling

Panel with a fixed height (scrolling activated)
Panel with a fixed height (scrolling activated)

Panel Without Scrolling

Panel with auto height (no scrolling)
Panel with auto height (no scrolling)

Guidelines

  • Nesting two or more panels is not recommended.
  • Do not stack too many panels on one page.

Exceptions

If you add a header toolbar (sap.m.Toolbar) via aggregations, it will overwrite the “headerText” property.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

  • No links

Implementation

  • No links

Date Picker

The date picker lets users select a localized date using touch, mouse, or keyboard input. It consists of two parts: the date input field and the date picker.

Use this control if the user needs to enter a single date or a date range. The control also allows users to navigate directly from one month or year to another.

Usage

Use the date picker if:

  • You need a range and know that your user is a power user who has to input lots of data. If the keyboard is the primary device used for navigating the app, use two input fields. This allows the user to quickly jump from field to field. By selecting a date in one of the fields, the other field should know what is selected and jump to the same selection.

Responsiveness

The date picker provides responsive behavior that allows for simple operation on all devices. It is smaller in compact mode and provides a touch-friendly size in cozy mode.

Clicking the date picker button opens the popover in full screen. To close it, the user can select a date (which triggers the close event), or click Cancel without selecting a date. Clicking the date input field allows the user to type and does not open the date picker popover.

Date picker on a smartphone
Date picker on a smartphone
Date picker on a desktop
Date picker on a desktop

Components

The date picker has two components: the date input field and the date picker button. On all devices users can either use the input field to type a date or use the date picker button to open the date picker calendar.

Date picker with input field and button
Date picker with input field and button

Date Input Field

In the input field, the user can enter a date directly or select it using the date picker. The system validates the entry and provides the user with feedback. You can also show placeholder text in the field.

Date Picker

With the date picker, the user can see a day view, month view, year view, or year ranges.

The current day and the selected date are highlighted. The calendar week is also visible in the day view. The calendar closes when a final day is selected. The user can click the arrows to navigate to the previous and the next day, month, or year view, depending on the current view.

The selected date is shown with a blue background. The current day is indicated with a purple border and owns the focus.

Date picker with a selected date and the current date
Date picker with a selected date and the current date
Clickable areas of the date picker
Clickable areas of the date picker

You can change the default focus “today” to another date. This can save users several clicks when they create events. For an event end date, for example, the focus should propose a date in the future (after the start date).

Use case-specific focus date
Use case-specific focus date

Month and Year Views

The month and year views can be used separately in a month or year picker. The year ranges are related to the year view and are not used separately. Selecting a year range navigates back to the year view, not the day view.

Month view in the date picker
Month view in the date picker
Year view in the date picker
Year view in the date picker
Year ranges in the date picker
Year ranges in the date picker

Footer

You can add a footer with OK and Cancel buttons to the date picker popover. However, we advise against this unless it’s very important that the user can pick multiple values (day, month, year) without closing the popover.

The default and recommended behavior is to close the date picker popover upon selection of the day (or month/year for the month and year pickers).

Date picker with footer
Date picker with footer

Behavior and Interaction

Selecting a Date

The user selects a date by clicking the date. After the user selects a day, the calendar closes and the date appears in the date input field.

Date selection
Date selection

Clicking the arrow shows the next day, month, or year view.

Navigating to the next month
Navigating to the next month

If the current month is clicked, the view changes to the month view and the user can change the month.

Switching to month view
Switching to month view

By clicking on a month, the user changes the month and the view changes to the day view.

Selecting another month
Selecting another month

The user can similarly change the year. By clicking the current year, the view changes to the year view. After the user selects a year, the view changes back to the day view.

Switching to year view
Switching to year view

After the user selects a year, the view changes back to the day view. The date in the date input field stays the same until the user selects a new date.

Selecting another year
Selecting another year

Styles

Value States

The date picker supports the following value states: error, warning, success, neutral, and information. You can display a value state text for error, warning, and information states to provide hints for the user.

For more information on how to use the different semantic states, see How to Use Semantic Colors.

Error state with error value state text
Error state with error value state text
Warning state with warning value state text
Warning state with warning value state text
Information state with information value state text (for example, to indicate a recommendation)
Information state with information value state text (for example, to indicate a recommendation)

Guidelines

Date Formats

Long Date Format

Use the long date format for master list/object list item/title and object header/title. Here are some examples:

  • English (US): January 16, 2022
  • German (DE): 16. Januar 2022
  • Danish (DK): 16. Jan. 2022

Short Date Format

Use the short date format for master list/object list item/list of object attributes if space is a concern. For example, you might need to save space if there is a label with the date. Here are some examples of the short date format:

  • English (US): 1/16/22
  • German (DE): 16.01.22
  • Japanese (JP): 22/01/16

Relative and Medium Date Format

If appropriate, use a relative format for master list/object list item/list of object status. For example: today, 1 day ago, 2 days ago, and so on up to 6 days ago. After 6 days, use an absolute date with the medium format.

Use the absolute date with medium format in the corresponding object header in the details area. Do not use the relative format here.

Responsive Table

If screen space is at a premium (for example, if there are too many columns), use the short date format in table cells. Otherwise use the medium format.

If you need to display the weekday, use the full format. For example:

  • English (US): Sunday, January 16, 2022
  • German (DE): Sonntag, 16. Januar 2022
  • French (FR): dimanche 16 janvier 2022

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Filter Bar

The filter bar filters item lists and tables according to various filter criteria. You can use it for both simple and complex lists, regardless of their size. To handle complex lists with multiple filters, the filter bar provides predefined, customizable filter sets (variants).

Filter bar within the dynamic page
Filter bar within the dynamic page
Information
The filter bar now supports the dynamic page. Do not use the filter bar in the sap.m.Page for new SAP Fiori apps. For more information on the differences, see the filter bar guideline for version 1.52.

Responsiveness

Because tables appear in many apps, from simple to complex ones, the filter bar needs to run on all form factors. While the main concept of the filter bar remains stable across the devices, its responsive design adapts the control’s behavior to match the ability of each device.

Size S (Smartphones)

Expanded filter bar (size S)
Expanded filter bar (size S)
Collapsed filter bar (size S)
Collapsed filter bar (size S)
Filter dialog (size S)
Filter dialog (size S)

Size M (Tablet)

Expanded filter bar (size M)
Expanded filter bar (size M)
Collapsed filter bar (size M)
Collapsed filter bar (size M)
Filter dialog (size M)
Filter dialog (size M)

Size L/XL (Desktops)

Expanded filter bar (size L/XL)
Expanded filter bar (size L/XL)
Collapsed filter bar (size L/XL)
Collapsed filter bar (size L/XL)
Filter dialog (size L/XL)
Filter dialog (size L/XL)

Layout

Filter Dialog

The filters inside the filter dialog are arranged in a vertical linear layout. If filter groups are maintained, the filters are visually grouped in sections, with the filter group name at the top. A link at the end of each group allows the user to add or remove filters from that group. The link text is Change Filters if at least one filter is activated, indicating that filters can be added or removed. If no filters have been set for the group, the link text is More Filters, indicating that more filters can be added.
The first group is called “Basic” and contains the preset filters that come with the app. A checkbox next to each filter enables the user to show the corresponding filter on the expanded filter bar. If the checkbox is selected, the filter is shown on the expanded filter bar. If the checkbox is not selected, the filter is only visible within the filter dialog. In both cases, the filter is active if a value is entered.
The vertical layout of the filter dialog remains stable across all devices. To ensure a clean grid layout appearance, the size of the widest input field is inherited by all other filters.
Filter dialog (size L)
Filter dialog (size L)
Filter dialog (size S)
Filter dialog (size S)

Expanded Filter Bar

The expanded filter bar arranges the input fields in a simple horizontal linear layout. If the browser’s window size is reduced or the filters exceed the first line, a simple mechanism opens a new line of filters. The height of the expanded filter bar is not limited and adjusts to accommodate the filters that need to be shown. The label is always above the input field. As in the filter dialog, the size of the widest input field is inherited by all other filters. This avoids having unstable and busy-looking grid layouts.
Filter bar (size L) with one row of filters
Filter bar (size L) with one row of filters
Filter Bar (Size L) with more than one row of filters
Filter Bar (Size L) with more than one row of filters
Filter bar (size S) with vertical filters
Filter bar (size S) with vertical filters

Components

Collapsed Filter Bar

The collapsed filter bar takes up very little space, leaving the bulk of the screen to display the actual results. However, the variant selector in the upper left corner is still available for switching between variants. The user can expand or collapse the filter bar by clicking on the header. If required by the use case, the filter bar can be expanded by default.
On desktop and tablet devices, the collapsed filter bar shows a summary of the filters currently applied. It shows Filtered By (x):, where “x” stands for the number of applied filters. This is followed by a comma-separated list of the filters currently applied. Up to 5 filters are listed. If more filters have been applied, an ellipsis (…) shows at the end of the string. If no filters have been applied, the summary text is Filtered By: None.
Collapsed filter bar
Collapsed filter bar

Expanded Filter Bar

Developer Hint
In addition to the collapsed filter bar, the expanded filter bar shows a user-defined filter subset of the currently selected variant.
The Adapt Filters (x) link opens the filter dialog, and allows the user to add filters or hide them. The Go button triggers the filter. The Go button is only shown in manual mode.
Expanded filter bar
Expanded filter bar

Filter Dialog

Developer Hint

The filter dialog is the central component that shows all filters of the selected variant, allowing the user to add filters to the variant or remove them. Filters are arranged into their respective filter groups. The user can search for a specific filter by name in the search bar at the top.

The footer toolbar at the bottom of the dialog provides the following functions:

  • Save: Saves your modified variant filter set (Save and Save As can be provided)
  • Cancel: Closes the dialog and undoes all changes
  • Restore: Restores the initial variant values (you can hide this button if it does not fit the app’s use case)
  • Go: Executes the selected filter set
  • Clear (optional): Clears all input fields/filters (this button should only be used if it fits the app’s use case)

The user can choose to hide filters on the expanded filter bar by deselecting the relevant checkbox next to the filter in the filter dialog (for example, if a filter is rarely edited, or unimportant).

Filter dialog
Filter dialog

Variant Selector

The variant selector is used to select the current variant, and also provides access to variant management.
Variant selector
Variant selector

Filter/Input Controls

Developer Hint
For development information, see data types for the smart filter bar.
Filter/input controls
Filter/input controls

Which filter control is used in the filter dialog or the expanded filter bar depends on the use case. Use the value help control if you want to offer an advanced function for selecting single or multiple items either inline (by entering text) or by means of a dialog. If there is a predefined list for single or multiple selection, use the combo box control. For temporal information you can use the date picker or date range selector.

When designing the filter bar, pick the simplest input control that works for your use case. Using more complex controls (like value help) when you don’t actually need them just increases the complexity of the filter bar.

Behavior and Interaction

The filter bar contains the following actions:

Selecting a Variant

The main use case for the filter bar is to select and execute variants that influence the list of items. In this example, the variant applies its filter set automatically. The item list is filtered without the user needing to click Go.

Personalizing the Expanded Filter Bar

Users can hide a filter on the expanded filter bar by deselecting the checkbox next to the relevant filter in the filter dialog. This allows the user to hide filters that are rarely changed from the extended filter bar, giving complex filters a more lightweight appearance.

Adding Filters to a Variant

In the filter dialog the user can access more filters for every filter group. Filters can then be added or removed in a separate dialog. Once a filter has been added or removed, it appears or disappears from the filter dialog. If the user selects the checkbox next to the filter, the filter is displayed on the extended filter bar.

Saving a New Variant

You can save new filter variants either in the variant selector or in the filter dialog.

Once you have changed an existing variant, an asterisk (*) is displayed next to the current variant name, indicating its “dirty state”.

You can either save the adapted variant with the current name (overwrite), or save it under a new name.

Option 1 – Variant Selector

Open the variant selector and choose Save As. Type your desired variant name into the input field and select OK.

Save new variant in variant selector
Save new variant in variant selector

Option 2 – Filter Dialog

Choose Adapt Filters to open the filter dialog. Choose Save from the footer toolbar and type your desired variant name into the input field. Select OK.

Save new variant in filter dialog
Save new variant in filter dialog

Guidelines

Default Variant Filters

For all filter bars, provide a set of predefined default filters that come with the app (“Basic” group in the filter dialog). Include filters that are:
  • Mandatory / crucial to the use case
  • Frequently used
  • Vital for reducing the number of items in the list
Users can hide filters in the “Basic” group, but cannot remove them from the filter dialog.
Default variant
Default variant "Basic"

Default Values

Provide a meaningful default value for as many filters as possible. Meaningful default values depend on your use case.

A default value for date ranges, for example, should reflect the time frame the user would normally apply. App designers need to decide which time frame is appropriate.

Appropriate default values are particularly crucial for filter sets and list reports that operate on large datasets. In this case, consider making certain default filters mandatory to help the user avoid loading very large datasets unnecessarily.

Filter without default value
Filter without default value
Filter with available values
Filter with available values
Filter with a default value
Filter with a default value

Table Filtering and Table Searching

Provide the user with a central location filtering and searching. If you use a filter bar, do not provide filter options or search options for the control below (for example, a table, chart, or list.). Avoiding multiple filter locations also helps to prevent confusing or contradictory entries (for example between the filter bar and a table filter).
Do
Table without filtering option
Table without filtering option
Don't
Table with filtering option
Table with filtering option

Initial State

The filter bar can initially be collapsed or expanded, depending on the use case:

Initial State Collapsed

If the app has a default variant that is executed on loading, the table is prefilled, and the user seldom changes the filters, the app can start with a collapsed filter bar.

Initial State Expanded

If the app does not use a default variant and the user has to set a filter to obtain a first result set for the table, start with an expanded filter bar. Also, if a vast number of items are expected, include some mandatory filters. Since the user first has to enter values for these filters, start with an expanded filter bar. If you are in any doubt, start the app with an expanded filter bar.

Note: At least one filter must be defined to begin with. This filter is set within the basic group by app designers. If the use case allows, and depending on the size of the result set, provide a table that is initially filled.

Initial state collapsed
Initial state collapsed
Initial state expanded
Initial state expanded

Basic Search Field

The basic search field allows the user to filter the results by a given keyword. In contrast to the other input fields, the basic search field has a placeholder text instead of a label.
Note: If you need to provide a search field, use the basic search field. The search field within the table must be deactivated.
Filter bar with basic search field
Filter bar with basic search field

Live Update / Manual Update

The filter bar is available in two separate modes: Live update mode and manual update mode.

Live Update

The live update mode is the default mode. The filter bar reacts instantly to every input change. The result table is updated every time the user changes a filter field or the search field. Therefore, a Go button is not necessary and is not shown if live update mode is used.

The search is triggered with every letter that is entered, starting with the first letter the user types. The table is updated with the results that match all set filters and include the search term.

Manual Update

In the manual update mode, the filter results are only updated when the user clicks or taps Go. A Go button is therefore mandatory in manual update mode. Pressing ENTER on the keyboard also triggers the filter.

Which Mode Should I Use?

We recommend using live update mode, which is more convenient for the user. However, if the user has to configure multiple filters to obtain a useful result set, or if the resulting traffic is expected to be excessively high, consider using manual update mode instead.

Filter bar in live update mode
Filter bar in live update mode
Filter bar in manual update mode
Filter bar in manual update mode

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Breadcrumb

A breadcrumb (or breadcrumb trail) is a type of secondary navigation that indicates the position of a page in its application hierarchy. It is typically used for drilldown scenarios where users navigate through related object pages, tables, and charts.

Usage

Use a breadcrumb if:

  • You want to show secondary navigation on the object page
  • You want to show navigation in a table
  • You want to show navigation in charts

Use a breadcrumb only when the drilldown scenario leads to related object pages: parent object page / child object page 1 / child object page 2 / child object page 3.

Do not use a breadcrumb if:

  • Your hierarchy contains only one level.

Do not include these elements in your breadcrumb path:

  • Other floorplans, such as overview pages and list reports
  • Cross-application navigation to other object pages
  • Standalone object pages, such as fact sheets

These cases are covered in the global navigation concept for SAP Fiori 2.0.

Responsiveness

Breadcrumbs are responsive. If there is insufficient horizontal space, the links in the breadcrumb trail collapse into a dropdown menu (sap.m.Select):

  • The first link in the breadcrumb (the point of origin) collapses first, followed by the next link in the hierarchy.
  • The last element in the breadcrumb is always visible, and should never collapse into the dropdown menu.
  • The last element is truncated if the horizontal space is insufficient.
Breadcrumb – Size L
Breadcrumb – Size L
Breadcrumb – Size M
Breadcrumb – Size M
Breadcrumb – Size S
Breadcrumb – Size S
Breadcrumb – Size S (dropdown menu selected)
Breadcrumb – Size S (dropdown menu selected)

Layout

The horizontal layout of the breadcrumb never changes. Links always appear next to each other.

Types

There are two types of breadcrumb:

  • Standard breadcrumb
    The standard breadcrumb shows the current page as the last item in the trail. The last item contains only plain text and not a link.
  • Breadcrumb without the current page
    Use this breadcrumb for the object page only. The breadcrumb shows the position of the object page in the application hiearchy, without the current page. All items in the breadcrumb are links.
Standard breadcrumb
Standard breadcrumb
Breadcrumb without the current page
Breadcrumb without the current page

Components

A breadcrumb can contain both links and text (standard breadcrumb), or just links (breadcrumb without current page).

Behavior and Interaction

Navigation

The purpose of the breadcrumb is to trigger navigation. The action is triggered when the user clicks a link in the breadcrumb trail.
For link behavior and interaction, see Link.

Styles

You can define the style of the separator between the breadcrumb links using the separatorStyle property.

The available values are:

  • Slash
  • Backslash
  • Double slash
  • Double backslash
  • Greater than
  • Double greater than

To find out about the different link styles, see Link.

Guidelines

  • In the dropdown menu on desktop and tablet devices, show only the links that are not visible in the breadcrumb trail.
  • In the dropdown menu on smartphones, show all the links in the breadcrumb trail in their hierarchical order.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

  • Breadcrumb (sample in SAPUI5 Demo Kit)
  • Link (sample in SAPUI5 Demo Kit)
  • Text (sample in SAPUI5 Demo Kit)

Button

Buttons allow users to trigger an action – either by clicking on or tapping the button, or by pressing certain keys such as Enter or the space bar. 

Usage

Standard Buttons

Use buttons for typical actions, such as:

  • Create, Edit, Save
  • Approve, Reject
  • Accept, Decline
  • OK, Cancel

The different button styles are designed to give the appropriate feedback to users. Don’t use them for decoration purposes.

Standard buttons in a toolbar
Standard buttons in a toolbar
Standard buttons in the footer toolbar
Standard buttons in the footer toolbar

Segmented Buttons

If you want the user to select one option from a small group, offer a segmented button in the toolbar or footer toolbar. For example:

  • Year, Month, Day
  • Small, Medium, Large
Segmented button in a toolbar
Segmented button in a toolbar
Segmented button in the footer toolbar
Segmented button in the footer toolbar

Toggle Buttons

Use toggle buttons in a toolbar or footer toolbar to activate or deactivate an object or element. You can also use toggle buttons to switch between different states.

Responsiveness

The buttons themselves are not responsive. The button text and position depend on the settings for the parent container. In a responsive container or control, the button text may become truncated, or the button may move to another position.

All three button types support the cozy and compact form factors. The compact form factor is used for apps running on a mouse and keyboard-operated device. For more information, check out the article on content density.

Types

Standard Button

Standard button
Standard button

Clicking or tapping a standard button triggers an action.

Toggle Button

Toggle button
Toggle button

Clicking or tapping a toggle button changes its state to “pressed”. The button returns to its initial state when the user clicks or taps it again. The toggle button is comparable to a checkbox control.

Segmented Button

Segmented button
Segmented button

A segmented button shows a group of options. When the user clicks or taps one of the options, it stays in a pressed state. The segmented button is comparable to a radio button group control.

Components

A button can contain an icon or a text. For more information about icons, check out the article on iconography.

Behavior and Interaction

Buttons can be enabled or disabled.

  • Enabled buttons can be clicked or tapped. They also have “hover” and “pressed” states that give feedback to the user.
  • Disabled buttons are shown as inactive and cannot be clicked or tapped.
Button behavior
Button behavior

Styles

Standard Buttons

The appearance of a button can change depending on where it’s used (for example, in a toolbar, footer toolbar, popup, or dialog box).

Default
Default
Back
Back
Transparent
Transparent
Positive (property: type = accept)
Positive (property: type = accept)
Negative (property: type = reject)
Negative (property: type = reject)
Emphasized
Emphasized

Toggle Buttons

Default
Default
Transparent
Transparent

Segmented Buttons

No special styles apply to segmented buttons. As a result, they look almost the same as the default style for standard buttons.

Guidelines

  • Don’t combine an icon and text within one button.
  • Choose a button text that is short and meaningful.
  • Use imperative verbs for all actions (for example: SaveCancel, Edit).
    Note: The grammatical form for actions can differ for other languages. For example, German action labels use the infinitive (Speichern, Abbrechen, Bearbeiten).
  • Keep in mind that the text can be up to 300% longer in other languages.
  • We don’t recommend using tooltips since they are only visible on desktop devices. However, you can use tooltips for icon buttons.
  • For icon buttons, make sure the default accessibility text for the icon is correct for your use case. If not, define an app-specific accessibility text.
  • Don’t use the icon control for buttons. Use the icon property for the button instead.
  • If an action button is temporarily inactive, use the disabled status.
  • If you need to show the number of items that will be affected by the action of the button, you can add the number in brackets. For example, Edit (3).

Exceptions

Segmented Button

By default, the control for segmented buttons calculates the button width and applies it to all buttons within the group. You can change this by setting the width for individual buttons.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

  • No links

Implementation


  • No links

Table Toolbar

The table toolbar always appears above the table and has a transparent background. The control is used for key actions that impact the entire table.

Usage

Use the table toolbar if:

  • There are multiple objects on your page and you need to edit only the table.
  • You want to show actions as close to their corresponding controls as possible.
  • You need a title for your table.

Do not use the table toolbar if:

  • You are using single selection and only one or two actions. In this case, place the actions on each line.

Responsiveness

To enable responsiveness, use the OverflowToolbar control. For more information, please refer to the corresponding section in the toolbar overview article.

Components

All of the components are optional. The table toolbar can contain the following actions:

  • App-specific actions
  • Generic actions

The following actions count as generic:

  • Title
  • Variant management
  • Switch
  • Search
  • Edit
  • View switch
  • Create (for new items)
  • Add (for existing items)
  • Sort, Filter, and Group (view settings)
  • Personalize
  • Export to spreadsheet
  • Print
  • Overflow
Example of possible components
Example of possible components

Behavior and Interaction

App-Specific Actions

If needed, the app team can define their own actions for the app. In this case, the text buttons should contain a short, unambiguous text that explains what action the button performs. A button text is usually a single-word verb (for example, Share). Note that translated UIs may increase the length of the text string.

Only use icon buttons if you are sure that the user will be able to interpret the meaning of the icon easily and without the aid of a tooltip.  Use standard and easily recognizable icons, such as a paper clip for an attachment.

Table toolbar with app-specific icon buttons
Table toolbar with app-specific icon buttons

Title (Generic)

A title provides a short, meaningful summary of the content, mostly by using a single word. The title bar is a toolbar property that supports consistently-sized text and titles with the same height in cozy and compact form factors.

Consider the following when using a title:

  • Use the sap.m.Title control.
  • The toolbar height must be set to 3 rem.
  • The title must have the label class sapMH4Fontsize.

Use a table title if you need the table toolbar, and if the title of the table is not indicated in the surrounding area. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a table title, such as Items. Note that the title becomes truncated if there is not enough space.

Title in the table toolbar
Title in the table toolbar

Variant Management (Generic)

Variants store settings that have been defined, for example, for layout, column visibility, sorting, and grouping. The variant management control enables the user to load, save, and change variants.

In the context of tables, the variant management control  is used to save, manage, and load table settings which include layout, column visibility, sorting, and grouping.

For this, the variant management control can be used independently of the filter settings.

Always place this control in the table toolbar next to the title.

If you place the variant management control inside a toolbar, you need to apply the following styles:

  • The toolbar height must be set to 3 rem.
  • The title must have the class sapMH4Fontsize.

The examples below show where to place this control:

Variant in the table toolbar
Variant in the table toolbar

Title and Variant Management (Generic)

In exceptional cases, both the title and variant management have to be used. However, we do not recommend this because it results in a crowded toolbar and problems with responsiveness may occur. Variant management alone is generally sufficient.

The title and variant management are both left-aligned. The title is placed first, followed by a separator and the variant management.

Title with variant management
Title with variant management

Content Switch (Generic)

When apps need to switch between different content in a table, use a select control (also known as a dropdown) or a segmented button. The select control and the segmented button are displayed left-aligned in the table toolbar and allow the user to show different views.

These views could be very specific. For example, AllMine, and Others. However, you should ensure that there is no interference with the filters in the filter bar. Alternatively, the views might be made up of specific groupings or configurations, such as By X or By Y.

We strongly recommend that you use the segmented button and the select control as follows:

  • A limited set of views (2-3) can be represented by a segmented button (sap.m.SegmentedButton), which should collapse into a dropdown on a smartphone.
  • If the number of views can change or is larger than 3, they should be represented by a select (m.Select) control.

For more information about using multiple predefined views, see the list report floorplan (under Content Area: Multiple Views)

You can also include counters on your segmented buttons or your dropdown to indicate, for example, the number of products in each specific content view. For example, All Products (115), Hardware (60), Software (55).

Segmented button with a counter included
Segmented button with a counter included

If you use a content switch, you no longer need a title. In very rare use cases, both a title and a content switch must be visible. In this case, the title and the content view are left-aligned.

Segmented text button to switch content
Segmented text button to switch content
Select to switch content
Select to switch content

You can also use the icon tab bar as a filter. At the front, there can be an All tab (optional) stating the overall number and type of items, such as 14 Products.

If you use the icon tab bar as a filter, we strongly recommend that you show a counter on every tab. If you need a counter, use the icon tab bar instead of the content switch inside the table. Also use the icon tab bar if you need different actions for your different table views. Use the content switch instead of tabs if there are multiple table variants.

Search (Generic)

If a dataset is too large for users to find items by scanning through them, we recommend that you offer a search functionality. Do not place a search function in the table toolbar if there is a filter bar above.

If you want to provide a search for your table, place it on the right side of the toolbar. Note that this control cannot be moved into the overflow menu. We therefore recommend that you define a minimum width.

For more information, see search.

Search in the table toolbar
Search in the table toolbar

Edit (Generic)

Sometimes the user will need to edit a table. In this case, you have two options: You must decide whether the user needs to edit more than one element, or whether the main use case is to edit only one element.

Option 1: Editing Line Items

To allow the user to edit a line item details page, set sap.m.ListType to “detail” in the corresponding item (sap.m.ColumnListItem/sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive). This creates an Edit button at the end of the line. The user can click or tap the button to trigger the edit event. Use this event to switch the corresponding line item to edit mode.

Edit is a list item type and therefore cannot be used together with navigation or with the use of click events on the whole item (active).

Option 1: Editing an individual line
Option 1: Editing an individual line

Option 2: Editing the Whole Table

To edit a whole table, use the table toolbar. The edit function is a text button. Triggering this action results in the Edit button being replaced by Save and Cancel, and the user can then make any necessary changes in the table. All actions that control the UI of the table remain visible, and all other actions are hidden.

 Table in display mode
Table in display mode
Table in edit mode
Table in edit mode

View Switch (Generic)

View switches are right-aligned in the toolbar and allow the user to switch between different chart types or table layouts. You must provide the view switch if the chart relies on subtle color differences or gradients of color. In these cases, users with visual impairments can switch to the table view.

Switches are optional and do not have to be available if there is no need to switch between different charts or tables.

The number of chart types and switches must be used with caution. Each app team must decide what kinds of chart types make sense to visualize the respective data to assist the user in the best possible way.

We do not recommend using more than three types of visualization. The sequence of chart type switches is not fixed; however, you must sort them in terms of their importance and frequency of usage.

The chart type currently in use is highlighted. For this purpose, use a segmented control with icons. For more information about the icons and the chart types they represent, see chart toolbar.

Create / Add (Generic)

Use a text button for Create or Add actions. Place the action as close to the content as possible.

If the Create or Add action is a main function, never move it into the overflow.

Table toolbar with 'Create' button
Table toolbar with 'Create' button

Sort, Filter, and Group (Generic)

Sort, Filter, and Group can appear in any combination or as single actions. If you use more than one of these actions, we recommend keeping them in the following order: Sort, Filter, and Group.

When the user chooses one of these actions, the view settings dialog appears. This dialog can provide any combination of these three settings, including only one setting, such as Sort.

  • If sorting, filtering, and/or grouping is a common use case in your app, offer one, two, or all three of the corresponding features in one or more view settings dialogs. Do not provide these features if the table is expected to have only a small number of entries (up to 20 in most cases).
  • If filtering is a main use case, do not offer filtering in the view settings dialog; use the filter bar instead.

There are two ways to trigger the view settings dialog:

  1. The user clicks or taps a button on the table toolbar. Offer all relevant functionality (Sort, Filter, and/or Group) in this dialog.
  2. The user clicks or taps one of several buttons for each of these view settings. Each button opens a view settings dialog which contains only the corresponding page.

Use one of the two options listed above based on the following guidelines:

  • If sorting, filtering, and/or grouping are a secondary use case, use option 1.
  • If there are several additional actions and the table toolbar becomes overloaded with buttons, use option 1.
  • If sorting, filtering, and/or grouping are a primary use case, use option 2 to allow faster access to these settings.
  • If screen real estate is not an issue, use option 2.
  • If there is only one view setting (Sort, Filter, or Group), use option 2.

Always use only the view settings you really need. For example, do not offer grouping if it does not support your use case.

Using the view settings dialog allows you to define several Sort, Filter, and/or Group settings per column. Thus, a column with several data points can be sorted, filtered, and/or grouped independently by each data point.

Ensure a consistent user experience. When a user reopens the app, show the table with the same view settings that were last defined by this user.

Option 1: One trigger for all view settings (sort, filter, and group)
Option 1: One trigger for all view settings (sort, filter, and group)
Option 2: Multiple triggers for the different view settings (sort, filter, and group)
Option 2: Multiple triggers for the different view settings (sort, filter, and group)

Personalization (Generic)

Use the table personalization dialog for adding, removing, and rearranging columns. The user triggers the dialog by clicking a button on the table toolbar.

Offer personalization if you need more columns than those that fit on a tablet screen (which is usually five) to fulfill 80% of your main use cases. Before you do this, try to reduce the number of columns, for example, by using several lines per column or by using the pop-in.

Ensure a consistent user experience. When a user reopens the app, show the table with the same settings that were last defined by this user.

Table toolbar with personalization icon
Table toolbar with personalization icon

Export to Spreadsheet (Generic)

The Export to Spreadsheet action allows the user to export table rows and can be represented by a generic icon button. Place the action as close to the content as possible.

Example of a table toolbar with the 'Export to Spreadsheet' icon
Example of a table toolbar with the 'Export to Spreadsheet' icon

Print (Generic)

The action for printing table items can be represented by a generic Print icon ( ).

Example of table toolbar with Print icon
Example of table toolbar with Print icon

Overflow (Generic)

Please see the section on overflow in the Behavior and Interaction section of the toolbar overview article.

Styles

The table toolbar is always transparent and and has transparent-style buttons. Do not use semantic or emphasized button styles. These are reserved for key actions in the footer toolbar. For more information, see Button.

Guidelines

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection,

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user how many items will be affected. Let the user choose whether to apply the action anyway or cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection
Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection

If the items are still available after the action was applied, keep them selected.

For further guidelines, see Toolbar Overview – Guidelines.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Grid List

As with the list and the responsive table, the grid list displays a set of items. In contrast to both controls, the grid list displays the items not in rows, but in a grid.

The grid list is usually used as an alternative view for a list or table. It is ideal for displaying images, charts, object cards, and other content, which profit from more height (but less width).

Grid List
Grid List

Usage

Use the grid list if:

  • Your content is “visual” and profits from the rectangular format of the items. This is true for e.g. images, charts, and object cards.
  • The focus is on items, not on cells. The grid list shows complete items.
  • You want to display a homogeneous set of basic data.
  • You need to sort, group, or filter simple data sets.
  • As an alternative view for tables or lists, if the content profits from the different format.

Do not use the grid list if:

  • Your content is not appropriate for a card-like format. For example, do not use the grid list for displaying a wall of text. Use a table instead.
  • The main use case is to select one item from a very small number of items, without viewing additional details. In this case, a select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • Data needs to be structured in a hierarchical manner. In this case, a tree might be more appropriate.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use a chart.
  • You just need it for layout reasons. In this case, use a layout container such as the CSSGrid.
  • You want to manage complex datasets that need to be extensively sorted, grouped, filtered, or edited. In this case, use a table.

Responsiveness

The responsiveness of the grid list results from the underlying grid. The underlying grid is defined by rows and columns. Columns can have a minimum and maximum or a fixed size. Whenever an additional column fits on the screen, it will be added. If a column does not fit on the screen anymore, it will be removed. Items are re-layouted accordingly.

Optionally, there can be different configurations for the underlying grid based on breakpoints, for example based on the device types.

The underlying grid defines the available space per item. The width can differ pending on the screen width (“breathing”) or be fixed. The height can differ pending on the content of the item or be fixed. “Breathing” items make better use of the available screen space and is therefore recommended. Make sure, that the item adapts to the resulting width / height, for example by

  • Re-layouting the item content
  • Hiding less important information
  • Re-sizing content like images or charts.
Size S
Size S
Size M
Size M
Size L
Size L

Components

  • The title bar holds the title and, an item counter. Instead of a title bar you can use a toolbar, including title, counter, variant management and actions.
  • Optionally, a filter info bar should appear when the grid list is filtered and shows information on the filter settings.
  • The collection of grid list items, layouted on a grid, occupies the main part of the grid list.
  • A More button can be shown if you do not want all items to be loaded at the start (known as “lazy loading”). Ideally, you should use scrolling to load more items instead of choosing the More button. Use More only, if content is shown below the grid list.
  • The footer can contain additional static text information.
Schematic visualization of the grid list
Schematic visualization of the grid list

Title Bar

The title bar contains the title of the grid list and an item counter

Title Bar
Title Bar

Instead of the title bar, a toolbar can be used instead. If done so, use a title control to display the title and item count. Variant management and actions can be added in this case. The toolbar can contain entry points for the view settings dialog, as well as view switches in the form of a segmented button, and buttons for actions like for example Add, or Edit.

Toolbar instead of title bar
Toolbar instead of title bar

For the title, keep the following in mind:

  • Use a title if you need the item count, toolbar actions, or variant management. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a title, such as Items.
  • Do not show the title bar at all, if all elements (title, item count, variant management, toolbar) are available in the surrounding area.
    Example: An object page (sub-)section contains only one grid list. In this case, add the item count and the toolbar to the (sub-)section header.
Developer Hint
Assistive technologies (such as screen readers) use the title to create a hierarchical site map for faster navigation. In addition, screen readers use the title as the label for the table. If you don’t use a title (for example, to avoid repetition), make sure that the table is connected to another meaningful on-screen text that can be used as a label for assistive technologies. You can do this using the method addAriaLabelledBy.

For displaying the item count, use the following format:

[title text] ([count])

for example:

Items (2,534)

For the item count, keep the following in mind:

  • include all the items that a user can reach by scrolling except group headers.
  • Remove the item count if there are zero items.
  • Do not show a count on the title bar, if a More button is used. Show the count on the more button instead.

If possible, keep the title bar sticky (sap.m.GridList, property: sticky).

Filter Info Bar

Beneath the toolbar, display a filter info bar (which itself is a special toolbar) if the grid list is filtered.

Filter Info Bar
Filter Info Bar

Items

The items (sap.f.GridListItem) are placed on a grid. To specify the design of items, it is recommend (but not mandatory) to follow the guidelines for object cards. Be aware that the item itself is responsible for its own responsiveness.

Use the grid list only, if your content profits from the format. This can apply to images, charts, but also to object cards or quick views. Another option is to mimick the format (but not the visual) of existing objects (e.g. business cards).

A grid list item can contain any content. This includes single controls, or a combination of controls (e.g. by using layout containers).

When designing an item,

  • Use the grid list item as starting point and make sure that the content adapts responsively to a changing item width / height.
  • Although the grid list can technically work with other list items (e.g. the standard list item), do not use them. They are not responsive enough for being used in a grid. In addition, selectors, navigation indicators and other elements are layouted differently (optimized for the list, not for the grid list).
  • Take care that an item can be identified, e.g. by adding a title, and if needed a sub title.
  • To show a string with an ID as identifier, use the title for the string, and the subtitle for the ID.
  • For status information, use semantic colors on foreground elements.
  • Avoid truncation. Use controls that wrap the text and configure them accordingly.
  • If an edit mode is needed, change your text controls (labels, text, and links) to input fields or other appropriate editable controls, as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before.
    You can do this by changing the control or, in more complex cases, by exchanging the whole item.

Not all items have to follow the same structure. This could be the case if one item is locked, but another item is in edit mode. Another example is to show a set of objects of different types in the same grid list.

Example for a grid list item
Example for a grid list item
Another example for a grid list item
Another example for a grid list item

Highlight

To show that an item needs attention, a highlight indicator can be shown in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to indicate:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry- / process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users what exactly is wrong. Therefore, make sure to provide this information within the item, ideally in the same color.

For details on the usage of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.m.ListItemBase, property: highlight)

Highlighted item
Highlighted item

States

To show that an item is unread, use the corresponding flag (sap.m.GridList, property: showUnread, sap.f.GridListItem, property: unread). This shows most of the content in bold font.

Unread item next to a read item
Unread item next to a read item

To show that an item has been modified, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string (Modified) near the item identifier.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error (for example, within the global edit flow), add the string (Contains errors) near the item identifier. To do this, use an object status control with the error state (sap.m.ObjectStatus, property: state, value: sap.ui.core.ValueState.Error). In addition, highlight the item accordingly (sap.f.GridListItem, property: highlight).

An item with an error
An item with an error

To show that an item is locked, use a transparent button with the corresponding icon and the text Locked by [Name] near the item identifier. The user can click or tap the button to open a quick view of the person.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in a draft state, use a transparent-style button with the text Draft near the item identifier. The user can click or tap the button to open a popover showing the timestamp of the last change.

An item with draft state
An item with draft state

Show only one state at any one time.

“More” Button

The More button loads more items to the front end if not all items have yet been loaded.

"More" button

Footer

The footer can be used to display additional static information relating to the content.

Grid list footer
Grid list footer

Behavior and Interaction

Scroll

The height of the grid list is defined by the number of items it contains. It does not have a scroll container on its own but is scrolled together with the page. When the user scrolls the page, the title bar and filter info bar can stick to the top of the surrounding layout container (sap.m.GridList, property: sticky).

Information
The “sticky” feature comes with some limitations:

  • It is not available on all browsers. In non-supporting browsers, the corresponding areas (title bar, filter info bar) are not fixed on top of the surrounding layout container while scrolling.
  • Certain layout containers suppress the sticky behavior, such as the grid layout. The same happens if the grid list is placed within the object page.
  • If focus is set to a fixed column header, the grid list is automatically scrolled to top.

Sticky toolbar
Sticky toolbar

Showing more items

If the grid list works in a “growing” mode, it only loads a few items at first. Additional items are only loaded (and rendered) on request. This request can either be triggered by scrolling (preferred), or by clicking the More button. Use the latter one only if content follows below the grid list. Use the “growing mode”, if more than 200 items are expected to be displayed.

If using the “More” button,

  • show the number of items already loaded and (if possible) the total number items below the text More.
  • do not show an item count on the title bar. Use the count on the More button instead.

In any case, if the “growing mode” is used, do not show more than 1,000 items overall.

Select

A grid list can have one of the following selection modes (sap.m.GridList/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode):

  • None: Items cannot be selected (sap.m.ListMode.None).
    Beware: Items can still use the sap.m.ListType “navigation”, which allows click handling on specific items. Only use this option if the click triggers navigation to a corresponding item details page.
  • Single selection master: One item in the grid list can be selected. Items are selected by clicking or tapping the whole row. The single select master mode has no obvious visual cues, such as checkboxes or radio buttons. It only provides a light blue background for the selected state. Because of this, it can barely be differentiated from grid lists without selection (mode: None). Single select master is the preferred mode for single selection. (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectMaster).
Selected item in
Selected item in "single selection master"
  • Single selection left: One item in the grid list can be selected. For this, the grid list provides radio buttons on the left side of each item. Only use this mode if a click on the whole item is being used for something else, such as navigation. (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectLeft). Even in this case, prefer single select master and synchronize the selection with the navigation, so that the navigated item is also the selected item.
  • Multi selection: Users can select one or more items. For this, the grid list provides checkboxes on the left side of each item. (sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect). The Shift key can be used to select a range. Try to avoid combining multi selection with navigation.
An unselected and a selected item in
An unselected and a selected item in "multi selection"

For all single selection modes, make sure that one item is initially selected. Otherwise, the user cannot return to the initial state. A selected item can only be deselected by selecting another item.

Click an Item

The whole item can be clickable. An event is fired by clicking on the item (anywhere where there is no interactive control inside the item). Apps can react on the event, for example, by opening a dialog (sap.f.GridListItem, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive).

Active elements do not have a visual indication and can therefore not be differentiated from non-active elements.

Active is a list item type and can therefore not be used together with “navigation” or “edit”. In addition, “active” uses the whole item as a clickable area and therefore cannot be used together with a grid list in “single select master” mode.

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a grid list or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.m.ListBase, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

When using drag and drop, keep the following in mind:

  • Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, it is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.
  • If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within the grid list, use drop targets that are between items (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between). This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).
  • Be aware that due to the re-arrangement of the items which happens after an item is dropped, it is not always clear where the item will finally be placed.
  • Do not combine rearranging items and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure that there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.
  • When combining rearranging items with grouping, be aware that moving items to another group also means that a value of the dropped item changes: because grouping is based on a specific data point, the dropped item needs to take on the value of the target group for the corresponding data point. If this is not wanted, do not allow users to rearrange items in grouped grid lists. Example:
    A grid list is grouped by availability. An item is moved from the group “Not Available” to the group “In Stock”. In this case, the moved item needs to change its availability to “In Stock” to match the target group. If changing the value doesn’t make sense, only allow users to rearrange the items within the same group, or don’t allow rearranging at all.

Loading Data

To indicate that the grid list is currently loading items, use the busy state. (sap.m.GridList, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Empty Grid Lists

Try not to display an empty grid list. If there is no way around this, provide instructions on how to fill the grid list with data (sap.m.ListBase, properties: showNoData, noDataText).

Examples:

  • If a grid list is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the grid list with data.
  • If a grid list is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    To start, set the relevant filters.
  • If a grid list is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No data found. Try adjusting the filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, a search is also offered, or only the search is offered).
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of filter settings).

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu to a grid list. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the whole grid list or an individual item by providing access to context-specific actions. A context menu is opened by right-clicking (mouse), long press (touch devices), or via keyboard using the context menu key or SHIFT+F10. If a control inside a grid list is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar). Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browsers context menu, which can no longer be opened.

Group

If grouped, a group header is displayed (sap.m.GroupHeaderListItem) above all items which belong to the corresponding group. The group header is not interactive.

A grouped grid list
A grouped grid list

Guidelines

Actions

To trigger actions on multiple items, use a multi-selection grid list (sap.m.GridList, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect), and offer the corresponding actions on the toolbar of the grid list. Keep the toolbar sticky (sap.m.GridList, property: sticky).

In rare cases, you can also offer the corresponding actions in the footer toolbar. Do this only if the grid list is the only area on the screen to which actions can be applied and if the actions are finalizing.

Do not offer actions for multiple items if the grid list is expected to have fewer than 10 items in most cases.

To trigger actions on a single item only (sap.m.GridList, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectMaster), the action can also be shown within the item. One example would be an Add to Cart button in a shopping application. Since these actions are repeated in every item and thus use a lot of screen real estate, only do this for one or two actions at most. In this case, show the action trigger near the content to which it belongs.

The following actions on single items must always be in-line:

  • Delete: Use the “Delete” mode of the grid list (sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This places a Delete button at the right side of an item. Clicking this button triggers the deletion of the corresponding item. Do not use this mode if deleting multiple items at once is the preferred use case.
    Delete is a mode of the grid list and therefore cannot be used together with single selection or multi-selection.
Delete button
Delete button

From these three actions (delete, navigation, and edit), you can combine delete and edit, or delete and navigation. Edit and navigation cannot be combined.

  • Navigation: Use the “Navigation” item type (sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This places a Navigation indicator at the right side of an item and the entire item becomes clickable. Use this to navigate to a new page containing item details. In rare cases, you can also use this for the category navigation pattern without navigating to another page. By contrast, clicking an interactive control within an item does not trigger the navigation event. Instead, the corresponding control handles the click event.
    “Navigation” is an item type and therefore cannot be used together with “edit”, or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).
Navigation Indicator
Navigation Indicator
  • Edit: Use the “Detail” list item type (sap.f.GridListItem, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail). This places an Edit icon at the right side of an item. Clicking the button triggers the edit event. Use this event to switch the corresponding item to edit mode.
    Edit is a list item type and therefore cannot be used together with “navigation” or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).
Edit button
Edit button

Add Items

  • Place the Add or Create text button on the toolbar of the grid list.
    • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
    • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.
  • Place new items always as the first item of the grid list.
  • Use highlight (information state) on the new item.

After pressing the Add button, there are three possibilities for adding an item, which should be considered in the following priority:

  • Add the item inline. Create an empty, editable item as the first item of the grid list. Show the Save button on the toolbar of the grid list. This option is recommended for simple scenarios where just a few input fields have to be filled.
  • Open a dialog for items where up to 8 input fields need to be filled. Save the new item at the dialog level.
  • Navigate to a new page. This behavior should only be used for very complex scenarios that cannot be handled by a dialog (for example, creating complex objects). When the user presses Save in the footer toolbar of the create page, navigate back to the grid list.

There are three different states of a new item:

  • New: The item was just created and is still in edit mode. It is highlighted with a visual indicator (information state).
  • Recent: The item was saved but is still highlighted and displayed as the first item of the grid list. Current filter, sort and group criteria are ignored since the item should remain visible.
  • As soon as the grid list is sorted, filtered, or grouped again, the new item is handled accordingly and loses the visual highlight, but not before.

In the context of the draft handling new items are not saved on grid list level, but rather with the entire draft.

Export to Spreadsheet

Mass Editing

  • Provide multiselection (sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).
  • Provide an Edit button.
  • If several items are selected, choosing the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

For details, see mass editing.

Grid Lists in Object Pages

A grid list with up to 20 expected items can be displayed right away, without lazy loading.

If you expect the grid list to have more than 20 items, use one of the following 3 options:

  • Lazy loading (More button): Use this option if you expect to have up to 100 items.
  • Tab navigation: If you expect to have more than 50 to 100 items, but less than 400, use the object page with tab navigation instead of anchor navigation. Put the grid list on a dedicated tab.
  • Navigation to a list report: If you expect the grid list to have more than 400 items, or if the tab approach is unsuitable, restrict the number of items in the grid list itself to a reasonable amount. To provide the user with a way to work with the entire grid list, offer navigation to a separate list report containing all items.

For all of the three options mentioned above, we recommend providing a search, and if feasible, sort and filter capabilities for the grid list in the object page. Grouping should be avoided.

For more information on the use of grid lists within the object page, see the Table section of the Object Page article.

Paste

To paste data from the clipboard to the grid list, the browser functionality for paste can be used (CTRL + V or browser context menu).

If the focus is on item level, the app has to take the data from the clipboard and add it to the corresponding controls within the items.

If the focus is on an editable control within an item, the control gets the data automatically.

Pasting via context menu does not work if a custom context menu is used.

View Settings

  • Provide individual buttons for each of the following settings on the toolbar of the grid list: sort, filter, group.
  • Clicking one of these buttons opens the view settings dialog or P13nDialog dialog with just the relevant page inside.
  • When closed, apply the settings to the grid list accordingly.

Keep the following in mind:

  • Do not offer any of these features if the grid list is expected to have only a small number of entries (up to 20 in most cases).
  • If filtering is a main use case, do not offer filtering on the toolbar of the grid list. Use the filter bar instead.
  • Always use only the view settings which are really needed. For example, do not offer grouping if it does not support your use case well.
  • Persist the view settings. When a user reopens the app, show the grid list with the same sort, filter, and group settings as last defined by this user.

Sort

  • For the default sort settings, sort by the item title, which is usually the identifier of an item.
  • If you offer sorting, offer it for each data point available in the item. Allow sorting in both directions, ascending and descending. The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order.
  • For each data point, provide a meaningful sort order. For example:
    • Sort text alphabetically
    • Sort numbers by their value
    • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
      • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
      • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
      • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
      • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.

Filter

  • To display the current filter state, use the info bar below the title. Clicking or tapping the info bar opens the filter page of the corresponding dialog.
  • Show the info bar only if the filter settings are not shown somewhere else. For example, do not show the info bar for settings taken in the filter bar or in a select placed in the toolbar of the grid list.
  • If the info bar is shown, provide an option to reset all corresponding filters on the info bar.
  • Keep the info bar sticky (sap.m.GridList, property: sticky).
Developer Hint
To display the current filter settings on the info bar, consider using the list formatter (sap.ui.core.format.ListFormat).

Group

  • To display the current group state, group headers are shown.
  • On the group header, show the following text (sap.m.GroupHeaderListItem, property: title):
    [Label of the grouped data point]: [Grouping Value]
  • If there is no grouping value, show the following text:
    [Label of the grouped data point]: (Not Available)
    This is the case if you have a group of items that don’t have a value for the grouped data point.

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection,

  • Enable the action, if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action, if it can be applied to a part of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user about how many items will be affected. Provide the choice to apply the action anyway or to cancel the action.
  • Disable the action only, if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

Message for action which applies to a part of a selection
Message for action which applies to a part of a selection

If the items are still available after the action was applied, keep them selected.

To trigger actions that are independent of the selection, show the actions on the toolbar of the grid list. Examples of such actions are add, edit (in the sense of changing the whole table to edit mode), sort, filter, and group.

To trigger a default action on the whole item, use the “Active” or “DetailAndActive” list item type (sap.f.GridListItem, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active).
Active items trigger an event when clicked, which can be handled by apps (for example, to open a dialog). Clicks on interactive controls within the item do not trigger the event but are handled by the interactive control. Do not use Active for navigation, to switch the line item to an edit state, or to delete the item.

Active can be combined with edit and delete, but not with navigation. Do not combine active with single selection.

Properties

sap.f.GridList

The following additional properties are available for the grid list:

  • The property: inset adds a margin on all sides of the grid list.
  • The property: headerText is a simple way to set the title for the grid list. However, this excludes the following:
    • A separate toolbar
    • variantManagement
  • The property: headerDesign affects the appearance of the header if the theme supports it. Leave the default value as it is.
  • The property: footerText adds a small additional row below the table footer or last item. This row can contain text only. Do not use this property.
  • The property: width defines the width of the whole grid list.
  • The property: includeItemInSelection uses a click on the whole item to select the corresponding item if the grid list is in a selection mode. This competes with other settings like “Navigation” or “Active” and should therefore not be used in combination with these two settings.
  • The property: enableBusyIndicator automatically shows a busy indicator while data is loaded. (In contrast to the property: busy, where the application can control when the grid list is set to busy state)
  • The property: modeAnimationOn does not have any effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: showSeparators does not have any effect. Do not use this property.
  • The property: swipeDirection does not have any effect. Do not use this property.
  • The property: rememberSelections leaves items selected even if they are currently not visible, for example, through filtering. If this behavior is not wanted, set the flag to “false”, but you should do so only in exceptional cases.
  • The property: busy sets the grid list to a busy state. While in busy state, the whole grid list cannot be used and items cannot be read due to an overlay.
  • The property: busyIndicatorDelay defines the time after which a busy state is shown after the grid list has been set to this state. Use the default value.
  • The property: visible shows the grid list (“true”) or hides it (“false”).
  • The property: tooltip provides a tooltip for the whole grid list. Do not use it.

sap.f.GridListItem

The following additional properties are available for sap.m.ColumnListItem:

  • The property: selected allows an item to be selected programmatically.
  • The property: counter shows a number on the right side of an item. This is used in cases like showing the number of subitems.
  • Do not use the property: busy.
  • Do not use the property: busyIndicatorDelay.
  • The property: visible shows or hides the item.
  • The property: tooltip adds a tooltip to a whole item. The tooltip is only shown on mouse interaction. It will not work on tablets or smartphones. Do not use it.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Grid List

As with the list and the responsive table, the grid list displays a set of items. In contrast to both controls, the grid list displays the items not in rows, but in a grid.

The grid list is usually used as an alternative view for a list or table. It is ideal for displaying images, charts, object cards, and other content, which profit from more height (but less width).

Grid List
Grid List

Usage

Use the grid list if:

  • Your content is “visual” and profits from the rectangular format of the items. This is true for e.g. images, charts, and object cards.
  • The focus is on items, not on cells. The grid list shows complete items.
  • You want to display a homogeneous set of basic data.
  • You need to sort, group, or filter simple data sets.
  • As an alternative view for tables or lists, if the content profits from the different format.

Do not use the grid list if:

  • Your content is not appropriate for a card-like format. For example, do not use the grid list for displaying a wall of text. Use a table instead.
  • The main use case is to select one item from a very small number of items, without viewing additional details. In this case, a select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • Data needs to be structured in a hierarchical manner. In this case, a tree might be more appropriate.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use a chart.
  • You just need it for layout reasons. In this case, use a layout container such as the CSSGrid.
  • You want to manage complex datasets that need to be extensively sorted, grouped, filtered, or edited. In this case, use a table.

Responsiveness

The responsiveness of the grid list results from the underlying grid. The underlying grid is defined by rows and columns. Columns can have a minimum and maximum or a fixed size. Whenever an additional column fits on the screen, it will be added. If a column does not fit on the screen anymore, it will be removed. Items are re-layouted accordingly.

Optionally, there can be different configurations for the underlying grid based on breakpoints, for example based on the device types.

The underlying grid defines the available space per item. The width can differ pending on the screen width (“breathing”) or be fixed. The height can differ pending on the content of the item or be fixed. “Breathing” items make better use of the available screen space and is therefore recommended. Make sure, that the item adapts to the resulting width / height, for example by

  • Re-layouting the item content
  • Hiding less important information
  • Re-sizing content like images or charts.
Size S
Size S
Size M
Size M
Size L
Size L

Components

  • The title bar holds the title and, an item counter. Instead of a title bar you can use a toolbar, including title, counter, variant management and actions.
  • Optionally, a filter info bar should appear when the grid list is filtered and shows information on the filter settings.
  • The collection of items, layouted on a grid, occupies the main part of the grid list.
  • A More button can be shown if you do not want all items to be loaded at the start (known as “lazy loading”). Ideally, you should use scrolling to load more items instead of choosing the More button. Use More only, if content is shown below the grid list.
  • The footer can contain additional static text information.
Schematic visualization of the grid list
Schematic visualization of the grid list

Title Bar

The title bar contains the title of the grid list and an item counter

Title Bar
Title Bar

Instead of the title bar, a toolbar can be used instead. If done so, use a title control to display the title and item count. Variant management and actions can be added in this case. The toolbar can contain entry points for the view settings dialog, as well as view switches in the form of a segmented button, and buttons for actions like for example Add, or Edit.

Toolbar instead of title bar
Toolbar instead of title bar

For the title, keep the following in mind:

  • Use a title if you need the item count, toolbar actions, or variant management. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a title, such as Items.
  • Do not show the title bar at all, if all elements (title, item count, variant management, toolbar) are available in the surrounding area.
    Example: An object page (sub-)section contains only one grid list. In this case, add the item count and the toolbar to the (sub-)section header.
Developer Hint
Assistive technologies (such as screen readers) use the title to create a hierarchical site map for faster navigation. In addition, screen readers use the title as the label for the table. If you don’t use a title (for example, to avoid repetition), make sure that the table is connected to another meaningful on-screen text that can be used as a label for assistive technologies. You can do this using the method addAriaLabelledBy.

For displaying the item count, use the following format:

[title text] ([count])

for example:

Items (2,534)

For the item count, keep the following in mind:

  • include all the items that a user can reach by scrolling except group headers.
  • Remove the item count if there are zero items.
  • Do not show a count on the title bar, if a More button is used. Show the count on the more button instead.

If possible, keep the title bar sticky (sap.m.GridList, property: sticky).

Filter Info Bar

Beneath the toolbar, display a filter info bar (which itself is a special toolbar) if the grid list is filtered.

Filter Info Bar
Filter Info Bar

Items

The items are placed on a grid. There are no specific item templates available. To specify the design of items, it is recommend (but not mandatory) to follow the guidelines for object cards. Be aware that the item itself is responsible for its own responsiveness.

Use the grid list only, if your content profits from the format. This can apply to images, charts, but also to object cards or quick views. Another option is to mimick the format (but not the visual) of existing objects (e.g. business cards).

A grid list item can contain any content. This includes single controls, or a combination of controls (e.g. by using layout containers).

When designing an item,

  • Use the custom list item as starting point and make sure that the content adapts responsively to a changing item width / height.
  • When using other list items, make sure that the minimum size of one item is large enough to display the item in a meaningful way.
  • Take care that an item can be identified, e.g. by adding a title, and if needed a sub title.
  • To show a string with an ID as identifier, use the title for the string, and the subtitle for the ID.
  • For status information, use semantic colors on foreground elements.
  • Avoid truncation. Use controls that wrap the text. For example, use text instead of a label.
  • If an edit mode is needed, change your text controls (labels, text, and links) to input fields or other appropriate editable controls, as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before.
    You can do this by changing the control or, in more complex cases, by exchanging the whole item.

The grid list works technically with all kind of list items, e.g. the object List Item. Just be aware that these items are not optimized for be used in a grid list: they are not responsive in themselves. Therefore, it is not recommended to use the existing predefined list items. Use the custom list item instead and build your own content.

Not all items have to follow the same structure. This could be the case if one item is locked, but another item is in edit mode. Another example is to show a set of objects of different types in the same list.

Example for a grid list item
Example for a grid list item
Another example for a grid list item
Another example for a grid list item

Highlight

To show that an item needs attention, a highlight indicator can be shown in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to indicate:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry- / process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users what exactly is wrong. Therefore, make sure to provide this information within the item, ideally in the same color.

For details on the usage of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.m.ListItemBase, property: highlight)

Highlighted item
Highlighted item

States

To show that an item is unread, use the corresponding flag (sap.m.GridList, property: showUnread, sap.m.ListItemBase, property: unread). This shows most of the content in bold font.

Unread item next to a read item
Unread item next to a read item

To show that an item has been modified, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string (Modified) near the item identifier.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error (for example, within the global edit flow), add the string (Contains errors) near the item identifier. To do this, use an object status control with the error state (sap.m.ObjectStatus, property: state, value: sap.ui.core.ValueState.Error). In addition, highlight the item accordingly (sap.m.ListItemBase, property: highlight).

An item with an error
An item with an error

To show that an item is locked, use a transparent button with the corresponding icon and the text Locked by [Name] near the item identifier. The user can click or tap the button to open a quick view of the person.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in a draft state, use a transparent-style button with the text Draft near the item identifier. The user can click or tap the button to open a popover showing the timestamp of the last change.

An item with draft state
An item with draft state

Show only one state at any one time.

“More” Button

The More button loads more items to the front end if not all items have yet been loaded.

"More" button

Footer

The footer can be used to display additional static information relating to the content.

Grid list footer
Grid list footer

Behavior and Interaction

Scroll

The height of the grid list is defined by the number of items it contains. It does not have a scroll container on its own but is scrolled together with the page. When the user scrolls the page, the title bar and filter info bar can stick to the top of the surrounding layout container (sap.m.GridList, property: sticky).

Information
The “sticky” feature comes with some limitations:

  • It is not available on all browsers. In non-supporting browsers, the corresponding areas (title bar, filter info bar) are not fixed on top of the surrounding layout container while scrolling.
  • Certain layout containers suppress the sticky behavior, such as the grid layout. The same happens if the grid list is placed within the object page.
  • If focus is set to a fixed column header, the grid list is automatically scrolled to top.

Sticky toolbar
Sticky toolbar

Showing more items

If the grid list works in a “growing” mode, it only loads a few items at first. Additional items are only loaded (and rendered) on request. This request can either be triggered by scrolling (preferred), or by clicking the More button. Use the latter one only if content follows below the grid list. Use the “growing mode”, if more than 200 items are expected to be displayed.

If using the “More” button,

  • show the number of items already loaded and (if possible) the total number items below the text More.
  • do not show an item count on the title bar. Use the count on the More button instead.

In any case, if the “growing mode” is used, do not show more than 1,000 items overall.

Select

A grid list can have one of the following selection modes (sap.m.GridList/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode):

  • None: Items cannot be selected (sap.m.ListMode.None).
    Beware: Items can still use the sap.m.ListType “navigation”, which allows click handling on specific items. Only use this option if the click triggers navigation to a corresponding item details page.
  • Single selection master: One item in the grid list can be selected. Items are selected by clicking or tapping the whole row. The single select master mode has no obvious visual cues, such as checkboxes or radio buttons. It only provides a light blue background for the selected state. Because of this, it can barely be differentiated from grid lists without selection (mode: None). Single select master is the preferred mode for single selection. (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectMaster).
Selected item in
Selected item in "single selection master"
  • Single selection left: One item in the grid list can be selected. For this, the grid list provides radio buttons on the left side of each item. Only use this mode if a click on the whole item is being used for something else, such as navigation. (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectLeft). Even in this case, prefer single select master and synchronize the selection with the navigation, so that the navigated item is also the selected item.
  • Multi selection: Users can select one or more items. For this, the grid list provides checkboxes on the left side of each item. (sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect). Try to avoid combining multi selection with navigation.
An unselected and a selected item in
An unselected and a selected item in "multi selection"

For all single selection modes, make sure that one item is initially selected. Otherwise, the user cannot return to the initial state. A selected item can only be deselected by selecting another item.

Click an Item

The whole item can be clickable. An event is fired by clicking on the item (anywhere where there is no interactive control inside the item). Apps can react on the event, for example, by opening a dialog (sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive).

Active elements do not have a visual indication and can therefore not be differentiated from non-active elements.

Active is a list item type and can therefore not be used together with “navigation” or “edit”. In addition, “active” uses the whole item as a clickable area and therefore cannot be used together with a grid list in “single select master” mode.

Loading Data

To indicate that the grid list is currently loading items, use the busy state. (sap.m.GridList, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Empty Grid Lists

Try not to display an empty grid list. If there is no way around this, provide instructions on how to fill the grid list with data (sap.m.ListBase, properties: showNoData, noDataText).

Examples:

  • If a grid list is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the grid list with data.
  • If a grid list is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    To start, set the relevant filters.
  • If a grid list is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No data found. Try adjusting the filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, a search is also offered, or only the search is offered).
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of filter settings).

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu to a grid list. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the whole grid list or an individual item by providing access to context-specific actions. A context menu is opened by right-clicking (mouse), long press (touch devices), or via keyboard using the context menu key or SHIFT+F10. If a control inside a grid list is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar). Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browsers context menu, which can no longer be opened.

Group

If grouped, a group header is displayed (sap.m.GroupHeaderLisItem) above all items which belong to the corresponding group. The group header is not interactive.

A grouped grid list
A grouped grid list

Guidelines

Actions

To trigger actions on multiple items, use a multi-selection grid list (sap.m.GridList, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect), and offer the corresponding actions on the toolbar of the grid list. Keep the toolbar sticky (sap.m.GridList, property: sticky).

In rare cases, you can also offer the corresponding actions in the footer toolbar. Do this only if the grid list is the only area on the screen to which actions can be applied and if the actions are finalizing.

Do not offer actions for multiple items if the grid list is expected to have fewer than 10 items in most cases.

To trigger actions on a single item only (sap.m.GridList, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectMaster), the action can also be shown within the item. One example would be an Add to Cart button in a shopping application. Since these actions are repeated in every item and thus use a lot of screen real estate, only do this for one or two actions at most. In this case, show the action trigger near the content to which it belongs.

The following actions on single items must always be in-line:

  • Delete: Use the “Delete” mode of the grid list (sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This places a Delete button at the right side of an item. Clicking this button triggers the deletion of the corresponding item. Do not use this mode if deleting multiple items at once is the preferred use case.
    Delete is a mode of the grid list and therefore cannot be used together with single selection or multi-selection.
Delete button
Delete button

From these three actions (delete, navigation, and edit), you can combine delete and edit, or delete and navigation. Edit and navigation cannot be combined.

  • Navigation: Use the “Navigation” item type (sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This places a Navigation indicator at the right side of an item and the entire item becomes clickable. Use this to navigate to a new page containing item details. In rare cases, you can also use this for the category navigation pattern without navigating to another page. By contrast, clicking an interactive control within an item does not trigger the navigation event. Instead, the corresponding control handles the click event.
    “Navigation” is an item type and therefore cannot be used together with “edit”, or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).
Navigation Indicator
Navigation Indicator
  • Edit: Use the “Detail” list item type (sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail). This places an Edit icon at the right side of an item. Clicking the button triggers the edit event. Use this event to switch the corresponding item to edit mode.
    Edit is a list item type and therefore cannot be used together with “navigation” or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).
Edit button
Edit button

Add Items

  • Place the Add button on the toolbar of the grid list. It can be displayed as an icon ( ) or text (for example, Add or Create).
  • Place new items always as the first item of the grid list.
  • Use highlight (information state) on the new item.

After pressing the Add button, there are three possibilities for adding an item, which should be considered in the following priority:

  • Add the item inline. Create an empty, editable item as the first item of the grid list. Show the Save button on the toolbar of the grid list. This option is recommended for simple scenarios where just a few input fields have to be filled.
  • Open a dialog for items where up to 8 input fields need to be filled. Save the new item at the dialog level.
  • Navigate to a new page. This behavior should only be used for very complex scenarios that cannot be handled by a dialog (for example, creating complex objects). When the user presses Save in the footer toolbar of the create page, navigate back to the grid list.

There are three different states of a new item:

  • New: The item was just created and is still in edit mode. It is highlighted with a visual indicator (information state).
  • Recent: The item was saved but is still highlighted and displayed as the first item of the grid list. Current filter, sort and group criteria are ignored since the item should remain visible.
  • As soon as the grid list is sorted, filtered, or grouped again, the new item is handled accordingly and loses the visual highlight, but not before.

In the context of the draft handling new items are not saved on grid list level, but rather with the entire draft.

Export to Spreadsheet

Mass Editing

  • Provide multiselection (sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).
  • Provide an Edit button.
  • If several items are selected, choosing the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

For details, see mass editing.

Grid Lists in Object Pages

A grid list with up to 20 expected items can be displayed right away, without lazy loading.

If you expect the grid list to have more than 20 items, use one of the following 3 options:

  • Lazy loading (More button): Use this option if you expect to have up to 100 items.
  • Tab navigation: If you expect to have more than 50 to 100 items, but less than 400, use the object page with tab navigation instead of anchor navigation. Put the grid list on a dedicated tab.
  • Navigation to a list report: If you expect the grid list to have more than 400 items, or if the tab approach is unsuitable, restrict the number of items in the grid list itself to a reasonable amount. To provide the user with a way to work with the entire grid list, offer navigation to a separate list report containing all items.

For all of the three options mentioned above, we recommend providing a search, and if feasible, sort and filter capabilities for the grid list in the object page. Grouping should be avoided.

For more information on the use of grid lists within the object page, see the Table section of the Object Page article.

Paste

To paste data from the clipboard to the grid list, the browser functionality for paste can be used (CTRL + V or browser context menu).

If the focus is on item level, the app has to take the data from the clipboard and add it to the corresponding controls within the items.

If the focus is on an editable control within an item, the control gets the data automatically.

Pasting via context menu does not work if a custom context menu is used.

View Settings

  • Provide individual buttons for each of the following settings on the toolbar of the grid list: sort, filter, group.
  • Clicking one of these buttons opens the view settings dialog or P13nDialog dialog with just the relevant page inside.
  • When closed, apply the settings to the grid list accordingly.

Keep the following in mind:

  • Do not offer any of these features if the grid list is expected to have only a small number of entries (up to 20 in most cases).
  • If filtering is a main use case, do not offer filtering on the toolbar of the grid list. Use the filter bar instead.
  • Always use only the view settings which are really needed. For example, do not offer grouping if it does not support your use case well.
  • Persist the view settings. When a user reopens the app, show the grid list with the same sort, filter, and group settings as last defined by this user.

Sort

  • For the default sort settings, sort by the item title, which is usually the identifier of an item.
  • If you offer sorting, offer it for each data point available in the item. Allow sorting in both directions, ascending and descending. The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order.
  • For each data point, provide a meaningful sort order. For example:
    • Sort text alphabetically
    • Sort numbers by their value
    • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
      • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
      • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
      • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
      • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.

Filter

  • To display the current filter state, use the info bar below the title. Clicking or tapping the info bar opens the filter page of the corresponding dialog.
  • Show the info bar only if the filter settings are not shown somewhere else. For example, do not show the info bar for settings taken in the filter bar or in a select placed in the toolbar of the grid list.
  • If the info bar is shown, provide an option to reset all corresponding filters on the info bar.
  • Keep the info bar sticky (sap.m.GridList, property: sticky).
Developer Hint
To display the current filter settings on the info bar, consider using the list formatter (sap.ui.core.format.ListFormat).

Group

  • To display the current group state, group headers are shown.
  • On the group header, show the following text (sap.m.GroupHeaderListItem, property: title):
    [Label of the grouped data point]: [Grouping Value]
  • If there is no grouping value, show the following text:
    [Label of the grouped data point]: (Not Available)
    This is the case if you have a group of items that don’t have a value for the grouped data point.

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection,

  • Enable the action, if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action, if it can be applied to a part of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user about how many items will be affected. Provide the choice to apply the action anyway or to cancel the action.
  • Disable the action only, if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

Message for action which applies to a part of a selection
Message for action which applies to a part of a selection

If the items are still available after the action was applied, keep them selected.

To trigger actions that are independent of the selection, show the actions on the toolbar of the grid list. Examples of such actions are add, edit (in the sense of changing the whole table to edit mode), sort, filter, and group.

To trigger a default action on the whole item, use the “Active” or “DetailAndActive” list item type (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active).
Active items trigger an event when clicked, which can be handled by apps (for example, to open a dialog). Clicks on interactive controls within the item do not trigger the event but are handled by the interactive control. Do not use Active for navigation, to switch the line item to an edit state, or to delete the item.

Active can be combined with edit and delete, but not with navigation. Do not combine active with single selection.

Properties

sap.f.GridList

The following additional properties are available for the grid list:

  • The property: inset adds a margin on all sides of the grid list.
  • The property: headerText is a simple way to set the title for the grid list. However, this excludes the following:
    • A separate toolbar
    • variantManagement
  • The property: headerDesign affects the appearance of the header if the theme supports it. Leave the default value as it is.
  • The property: footerText adds a small additional row below the table footer or last item. This row can contain text only. Do not use this property.
  • The property: width defines the width of the whole grid list.
  • The property: includeItemInSelection uses a click on the whole item to select the corresponding item if the grid list is in a selection mode. This competes with other settings like “Navigation” or “Active” and should therefore not be used in combination with these two settings.
  • The property: enableBusyIndicator automatically shows a busy indicator while data is loaded. (In contrast to the property: busy, where the application can control when the grid list is set to busy state)
  • The property: modeAnimationOn does not have any effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: showSeparators does not have any effect. Do not use this property.
  • The property: swipeDirection does not have any effect. Do not use this property.
  • The property: rememberSelections leaves items selected even if they are currently not visible, for example, through filtering. If this behavior is not wanted, set the flag to “false”, but you should do so only in exceptional cases.
  • The property: busy sets the grid list to a busy state. While in busy state, the whole grid list cannot be used and items cannot be read due to an overlay.
  • The property: busyIndicatorDelay defines the time after which a busy state is shown after the grid list has been set to this state. Use the default value.
  • The property: visible shows the grid list (“true”) or hides it (“false”).
  • The property: tooltip provides a tooltip for the whole grid list. Do not use it.

sap.m.CustomListItem

The following additional properties are available for sap.m.ColumnListItem:

  • The property: selected allows an item to be selected programmatically.
  • The property: counter shows a number on the right side of an item. This is used in cases like showing the number of subitems.
  • Do not use the property: busy.
  • Do not use the property: busyIndicatorDelay.
  • The property: visible shows or hides the item.
  • The property: tooltip adds a tooltip to a whole item. The tooltip is only shown on mouse interaction. It will not work on tablets or smartphones. Do not use it.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Analytical Table (ALV)

An analytical table contains a set of data that is structured in rows and columns. It provides several powerful possibilities for working with the data, including advanced grouping and aggregations.

In contrast to other tables, the analytical data binding used by the analytical table allows an aggregated number to be shown automatically in a cell. This means that a number in such a summarized cell is a total sum of several lines in the database.

Usage

Use the analytical table (ALV) if:

  • The cell level and the spatial relationship between cells are more important than the line item. Examples include spreadsheet analyses and waterfall charts. Note that an analytical table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You have to work on more than 1,000 rows. In this case, the analytical table is easier to handle. In contrast to the responsive table, the architecture of the analytical table is optimized for handling large numbers of items. Note that an analytical table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • Comparing items is a major use case. In this case, an analytical table might be more appropriate than a responsive table. In the analytical table, each cell contains only one data point. In contrast, the responsive table is more flexible regarding line items, including the ability to add more data points per cell and also the pop-in function. Both make comparisons more difficult. Note that an analytical table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.

Do not use the analytical table (ALV) if:

  • You need a table. The responsive table is the default table in SAP Fiori. Additional use cases where you might need the responsive table include:
    • You need to provide a total sum for one column. You can also add totals to the responsive table.
    • The focus is on working on line items, not on cells. The responsive table is optimized for displaying complete items on all devices (such as purchase orders and purchase requisitions).
    • Selecting one or more items is a main use case and details are needed to choose the correct item.
    • Line items are independent of each other and no operation across columns is needed.
    • You want to have only one implementation for all devices.
  • The main use case is choosing one item from a very small number of items with no additional details. A select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • The main use case is choosing one out of several items with only a few details per item. A list might be more appropriate. Pay attention to the layout of the list item to ensure that it has a pleasant appearance. Examples include the master list and the attachment list.
  • You cannot provide an analytical binding on the technical side. In this case, a grid table will do the work. Note that the grid table provides only one level of grouping, no aggregation options, and is also not responsive.
  • Data needs to be structured in a hierarchical manner. In this case, a tree table might be more appropriate. Although the analytical table can have several grouping levels, it is not as flexible when nodes at several levels contain children. Note that neither the tree table nor the analytical table are responsive. You will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones and tablets.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use charts.
  • You just need it for layout reasons. In this case, use a layout container like HBox or VBox.
  • You need read-only or editable field-value pairs. Use a form instead. The analytical table is not optimized for form-like input navigation.

Responsiveness

The analytical table is available for desktops and tablets, but not in smartphone sizes. It supports touch devices, but is not optimized for small screens.

If you use an analytical table for desktop use cases, note that you must implement a fallback solution for mobile and touch devices. This fallback solution does not need to support all use cases.

You could create a fallback by using a responsive table. However, a completely different solution, such as showing charts in a read-only case, might be more suitable.

Analytical table (ALV) shown on a desktop
Analytical table (ALV) shown on a desktop
Analytical table (ALV) shown on a tablet
Analytical table (ALV) shown on a tablet

Components

An analytical table does not consist of other elements. However, it is common to use a toolbar above the analytical table.

The toolbar can contain entry points for the view settings dialog and the table personalization dialog or for the p13n dialog, as well as for view switches in the form of a segmented button, and buttons for Add, Edit, and other actions.

Behavior and Interaction

An analytical table is quite restricted in terms of its content, although it provides powerful features for working with the content.

Table Level

Scroll

An analytical table allows horizontal and vertical scrolling (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: navigationMode, value: Scrollbar).

You can add any number of line items to the analytical table, which is known as “lazy loading”.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: rowHeight).

The analytical table is optimized to allow faster scrolling within the first 1000 items.

Scroll bar
Scroll bar

Select

Selection for an analytical table depends on the chosen selection mode. The following options are available:

No selection: Items cannot be selected. (property: selectionMode = None)

Analytical table without item selection
Analytical table without item selection

Single selection: One item in the analytical table can be selected. A row selector column is shown. (property: selectionMode = Single)

Analytical table with single selection
Analytical table with single selection
  • Multiple selection: One or more items can be selected. The analytical table provides a column with checkboxes on the left-hand side. Clicking a checkbox toggles the state of the corresponding row from deselected to selected and back. The Shift key can be used to select a range. For multiple selection, you can choose between two variants.
    • Multi-toggle mode (property: selectionMode = MultiToggle)
    • Multi-selection plug-in (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin)

    These variants behave differently when the user selects more items than are currently loaded in the front end.

    Multi-toggle

    In multi-toggle mode, you can offer a Select All checkbox to the left of the column header (property: enableSelectAll). Selecting this checkbox selects or deselects all items that are currently loaded in the front end. All other items are not selected/deselected. If the application data is stored in the back end, scrolling down further can reveal additional unselected items. The same can happen with range selections if not all items in the selected range have been loaded to the front end.

    Multi-selection plug-in

    If you use this plug-in instead of the multi-toggle selection mode, the behavior for range selection and Select All changes:

    • By default, a dedicated Deselect All button replaces the Select All checkbox. There is no default UI element for selecting all items.
    • You can set a limit for the number of items that can be selected (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin, property: limit). This limit has the following effect:
      • The range that can be selected using the Shift key is limited to the specified number of items (default = 200). The table automatically scrolls back to the last selected item. Users can select more items by selecting additional ranges (the specified limit applies each time).
      • If the selection limit is set to 0, a Select All checkbox is shown. There is also no limit on the number of items that can be selected in a range. All selected items are loaded, which can lead to performance issues for large data sets.
    • If selected items are not already available in the front end, they are loaded automatically by the plug-in and set as selected.
Analytical table with multiple selection
Analytical table with multiple selection
Using the multi-selection plug-in with a limit
Using the multi-selection plug-in with a limit

Selection Behavior

An item can be selected in different ways, depending on the configuration of the analytical table (sap.ui.table.Table, property: selectionBehavior):

  • Row: An item is selected by clicking the checkbox or the row. Use this option for multi-selection tables if clicking a row or a cell is not used for anything else.
  • RowSelector: An item is selected only by clicking the checkbox in the selector cell. Use this option if clicking the row (or a cell inside the row) is used for something else, such as navigation.
  • RowOnly: An item is selected only by clicking the row, and not using checkboxes in the selector cells. Use this for single-selection tables if clicking a row or a cell is not used for another purpose, such as navigation.

Compact, Cozy, and Condensed

Like all SAP Fiori controls, the analytical table is shown in compact mode on a desktop and in cozy mode on tablets.

For desktop devices, you can fit even more rows onto the screen by using the condensed mode together with the compact mode. This renders less white space for each item.

Note that the condensed content density must always be set in addition to the compact mode. Do not use the condensed mode on its own. Do not mix condensed with cozy. Doing so could lead to unpredictable or unwanted results, such as cozy-sized controls in condensed-sized containers, missing padding, and so on.

Note that neither compact mode nor condensed mode support touch interaction. Even on a desktop with a touch screen, users will have difficulty selecting rows or using controls inside the cells with their fingers.

For more information on cozy and compact modes, see content density.

 

 

 

 

Analytical table in compact mode
Analytical table in compact mode
Analytical table in condensed mode - more items on the same screen real estate
Analytical table in condensed mode - more items on the same screen real estate

Column Header

The column header provides the label for the corresponding column and access to the column header menu.

Columns are resized as follows:

  • Mouse interaction: The user drags the separator line between two columns (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: Resizable). Double-clicking the line optimizes the column according to the length of the data currently visible and the label of the column header (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: Autoresizable).
  • Touch interaction: The user clicks or taps the column header to reveal two buttons: one to show the column header menu and one for resizing. The user drags the latter to resize the column.

When the user resizes a column, the adaptation of the column width depends on how the column widths are set:

  • If column widths are set in pixel-based units (px, em, rem), the resized column is adapted and subsequent columns are moved accordingly. The width of all other columns is not affected.
    If all the columns together do not use up the full width of the table control, empty space is added. If all the columns together exceed the width of the table control, a scrollbar appears.
  • If all column widths are set as percentages or “auto”, resizing one column automatically resizes one or more other columns. Resizing can also affect the position of the resized column. This option utilizes the full width of the table and ensures that no white space is added. A scrollbar appears only if all or most of the columns become to narrow. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, you can set a minimum width per column. However, this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are resized automatically. End users can still reduce the column width to below the defined minimum (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: width, minWidth).

Users can rearrange columns by dragging the column header to another position (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: enableColumnReordering).

Column header
Column header
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Columns do not use up the available space
Columns do not use up the available space

Column Header Menu

For each column, a menu can contain the following menu items (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumnMenu, property: Visible):

  • Sort Ascending/Descending (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: showSortMenuEntries)
  • Free text filter (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: showFilterMenuEntries)
  • Group
  • Totals
  • Freeze from the first to the last specified column (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: enableColumnFreeze)

For each column, the menu can be replaced by an app-specific menu.

Column header menu
Column header menu

Sort

The column header menu can provide two sort options (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: sortProperty, showSortMenuEntry):

  • Sort Ascending
  • Sort Descending

The user selects one of these options to sort the corresponding column accordingly (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

Sort settings in column header menu
Sort settings in column header menu

Filter

The column header menu can provide a search field for entering free text (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: filterProperty, showFilterMenuEntries).

If the user enters a term in the input field and triggers the search by pressing ENTER when the focus is on the filter input field, the analytical table is filtered by the corresponding column and value (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, properties: filtered, filterProperty, filterValue, filterOperator, sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: filterType).

Note that the filter may return zero results, in which case, the table might be empty.

General recommendations for filtering:

  • If filtering is a main use case, choose the filter bar or any other filtering UI over the built-in free text filter.
  • Only use the free text filter if filtering is a secondary use case and if the filter bar is too heavy.
Free text filter in column header menu
Free text filter in column header menu

Group

The column header menu can provide the option to group by this column (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: sortProperty).

One group collects all items with the same value within the corresponding column.

Group setting in column header menu
Group setting in column header menu

If line items are grouped in a column, every group is provided with a collapsible or expandable group header (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: grouped). The header text consists of the column name and the value for the corresponding group (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: groupHeaderFormatter). Several grouping levels are possible.

The corresponding column can be hidden to avoid duplicates (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: showIfGrouped). Exercise caution when using this option since hiding the column changes the table layout and may lead to confusion.

Group headers and the corresponding columns are shown – The relevant data is duplicated
Group headers and the corresponding columns are shown – The relevant data is duplicated
Group headers shown, the corresponding column hidden – No duplicates
Group headers shown, the corresponding column hidden – No duplicates

Aggregation

The column header menu can provide the option to show or hide aggregation totals for this column.

Aggregation in column header menu
Aggregation in column header menu

Intermediate aggregations are shown at group level for the corresponding columns if the group contains more than one line item (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: summed).

Group total
Group total

The overall aggregation is shown at the bottom of the analytical table.

Overal aggregation
Overal aggregation

Freeze Columns

The column header menu can provide the option to freeze columns (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: enableColumnFreeze). Selecting Freeze freezes all columns up to the one in which the operation was triggered (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: fixedColumnCount).

When Freeze is triggered, the menu item changes to Unfreeze for the corresponding column.

Freeze setting in column header menu
Freeze setting in column header menu

Line Item Level

A line item contains a set of cells and provides options for selecting the item.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height.

(sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: rowHeight)

Line item
Line item

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Cell Level

A cell provides one data point.

It can contain one of the following controls to display this data point:

While it is technically possible to also use other controls, doing so could lead to issues with alignment, condensed mode, screen reader support, and keyboard support.

If you use text, use only single-line text to keep the same row height. Truncate if necessary as this prevents adverse side effects when scrolling vertically (sap.m.Text, property: wrapping, value: false). Do not wrap.

Cell
Cell

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a table. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

When opened, the context menu gets the row and column context, except for special columns (such as the selection column) or special rows (like group headers). Context menus can be implemented for a specific table, row, or cell (not recommended for editable cells).

By default, the analytical table provides a context menu on the group headers (for example, Expand, Collapse, …). Otherwise, no default context menus are provided.

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a table is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Analytical table with context menu
Analytical table with context menu

Guidelines

Data Density vs. Complexity

The analytical table can be used to display and work with large amounts of data. Unfortunately, the analytical table has a high data density and therefore conveys an immediate feeling of complexity.

Only show tables with a lot of data as a last resort. To make the data easier to read, you should instead try the following:

  • Break down the data into manageable chunks and allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Try to avoid horizontal scrolling in the default delivery.

Try to minimize the number of columns, especially if there is a large number of rows.

Table Title

Implement the table title by using a title control in a toolbar.

Use a table title only if the title of the table is not indicated in the surrounding area.

Do not use a table title if it simply repeats text that is already above the table. For example:

  • A pricing conditions table is the only control on a tab labeled Pricing Conditions.
  • A section or subsection on an object page contains only one table.

Use a table title if you need the item count, table toolbar, or variant management. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a table title, such as Items.
Exception: If the surrounding area contains the table title, and both the item count and toolbar can be added to the surrounding area, no additional table title is needed.
Example: An object page (sub-)section contains only one table. In this case, add the item count and the table toolbar to the (sub-)section header.

If you use a table title, show either a title for the table, with or without variant management, or an item count in the following format:

Items (2,534).

The item count in the table title includes all the visible items that a user can reach by scrolling or expanding groups. Group headers are not included.

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items.

Developer Hint
Assistive technologies (such as screen readers) use the title to create a hierarchical site map for faster navigation. In addition, screen readers use the title as the label for the table.

If you don’t use a title (for example, to avoid repetition), make sure that the table is connected to another meaningful on-screen text that can be used as a label for assistive technologies. You can do this using the method addAriaLabelledBy.

Multiple Selection

  • We strongly recommend using the multi-selection plug-in. This ensures that all items selected using Select All or as part of a range are included – even if some items were not initially loaded in the front end. This is not the case if you use the multi-toggle option.
  • Do not limit the range selection for the multi-selection plug-in unless you have to.
    • If the dataset is small and/or completely available in the front-end, set the limit property to 0 to enable the Select All option and allow users to select any range.
    • If you have a large dataset, set a limit on the number of selected items to avoid performance issues. Also bear in mind that some actions won’t be helpful if the dataset is too big (for example, a delete operation on 2 million database entries).

In multiple selection mode (multi toggle), do not show checkboxes in the first data column in the default delivery to avoid confusion.

Don't
Do not add checkboxes to the first column
Do not add checkboxes to the first column

Loading Data

To indicate that the table is currently loading items, use the busy state (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Columns – Best Practices

Minimize the number of columns. Avoid the need to scroll horizontally in the default delivery.

By default, the analytical table assigns the same width to each column. We recommend overwriting this default to provide optimal space for your content (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: width).

If you define the column width in pixels or rems, resizing a column affects only the width of this specific column. Reducing the size of the browser window results in a scrollbar. If the user resizes a column, and the total width of all columns exceeds the table width, a scrollbar appears. If the columns do not take up the full table width, white space appears to the right of the last column.

If you define the column width as a percentage, resizing one column affects the width of several or all columns. Reducing the size of the browser window truncates the texts. This ensures that the columns fill up all the available space. A scrollbar appears only if width of all the columns still exceeds the table width after the automatic width adjustments. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, you can set a minimum width per column. However, this this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users can still reduce the column width to below the defined minimum (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: width, minWidth).

If you set the column width to “auto”, the behavior is the same as for “percentage”. However, unlike “percentage”, “auto” distributes the columns equally.

To decide on how to set the column width (pixel/rem/em vs. percent/auto), keep the following in mind:

  • For tables with only 2 to 3 columns, use pixel-based units. This ensures that the values in the columns are not spread over the whole screen on wide screens, which improves the readability of the line items.
  • For tables with many columns, where a horizontal scrollbar is usually needed, use pixel based units. This avoids unintended side effects when resizing columns.
  • For all other tables, use whatever fits your case better.

Be cautious when mixing columns with pixel-based and percentage-based widths. While this can be helpful in some cases, it can also cause even more side effects when resizing a column. If you are using percentage-based widths for one or more columns, consider not allowing end users to resize columns at all.

Optimize the column width for its initial visible content, including the column header texts. If this is not possible (for example, if showing the full texts would result in extremely wide columns), let the texts truncate. End users can change the width of the column to read the full text, as needed.

Maintain a constant column width and avoid adjusting it automatically when the content changes.

Always keep to one line of text. Do not wrap.

Don't
In the default delivery, the initial visible content should not be truncated
In the default delivery, the initial visible content should not be truncated
Don't
Never wrap texts
Never wrap texts

Column Headers – Best Practices

For each column, provide a label in the column header. In the default delivery, do not truncate the column header texts. Only let the text truncate if showing the full text would make the column too wide. Never wrap the text.

Content Alignment

For alignment of cell content, follow the guidelines below.

Left-align: text, IDs, phone numbers, URLs, passwords, and email addresses.

Left-alignment of text
Left-alignment of text

Right-align: numbers, except IDs, to ensure comparability of numbers and amounts.

Right-alignment of numbers
Right-alignment of numbers

Right-align amounts with currencies to the cell and align them in terms of their respective decimal points.

This ensures that amounts with different currencies are shown correctly, whether these currencies have 0, 2, or 3 decimals.

For aligning to the decimal point, use the sap.ui.uinified.Currency control.

Alignment to decimal point
Alignment to decimal point

Right-align dates and times.

This ensures comparability for most formats and locales.

Right-alignment of dates
Right-alignment of dates

Left-align status information.

Left-align status information
Left-align status information

Center-align icons.

Left-align micro charts.

XS micro charts in condensed mode
XS micro charts in condensed mode

Content Formatting

Key Identifier

Use a bold label or an emphasized link as the key identifier of an item. In the default delivery, show the key identifier in the first column.

Emphasized link
Emphasized link

For strings with IDs, use one of the following:

  • Show the ID in brackets after the corresponding string. Use this format if sorting, grouping, or filtering is only needed on the string, but not on the ID.
  • Show the ID in a separate column. Use this format if sorting, grouping, or filtering on the string and the ID is needed.
Text and ID in one column – Sorting, filtering, and grouping only on the text
Text and ID in one column – Sorting, filtering, and grouping only on the text
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link
Text and ID in two columns – Allows sorting, filtering, and grouping on both
Text and ID in two columns – Allows sorting, filtering, and grouping on both
If displayed as a link, use only the string as the link, not the ID
If displayed as a link, use only the string as the link, not the ID

Truncation

Avoid truncation of typical content in the default delivery (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: width). However, since the columns are resizable, do not worry too much if truncation occurs as columns can still be enlarged if necessary.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must also have the same height. If you need to decide between truncation and different row heights, choose truncation. Do not wrap.

Optimize column width for typical content, not all content
Optimize column width for typical content, not all content

Number of Links

Are there too many links? Use subtle links to avoid a wall of links. Standard links are also emphasized more if they are surrounded by subtle links.

For example, a financial table consists of several columns with summarized cells. A summarized cell shows the total sum of several database entries. Each sum should be a link to a report that shows details about which database entries produce the total sum. The line item identifier should also be a link that provides more detail about the line item itself. Use a standard or emphasized link for the item identifier, and subtle links for the summarized cells.

Emphasized links, links, subtle links, and text
Emphasized links, links, subtle links, and text

Missing Value

If there is no value for a cell, leave it blank. Do not display text as N/A.

Leave empty fields blank
Leave empty fields blank

Numbering Items

In terms of numbering items:

  • If the item number is more like an ID with regard to its description, use ID formatting as described above.
  • In all other cases, use a separate column for the item number.
Add a separate column for the item number
Add a separate column for the item number

Status

For status information, use semantic colors on the foreground elements.

For status information on text, use an object status.

Semantic colors on text
Semantic colors on text

Micro Charts

Use only the following micro charts: Bullet, comparison, stacked bar. When using micro charts, use them in size XS.

Micro charts in an analytical table
Micro charts in an analytical table

Empty Tables

Avoid empty analytical tables. If necessary, provide instructions on how to fill the analytical table with data (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, properties: noDataText, showNoData).

Examples:

  • If a table is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the table with data.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    To start, set the relevant filters.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No data found. Try adjusting the filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, a search is also offered, or only the search is offered).
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of filter settings).
Provide meaningful instructions
Provide meaningful instructions

Invalid State

To show an invalid state of the analytical table within the list report floorplan, show an overlay on the analytical table and the corresponding toolbar (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: showOverlay). The overlay prevents user interactions.

Use this within the list report floorplan if filter settings have been changed but the analytical table has not yet been updated.

Analytical table with invalid data
Analytical table with invalid data

Item States

To show that an item has been modified, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string (Modified) in an additional column with the label Editing Status.

In the default delivery, add a column directly behind the key identifier.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string Contains errors in the Editing Status column and highlight the row accordingly. This string replaces the Modified string.

A modified item with an error
A modified item with an error

To show that an item is locked, add a transparent-style button with the corresponding icon and the text Locked by [name] in the Editing Status column.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in draft state, add a transparent-style button with the text Draft in the Editing Status column.

Item in draft state
Item in draft state

Show only one state at a time.

Numbers and Units

Show the unit of measurement in one of the following ways:

The number and unit are in the same cell. Do this if sorting, filtering, or grouping by the unit of measurement are not needed.

Use a currency control to display the concatenated string.

Number and unit of measurement in one cell
Number and unit of measurement in one cell

The number and unit are in separate columns. Do this if sorting, filtering, or grouping by the unit of measurement are a common use case.

Note that this column can be hidden or moved independently of the column containing the corresponding number. Therefore, be sure to have clear labels for both columns to communicate the dependency.

Number and unit of measurement in two columns
Number and unit of measurement in two columns

If the unit of measurement is the same for all rows, show the unit of measurement in the column header. Otherwise, show the unit of measurement within the row.

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, drag and drop is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose, such as (toolbar) buttons.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

Do not use drag and drop for rearranging items in the analytical table. The analytical table is mainly used for grouping items and for calculating the totals per group and column. Moving items to another group also means that a value of the dropped item changes: because grouping is based on values in a column, the dropped item needs to take on the value of the target group for the corresponding column.

Example:
A table is grouped by availability. An item is moved from the group “Not Available” to the group “In Stock”. In this case, the moved item needs to change its availability to “In Stock” to match the target group. Because changing the value in this way doesn’t make sense, rearranging items is not permitted in analytical tables.

Don't
Do not use drag and drop for rearranging items in the analytical table
Do not use drag and drop for rearranging items in the analytical table

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar). Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

The context menu can be triggered for the table, row, or cell. However, we do not recommend using context menus for cells: because the content of a cell is a different touch target than the cell itself, opening a cell context menu via touch is quite hard, even in cozy mode.

Do not combine context menus with condensed mode: editable controls fill the entire space inside a cell. Because of this, context menus cannot be opened at all with touch or mouse interaction.

Actions

Multiple Items

To trigger actions on multiple items, use a multiselection analytical table (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: selectionMode, value: MultiToggle). Offer the corresponding actions in the table toolbar.

Do not offer action triggering on multiple items if the table is generally expected to have fewer than 10 items. In this case, try to use the responsive table instead of the analytical table.

Single Item

To trigger actions on a single item (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: selectionMode, value: Single):

  • Show the actions on the table toolbar.
  • In rare cases, show the actions within the line item. One example would be an Add to Cart button in a shopping application. Since these actions are repeated in every line and thus use a lot of screen real estate, do this only for a maximum of one or two actions. Provide a separate column per action. Use a button, unless the action trigger belongs to a link.

To trigger navigation on line item level choose one of the following options:

  • Use a link for the attribute that identifies the row. Clicking the link triggers the navigation.
  • Add the RowActions column and show the navigation indicator (  ) at the end of the row. The navigation arrow triggers the navigation.

Use the RowActions column only for one or both of the following actions:

  • Navigate to details page ( )
  • Delete ( )

The RowActions column does not provide a column header text. It is fixed and will not scroll away. Users also cannot personalize this column.

Single Cell

For triggering actions on a single cell, create the corresponding click event. Do not use the cell click event if the cell contains interactive controls, such as links.

Add Items

For adding items, place an Add or Create text button on the table toolbar.

  • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
  • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.

Show new items as the first item of the table, with a visual highlight at the beginning of the row.

For more details, see the guidelines for managing objects (including subarticles).

Enabling/Disabling Actions

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection:

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user how many items will be affected. Let users choose whether to apply the action anyway or cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

If the action was applied and the items are still available, keep them selected.

Message for action which applies to a part of a selection
Message for action which applies to a part of a selection

Editable Content

For editable content, only use the following controls, and only one control per cell:

Only these controls are optimized for all viewing modes of the analytical table.

If you need edit mode, change your text controls, such as label, text, link, object status, icons, and currencies, to editable controls as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before. You can do this by exchanging the controls, for example, from sap.m.Text to sap.m.Input.

For mass editing items:

  • Provide multiselection.
  • Provide an Edit button.
  • If several items are selected, clicking the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

This is similar to mass editing in the split-screen layout floorplan.

Warning
Do not offer editing for summarized cells. A summarized cell shows the total sum of several database entries. Changing the total sum does not make sense since it is unclear how this sum is divided between the different database entries.
Interactive controls – Inline
Interactive controls – Inline

View Settings

There are several ways to show Sort, Filter, and/or Group settings:

  • Column header menu: In all cases, show the corresponding settings in the column header menu.
  • View settings dialog: Simple and more flexible with regard to filter settings. No advantage for sorting. Allows the user to ungroup grouped columns.tables with a medium amount of items.
  • Table personalization dialog: Provides complex options for sorting items by several levels and allows the user to ungroup grouped columns. It also provides a query-builder-like approach for filter settings. The complexity of the options is also its downside. Use the table personalization dialog for tables with a large number of items.
  • If filtering is a main use case, use the filter bar. In this case, avoid offering additional filter settings on the table. If you do, the filter settings on the table work only on the result set provided by the filter bar.

Always be careful when synchronizing the settings in the dialog with the settings from the column header menu.

Trigger the dialogs in one of the following ways:

  • View settings dialog: Provide several buttons, one for each of these view settings. Each button opens the view settings dialog on the corresponding page.
  • Table personalization dialog: Provide a settings button, which opens the table personalization dialog containing all pages.

Use only the view settings you really need. For example, do not offer grouping if it does not support your use case.

 

Column header menu with view settings
Column header menu with view settings
Table toolbar with triggers for view settings dialog
Table toolbar with triggers for view settings dialog
Table toolbar with trigger for table personalization dialog
Table toolbar with trigger for table personalization dialog

Persist the view settings. When a user reopens the app, show the analytical table with the same sort, filter, group, and aggregation settings as last defined by this user.

Sort

To display the current sort state, an icon is shown in the column header of the last sorted column. This icon indicates the sort direction (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

For the default sort setting, sort by the column that identifies the row, which is usually the first column in default delivery. Use a meaningful sort order, such as alphabetical order for text, numeric order for numbers, or chronological order for dates.

Column, sorted ascending
Column, sorted ascending
Column, sorted descending
Column, sorted descending

The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order.

For each column, provide a meaningful sort order. For example:

  • Sort text alphabetically
  • Sort numbers by their value
  • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
    • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
    • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
    • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
    • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first

Filter

To display the current filter state, an icon is shown in the column header of the filtered column (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: filtered, filterProperty, filterValue, filterOperator, defaultFilterOperator, filterType).

Column, filtered
Column, filtered

Group

To display the current group state, group headers are shown. Show the following text in the group header (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: grouped, showIfGrouped, groupHeaderFormatter):

[Label of the grouped column]: [Grouping value]

If there is no grouping value, show the following text:
[Label of the grouped column]: (Not Available)

This is the case if you have a group of items that don’t have a value for the grouped column.

 

Set the property collapseRecursive to “false” to keep subgroups expanded even after collapsing and expanding the parent group.

Group headers, several levels
Group headers, several levels

On non-touch devices, right-clicking a group header opens the group header menu. On touch devices, the same menu is opened by using the menu icon on the right side of a group header.

The group header menu provides several options:

  • Show/Hide: Shows or hides the column in the table layout, although it is grouped.
  • Ungroup: When the user ungroups a column, the corresponding group headers disappear. If the column was hidden, it is shown again as a separate column.
  • Ungroup All: The columns are shown again.
  • Move Up: Rearranges the grouping levels hierarchy by moving the selected group above the group that is one level higher up in the hierarchy.
  • Move Down: Rearranges the grouping levels hierarchy by moving the selected group below the group that is one level lower down in the hierarchy.
  • Collapse Level: Collapses all groups on the corresponding grouping level.
  • Collapse All: All groups are collapsed.
Group header menu
Group header menu
Group header on touch devices
Group header on touch devices

In general:

  • Offer grouping on objects and attributes.
  • Do not offer grouping on measures.
  • If appropriate, offer reasonable grouping by default, but do not exaggerate. As a rule of thumb, use up to three group levels.
  • Provide more space for the first column. Grouping needs an indent per group level. Extra space in the first column prevents truncated text.

Aggregate

To display the current aggregation state, the total sum of the corresponding column is shown at the bottom of the table.

If items are grouped, an intermediate sum is shown:

  • At the bottom of each group if the group is expanded.
  • In the group header if the group is collapsed.

(sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: summed)

When aggregating amounts with different units of measurement, show an asterisk (*) in the aggregation rows.

When sorting an aggregated column, only the leaf nodes of a group are included by default. If each measure column currently displays a single unit of measurement, the order of the groups can also be affected.

For example:
Let’s assume that table items are grouped by Country/Region and aggregated by Total Net Amount. If you sort the Total Net Amount column in descending order, the largest total net amount is shown first.

Warning
Only enable sorting by totals if each column has a single unit of measurement. This prevents inconsistencies in the sorting behavior, which depends on user settings, such as filter settings or the columns currently displayed.
Developer Hint
To allow sorting by totals, the following conditions must be met:

  1. For each measure column, multiple units must not occur in the displayed data, regardless of whether or not totals are shown.
  2. The autoExpandMode of the AnalyticalBinding must be set to Sequential. Note that the default is Bundled.

In general:

  • Offer aggregation on measures, but not on objects or attributes.
  • Avoid aggregations on the first three columns for the default delivery. As soon as grouping is used together with aggregations, collapsing a group shows the aggregation on the group header. This conflicts with the group name.
  • Where appropriate, offer reasonable aggregation by default.
Aggregation and groups
Aggregation and groups

Personalization

Only offer personalization if you need more columns than a tablet screen can display at any one time, which is usually five.

Persist the column layout. When a user reopens the app, show the analytical table with the same column layout settings as last defined by this user.

Add, Remove, and Rearrange Columns

To add, remove, or rearrange columns, use one of the following:

  • The table personalization dialog: It offers some simple settings for column layout. Use this if you have only a few columns to choose from and/or you use the view settings dialog.
  • The p13n dialog: Besides various complex view settings, it also provides settings for column layout. Use this if you have a large number of columns to choose from and/or you use this dialog anyway for view settings.

In both cases, trigger the dialog via the settings button in the table toolbar.

You can also use drag and drop to rearrange columns (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnReordering). If you allow rearranging via drag and drop as well as via a dialog, keep both places in sync.

Resize Columns

Resizing columns works differently on touch and non-touch devices.

  • Non-touch devices: Drag and drop the column separator on the right side of the column. Double-clicking the column separator optimizes the width of the column for the data currently loaded into the front end, which is usually about 100 rows.
  • Touch devices: Clicking the column header reveals two buttons: one for opening the column header menu, another one for resizing the column. Drag and drop this second button to resize the column.

Freeze Columns

For freezing columns, offer the setting in the column header menu (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: enableColumnFreeze).

Selecting Freeze on a column freezes all columns from the first one to the one where Freeze is selected. On this column, the menu entry changes from Freeze to Unfreeze.

Frozen column
Frozen column

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, you can display a highlight indicator in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to show:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry-specific or process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”.

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users exactly what is wrong. Make sure that you provide this information within the table row, ideally in the same color.

For details on the use of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, aggregation: rowSettingsTemplate)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Tables in Object Pages

In the object page, we advise against using analytical, grid, and tree tables. Instead, use a responsive table and offer navigation to a list report with the table types mentioned above.

For more information on the use of tables within the object page, see the Tables section of the Object Page article.

Export to Spreadsheet

On the table toolbar, apps can provide a menu button for exporting table data to a spreadsheet. For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button
'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button

Properties

sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable

The following additional properties are available for the analytical table:

  • The property: width defines the width of the analytical table.
  • The property: rowHeight defines the height of each row in the analytical table. Since the height required is calculated automatically by the analytical table, this property is only needed rarely.
  • The property: columnHeaderHeight defines the height of the column headers. Since the height required is calculated automatically by the analytical table, this property is only needed rarely.
  • The property: columnHeaderVisible can be used to hide the column headers. Always show the column headers.
  • The property: showColumnVisibilityMenu provides an additional entry in the column header menu that allows columns to be shown or hidden. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Do not use this property.
  • The property: columnVisibilityMenuSorter is used for sorting the columns inside the column header menu if showing and hiding columns is provided in the menu. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Do not use this property.
  • The property: visibleRowCount defines the height of the analytical table. Show as many rows as fit on the screen.
  • The property: visibleRowCountMode defines whether the height of the analytical table is fixed or automatically calculated based on the space provided by the underlying container. For automatic calculation, make sure that all rows have the same height.
  • The property: minimumAutoRowCount defines the minimum number of rows that must be shown if the property: visibleRowCountMode is set to “auto”. Show at least three to five rows.
  • The property: firstVisibleRow defines the first row shown in the visible area of the analytical table. The analytical table is scrolled accordingly.
  • The property: allowColumnReordering is deprecated. Use the property: enableColumnReordering instead.
  • The property: editable does not have a visible effect. Please do not use it.
  • The property: threshold is used for optimizing lazy loading of items. In most cases, the default value is appropriate.
  • The property: enableGrouping is experimental and does not have a meaningful effect on the analytical table. Do not use it.
  • The property: sumOnTop shows additional aggregation values on the group header, even if the group is expanded. Do not use it.
  • The property: enableCustomFilter changes the filter entry in the column header menu from an edit box to Filter…. Selecting this entry throws an event that apps can react to, for example, by opening a dialog. In general, you should choose the built-in filter over your own implementation. Specifically, keep filtering via the column header menu simple, while offering more advanced options via the table personalization dialog.
  • The property: enableBusyIndicator has not yet been fully implemented. Do not use it.
  • The property: title adds a line of text on top of the analytical table. Do not use it. To add a title to the table, use a toolbar.
  • The property: footer adds a short text at the bottom of the table.
  • The property: Busy sets the analytical table to busy state. While in busy state, the whole table cannot be used and items cannot be read due to an overlay.
  • The property: Tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: alternateRowColors displays the rows with alternating background colors (“banded rows”). Do not use it.

sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn

The following additional properties are available for the analytical column:

  • The property: leadingProperty is used for data binding.
  • The property: inResult is used for data binding.
  • The property: visible defines whether a column is shown or hidden.
  • The property: name defines the name shown in the column header menu for showing and hiding columns. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Please do not use this property.
  • The property: headerSpan defines whether one column header is used for one or several columns. To prevent adverse side effects, always use one column header for only one single column. Please do not use this property.
  • The property: Tooltip does not have an effect. Please do not use it.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Grid Table

A grid table contains a set of data that is structured in rows and columns. It allows the user to scroll in both directions and can handle large numbers of items and columns.

Usage

Use the grid table if:

  • The cell level and the spatial relationship between cells are more important than the line item. Examples include spreadsheet analyses and waterfall charts. Note that a grid table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You have to work on more than 1,000 rows. In this case, the grid table is easier to handle. In contrast to the responsive table, the architecture of the grid table is optimized for handling large numbers of items. Note that a grid table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktop and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • Comparing items is a major use case. In this case, a grid table might be more appropriate than a responsive table. In the grid table, each cell contains only one data point. In contrast, the responsive table is more flexible regarding line items, including the ability to add more data points per cell and also the pop-in function. Both make comparisons more difficult. Note that a grid table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You need an analytical table, but you cannot provide an analytical binding on the technical side. In this case, a grid table will do the work. Note that the grid table provides only one level of grouping, no aggregation options, and is also not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.

Do not use the grid table if:

  • You need a table. The responsive table is the default table in SAP Fiori. Additional use cases where you might need the responsive table include:
    • The focus is on working on line items, not on cells. The responsive table is optimized for displaying complete items on all devices, such as file browsing and a list of documents you want to act on, like purchase orders and purchase requisitions.
    • Selecting one or several items is the main use case and details are needed to choose the correct item.
    • Line items are independent of each other and no operation across columns is needed.
    • You want to have only one implementation for all devices.
  • The main use case is choosing one item from a very small number of items with no additional details. A select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • The main use case is choosing one out of several items with only a few details per item. A list might be more appropriate. Pay attention to the layout of the list item to ensure that it has a pleasant appearance.
  • Data needs to be structured in a hierarchical manner. Use a tree table instead. Note that neither the tree table nor the grid table are responsive. You will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones and tablets.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use charts.
  • You just need it for layout reasons. In this case, use a layout container such as HBox or VBox.
  • You need read-only or editable field-value pairs. Use a form instead. The grid table is not optimized for form-like input navigation.

Responsiveness

A grid table is available for desktops and tablets, but not in smartphone sizes. It supports touch devices, but is not optimized for small screens.

If you use a grid table, note that you have to implement a fallback solution for small screens. This fallback solution does not need to support all use cases.

You could create a fallback by using a responsive table, but a completely different solution, such as showing charts in a read-only case, might be more appropriate.

Grid table shown on a desktop
Grid table shown on a desktop
Grid table shown on a tablet
Grid table shown on a tablet

Layout

The column header allows the user to resize and rearrange columns. It also provides access to a menu with column-specific commands.

The collection of items, or rows, occupies the main part of the grid table.

The selector cells allow the user to select one or more items.

The Select All button selects or deselects all items.

Schematic visualization of the grid table
Schematic visualization of the grid table

Components

A grid table does not consist of other elements. However, it is common to use a toolbar above the grid table.

The toolbar can contain entry points for the view settings dialog and the table personalization dialog or for the p13n dialog, as well as view switches in the form of a segmented button, and buttons for Add, Edit, and other actions.

Behavior and Interaction

A grid table is quite restricted in terms of its content.

Table Level

Scroll

A grid table allows horizontal and vertical scrolling (sap.ui.table.Table, property: navigationMode, value: Scrollbar).

You can add any number of line items to the grid table, which uses “lazy loading”.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.Table, property: rowHeight).

The grid table is optimized to allow faster scrolling within the first 1000 items.

Scroll bar
Scroll bar

Select

Selection Mode

Selection for a grid table depends on the chosen selection mode. The following options are available:

No selection: Items cannot be selected. (property: selectionMode = None)

A non-selection grid table
A non-selection grid table

Single selection: One item in the grid table can be selected. A row selector column is shown. (property: selectionMode = Single)

A single-selection grid table
A single-selection grid table

Multiple selection: One or more items can be selected. The grid table provides a column with checkboxes on the left-hand side. Clicking a checkbox toggles the state of the corresponding row from deselected to selected and back. The Shift key can be used to select a range.

For multiple selection, you can choose between two variants.

  • Multi-toggle mode (property: selectionMode = MultiToggle)
  • Multi-selection plug-in (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin)

These variants behave differently when the user selects more items than are currently loaded in the front end.

Multi-toggle

In multi-toggle mode, you can offer a Select All checkbox to the left of the column header (property: enableSelectAll). Selecting this checkbox selects or deselects all items that are currently loaded in the front end. All other items are not selected/deselected. If the application data is stored in the back end, scrolling down further can reveal additional unselected items. The same can happen with range selections if not all items in the selected range have been loaded to the front end.

Multi-selection plug-in

If you use this plug-in instead of the multi-toggle selection mode, the behavior for range selection and Select All changes:

  • By default, a dedicated Deselect All button replaces the Select All checkbox. There is no default UI element for selecting all items.
  • You can set a limit for the number of items that can be selected (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin, property: limit). This limit has the following effect:
    • The range that can be selected using the Shift key is limited to the specified number of items (default = 200). The table automatically scrolls back to the last selected item. Users can select more items by selecting additional ranges (the specified limit applies each time).
    • If the selection limit is set to 0, a Select All checkbox is shown. There is also no limit on the number of items that can be selected in a range. All selected items are loaded, which can lead to performance issues for large data sets.
  • If selected items are not already available in the front end, they are loaded automatically by the plug-in and set as selected.
A multiselection grid table
A multiselection grid table
Using the multi-selection plug-in with a limit
Using the multi-selection plug-in with a limit

Selection Behavior

An item can be selected in different ways, depending on the configuration of the grid table (sap.ui.table.Table, property: selectionBehavior):

  • Row: An item is selected by clicking the checkbox or the row. Use this option for multi-selection grid tables if clicking a row or a cell is not used for anything else.
  • RowSelector: An item is selected only by clicking the checkbox in the selector cell. Use this option if clicking the row (or a cell inside the row) is used for something else, such as navigation.
  • RowOnly: An item is selected only by clicking the row, and not using checkboxes in the selector cells. Use this for single-selection grid tables if clicking a row or a cell is not used for another purpose, such as navigation.

Compact, Cozy, and Condensed

Like all SAP Fiori controls, the grid table is shown in compact mode on a desktop and in cozy mode on tablets.

For a desktop, you can also display even more rows on the same screen height by adding the condensed mode in addition to the compact mode. This renders less white space for each item.

Note that the condensed content density has always to be set in addition to compact. Do not use condensed on its own. Do not mix condensed with cozy. Doing so could lead to unpredictable and / or unwanted results, e.g. cozy sized controls in condensed sized containers, missing padings, etc.

Note that neither compact mode nor condensed mode can be interacted with via touch. Even on a desktop with a touch screen, users will have difficulty selecting rows or using controls inside the cells when using their fingers.

Furthermore, condensed mode is not available for Internet Explorer 9. If condensed mode is to be used, please provide a fallback.

For more information on cozy and compact modes, see content density.

Column Header

The column header provides the label for the corresponding column and access to the column header menu.

Columns are resized as follows:

  • Mouse interaction: The user drags the separator line between two columns (sap.ui.table.Column, property: Resizable). Double-clicking the line optimizes the column according to the length of the currently visible data and the label of the column header (sap.ui.table.Column, property: Autoresizable).
  • Touch interaction: The user taps the column header to reveal two buttons – one to show the column header menu, and one for resizing. The user drags the latter to resize the column.

After resizing a column, the adaptation of the column widths depends on how the column width is set:

  • If column widths are set in pixel-based units (px, em, rem), the corresponding column is adapted and the columns that follow are moved accordingly. The width of all other columns is not affected.
    If all the columns together take up less width than the table control, an empty space is added. In case all columns together take up more width than the table control, a scrollbar appears. (sap.ui.table.Column, property: width)
  • If all column widths are set in percentage or “auto”, resizing one column might also lead to the automatic resizing of some or all other columns. The position of the resized column might also be affected. This is done to ensure that the whole table width is used and no white space is added. A scrollbar appears only if all or most of the columns shrink significantly. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, a minimum width can be set per column. Please be aware that this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users are still able to reduce the column width below the provided minimum. (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: width, minWidth)

Columns can be rearranged by dragging the column header to another position (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnReordering).

Column header
Column header
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Less columns than space available
Less columns than space available

Column Header Menu

For each column, a menu can contain the following menu items (sap.ui.table.ColumnMenu, property: visible):

  • Sort Ascending/Descending (sap.ui.table.Column, property: showSortMenuEntries)
  • Free text filter (sap.ui.table.Column, property: showFilterMenuEntries)
  • Group (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableGrouping)
  • Freeze from the first to the last specified column (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnFreeze)

For each column, the menu can be replaced by an app-specific menu.

Column header menu
Column header menu

Sort

The column header menu can provide two sort options (sap.ui.table. Column, properties: sortProperty, showSortMenuEntry):

  • Sort Ascending
  • Sort Descending

The user selects one of these options to sort the corresponding column accordingly (sap.ui.table. Column, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

Sort settings in column header menu
Sort settings in column header menu

Filter

The column header menu can provide a search field for entering free text (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: filterProperty, showFilterMenuEntries).

If the user enters a term in the input field and triggers the search by pressing Enter when the focus is on the filter input field, the grid table is filtered by the corresponding column and value (sap.ui.table.Table, properties: filtered, filterProperty, filterValue, filterOperator, sap.ui.table.Column, property: filterType).

Note that the filter may return zero results, in which case, the table might be empty.

General recommendations for filtering:

  • If filtering is a main use case, choose the filter bar or any other filtering UI over the built-in free text filter.
  • Only use the free text filter if filtering is a secondary use case and if the filter bar is too heavy.
Free text filter in column header menu
Free text filter in column header menu

Group

The column header menu can provide the option to group by this column (sap.ui.table.Column, property: enableGrouping).

One group collects all items with the same value within the corresponding column.

Group setting in column header menu
Group setting in column header menu

If line items are grouped in a column, every group is provided with a collapsible or expandable group header. The header text consists of the name of the value and the number of items in the specific group. Only one grouping level is possible.

Group header
Group header

Once line items have been grouped, the corresponding column is hidden. There is no built-in possibility to ungroup the grid table again. Therefore, provide a view settings dialog or table presonalization dialog to offer an additional way to group by a column and a way to ungroup the complete table.

An exception to this is when the table is grouped from the start and should not be ungrouped at all.

Group headers shown, the corresponding column hidden: no duplicates, but a confusing change
Group headers shown, the corresponding column hidden: no duplicates, but a confusing change
Warning
Note that grouping the grid table is experimental and currently works only on items loaded to the front end. Thus, scrolling down the table leads to data not being grouped as expected.

Only use this feature if you have just a few line items, all of which are loaded to the front end. If this is the case, consider using a responsive table first instead of a grid table.

Freeze Columns

The column header menu can provide the option to freeze columns (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnFreeze). Selecting Freeze freezes all columns up to the one in which the operation was triggered (sap.ui.table. Table, property: fixedColumnCount).

When Freeze is triggered, the menu item changes to Unfreeze for the corresponding column.

Freeze setting in column header menu
Freeze setting in column header menu

Line Item Level

A line item contains a set of cells and provides options for selecting the item.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.Table, property: rowHeight).

Line item
Line item

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a table or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.ui.table.Table, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a table. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

When opened, the context menu gets the row and column context, except for special columns (such as the selection column) or special rows (like group headers). Context menus can be implemented for a specific table, row, or cell (not recommended for editable cells).

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a table is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Grid table with a context menu
Grid table with a context menu

Cell Level

A cell provides one data point.

It can contain one of the following controls to display this data point:

While it is technically possible to also use other controls, doing so could lead to issues in regards to alignment, condensed mode, screen reader support, and keyboard support.

If you use text, use only single-line text to keep the same row height. Truncate if necessary as this prevents adverse side effects when scrolling vertically (sap.m.Text, property: wrapping, value: false). Do not wrap.

Cell
Cell

Guidelines

Data Density vs. Complexity

The grid table can be used to display large amounts of data. Unfortunately, the grid table has a high data density and therefore conveys an immediate feeling of complexity.

Only show tables with a lot of data as a last resort. Try the following instead:

  • Break down the data into manageable chunks and allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Try to avoid horizontal scrolling in the default delivery.

Try to minimize the number of columns, especially if there is a large number of rows.

Table Title

Implement the table title by using a title control in a toolbar.

Use a table title only if the title of the table is not indicated in the surrounding area.

Do not use a table title if it simply repeats text that is already above the table. For example:

  • A pricing conditions table is the only control on a tab labeled Pricing Conditions.
  • A section or subsection on an object page contains only one table.

Use a table title if you need the item count, table toolbar, or variant management. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a table title, such as Items.
Exception: If the surrounding area contains the table title, and both the item count and toolbar can be added to the surrounding area, no additional table title is needed.
Example: An object page (sub-)section contains only one table. In this case, add the item count and the table toolbar to the (sub-)section header.

If you use a table title, show either a title for the table, with or without variant management, or an item count in the following format:

Items (2,534).

The item count in the table title includes all the visible items that a user can reach by scrolling or expanding groups. Group headers are not included.

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items.

Developer Hint
Assistive technologies (such as screen readers) use the title to create a hierarchical site map for faster navigation. In addition, screen readers use the title as the label for the table.

If you don’t use a title (for example, to avoid repetition), make sure that the table is connected to another meaningful on-screen text that can be used as a label for assistive technologies. You can do this using the method addAriaLabelledBy.

Multiple Selection

  • We strongly recommend using the multi-selection plug-in. This ensures that all items selected using Select All or as part of a range are included – even if some items were not initially loaded in the front end. This is not the case if you use the multi-toggle option.
  • Do not limit the range selection for the multi-selection plug-in unless you have to.
    • If the dataset is small and/or completely available in the front-end, set the limit property to 0 to enable the Select All option and allow users to select any range.
    • If you have a large dataset, set a limit on the number of selected items to avoid performance issues. Also bear in mind that some actions won’t be helpful if the dataset is too big (for example, a delete operation on 2 million database entries).
  • In multiple selection mode (multi toggle), do not show checkboxes in the first data column in the default delivery to avoid confusion.
Don't
Do not add checkboxes to the first data column in the default delivery
Do not add checkboxes to the first data column in the default delivery

Loading Data

To indicate that the table is currently loading items, use the busy state. (sap.ui.table.Table, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Grid table in busy state while loading data
Grid table in busy state while loading data

Columns – Best Practices

Minimize the number of columns. Avoid the need to scroll horizontally in the default delivery.

The grid table assigns the same width to each column by default. It is recommended that you overwrite this default to provide optimal space for your content (sap.ui.table.Column, property: width).

If you define the column width in pixels or rems, resizing a column affects only the width of this specific column. Reducing the browser window size results in a scrollbar. After resizing a column, a scroll bar appears if the width of the table is not enough to show all columns. If the columns use less space than available, white space appears on the right side of the last column.

If you define the column width as a percentage, resizing one column affects the width of several or all columns. Text becomes truncated when the browser window size is reduced. This is done to make sure that all columns together fill the space of the table. A scrollbar appears only in case the automatic change of the column widths is not enough for showing all columns. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, a minimum width can be set per column. Please be aware that this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users are still able to reduce the column width below the provided minimum.

If you define the column width as “auto”, the behavior is the same as for “percentage”. In contrast to percentage, “auto” distributes the columns equally.

To decide on how to set the column width (pixel / rem / em vs. percent / auto), keep the following in mind:

  • For tables with only 2 to 3 columns, use pixel-based units. This ensures that on wide screens the values in the columns are not spread over the whole screen, which improves the readability of line items.
  • For tables with many columns, where a horizontal scrollbar is usually needed, use pixel-based units. This avoids unintended side effects when resizing columns.
  • For all other tables, use whatever fits your case better.

Be cautious with mixing columns with pixel-based and percentage-based widths. While this can be helpful in some cases, it could also cause even more unexpected side effects when resizing a column. When using percentage-based widths for one or more columns, think of the possibility to not allow end users to resize columns at all.

Optimize the column width for its initial visible content, including the column header texts. If this is not possible (for example, if showing the full texts would result in extremely wide columns), let the texts truncate. End users can change the width of the column to read the full text, as needed.

Maintain a constant column width and avoid adjusting it automatically when the content changes.

Always keep to one line of text. Do not wrap.

Don't
In the default delivery, the initial visible content should not be truncated
In the default delivery, the initial visible content should not be truncated
Don't
Never wrap texts
Never wrap texts

Column Headers – Best Practices

For each column, provide a label in the column header. In the default delivery, do not truncate the column header texts. Only let the text truncate if showing the full text would make the column too wide. Never wrap the text.

Content Alignment

For alignment of cell content, follow the guidelines below.

Left-align the following: text, IDs, phone numbers, URLs, passwords, and email addresses.

Left-alignment of text
Left-alignment of text

Right-align numbers (except IDs).

This ensures comparability of numbers and amounts.

Right-alignment of numbers
Right-alignment of numbers

Right-align amounts with currencies to the cell and align them in terms of their respective decimal points.

This ensures that amounts with different currencies are shown correctly, whether these currencies have 0, 2, or 3 decimals.

For aligning to the decimal point, use the sap.ui.uinified.Currency control.

Alignment to decimal point
Alignment to decimal point

Right-align dates and times.

This ensures comparability for most formats and locales.

Right-alignment of dates
Right-alignment of dates

Left-align status information.

Left-align status information
Left-align status information

Center-align icons.

Left-align micro charts.

XS micro charts in condensed mode
XS micro charts in condensed mode

Content Formatting

Locale Settings

Be locale-aware: show dates, times, numbers, and so on in the format corresponding to the user’s locale settings.

Key Identifier

Use a bold label or an emphasized link as the key identifier of an item. In the default delivery, show the key identifier in the first column.

Emphasized link
Emphasized link

For strings with IDs, use one of the following:

  • Show the ID in brackets after the corresponding string. Use this formatting if sorting, grouping, or filtering is only needed on the string, but not on the ID.
  • Show the ID in a separate column. Use this format if sorting, grouping, or filtering on the string and the ID is needed.
Text and ID in one column – Sorting, filtering, and grouping only on the text
Text and ID in one column – Sorting, filtering, and grouping only on the text
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link
Text and ID in two columns – Allows sorting, filtering, and grouping on both
Text and ID in two columns – Allows sorting, filtering, and grouping on both
If displayed as a link, use only the string as the link, not the ID
If displayed as a link, use only the string as the link, not the ID

Truncation

Avoid truncation of typical content in the default delivery (sap.ui.table.Column, property: width). However, since the columns are resizable, do not worry too much if truncation occurs as columns can still be enlarged if necessary.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must also have the same height. If you need to decide between truncation and different row heights, choose truncation. Do not wrap.

Optimize column width for typical content, not all content
Optimize column width for typical content, not all content

Number of Links

Are there too many links? Use subtle links to avoid a wall of links. Standard links are also emphasized more if they are surrounded by subtle links.

Emphasized links, links, subtle links, and text
Emphasized links, links, subtle links, and text

Missing Value

If there is no value for a cell, leave it blank. Do not display text as N/A.

Leave empty fields blank
Leave empty fields blank

Numbering Items

In terms of numbering items:

  • If the item number is more like an ID with regard to its description, use ID formatting as described above.
  • In all other cases, use a separate column for the item number.
Add a separate column for the item number
Add a separate column for the item number

Status

For status information, use semantic colors on the foreground elements.

For status information on text, use an object status.

Semantic colors on text
Semantic colors on text

Micro Charts

Use only the following micro charts: Bulletcomparisonstacked bar. When using micro charts, use them in size XS.

Micro charts in a grid table
Micro charts in a grid table

Empty Tables

Avoid empty grid tables. If necessary, provide instructions on how to fill the grid table with data (sap.ui.table.Table, properties: noDataText, showNoData).

Examples:

  • If a table is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the table with data.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    To start, set the relevant filters.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No data found. Try adjusting the filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, a search is also offered, or only the search is offered).
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of filter settings).
Provide meaningful instructions
Provide meaningful instructions

Invalid State

To show an invalid state of the grid table within the list report floorplan, show an overlay on the grid table and the corresponding toolbar (sap.ui.table.Table, property: showOverlay). The overlay prevents user interactions.

Use this within the list report floorplan if filter settings have been changed but the grid table is has not yet been updated.

Grid table with invalid data
Grid table with invalid data

Item States

To show that an item has been modified, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string Modified in an additional column with the label Editing Status.

In the default delivery, add a column directly behind the key identifier.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string Contains errors in the Editing Status column and highlight the row accordingly. This string replaces the Modified string.

A modified item with an error
A modified item with an error

To show that an item is locked, add a transparent-style button with the corresponding icon and the text Locked by [name] in the Editing Status column.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in draft state, add a transparent-style button with the text Draft in the Editing Status column.

Item in draft state
Item in draft state

Show only one state at a time.

Numbers and Units

Show the unit of measurement in one of the following ways:

Number and Unit in Same Cell

The number and the unit are in the same cell. Do this if sorting, filtering, or grouping by the unit of measurement are not needed.

Use a currency control to display the concatenated string.

Number and unit of measurement in one cell
Number and unit of measurement in one cell

Number and Unit in Separate Columns

The number and unit are in separate columns. Do this if sorting, filtering, or grouping by the unit of measurement are a common use case.

Note that this column can be hidden or moved independently of the column containing the corresponding number. Therefore, be sure to have clear labels for both columns to communicate the dependency.

Number and unit of measurement in two columns
Number and unit of measurement in two columns

Show the unit of measurment on the column header, if the unit of measurement is the same for all rows. If not, show the unit of measurement within the row.

Drag and Drop

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within the table, use drop targets that are between items (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between). This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Drop targets in between items
Drop targets in between items

Do not combine rearranging items and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure that there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items with sorting
Do not combine rearranging items with sorting

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, it is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

When combining rearranging items with grouping, be aware that moving items to another group also means that a value of the dropped item changes: because grouping is based on values in a column, the dropped item needs to take on the value of the target group for the corresponding column. If this is not wanted, do not allow users to rearrange items in grouped tables.

Example:
A table is grouped by availability. An item is moved from the group “Not Available” to the group “In Stock”. In this case, the moved item needs to change its availability to “In Stock” to match the target group. If changing the value doesn’t make sense make sense, only allow users to rearrange the items within the same group, or don’t allow rearranging at all.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing.
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing.

Context Menu

Use the context menu only as a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar). Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

The context menu can be triggered for the table, row, or cell. However, we do not recommend using context menus for cells: because the content of a cell is a different touch target than the cell itself, opening a cell context menu via touch is quite hard, even in cozy mode.

Do not combine context menus with condensed mode: editable controls fill the entire space inside a cell. Because of this, context menus cannot be opened at all with touch or mouse interaction.

Actions

Multiple Items

To trigger actions on multiple items, use a mutliselection grid table (sap.ui.table.Table, property: selectionMode, value: MultiToggle). Offer the corresponding actions in the table toolbar.

Do not offer action triggering on multiple items if the table is generally expected to have fewer than 10 items. In this case, try to use the responsive table instead of the grid table.

Single Item

To trigger actions on a single item (sap.ui.table. Table, property: selectionMode, value: Single):

  • Show the actions on the table toolbar.
  • In rare cases, show the actions within the line item. One example would be an Add to Cart button in a shopping application. Since these actions are repeated in every line and thus use a lot of screen real estate, do this only for a maximum of one or two actions. Provide a separate column per action. Use a button, unless the action trigger belongs to a link.

To trigger navigation on line item level, choose one of the following options:

  • Use a link for the attribute that identifies the row. Clicking the link triggers the navigation.
  • Add the RowActions column and show the navigation indicator (  ) at the end of the row. The navigation arrow triggers the navigation.

Use the RowActions column only for one or both of the following actions:

  • Navigate to details page ( )
  • Delete ( )

The RowActions column does not provide a column header text. It is fixed and will not scroll away. Users also cannot personalize this column.

Single Cell

To trigger actions on a single cell, create the corresponding click event. Do not use the cell click event if the cell contains interactive controls, such as links.

Add Items

For adding items, place an Add or Create text button on the table toolbar.

  • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
  • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.

Show new items as the first item of the table, with a visual highlight at the beginning of the row.

For more details, see the guidelines for managing objects (including subarticles).

Enabling/Disabling Actions

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection:

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user how many items will be affected. Let the user choose whether to apply the action anyway or cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

If the action was applied, and if the items are still available, keep them selected.

Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection
Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection

Editable Content

For editable content, only use the following controls, and only one control per cell:

Only these controls are optimized for all viewing modes of the grid table.

If you need edit mode, change your text controls, such as label, text, link, object status, icons, and currencies, to editable controls as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before. You can do this by exchanging the controls, for example, from sap.m.Text to sap.m.Input.

For mass editing items:

  • Provide multiselection.
  • Provide an Edit button.
  • If several items are selected, clicking the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

For more information, see Mass Editing.

Interactive controls – In line
Interactive controls – In line

View Settings

There are several ways to show Sort, Filter, and/or Group settings:

  • Column header menu: In all cases, show the corresponding settings in the column header menu.
  • View settings dialog: Simple and more flexible with regard to filter settings. No advantage for sorting. Allows the user to ungroup grouped columns.tables with a medium amount of items.
  • Table personalization dialog: Provides complex options for sorting items by several levels and allows the user to ungroup grouped columns. It also provides a query-builder-like approach for filter settings. The complexity of the options is also its downside. Use the table personalization dialog for tables with a large number of items.
  • If filtering is a main use case, use the filter bar. In this case, avoid offering additional filter settings on the table. If you do, the filter settings on the grid table work only on the result set provided by the filter bar.

Always be careful when synchronizing the settings in the dialog with the settings from the column header menu.

Trigger the dialogs in one of the following ways:

  • View settings dialog: Provide several buttons, one for each of these view settings. Each button opens the view settings dialog on the corresponding page.
  • Table personalization dialog: Provide a settings button, which opens the table personalization dialog containing all pages.

Use only the view settings you really need. For example, do not offer grouping if it does not support your use case.

Column header menu with view settings
Column header menu with view settings
Table toolbar with triggers for view settings dialog
Table toolbar with triggers for view settings dialog
Table toolbar with trigger for table personalization dialog
Table toolbar with trigger for table personalization dialog

Be persistent. When reopening the app, show the analytical table in the same view settings (sort/ filter/ group/ aggregation settings) as last defined by this user.

Sort

To display the current sort state, an icon is shown in the column header of the most recently sorted column. This icon indicates the sort direction (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

For the default sort settings, sort by the column that identifies the row, which is usually the first column in default delivery.

Column, sorted ascending
Column, sorted ascending
Column, sorted descending
Column, sorted descending

The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order. For each column, provide a meaningful sort order. For example:

  • Sort text alphabetically
  • Sort numbers by their value
  • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
    • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
    • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
    • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
    • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first

Filter

To display the current filter state, an icon is shown in the column header of the filtered column (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: filtered, filterProperty, filterValue, filterOperator, defaultFilterOperator, filterType).

Column, filtered
Column, filtered

Group

To display the current group state, group headers are shown. Show the following text in the group header:

[Grouping value] – [Item count for the group]

Group headers
Group headers

In general, offer reasonable grouping by default if appropriate. Enable the user to ungroup via the view settings dialog or via the table personalization dialog.

Personalization

Only offer personalization if you need more columns than those that fit on a tablet screen, which is usually five, to fulfill 80% of your main use cases.

Persist the column layout. When a user reopens the app, show the grid table with the same column layout settings as last defined by this user.

Add, Remove, and Rearrange Columns

To add, remove, or rearrange columns, use one of the following:

  • The table personalization dialog: It offers some simple settings for column layout. Use this if you have only a few columns to choose from and/or you use the view settings dialog.
  • The p13n dialog: Besides various complex view settings, it also provides settings for column layout. Use this if you have a large number of columns to choose from and/or you use this dialog anyway for view settings.

In both cases, trigger the dialog via the settings button in the table toolbar.

You can also use drag and drop to rearrange columns (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnReordering). If you allow rearranging via drag and drop as well as via a dialog, keep both places in sync.

Resize Columns

Resizing columns works differently on touch and non-touch devices.

  • Non-touch devices: Drag and drop the column separator on the right side of the column. Double-clicking the column separator optimizes the width of the column to the data currently loaded into the front end, which is usually about 100 rows.
  • Touch devices: Clicking the column header reveals two buttons: one for opening the column header menu, another one for resizing the column. Drag and drop this second button to resize the column.

Freeze Columns

To freeze columns, offer the setting in the column header menu (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnFreeze). Selecing Freeze on a column freezes all columns from the first one to the one where Freeze is selected. On this column, the menu entry changes from Freeze to Unfreeze.

Frozen column
Frozen column

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, a highlight indicator can be shown in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to indicate:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry-specific or process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”.

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users exactly what is wrong. Make sure that you provide this information within the table row, ideally in the same color.

For details on the use of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.ui.table.Table, aggregation: rowSettingsTemplate)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Tables in Object Pages

In the object page, we advise against using the analytical, grid, and tree tables. Instead, use a responsive table and offer navigation to a list report with the table types mentioned above.

For more information on the use of tables within the object page, see the Tables section of the Object Page article.

Export to Spreadsheet

On the table toolbar, apps can provide a menu button for exporting table data to a spreadsheet. For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button
'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button

Paste

The browser paste function can be used to paste data from the clipboard to the table (CTRL+V or browser context menu).

  • If the focus is on row level, the app has to take the data from the clipboard and add it to the corresponding controls within the table.
  • If the focus is on an editable control within the table, the control gets the data automatically.

Pasting via the context menu does not work if a custom context menu is used.

Properties

sap.ui.table.Table

The following additional properties are available for the grid table:

  • The property: width defines the width of the grid table.
  • The property: rowHeight defines the height of each row in the grid table. Since the height required is calculated automatically by the grid table, this property is only needed rarely.
  • The property: columnHeaderHeight defines the height of the column headers. Since the height required is calculated automatically by the grid table, this property is only needed rarely.
  • The property: columnHeaderVisible can be used to hide the column headers. Always show the column headers.
  • The property: showColumnVisibilityMenu provides an additional entry in the column header menu that allows columns to be shown or hidden. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Do not use this property.
  • The property: visibleRowCount defines the height of the grid table. Show as many rows as fit on the screen.
  • The property: visibleRowCountMode defines whether the height of the grid table is fixed or automatically calculated based on the space provided by the underlying container. For automatic calculation, make sure that all rows have the same height.
  • The property: minAutoRowCount defines the minimum number of rows that must be shown if the property: visibleRowCountMode is set to “auto”. Show at least three to five rows.
  • The property: firstVisibleRow defines the first row shown in the visible area of the grid table. The grid table is scrolled accordingly.
  • The property: allowColumnReordering is deprecated. Do not use it. Use the property: enableColumnReordering instead.
  • The property: editable does not have a visible effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: enableGrouping turns the experimental grouping on or off. Handle with care.
  • The property: enableCustomFilter changes the filter entry in the column header menu from an edit box to Filter…. Selecting this entry throws an event to which apps can react, for example, by opening a dialog. In general, you should choose the built-in filter over your own implementation. Specifically, keep filtering via the column header menu simple, while offering more advanced options via the table personalization dialog.
  • The property: enableBusyIndicator has not yet been fully implemented. Do not use it.
  • The property: title adds a line of text on top of the grid table. Do not use this. To add a title to the table, use a toolbar.
  • The property: footer adds a short text at the bottom of the table.
  • The property: Busy sets the grid table to busy state. While in busy state, the whole table cannot be used and items cannot be read due to an overlay.
  • The property: Tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: alternateRowColors displays the rows with alternating background colors (“banded rows”). Do not use it.

sap.ui.table.Column

The following additional properties are available for the column:

  • The property: visible defines whether a column is shown or hidden.
  • The property: name defines the name shown in the column header menu for showing and hiding columns. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Do not use this property.
  • The property: headerSpan defines whether one column header is used for one or several columns. To prevent adverse side effects, always use one column header for only one single column. Do not use this property.
  • The property: Tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Tree Table

A tree table contains a hierarchical set of data structured in rows and columns and grouped into nodes. The analytical table (also know as ALV) can provide additional details in several non-hierarchical columns per line item. 

Usage

Trees are used to display and work with large amounts of hierarchical data. They have a high data density and therefore convey an immediate feeling of complexity. Ideally, you should only show trees with a lot of hierarchical data as a last resort. Try the following instead:

  • Break down the data into manageable chunks and allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Responsiveness

A tree table is available for desktops and tablets, but not in smartphone sizes. It supports touch devices, but is not optimized for small screens.

If you use a tree table, note that you have to implement a fallback solution for small screens. This fallback solution does not need to support all use cases.

Possible fallback solutions are as follows:

  • Use navigation to different pages instead of a tree structure. This works well for structures that are no more than four levels deep.
  • Remove levels until only one or two remain. Replace a single-level tree by a table, and a two-level tree by a grouped table or a split-screen layout.
  • Use filtering instead of a tree structure.

You can try to create a fallback based on these ideas, but a completely different solution, such as showing charts in a read-only case, might be more appropriate.

Tree table shown on a desktop
Tree table shown on a desktop
Tree table shown on a tablet
Tree table shown on a tablet

Types

Like all SAP Fiori controls, the tree table is shown in compact mode on a desktop and in cozy mode on tablets.

For a desktop, you can also display even more rows on the same screen height by adding the condensed mode in addition to the compact mode. This renders less white space for each item.

Note that the condensed content density has always to be set in addition to compact. Do not use condensed on its own. Do not mix condensed with cozy. Doing so could lead to unpredictable and / or unwanted results, e.g. cozy sized controls in condensed sized containers, missing padings, etc.

Note that neither compact mode nor condensed mode can be interacted with via touch. Even on a desktop with a touch screen, users will have difficulty selecting rows or using controls inside the cells when using their fingers.

Furthermore, condensed mode is not available for Internet Explorer 9. If condensed mode is to be used, please provide a fallback.

For more information on cozy and compact modes, see content density.

Compact Mode

Tree table - Compact mode
Tree table - Compact mode

Condensed Mode

Tree table - Condensed mode
Tree table - Condensed mode

Components

Column Header

The column header provides the label for the corresponding column and access to the column header menu.

Resizing columns works in the following ways:

  • Mouse interaction: Dragging the separator line between two columns (sap.ui.table. Column, property: Resizable). Double-clicking optimizes the column according to the length of the currently visible data and the label of the column header (sap.ui.table.Column, property: Autoresizable).
  • Touch interaction: The user taps the column header to reveal two buttons: one for showing the column header menu and one for resizing. Drag the latter to resize the column.

After resizing a column, the adaptation of the column widths depends on how the column width is set:

  • If column widths are set in pixel-based units (px, em, rem), the corresponding column is adapted and following columns are moved accordingly. The width of all other columns is not affected.
    If all the columns together take up less width than the table control, an empty space is added. If all the columns together take up more width than the table control, a scrollbar appears.
  • If all column widths are set in percentage or “auto”, resizing one column might also lead to the automatic resizing of some or all other columns. The position of the resized column might also be affected. This is done to ensure that the whole table width is used and no white space is added. A scrollbar appears only, if all or most of the columns get very small. To avoid the unintended side effect of undersized columns, a minimum width can be set per column. Please be aware that this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users are still able to reduce the column width below the provided minimum. (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: width, minWidth)

Columns can be rearranged by dragging the column header to another position (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, property: enableColumnReordering).

Tree table – Column header
Tree table – Column header
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Less columns than space available
Less columns than space available

Line Item

A line item contains a set of cells and provides options for selecting the item.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, property: rowHeight).

Tree table – Line item
Tree table – Line item

In rare cases, show actions within the line item. An example would be an Add to Cart button in a shopping application. Since these actions are repeated in every line and thus use a lot of screen real estate, only do this for one or two actions at most. In this case, show the action trigger near the content to which it belongs. Do not add a specific column for actions, but instead use transparent-style buttons. An exception to this is if the action trigger belongs to a link.

Tree Column

The first colum (tree column) provides the hierarchical structure.

Tree table – Tree column
Tree table – Tree column

Expand/Collapse Button

The expand/collapse button is offered on container nodes to allow the child items of the corresponding container to be shown or hidden.

Tree table – Expand/collapse
Tree table – Expand/collapse

Container Node

A container node is a line item that contains child elements.

Tree table – Container node
Tree table – Container node

Leaf Node

A leaf node is a line item that does not contain child elements.

Tree table – Leave node
Tree table – Leave node

Cell

Each cell provides one data point. It can contain one of the following controls to display the data point:

While it is technically possible to also use other controls, doing so could lead to issues in regards to alignment, condensed mode, screen reader support, and keyboard support.

If you use text, use only single-line text to keep the same row height. Truncate if necessary as this prevents adverse side effects when scrolling vertically (sap.m.Text, property: wrapping, value: false).

Tree table – Cell
Tree table – Cell

Tree Cell

A tree cell is a cell inside the tree column. Besides its data point, it provides a collapse/expand button on container nodes, and it indents the different hierarchy levels.

Tree table – Tree cell
Tree table – Tree cell

Column Header Menu

For the tree column, the column header menu can contain the menu item Freeze and a Filter field, in which the user enters free text.
For all other columns, only the free text filter is available.

Tree table – Tree column header menu
Tree table – Tree column header menu

Selection Cells

For multiselection tree tables, the first column contains checkboxes for selecting line items. Besides multiselection, the tree table offers a single-selection mode and also a read-only mode, in which line items are not selectable.

Tree table – Selection cells
Tree table – Selection cells

Select All

For multiselection tree tables, the column header can contain a checkbox above the selection cells for selecting or deselecting all line items.

Tree table – Select all
Tree table – Select all

Scrollbar

The tree table allows horizontal and vertical scrolling. You can add any number of line items to the tree table, which uses “lazy loading”.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, property: rowHeight).

The tree table is optimized to allow faster scrolling within the first 1000 items.

Tree table – Vertical scroll bar
Tree table – Vertical scroll bar

Behavior and Interaction

Selection

The tree provides the following possibilities:

No selection: Items cannot be selected. (property: selectionMode = None)

Tree table – No selection
Tree table – No selection

Single selection: One item in the tree table can be selected. A row selector column is shown. (property: selectionMode = Single)

Tree table – Single selection
Tree table – Single selection

Multiple selection: One or more items can be selected. The tree table provides a column with checkboxes on the left-hand side. Clicking a checkbox toggles the state of the corresponding row from deselected to selected and back. The Shift key can be used to select a range.

For multiple selection, you can choose between two variants.

  • Multi-toggle mode (property: selectionMode = MultiToggle)
  • Multi-selection plug-in (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin)

These variants behave differently when the user selects more items than are currently loaded in the front end.

Multi-toggle

In multi-toggle mode, you can offer a Select All checkbox to the left of the column header (property: enableSelectAll). Selecting this checkbox selects or deselects all items that are currently loaded in the front end. All other items are not selected/deselected. If the application data is stored in the back end, scrolling down further can reveal additional unselected items. The same can happen with range selections if not all items in the selected range have been loaded to the front end.

Multi-selection plug-in

If you use this plug-in instead of the multi-toggle selection mode, the behavior for range selection and Select All changes:

  • By default, a dedicated Deselect All button replaces the Select All checkbox. There is no default UI element for selecting all items.
  • You can set a limit for the number of items that can be selected (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin, property: limit). This limit has the following effect:
    • The range that can be selected using the Shift key is limited to the specified number of items (default = 200). The table automatically scrolls back to the last selected item. Users can select more items by selecting additional ranges (the specified limit applies each time).
    • If the selection limit is set to 0, a Select All checkbox is shown. There is also no limit on the number of items that can be selected in a range. All selected items are loaded, which can lead to performance issues for large data sets.
  • If selected items are not already available in the front end, they are loaded automatically by the plug-in and set as selected.
Tree table – Multiple selection
Tree table – Multiple selection
Using the multi-selection plug-in with a limit
Using the multi-selection plug-in with a limit

Selection Behavior

An item can be selected in different ways, depending on the configuration of the tree table (sap.ui.table.Table, property: selectionBehavior):

  • Row: An item is selected by clicking the checkbox or the row. Use this option for multi-selection tree tables if clicking a row or a cell is not used for anything else.
  • RowSelector: An item is selected only by clicking the checkbox in the selector cell. Use this option if clicking the row (or a cell inside the row) is used for something else, such as navigation.
  • RowOnly: An item is selected only by clicking the row, and not using checkboxes in the selector cells. Use this for single-selection tree tables if clicking a row or a cell is not used for another purpose, such as navigation.

Set the property collapseRecursive to “false” in order to keep the selection on subnodes even after collapsing and expanding the root node.

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a table or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position  (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and Drop
Drag and Drop

Column Header Menu

Sort

The column header menu can provide two sort options (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: sortProperty, showSortMenuEntry):

  • Sort Ascending
  • Sort Descending

The user selects one of these options to sort the corresponding column accordingly (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

Sort settings in column header menu
Sort settings in column header menu

Filter

The column header menu can provide a search field for entering free text. If the user enters a term in the input field and triggers the search by pressing Enter, the tree is filtered by the tree column and the corresponding value. If no items match the filter values, the filtered tree table may be empty.

Tree table – Filter
Tree table – Filter

Freeze Columns

The Freeze/Unfreeze option is provided in the column header menu of all columns. Using Freeze on one column freezes all columns from the first one to the selected one.

Tree table–- Freeze
Tree table–- Freeze

Column Handling

Show/Hide Columns

Columns can be shown and hidden. If the tree column is hidden, the following column is the tree column.

Rearrange Columns

The user rearranges columns by dragging and dropping the corresponding column header. The tree column is always the first column and cannot be dragged.

Resize Columns

Columns are resized as follows:

  • Mouse interaction: The user drags the separator line between two columns (sap.ui.table. Column, property: Resizable). Double-clicking the line optimizes the column according to the length of the currently visible data and the label of the column header (sap.ui.table.Column, property: Autoresizable). Note that auto-resizing works only if the cells in this column contain one of the following controls: text, label, link, or input.
  • Touch interaction: The user clicks or taps the column header to reveal two buttons: One to show the column header menu, and one for resizing. The user drags the latter to resize the column.

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a table. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

When opened, the context menu gets the row and column context, except for special columns (such as the selection column) or special rows (like group headers). Context menus can be implemented for a specific table, row, or cell (not recommended for editable cells).

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a table is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Tree table with context menu
Tree table with context menu

Cell Content

The tree is traditional in that each cell can contain only one data point in one single line.

Apart from plain read-only text, cells can contain the following:

While it is technically possible to also use other controls, doing so could lead to issues in regards to alignment, condensed mode, screen reader support, and keyboard support.

If you use text, use only single-line text to keep the same row height. Truncate if necessary as this prevents adverse side effects when scrolling vertically (sap.m.Text, property: wrapping, value: false).

Guidelines

Filtering

What exactly needs to stay or be removed is highly dependent on the kind of structure and data your tree table displays. For many trees, the following approach works well if you want to apply filters only to the leaves of a tree:

  • Remove all leaves that don’t fit the filter criteria
  • Remove empty nodes

Where nodes need to be filtered, keep the following in mind:

  • A node may or may not fit the filter criteria.
  • A node can contain items (nodes and/or leaves) that fit the filter criteria.

Because of this, the results might contain more nodes than those that are relevant for the filter criteria.

Developer Hint
The tree table itself has no influence on the filter result. It sends a filter request and displays whatever comes back. Make sure that the result set is meaningful.

Sorting

First of all: Is sorting meaningful in your tree? If so, decide on a meaningful default sort order.

If sorting is meaningful, is it meaningful on all levels? Or does the tree structure need to be stable? In the latter case, sort only leaves, but not nodes.

To display the current sort state, an icon is shown in the column header of the most recently sorted column. This icon indicates the sort direction (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order. For each column, provide a meaningful sort order. For example:

  • Sort text alphabetically
  • Sort numbers by their value
  • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
    • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
    • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
    • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
    • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.

Loading Data

To indicate that the table is currently loading items, use the busy state (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data has been loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Initital Display

Think of the initial expand / collapse state of a tree: If your structure contains many items on the root level, it might make sense to collapse the whole tree in the beginning.

In contrast, if the main items to work with are displayed on a deeper level (e.g. the parent nodes are just some kind of categorization), the tree should be expanded up to the first level where the needed items appear.

Selection

  • We strongly recommend using the multi-selection plug-in. This ensures that all items selected using Select All or as part of a range are included – even if some items were not initially loaded in the front end. This is not the case if you use the multi-toggle option.
  • Do not limit the range selection for the multi-selection plug-in unless you have to.
    • If the dataset is small and/or completely available in the front-end, set the limit property to 0 to enable the Select All option and allow users to select any range.
    • If you have a large dataset, set a limit on the number of selected items to avoid performance issues. Also bear in mind that some actions won’t be helpful if the dataset is too big (for example, a delete operation on 2 million database entries).
  • In multiple selection mode, do not show checkboxes in the first data column in the default delivery to avoid confusion.

Empty Table

Try to avoid empty tables. If necessary, provide instructions on how to fill the tree table with data.

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items.

Add Items

For adding items, place an Add or Create text button on the table toolbar.

  • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
  • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.

Show new items as the first item of the tree table or node:

  • If nothing is selected, add the new item to the root.
  • If a single node is selected, add the new item to the selected node.
  • If a single leaf is selected, add the new item as child of this leaf. The original selected item becomes a node.

If your tree doesn’t support adding items to the root, selected node, or selected leaf, disable Create or Add for the corresponding levels.

Disable Create or Add if more than one item is selected.

For more details, see the guidelines for managing objects (including subarticles).

Enabling/Disabling Actions

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection:

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user how many items will be affected. Let the user choose whether to apply the action anyway or cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

If the action was applied and the items are still available, keep them selected.

Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection
Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection

Columns

Minimize the number of columns. Avoid the need to scroll horizontally in the default delivery. In the first column, show the hierarchical data, which should identify the line item. Choose the name over the ID, but if both are needed, show the name first, then the ID.

The tree table assigns the same width to each column by default. It is recommended that you overwrite this default to provide optimal space for your content (sap.ui.table.Column, property: width).

If you define the column width in pixels or rems, resizing a column affects only the width of this specific column. Reducing the browser window size results in a scrollbar. After resizing a column, a scrollbar appears if the width of the table is not enough to show all columns. If the columns use less space than is available, white space appears on the right side of the last column.

If you define the column width as a percentage, resizing one column affects the width of several or all columns. Text becomes truncated when the browser window size is reduced. This is done to make sure that all columns together fill the space of the table. A scrollbar appears only in case the automatic change of the column widths is not enough to display all columns. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, a minimum width can be set per column. Please be aware that this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users are still able to reduce the column width below the provided minimum. (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: width, minWidth)

If you define the column width as “auto”, the behavior is the same as for “percentage”. In contrast to percentage, “auto” distributes the columns equally.

To decide on how to set the column width (pixel/rem/em vs. percent/auto), keep the following tips in mind:

  • For tables with only 2 to 3 columns, use pixel-based units. This ensures that on wide screens the values in the columns are not spread over the whole screen, which improves readability of line items.
  • For tables with many columns, where a horizontal scrollbar is usually needed, use pixel-based units. This avoids unintended side effects when resizing columns.
  • For all other tables, use whatever fits your case better.

Be cautious with mixing columns with pixel-based and percentage-based widths. While this can be helpful in some cases, it could also cause even more unintended side effects when resizing a column. When using percentage-based widths for one or more columns, think of the possibility to not allow end users to resize columns at all.

Alignment of Cell Content

Align column headers according to their cell content:

  • Texts are left-aligned.
  • Numbers (except for IDs), dates, and times are right-aligned.
  • Icons are centered.
  • Micro charts are left-aligned.

In addition, align amounts with currencies to the decimal point. You can do this with the sap.ui.unified.Currency control.

Note that most currencies have two digits after the decimal point, but there are exceptions, for example:

  • The Tunisian dinar has three digits.
  • The Japanese yen has no digits.

In tree tables with mixed currencies, all amounts still have to be aligned to the decimal point.

To enable positive and negative values to be identified more easily, position the minus sign to the right of the number. It is placed in the same position in every row.

For more information, see currency.

Formatting Cell Content

  • Note that there are different locale formats, so show dates, times, and numbers in the format corresponding to the user’s language.
  • If text and an ID are to be shown, show the ID in brackets after the corresponding text.
  • If the unit of measurement is the same for all rows, show the unit of measurement in the column header. Otherwise, show the unit of measurement within the row.
  • If you want to let users sort, filter, or group by amount and by unit of measure independently, put both in different columns. If you combine them in one column, offer only sorting, filtering, and grouping by amount.

Tree vs. Table

Trees are more complex than tables due to their hierarchical view. Users tend to have more problems finding items in hierarchical views than in flat lists, except where the hierarchical view is natural. By natural we mean that every child node should be part of only one parent, and this relationship between the child and parent is clear and well known.

Do
Example of an acceptable use of tree tables
Example of an acceptable use of tree tables
Do
A clear parent-child relationship
A clear parent-child relationship

When you use trees, you should choose broad hierarchies over deep hierarchies. Deep hierarchies make finding items more complicated. So try to reduce hierarchical levels where possible, especially if the hierarchy is not natural. Ideally, a tree should have a maximum of four levels, the first two of which should contain the most important items.

Don't
Avoid unnecessary depth in the hierarchy
Avoid unnecessary depth in the hierarchy
Do
Favor breadth over depth in the hierarchy
Favor breadth over depth in the hierarchy

You can use the following methods to reduce hierarchy levels:

  • Avoid single root nodes. A single root node is often used to provide a Select All feature. Since the tree control provides an extra space for a Select All feature, the root node is not usually needed.
  • When you use only two levels, choose a grouped table or grouped ALV over a tree table control. Expand all groups for the default delivery.
  • Container nodes at the top level can usually be replaced by tabs or value pickers.
  • Eliminate unnecessary mid-level containers, for example, by combining redundant ones.
  • Exercise care when using a tree due to its overall complexity. The hierarchical structure of the data does not necessarily mean that a tree control is required.

Design Concepts

The tree table can be used to display large amounts of hierarchical data. Unfortunately, tree tables have a high data density and therefore convey an immediate feeling of complexity. Ideally, tree tables with large amounts of data should only be shown if there is no other option. You should instead try the following:

  • Flatten the data. A list, table, or ALV is still complex, but less so than a tree table.
  • Break down the data into manageable chunks. Allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Try to avoid horizontal scrolling in the default delivery.

Navigation

To trigger navigation on line item level, choose one of the following options:

  • Use a link for the attribute that identifies the row. Clicking the link triggers the navigation. This is the preferred option.
  • Add the RowActions column and show the navigation arrow (  ) at the end of the row. No column header text is required. The navigation column is fixed and will not scroll away. Users also cannot personalize this column. The navigation arrow triggers the navigation.
    Do not use the RowActions column for actions other than navigation and deletion.

Examples of Incorrect and Correct Usage

When you use trees:

  • Choose breadth over depth.
  • Emphasize important values. Do not let the user run into a wall of text without guidance. You can use bold text for this.
  • Try to minimize the number of columns, especially if there is a large number of rows.
  • Optimize column width for its initial visible content. Do not automatically adjust column width based on content changes.
  • Do not wrap content, truncate it. End users can easily change the column width to see the full text.
Don't
Avoid: The initial visible content should not be truncated in the default delivery
Avoid: The initial visible content should not be truncated in the default delivery
Don't
Never wrap texts
Never wrap texts
  • Maintain a fixed layout, except when the user wants to change it.
  • In the default layout, use the tree column for the item name or data that identifies the row. This helps the user to choose between different items.
  • Create a clear and immediately understandable hierarchy. Use clear parent-child relationships. If this is not possible, add a child in different nodes to help the user find the element.
Do
Acceptable: repeat entries to optimize finding items
Acceptable: repeat entries to optimize finding items
  • Consider persisting the layout settings. When a user reopens the app, show the tree table with the same column sizes, column order, and view settings as last defined by this user.
  • Use the Select All feature only if it makes sense. Note that selecting a lot of data also takes time and might not be appropriate for all use cases. For example, a delete operation on two million database entries might not be very helpful in many cases.
  • Set the property collapseRecursive to “false” in order to keep the selection on subnodes even after collapsing and expanding the root node.

Empty Tree Tables

Avoid empty tree tables. If necessary, provide instructions on how to fill the tree table with data (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, properties: noDataText, showNoData).

Examples:

  • If a tree table is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the tree table with data.
  • If a tree table is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    No filters set. To start, enter your search and filter settings and run the search.
  • If a tree table is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No items found. Check the search and filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, no search is offered, only the search is offered).
  • You are using the live search (no Go button in the filter bar). In this case, leave out “run the search”.
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of search and filter settings).

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, you can display a highlight indicator in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to show:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry-specific or process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”.

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users exactly what is wrong. Make sure that you provide this information within the table row, ideally in the same color.

For details on the use of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.ui.table.TreeTable, aggregation: rowSettingsTemplate)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. Also, because there is no generic keyboard interaction, drag and drop isn’t accessible. Moreover, drag and drop is not available on all browsers. For these reasons, offer drag and drop only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within a tree table, use the following options:

  • For dropping items as a child, use whole nodes as drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.On).
  • For dropping items on the same level, use the space between items as drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between).
  • If you want to allow users to drop items as a child or sibling, offer both drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.OnOrBetween).

This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Drop target on an Item
Drop target on an Item

Do not combine rearranging items within one level and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

Moving items from one node to another can be combined with sorting without any issues.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items on the same level with sorting
Do not combine rearranging items on the same level with sorting

Visible Alternatives to Drag and Drop

Depending on the functionality you need, use one or more of the following alternatives:

  • To move items up or down within a node:
    Use the  Move Up and  Move Down buttons on the toolbar. These buttons move the selected items until the first selected item can’t be moved up / the last selected item can’t be moved down any further.
    Depending on your tree, this can make sense for both leaves and nodes, only for leaves, or only for nodes. When moving a node, move the whole node and (if applicable) all its children up or down to the next position within the parent node.
    Always make sure that when the user moves an item in one direction and then moves it back, the order is the same as it was before.
    Do not combine the option to move items up and down with sorting.
  • To move items to another node:
    Use Copy and Paste buttons on the toolbar.
    Alternatively, offer a Move To button. Clicking Move To opens a dialog that shows all the nodes of the tree, but no leaves. Selecting an item in this dialog closes the dialog and moves the corresponding items to the selected node.
  • To change the level of an item:
    In some trees, such as document structures, users can change the level of an item without affecting the level of parent or child items. In this case, use left and right arrow buttons (   ).

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar). Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

The context menu can be triggered for the table, row, or cell. However, we do not recommend using context menus for cells: because the content of a cell is a different touch target than the cell itself, opening a cell context menu via touch is quite hard, even in cozy mode.

Do not combine context menus with condensed mode: editable controls fill the entire space inside a cell. Because of this, context menus cannot be opened at all with touch or mouse interaction.

Tables in Object Pages

In the object page, we advise against using analytical, grid, and tree tables. Instead, use a responsive table and offer navigation to a list report with the table types mentioned above.

For more information on the use of tables within the object page, see the Tables section of the Object Page article.

Export to Spreadsheet

On the table toolbar, apps can provide a menu button for exporting table data to a spreadsheet. For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button
'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

List

In SAP Fiori, we distinguish between tables and lists. Both usually contain homogeneous data, but lists generally have rather basic data, whereas the data in tables tends to be more complex. Lists are mostly used in the master list for a master-detail scenario using the flexible column layout, as well as in popovers or dialogs. For certain use cases, lists can also be used in the dynamic page layout.

Usage

Use the list if:

  • You want to display a homogeneous set of basic data.
  • You need to sort, group, or filter simple datasets.
  • You need to display a single-level hierarchy rather than using a complex tree table to support this simple use case.

Do not use the list if:

  • You want to manage complex datasets that need to be extensively sorted, grouped, filtered, or edited. In this case, use a table.
  • You work with complex hierarchies. In this case, use a tree.

Responsiveness

The list is like a layout container. You can change its width, but you must also ensure that the items contained in the list adapt whenever the list is resized.

All list item variants available in SAP Fiori already adapt to the respective screen size.

List Item Variants

The list contains various list items. These items can be of various types depending on the use case and on the content they have. SAPUI5 already provides the most common list items in SAP Fiori in the form of controls, although custom list items can also be created if necessary.

All the available list item types behave responsively and adapt to changing screen sizes out of the box. Most of them use truncation if size becomes too limited, since they are usually used to navigate to the item details. For custom list items, you can also wrap the texts, if required.

Object List Item

The object list item is the list item variant used most frequently in SAP Fiori applications. Consisting of a title, key figure, attributes, and a status, it contains the most important information about an object.

The space available for the attributes and status is limited as it should only show crucial information that allows the user to decide which items should be dealt with first.

All essential information about an object is usually provided when the user navigates to the item details.

For more information, see object list item.

Object list items
Object list items

Standard List Item

The standard list item is used for less complex entries, such as when the user selects an item in a dialog. This list item contains an optional image, a title, description, and a single info text (which can contain semantic information).

For more information, see standard list item.

Standard list items
Standard list items

Display List Item

The display list item is the simplest form of a list item and is only capable of showing a label and values. It is seldom used.

For more information, see display list item.

Display list items
Display list items

Action List Item

The action list item allows various actions to be triggered in a dialog. The action list item is not used in the content area.

For more information, see action list item.

Action list item
Action list item

Feed List Item

The feed list item is mainly used in feeds and notes.

For more information, see feed list item.

Feed with feed list items
Feed with feed list items

Input List Item

The input list item allows the user to enter data in a list item. It is seldom used in SAP Fiori apps as forms are usually the preferable method for entering data.

For more information, see input list item.

Input list item
Input list item

Components

The list control comes with the following main properties:

Header

The header text contains the title of the list. It is usually only used when the list is in the content area.

Footer

The footer text is the last entry in the list, and as such, it scrolls away with the content. Therefore, this property is also seldom used.

Lazy Loading

Like the table, the list also allows lazy loading. The “growing” list property is used for this purpose.

List with header and footer
List with header and footer

Empty List

Avoid empty lists. If necessary, provide instructions on how to fill the list with data (sap.m.List/ sap.m.ListBase, properties: noDataText, showNoData).

Examples:

  • If a list is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the list with data.
  • If a list is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    No filters set. To start, enter your search and filter settings and run the search.
  • If a list is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No items found. Check the search and filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, no search is offered, only the search is offered).
  • You are using the live search (no Go button in the filter bar). In this case, leave out “run the search”.
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of search and filter settings).
Empty list
Empty list

Count

List items can have a count, which is located on the far right of a row. You can use the count in simple lists, such as those that contain standard list items, to indicate how many subitems the user can expect when navigating to the item.

Standard list items with counter
Standard list items with counter

Read/Unread

You can set an indicator to highlight unread items, making it easier for the user to discover them (property: showUnread = true). If you set this indicator, all texts for the unread items are shown in bold font.

By default, this indicator is switched off, and all list items are displayed in normal font.

Display list item with read and unread items
Display list item with read and unread items

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, you can display a highlight indicator in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to show:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry-specific or process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”.

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users exactly what is wrong. Make sure that you provide this information within the table row, ideally in the same color.

For details on the use of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.m.ListItemBase, property: highlight)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Behavior and Interaction

There are several ways to interact with the list and its list items:

Line Item Level

Scroll

The height of the list is defined by the number of items it contains. It does not have its own scroll container, but is scrolled together with the app.

If the list works in a “growing” mode, it only loads a few items at first. Additional items are only loaded (and rendered) on request. The “request” can either be triggered by scrolling (preferred), or by clicking the More button.

When the user scrolls, the title and the filter info bar can stick to the top of the surrounding layout container (sap.m.List, property: sticky).

Information
The “sticky” feature comes with some limitations:

  • It is not available on all browsers. In non-supporting browsers, the corresponding areas are not fixed on top of the surrounding layout container while scrolling.
  • Certain layout containers suppress the sticky behavior, such as the grid layout. The same happens if the list is placed within the object page.
  • If the focus is set to a sticky area, the list is automatically scrolled to top.

Sticky title
Sticky title

Mode

The list can have several modes. The respective property (Mode) allows the following selection methods:

  • None
  • SingleSelectMaster (used to pick one item with no additional indicator, as in the master list for a master-detail scenario with the flexible column layout)
  • SingleSelectLeft (used to pick one item using a radio button on the far left)
  • MultiSelect (used to pick several items from the list using checkboxes on the far left)
  • Delete (used to delete items from the list using a delete indicator on the far right)
Developer Hint
In multiple selection mode, users can (de)select all items using the shortcut CTRL+A. This only affects items that have already been loaded to the front-end server. All other items are not (de)selected before they are loaded (for example, items added via lazy loading with growingScrollToLoad). This conflicts with the guideline that all items the user can reach by scrolling must be (de)selected.

To process all items, listen to the selectionChange event and to its flag selectAll. This indicates whether CTRL+A was triggered. As soon as an action is triggered, process the items accordingly. Depending on the number of items, consider processing them in the back end.

List with explicit single selection
List with explicit single selection
List with multiple selection
List with multiple selection
List with delete mode
List with delete mode

Grouping

List items can be grouped. The group header is a visually separate line at the top of the items it groups. It does not currently provide an interaction of its own.

Grouped list
Grouped list

Type

The list item type defines the interaction of the list item, which is accompanied by a visual cue.

The items can be one of the following:

  • Active (click event; cursor changes to indicate that)
  • Inactive (no click event; cursor does not change)
  • Navigation (a small arrow appears on the far right, indicating that clicking would navigate)
  • Detail (a pencil appears on the far right, indicating that something can be changed. The user can only click on the pencil.)
  • Detail and active (same as “detail”, but the item itself is also clickable)

The example shows how all these types are visualized.

All list item types: inactive, detail, navigation, active, detail and active
All list item types: inactive, detail, navigation, active, detail and active

Swipe

You can provide a swipe feature (SwipeDirection) for quickly approving or deleting items without having to look at the details. It must only be provided as an additional feature, and not be the only way of performing the action.

List with swipe action
List with swipe action

Context Menu

The context menu can be triggered for the list or per item.

It gives users an alternative way of modifying the focused elements by giving access to context-specific functions.

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

List - context menu
List - context menu

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a list or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.m.ListBase, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Styles

The list items can have a header when they are used in a content area. It is also technically possible to change the background of the header and of the list itself. Depending on the use case, the lines between the list items and around the list can be shown or hidden.

The property Show Separators (All, Inner, None) allows only the outer lines (Inner) or all the lines (None) to be hidden when the list is used as a more structural element within a content area.

List without separators
List without separators

Guidelines

Text Length

When you use the list in the first column of the flexible column layout, keep the texts as short as possible and only as long as necessary. If you expect large numbers, use formatting instead.

Custom List Items

If none of the list items provided suits the requirements of your app, you can also create a custom list. If you choose this option, ensure that your custom list item is responsive when resized.

When creating custom list items, take the following guidelines into account, as needed:

Radio Button

Only use radio buttons if they are absolutely necessary. One example would be if you want to distinguish single selection from navigation. This is a rare case in which visible radio buttons for single selection are allowed.

Actions

To trigger actions on single items, show the actions on a toolbar above the list. Do not offer actions on multiple items if the list is expected to have fewer than 10 items in most cases.

The following actions on single items must always be inline:

  • Delete: Use “Delete” mode (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This places a Delete  button at the end of each item.
  • Navigation: Use the “Navigation” item type (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This places a navigation indicator at the end of the corresponding items. Use this to navigate to a new page containing item details.
  • Edit: Use the “Detail” item type (sap.m.TreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail). This places an Edit   icon at the end of the corresponding items.

You can combine delete and edit actions, or delete and navigation actions. However, edit and navigation actions cannot be combined.

To trigger actions that are independent of the selection, show the actions on a toolbar above the list. For example: AddCollapse AllExpand All, … .

To trigger a default action on the entire item, use the “Active” or “DetailAndActive” item type (sap.m.TreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active). When clicked, active items trigger an event that can be handled by the app (for example, to open a dialog). Selection of items and expanding/collapsing a node do not trigger the event, and are handled by the tree. Do not use the active item type for navigation, to switch the line item to an edit state, or to delete the item.

Active can be combined with edit and delete, but not with navigation. Do not combine active with the single selection master.

Add Items

For adding items, place an Add or Create text button on the table toolbar.

  • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
  • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.

Show new items as the first item of the table, with a visual highlight at the beginning of the row.

For more information, see the guidelines for managing objects (including subarticles).

Enabling/Disabling Actions

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection:

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user how many items will be affected. Let users choose whether to apply the action anyway or cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

If the action was applied and the items are still available, keep them selected.

Message for action which applies to a part of a selection
Message for action which applies to a part of a selection

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar).

Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, it is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within the list, use drop targets that are between items (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between). This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Drop targets in between items
Drop targets in between items

Do not combine rearranging items and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure that there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

When combining rearranging items with grouping, be aware that moving items to another group also means that a value of the dropped item changes: because grouping is based on values, the dropped item needs to take on the corresponding value of the target group. If this is not wanted, do not allow users to rearrange items in grouped lists.

 

Example:

A list is grouped by availability. An item is moved from the group “Not Available” to the group “In Stock”. In this case, the moved item needs to change its availability to “In Stock” to match the target group. If changing the value doesn’t make sense, only allow users to rearrange the items within the same group, or don’t allow rearranging at all.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing

Export to Spreadsheet

Apps can provide a menu button for exporting list data to a spreadsheet (for example, on the relevant toolbar). For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button
'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Tree Table

A tree table contains a hierarchical set of data structured in rows and columns and grouped into nodes. The analytical table (also know as ALV) can provide additional details in several non-hierarchical columns per line item. 

Usage

Trees are used to display and work with large amounts of hierarchical data. They have a high data density and therefore convey an immediate feeling of complexity. Ideally, you should only show trees with a lot of hierarchical data as a last resort. Try the following instead:

  • Break down the data into manageable chunks and allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Responsiveness

A tree table is available for desktops and tablets, but not in smartphone sizes. It supports touch devices, but is not optimized for small screens.

If you use a tree table, note that you have to implement a fallback solution for small screens. This fallback solution does not need to support all use cases.

Possible fallback solutions are as follows:

  • Use navigation to different pages instead of a tree structure. This works well for structures that are no more than four levels deep.
  • Remove levels until only one or two remain. Replace a single-level tree by a table, and a two-level tree by a grouped table or a split-screen layout.
  • Use filtering instead of a tree structure.

You can try to create a fallback based on these ideas, but a completely different solution, such as showing charts in a read-only case, might be more appropriate.

Tree table shown on a desktop
Tree table shown on a desktop
Tree table shown on a tablet
Tree table shown on a tablet

Types

Like all SAP Fiori controls, the tree table is shown in compact mode on a desktop and in cozy mode on tablets.

For a desktop, you can also display even more rows on the same screen height by adding the condensed mode in addition to the compact mode. This renders less white space for each item.

Note that the condensed content density has always to be set in addition to compact. Do not use condensed on its own. Do not mix condensed with cozy. Doing so could lead to unpredictable and / or unwanted results, e.g. cozy sized controls in condensed sized containers, missing padings, etc.

Note that neither compact mode nor condensed mode can be interacted with via touch. Even on a desktop with a touch screen, users will have difficulty selecting rows or using controls inside the cells when using their fingers.

Furthermore, condensed mode is not available for Internet Explorer 9. If condensed mode is to be used, please provide a fallback.

For more information on cozy and compact modes, see content density.

Compact Mode

Tree table - Compact mode
Tree table - Compact mode

Condensed Mode

Tree table - Condensed mode
Tree table - Condensed mode

Components

Column Header

The column header provides the label for the corresponding column and access to the column header menu.

Resizing columns works in the following ways:

  • Mouse interaction: Dragging the separator line between two columns (sap.ui.table. Column, property: Resizable). Double-clicking optimizes the column according to the length of the currently visible data and the label of the column header (sap.ui.table.Column, property: Autoresizable).
  • Touch interaction: The user taps the column header to reveal two buttons: one for showing the column header menu and one for resizing. Drag the latter to resize the column.

After resizing a column, the adaptation of the column widths depends on how the column width is set:

  • If column widths are set in pixel-based units (px, em, rem), the corresponding column is adapted and following columns are moved accordingly. The width of all other columns is not affected.
    If all the columns together take up less width than the table control, an empty space is added. If all the columns together take up more width than the table control, a scrollbar appears.
  • If all column widths are set in percentage or “auto”, resizing one column might also lead to the automatic resizing of some or all other columns. The position of the resized column might also be affected. This is done to ensure that the whole table width is used and no white space is added. A scrollbar appears only, if all or most of the columns get very small. To avoid the unintended side effect of undersized columns, a minimum width can be set per column. Please be aware that this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users are still able to reduce the column width below the provided minimum. (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: width, minWidth)

Columns can be rearranged by dragging the column header to another position (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, property: enableColumnReordering).

Tree table – Column header
Tree table – Column header
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Less columns than space available
Less columns than space available

Line Item

A line item contains a set of cells and provides options for selecting the item.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, property: rowHeight).

Tree table – Line item
Tree table – Line item

In rare cases, show actions within the line item. An example would be an Add to Cart button in a shopping application. Since these actions are repeated in every line and thus use a lot of screen real estate, only do this for one or two actions at most. In this case, show the action trigger near the content to which it belongs. Do not add a specific column for actions, but instead use transparent-style buttons. An exception to this is if the action trigger belongs to a link.

Tree Column

The first colum (tree column) provides the hierarchical structure.

Tree table – Tree column
Tree table – Tree column

Expand/Collapse Button

The expand/collapse button is offered on container nodes to allow the child items of the corresponding container to be shown or hidden.

Tree table – Expand/collapse
Tree table – Expand/collapse

Container Node

A container node is a line item that contains child elements.

Tree table – Container node
Tree table – Container node

Leaf Node

A leaf node is a line item that does not contain child elements.

Tree table – Leave node
Tree table – Leave node

Cell

Each cell provides one data point. It can contain one of the following controls to display the data point:

While it is technically possible to also use other controls, doing so could lead to issues in regards to alignment, condensed mode, screen reader support, and keyboard support.

If you use text, use only single-line text to keep the same row height. Truncate if necessary as this prevents adverse side effects when scrolling vertically (sap.m.Text, property: wrapping, value: false).

Tree table – Cell
Tree table – Cell

Tree Cell

A tree cell is a cell inside the tree column. Besides its data point, it provides a collapse/expand button on container nodes, and it indents the different hierarchy levels.

Tree table – Tree cell
Tree table – Tree cell

Column Header Menu

For the tree column, the column header menu can contain the menu item Freeze and a Filter field, in which the user enters free text.
For all other columns, only the free text filter is available.

Tree table – Tree column header menu
Tree table – Tree column header menu

Selection Cells

For multiselection tree tables, the first column contains checkboxes for selecting line items. Besides multiselection, the tree table offers a single-selection mode and also a read-only mode, in which line items are not selectable.

Tree table – Selection cells
Tree table – Selection cells

Select All

For multiselection tree tables, the column header can contain a checkbox above the selection cells for selecting or deselecting all line items.

Tree table – Select all
Tree table – Select all

Scrollbar

The tree table allows horizontal and vertical scrolling. You can add any number of line items to the tree table, which uses “lazy loading”.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, property: rowHeight).

The tree table is optimized to allow faster scrolling within the first 1000 items.

Tree table – Vertical scroll bar
Tree table – Vertical scroll bar

Behavior and Interaction

Selection

The tree provides the following possibilities:

No selection: Items cannot be selected. (property: selectionMode = None)

Tree table – No selection
Tree table – No selection

Single selection: One item in the tree table can be selected. A row selector column is shown. (property: selectionMode = Single)

Tree table – Single selection
Tree table – Single selection

Multiple selection: One or more items can be selected. The tree table provides a column with checkboxes on the left-hand side. Clicking a checkbox toggles the state of the corresponding row from deselected to selected and back. The Shift key can be used to select a range.

For multiple selection, you can choose between two variants.

  • Multi-toggle mode (property: selectionMode = MultiToggle)
  • Multi-selection plug-in (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin)

These variants behave differently when the user selects more items than are currently loaded in the front end.

Multi-toggle

In multi-toggle mode, you can offer a Select All checkbox to the left of the column header (property: enableSelectAll). Selecting this checkbox selects or deselects all items that are currently loaded in the front end. All other items are not selected/deselected. If the application data is stored in the back end, scrolling down further can reveal additional unselected items. The same can happen with range selections if not all items in the selected range have been loaded to the front end.

Multi-selection plug-in

If you use this plug-in instead of the multi-toggle selection mode, the behavior for range selection and Select All changes:

  • By default, a dedicated Deselect All button replaces the Select All checkbox. There is no default UI element for selecting all items.
  • You can set a limit for the number of items that can be selected (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin, property: limit). This limit has the following effect:
    • The range that can be selected using the Shift key is limited to the specified number of items (default = 200). The table automatically scrolls back to the last selected item. Users can select more items by selecting additional ranges (the specified limit applies each time).
    • If the selection limit is set to 0, a Select All checkbox is shown. There is also no limit on the number of items that can be selected in a range. All selected items are loaded, which can lead to performance issues for large data sets.
  • If selected items are not already available in the front end, they are loaded automatically by the plug-in and set as selected.
Tree table – Multiple selection
Tree table – Multiple selection
Using the multi-selection plug-in with a limit
Using the multi-selection plug-in with a limit

Selection Behavior

An item can be selected in different ways, depending on the configuration of the tree table (sap.ui.table.Table, property: selectionBehavior):

  • Row: An item is selected by clicking the checkbox or the row. Use this option for multi-selection tree tables if clicking a row or a cell is not used for anything else.
  • RowSelector: An item is selected only by clicking the checkbox in the selector cell. Use this option if clicking the row (or a cell inside the row) is used for something else, such as navigation.
  • RowOnly: An item is selected only by clicking the row, and not using checkboxes in the selector cells. Use this for single-selection tree tables if clicking a row or a cell is not used for another purpose, such as navigation.

Set the property collapseRecursive to “false” in order to keep the selection on subnodes even after collapsing and expanding the root node.

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a table or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position  (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and Drop
Drag and Drop

Column Header Menu

Sort

The column header menu can provide two sort options (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: sortProperty, showSortMenuEntry):

  • Sort Ascending
  • Sort Descending

The user selects one of these options to sort the corresponding column accordingly (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

Sort settings in column header menu
Sort settings in column header menu

Filter

The column header menu can provide a search field for entering free text. If the user enters a term in the input field and triggers the search by pressing Enter, the tree is filtered by the tree column and the corresponding value. If no items match the filter values, the filtered tree table may be empty.

Tree table – Filter
Tree table – Filter

Freeze Columns

The Freeze/Unfreeze option is provided in the column header menu of all columns. Using Freeze on one column freezes all columns from the first one to the selected one.

Tree table–- Freeze
Tree table–- Freeze

Column Handling

Show/Hide Columns

Columns can be shown and hidden. If the tree column is hidden, the following column is the tree column.

Rearrange Columns

The user rearranges columns by dragging and dropping the corresponding column header. The tree column is always the first column and cannot be dragged.

Resize Columns

Columns are resized as follows:

  • Mouse interaction: The user drags the separator line between two columns (sap.ui.table. Column, property: Resizable). Double-clicking the line optimizes the column according to the length of the currently visible data and the label of the column header (sap.ui.table.Column, property: Autoresizable). Note that auto-resizing works only if the cells in this column contain one of the following controls: text, label, link, or input.
  • Touch interaction: The user clicks or taps the column header to reveal two buttons: One to show the column header menu, and one for resizing. The user drags the latter to resize the column.

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a table. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

When opened, the context menu gets the row and column context, except for special columns (such as the selection column) or special rows (like group headers). Context menus can be implemented for a specific table, row, or cell (not recommended for editable cells).

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a table is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Tree table with context menu
Tree table with context menu

Cell Content

The tree is traditional in that each cell can contain only one data point in one single line.

Apart from plain read-only text, cells can contain the following:

While it is technically possible to also use other controls, doing so could lead to issues in regards to alignment, condensed mode, screen reader support, and keyboard support.

If you use text, use only single-line text to keep the same row height. Truncate if necessary as this prevents adverse side effects when scrolling vertically (sap.m.Text, property: wrapping, value: false).

Guidelines

Filtering

What exactly needs to stay or be removed is highly dependent on the kind of structure and data your tree table displays. For many trees, the following approach works well if you want to apply filters only to the leaves of a tree:

  • Remove all leaves that don’t fit the filter criteria
  • Remove empty nodes

Where nodes need to be filtered, keep the following in mind:

  • A node may or may not fit the filter criteria.
  • A node can contain items (nodes and/or leaves) that fit the filter criteria.

Because of this, the results might contain more nodes than those that are relevant for the filter criteria.

Developer Hint
The tree table itself has no influence on the filter result. It sends a filter request and displays whatever comes back. Make sure that the result set is meaningful.

Sorting

First of all: Is sorting meaningful in your tree? If so, decide on a meaningful default sort order.

If sorting is meaningful, is it meaningful on all levels? Or does the tree structure need to be stable? In the latter case, sort only leaves, but not nodes.

To display the current sort state, an icon is shown in the column header of the most recently sorted column. This icon indicates the sort direction (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order. For each column, provide a meaningful sort order. For example:

  • Sort text alphabetically
  • Sort numbers by their value
  • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
    • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
    • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
    • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
    • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.

Loading Data

To indicate that the table is currently loading items, use the busy state (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data has been loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Initital Display

Think of the initial expand / collapse state of a tree: If your structure contains many items on the root level, it might make sense to collapse the whole tree in the beginning.

In contrast, if the main items to work with are displayed on a deeper level (e.g. the parent nodes are just some kind of categorization), the tree should be expanded up to the first level where the needed items appear.

Selection

  • We strongly recommend using the multi-selection plug-in. This ensures that all items selected using Select All or as part of a range are included – even if some items were not initially loaded in the front end. This is not the case if you use the multi-toggle option.
  • Do not limit the range selection for the multi-selection plug-in unless you have to.
    • If the dataset is small and/or completely available in the front-end, set the limit property to 0 to enable the Select All option and allow users to select any range.
    • If you have a large dataset, set a limit on the number of selected items to avoid performance issues. Also bear in mind that some actions won’t be helpful if the dataset is too big (for example, a delete operation on 2 million database entries).
  • In multiple selection mode, do not show checkboxes in the first data column in the default delivery to avoid confusion.

Empty Table

Try to avoid empty tables. If necessary, provide instructions on how to fill the tree table with data.

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items.

Add Items

For adding items, place an Add or Create text button on the table toolbar.

  • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
  • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.

Show new items as the first item of the tree table or node:

  • If nothing is selected, add the new item to the root.
  • If a single node is selected, add the new item to the selected node.
  • If a single leaf is selected, add the new item as child of this leaf. The original selected item becomes a node.

If your tree doesn’t support adding items to the root, selected node, or selected leaf, disable Create or Add for the corresponding levels.

Disable Create or Add if more than one item is selected.

For more details, see the guidelines for managing objects (including subarticles).

Enabling/Disabling Actions

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection:

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user how many items will be affected. Let the user choose whether to apply the action anyway or cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

If the action was applied and the items are still available, keep them selected.

Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection
Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection

Columns

Minimize the number of columns. Avoid the need to scroll horizontally in the default delivery. In the first column, show the hierarchical data, which should identify the line item. Choose the name over the ID, but if both are needed, show the name first, then the ID.

The tree table assigns the same width to each column by default. It is recommended that you overwrite this default to provide optimal space for your content (sap.ui.table.Column, property: width).

If you define the column width in pixels or rems, resizing a column affects only the width of this specific column. Reducing the browser window size results in a scrollbar. After resizing a column, a scrollbar appears if the width of the table is not enough to show all columns. If the columns use less space than is available, white space appears on the right side of the last column.

If you define the column width as a percentage, resizing one column affects the width of several or all columns. Text becomes truncated when the browser window size is reduced. This is done to make sure that all columns together fill the space of the table. A scrollbar appears only in case the automatic change of the column widths is not enough to display all columns. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, a minimum width can be set per column. Please be aware that this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users are still able to reduce the column width below the provided minimum. (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: width, minWidth)

If you define the column width as “auto”, the behavior is the same as for “percentage”. In contrast to percentage, “auto” distributes the columns equally.

To decide on how to set the column width (pixel/rem/em vs. percent/auto), keep the following tips in mind:

  • For tables with only 2 to 3 columns, use pixel-based units. This ensures that on wide screens the values in the columns are not spread over the whole screen, which improves readability of line items.
  • For tables with many columns, where a horizontal scrollbar is usually needed, use pixel-based units. This avoids unintended side effects when resizing columns.
  • For all other tables, use whatever fits your case better.

Be cautious with mixing columns with pixel-based and percentage-based widths. While this can be helpful in some cases, it could also cause even more unintended side effects when resizing a column. When using percentage-based widths for one or more columns, think of the possibility to not allow end users to resize columns at all.

Alignment of Cell Content

Align column headers according to their cell content:

  • Texts are left-aligned.
  • Numbers (except for IDs), dates, and times are right-aligned.
  • Icons are centered.
  • Micro charts are left-aligned.

In addition, align amounts with currencies to the decimal point. You can do this with the sap.ui.unified.Currency control.

Note that most currencies have two digits after the decimal point, but there are exceptions, for example:

  • The Tunisian dinar has three digits.
  • The Japanese yen has no digits.

In tree tables with mixed currencies, all amounts still have to be aligned to the decimal point.

To enable positive and negative values to be identified more easily, position the minus sign to the right of the number. It is placed in the same position in every row.

For more information, see currency.

Formatting Cell Content

  • Note that there are different locale formats, so show dates, times, and numbers in the format corresponding to the user’s language.
  • If text and an ID are to be shown, show the ID in brackets after the corresponding text.
  • If the unit of measurement is the same for all rows, show the unit of measurement in the column header. Otherwise, show the unit of measurement within the row.
  • If you want to let users sort, filter, or group by amount and by unit of measure independently, put both in different columns. If you combine them in one column, offer only sorting, filtering, and grouping by amount.

Tree vs. Table

Trees are more complex than tables due to their hierarchical view. Users tend to have more problems finding items in hierarchical views than in flat lists, except where the hierarchical view is natural. By natural we mean that every child node should be part of only one parent, and this relationship between the child and parent is clear and well known.

Do
Example of an acceptable use of tree tables
Example of an acceptable use of tree tables
Do
A clear parent-child relationship
A clear parent-child relationship

When you use trees, you should choose broad hierarchies over deep hierarchies. Deep hierarchies make finding items more complicated. So try to reduce hierarchical levels where possible, especially if the hierarchy is not natural. Ideally, a tree should have a maximum of four levels, the first two of which should contain the most important items.

Don't
Avoid unnecessary depth in the hierarchy
Avoid unnecessary depth in the hierarchy
Do
Favor breadth over depth in the hierarchy
Favor breadth over depth in the hierarchy

You can use the following methods to reduce hierarchy levels:

  • Avoid single root nodes. A single root node is often used to provide a Select All feature. Since the tree control provides an extra space for a Select All feature, the root node is not usually needed.
  • When you use only two levels, choose a grouped table or grouped ALV over a tree table control. Expand all groups for the default delivery.
  • Container nodes at the top level can usually be replaced by tabs or value pickers.
  • Eliminate unnecessary mid-level containers, for example, by combining redundant ones.
  • Exercise care when using a tree due to its overall complexity. The hierarchical structure of the data does not necessarily mean that a tree control is required.

Design Concepts

The tree table can be used to display large amounts of hierarchical data. Unfortunately, tree tables have a high data density and therefore convey an immediate feeling of complexity. Ideally, tree tables with large amounts of data should only be shown if there is no other option. You should instead try the following:

  • Flatten the data. A list, table, or ALV is still complex, but less so than a tree table.
  • Break down the data into manageable chunks. Allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Try to avoid horizontal scrolling in the default delivery.

Navigation

To trigger navigation on line item level, choose one of the following options:

  • Use a link for the attribute that identifies the row. Clicking the link triggers the navigation. This is the preferred option.
  • Add the RowActions column and show the navigation arrow (  ) at the end of the row. No column header text is required. The navigation column is fixed and will not scroll away. Users also cannot personalize this column. The navigation arrow triggers the navigation.
    Do not use the RowActions column for actions other than navigation and deletion.

Examples of Incorrect and Correct Usage

When you use trees:

  • Choose breadth over depth.
  • Emphasize important values. Do not let the user run into a wall of text without guidance. You can use bold text for this.
  • Try to minimize the number of columns, especially if there is a large number of rows.
  • Optimize column width for its initial visible content. Do not automatically adjust column width based on content changes.
  • Do not wrap content, truncate it. End users can easily change the column width to see the full text.
Don't
Avoid: The initial visible content should not be truncated in the default delivery
Avoid: The initial visible content should not be truncated in the default delivery
Don't
Never wrap texts
Never wrap texts
  • Maintain a fixed layout, except when the user wants to change it.
  • In the default layout, use the tree column for the item name or data that identifies the row. This helps the user to choose between different items.
  • Create a clear and immediately understandable hierarchy. Use clear parent-child relationships. If this is not possible, add a child in different nodes to help the user find the element.
Do
Acceptable: repeat entries to optimize finding items
Acceptable: repeat entries to optimize finding items
  • Consider persisting the layout settings. When a user reopens the app, show the tree table with the same column sizes, column order, and view settings as last defined by this user.
  • Use the Select All feature only if it makes sense. Note that selecting a lot of data also takes time and might not be appropriate for all use cases. For example, a delete operation on two million database entries might not be very helpful in many cases.
  • Set the property collapseRecursive to “false” in order to keep the selection on subnodes even after collapsing and expanding the root node.

Empty Tree Tables

Avoid empty tree tables. If necessary, provide instructions on how to fill the tree table with data (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, properties: noDataText, showNoData).

Examples:

  • If a tree table is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the tree table with data.
  • If a tree table is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    No filters set. To start, enter your search and filter settings and run the search.
  • If a tree table is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No items found. Check the search and filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, no search is offered, only the search is offered).
  • You are using the live search (no Go button in the filter bar). In this case, leave out “run the search”.
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of search and filter settings).

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, you can display a highlight indicator in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to show:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry-specific or process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”.

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users exactly what is wrong. Make sure that you provide this information within the table row, ideally in the same color.

For details on the use of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.ui.table.TreeTable, aggregation: rowSettingsTemplate)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. Also, because there is no generic keyboard interaction, drag and drop isn’t accessible. Moreover, drag and drop is not available on all browsers. For these reasons, offer drag and drop only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within a tree table, use the following options:

  • For dropping items as a child, use whole nodes as drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.On).
  • For dropping items on the same level, use the space between items as drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between).
  • If you want to allow users to drop items as a child or sibling, offer both drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.OnOrBetween).

This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Drop target on an Item
Drop target on an Item

Do not combine rearranging items within one level and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

Moving items from one node to another can be combined with sorting without any issues.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items on the same level with sorting
Do not combine rearranging items on the same level with sorting

Visible Alternatives to Drag and Drop

Depending on the functionality you need, use one or more of the following alternatives:

  • To move items up or down within a node:
    Use the  Move Up and  Move Down buttons on the toolbar. These buttons move the selected items until the first selected item can’t be moved up / the last selected item can’t be moved down any further.
    Depending on your tree, this can make sense for both leaves and nodes, only for leaves, or only for nodes. When moving a node, move the whole node and (if applicable) all its children up or down to the next position within the parent node.
    Always make sure that when the user moves an item in one direction and then moves it back, the order is the same as it was before.
    Do not combine the option to move items up and down with sorting.
  • To move items to another node:
    Use Copy and Paste buttons on the toolbar.
    Alternatively, offer a Move To button. Clicking Move To opens a dialog that shows all the nodes of the tree, but no leaves. Selecting an item in this dialog closes the dialog and moves the corresponding items to the selected node.
  • To change the level of an item:
    In some trees, such as document structures, users can change the level of an item without affecting the level of parent or child items. In this case, use left and right arrow buttons (   ).

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar). Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

The context menu can be triggered for the table, row, or cell. However, we do not recommend using context menus for cells: because the content of a cell is a different touch target than the cell itself, opening a cell context menu via touch is quite hard, even in cozy mode.

Do not combine context menus with condensed mode: editable controls fill the entire space inside a cell. Because of this, context menus cannot be opened at all with touch or mouse interaction.

Tables in Object Pages

In the object page, we advise against using analytical, grid, and tree tables. Instead, use a responsive table and offer navigation to a list report with the table types mentioned above.

For more information on the use of tables within the object page, see the Tables section of the Object Page article.

Export to Spreadsheet

On the table toolbar, apps can provide a menu button for exporting table data to a spreadsheet. For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button
'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Tree

Within SAP Fiori, we distinguish between tree tables and trees. Both usually allow the user to display and work with a hierarchical set of items. While tree tables are usually used for more complex data, trees are generally used for rather basic data. Trees are mostly used in the master list for a master-detail scenario using the flexible column layout and in popovers or dialogs. In certain use cases, they can also be used in the dynamic page layout.

In the case of tree tables and trees, items that contain additional items are called nodes, while items that do not contain any other items are called leaves. If available, a single topmost node is called a root node. Apart from the hierarchical structure of its nodes and leaves, a tree is quite similar to a list.

Usage

Use the tree if:

  • You need to display the key identifier of hierarchically structured items (for example in the first column of the flexible column layout).
  • Selecting one or more items out of a set of hierarchically structured items is a main use case.
  • The hierarchy has a restricted number of levels (up to about 12, depending on the content) and items (around 200).
  • You want to have only one implementation for all devices.

Do not use the tree if:

  • The main use case is to select one item from a very small number of non-hierarchical items, without viewing additional details. In this case, a select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • Items are not structured hierarchically. Use a list instead.
  • The hierarchy turns out to have only two levels. In this case, use a grouped list.
  • The hierarchy turns out to be just a categorization based on several details of the item. In this case, an analytical table provides multi-level grouping. Note that the analytical table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You need to display very deep hierarchies with additional data per item. In this case, use a tree table. Note that the tree table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • The structure contains more than 200 items. In this case, use the tree table. It is optimized for large item sets and provides better performance. Note that the tree table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use a chart.

Check out the table overview to decide which SAP Fiori table is most suitable for your needs.

Responsiveness

The tree is like a list containing hierarchical data. It acts as a container for items, with the possibility to expand and collapse nodes. When reducing the width, item texts wrap to ensure that the tree adapts to the new size.

In addition, the tree changes the indentation per level dynamically when the user expands a node, based on number of levels currently showing.

Tree displaying 2 levels
Tree displaying 2 levels
Tree displaying 3 levels
Tree displaying 3 levels
Tree displaying 4 levels
Tree displaying 4 levels

Layout

The title bar (optional) contains the title of the tree. In addition, an item counter and toolbar items can be placed on the title bar.
The collection of hierarchical items occupies the main part of the tree.

Schematic visualization of the tree
Schematic visualization of the tree

Components

The title bar consists of a toolbar. The toolbar can contain a title, an item count, and other toolbar items such as actions or view settings, for example.

The standard tree item consists of:

  • A highlight indicator (optional)
  • An expand/collapse button for nodes
  • A selector in form of a checkbox or a radio button (optional)
  • An icon (optional)
  • text
  • A counter (optional)
  • Additional buttons with actions such as Edit, Navigate, or Delete (optional)

If additional controls are needed, use a custom tree item. The custom tree item allows you to use any combination of controls inside the tree.

Standard tree item
Standard tree item

Behavior and Interaction (incl. Gestures)

Tree Level

Scrolling

The height of the tree is defined by the number of items it contains. It does not have its own scroll container, but is scrolled together with the app.

Same tree, with different expand state
Same tree, with different expand state

When the user scrolls, the title and the filter info bar can stick to the top of the surrounding layout container (sap.m.Tree, property: sticky).

Information
The “sticky” feature comes with some limitations:

  • It is not available on all browsers. In non-supporting browsers, the corresponding areas are not fixed on top of the surrounding layout container while scrolling.
  • Certain layout containers suppress the sticky behavior, such as the grid layout. The same happens if the table is placed within the object page.
  • If focus is set to a sticky area, the tree is automatically scrolled to top.

Sticky title
Sticky title

Selecting

A tree can have one of the following selection modes (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, property: mode):

None: Items cannot be selected (sap.m.ListMode.None).
Beware: Items can, nevertheless, use the sap.m.ListType “navigation” which allows click-handling on specific items. This should only be used when the click triggers a navigation to a corresponding item details page.

Tree without selectable items
Tree without selectable items

Single select master: One item of the tree can be selected. To select an item, click anywhere on the item. Single select master does not add any visual indication to the tree and therefore cannot be differentiated from trees without selection if no item is selected. Therefore, always keep one item selected. For single selection, this is the preferred mode. (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectMaster)

Single selection: only one item is selected.
Single selection: only one item is selected.

Single select left: One item of the tree can be selected. For this, the tree provides radio buttons on the left side of each line item. Use this selection mode only if clicking on the item triggers something else, such as a navigation. Ideally, always keep one item selected, even in initial state (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectLeft).

Single selection with radio buttons. Use only if row clicks are used for something else, such as for navigation.
Single selection with radio buttons. Use only if row clicks are used for something else, such as for navigation.

Multiple selection: Allows the selection of one or more items. For this, the tree provides checkboxes on the left side of each line item. Each item is selected independently of the others (sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).

Developer Hint
In multiple selection mode, users can (de)select all items using the shortcut CTRL+A. This only affects items that have already been loaded to the front-end server. All other items are not (de)selected before they are loaded (for example, items added via lazy loading with growingScrollToLoad). This conflicts with the guideline that all items the user can reach by scrolling must be (de)selected.

Also note that CTRL+A only (de)selects items within expanded nodes.

To process all items, listen to the selectionChange event and to its flag selectAll. This indicates whether CTRL+A was triggered. As soon as an action is triggered, process the items accordingly. Depending on the number of items, consider processing them in the back end.

Multiple selection
Multiple selection

Deleting

To delete single items, use the tree in “delete” mode (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This adds a Delete   button to each item. Clicking or tapping this button triggers the deletion of the corresponding item. Do not use this mode if deleting multiple items at once is the preferred use case. Delete is a mode of the tree and  therefore cannot be used together with single selection or multi selection.

Tree in “delete” mode
Tree in “delete” mode

Line Item Level

Expandable and Collapsible Nodes

An Expand/Collapse button is provided automatically for each node.

Expand/collapse button
Expand/collapse button

Navigating

To allow navigation from an item, set type to “navigation” within the corresponding item (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This will create an indicator at the end of the line (“>”) and the entire item will become selectable. Clicking or tapping the line triggers the navigation event. However, clicking or tapping a selectable area or an expandable/collapse node does not. Use the navigation event to navigate to a new page containing item details.
If no navigation is possible, set type to “inactive”.
Navigation is an item type and therefore cannot be used together with “edit” or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).

Tree items with navigation indicator
Tree items with navigation indicator
Navigation indicators can be set per item
Navigation indicators can be set per item

Editing Items

To allow the user to edit an item, set type to “detail” within the corresponding item (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive). This will create an edit  button at the end of the line. Clicking the button triggers the edit event. Use this event to either open a dialog or a details page where the item can be edited.
Edit is an item type and therefore cannot be used together with “navigation” or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).

Edit button
Edit button

Clicking an Item

Items as a whole can be clickable. An event is fired by clicking on the item (anywhere except when triggering a selection or when expanding/collapsing a node). Apps can react to the event, such as by opening a dialog (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive).
Active elements do not have a visual indication and therefore cannot be differentiated from non-active elements.
“Active” is an item type and  therefore cannot be used together with “navigation” or “edit”. In addition, “active” uses the entire item as a clickable area and thus cannot be used together with single select master.

Active items
Active items

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a tree. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

The context menu can be triggered for the tree or per item.

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a tree is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Tree - context menu
Tree - context menu

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a tree or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.m.ListBase, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Guidelines

Tree vs. List

Trees are more complex than lists due to their hierarchical view. Users tend to have more problems finding items in hierarchical views than in flat lists, except where the hierarchical view is natural. By natural we mean that every child node should be part of only one parent, and this relationship between the child and parent is clear and well known.

Example of an acceptable use of trees
Example of an acceptable use of trees
Do
A clear parent-child relationship
A clear parent-child relationship

Broad vs. Deep Hierarchies

When you use trees, you should choose broad hierarchies over deep hierarchies. Deep hierarchies make finding items more complicated. So try to reduce hierarchical levels where possible, especially if the hierarchy is not natural. Ideally, a tree should have a maximum of four levels, the first two of which should contain the most important items.

Don't
Avoid unnecessary depth in the hierarchy
Avoid unnecessary depth in the hierarchy
Do
Favor breadth over depth in a hierarchy
Favor breadth over depth in a hierarchy

You can use the following methods to reduce hierarchy levels:

  • Avoid a single root node. It is usually not needed.
  • Container nodes at the top level can usually be replaced by tabs or value pickers.
  • Eliminate unnecessary mid-level containers, for example, by combining redundant ones.
  • Exercise care when using a tree due to its overall complexity. The hierarchical structure of the data does not necessarily mean that a tree control is required.
Acceptable: repeat entries to optimize finding items
Acceptable: repeat entries to optimize finding items

Design Concepts

The tree can be used to display hierarchical data. Unfortunately, trees convey an immediate feeling of complexity. Ideally, show trees only if there is no other option. You should instead try the following:

  • Flatten the data. A list is still complex, but less so than a tree. A combo box might also fit in some use cases.
  • When only two levels are needed, a grouped list control can be used. This works well, where group nodes are used for categorizing their children and where the group nodes themselves do not need to be selectable.
  • Break down the data into manageable chunks. Allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Title

Use a title only if the title of the tree is not indicated in the surrounding area. If needed, implement the title text by adding a title to a toolbar. Place the toolbar above the tree.

Do not use a title if it simply repeats text that is already above the tree. For example:

  • Beverages tree is the only control on a tab labeled Beverages.
  • A section or subsection on an object page contains only one tree.

Use a title if you need the item count, toolbar, or variant management. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a title, such as Items.
Exception: If the surrounding area contains the title, and both the item count and toolbar can be added to the surrounding area, no additional title is needed.
Example: An object page (sub-)section contains only one tree. In this case, add the item count and the table toolbar to the (sub-)section header.

If you use a title, be sure to include the following:

  • A title text for the tree.
  • An (optional) item count using the following format: Title (Number of Items). For example, Items (17). Depending on the use case, either count all items or only leaves (for example, if nodes are mainly used for categorization).

Remove the item count in the title if there are zero items.

If possible, keep the toolbar sticky (sap.m.Tree, property: sticky).

Developer Hint
Assistive technologies (such as screen readers) use the title to create a hierarchical site map for faster navigation. In addition, screen readers use the title as the label for the tree.

If you don’t use a title (for example, to avoid repetition), make sure that the tree is connected to another meaningful on-screen text that can be used as a label for assistive technologies. You can do this using the method addAriaLabelledBy.

Title
Title
Title with item count
Title with item count

Loading Data

To indicate that the tree is currently loading items, use the busy state (sap.m.Tree, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Tree in busy state while loading data
Tree in busy state while loading data

Initial Display

Think of the initial expandable/collapsible state of a tree. If your structure contains many items on the root level, it might make sense to collapse the whole tree in its initial state.

In contrast, if the most important items are displayed on a deeper level (if, for example, the parent nodes are simply a kind of categorization), the tree should be expanded up to the first level where the most important items immediately appear.

Content

The standard tree item allows you to set one text per item. The text wraps, which can lead to items of different heights depending on the length of the text. An icon can be shown before the text. Try not to use the icons, and only use them if the meaning of the icons is clear and unambiguous. In addition, a counter can be placed on the right side of the item (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: counter).

The custom tree item allows you to use any combination of controls inside a tree, including editable controls (selection controls, Expand/Collapse buttons, navigation indicators, counters).

When designing a custom tree item, consider the responsive behavior. Take into account that all the controls you can add to a tree require additional width. Their position cannot be changed.

Standard tree item with all options
Standard tree item with all options

Content Formatting

To display object names with an ID, show the ID in brackets after the corresponding object name.

Place the ID in brackets after the corresponding object name
Place the ID in brackets after the corresponding object name

Try not to display an empty tree. If there is no way around this, provide instructions on how to fill the tree with data (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, properties: showNoData, noDataText).

 

Examples:

  • If a tree is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the tree with data.
  • If a tree is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    No filters set. To start, enter your search and filter settings and run the search.
  • If a tree is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No items found. Check the search and filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, no search is offered, only the search is offered).
  • You are using the live search (no Go button in the filter bar). In this case, leave out “run the search”.
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of search and filter settings).
Provide meaningful instructions within an empty tree
Provide meaningful instructions within an empty tree

Highlighting Items

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, you can display a highlight indicator in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to show:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry-specific or process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”.

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users exactly what is wrong. Make sure that you provide this information within the table row, ideally in the same color.

For details on the use of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.m.ListItemBase, property: highlight)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Item States

To show that an item has been modified, for example within the global edit flow, add the string (Modified) to the text of the item.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error, for example within the global edit flow, add the string (Contains errors) to the text of the item and highlight the row accordingly.

A modified item with an error
A modified item with an error

To show that an item is locked, add the string (Locked by [name]) to the text of the item.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in a draft state, add the string (Draft) to the text of the item.

Item in draft state
Item in draft state

Show only one state at any one time.

Actions

To trigger actions on items, show the actions on a toolbar above the tree. Do not offer action triggering on multiple items if the tree is expected to have fewer than 10 items in most cases.
The following actions on single items must always be in-line:

Delete: Use “Delete” mode (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This places a delete  button at the end of each item.

Items with Delete button
Items with Delete button

Navigation: Use the “Navigation” item type (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This places a navigation indicator at the end of the corresponding items. Use this to navigate to a new page containing item details.

Items with navigation indicator
Items with navigation indicator

Edit: Use the “Detail” item type (sap.m.TreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail). This places an edit   icon at the end of the corresponding items.

Edit button
Edit button

From these three actions (delete, navigation, and edit), you can combine delete and edit, or delete and navigation. Edit and navigation cannot be combined.

To trigger actions that are independent of the selection, show the actions on a toolbar above the tree. For example: AddCollapse AllExpand All, …

To trigger a default action on the entire item, use the “Active” or “DetailAndActive” item type (sap.m.TreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active). Active items trigger an event when clicked, which can be handled by apps, for example, to open a dialog. Selection and expanding/collapsing a node does not trigger the event, but are handled by the tree. Do not use this for navigation, to switch the line item to an edit state, or to delete the item.
Active can be combined with edit and delete, but not with navigation. Do not combine active with single selection master.

Add Items

For adding items, place an Add or Create text button on the toolbar.

  • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
  • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.

Show new items as the first item of the tree or node:

  • If nothing is selected, add the new item to the root.
  • If a single node is selected, add the new item to the selected node.
  • If a single leaf is selected, add the new item as a child of this leaf. The original selected item becomes a node.

If your tree doesn’t support adding items to the root, selected node, or selected leaf, disable Create or Add for the corresponding levels.

Disable Create or Add if more than one item is selected.

For more details, see guidelines for managing objects (including subarticles).

Enabling/Disabling Actions

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection:

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that tells the user how many items will be affected. Let users choose whether to apply the action anyway or cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

If the action was applied and the items are still available, keep them selected.

Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection
Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection

Editing Items

To edit items, add an Edit button either in-line on the toolbar above the tree. Triggering the button either opens a dialog or navigates to an editable details page.

For mass editing:

  • Provide multiselection (sap.m.Tree/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).
  • Provide an Edit button on the toolbar above the tree.
  • If several items are selected, triggering the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

For more details, see mass editing.

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar).

Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. Also, because there is no generic keyboard interaction, drag and drop isn’t accessible. Moreover, drag and drop is not available on all browsers. For these reasons, offer drag and drop only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within a tree, use the following options:

  • For dropping items as a child, use whole nodes as drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.On).
  • For dropping items on the same level, use the space between items as drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between).
  • If you want to allow users to drop items as a child or sibling, offer both drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.OnOrBetween).

This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Do not combine rearranging items within one level and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

Moving items from one node to another can be combined with sorting without any issues.

Drop targets in between items
Drop targets in between items

Visible Alternatives to Drag and Drop

Depending on the functionality you need, use one or more of the following alternatives:

  • To move items up or down within a node:
    Use the  Move Up and  Move Down buttons on the toolbar. These buttons move the selected items until the first selected item can’t be moved up or the last selected item can’t be moved down any further.
    Depending on your tree, this can make sense for both leaves and nodes, only for leaves, or only for nodes. When moving a node, move the whole node and (if applicable) all its children up or down to the next position within the parent node.
    Always make sure that when the user moves an item in one direction and then moves it back, the order is the same as it was before.
    Do not combine the option to move items up and down with sorting.
  • To move items to another node:
    Use Copy and Paste buttons on the toolbar.
    Alternatively, offer a Move To button. Clicking Move To opens a dialog that shows all the nodes of the tree, but no leaves. Selecting an item in this dialog closes the dialog and moves the corresponding items to the selected node.
  • To change the level of an item:
    In some trees, such as document structures, users can change the level of an item without affecting the level of parent or child items. In this case, use left and right arrow buttons (   ).

Filtering

What exactly needs to stay or be removed is highly dependent on the kind of structure and data your tree displays. For many trees, the following approach works well if you want to apply filters only to the leaves of a tree:

  • Remove all leaves that don’t fit the filter criteria
  • Remove empty nodes

If you also apply filters to nodes, keep the following in mind:

  • A node may or may not fit the filter criteria.
  • A node can contain items (nodes and/or leaves) that fit the filter criteria.

Because of this, the results might contain more nodes than those that are relevant for the filter criteria.

Developer Hint
The tree control itself has no influence on the filter result. It sends a filter request and displays whatever comes back. Make sure that the result set is meaningful.
[/vc_row_inner]

Sorting

Before you start, ask yourself if sorting is meaningful in your tree. If so, decide on a meaningful default sort order.

If sorting is meaningful, is it meaningful on all levels? Or does the tree structure need to be stable? In the latter case, sort only leaves, but not nodes.

The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order. Use a meaningful sort order. For example:

  • Sort text alphabetically
  • Sort numbers by their value
  • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
    • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
    • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
    • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
    • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.

Export to Spreadsheet

On the table toolbar, apps can provide a menu button for exporting the tree data to a spreadsheet. For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button
'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Responsive Table

The responsive table is the default table in SAP Fiori. It contains a set of line items and is fully responsive. Depending on the scenario, users can also navigate from the line items to further details.

A line item contains several data points sorted into columns. A data point refers to a unit of information, such as a number, a text, a unit of measurement, and so on, which can be used to form the content of a tableform or other control. One data point is usually displayed by a control, such as a text, object status, or input field. A control can display more than one data point, for example, by concatenating text.

In contrast to traditional tables, a “cell” of the responsive table is not limited to displaying only one control, and therefore a single cell can present far more than one data point.

Responsive table
Responsive table

Usage

Use the responsive table if:

  • You need a table. The responsive table is the default table in SAP Fiori.
  • You need to use various controls inside a line item, such as micro charts. By contrast, the analytical table supports only a very limited set of controls.
  • The focus is on line items, not on cells. The responsive table is optimized for viewing complete items on all devices.
  • Selecting one or more items is a main use case and details are needed to choose the correct item.
  • Line items are independent of each other and no operation across columns is needed.
  • You want to have only one implementation for all devices. As the name suggests, the responsive table is responsive.

Do not use the responsive table if:

  • The main use case is to select one item from a very small number of items, without viewing additional details. In this case, a select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • The main use case is to select one item from several items, with the possibility of viewing only a few details per item. In this case, a list might be more appropriate. Pay attention to the layout of the list item to ensure that it has a pleasant appearance.
  • The cell level and the spatial relationship between cells is more important than the line item. In this case, use the analytical table or grid table. Examples include spreadsheet analyses and waterfall charts. Note that neither the analytical table nor the grid table are fully responsive. Both are only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You are working on more than 1,000 rows. Try using the analytical table or grid table instead; they are easier to handle, perform better, and are optimized for handling large numbers of items. Note that neither the analytical table nor the grid table are fully responsive. Both are only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • Comparing items is a major use case. In this case, the analytical table or grid table might be more appropriate because each cell contains only one data point. By contrast, the responsive table offers greater flexibility within line items, including the ability to add more data points per cell and the pop-in function. Both make comparisons more difficult. Note that neither the analytical table nor the grid table are fully responsive. Both are only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • Data needs to be structured in a hierarchical manner. In this case, a tree table might be more appropriate. Although the analytical table can have several grouping levels, it is not as flexible when nodes at several levels contain child nodes. Note that neither the analytical table nor the grid table are fully responsive. Both are only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use a chart.
  • You just need it for layout reasons. In this case, use a layout container such as a horizontal layout or a vertical layout instead.
  • You need read-only or editable field-value pairs. In this case, use a form instead. The responsive table is not optimized for form-like input navigation.
Don't
Do not use a responsive table as a form
Do not use a responsive table as a form

See the table overview to decide which SAP Fiori table is most suitable for your needs.

Responsiveness

The responsive table is optimized for viewing one line item at a time with no scrolling or only vertical scrolling, irrespective of the display width.

On smartphones, only the most important data remains in the one-column or two-column table, while all other data is moved to the space between two item rows, known as the “pop-in area”.

In this area, data for the corresponding cell is provided as a label/value pair. The label is defined by the column header, and the value is taken from the corresponding cell. Labels can be displayed next to the value or above the value.

Within the pop-in area, the label/value pairs can be displayed in the following ways (sap.m.Table, property: PopinLayout):

  • Block: Label/value pairs are listed one below the other.
  • GridSmall: Label/value pairs are displayed next to each other in equally spaced grid cells. An additional column is shown for each 13 rem of available width (208 px with default browser settings). If the number of grid cells exceeds the available width, the grid cells wrap. On S size, this layout transforms automatically to a block layout.
  • GridLarge: The display logic is the same as for GridSmall,, but grid columns come with a larger minimum width (26 rem instead of 13 rem).

In all layouts, you can show the labels next to or above (recommended) the corresponding data.

The responsive table uses all the available space, and does not provide any padding. If there is space around the table, it comes from the spacing defined for the surrounding layout container.

Information
The GridSmall and GridLarge layouts are not available in all browsers. If the chosen layout is not available, it is automatically changed to Block layout.
The responsive table displayed on a smartphone (size S)
The responsive table displayed on a smartphone (size S)
The responsive table displayed on a tablet (size M)
The responsive table displayed on a tablet (size M)
The responsive table displayed in compact mode on a desktop computer (size L)
The responsive table displayed in compact mode on a desktop computer (size L)

To ensure responsiveness, you must configure each column. Depending on the width of the table (in pixels), the column needs to know which of the following responses is required:

  • Stay in the table layout.
  • Move to the pop-in (sap.m.Column, with the properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth, popinHAlign, popinDisplay).
  • Hide.

By default, the width provided is interpreted as the screen width. If the table does not use the full width of the screen, app developers have to configure the table accordingly (sap.m.Table, property: contextualWidth).

Since you have to define this for each column, you can also handle more than one column at a single breakpoint, such as moving three columns to the pop-in area at once.

Each of the three device types has a predefined value for the screen width. However, you will get better results if you offer more breakpoints by using pixel values instead of the predefined values.

For the smallest screen width, keep the following information in the table layout:

  • The identifier of the line item
  • The key attribute

Example for Block Layout

A typical responsive table.

A typical responsive table
A typical responsive table

Hide the information column for a width smaller than 570 px.

Hiding the information column
Hiding the information column

Move the column “vendor” to the pop-in area for a width smaller than 460 px (sap.m.Column, properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth).

Moving the vendor column to the pop-in area
Moving the vendor column to the pop-in area

Move the column “limit” to the pop-in for a width smaller than 350 px (sap.m.Column, properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth).

Moving the limit column to the pop-in area
Moving the limit column to the pop-in area

Move the column “price” to the pop-in area for a width smaller than 270 px (sap.m.Column, properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth).

Moving the price column to the pop-in area
Moving the price column to the pop-in area

If you still need to support smaller screens, values can be moved below the corresponding labels inside the pop-in area. In these examples, this happens for a width smaller than 220 px (sap.m.Column, property: popinDisplay).

Pop-in area: moving the data below the labels
Pop-in area: moving the data below the labels

Example for GridLarge Layout

A more complex responsive table.

A more complex responsive table (full screen without pop-in)
A more complex responsive table (full screen without pop-in)

In this example, the Average Occupancy Rate and Available In columns move to the pop-in area if the screen width is less than 1900 pixels.

GridLarge layout - 'Average Occupancy Rate' and 'Available In' columns move to the pop-in area
GridLarge layout - 'Average Occupancy Rate' and 'Available In' columns move to the pop-in area

If the width is less than 1500 pixels, the Average Stay column moves to the pop-in area.

GridLarge layout - 'Average Stay' column moves to the pop-in area
GridLarge layout - 'Average Stay' column moves to the pop-in area

If the width is less than 1100 pixels, the Description column moves to the pop-in area. Since all four columns in the pop-in area do not fit into one row, the pop-in wraps.

GridLarge layout - 'Description' column moves to the pop-in area
GridLarge layout - 'Description' column moves to the pop-in area

If the width is reduced even further, the Details column moves to the pop-in area. On this narrow screen, only one column fits into one pop-in row, so it looks exactly like the block layout.

GridLarge layout - 'Details' column moves to the pop-in area
GridLarge layout - 'Details' column moves to the pop-in area

Layout

The optional title bar consists of the title of the responsive table, an item counter, variant management, and the toolbar.

The filter info bar appears when the responsive table is filtered, and shows information on the filter settings.

The column header shows the label for each column.

The collection of items, or rows, occupies the main part of the responsive table.

You can add aggregation information (such as totals) on the table footer.

A More button can be shown if you do not want all items to be loaded at the start (known as “lazy loading”). Ideally, you should use scrolling to load more items instead of choosing the More button.

Schematic visualization of the responsive table
Schematic visualization of the responsive table

Components

The title bar contains the title of the responsive table, an item counter, variant management, and the toolbar.

The toolbar can contain entry points for the view settings dialog and the table personalization dialog, as well as view switches in the form of a segmented button, and buttons for AddEdit, and other actions.
Beneath the toolbar, display a filter info bar (which itself is a special toolbar) if the responsive table is filtered.
To format within items, apply the guidelines for formatting data. Controls commonly used inside items are the object identifier and the object number. For more information about these controls, see object display components.
You can use the table footer to display additional static information relating to the table content.
The More button loads more items to the front end if not all items have yet been loaded.
Components of the responsive table
Components of the responsive table

Behavior and Interaction

The responsive table is quite flexible with regard to its content.

Table Level

Scroll

The height of the table is defined by the number of items it contains. It does not have a scroll container on its own, but is scrolled together with the app (in contrast to the grid table and the analytical table).

If the table works in a “growing” mode, it only loads a few items at first. Additional items are only loaded (and rendered) on request. The “request” can either be triggered by scrolling (preferred), or by clicking the More button.

Same table, different number of items
Same table, different number of items

When the user scrolls, the title bar, column headers, and filter info bar can stick to the top of the surrounding layout container (sap.m.Table, property: sticky).

Information
The “sticky” feature comes with some limitations:

  • It is not available on all browsers. In non-supporting browsers, the corresponding areas (title bar, column headers, filter info bar) are not fixed on top of the surrounding layout container while scrolling.
  • Certain layout containers suppress the sticky behavior, such as the grid layout. The same happens if the table is placed within the object page.
  • If focus is set to a fixed column header, the table is automatically scrolled to top.

Sticky table title and sticky column header
Sticky table title and sticky column header

Merge Duplicates

To simulate the behavior of row spanning, you can merge cells of consecutive rows inside one or more columns automatically if they contain the same value (sap.m.Column, properties: mergeDuplicates, mergeFunctionName).

Use the merge feature if you expect the column to contain duplicate entries, and it makes sense to group them. In the example screenshot, the Supplier, Product, and Dimensions columns reflect a hierarchical structure: Suppliers have products, which in turn have dimensions. Because suppliers typically have multiple products, merging duplicate entries for the supplier column makes the table easier to read. Note, however, that when the user sorts the table by another field, the hierarchy changes and the merged items are regrouped accordingly.

Do not use the merge feature if duplicate entries are not part of the design. If consecutive table rows happen to have the same values at runtime, this alone isn’t a valid reason to group them.

Supplier column merges duplicates in consecutive rows
Supplier column merges duplicates in consecutive rows
Merged columns with multiselection
Merged columns with multiselection

Select

A responsive table can have one of the following selection modes (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode):

  • None: Items cannot be selected (sap.m.ListMode.None).
    Beware: Line items can still use the sap.m.ListType “navigation”, which allows click handling on specific line items. Only use this option if the click triggers navigation to a corresponding line item details page.
  • Single selection master: One item in the responsive table can be selected. Items are selected by clicking or tapping the whole row. The single select master mode has no obvious visual cues, such as checkboxes or radio buttons. It only provides a light blue background for the selected state. Because of this, it can barely be differentiated from tables without selection (mode: None). Single select master is the preferred mode for single selection (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectMaster).
  • Single selection left: One item in the responsive table can be selected. For this, the responsive table provides radio buttons on the left side of each line item. Only use this mode if row clicks are being used for something else, such as navigation. (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectLeft).
  • Multiple selection: Users can select one or more items. For this, the responsive table provides checkboxes on the left side of each line item. Users can (de)select all items using the Select All checkbox to the left of the column header. Select All (de)selects all items that the user can reach by scrolling (sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).
Responsive table without selectable items
Responsive table without selectable items
Single selection master
Single selection master
SIngle selection left, with radio buttons. Use only if row clicks are used for something else.
SIngle selection left, with radio buttons. Use only if row clicks are used for something else.
Multiple selection
Multiple selection

Group

For grouping items, a group header is displayed (sap.m.GroupHeaderLisItem). The group header is not interactive.

Group headers
Group headers

Show Aggregations

Show aggregations (such as totals) on the table footer (sap.m.Column, aggregation: footer).

Do not show aggregations in “growing” mode. It is not clear, if an aggregation will only aggregate the items loaded into the front end, or all items.

Table footer displays aggregated total
Table footer displays aggregated total

Load Items

To show more than 200 items, use the “growing” mode (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, properties: growing, growingThreshold, growingScrollToLoad, growingTriggerText). The growing mode allows the user to load only the first few items. Additional items are only loaded (and rendered) on request, which improves performance. The “request” can either be done via scrolling (preferred), or by clicking the More button.

If using the More button, show the number of items already loaded and the total number items below the text More, if possible.

Do not show more than 1,000 items overall, even in growing mode. Use the grid table instead.

Do not show aggregations in growing mode. Also, do not display an item count on the table toolbar if growing mode is used. Use the count on the More button instead.

Load on scroll
Load on scroll

Line Item Level

Delete Single Item Rows

To delete single item rows, use the table in the mode “delete” (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This adds Delete buttons to each line item. Clicking this button triggers the deletion of the corresponding line item.

Do not use this mode if deleting multiple lines at once is the preferred use case.

Delete is a mode of the responsive table and therefore cannot be used together with single selection or multiselection.

Responsive table in 'delete' mode
Responsive table in 'delete' mode

Navigate

To allow navigation from a line item, use an item with the type “navigation” (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This creates an indicator at the end of the line (“>”) and the entire line item becomes clickable. If the user clicks or taps on the line, navigate to a new page containing line item details. In rare cases, you can also use the navigation mode for category navigation, without navigating to another page.

By contrast, clicking an interactive control within a line item does not trigger the navigation event. Instead, the corresponding control handles the click event.

If no navigation is possible, set sap.m.ListType to “inactive”.

“Navigation” is a list item type and therefore cannot be used together with “edit”, or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).

Navigation indicator
Navigation indicator

Edit Line Items

To allow editing for a line item, set sap.m.ListType to “detail” within the corresponding item (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive). This will create an Edit button at the end of the line. Clicking the button triggers the edit event. Use this event to switch the corresponding line item to edit mode.

Edit is a list item type and therefore cannot be used together with “navigation” or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).

Edit button
Edit button

Click an Item

Items as a whole can be clickable. An event is fired by clicking on the item (anywhere where there is no interactive control inside the item). Apps can react on the event, for example, by opening a dialog (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive).

Active elements do not have a visual indication and can therefore not be differentiated from non-active elements.

Active is a list item type and can therefore not be used together with “navigation” or “edit”. In addition, “active” uses the whole item as a clickable area and therefore cannot be used together with a single-selection table.

Active element
Active element

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a table or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.m.ListBase, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a table. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

When opened, the context menu gets the row and column context, except for special columns (such as the selection column). Context menus can be implemented for a specific table or row.

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a table is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Responsive table with a context menu
Responsive table with a context menu

Cell Level

Showing Information

In contrast to traditional tables (such as the analytical table or the tree table), a cell can contain more than just one line of text.

Several lines of text within one cell
Several lines of text within one cell

Add Controls

Alongside textual elements, you can also add any control to a table cell, such as input fields, microcharts, buttons, and so on.

Controls inside cells
Controls inside cells
Any control can be placed inside cells
Any control can be placed inside cells

A cell can contain more than one control and more than one data point.

With the View Settings dialog, users can sort, filter, and group by each of these data points.

Several controls per cell
Several controls per cell

You can also have different controls in different rows in the same column. This could be the case if one item is locked, but another item is in edit mode, for example.

Different controls per column
Different controls per column

Guidelines

Responsiveness

While the pop-in layouts GridLarge and GridSmall make better use of the available width, they also only look good with content that is specifically designed for pop-in behavior. If you have text-only tables with only one value per column, use the Block layout (sap.m.Table, property: popinLayout).

Place the column header labels in the pop-in area above the corresponding values (sap.m.Column, property: popinDisplay, value: Block). This avoids alignment issues with different content. Be aware that the labels get top-aligned with the adjacent content.
Only place the label next to the corresponding value under the following conditions (sap.m.Column, property: popinDisplay, value: Inline):

  • The values are text-only (no input fields, icons, images, micro charts, and so on)
  • The available space is at least the double the width of size S.

This avoids truncation or “over-wrapping” of the labels and content.

If a column does not have a column header text (for example, if it always contains the same button with its own label), do not show the header text as a label in the pop-in area either (sap.m.Column, property: popinDisplay, value: withoutHeader). If you forget this setting, you will see an empty space followed by a colon (“:”).

Information
The GridSmall and GridLarge layouts are not available in all browsers. If the chosen layout is not available, it is automatically changed to Block layout.

Table Title

Implement the table title by using a title control in a toolbar.

Use a table title only if the title of the table is not indicated in the surrounding area. Do not use a table title if it simply repeats text that is already above the table. For example:

  • A pricing conditions table is the only control on a tab labeled Pricing Conditions.
  • A section or subsection on an object page contains only one table.

Use a table title if you need the item count, table toolbar, or variant management. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a table title, such as Items.
Exception: If the surrounding area contains the table title, and both the item count and toolbar can be added to the surrounding area, no additional table title is needed.
Example: An object page (sub-)section contains only one table. In this case, add the item count and the table toolbar to the (sub-)section header.

Developer Hint
Assistive technologies (such as screen readers) use the title to create a hierarchical site map for faster navigation. In addition, screen readers use the title as the label for the table.

If you don’t use a title (for example, to avoid repetition), make sure that the table is connected to another meaningful on-screen text that can be used as a label for assistive technologies. You can do this using the method addAriaLabelledBy.

If you use a table title, show either a title for the table, with or without variant management, or an item count in the following format:

Items (2,534)

The item count in the table title includes all the visible items that a user can reach by scrolling. Group headers are not included.

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items. Do not use an item count together with “growing mode”.

If possible, keep the title bar sticky (sap.m.Table, property: sticky).

Table title with item count
Table title with item count

Selection

If the click area for the row is being used for another purpose (such as navigation), it cannot be used for selecting the row. In this case, use the “single select left” selection mode, which offers a radio button as an additional click area for each row. To avoid confusion, make sure that the first data column does not contain radio buttons in default delivery.

In all other single selection cases, use the selection mode “single select master”.

For all single selection modes, make sure that one item is initially selected. Otherwise, the user cannot return to the initial state. A selected item can only be deselected by selecting another item.

In multiple selection mode, do not show checkboxes in the first data column in the default delivery to avoid confusion. Offer the Select All checkbox for (de)selecting all items the user can reach by scrolling.

Don't
Single selection left - Do not show radio buttons in the first column in the default delivery
Single selection left - Do not show radio buttons in the first column in the default delivery
Don't
Multiple selection - Do not show checkboxes in the first column in the default delivery
Multiple selection - Do not show checkboxes in the first column in the default delivery
Do
Use the selection mode
Use the selection mode "single select left" if clicking the row is used for something else (such as navigation)
Do
Use the selection mode
Use the selection mode "single select master" in all other single-selection cases
Developer Hint
Select All is only applied to items that have already been loaded to the front-end server. All other items are not (de)selected before they are loaded, such as items added via lazy loading with growingScrollToLoad. This conflicts with the guideline that all items the user can reach by scrolling must be (de)selected.

To process all items, listen to the selectionChange event and to its selectAll flag. This indicates whether the Select All checkbox was triggered. As soon as an action is triggered, process the items accordingly. Depending on the number of items, consider processing them in the back end.

Loading Data

To indicate that the table is currently loading items, use the busy state. (sap.m.Table, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Table in busy state while loading data
Table in busy state while loading data

Columns – Best Practices

Minimize the number of columns:

  • On a smartphone, use only one or two columns, depending on the content.
  • On a tablet or desktop, use three to five columns if the responsive table is shown within the flexible column layout. Use about eight columns if using the full screen width, depending on the content.

If the responsive table does not fit into the width provided:

  • Hide columns to reduce the width of the table.
  • Use pop-in areas to show the whole content by increasing the height of the line items (sap.m.Column, properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth).

At the smallest size, keep the following information in the table layout:

  • The column that identifies the line item.
  • The column that contains the key attribute.

If both of these do not fit into the width provided, keep just the column with the line item identifier in the tabular layout.

The responsive table assigns the same width to each column by default. It is recommended that you overwrite this default to provide optimal space for your content (sap.m.Column, property: width).

Optimize column width for its initial content (sap.m.Column, property: width). If the content is dynamic, optimize column width for typical content.

If you need more columns than those that fit on a tablet screen (usually five) to fulfill 80% of your main use cases, offer an option to add, remove, and rearrange columns via the table personalization dialog. Before doing so, try to reduce the number of columns, for example, by using several lines per column or by utilizing the pop-in function. See the cheat sheet for an example.

Column Headers – Best Practices

Within the column header, provide a label for each column (sap.m.Column, aggregation: header). The column header label is reused as a label in the pop-in area.

Exception: If the column does not pop in, no column header label is needed as long as at least one column still has a column header label.

Use controls that wrap, such as text (with wrapping enabled). Do not use controls that truncate, such as labels.

Keep column headers sticky.

Do
Wrap column headers
Wrap column headers
Don't
Do not truncate column headers
Do not truncate column headers

Column headers (sap.m.Column, aggregation: header) usually contain links or text-based controls.

Column headers can also contain other kinds of SAP Fiori controls. However, the column header cannot be aligned vertically, making it difficult to use many controls in the column header. Using other kinds of controls also creates problems with pop-in behavior and could thus lead to accessibility issues. Therefore, exercise caution when using them in a column header.

Accepted: Link as column header text (rarely used)
Accepted: Link as column header text (rarely used)
Accepted if responsiveness is taken into account: Text plus search field
Accepted if responsiveness is taken into account: Text plus search field

If a column cell contains several fields, use an umbrella term in the column header (such as Address for fields like Street, ZIP Code, and City).

For text and ID fields, use a generic label (for example, Employee for Name and ID).

If none of these are possible, separate the labels with “/” (for example, Name / Status).

For boolean values, such as checkboxes, find a descriptive text for the column header.

Content Alignment

For alignment of cell content, follow the guidelines below (sap.m.Column, properties: halgin, valign, sap.m.ColumnListItem, property: VAlign). Align the column header horizontally according to the content of the cell.

Exception: Secondary information in a column always follows the alignment of the main information.

Left-align: text, IDs, phone numbers, URLs, passwords, and email addresses.

Left-alignment of text
Left-alignment of text

Right-align: numbers and amounts, except IDs, to ensure comparability of such figures.

Right-alignment of numbers
Right-alignment of numbers

Right-align: dates and times (to ensure comparability for most formats and locales).

Right-alignment of dates
Right-alignment of dates

Left-align status information.

Left-align status information
Left-align status information

Center-align icons.

Vertical alignment:

Top-align where possible to facilitate reading the content on one line.

Do not use top-alignment if it results in a peculiar layout. This usually happens when controls that need more vertical space are combined with text-only controls, such as input fields. In this case, try center-alignment instead and fine tune it until the layout fits.

Do
Use top-alignment where possible
Use top-alignment where possible
Don't
Do not use top alignment if it doesn't make sense
Do not use top alignment if it doesn't make sense

Content Formatting

The responsive table provides flexibility, including multiline cells, by enabling every control to be put into a cell.

As a key identifier of an item, use an object identifier. Show the key identifier in the first column. For more information, see object display components.

If the table width is small, do not hide this column or move it to the pop-in area.

Object identifier
Object identifier

Strings with IDs: If the responsive table contains more single-line data, show the ID in brackets after the corresponding string.

This minimizes the line height.

For items with a small line height, place the ID in brackets after the corresponding string
For items with a small line height, place the ID in brackets after the corresponding string
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link

Strings with IDs: If line height is already large, show the ID below the corresponding string. Use the object identifier to do so.

For items with a large line height, place the ID below the corresponding string
For items with a large line height, place the ID below the corresponding string
Is displayed as a link, use only the first line as the link
Is displayed as a link, use only the first line as the link

If there is more than one key identifier (for example, First Name and Last Name), display these columns first and show the values in bold text.

Several key identifiers
Several key identifiers

For status information, use semantic colors on the foreground elements.

For status information on text: If the status is actionable, add a transparent icon button next to the text.

Semantic colors on text
Semantic colors on text

Avoid truncation. Use controls that wrap the text.

For example, use text instead of a label.

Do
Do: wrap text
Do: wrap text
Don't
Do not: truncate text
Do not: truncate text

For editable content, use input fields and other interactive controls within the table cells. If you need to offer edit mode, change your text controls (labels, text, and links, to input fields or other appropriate controls) as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before.

You can do this by changing the control or, in more complex cases, by exchanging the whole responsive table.

Interactive controls – Inline
Interactive controls – Inline

If there is no value for a cell, leave it blank. Do not display text as N/A.

Leave empty fields blank
Leave empty fields blank

Numbering Items

  • If the item number has four digits/letters or less and is equally important as the corresponding description, concatenate the item number with the description and show it in one column.
  • If the item number has five digits/letters or more, or if it is more important than the corresponding description, for example, when no description is available, use a separate column for the item number.
  • If the item number is more like an ID in regards to its description, use ID formatting, like Description (ID).
For short numbers, add the item number to the description
For short numbers, add the item number to the description

Flag and Favorite

Place the flag or favorite marker in the first column (in the default delivery). To change the settings, users need to drill down into the object itself.

Item marked as a favorite
Item marked as a favorite

Empty Tables

Try not to display an empty responsive table. If there is no way around this, provide instructions on how to fill the table with data (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, properties: showNoData, noDataText).

Examples:

  • If a table is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the table with data.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    To start, set the relevant filters.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No data found. Try adjusting the filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, a search is also offered, or only the search is offered).
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of filter settings).

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items.

Provide meaningful instructions
Provide meaningful instructions

Item States

To show that an item is unread, use the corresponding flag (sap.m.Table, property: showUnread, sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: unread). This shows most of the content in bold font.

An unread item
An unread item

To show that an item has been modified, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string (Modified) at the bottom of the column that identifies the line item.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error (for example, within the global edit flow), add the string (Contains errors) at the bottom of the column that identifies the line item. To do this, use an object status control with the error state (sap.m.ObjectStatus, property: state, value: sap.ui.core.ValueState.Error).

In addition, highlight the row accordingly (sap.m.ListItemBase, property: highlight).

A modified item with an error
A modified item with an error

To show that an item is locked, use a transparent button with the corresponding icon and the text Locked by [Name] at the bottom of the identifying column. The user can click or tap the button to open a quick view of the person.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in a draft state, use a transparent-style button with the text Draft at the bottom of the identifying column. The user can click or tap the button to open a popover showing the timestamp of the last change.

Item in draft state
Item in draft state

Show only one state at any one time.

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, a highlight indicator can be shown in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to indicate:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry-specific or process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”.

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users exactly what is wrong. Make sure that you provide this information within the table row, ideally in the same color.

For details on the use of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.m.ListItemBase, property: highlight)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Numbers and Units

If the following conditions all apply, show the unit of measurement in the column header:

  • The unit of measurement is the same for all rows
  • A single cell contains only one amount with the unit of measurement
  • The column header does not scroll away

In all other cases, show the unit of measurement together with the corresponding amount within the row.

Show the unit of measurement in the same column as the corresponding amount.

For numbers with units, show the correct formatting by using the object number control.

Object number
Object number

For the most important number with its unit, show the correct formatting by using the object number control and the emphasized flag.
Exception: If all numbers are of equal importance, emphasize none of them.

If the table width is narrow, do not hide this column or move it to the pop-in area.
Exception: If the column containing the object identifier and the column containing the key attribute do not fit together on the screen, move the column containing the key attribute to the pop-in area.

Object number (emphasized)
Object number (emphasized)

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, it is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within the table, use drop targets that are between items (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between). This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Drop targets in between items
Drop targets in between items

Do not combine rearranging items and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure that there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

When combining rearranging items with grouping, be aware that moving items to another group also means that a value of the dropped item changes: because grouping is based on values in a column, the dropped item needs to take on the value of the target group for the corresponding column. If this is not wanted, do not allow users to rearrange items in grouped tables.

Example:
A table is grouped by availability. An item is moved from the group “Not Available” to the group “In Stock”. In this case, the moved item needs to change its availability to “In Stock” to match the target group. If changing the value doesn’t make sense, only allow users to rearrange the items within the same group, or don’t allow rearranging at all.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing.
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing.

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar).

Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

The context menu can be triggered for the whole table or per row.

Actions

To trigger actions on multiple items, use a multiselection table (sap.m.Table, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect), and offer the corresponding actions on the table toolbar. Keep the table toolbar sticky (sap.m.Table, property: sticky).

Do not offer actions for multiple items if the table is expected to have fewer than 10 items in most cases.

To trigger actions on a single item only (sap.m.Table, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectMaster):

  • Offer the corresponding actions in the footer toolbar if the responsive table is the only area on the screen to which actions can be applied. This has the advantage that the actions on the footer toolbar are fixed on the screen and cannot be scrolled away.
  • In other cases, show the actions on the table toolbar.
  • In rare cases, show the actions within the line item. One example would be an Add to Cart button in a shopping application. Since these actions are repeated in every line and thus use a lot of screen real estate, only do this for one or two actions at most. In this case, show the action trigger near the content to which it belongs. Do not add a specific column for actions. An exception to this is if the action trigger belongs to a link.
Inline actions
Inline actions

Enabling/Disabling Actions

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection:

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user how many items will be affected. Give users the option to apply the action anyway or to cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

If the action was applied, and if the items are still available, keep them selected.

Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection
Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection
Place actions near to the objects to which they belong
Place actions near to the objects to which they belong

The following actions on single items must always be in-line:

Delete: Use “Delete” table mode (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This places a Delete button at the end of each row.

Delete button
Delete button

Navigation: Use the “Navigation” column list item type (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This places a Navigation indicator at the end of each row.

Use this to navigate to a new page containing line item details. In rare cases, you can also use this for navigation within the table without navigating to another page.

Navigation indicator
Navigation indicator

Edit: Use the “Detail” column list item type (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail). This places an Edit icon at the end of each row.

Edit button
Edit button

From these three actions (delete, navigation, and edit), you can combine delete and edit, or delete and navigation.

Edit and navigation cannot be combined.

To trigger actions that are independent of the selection, show the actions on the table toolbar. Examples of such actions are add, edit (in the sense of changing the whole table to edit mode), sort, filter, group (or view settings), and table personalization.

To trigger a default action on the whole line item, use the “Active” or “DetailAndActive” column list item type (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active).

Active items trigger an event when clicked, which can be handled by apps (for example, to open a dialog). Clicks on interactive controls within the item do not trigger the event, but are handled by the interactive control. Do not use this for navigation, to switch the line item to an edit state, or to delete the item.

Active can be combined with edit and delete, but not with navigation. Do not combine active with single selection.

Add Items

For adding items, place an Add or Create text button on the table toolbar.

  • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
  • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.

Show new items as the first item of the table, with a visual highlight at the beginning of the row.

There are three options for adding an item after the Add button is pressed. In order of priority (most recommended first), these are:

  1. Add the item inline. Create an empty, editable row as the first item of the table. Show the Save button on the table toolbar. This option is recommended for simple scenarios with just a few columns and no option to hide columns.
  2. Open a dialog for larger tables with up to 8 editable columns. Save the new item at the dialog level.
  3. Navigate to a new page. This behavior should only be used for very complex scenarios that cannot be handled by a dialog (for example, tables with more than 8 columns). When the user presses Save in the footer toolbar of the create page, navigate back to the table.

A new item can have three different states:

  1. New: The item was just created and is in edit mode. It is highlighted with a visual indicator.
  2. Recent: The item was saved, but is still highlighted and displayed as the first item of the table. Current filter, sort and group criteria are ignored to keep the item visible.
  3. As soon as the responsive table is sorted, filtered, or grouped again, the action is also applied to the new item. It then also loses the visual highlight.

In the context of the draft handling new items are not saved on table level, but rather with the entire draft.

For more details, see the guidelines for managing objects (including subarticles).

Add button in table toolbar
Add button in table toolbar
New item as first row in edit mode
New item as first row in edit mode
Saved new item, still highlighted, still the first item
Saved new item, still highlighted, still the first item

Editable Content

For editable content, use input fields and any other interactive controls within the table cells that meet your input needs.

All SAPUI5 controls can be used.

If you need edit mode, change your text controls, such as label, text, and link, to input fields, or other appropriate controls as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before.

You can do this by exchanging the control or, in more complex cases, by exchanging the entire responsive table.

For mass editing items:

  • Provide multiselection (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).
  • Provide an Edit button.
  • If several items are selected, choosing the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

For details, see mass editing.

View Settings: Sort, Filter, and Group

Sort, filter, and/or group settings are handled in the view settings dialog. This dialog can provide any combination of these three settings, including just one setting, such as sort only.

  • If sorting, filtering, and/or grouping are a common use case in your app, offer one, two, or all three of the corresponding features in one or more view settings dialogs. Note: Do not offer these features if the table is expected to have only a small number of entries (up to 20 in most cases).
  • If filtering is a main use case, do not offer filtering in the view settings dialog. Use the filter bar instead.

To trigger the view settings dialog, provide several buttons, one for each of these view settings. Each button opens a view settings dialog that contains only the relevant page.

You should always use only the view settings you really need. For example, do not offer grouping if it does not support your use case well.

Using the view settings dialog allows you to define several sort, filter, and/or group settings per column. Therefore, you can sort, filter, and/or group a column with several data points independently by each data point.

Several triggers for the different view settings (sort, filter, group)
Several triggers for the different view settings (sort, filter, group)

Sort

For the default sort settings, sort by the column that identifies the row, which is usually the first column in default delivery. From this column, use the primary data point.

If you offer sorting, offer it for each data point. In other words, allow sorting by both the primary and secondary information in a column. Allow sorting in both directions, ascending and descending. The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order.

For each data point, provide a meaningful sort order. For example:

  • Sort text alphabetically
  • Sort numbers by their value
  • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
    • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
    • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
    • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
    • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first

Filter

To display the current filter state, use the info bar below the table title. Clicking or tapping the info bar opens the view settings dialog on the filter page.

Show the info bar only if the filter settings are not shown somewhere else. For example, do not show the info bar for settings taken in the filter bar or in a select placed in the table toolbar.

If the info bar is shown, provide an option to reset all corresponding filters on the info bar.

Keep the info bar sticky (sap.m.Table, property: sticky).

Developer Hint
To display the current filter settings on the info bar, consider using the list formatter (sap.ui.core.format.ListFormat).
Filtered table
Filtered table

Group

To display the current group state, group headers are shown.

On the group header, show the following text (sap.m.GroupHeaderListItem, property: title):

[Label of the grouped column]: [Grouping Value]

Do not use several values on the group header.

Grouped table
Grouped table

If there is no grouping value, show the following text:
[Label of the grouped column]: (Not Available)

This is the case if you have a group of items that don’t have a value for the grouped column.

Grouped table, with missing grouping value
Grouped table, with missing grouping value

Persist the view settings. When a user reopens the app, show the responsive table with the same sort, filter, and group settings as last defined by this user.

Personalization

To add, remove, or rearrange columns, use the table personalization dialog. Trigger the dialog via a button in the table toolbar.

Offer personalization if you need more columns than those that fit on a tablet screen, which is usually five, to fulfill 80% of your main use cases. Before doing so, try to reduce the number of columns, for example, by using several lines per column or by utilizing the pop-in function. See the cheat sheet for an example.

View settings and table personalization icons
View settings and table personalization icons

Persist the column layout settings. When a user reopens the app, show the responsive table with the same column layout as last defined by this user.

Tables in Object Pages

To show a table in the object page content area, use the responsive table.

A responsive table with up to 20 expected items can be displayed right away, without lazy loading.
If you expect the table to have more than 20 items, use one of the following 3 options:

  1. Lazy loading (More button): Use this option if you expect to have up to 100 items.
  2. Tab navigation: If you expect to have more than 50 to 100 items, but less than 400, use the object page with tab navigation instead of anchor navigation. Put the table on a dedicated tab.
  3. Navigation to a list report: If you expect the table to have more than 400 items, or if the tab approach is unsuitable, restrict the number of items in the table itself to a reasonable amount. To provide the user with a way to work with the entire table, offer navigation to a separate list report containing the full table.

For all of the three options mentioned above, we recommend providing a search, and if feasible, sort and filter capabilities for the table in the object page. Grouping should be avoided.

For more information on the use of tables within the object page, see the Tables section of the Object Page article.

Export to Spreadsheet

On the table toolbar, apps can provide a menu button for exporting table data to a spreadsheet. For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button
'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button

Paste

To paste data from the clipboard to the table, the browser functionality for paste can be used (CTRL + V or browser context menu).

  • If the focus is on row level, the app has to take the data from the clipboard and add it to the corresponding controls within the table.
  • If the focus is on an editable control within the table, the control gets the data automatically.

Pasting via context menu does not work if a custom context menu is used.

Properties

sap.m.Table

The following additional properties are available for the responsive table:

  • The property: fixedLayout defines the algorithm the control uses to define column width. Setting it to “false” would perform automatic calculations for the column width, based on the longest non-breakable content. You should always set it to “true” for performance reasons. Exceptions are permissible if the table has only a few columns for a large width and fewer than 10 rows are displayed.
  • The property: backgroundDesign defines the background on which items are rendered. Use the default value.
  • The property: showOverlay provides an overlay on the whole table, which prevents use of the responsive table. This is used within the list report floorplan to mark the table as outdated after filter settings have been changed but the new filter settings have not yet been applied. Do not use it in other cases.
  • The property: inset adds a margin on all sides of the responsive table.
  • The property: headerText is a simple way to set the table title if you just need a title. However, do not use any of the following:
    • A separate toolbar
    • variantManagement
    • headerToolbar aggregation
  • The property: headerDesign affects the appearance of the header if the theme supports it. Leave the default value as it is.
  • The property: footerText adds a small additional row below the table footer or last item. This row can contain text only. Do not use this property.
  • The property: width defines the width of the whole table.
  • The property: includeItemInSelection uses a click on the whole line item to select the corresponding item if the responsive table is in a selection mode. This competes with other settings like “Navigation” or “Active” and should therefore not be used.
  • The property: enableBusyIndicator automatically shows a busy indicator while data is loaded. (In contrast to the property: busy, where the application can control when the table is set to busy state)
  • The property: modeAnimationOn does not have any effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: showSeparators allows you to show all, none, or some separators. The default setting, which is to show all separators, is to be used.
  • The property: swipeDirection allows you to define the direction in which to swipe if additional actions are hidden behind a table row. This works only on touch devices. Do not use this property.
  • The property: rememberSelections leaves items selected even if they are not currently visible, for example, through filtering. If this behavior is not wanted, set the flag to “false”, but you should do so only in exceptional cases.
  • The property: busy sets the table to a busy state. While in busy state, the whole table cannot be used and items cannot be read due to an overlay.
  • The property: busyIndicatorDelay defines the time after which a busy state is shown after the responsive table has been set to this state. Use the default value.
  • The property: visible shows the table (“true”) or hides it (“false”).
  • The property: tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: alternateRowColors displays the rows with alternating background colors (“banded rows”). Do not use it.

sap.m.Column

The following additional properties are available for sap.m.Column:

  • The property: width defines the width of the column in all units allowed by HTML, such as em, rem, %, and px.
  • The property: styleClass is used if you need to change the visual design of a column. Do not use this, but use the default style instead.
  • The property: visible shows or hides the column.
  • The property: tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.

sap.m.ColumnListItem

The following additional properties are available for sap.m.ColumnListItem:

  • The property: selected allows an item to be selected programmatically.
  • The property: counter does not have any effect. Do not use it.
  • Do not use the property: busy.
  • Do not use the property: busyIndicatorDelay.
  • The property: visible shows or hides the item.
  • The property: tooltip adds a tooltip to a whole row. The tooltip is only shown on mouse interaction. It will not work on tablets or smartphones. Do not use it.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Grid Table

A grid table contains a set of data that is structured in rows and columns. It allows the user to scroll in both directions and can handle large numbers of items and columns.

Usage

Use the grid table if:

  • The cell level and the spatial relationship between cells are more important than the line item. Examples include spreadsheet analyses and waterfall charts. Note that a grid table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You have to work on more than 1,000 rows. In this case, the grid table is easier to handle. In contrast to the responsive table, the architecture of the grid table is optimized for handling large numbers of items. Note that a grid table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktop and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • Comparing items is a major use case. In this case, a grid table might be more appropriate than a responsive table. In the grid table, each cell contains only one data point. In contrast, the responsive table is more flexible regarding line items, including the ability to add more data points per cell and also the pop-in function. Both make comparisons more difficult. Note that a grid table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You need an analytical table, but you cannot provide an analytical binding on the technical side. In this case, a grid table will do the work. Note that the grid table provides only one level of grouping, no aggregation options, and is also not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.

Do not use the grid table if:

  • You need a table. The responsive table is the default table in SAP Fiori. Additional use cases where you might need the responsive table include:
    • The focus is on working on line items, not on cells. The responsive table is optimized for displaying complete items on all devices, such as file browsing and a list of documents you want to act on, like purchase orders and purchase requisitions.
    • Selecting one or several items is the main use case and details are needed to choose the correct item.
    • Line items are independent of each other and no operation across columns is needed.
    • You want to have only one implementation for all devices.
  • The main use case is choosing one item from a very small number of items with no additional details. A select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • The main use case is choosing one out of several items with only a few details per item. A list might be more appropriate. Pay attention to the layout of the list item to ensure that it has a pleasant appearance.
  • Data needs to be structured in a hierarchical manner. Use a tree table instead. Note that neither the tree table nor the grid table are responsive. You will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones and tablets.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use charts.
  • You just need it for layout reasons. In this case, use a layout container such as HBox or VBox.
  • You need read-only or editable field-value pairs. Use a form instead. The grid table is not optimized for form-like input navigation.

Responsiveness

A grid table is available for desktops and tablets, but not in smartphone sizes. It supports touch devices, but is not optimized for small screens.

If you use a grid table, note that you have to implement a fallback solution for small screens. This fallback solution does not need to support all use cases.

You could create a fallback by using a responsive table, but a completely different solution, such as showing charts in a read-only case, might be more appropriate.

Grid table shown on a desktop
Grid table shown on a desktop
Grid table shown on a tablet
Grid table shown on a tablet

Layout

The column header allows the user to resize and rearrange columns. It also provides access to a menu with column-specific commands.

The collection of items, or rows, occupies the main part of the grid table.

The selector cells allow the user to select one or more items.

The Select All button selects or deselects all items.

Schematic visualization of the grid table
Schematic visualization of the grid table

Components

A grid table does not consist of other elements. However, it is common to use a toolbar above the grid table.

The toolbar can contain entry points for the view settings dialog and the table personalization dialog or for the p13n dialog, as well as view switches in the form of a segmented button, and buttons for Add, Edit, and other actions.

Behavior and Interaction

A grid table is quite restricted in terms of its content.

Table Level

Scroll

A grid table allows horizontal and vertical scrolling (sap.ui.table.Table, property: navigationMode, value: Scrollbar).

You can add any number of line items to the grid table, which uses “lazy loading”.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.Table, property: rowHeight).

The grid table is optimized to allow faster scrolling within the first 1000 items.

Scroll bar
Scroll bar

Select

Selection Mode

Selection for a grid table depends on the chosen selection mode. The following options are available:

No selection: Items cannot be selected. (property: selectionMode = None)

A non-selection grid table
A non-selection grid table

Single selection: One item in the grid table can be selected. A row selector column is shown. (property: selectionMode = Single)

A single-selection grid table
A single-selection grid table

Multiple selection: One or more items can be selected. The grid table provides a column with checkboxes on the left-hand side. Clicking a checkbox toggles the state of the corresponding row from deselected to selected and back. The Shift key can be used to select a range.

For multiple selection, you can choose between two variants.

  • Multi-toggle mode (property: selectionMode = MultiToggle)
  • Multi-selection plug-in (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin)

These variants behave differently when the user selects more items than are currently loaded in the front end.

Multi-toggle

In multi-toggle mode, you can offer a Select All checkbox to the left of the column header (property: enableSelectAll). Selecting this checkbox selects or deselects all items that are currently loaded in the front end. All other items are not selected/deselected. If the application data is stored in the back end, scrolling down further can reveal additional unselected items. The same can happen with range selections if not all items in the selected range have been loaded to the front end.

Multi-selection plug-in

If you use this plug-in instead of the multi-toggle selection mode, the behavior for range selection and Select All changes:

  • By default, a dedicated Deselect All button replaces the Select All checkbox. There is no default UI element for selecting all items.
  • You can set a limit for the number of items that can be selected (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin, property: limit). This limit has the following effect:
    • The range that can be selected using the Shift key is limited to the specified number of items (default = 200). The table automatically scrolls back to the last selected item. Users can select more items by selecting additional ranges (the specified limit applies each time).
    • If the selection limit is set to 0, a Select All checkbox is shown. There is also no limit on the number of items that can be selected in a range. All selected items are loaded, which can lead to performance issues for large data sets.
  • If selected items are not already available in the front end, they are loaded automatically by the plug-in and set as selected.
A multiselection grid table
A multiselection grid table
Using the multi-selection plug-in with a limit
Using the multi-selection plug-in with a limit

Selection Behavior

An item can be selected in different ways, depending on the configuration of the grid table (sap.ui.table.Table, property: selectionBehavior):

  • Row: An item is selected by clicking the checkbox or the row. Use this option for multi-selection grid tables if clicking a row or a cell is not used for anything else.
  • RowSelector: An item is selected only by clicking the checkbox in the selector cell. Use this option if clicking the row (or a cell inside the row) is used for something else, such as navigation.
  • RowOnly: An item is selected only by clicking the row, and not using checkboxes in the selector cells. Use this for single-selection grid tables if clicking a row or a cell is not used for another purpose, such as navigation.

Compact, Cozy, and Condensed

Like all SAP Fiori controls, the grid table is shown in compact mode on a desktop and in cozy mode on tablets.

For a desktop, you can also display even more rows on the same screen height by adding the condensed mode in addition to the compact mode. This renders less white space for each item.

Note that the condensed content density has always to be set in addition to compact. Do not use condensed on its own. Do not mix condensed with cozy. Doing so could lead to unpredictable and / or unwanted results, e.g. cozy sized controls in condensed sized containers, missing padings, etc.

Note that neither compact mode nor condensed mode can be interacted with via touch. Even on a desktop with a touch screen, users will have difficulty selecting rows or using controls inside the cells when using their fingers.

Furthermore, condensed mode is not available for Internet Explorer 9. If condensed mode is to be used, please provide a fallback.

For more information on cozy and compact modes, see content density.

Column Header

The column header provides the label for the corresponding column and access to the column header menu.

Columns are resized as follows:

  • Mouse interaction: The user drags the separator line between two columns (sap.ui.table.Column, property: Resizable). Double-clicking the line optimizes the column according to the length of the currently visible data and the label of the column header (sap.ui.table.Column, property: Autoresizable).
  • Touch interaction: The user taps the column header to reveal two buttons – one to show the column header menu, and one for resizing. The user drags the latter to resize the column.

After resizing a column, the adaptation of the column widths depends on how the column width is set:

  • If column widths are set in pixel-based units (px, em, rem), the corresponding column is adapted and the columns that follow are moved accordingly. The width of all other columns is not affected.
    If all the columns together take up less width than the table control, an empty space is added. In case all columns together take up more width than the table control, a scrollbar appears. (sap.ui.table.Column, property: width)
  • If all column widths are set in percentage or “auto”, resizing one column might also lead to the automatic resizing of some or all other columns. The position of the resized column might also be affected. This is done to ensure that the whole table width is used and no white space is added. A scrollbar appears only if all or most of the columns shrink significantly. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, a minimum width can be set per column. Please be aware that this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users are still able to reduce the column width below the provided minimum. (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: width, minWidth)

Columns can be rearranged by dragging the column header to another position (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnReordering).

Column header
Column header
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Less columns than space available
Less columns than space available

Column Header Menu

For each column, a menu can contain the following menu items (sap.ui.table.ColumnMenu, property: visible):

  • Sort Ascending/Descending (sap.ui.table.Column, property: showSortMenuEntries)
  • Free text filter (sap.ui.table.Column, property: showFilterMenuEntries)
  • Group (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableGrouping)
  • Freeze from the first to the last specified column (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnFreeze)

For each column, the menu can be replaced by an app-specific menu.

Column header menu
Column header menu

Sort

The column header menu can provide two sort options (sap.ui.table. Column, properties: sortProperty, showSortMenuEntry):

  • Sort Ascending
  • Sort Descending

The user selects one of these options to sort the corresponding column accordingly (sap.ui.table. Column, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

Sort settings in column header menu
Sort settings in column header menu

Filter

The column header menu can provide a search field for entering free text (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: filterProperty, showFilterMenuEntries).

If the user enters a term in the input field and triggers the search by pressing Enter when the focus is on the filter input field, the grid table is filtered by the corresponding column and value (sap.ui.table.Table, properties: filtered, filterProperty, filterValue, filterOperator, sap.ui.table.Column, property: filterType).

Note that the filter may return zero results, in which case, the table might be empty.

General recommendations for filtering:

  • If filtering is a main use case, choose the filter bar or any other filtering UI over the built-in free text filter.
  • Only use the free text filter if filtering is a secondary use case and if the filter bar is too heavy.
Free text filter in column header menu
Free text filter in column header menu

Group

The column header menu can provide the option to group by this column (sap.ui.table.Column, property: enableGrouping).

One group collects all items with the same value within the corresponding column.

Group setting in column header menu
Group setting in column header menu

If line items are grouped in a column, every group is provided with a collapsible or expandable group header. The header text consists of the name of the value and the number of items in the specific group. Only one grouping level is possible.

Group header
Group header

Once line items have been grouped, the corresponding column is hidden. There is no built-in possibility to ungroup the grid table again. Therefore, provide a view settings dialog or table presonalization dialog to offer an additional way to group by a column and a way to ungroup the complete table.

An exception to this is when the table is grouped from the start and should not be ungrouped at all.

Group headers shown, the corresponding column hidden: no duplicates, but a confusing change
Group headers shown, the corresponding column hidden: no duplicates, but a confusing change
Warning
Note that grouping the grid table is experimental and currently works only on items loaded to the front end. Thus, scrolling down the table leads to data not being grouped as expected.

Only use this feature if you have just a few line items, all of which are loaded to the front end. If this is the case, consider using a responsive table first instead of a grid table.

Freeze Columns

The column header menu can provide the option to freeze columns (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnFreeze). Selecting Freeze freezes all columns up to the one in which the operation was triggered (sap.ui.table. Table, property: fixedColumnCount).

When Freeze is triggered, the menu item changes to Unfreeze for the corresponding column.

Freeze setting in column header menu
Freeze setting in column header menu

Line Item Level

A line item contains a set of cells and provides options for selecting the item.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.Table, property: rowHeight).

Line item
Line item

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a table or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.ui.table.Table, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a table. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

When opened, the context menu gets the row and column context, except for special columns (such as the selection column) or special rows (like group headers). Context menus can be implemented for a specific table, row, or cell (not recommended for editable cells).

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a table is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Grid table with a context menu
Grid table with a context menu

Cell Level

A cell provides one data point.

It can contain one of the following controls to display this data point:

While it is technically possible to also use other controls, doing so could lead to issues in regards to alignment, condensed mode, screen reader support, and keyboard support.

If you use text, use only single-line text to keep the same row height. Truncate if necessary as this prevents adverse side effects when scrolling vertically (sap.m.Text, property: wrapping, value: false). Do not wrap.

Cell
Cell

Guidelines

Data Density vs. Complexity

The grid table can be used to display large amounts of data. Unfortunately, the grid table has a high data density and therefore conveys an immediate feeling of complexity.

Only show tables with a lot of data as a last resort. Try the following instead:

  • Break down the data into manageable chunks and allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Try to avoid horizontal scrolling in the default delivery.

Try to minimize the number of columns, especially if there is a large number of rows.

Table Title

Implement the table title by using a title control in a toolbar.

Use a table title only if the title of the table is not indicated in the surrounding area.

Do not use a table title if it simply repeats text that is already above the table. For example:

  • A pricing conditions table is the only control on a tab labeled Pricing Conditions.
  • A section or subsection on an object page contains only one table.

Use a table title if you need the item count, table toolbar, or variant management. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a table title, such as Items.
Exception: If the surrounding area contains the table title, and both the item count and toolbar can be added to the surrounding area, no additional table title is needed.
Example: An object page (sub-)section contains only one table. In this case, add the item count and the table toolbar to the (sub-)section header.

If you use a table title, show either a title for the table, with or without variant management, or an item count in the following format:

Items (2,534).

The item count in the table title includes all the visible items that a user can reach by scrolling or expanding groups. Group headers are not included.

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items.

Developer Hint
Assistive technologies (such as screen readers) use the title to create a hierarchical site map for faster navigation. In addition, screen readers use the title as the label for the table.

If you don’t use a title (for example, to avoid repetition), make sure that the table is connected to another meaningful on-screen text that can be used as a label for assistive technologies. You can do this using the method addAriaLabelledBy.

Multiple Selection

  • We strongly recommend using the multi-selection plug-in. This ensures that all items selected using Select All or as part of a range are included – even if some items were not initially loaded in the front end. This is not the case if you use the multi-toggle option.
  • Do not limit the range selection for the multi-selection plug-in unless you have to.
    • If the dataset is small and/or completely available in the front-end, set the limit property to 0 to enable the Select All option and allow users to select any range.
    • If you have a large dataset, set a limit on the number of selected items to avoid performance issues. Also bear in mind that some actions won’t be helpful if the dataset is too big (for example, a delete operation on 2 million database entries).
  • In multiple selection mode (multi toggle), do not show checkboxes in the first data column in the default delivery to avoid confusion.
Don't
Do not add checkboxes to the first data column in the default delivery
Do not add checkboxes to the first data column in the default delivery

Loading Data

To indicate that the table is currently loading items, use the busy state. (sap.ui.table.Table, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Grid table in busy state while loading data
Grid table in busy state while loading data

Columns – Best Practices

Minimize the number of columns. Avoid the need to scroll horizontally in the default delivery.

The grid table assigns the same width to each column by default. It is recommended that you overwrite this default to provide optimal space for your content (sap.ui.table.Column, property: width).

If you define the column width in pixels or rems, resizing a column affects only the width of this specific column. Reducing the browser window size results in a scrollbar. After resizing a column, a scroll bar appears if the width of the table is not enough to show all columns. If the columns use less space than available, white space appears on the right side of the last column.

If you define the column width as a percentage, resizing one column affects the width of several or all columns. Text becomes truncated when the browser window size is reduced. This is done to make sure that all columns together fill the space of the table. A scrollbar appears only in case the automatic change of the column widths is not enough for showing all columns. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, a minimum width can be set per column. Please be aware that this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users are still able to reduce the column width below the provided minimum.

If you define the column width as “auto”, the behavior is the same as for “percentage”. In contrast to percentage, “auto” distributes the columns equally.

To decide on how to set the column width (pixel / rem / em vs. percent / auto), keep the following in mind:

  • For tables with only 2 to 3 columns, use pixel-based units. This ensures that on wide screens the values in the columns are not spread over the whole screen, which improves the readability of line items.
  • For tables with many columns, where a horizontal scrollbar is usually needed, use pixel-based units. This avoids unintended side effects when resizing columns.
  • For all other tables, use whatever fits your case better.

Be cautious with mixing columns with pixel-based and percentage-based widths. While this can be helpful in some cases, it could also cause even more unexpected side effects when resizing a column. When using percentage-based widths for one or more columns, think of the possibility to not allow end users to resize columns at all.

Optimize the column width for its initial visible content, including the column header texts. If this is not possible (for example, if showing the full texts would result in extremely wide columns), let the texts truncate. End users can change the width of the column to read the full text, as needed.

Maintain a constant column width and avoid adjusting it automatically when the content changes.

Always keep to one line of text. Do not wrap.

Don't
In the default delivery, the initial visible content should not be truncated
In the default delivery, the initial visible content should not be truncated
Don't
Never wrap texts
Never wrap texts

Column Headers – Best Practices

For each column, provide a label in the column header. In the default delivery, do not truncate the column header texts. Only let the text truncate if showing the full text would make the column too wide. Never wrap the text.

Content Alignment

For alignment of cell content, follow the guidelines below.

Left-align the following: text, IDs, phone numbers, URLs, passwords, and email addresses.

Left-alignment of text
Left-alignment of text

Right-align numbers (except IDs).

This ensures comparability of numbers and amounts.

Right-alignment of numbers
Right-alignment of numbers

Right-align amounts with currencies to the cell and align them in terms of their respective decimal points.

This ensures that amounts with different currencies are shown correctly, whether these currencies have 0, 2, or 3 decimals.

For aligning to the decimal point, use the sap.ui.uinified.Currency control.

Alignment to decimal point
Alignment to decimal point

Right-align dates and times.

This ensures comparability for most formats and locales.

Right-alignment of dates
Right-alignment of dates

Left-align status information.

Left-align status information
Left-align status information

Center-align icons.

Left-align micro charts.

XS micro charts in condensed mode
XS micro charts in condensed mode

Content Formatting

Locale Settings

Be locale-aware: show dates, times, numbers, and so on in the format corresponding to the user’s locale settings.

Key Identifier

Use a bold label or an emphasized link as the key identifier of an item. In the default delivery, show the key identifier in the first column.

Emphasized link
Emphasized link

For strings with IDs, use one of the following:

  • Show the ID in brackets after the corresponding string. Use this formatting if sorting, grouping, or filtering is only needed on the string, but not on the ID.
  • Show the ID in a separate column. Use this format if sorting, grouping, or filtering on the string and the ID is needed.
Text and ID in one column – Sorting, filtering, and grouping only on the text
Text and ID in one column – Sorting, filtering, and grouping only on the text
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link
Text and ID in two columns – Allows sorting, filtering, and grouping on both
Text and ID in two columns – Allows sorting, filtering, and grouping on both
If displayed as a link, use only the string as the link, not the ID
If displayed as a link, use only the string as the link, not the ID

Truncation

Avoid truncation of typical content in the default delivery (sap.ui.table.Column, property: width). However, since the columns are resizable, do not worry too much if truncation occurs as columns can still be enlarged if necessary.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must also have the same height. If you need to decide between truncation and different row heights, choose truncation. Do not wrap.

Optimize column width for typical content, not all content
Optimize column width for typical content, not all content

Number of Links

Are there too many links? Use subtle links to avoid a wall of links. Standard links are also emphasized more if they are surrounded by subtle links.

Emphasized links, links, subtle links, and text
Emphasized links, links, subtle links, and text

Missing Value

If there is no value for a cell, leave it blank. Do not display text as N/A.

Leave empty fields blank
Leave empty fields blank

Numbering Items

In terms of numbering items:

  • If the item number is more like an ID with regard to its description, use ID formatting as described above.
  • In all other cases, use a separate column for the item number.
Add a separate column for the item number
Add a separate column for the item number

Status

For status information, use semantic colors on the foreground elements.

For status information on text, use an object status.

Semantic colors on text
Semantic colors on text

Micro Charts

Use only the following micro charts: Bulletcomparisonstacked bar. When using micro charts, use them in size XS.

Micro charts in a grid table
Micro charts in a grid table

Empty Tables

Avoid empty grid tables. If necessary, provide instructions on how to fill the grid table with data (sap.ui.table.Table, properties: noDataText, showNoData).

Examples:

  • If a table is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the table with data.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    To start, set the relevant filters.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No data found. Try adjusting the filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, a search is also offered, or only the search is offered).
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of filter settings).
Provide meaningful instructions
Provide meaningful instructions

Invalid State

To show an invalid state of the grid table within the list report floorplan, show an overlay on the grid table and the corresponding toolbar (sap.ui.table.Table, property: showOverlay). The overlay prevents user interactions.

Use this within the list report floorplan if filter settings have been changed but the grid table is has not yet been updated.

Grid table with invalid data
Grid table with invalid data

Item States

To show that an item has been modified, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string Modified in an additional column with the label Editing Status.

In the default delivery, add a column directly behind the key identifier.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string Contains errors in the Editing Status column and highlight the row accordingly. This string replaces the Modified string.

A modified item with an error
A modified item with an error

To show that an item is locked, add a transparent-style button with the corresponding icon and the text Locked by [name] in the Editing Status column.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in draft state, add a transparent-style button with the text Draft in the Editing Status column.

Item in draft state
Item in draft state

Show only one state at a time.

Numbers and Units

Show the unit of measurement in one of the following ways:

Number and Unit in Same Cell

The number and the unit are in the same cell. Do this if sorting, filtering, or grouping by the unit of measurement are not needed.

Use a currency control to display the concatenated string.

Number and unit of measurement in one cell
Number and unit of measurement in one cell

Number and Unit in Separate Columns

The number and unit are in separate columns. Do this if sorting, filtering, or grouping by the unit of measurement are a common use case.

Note that this column can be hidden or moved independently of the column containing the corresponding number. Therefore, be sure to have clear labels for both columns to communicate the dependency.

Number and unit of measurement in two columns
Number and unit of measurement in two columns

Show the unit of measurment on the column header, if the unit of measurement is the same for all rows. If not, show the unit of measurement within the row.

Drag and Drop

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within the table, use drop targets that are between items (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between). This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Drop targets in between items
Drop targets in between items

Do not combine rearranging items and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure that there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items with sorting
Do not combine rearranging items with sorting

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, it is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

When combining rearranging items with grouping, be aware that moving items to another group also means that a value of the dropped item changes: because grouping is based on values in a column, the dropped item needs to take on the value of the target group for the corresponding column. If this is not wanted, do not allow users to rearrange items in grouped tables.

Example:
A table is grouped by availability. An item is moved from the group “Not Available” to the group “In Stock”. In this case, the moved item needs to change its availability to “In Stock” to match the target group. If changing the value doesn’t make sense make sense, only allow users to rearrange the items within the same group, or don’t allow rearranging at all.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing.
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing.

Context Menu

Use the context menu only as a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar). Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

The context menu can be triggered for the table, row, or cell. However, we do not recommend using context menus for cells: because the content of a cell is a different touch target than the cell itself, opening a cell context menu via touch is quite hard, even in cozy mode.

Do not combine context menus with condensed mode: editable controls fill the entire space inside a cell. Because of this, context menus cannot be opened at all with touch or mouse interaction.

Actions

Multiple Items

To trigger actions on multiple items, use a mutliselection grid table (sap.ui.table.Table, property: selectionMode, value: MultiToggle). Offer the corresponding actions in the table toolbar.

Do not offer action triggering on multiple items if the table is generally expected to have fewer than 10 items. In this case, try to use the responsive table instead of the grid table.

Single Item

To trigger actions on a single item (sap.ui.table. Table, property: selectionMode, value: Single):

  • Show the actions on the table toolbar.
  • In rare cases, show the actions within the line item. One example would be an Add to Cart button in a shopping application. Since these actions are repeated in every line and thus use a lot of screen real estate, do this only for a maximum of one or two actions. Provide a separate column per action. Use a button, unless the action trigger belongs to a link.

To trigger navigation on line item level, choose one of the following options:

  • Use a link for the attribute that identifies the row. Clicking the link triggers the navigation.
  • Add the RowActions column and show the navigation indicator (  ) at the end of the row. The navigation arrow triggers the navigation.

Use the RowActions column only for one or both of the following actions:

  • Navigate to details page ( )
  • Delete ( )

The RowActions column does not provide a column header text. It is fixed and will not scroll away. Users also cannot personalize this column.

Single Cell

To trigger actions on a single cell, create the corresponding click event. Do not use the cell click event if the cell contains interactive controls, such as links.

Add Items

For adding items, place an Add or Create text button on the table toolbar.

  • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
  • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.

Show new items as the first item of the table, with a visual highlight at the beginning of the row.

For more details, see the guidelines for managing objects (including subarticles).

Enabling/Disabling Actions

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection:

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user how many items will be affected. Let the user choose whether to apply the action anyway or cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

If the action was applied, and if the items are still available, keep them selected.

Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection
Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection

Editable Content

For editable content, only use the following controls, and only one control per cell:

Only these controls are optimized for all viewing modes of the grid table.

If you need edit mode, change your text controls, such as label, text, link, object status, icons, and currencies, to editable controls as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before. You can do this by exchanging the controls, for example, from sap.m.Text to sap.m.Input.

For mass editing items:

  • Provide multiselection.
  • Provide an Edit button.
  • If several items are selected, clicking the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

For more information, see Mass Editing.

Interactive controls – In line
Interactive controls – In line

View Settings

There are several ways to show Sort, Filter, and/or Group settings:

  • Column header menu: In all cases, show the corresponding settings in the column header menu.
  • View settings dialog: Simple and more flexible with regard to filter settings. No advantage for sorting. Allows the user to ungroup grouped columns.tables with a medium amount of items.
  • Table personalization dialog: Provides complex options for sorting items by several levels and allows the user to ungroup grouped columns. It also provides a query-builder-like approach for filter settings. The complexity of the options is also its downside. Use the table personalization dialog for tables with a large number of items.
  • If filtering is a main use case, use the filter bar. In this case, avoid offering additional filter settings on the table. If you do, the filter settings on the grid table work only on the result set provided by the filter bar.

Always be careful when synchronizing the settings in the dialog with the settings from the column header menu.

Trigger the dialogs in one of the following ways:

  • View settings dialog: Provide several buttons, one for each of these view settings. Each button opens the view settings dialog on the corresponding page.
  • Table personalization dialog: Provide a settings button, which opens the table personalization dialog containing all pages.

Use only the view settings you really need. For example, do not offer grouping if it does not support your use case.

Column header menu with view settings
Column header menu with view settings
Table toolbar with triggers for view settings dialog
Table toolbar with triggers for view settings dialog
Table toolbar with trigger for table personalization dialog
Table toolbar with trigger for table personalization dialog

Be persistent. When reopening the app, show the analytical table in the same view settings (sort/ filter/ group/ aggregation settings) as last defined by this user.

Sort

To display the current sort state, an icon is shown in the column header of the most recently sorted column. This icon indicates the sort direction (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

For the default sort settings, sort by the column that identifies the row, which is usually the first column in default delivery.

Column, sorted ascending
Column, sorted ascending
Column, sorted descending
Column, sorted descending

The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order. For each column, provide a meaningful sort order. For example:

  • Sort text alphabetically
  • Sort numbers by their value
  • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
    • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
    • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
    • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
    • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first

Filter

To display the current filter state, an icon is shown in the column header of the filtered column (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: filtered, filterProperty, filterValue, filterOperator, defaultFilterOperator, filterType).

Column, filtered
Column, filtered

Group

To display the current group state, group headers are shown. Show the following text in the group header:

[Grouping value] – [Item count for the group]

Group headers
Group headers

In general, offer reasonable grouping by default if appropriate. Enable the user to ungroup via the view settings dialog or via the table personalization dialog.

Personalization

Only offer personalization if you need more columns than those that fit on a tablet screen, which is usually five, to fulfill 80% of your main use cases.

Persist the column layout. When a user reopens the app, show the grid table with the same column layout settings as last defined by this user.

Add, Remove, and Rearrange Columns

To add, remove, or rearrange columns, use one of the following:

  • The table personalization dialog: It offers some simple settings for column layout. Use this if you have only a few columns to choose from and/or you use the view settings dialog.
  • The p13n dialog: Besides various complex view settings, it also provides settings for column layout. Use this if you have a large number of columns to choose from and/or you use this dialog anyway for view settings.

In both cases, trigger the dialog via the settings button in the table toolbar.

You can also use drag and drop to rearrange columns (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnReordering). If you allow rearranging via drag and drop as well as via a dialog, keep both places in sync.

Resize Columns

Resizing columns works differently on touch and non-touch devices.

  • Non-touch devices: Drag and drop the column separator on the right side of the column. Double-clicking the column separator optimizes the width of the column to the data currently loaded into the front end, which is usually about 100 rows.
  • Touch devices: Clicking the column header reveals two buttons: one for opening the column header menu, another one for resizing the column. Drag and drop this second button to resize the column.

Freeze Columns

To freeze columns, offer the setting in the column header menu (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnFreeze). Selecing Freeze on a column freezes all columns from the first one to the one where Freeze is selected. On this column, the menu entry changes from Freeze to Unfreeze.

Frozen column
Frozen column

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, a highlight indicator can be shown in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to indicate:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry-specific or process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”.

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users exactly what is wrong. Make sure that you provide this information within the table row, ideally in the same color.

For details on the use of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.ui.table.Table, aggregation: rowSettingsTemplate)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Tables in Object Pages

In the object page, we advise against using the analytical, grid, and tree tables. Instead, use a responsive table and offer navigation to a list report with the table types mentioned above.

For more information on the use of tables within the object page, see the Tables section of the Object Page article.

Export to Spreadsheet

On the table toolbar, apps can provide a menu button for exporting table data to a spreadsheet. For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button
'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button

Paste

The browser paste function can be used to paste data from the clipboard to the table (CTRL+V or browser context menu).

  • If the focus is on row level, the app has to take the data from the clipboard and add it to the corresponding controls within the table.
  • If the focus is on an editable control within the table, the control gets the data automatically.

Pasting via the context menu does not work if a custom context menu is used.

Properties

sap.ui.table.Table

The following additional properties are available for the grid table:

  • The property: width defines the width of the grid table.
  • The property: rowHeight defines the height of each row in the grid table. Since the height required is calculated automatically by the grid table, this property is only needed rarely.
  • The property: columnHeaderHeight defines the height of the column headers. Since the height required is calculated automatically by the grid table, this property is only needed rarely.
  • The property: columnHeaderVisible can be used to hide the column headers. Always show the column headers.
  • The property: showColumnVisibilityMenu provides an additional entry in the column header menu that allows columns to be shown or hidden. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Do not use this property.
  • The property: visibleRowCount defines the height of the grid table. Show as many rows as fit on the screen.
  • The property: visibleRowCountMode defines whether the height of the grid table is fixed or automatically calculated based on the space provided by the underlying container. For automatic calculation, make sure that all rows have the same height.
  • The property: minAutoRowCount defines the minimum number of rows that must be shown if the property: visibleRowCountMode is set to “auto”. Show at least three to five rows.
  • The property: firstVisibleRow defines the first row shown in the visible area of the grid table. The grid table is scrolled accordingly.
  • The property: allowColumnReordering is deprecated. Do not use it. Use the property: enableColumnReordering instead.
  • The property: editable does not have a visible effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: enableGrouping turns the experimental grouping on or off. Handle with care.
  • The property: enableCustomFilter changes the filter entry in the column header menu from an edit box to Filter…. Selecting this entry throws an event to which apps can react, for example, by opening a dialog. In general, you should choose the built-in filter over your own implementation. Specifically, keep filtering via the column header menu simple, while offering more advanced options via the table personalization dialog.
  • The property: enableBusyIndicator has not yet been fully implemented. Do not use it.
  • The property: title adds a line of text on top of the grid table. Do not use this. To add a title to the table, use a toolbar.
  • The property: footer adds a short text at the bottom of the table.
  • The property: Busy sets the grid table to busy state. While in busy state, the whole table cannot be used and items cannot be read due to an overlay.
  • The property: Tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: alternateRowColors displays the rows with alternating background colors (“banded rows”). Do not use it.

sap.ui.table.Column

The following additional properties are available for the column:

  • The property: visible defines whether a column is shown or hidden.
  • The property: name defines the name shown in the column header menu for showing and hiding columns. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Do not use this property.
  • The property: headerSpan defines whether one column header is used for one or several columns. To prevent adverse side effects, always use one column header for only one single column. Do not use this property.
  • The property: Tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Analytical Table (ALV)

An analytical table contains a set of data that is structured in rows and columns. It provides several powerful possibilities for working with the data, including advanced grouping and aggregations.

In contrast to other tables, the analytical data binding used by the analytical table allows an aggregated number to be shown automatically in a cell. This means that a number in such a summarized cell is a total sum of several lines in the database.

Usage

Use the analytical table (ALV) if:

  • The cell level and the spatial relationship between cells are more important than the line item. Examples include spreadsheet analyses and waterfall charts. Note that an analytical table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You have to work on more than 1,000 rows. In this case, the analytical table is easier to handle. In contrast to the responsive table, the architecture of the analytical table is optimized for handling large numbers of items. Note that an analytical table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • Comparing items is a major use case. In this case, an analytical table might be more appropriate than a responsive table. In the analytical table, each cell contains only one data point. In contrast, the responsive table is more flexible regarding line items, including the ability to add more data points per cell and also the pop-in function. Both make comparisons more difficult. Note that an analytical table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.

Do not use the analytical table (ALV) if:

  • You need a table. The responsive table is the default table in SAP Fiori. Additional use cases where you might need the responsive table include:
    • You need to provide a total sum for one column. You can also add totals to the responsive table.
    • The focus is on working on line items, not on cells. The responsive table is optimized for displaying complete items on all devices (such as purchase orders and purchase requisitions).
    • Selecting one or more items is a main use case and details are needed to choose the correct item.
    • Line items are independent of each other and no operation across columns is needed.
    • You want to have only one implementation for all devices.
  • The main use case is choosing one item from a very small number of items with no additional details. A select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • The main use case is choosing one out of several items with only a few details per item. A list might be more appropriate. Pay attention to the layout of the list item to ensure that it has a pleasant appearance. Examples include the master list and the attachment list.
  • You cannot provide an analytical binding on the technical side. In this case, a grid table will do the work. Note that the grid table provides only one level of grouping, no aggregation options, and is also not responsive.
  • Data needs to be structured in a hierarchical manner. In this case, a tree table might be more appropriate. Although the analytical table can have several grouping levels, it is not as flexible when nodes at several levels contain children. Note that neither the tree table nor the analytical table are responsive. You will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones and tablets.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use charts.
  • You just need it for layout reasons. In this case, use a layout container like HBox or VBox.
  • You need read-only or editable field-value pairs. Use a form instead. The analytical table is not optimized for form-like input navigation.

Responsiveness

The analytical table is available for desktops and tablets, but not in smartphone sizes. It supports touch devices, but is not optimized for small screens.

If you use an analytical table for desktop use cases, note that you must implement a fallback solution for mobile and touch devices. This fallback solution does not need to support all use cases.

You could create a fallback by using a responsive table. However, a completely different solution, such as showing charts in a read-only case, might be more suitable.

Analytical table (ALV) shown on a desktop
Analytical table (ALV) shown on a desktop
Analytical table (ALV) shown on a tablet
Analytical table (ALV) shown on a tablet

Components

An analytical table does not consist of other elements. However, it is common to use a toolbar above the analytical table.

The toolbar can contain entry points for the view settings dialog and the table personalization dialog or for the p13n dialog, as well as for view switches in the form of a segmented button, and buttons for Add, Edit, and other actions.

Behavior and Interaction

An analytical table is quite restricted in terms of its content, although it provides powerful features for working with the content.

Table Level

Scroll

An analytical table allows horizontal and vertical scrolling (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: navigationMode, value: Scrollbar).

You can add any number of line items to the analytical table, which is known as “lazy loading”.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: rowHeight).

The analytical table is optimized to allow faster scrolling within the first 1000 items.

Scroll bar
Scroll bar

Select

Selection for an analytical table depends on the chosen selection mode. The following options are available:

No selection: Items cannot be selected. (property: selectionMode = None)

Analytical table without item selection
Analytical table without item selection

Single selection: One item in the analytical table can be selected. A row selector column is shown. (property: selectionMode = Single)

Analytical table with single selection
Analytical table with single selection
  • Multiple selection: One or more items can be selected. The analytical table provides a column with checkboxes on the left-hand side. Clicking a checkbox toggles the state of the corresponding row from deselected to selected and back. The Shift key can be used to select a range. For multiple selection, you can choose between two variants.
    • Multi-toggle mode (property: selectionMode = MultiToggle)
    • Multi-selection plug-in (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin)

    These variants behave differently when the user selects more items than are currently loaded in the front end.

    Multi-toggle

    In multi-toggle mode, you can offer a Select All checkbox to the left of the column header (property: enableSelectAll). Selecting this checkbox selects or deselects all items that are currently loaded in the front end. All other items are not selected/deselected. If the application data is stored in the back end, scrolling down further can reveal additional unselected items. The same can happen with range selections if not all items in the selected range have been loaded to the front end.

    Multi-selection plug-in

    If you use this plug-in instead of the multi-toggle selection mode, the behavior for range selection and Select All changes:

    • By default, a dedicated Deselect All button replaces the Select All checkbox. There is no default UI element for selecting all items.
    • You can set a limit for the number of items that can be selected (sap.ui.table.plugins.MultiSelectionPlugin, property: limit). This limit has the following effect:
      • The range that can be selected using the Shift key is limited to the specified number of items (default = 200). The table automatically scrolls back to the last selected item. Users can select more items by selecting additional ranges (the specified limit applies each time).
      • If the selection limit is set to 0, a Select All checkbox is shown. There is also no limit on the number of items that can be selected in a range. All selected items are loaded, which can lead to performance issues for large data sets.
    • If selected items are not already available in the front end, they are loaded automatically by the plug-in and set as selected.
Analytical table with multiple selection
Analytical table with multiple selection
Using the multi-selection plug-in with a limit
Using the multi-selection plug-in with a limit

Selection Behavior

An item can be selected in different ways, depending on the configuration of the analytical table (sap.ui.table.Table, property: selectionBehavior):

  • Row: An item is selected by clicking the checkbox or the row. Use this option for multi-selection tables if clicking a row or a cell is not used for anything else.
  • RowSelector: An item is selected only by clicking the checkbox in the selector cell. Use this option if clicking the row (or a cell inside the row) is used for something else, such as navigation.
  • RowOnly: An item is selected only by clicking the row, and not using checkboxes in the selector cells. Use this for single-selection tables if clicking a row or a cell is not used for another purpose, such as navigation.

Compact, Cozy, and Condensed

Like all SAP Fiori controls, the analytical table is shown in compact mode on a desktop and in cozy mode on tablets.

For desktop devices, you can fit even more rows onto the screen by using the condensed mode together with the compact mode. This renders less white space for each item.

Note that the condensed content density must always be set in addition to the compact mode. Do not use the condensed mode on its own. Do not mix condensed with cozy. Doing so could lead to unpredictable or unwanted results, such as cozy-sized controls in condensed-sized containers, missing padding, and so on.

Note that neither compact mode nor condensed mode support touch interaction. Even on a desktop with a touch screen, users will have difficulty selecting rows or using controls inside the cells with their fingers.

For more information on cozy and compact modes, see content density.

 

 

 

 

Analytical table in compact mode
Analytical table in compact mode
Analytical table in condensed mode - more items on the same screen real estate
Analytical table in condensed mode - more items on the same screen real estate

Column Header

The column header provides the label for the corresponding column and access to the column header menu.

Columns are resized as follows:

  • Mouse interaction: The user drags the separator line between two columns (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: Resizable). Double-clicking the line optimizes the column according to the length of the data currently visible and the label of the column header (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: Autoresizable).
  • Touch interaction: The user clicks or taps the column header to reveal two buttons: one to show the column header menu and one for resizing. The user drags the latter to resize the column.

When the user resizes a column, the adaptation of the column width depends on how the column widths are set:

  • If column widths are set in pixel-based units (px, em, rem), the resized column is adapted and subsequent columns are moved accordingly. The width of all other columns is not affected.
    If all the columns together do not use up the full width of the table control, empty space is added. If all the columns together exceed the width of the table control, a scrollbar appears.
  • If all column widths are set as percentages or “auto”, resizing one column automatically resizes one or more other columns. Resizing can also affect the position of the resized column. This option utilizes the full width of the table and ensures that no white space is added. A scrollbar appears only if all or most of the columns become to narrow. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, you can set a minimum width per column. However, this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are resized automatically. End users can still reduce the column width to below the defined minimum (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: width, minWidth).

Users can rearrange columns by dragging the column header to another position (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: enableColumnReordering).

Column header
Column header
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Columns do not use up the available space
Columns do not use up the available space

Column Header Menu

For each column, a menu can contain the following menu items (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumnMenu, property: Visible):

  • Sort Ascending/Descending (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: showSortMenuEntries)
  • Free text filter (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: showFilterMenuEntries)
  • Group
  • Totals
  • Freeze from the first to the last specified column (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: enableColumnFreeze)

For each column, the menu can be replaced by an app-specific menu.

Column header menu
Column header menu

Sort

The column header menu can provide two sort options (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: sortProperty, showSortMenuEntry):

  • Sort Ascending
  • Sort Descending

The user selects one of these options to sort the corresponding column accordingly (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

Sort settings in column header menu
Sort settings in column header menu

Filter

The column header menu can provide a search field for entering free text (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: filterProperty, showFilterMenuEntries).

If the user enters a term in the input field and triggers the search by pressing ENTER when the focus is on the filter input field, the analytical table is filtered by the corresponding column and value (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, properties: filtered, filterProperty, filterValue, filterOperator, sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: filterType).

Note that the filter may return zero results, in which case, the table might be empty.

General recommendations for filtering:

  • If filtering is a main use case, choose the filter bar or any other filtering UI over the built-in free text filter.
  • Only use the free text filter if filtering is a secondary use case and if the filter bar is too heavy.
Free text filter in column header menu
Free text filter in column header menu

Group

The column header menu can provide the option to group by this column (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: sortProperty).

One group collects all items with the same value within the corresponding column.

Group setting in column header menu
Group setting in column header menu

If line items are grouped in a column, every group is provided with a collapsible or expandable group header (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: grouped). The header text consists of the column name and the value for the corresponding group (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: groupHeaderFormatter). Several grouping levels are possible.

The corresponding column can be hidden to avoid duplicates (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: showIfGrouped). Exercise caution when using this option since hiding the column changes the table layout and may lead to confusion.

Group headers and the corresponding columns are shown – The relevant data is duplicated
Group headers and the corresponding columns are shown – The relevant data is duplicated
Group headers shown, the corresponding column hidden – No duplicates
Group headers shown, the corresponding column hidden – No duplicates

Aggregation

The column header menu can provide the option to show or hide aggregation totals for this column.

Aggregation in column header menu
Aggregation in column header menu

Intermediate aggregations are shown at group level for the corresponding columns if the group contains more than one line item (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: summed).

Group total
Group total

The overall aggregation is shown at the bottom of the analytical table.

Overal aggregation
Overal aggregation

Freeze Columns

The column header menu can provide the option to freeze columns (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: enableColumnFreeze). Selecting Freeze freezes all columns up to the one in which the operation was triggered (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: fixedColumnCount).

When Freeze is triggered, the menu item changes to Unfreeze for the corresponding column.

Freeze setting in column header menu
Freeze setting in column header menu

Line Item Level

A line item contains a set of cells and provides options for selecting the item.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height.

(sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: rowHeight)

Line item
Line item

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Cell Level

A cell provides one data point.

It can contain one of the following controls to display this data point:

While it is technically possible to also use other controls, doing so could lead to issues with alignment, condensed mode, screen reader support, and keyboard support.

If you use text, use only single-line text to keep the same row height. Truncate if necessary as this prevents adverse side effects when scrolling vertically (sap.m.Text, property: wrapping, value: false). Do not wrap.

Cell
Cell

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a table. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

When opened, the context menu gets the row and column context, except for special columns (such as the selection column) or special rows (like group headers). Context menus can be implemented for a specific table, row, or cell (not recommended for editable cells).

By default, the analytical table provides a context menu on the group headers (for example, Expand, Collapse, …). Otherwise, no default context menus are provided.

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a table is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Analytical table with context menu
Analytical table with context menu

Guidelines

Data Density vs. Complexity

The analytical table can be used to display and work with large amounts of data. Unfortunately, the analytical table has a high data density and therefore conveys an immediate feeling of complexity.

Only show tables with a lot of data as a last resort. To make the data easier to read, you should instead try the following:

  • Break down the data into manageable chunks and allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Try to avoid horizontal scrolling in the default delivery.

Try to minimize the number of columns, especially if there is a large number of rows.

Table Title

Implement the table title by using a title control in a toolbar.

Use a table title only if the title of the table is not indicated in the surrounding area.

Do not use a table title if it simply repeats text that is already above the table. For example:

  • A pricing conditions table is the only control on a tab labeled Pricing Conditions.
  • A section or subsection on an object page contains only one table.

Use a table title if you need the item count, table toolbar, or variant management. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a table title, such as Items.
Exception: If the surrounding area contains the table title, and both the item count and toolbar can be added to the surrounding area, no additional table title is needed.
Example: An object page (sub-)section contains only one table. In this case, add the item count and the table toolbar to the (sub-)section header.

If you use a table title, show either a title for the table, with or without variant management, or an item count in the following format:

Items (2,534).

The item count in the table title includes all the visible items that a user can reach by scrolling or expanding groups. Group headers are not included.

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items.

Developer Hint
Assistive technologies (such as screen readers) use the title to create a hierarchical site map for faster navigation. In addition, screen readers use the title as the label for the table.

If you don’t use a title (for example, to avoid repetition), make sure that the table is connected to another meaningful on-screen text that can be used as a label for assistive technologies. You can do this using the method addAriaLabelledBy.

Multiple Selection

  • We strongly recommend using the multi-selection plug-in. This ensures that all items selected using Select All or as part of a range are included – even if some items were not initially loaded in the front end. This is not the case if you use the multi-toggle option.
  • Do not limit the range selection for the multi-selection plug-in unless you have to.
    • If the dataset is small and/or completely available in the front-end, set the limit property to 0 to enable the Select All option and allow users to select any range.
    • If you have a large dataset, set a limit on the number of selected items to avoid performance issues. Also bear in mind that some actions won’t be helpful if the dataset is too big (for example, a delete operation on 2 million database entries).

In multiple selection mode (multi toggle), do not show checkboxes in the first data column in the default delivery to avoid confusion.

Don't
Do not add checkboxes to the first column
Do not add checkboxes to the first column

Loading Data

To indicate that the table is currently loading items, use the busy state (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Columns – Best Practices

Minimize the number of columns. Avoid the need to scroll horizontally in the default delivery.

By default, the analytical table assigns the same width to each column. We recommend overwriting this default to provide optimal space for your content (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: width).

If you define the column width in pixels or rems, resizing a column affects only the width of this specific column. Reducing the size of the browser window results in a scrollbar. If the user resizes a column, and the total width of all columns exceeds the table width, a scrollbar appears. If the columns do not take up the full table width, white space appears to the right of the last column.

If you define the column width as a percentage, resizing one column affects the width of several or all columns. Reducing the size of the browser window truncates the texts. This ensures that the columns fill up all the available space. A scrollbar appears only if width of all the columns still exceeds the table width after the automatic width adjustments. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, you can set a minimum width per column. However, this this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users can still reduce the column width to below the defined minimum (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: width, minWidth).

If you set the column width to “auto”, the behavior is the same as for “percentage”. However, unlike “percentage”, “auto” distributes the columns equally.

To decide on how to set the column width (pixel/rem/em vs. percent/auto), keep the following in mind:

  • For tables with only 2 to 3 columns, use pixel-based units. This ensures that the values in the columns are not spread over the whole screen on wide screens, which improves the readability of the line items.
  • For tables with many columns, where a horizontal scrollbar is usually needed, use pixel based units. This avoids unintended side effects when resizing columns.
  • For all other tables, use whatever fits your case better.

Be cautious when mixing columns with pixel-based and percentage-based widths. While this can be helpful in some cases, it can also cause even more side effects when resizing a column. If you are using percentage-based widths for one or more columns, consider not allowing end users to resize columns at all.

Optimize the column width for its initial visible content, including the column header texts. If this is not possible (for example, if showing the full texts would result in extremely wide columns), let the texts truncate. End users can change the width of the column to read the full text, as needed.

Maintain a constant column width and avoid adjusting it automatically when the content changes.

Always keep to one line of text. Do not wrap.

Don't
In the default delivery, the initial visible content should not be truncated
In the default delivery, the initial visible content should not be truncated
Don't
Never wrap texts
Never wrap texts

Column Headers – Best Practices

For each column, provide a label in the column header. In the default delivery, do not truncate the column header texts. Only let the text truncate if showing the full text would make the column too wide. Never wrap the text.

Content Alignment

For alignment of cell content, follow the guidelines below.

Left-align: text, IDs, phone numbers, URLs, passwords, and email addresses.

Left-alignment of text
Left-alignment of text

Right-align: numbers, except IDs, to ensure comparability of numbers and amounts.

Right-alignment of numbers
Right-alignment of numbers

Right-align amounts with currencies to the cell and align them in terms of their respective decimal points.

This ensures that amounts with different currencies are shown correctly, whether these currencies have 0, 2, or 3 decimals.

For aligning to the decimal point, use the sap.ui.uinified.Currency control.

Alignment to decimal point
Alignment to decimal point

Right-align dates and times.

This ensures comparability for most formats and locales.

Right-alignment of dates
Right-alignment of dates

Left-align status information.

Left-align status information
Left-align status information

Center-align icons.

Left-align micro charts.

XS micro charts in condensed mode
XS micro charts in condensed mode

Content Formatting

Key Identifier

Use a bold label or an emphasized link as the key identifier of an item. In the default delivery, show the key identifier in the first column.

Emphasized link
Emphasized link

For strings with IDs, use one of the following:

  • Show the ID in brackets after the corresponding string. Use this format if sorting, grouping, or filtering is only needed on the string, but not on the ID.
  • Show the ID in a separate column. Use this format if sorting, grouping, or filtering on the string and the ID is needed.
Text and ID in one column – Sorting, filtering, and grouping only on the text
Text and ID in one column – Sorting, filtering, and grouping only on the text
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link
Text and ID in two columns – Allows sorting, filtering, and grouping on both
Text and ID in two columns – Allows sorting, filtering, and grouping on both
If displayed as a link, use only the string as the link, not the ID
If displayed as a link, use only the string as the link, not the ID

Truncation

Avoid truncation of typical content in the default delivery (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: width). However, since the columns are resizable, do not worry too much if truncation occurs as columns can still be enlarged if necessary.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must also have the same height. If you need to decide between truncation and different row heights, choose truncation. Do not wrap.

Optimize column width for typical content, not all content
Optimize column width for typical content, not all content

Number of Links

Are there too many links? Use subtle links to avoid a wall of links. Standard links are also emphasized more if they are surrounded by subtle links.

For example, a financial table consists of several columns with summarized cells. A summarized cell shows the total sum of several database entries. Each sum should be a link to a report that shows details about which database entries produce the total sum. The line item identifier should also be a link that provides more detail about the line item itself. Use a standard or emphasized link for the item identifier, and subtle links for the summarized cells.

Emphasized links, links, subtle links, and text
Emphasized links, links, subtle links, and text

Missing Value

If there is no value for a cell, leave it blank. Do not display text as N/A.

Leave empty fields blank
Leave empty fields blank

Numbering Items

In terms of numbering items:

  • If the item number is more like an ID with regard to its description, use ID formatting as described above.
  • In all other cases, use a separate column for the item number.
Add a separate column for the item number
Add a separate column for the item number

Status

For status information, use semantic colors on the foreground elements.

For status information on text, use an object status.

Semantic colors on text
Semantic colors on text

Micro Charts

Use only the following micro charts: Bullet, comparison, stacked bar. When using micro charts, use them in size XS.

Micro charts in an analytical table
Micro charts in an analytical table

Empty Tables

Avoid empty analytical tables. If necessary, provide instructions on how to fill the analytical table with data (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, properties: noDataText, showNoData).

Examples:

  • If a table is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the table with data.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    To start, set the relevant filters.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No data found. Try adjusting the filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, a search is also offered, or only the search is offered).
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of filter settings).
Provide meaningful instructions
Provide meaningful instructions

Invalid State

To show an invalid state of the analytical table within the list report floorplan, show an overlay on the analytical table and the corresponding toolbar (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: showOverlay). The overlay prevents user interactions.

Use this within the list report floorplan if filter settings have been changed but the analytical table has not yet been updated.

Analytical table with invalid data
Analytical table with invalid data

Item States

To show that an item has been modified, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string (Modified) in an additional column with the label Editing Status.

In the default delivery, add a column directly behind the key identifier.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string Contains errors in the Editing Status column and highlight the row accordingly. This string replaces the Modified string.

A modified item with an error
A modified item with an error

To show that an item is locked, add a transparent-style button with the corresponding icon and the text Locked by [name] in the Editing Status column.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in draft state, add a transparent-style button with the text Draft in the Editing Status column.

Item in draft state
Item in draft state

Show only one state at a time.

Numbers and Units

Show the unit of measurement in one of the following ways:

The number and unit are in the same cell. Do this if sorting, filtering, or grouping by the unit of measurement are not needed.

Use a currency control to display the concatenated string.

Number and unit of measurement in one cell
Number and unit of measurement in one cell

The number and unit are in separate columns. Do this if sorting, filtering, or grouping by the unit of measurement are a common use case.

Note that this column can be hidden or moved independently of the column containing the corresponding number. Therefore, be sure to have clear labels for both columns to communicate the dependency.

Number and unit of measurement in two columns
Number and unit of measurement in two columns

If the unit of measurement is the same for all rows, show the unit of measurement in the column header. Otherwise, show the unit of measurement within the row.

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, drag and drop is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose, such as (toolbar) buttons.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

Do not use drag and drop for rearranging items in the analytical table. The analytical table is mainly used for grouping items and for calculating the totals per group and column. Moving items to another group also means that a value of the dropped item changes: because grouping is based on values in a column, the dropped item needs to take on the value of the target group for the corresponding column.

Example:
A table is grouped by availability. An item is moved from the group “Not Available” to the group “In Stock”. In this case, the moved item needs to change its availability to “In Stock” to match the target group. Because changing the value in this way doesn’t make sense, rearranging items is not permitted in analytical tables.

Don't
Do not use drag and drop for rearranging items in the analytical table
Do not use drag and drop for rearranging items in the analytical table

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar). Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

The context menu can be triggered for the table, row, or cell. However, we do not recommend using context menus for cells: because the content of a cell is a different touch target than the cell itself, opening a cell context menu via touch is quite hard, even in cozy mode.

Do not combine context menus with condensed mode: editable controls fill the entire space inside a cell. Because of this, context menus cannot be opened at all with touch or mouse interaction.

Actions

Multiple Items

To trigger actions on multiple items, use a multiselection analytical table (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: selectionMode, value: MultiToggle). Offer the corresponding actions in the table toolbar.

Do not offer action triggering on multiple items if the table is generally expected to have fewer than 10 items. In this case, try to use the responsive table instead of the analytical table.

Single Item

To trigger actions on a single item (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: selectionMode, value: Single):

  • Show the actions on the table toolbar.
  • In rare cases, show the actions within the line item. One example would be an Add to Cart button in a shopping application. Since these actions are repeated in every line and thus use a lot of screen real estate, do this only for a maximum of one or two actions. Provide a separate column per action. Use a button, unless the action trigger belongs to a link.

To trigger navigation on line item level choose one of the following options:

  • Use a link for the attribute that identifies the row. Clicking the link triggers the navigation.
  • Add the RowActions column and show the navigation indicator (  ) at the end of the row. The navigation arrow triggers the navigation.

Use the RowActions column only for one or both of the following actions:

  • Navigate to details page ( )
  • Delete ( )

The RowActions column does not provide a column header text. It is fixed and will not scroll away. Users also cannot personalize this column.

Single Cell

For triggering actions on a single cell, create the corresponding click event. Do not use the cell click event if the cell contains interactive controls, such as links.

Add Items

For adding items, place an Add or Create text button on the table toolbar.

  • Use Create if the button adds a brand new item that doesn’t yet exist on the database.
  • Use Add if the item already exists and is merely added or assigned to the current object.

Show new items as the first item of the table, with a visual highlight at the beginning of the row.

For more details, see the guidelines for managing objects (including subarticles).

Enabling/Disabling Actions

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection:

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user how many items will be affected. Let users choose whether to apply the action anyway or cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

If the action was applied and the items are still available, keep them selected.

Message for action which applies to a part of a selection
Message for action which applies to a part of a selection

Editable Content

For editable content, only use the following controls, and only one control per cell:

Only these controls are optimized for all viewing modes of the analytical table.

If you need edit mode, change your text controls, such as label, text, link, object status, icons, and currencies, to editable controls as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before. You can do this by exchanging the controls, for example, from sap.m.Text to sap.m.Input.

For mass editing items:

  • Provide multiselection.
  • Provide an Edit button.
  • If several items are selected, clicking the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

This is similar to mass editing in the split-screen layout floorplan.

Warning
Do not offer editing for summarized cells. A summarized cell shows the total sum of several database entries. Changing the total sum does not make sense since it is unclear how this sum is divided between the different database entries.
Interactive controls – Inline
Interactive controls – Inline

View Settings

There are several ways to show Sort, Filter, and/or Group settings:

  • Column header menu: In all cases, show the corresponding settings in the column header menu.
  • View settings dialog: Simple and more flexible with regard to filter settings. No advantage for sorting. Allows the user to ungroup grouped columns.tables with a medium amount of items.
  • Table personalization dialog: Provides complex options for sorting items by several levels and allows the user to ungroup grouped columns. It also provides a query-builder-like approach for filter settings. The complexity of the options is also its downside. Use the table personalization dialog for tables with a large number of items.
  • If filtering is a main use case, use the filter bar. In this case, avoid offering additional filter settings on the table. If you do, the filter settings on the table work only on the result set provided by the filter bar.

Always be careful when synchronizing the settings in the dialog with the settings from the column header menu.

Trigger the dialogs in one of the following ways:

  • View settings dialog: Provide several buttons, one for each of these view settings. Each button opens the view settings dialog on the corresponding page.
  • Table personalization dialog: Provide a settings button, which opens the table personalization dialog containing all pages.

Use only the view settings you really need. For example, do not offer grouping if it does not support your use case.

 

Column header menu with view settings
Column header menu with view settings
Table toolbar with triggers for view settings dialog
Table toolbar with triggers for view settings dialog
Table toolbar with trigger for table personalization dialog
Table toolbar with trigger for table personalization dialog

Persist the view settings. When a user reopens the app, show the analytical table with the same sort, filter, group, and aggregation settings as last defined by this user.

Sort

To display the current sort state, an icon is shown in the column header of the last sorted column. This icon indicates the sort direction (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

For the default sort setting, sort by the column that identifies the row, which is usually the first column in default delivery. Use a meaningful sort order, such as alphabetical order for text, numeric order for numbers, or chronological order for dates.

Column, sorted ascending
Column, sorted ascending
Column, sorted descending
Column, sorted descending

The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order.

For each column, provide a meaningful sort order. For example:

  • Sort text alphabetically
  • Sort numbers by their value
  • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
    • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
    • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
    • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
    • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first

Filter

To display the current filter state, an icon is shown in the column header of the filtered column (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: filtered, filterProperty, filterValue, filterOperator, defaultFilterOperator, filterType).

Column, filtered
Column, filtered

Group

To display the current group state, group headers are shown. Show the following text in the group header (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: grouped, showIfGrouped, groupHeaderFormatter):

[Label of the grouped column]: [Grouping value]

If there is no grouping value, show the following text:
[Label of the grouped column]: (Not Available)

This is the case if you have a group of items that don’t have a value for the grouped column.

 

Set the property collapseRecursive to “false” to keep subgroups expanded even after collapsing and expanding the parent group.

Group headers, several levels
Group headers, several levels

On non-touch devices, right-clicking a group header opens the group header menu. On touch devices, the same menu is opened by using the menu icon on the right side of a group header.

The group header menu provides several options:

  • Show/Hide: Shows or hides the column in the table layout, although it is grouped.
  • Ungroup: When the user ungroups a column, the corresponding group headers disappear. If the column was hidden, it is shown again as a separate column.
  • Ungroup All: The columns are shown again.
  • Move Up: Rearranges the grouping levels hierarchy by moving the selected group above the group that is one level higher up in the hierarchy.
  • Move Down: Rearranges the grouping levels hierarchy by moving the selected group below the group that is one level lower down in the hierarchy.
  • Collapse Level: Collapses all groups on the corresponding grouping level.
  • Collapse All: All groups are collapsed.
Group header menu
Group header menu
Group header on touch devices
Group header on touch devices

In general:

  • Offer grouping on objects and attributes.
  • Do not offer grouping on measures.
  • If appropriate, offer reasonable grouping by default, but do not exaggerate. As a rule of thumb, use up to three group levels.
  • Provide more space for the first column. Grouping needs an indent per group level. Extra space in the first column prevents truncated text.

Aggregate

To display the current aggregation state, the total sum of the corresponding column is shown at the bottom of the table.

If items are grouped, an intermediate sum is shown:

  • At the bottom of each group if the group is expanded.
  • In the group header if the group is collapsed.

(sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: summed)

When aggregating amounts with different units of measurement, show an asterisk (*) in the aggregation rows.

When sorting an aggregated column, only the leaf nodes of a group are included by default. If each measure column currently displays a single unit of measurement, the order of the groups can also be affected.

For example:
Let’s assume that table items are grouped by Country/Region and aggregated by Total Net Amount. If you sort the Total Net Amount column in descending order, the largest total net amount is shown first.

Warning
Only enable sorting by totals if each column has a single unit of measurement. This prevents inconsistencies in the sorting behavior, which depends on user settings, such as filter settings or the columns currently displayed.
Developer Hint
To allow sorting by totals, the following conditions must be met:

  1. For each measure column, multiple units must not occur in the displayed data, regardless of whether or not totals are shown.
  2. The autoExpandMode of the AnalyticalBinding must be set to Sequential. Note that the default is Bundled.

In general:

  • Offer aggregation on measures, but not on objects or attributes.
  • Avoid aggregations on the first three columns for the default delivery. As soon as grouping is used together with aggregations, collapsing a group shows the aggregation on the group header. This conflicts with the group name.
  • Where appropriate, offer reasonable aggregation by default.
Aggregation and groups
Aggregation and groups

Personalization

Only offer personalization if you need more columns than a tablet screen can display at any one time, which is usually five.

Persist the column layout. When a user reopens the app, show the analytical table with the same column layout settings as last defined by this user.

Add, Remove, and Rearrange Columns

To add, remove, or rearrange columns, use one of the following:

  • The table personalization dialog: It offers some simple settings for column layout. Use this if you have only a few columns to choose from and/or you use the view settings dialog.
  • The p13n dialog: Besides various complex view settings, it also provides settings for column layout. Use this if you have a large number of columns to choose from and/or you use this dialog anyway for view settings.

In both cases, trigger the dialog via the settings button in the table toolbar.

You can also use drag and drop to rearrange columns (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnReordering). If you allow rearranging via drag and drop as well as via a dialog, keep both places in sync.

Resize Columns

Resizing columns works differently on touch and non-touch devices.

  • Non-touch devices: Drag and drop the column separator on the right side of the column. Double-clicking the column separator optimizes the width of the column for the data currently loaded into the front end, which is usually about 100 rows.
  • Touch devices: Clicking the column header reveals two buttons: one for opening the column header menu, another one for resizing the column. Drag and drop this second button to resize the column.

Freeze Columns

For freezing columns, offer the setting in the column header menu (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: enableColumnFreeze).

Selecting Freeze on a column freezes all columns from the first one to the one where Freeze is selected. On this column, the menu entry changes from Freeze to Unfreeze.

Frozen column
Frozen column

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, you can display a highlight indicator in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to show:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • Additional information, such as blue to highlight newly added items.
  • Industry-specific or process-specific states, such as “out of stock” or “excess of inventory”.

Be aware that the highlight is just an indication. It does not tell users exactly what is wrong. Make sure that you provide this information within the table row, ideally in the same color.

For details on the use of highlight colors, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

(sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, aggregation: rowSettingsTemplate)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Tables in Object Pages

In the object page, we advise against using analytical, grid, and tree tables. Instead, use a responsive table and offer navigation to a list report with the table types mentioned above.

For more information on the use of tables within the object page, see the Tables section of the Object Page article.

Export to Spreadsheet

On the table toolbar, apps can provide a menu button for exporting table data to a spreadsheet. For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button
'Export to Spreadsheet' menu button

Properties

sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable

The following additional properties are available for the analytical table:

  • The property: width defines the width of the analytical table.
  • The property: rowHeight defines the height of each row in the analytical table. Since the height required is calculated automatically by the analytical table, this property is only needed rarely.
  • The property: columnHeaderHeight defines the height of the column headers. Since the height required is calculated automatically by the analytical table, this property is only needed rarely.
  • The property: columnHeaderVisible can be used to hide the column headers. Always show the column headers.
  • The property: showColumnVisibilityMenu provides an additional entry in the column header menu that allows columns to be shown or hidden. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Do not use this property.
  • The property: columnVisibilityMenuSorter is used for sorting the columns inside the column header menu if showing and hiding columns is provided in the menu. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Do not use this property.
  • The property: visibleRowCount defines the height of the analytical table. Show as many rows as fit on the screen.
  • The property: visibleRowCountMode defines whether the height of the analytical table is fixed or automatically calculated based on the space provided by the underlying container. For automatic calculation, make sure that all rows have the same height.
  • The property: minimumAutoRowCount defines the minimum number of rows that must be shown if the property: visibleRowCountMode is set to “auto”. Show at least three to five rows.
  • The property: firstVisibleRow defines the first row shown in the visible area of the analytical table. The analytical table is scrolled accordingly.
  • The property: allowColumnReordering is deprecated. Use the property: enableColumnReordering instead.
  • The property: editable does not have a visible effect. Please do not use it.
  • The property: threshold is used for optimizing lazy loading of items. In most cases, the default value is appropriate.
  • The property: enableGrouping is experimental and does not have a meaningful effect on the analytical table. Do not use it.
  • The property: sumOnTop shows additional aggregation values on the group header, even if the group is expanded. Do not use it.
  • The property: enableCustomFilter changes the filter entry in the column header menu from an edit box to Filter…. Selecting this entry throws an event that apps can react to, for example, by opening a dialog. In general, you should choose the built-in filter over your own implementation. Specifically, keep filtering via the column header menu simple, while offering more advanced options via the table personalization dialog.
  • The property: enableBusyIndicator has not yet been fully implemented. Do not use it.
  • The property: title adds a line of text on top of the analytical table. Do not use it. To add a title to the table, use a toolbar.
  • The property: footer adds a short text at the bottom of the table.
  • The property: Busy sets the analytical table to busy state. While in busy state, the whole table cannot be used and items cannot be read due to an overlay.
  • The property: Tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: alternateRowColors displays the rows with alternating background colors (“banded rows”). Do not use it.

sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn

The following additional properties are available for the analytical column:

  • The property: leadingProperty is used for data binding.
  • The property: inResult is used for data binding.
  • The property: visible defines whether a column is shown or hidden.
  • The property: name defines the name shown in the column header menu for showing and hiding columns. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Please do not use this property.
  • The property: headerSpan defines whether one column header is used for one or several columns. To prevent adverse side effects, always use one column header for only one single column. Please do not use this property.
  • The property: Tooltip does not have an effect. Please do not use it.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Harvey Ball Micro Chart

You can use a Harvey Ball chart to visualize a value compared to its total. This is not a pie chart with multiple values or sections, but rather just one value from a total. If you configure thresholds, the semantic color of the value shows a positive, critical, or negative value. You can also use regular chart colors from the qualitative palette without a semantic meaning.

Different Harvey Ball charts
Different Harvey Ball charts

Usage

The Harvey Ball micro chart can be embedded into a table, list, tile,or header.

Responsiveness

The Harvey Ball micro chart is fully responsive. The size adjusts dynamically based on the dimensions of the parent container. In addition, there are four fixed sizes: L, M, S and XS. Each fixed size is a snapshot of the fully responsive micro chart for specific dimensions.

Harvey Ball micro chart - Size L
Harvey Ball micro chart - Size L
Harvey Ball micro chart - Size M
Harvey Ball micro chart - Size M
Harvey Ball micro chart - Size S
Harvey Ball micro chart - Size S
Harvey Ball micro chart - Size XS
Harvey Ball micro chart - Size XS

You can use size XS to embed the Harvey Ball micro chart in the cells of a grid tableanalytical table, or tree table (also in condensed mode). Left-align the Harvey Ball micro chart in the table cell.

Harvey Ball micro chart in size XS in a grid table
Harvey Ball micro chart in size XS in a grid table

Maximum and Minimum Sizes

The Harvey Ball micro chart can have the following dimensions:

Width Height
Maximum 320 px 94 px
Minimum 64 px 18 px

If the chart height is less than 56 px, only the slice label is visible.

Components

Labels

If the container scales in height, the size of the micro chart adapts to the available vertical space.

  • If the container height increases, the size of the micro chart increases (assuming the available width is suffcient).
  • If the container height decreases, the size of the micro chart is reduced again.

If the micro chart is smaller than size S, only the chart slice and slice label are visible. If there is not enough space for the label, it is not shown.

Harvey Ball micro chart - components
Harvey Ball micro chart - components

Resources

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Table Toolbar

The table toolbar always appears above the table and has a transparent background. The control is used for key actions that impact the entire table.

Usage

Use the table toolbar if:

  • There are multiple objects on your page and you need to edit only the table.
  • You want to show actions as close to their corresponding controls as possible.
  • You need a title for your table.

Do not use the table toolbar if:

  • You are using single selection and only one or two actions. In this case, place the actions on each line.

Responsiveness

To enable responsiveness, use the OverflowToolbar control. For more information, please refer to the corresponding section in the toolbar overview article.

Components

All of the components are optional. The table toolbar can contain the following actions:

  • App-specific actions
  • Generic actions

The following actions count as generic:

  • Title
  • Variant management
  • Switch
  • Search
  • Edit
  • View switch
  • Create (for new items)
  • Add (for existing items)
  • Sort, Filter, and Group (view settings)
  • Personalize
  • Export to spreadsheet
  • Print
  • Overflow
Example of possible components
Example of possible components

Behavior and Interaction

App-Specific Actions

If needed, the app team can define their own actions for the app. In this case, the text buttons should contain a short, unambiguous text that explains what action the button performs. A button text is usually a single-word verb (for example, Share). Note that translated UIs may increase the length of the text string.

Only use icon buttons if you are sure that the user will be able to interpret the meaning of the icon easily and without the aid of a tooltip.  Use standard and easily recognizable icons, such as a paper clip for an attachment.

Table toolbar with app-specific icon buttons
Table toolbar with app-specific icon buttons

Title (Generic)

A title provides a short, meaningful summary of the content, mostly by using a single word. The title bar is a toolbar property that supports consistently-sized text and titles with the same height in cozy and compact form factors.

Consider the following when using a title:

  • Use the sap.m.Title control.
  • The toolbar height must be set to 3 rem.
  • The title must have the label class sapMH4Fontsize.

Use a table title if you need the table toolbar, and if the title of the table is not indicated in the surrounding area. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a table title, such as Items. Note that the title becomes truncated if there is not enough space.

Title in the table toolbar
Title in the table toolbar

Variant Management (Generic)

Variants store settings that have been defined, for example, for layout, column visibility, sorting, and grouping. The variant management control enables the user to load, save, and change variants.

In the context of tables, the variant management control  is used to save, manage, and load table settings which include layout, column visibility, sorting, and grouping.

For this, the variant management control can be used independently of the filter settings.

Always place this control in the table toolbar next to the title.

If you place the variant management control inside a toolbar, you need to apply the following styles:

  • The toolbar height must be set to 3 rem.
  • The title must have the class sapMH4Fontsize.

The examples below show where to place this control:

Variant in the table toolbar
Variant in the table toolbar

Title and Variant Management (Generic)

In exceptional cases, both the title and variant management have to be used. However, we do not recommend this because it results in a crowded toolbar and problems with responsiveness may occur. Variant management alone is generally sufficient.

The title and variant management are both left-aligned. The title is placed first, followed by a separator and the variant management.

Title with variant management
Title with variant management

Content Switch (Generic)

When apps need to switch between different content in a table, use a select control (also known as a dropdown) or a segmented button. The select control and the segmented button are displayed left-aligned in the table toolbar and allow the user to show different views.

These views could be very specific. For example, AllMine, and Others. However, you should ensure that there is no interference with the filters in the filter bar. Alternatively, the views might be made up of specific groupings or configurations, such as By X or By Y.

We strongly recommend that you use the segmented button and the select control as follows:

  • A limited set of views (2-3) can be represented by a segmented button (sap.m.SegmentedButton), which should collapse into a dropdown on a smartphone.
  • If the number of views can change or is larger than 3, they should be represented by a select (m.Select) control.

For more information about using multiple predefined views, see the list report floorplan (under Content Area: Multiple Views)

You can also include counters on your segmented buttons or your dropdown to indicate, for example, the number of products in each specific content view. For example, All Products (115), Hardware (60), Software (55).

Segmented button with a counter included
Segmented button with a counter included

If you use a content switch, you no longer need a title. In very rare use cases, both a title and a content switch must be visible. In this case, the title and the content view are left-aligned.

Segmented text button to switch content
Segmented text button to switch content
Select to switch content
Select to switch content

You can also use the icon tab bar as a filter. At the front, there can be an All tab (optional) stating the overall number and type of items, such as 14 Products.

If you use the icon tab bar as a filter, we strongly recommend that you show a counter on every tab. If you need a counter, use the icon tab bar instead of the content switch inside the table. Also use the icon tab bar if you need different actions for your different table views. Use the content switch instead of tabs if there are multiple table variants.

Search (Generic)

If a dataset is too large for users to find items by scanning through them, we recommend that you offer a search functionality. Do not place a search function in the table toolbar if there is a filter bar above.

If you want to provide a search for your table, place it on the right side of the toolbar. Note that this control cannot be moved into the overflow menu. We therefore recommend that you define a minimum width.

For more information, see search.

Search in the table toolbar
Search in the table toolbar

Edit (Generic)

Sometimes the user will need to edit a table. In this case, you have two options: You must decide whether the user needs to edit more than one element, or whether the main use case is to edit only one element.

Option 1: Editing Line Items

To allow the user to edit a line item details page, set sap.m.ListType to “detail” in the corresponding item (sap.m.ColumnListItem/sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive). This creates an Edit button at the end of the line. The user can click or tap the button to trigger the edit event. Use this event to switch the corresponding line item to edit mode.

Edit is a list item type and therefore cannot be used together with navigation or with the use of click events on the whole item (active).

Option 1: Editing an individual line
Option 1: Editing an individual line

Option 2: Editing the Whole Table

To edit a whole table, use the table toolbar. The edit function is a text button. Triggering this action results in the Edit button being replaced by Save and Cancel, and the user can then make any necessary changes in the table. All actions that control the UI of the table remain visible, and all other actions are hidden.

 Table in display mode
Table in display mode
Table in edit mode
Table in edit mode

View Switch (Generic)

View switches are right-aligned in the toolbar and allow the user to switch between different chart types or table layouts. You must provide the view switch if the chart relies on subtle color differences or gradients of color. In these cases, users with visual impairments can switch to the table view.

Switches are optional and do not have to be available if there is no need to switch between different charts or tables.

The number of chart types and switches must be used with caution. Each app team must decide what kinds of chart types make sense to visualize the respective data to assist the user in the best possible way.

We do not recommend using more than three types of visualization. The sequence of chart type switches is not fixed; however, you must sort them in terms of their importance and frequency of usage.

The chart type currently in use is highlighted. For this purpose, use a segmented control with icons. For more information about the icons and the chart types they represent, see chart toolbar.

Create / Add (Generic)

Use a text button for Create or Add actions. Place the action as close to the content as possible.

If the Create or Add action is a main function, never move it into the overflow.

Table toolbar with 'Create' button
Table toolbar with 'Create' button

Sort, Filter, and Group (Generic)

Sort, Filter, and Group can appear in any combination or as single actions. If you use more than one of these actions, we recommend keeping them in the following order: Sort, Filter, and Group.

When the user chooses one of these actions, the view settings dialog appears. This dialog can provide any combination of these three settings, including only one setting, such as Sort.

  • If sorting, filtering, and/or grouping is a common use case in your app, offer one, two, or all three of the corresponding features in one or more view settings dialogs. Do not provide these features if the table is expected to have only a small number of entries (up to 20 in most cases).
  • If filtering is a main use case, do not offer filtering in the view settings dialog; use the filter bar instead.

There are two ways to trigger the view settings dialog:

  1. The user clicks or taps a button on the table toolbar. Offer all relevant functionality (Sort, Filter, and/or Group) in this dialog.
  2. The user clicks or taps one of several buttons for each of these view settings. Each button opens a view settings dialog which contains only the corresponding page.

Use one of the two options listed above based on the following guidelines:

  • If sorting, filtering, and/or grouping are a secondary use case, use option 1.
  • If there are several additional actions and the table toolbar becomes overloaded with buttons, use option 1.
  • If sorting, filtering, and/or grouping are a primary use case, use option 2 to allow faster access to these settings.
  • If screen real estate is not an issue, use option 2.
  • If there is only one view setting (Sort, Filter, or Group), use option 2.

Always use only the view settings you really need. For example, do not offer grouping if it does not support your use case.

Using the view settings dialog allows you to define several Sort, Filter, and/or Group settings per column. Thus, a column with several data points can be sorted, filtered, and/or grouped independently by each data point.

Ensure a consistent user experience. When a user reopens the app, show the table with the same view settings that were last defined by this user.

Option 1: One trigger for all view settings (sort, filter, and group)
Option 1: One trigger for all view settings (sort, filter, and group)
Option 2: Multiple triggers for the different view settings (sort, filter, and group)
Option 2: Multiple triggers for the different view settings (sort, filter, and group)

Personalization (Generic)

Use the table personalization dialog for adding, removing, and rearranging columns. The user triggers the dialog by clicking a button on the table toolbar.

Offer personalization if you need more columns than those that fit on a tablet screen (which is usually five) to fulfill 80% of your main use cases. Before you do this, try to reduce the number of columns, for example, by using several lines per column or by using the pop-in.

Ensure a consistent user experience. When a user reopens the app, show the table with the same settings that were last defined by this user.

Table toolbar with personalization icon
Table toolbar with personalization icon

Export to Spreadsheet (Generic)

The Export to Spreadsheet action allows the user to export table rows and can be represented by a generic icon button. Place the action as close to the content as possible.

Example of a table toolbar with the 'Export to Spreadsheet' icon
Example of a table toolbar with the 'Export to Spreadsheet' icon

Print (Generic)

The action for printing table items can be represented by a generic Print icon ( ).

Example of table toolbar with Print icon
Example of table toolbar with Print icon

Overflow (Generic)

Please see the section on overflow in the Behavior and Interaction section of the toolbar overview article.

Styles

The table toolbar is always transparent and and has transparent-style buttons. Do not use semantic or emphasized button styles. These are reserved for key actions in the footer toolbar. For more information, see Button.

Guidelines

To indicate if an action can be applied to the current selection,

  • Enable the action if it can be applied to all selected items.
  • Enable the action if it can be applied to some of the selected items. If the action is triggered, show a message that informs the user how many items will be affected. Let the user choose whether to apply the action anyway or cancel the action.
  • Only disable the action if it can be applied to none of the selected items.

For more details, see UI Element – States.

Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection
Message for an action that applies to a part of a selection

If the items are still available after the action was applied, keep them selected.

For further guidelines, see Toolbar Overview – Guidelines.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Select Dialog

The select dialog enables users to select one or more items from a comprehensive list. The select dialog comes with a list of entries and a search field to filter the list.

A more enhanced dialog for single selection and multiselection is the value help dialog as it offers range selection and excluding functions.

Usage

Use the select dialog if:

  • Users need to select one or more entries from a comprehensive list that contains multiple attributes or values.

Do not use the select dialog if:

  • Users need to pick one item from a predefined set of options that contains one attribute or value only such as languages. In this case, consider using the combo box or select instead.
  • Your use case requires more enhanced functionalities such as a selection based on ranges. For the selection of values, consider using the value help dialog instead.
  • Your use case requires tabs, filters, or an Add New functionality in the select dialog. In this case, use a standard dialog instead.
Information
For more information on which selection control to choose, see the selection control overview.

Responsiveness

The display of the select control depends on the device. On phones, the selection list takes up the whole screen. On desktop and tablet devices it appears as a popover.

Size S

Single select dialog in full screen on smartphone
Single select dialog in full screen on smartphone
Multi-select dialog in full screen on smartphone
Multi-select dialog in full screen on smartphone

Size M

Single select dialog on tablet
Single select dialog on tablet
Multi-select dialog on tablet
Multi-select dialog on tablet

Size L

Single select dialog on desktop
Single select dialog on desktop
Multi-select dialog on desktop
Multi-select dialog on desktop

Components

Dialog Header

You need to set the title of the dialog header (1). We recommend the following form:

Single selection

Select

Example: Select Product

Multi-selection

Select

Example: Select Products

Search

The first element in the dialog is a standard search field (2).

Info Toolbar

The info toolbar (3) is only available in multi-selection mode. It shows the number of selected items in the following form:

Selected :

Example: Selected Products: 2

Content

The content area (4) can be filled with any list content inherited from the list item base, such as standard list items, display list items, and feed list items. You can set the content to be displayed as grouped.

Button Toolbar

The button toolbar (5) contains two buttonsSelect and Cancel. Select takes over the selection, while Cancel resets the selection to the state it was in when the dialog was opened.

Components of the select dialog. Left: single select, right: multi select
Components of the select dialog. Left: single select, right: multi select

Behavior and Interaction

The select dialog can be called up from any control. The most common trigger is an input field with selection icon, also known as a “value help field”, or F4. Alternative triggers are buttons or icons, which add items to an existing list or the info bar in the master list in order to apply a contextual filter.

Single Select

Once users select an entry, the select dialog is closed and the selected entry is taken over. If applicable, the entry is displayed in the field from which the dialog was triggered.

Multi-Select

In the multi-select version of the select dialog, checkboxes are provided for choosing multiple entries. The selection is taken over when the user closes the dialog via OK. Cancel closes the dialog without taking over the selected values. An info bar indicates the number of selected items.

Search

The user can search items.

Guidelines

List Options

If you need to indicate that none of the selection options are selected, or you need to allow the user not to select an option, provide (None) as an option and place it at the beginning of the list.

If you need to indicate that all items apply (for example, as a list filter), provide All as an option and place it at the beginning of the list.

Select list with '(None)'
Select list with '(None)'

Search Behavior

Two types of search behavior are available:

(1) A live search, also known as “search-as-you-type” (property: liveChange), which is triggered by each character that the user enters or deletes.

(2) A manual search, which is triggered explicitly after the user enters text in the search field and clicks or taps the Search icon or presses the ENTER key.

Although app developers need to decide themselves which search to use, we recommend implementing the live search whenever possible. Use the manual search only if the amount of data is too large and your app would otherwise run into performance issues. For more information, check out the article on search.

Remember Selections

If your use case requires selections in a dialog to be remembered so that the user can make corrections, you can set the rememberSelections function in the select dialog to ‘true’. When users exit the dialog by clicking or tapping Cancel, the selection is restored to the state it was in when the dialog was opened.

Selection is remembered after the dialog is reopened
Selection is remembered after the dialog is reopened

Once the dialog is closed, the selection is reset by default. This allows users to make a new selection when they reopen the dialog. This functionality makes sense, for example, when users need to add multiple items to a table.

Selection is reset after the dialog is closed
Selection is reset after the dialog is closed

Info Bar

In multi-selection mode, an info bar shows the number of selected items. Use the following format:

Selected: [Business Objects] Selected: [Number of Items]
Example: Products Selected: 2

Note that the info bar is not “sticky”. When the user scrolls down the list, the info bar scrolls off the screen.

“Clear” Button

The Clear button allows users to clear all the selected items. By default, the button is not shown. To display the button, set the showClearButton property to “true”.

Select dialog with 'Clear' button
Select dialog with 'Clear' button

Content

By default, the select dialog comes with a growing feature (property: growing = true). We recommend disabling the growing feature and setting this property to “false”. This ensures that all items in the table are loaded at once, and that the “Items selected” count, the search, and select/deselect features all work properly.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

  • No links

Table Select Dialog

Table select is a commonly-used dialog that helps users to make a selection from a comprehensive table containing multiple attributes or values. With the dialog, users are also able to access additional information about the objects in the table without needing to select them first.

The dialog provides a responsive table layout with additional search, filter, and selection functionalities in the header. A footer toolbar provides actions for canceling or confirming the process.

Usage

Use the table select dialog if:

  • You need to help users select one or more items from a comprehensive list that contains multiple attributes or values.

Do not use the table select dialog if:

  • You need to help users pick one item from a predefined set of options that contains only one value. In this case, use the dropdown box instead.
  • You need to help users with query-based range selection and enhanced filter options. In this case, use the value help dialog instead.
  • Your use case requires tabs, filters, or actions in a select dialog.In this case, use a standard dialog instead.
  • Your use case only requires filtering without selection. In this case, use the filter toolbar instead.
Information
For more information on which selection control to choose, see the selection control overview.

Responsiveness

The table inside the table select dialog behaves like the responsive table. On smaller screens, the columns wrap and build a list that shows all the information. All other elements in the control are also responsive.

On bigger screens, the table select dialog also provides columns
On bigger screens, the table select dialog also provides columns
The table in the dialog is responsive and wraps on smaller screens to show a list
The table in the dialog is responsive and wraps on smaller screens to show a list

Behavior and Interaction

The table select dialog can be called up from any control. The trigger is usually a button with a selection icon in an input field, or an Add button in a toolbar.

Triggers

Input Trigger

This trigger can be useful if users need to select, for example, one customer from a large customer register.

Example of a trigger: the selection icon in the input field
Example of a trigger: the selection icon in the input field

“Add” Button

This trigger can be useful if users need to add an item to a list. For example, the dialog could help users select the product from a large product catalog. Clicking Select in the footer toolbar of the dialog adds the selected products to the list.

“Clear” Button

The Clear button allows users to clear all the selected items.

Example of a trigger: 'Add' button in a table
Example of a trigger: 'Add' button in a table

Sticky Header

The column headers and info toolbar in the table select dialog are “sticky”, which means that they stay fixed on top when scrolling (sap.m.Table, property: sticky).

Information
The “sticky” feature has some browser limitations, and is not supported in Internet Explorer and in Microsoft Edge versions older than 41. In these browsers, the headers of the table select dialog will not be sticky.
Example of sticky headers
Example of sticky headers

 

Single Select

The single-select version does not need a Select button in the footer toolbar because the selected entry is taken over and closed as soon as a user selects an item from the table. If applicable, the entry is displayed in the field from which the dialog was triggered. Alternatively, a toast message can be shown if necessary.

Multi-Select

The multi-select version of the table select dialog provides checkboxes for users to choose multiple items. The blue info bar above the table indicates the number of selected items. The selection is taken over when the user closes the dialog via the Select button in the footer toolbar. Clicking or tapping Cancel closes the dialog without taking over the selected values.

Remembering Selections

If selections need to be memorized in order to help users make corrections, you can set the RememberSelections property to true. This restores the selection to the state it was in when the dialog was last opened as soon as users exit the dialog via Select or Cancel. The interaction flow of the RememberSelections property is shown and explained in the select dialog article.

Grouping

The list can also be displayed as grouped. Group headers divide the table into segments. A pregrouped table is useful for tables with many entries, which can be sorted by a single attribute.

A responsive table with group headers
A responsive table with group headers

Guidelines

Set the information provided in the table select dialog from top to bottom as follows:

Dialog Header

Use the following format for the dialog header:

  • For single selection: Select [Business Object]
    Example: Select Product
  • For multiple selection: Select [Business Objects]
    Example: Select Products.

Search

The first interactive element in the dialog is a standard search field. Two types of search behavior are available:

  • live search, also known as “search-as-you-type,” which is triggered by each character that the user enters or deletes.
  • A manual search, which is triggered explicitly after the user enters text in the search field and clicks or taps theSearch icon or presses the ENTER key. As soon as the user hits the Search button, a Delete icon appears at the end of the input field to delete the keyword and cancel the result list.

App developers need to decide which search to use. We recommend implementing the live search whenever possible. Use the manual search only if the amount of data is too large and if your app would otherwise run into performance issues. For more information, check out the article on searching.

Info Bar

In multi-selection mode, an info bar shows the number of selected items. Use the following format:

[Business Objects] Selected: [Number of Items]
Example: Products Selected: 2

“Clear” Button

The “Clear” button for clearing all the selected items is optional. By default, the button is not shown. To display the button, set the showClearButton property to “true”.

Content

The content area provides a table. This behaves like the responsive table, so the columns wrap on smaller screens and display a list.

By default, the table select comes with a growing feature (property: growing = true). We recommend disabling the growing feature and setting this property to “false”. This ensures that all items in the table are loaded at once, and that the “Items selected” count, the search, and select/deselect features all work properly.

Footer Toolbar

In the multi-select version, the footer toolbar contains the Select and Cancel buttons. Select takes over the selection, while Cancel resets the selection to the state it was in when the user opened the dialog.

In the single-select version, only provide Cancel in the footer toolbar because the dialog takes over the selection as soon as the user chooses one.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Standard List Item

The standard list item is used for less complex datasets, such as when the user selects an item in a dialog. It consists of an optional image, a title, description, and a single info text, which can contain semantic information.

Standard list item
Standard list item

Usage

Use the standard list item if:

  • You want to display a simple set of data within a select dialog.
  • You want to display a simple set of data in the master list which does not involve objects. (For objects, you should use the object list item.)

Responsiveness

The standard list item can contain an icon (in the form of an image or from the SAP icon font), a title (left-aligned), a short description (left-aligned below the title), and a semantic info text (right-aligned next to the description).

The title and description can wrap. The semantic info text does not wrap or truncate.

Standard list item with semantic colored info
Standard list item with semantic colored info

By default, the title font is larger if the description is empty. If you have list items with and without a description, this results in differently sized titles, which makes it harder to read. In this case, you should switch off the title size adaptation (AdaptTitleSize).

Standard list item with image and adapted title
Standard list item with image and adapted title

Behavior and Interaction

List item behavior and interaction is similar for all list item variants and is therefore described in the list overview article.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Toolbar Overview

The toolbar enables the user to change the UI or trigger an action. For example, the toolbar allows the user to change views, manipulate data or objects, navigate to another page, perform generic actions, and so on.

This article gives an overview of what kind of different toolbars exist and when to use which one.

Information
With SAPUI5 version 1.40, the floating footer toolbar was introduced to improve the legibility and general clarity of the page. It is slightly transparent, showing underlying content. The floating footer property is activated at page level and not at the floating footer itself.

Actions and Layout

Actions can be used as follows:

  • They can be independent of the current selection and not related to a specific item or object. (1)
  • They can be specific to the current object (user selects one item). (2)
  • They can apply to a set of items (user selects two or more items). (3)
  • They can control the settings of the UI, which affects all items. (4)
Types of actions
Types of actions

Sort your buttons according to their importance for the user, with the most frequently-used action first and the most seldom-used action last. All buttons go into the overflow from right to left, thus ensuring that the most important buttons are the last to be moved into the overflow menu.

The toolbar is mostly used for buttons (with an icon or text) and should be right-aligned.

Responsiveness

To enable responsiveness, use the OverflowToolbar control. Based on the sap.m.Toolbar control, the OverflowToolbar control is a container that provides overflow when its content does not fit in the visible area. Controls that can overflow include the segmented button, select, toggle button, checkbox, input, search field, combo box, and date/time input.

Only allow important actions to shrink and stay outside the overflow. The app team itself must decide which actions it considers to be sufficiently important.

The height of the toolbar changes on desktops (compact mode), tablets, and smartphones (cozy mode). For more information, see the article on content density.

Responsive table toolbar – Size S
Responsive table toolbar – Size S
Responsive table toolbar – Size L
Responsive table toolbar – Size L

Behavior and Interaction

App teams should implement overflow behavior to ensure that all actions can be accessed at any time. Buttons are sorted by usage, with the most frequently used action first (on the left) and the most seldom-used action last (on the right). This ensures that the most important buttons are the last to be moved into the overflow menu. Our general guideline is to use only icon buttons or text buttons. Do not combine an icon and text into one button. Buttons are always right-aligned.

Overflow (Generic)

The overflow should be activated either when there is not enough space for all actions, or if some actions are less important than others. In this case, the app team might decide to have certain actions only appear in the overflow. Furthermore, the app team can also decide that some (important) actions should never be moved into the overflow.

When you implement the overflow toolbar, the overflow behavior is generated automatically. Since release 1.30, new features have been added to the overflow toolbar. The  “” (overflow) button is now a toggle button and can be used to switch the overflow menu on and off.

The user clicks or taps the overflow button to open a popover. In this action sheet, all icon buttons are labeled with text and the user can overflow the following controls:

All buttons go into the overflow from right to the left. This ensures that the most important buttons are the last to be moved into the overflow menu.

The sap.m.ToolbarSeparator can also go into the overflow. The separator then changes from a vertical line into a horizontal line. If the control happens to be the first or the last item of the overflow area, the separator isn’t displayed.

Prioritization

You can also prioritize the actions in the toolbar by applying one of five statuses:

  • Always overflow: The action always goes into the overflow.
  • Disappear: An action that is not so relevant for the user can disappear if the space is limited (for example, a title).
  • Low: Assign the priority “Low” to an action if the user seldom needs it; this action will overflow first.
  • High: Actions set to “High” remain visible in the toolbar until all lower-priority actions have moved to the overflow. Lower-priority actions are those with the priorities “Disappear” or “Low”, and all unprioritized actions.
  • Never overflow: These actions are always visible in the toolbar.

The priority of each item is high by default. If two items have equal priority, the item on the right side overflows first.

Grouping

Items can overflow together even if they are in different positions. This can be achieved using the group property in the overflow toolbar layout data. When the value of the property is 0, the element does not belong to any group. When two or more elements are given the same property value, they belong to the same group and will go into the overflow together. Elements that belong to a group are not allowed to have “always overflow” or “never overflow” as priorities, since these priorities force the items to remain either in the toolbar or in the overflow area. When group elements have different priorities, the priority of the group is defined by the maximum priority of its elements.

Table toolbar on desktop without overflow
Table toolbar on desktop without overflow
Table toolbar on smartphone with overflow
Table toolbar on smartphone with overflow
Table toolbar on smartphone with open overflow
Table toolbar on smartphone with open overflow

Styles

The footer toolbar has a dark background, while header and content toolbars have a transparent style. Buttons are always transparent. Semantic and emphasized buttons are reserved for key actions, which can appear in the header, content, or footer toolbars.

Apply the following rules for emphasized and semantic buttons:

  • Use a maximum of 1 emphasized button per toolbar.
  • Never mix emphasized and semantic buttons.
  • Ideally, there should be only one emphasized action per page. There can be valid exceptions, but we generally recommend using only one emphasized button.
  • For more information, see Buttons.

The toolbar style is an enumeration with two properties: Standard (default) and Clear.

  • Standard style results in linear design (with border) and is intended for standalone usage of the toolbar.
  • Clear style appears as a plain color without borders. This style visually groups the toolbar with a nearby control or controls.

The toolbar style property is combined with the toolbar design property to create various visual styles.

Types

A variety of toolbars exist for different use cases (see examples below). The following types are used:

  • Header toolbar: Contains global actions that are important for the whole page
  • Footer toolbar: Contains only closing and finalizing actions
  • Table toolbar: Toolbar that is positioned above a table and contains table-specific actions
  • Chart toolbar: Toolbar that is positioned above a chart and contains chart-specific actions
  • Infobar: Blue toolbar that indicates what filters have been set, and how many items have been selected
Header Toolbar with Edit and Delete Action
Header Toolbar with Edit and Delete Action
Footer toolbar with transparent standard buttons and emphasized
Footer toolbar with transparent standard buttons and emphasized
Table toolbar with title, show items, sort, group and settings
Table toolbar with title, show items, sort, group and settings
Chart toolbar with perspective switch, legend, zoom, full screen, view switch
Chart toolbar with perspective switch, legend, zoom, full screen, view switch
Infobar in filtered master list
Infobar in filtered master list

Guidelines

Order of Buttons

To provide a consistent user experience for each app, we highly recommend using the following alignment for generic actions:

  • All buttons are right-aligned.
  • Text buttons should be grouped together, as should icon buttons.
  • Place semantic buttons side by side (for example, Accept and Reject).
  • App-specific text-only buttons and generic text-only buttons can be combined and arranged in a sequence defined by the app team. Remember to place the most frequently-used actions furthest to the left of the group of buttons. This ensures that these actions are the last to be moved into the overflow menu or are visible at all times.

General Guidelines

  • Do not overload the toolbar with actions.
  • Place actions as close to the corresponding content as possible.
  • Place commands in the same location throughout the app. Each page should contain only the commands that are relevant to that page. If commands are shared between pages, they should be placed as close to the same location as possible on each page so that users can predict where the commands can be found when navigating.
  • Separate navigation and commands. Place commands as close to their corresponding items as possible.
  • Do not place Settings, Logout, or other account management commands in the footer toolbar. All these actions are shown in the Me Area.
  • Use only icon buttons or text buttons. Do not combine an icon and text into one button. Buttons are always right-aligned.
  • If you want to group buttons, use a menu button.
  • Actions that impact the entire page are placed in the header area.
  • Only closing or finalizing actions are placed in the footer toolbar (for example, Submit or Post).

UI Text Guidelines

Use tooltips such as Sort, Filter, and Group to label the icons in the footer toolbar. In the case of Sort, Group, and Filter, use the following text for the no selection made option:

  • (Not sorted)

Note: In most cases, (Not sorted) is not necessary. Simply show the default sort settings instead:

  • (Not filtered)
  • (Not grouped)

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Footer Toolbar

The footer toolbar always appears as floating footer at the bottom of the screen. The floating footer property creates some padding between screen and toolbar, improving visibility.

The control is used for closing or finalizing actions that impact the whole page. It is only visible when actions appear, when message handling is visible, or when the draft indicator is displayed. One main advantage of the footer bar is that this bar is always visible and will not scroll away.

Our general guideline is to use only icon buttons or text buttons. Icon and text should not be combined into one button. Buttons are always right-aligned.

Buttons are sorted from frequently-used to seldom-used. This ensures that the most important buttons will go into the overflow last.

Usage

Use the footer toolbar:

  • If you have closing or finalizing actions on your page that apply to the whole page.

Do not use the footer toolbar:

  • If you have different containers on your page (such as charts, tables, and forms) and the action influences only certain items. In this case, place the action as close to the corresponding item(s) as possible.
  • If you have global actions (such as Edit or Delete) that are not finalizing or closing actions. In this case, use the header toolbar instead.

Responsiveness

To enable responsiveness, use the OverflowToolbar control. For more information, please refer to the corresponding section in the toolbar overview article.

The height of the toolbar changes on desktops (compact mode), tablets, and smartphones (cozy mode). For more information about cozy and compact modes, see content density.

Footer toolbar - Size S
Footer toolbar - Size S
Footer toolbar - Size M
Footer toolbar - Size M
Footer toolbar - Size L
Footer toolbar - Size L

Components

The footer toolbar can contain the following components:

  • Message indicator
  • Draft indicator
  • Finalizing/closing actions
Examples of possible components
Examples of possible components

All closing or finalizing actions are placed on the right side of the toolbar.

The footer toolbar can also include a message and draft indicator. For more information, see draft handling and messaging.

Behavior and Interaction

Our general guideline is to use only icon buttons or text buttons. Icon and text should not be combined into one button. Buttons are always right-aligned.

The buttons are sorted from frequently-used to seldom-used. This ensures that the most important buttons will go into the overflow last.

Styles

  • Use button styles only if they help the user, and not for decoration.
  • Use them for the most common actions, such as Save.
  • Use a positive/negative style (property: typeaccept or reject) or an emphasized style (property: type emphasized).
  • Use only one emphasized button per toolbar and never mix emphasized and semantic buttons.
    Exception: Additional messaging button for the message popover

For more information, see Button.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

View Settings Dialog

The view settings dialog helps the user to sort, filter, or group data within a (master) list or a table. The dialog is triggered by icon buttons in the table toolbar.

Usage

Use the view settings dialog if:

  • You need to allow the user to sort line items in a manageable list or table (up to about 20 columns).
  • You need to offer custom filter settings in a manageable list or table (up to about 20 columns).
  • You need to allow the user to group line items in a manageable list or table (up to about 20 columns).

Do not use the view settings dialog if:

  • You have complex tables (more than about 20 columns).
  • You need to rearrange columns within your table. Use the table personalization dialog instead.
  • You need very specific sort, filter, or column sorting options within complex tables. Use the P13n dialog instead.

Button Placement

For sorting, filtering, and grouping, place the corresponding icon button for each function directly in the toolbar.

Do not place sort, filter, or group buttons in the footer toolbar if they refer to a table.

For detailed information about where to place the sort, filter, and group buttons, see Sort, Filter, Group (Generic) in the table toolbar article.

Sort, Group, and Filter a List

You can also offer the view setting features for a list.

Responsiveness

The popover dialog appears as a modal window on desktop and tablet screen sizes, but full screen on smartphones.

The view settings dialog is a composite control that consists of a modal dialog with a maximum of three tabs with lists of attributes. Each helps the user to either sort, filter, or group a table or list. If the use case requires only a sort feature, for example, you can hide the filter and group tabs.

The dialog is triggered by the icon button in the table header
The dialog is triggered by the icon button in the table header
View settings dialog - Size S
View settings dialog - Size S
View settings dialog - Size M
View settings dialog - Size M
View settings dialog - Size L
View settings dialog - Size L

Behavior and Interaction

The sort, filter, and group features can all be applied to a table simultaneously.

Sort

The first tab in the view settings dialog is the sort feature. The tab shows a standard sort icon with two arrows – one pointing up, and one pointing down (see image above).

The sort dialog shows two groups of sort settings. The first group offers general Ascending and Descending sort options. The second group offers attributes that fit the use case, such as Product, Supplier, Weight, or Price. The attributes can match the table columns, but because a table column can also contain several data points, such as “Name” and “Surname”, the attributes allow an attribute to be shown for each data point.

The user select attributes using the radio buttons. Clicking or tapping OK closes the dialog and shows the table items in the selected order.

Filter

The second tab in the View Settings dialog is the filter feature. The tab shows a filter, which is the standard filter icon. The filter tab can offer a single filter selection list, a multi-filter selection list, or a category list. The category list provides an overview, and allows the user to drill down to detailed filter selection lists.

The dialog for choosing a category from the filter tab drills down to the filter settings.
The dialog for choosing a category from the filter tab drills down to the filter settings.
The dialog after choosing a general filter category (here: Weight). You can refine the filter further by selecting subcategories.
The dialog after choosing a general filter category (here: Weight). You can refine the filter further by selecting subcategories.
A table view filtered by 'Weight'. The info bar shows the filter setting.
A table view filtered by 'Weight'. The info bar shows the filter setting.

Filter Selection List – Single Selection

The dialog offers one single-selection list with radio buttons to select a filter. This list is useful for offering a list of preconfigured filters for a specific use, such as “Products with numbers ‘starting between 100 and 200’ with status ‘in stock’ and color ‘green’”.

Filter Selection List – Multi-Selection

You can also offer a filter selection list as a multi-selection list. In this case, the user can choose, for example, all “green” and “red” products.

Selection of multiple filters
Selection of multiple filters

Category List

The filter dialog shows a single list of general filter categories depending on the use case, like Price or Height. The user chooses a category by clicking or tapping the list item, such as Price. As this is a simple drilldown, these categories do not offer radio buttons. The dialog shows a list of filter settings in the Price category. Optional filters here, such as Less than 100, depend on the use case. The user chooses a filter setting by selecting one of the radio buttons offered in this list. Clicking or tapping OK closes the dialog and shows the table items filtered by the selected attribute. The info bar shows which filter has been set.

Free-Form Apps

You can also customize your own filter UIs, for example, to support date picking.

Filter Values

Filters can correspond to single values as well as groups, such as “<100.00 EUR”.

Filter Reset

The refresh button on the filter tab resets all filter settings.

Removing Filters

Be sure to offer an entry such as Not Filtered in a single-selection list. This enables users to remove a set filter.

Group

The third tab in the view settings dialog is the group feature. The tab shows an icon with lines in square brackets, which is the standard group icon.

The group dialog shows two groups of attributes. The first group offers a general Ascending or Descending order, which allows the user to select the order in which the defined groups appear. The second group offers attributes that fit the use case, such as Type or Supplier.

You can also offer an attribute like Price to group data in a table.

The user uses the radio buttons or selects checkboxes to choose attributes. Clicking or tapping OK closes the dialog and shows the table with items grouped below headers.

Dialog for choosing an attribute from the group tab
Dialog for choosing an attribute from the group tab
A table view grouped by supplier – Group headers divide the list
A table view grouped by supplier – Group headers divide the list

Naming Group Headers

Be sure to name the group headers as follows: Category Name: Value/Range. For example, Category: Accessories, or Supplier: Red Point Stores.

Guidelines

For opening the dialog from a table toolbar, use different buttons for each function (sort, filter, group). With each button, open the View Settings dialog with just the corresponding tab.

If possible, give users the option not to filter or group. For sorting, this is only necessary if the use case calls for an unsorted list. In all three cases, show this option as the first entry in the list of criteria (remember to include the brackets):

  • (Not Sorted)
  • (Not Filtered)
  • (Not Grouped)

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Select

The select control (also known as a dropdown) is commonly used to enable users to select an item from a predefined list.

Usage

Use select if:

  • Users need to select one item exclusively from a short list of options (for example, fewer than 12 items).
  • The values of the option list are of secondary importance and do not need to be displayed right away.

Do not use select if:

  • Users need to choose between two options, such as On or Off and Yes or No. In this case, consider using a switch control instead.
  • Users need to pick one item from a very large set of options. In this case, consider using the combo box instead.
  • You need to display more than one attribute. In this case, consider using the input field with a select dialog or a value help dialog instead.
  • The user needs to search on multiple attributes. In this case, consider using the input field with select dialog or value help dialog instead.
  • Your use case requires all available options to be displayed right away, without any user interaction. In this case, consider using radio buttons or a radio button group instead.
Information
For more information on which selection control to choose, see the selection control overview.

Responsiveness

The display of the select control depends on the device. On smartphones, the selection list takes up the whole screen. On desktop and tablet devices, it appears as a popover.

Size S

Select option list in full screen - Size S
Select option list in full screen - Size S

Size M

Select option list – The option list opens above the field if there is not enough space below it - Size M
Select option list – The option list opens above the field if there is not enough space below it - Size M

Size L

Select option list – The option list opens above the field if there is not enough space below it - Size L
Select option list – The option list opens above the field if there is not enough space below it - Size L

Layout

The select control can be placed in toolbars, such as chart toolbarsfooter toolbars, or header toolbars, as well as in forms or tables:

Components

Select Trigger

The trigger to open the option list is either the Select field (1), which also displays the current selection, or an icon (3).

Option List

The option list (2) displays all the items available to the user. The selection is always highlighted. Selecting another option from the list moves the highlight to the selected option.

Full Screen Title Bar for Size S

Opening the select control on a smartphone brings up the option list in full screen mode. The full screen mode can be closed using the icon on the top right corner (5).

You need to set a title for the full screen mode (4). We recommend the following format:

Single selection

Select [Entity]

Example: Select Product

Multi-selection

Select [Entities]

Example: Select Products

 

Anatomy of the select control
Anatomy of the select control
Anatomy of the select control - Size S
Anatomy of the select control - Size S

Behavior and Interaction

Clicking/Tapping

The Select field always displays the current selection. The user clicks or taps the field to display a list of options to choose from. Once the user selects an option, the list box closes and the selected option is displayed in the field. If there is no Select field but an icon, the user clicks the icon to open the list of options. The currently selected item is always highlighted in the list to help the user identify what has been selected.

Guidelines

Option List

The option list can contain either text-only values (a) or text values with an icon in front (b). Keep the text values as short as possible because the list uses single lines only. Values that are too long may be truncated. This is especially important when you use icons.

Only use icons if they help users better identify or understand the presented options. To set icons, use the icon property for each list entry.

If you need to indicate that none of the selection options are selected, or you need to allow the user not to select an option, provide (None) (1) as an option and place it at the beginning of the list.

If you need to indicate that all items apply, for example, as a list filter, provide All as an option and place it at the beginning of the list.

If your use case requires a blank input field instead of (None), use a combo box instead.

If the select control is placed in a toolbar with an icon as a trigger for sorting, grouping or filtering a set of items, consider the following guideline:

Sort, Group, and Filter:

  • (Not sorted)
    Note: In most cases, this option is not necessary; just show the default sort settings instead.
  • (Not filtered)
  • (Not grouped)

For more information about the toolbar, see toolbar overview.

Define a default selection whenever possible (2). If the selected item is not specified, the first one is selected.

(a) Text-only version; (b) icon and text
(a) Text-only version; (b) icon and text
(1) Selection option list with (None); (2) first value selected
(1) Selection option list with (None); (2) first value selected

Label

The select control can be displayed with or without a label. If the field is attached to another field, you do not need to define a second label.

Information

Do not provide a blank value to indicate that nothing is selected.

Sorting

The sort option list contains all the items that are available to the user. Choose one of the following styles to order the content:

Logical: Sort items into a meaningful order. Group related options together and show the most common options first, followed by less common options. Sort the options alphabetically if more than eight select options are available. This helps the user find the right option quickly.

Example of logical sorting
Example of logical sorting

Alphabetical: Sort currencies, names, and similar content alphabetically.

Example of alphabetical sorting
Example of alphabetical sorting

Numeric: Sort numeric values into a sequential order, with the lowest number first.

Example of numeric sorting
Example of numeric sorting

Chronological: Sort time-related information into chronological order, with the most recent first.

Example of chronological sorting
Example of chronological sorting

Width

You can adjust the width of the option list to some extent. The width of the select control is set to Auto by default, while the maximum width is set to 100%. The option list adapts its length to the longest entry by default.

The select control is usually used in forms, where the width is determined by the form element or container in which the select control is embedded. Therefore, we do not recommend defining a fixed width, but rather working with proper layout containers, like the form, simple form, or responsive grid layout, and with the layout data property, where the width is defined.

If you need to restrict the width to a defined value, set the width accordingly.

Do not allow the control to auto-adjust based on the selection.

Keep in mind that there is no horizontal scrolling in the option list. Entries in the list that are too long are truncated and users will not be able to read them.

Information
If localized text is not an issue, such as with currency codes, consider using a smaller width.

Unit of Measurement

You can use the layout options of the form to can add the unit of measurement (UoM) after select. Apps can use the label-field ratio to show the UoM after the field. However, you must make sure that the UoM is properly visualized and doesn’t wrap to the next row.

Developer Hint

For accessibility purposes, you can use “ariaDescribedBy” from the input control.

Semantic Colors

Different value states or meanings can be indicated by using semantic colors. The visual states are shown below in their regular state (left) and focused (right). Note that the positive/success state does not show a message on focus.

For more details on the correct usage, see How To Use Semantic Colors.

Neutral
Neutral
Neutral (focus)
Neutral (focus)
Information
Information
Information (focus)
Information (focus)
Success
Success
Success (focus)
Success (focus)
Error
Error
Error (focus)
Error (focus)
Warning
Warning
Warning (focus)
Warning (focus)

Value State Text

The select control can display the value state text even if the dropdown is open. This ensures that the value states are shown in all situations and on all devices. When the user opens the dropdown, the value state sticks to the top and does not scroll away. The control also supports multi-line text for the value state.

Value state text displayed when the dropdown is open
Value state text displayed when the dropdown is open

Read-Only

The select control can be displayed as read-only (property: editable, default = “true”). If the editable property is set to “false”, interaction with the control is disabled. The control remains focusable, but the background and border are changed to indicate that it is read-only.

Select read-only
Select read-only

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Multi-Combo Box

The multi-combo box control is commonly used to enable users to select one or more options from a predefined list. The control provides an editable input field to filter the list, and a dropdown arrow to open the list of available options. The select options in the list have checkboxes that permit multi-selection.

Usage

Use the multi-combo box if:

  • The user needs to select one or more options from a long list of options (maximum of approximately 200).
  • The values of the option list contain secondary information that does not need to be displayed right away.

Do not use the multi-combo box if:

  • The user needs to choose between two options, such as ON or OFF and YES or NO. In this case, consider using a switch control instead.
  • You need to display more than one attribute. In this case, consider using the select dialog or value help dialog instead.
  • The user needs to search on multiple attributes. In this case, consider using the select dialog or value help dialog instead.
  • Your use case requires all available options to be displayed right away, without any user interaction. In this case, consider using checkboxes instead.
  • You want to enable users to add custom values. In this case, consider using the multi-input field.
  • Your use case requires more options to choose from. In this case, consider using the multi-input field, either with the select dialog or value help dialog (for more than 1000 items).
Information
For more information on which selection control to choose, see the selection control overview.

Responsiveness

The multi-combo box is optimized for keyboard and mouse interaction.

Size S

 Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size S
Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size S
Option list in full screen - Size S
Option list in full screen - Size S

Size M

Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size M
Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size M

Size L

Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size L
Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size L

Also see the section on behavior for mobile devices.

Components

Input Field

The input field (2) can display a placeholder text (6) when it’s empty, or a token (1) if a value is selected.

Dropdown Trigger

The dropdown button (3) collapses and expands the dropdown list.

Option List

The option list (7) contains a list of selectable options (5). Clicking the label of for an entry closes the option list and creates a token for the selected option. To enable multi-selection, every entry also has a checkbox (4). Clicking a checkbox creates a token. The option list remains open.

Components of the multi-combo box
Components of the multi-combo box

Two-Column Layout

Use the multi-combo box with a two-column layout if you need to display additional information for the selection options, such as currencies, country abbreviations, or system abbreviations.

Multi-combo box with a two-column layout
Multi-combo box with a two-column layout

Behavior and Interaction

Select a Value

There are three ways to select an item from the list:

  • Tick the checkbox (option list remains open).
  • Click or tap the label of a select option (option list is closed).
  • Use the keyboard (spacebar or Enter).

The user clicks or taps the input field to place the cursor in the field (1). Clicking the arrow displays the list (2). As the user types into the input field, the list is filtered accordingly (3). The up and down arrows move the focus within the list (4), while the typed text remains in the input field. Selected options are automatically entered into the input field as tokens (5).

If the user selects items from the filtered option list (3) by clicking or tapping the checkbox or by pressing the spacebar of the keyboard, the text entered in input field remains. The option list stays open. If the user selects items by clicking or tapping the label or by pressing Enter, the entered text is cleared and the option list is closed.

Input Field

Any character in the input field acts as a filter for the option list. The input field only allows users to type text that matches the items in the list. If the user tries to enter character combinations that are not in the option list, visual feedback is provided to indicate that the combination of characters is invalid, while the input field suppresses the characters entered.

Behavior - Sizes M and L
Behavior - Sizes M and L

Choose from Option List

The option list displays all the available items that the user can choose from. Clicking the arrow opens the option list below the field. If there is not enough space to display the dropdown list below the field, it is displayed above the field instead.

Reviewing Tokens

If tokens have been selected, and the multi-combo box is not in focus, the input field displays as many tokens as possible in the available space. If more tokens have been selected, an [n] More label indicates the number of hidden tokens. The tokens in the input field appear in the order in which they were selected.

Clicking or tapping the [n] More label opens a popover below the input field, in which all selected items are shown. The user can deselect an item by clicking or tapping its checkbox or label.

Multi-combo box - n More
Multi-combo box - n More

If the length of the last selected token exceeds the width of the input field, a label [n] Item/s is shown when the field is not in focus.

Clicking or tapping the [n] Item/s label opens a popover below the input field, in which all selected items are shown. The user can deselect an item by clicking or tapping its checkbox or label.

Multi-combo box - '1 Item' label (desktop)
Multi-combo box - '1 Item' label (desktop)
Multi-combo box - 'n Items' label (Desktop)
Multi-combo box - 'n Items' label (Desktop)

Filtering the Option List

When the user starts typing in the input field, the option list is filtered. Only items that match the characters entered are shown in the dropdown list. The default filtering method is “starts with per term”, which matches the beginning of each word in an item’s text.

In addition, application developers can set a custom filtering method “starts with” or “contains” (method: setFilterFunction). The “starts with” approach filters only for items where the beginning of the label matches the query entered. The “Contains” approach searches the full label for a match.

As a visual hint for the user, the matched characters are highlighted in the option list items. The highlighting works on the basis of “starts with per term”, regardless of the filtering method.

If the filtered option list contains items that start with the characters entered by the user, the first matching, unselected item is auto-completed in the input field.

Multi-combo box - Default filtering and auto-complete
Multi-combo box - Default filtering and auto-complete

Grouping

Option list items can be grouped. Visually, the group header is a separate line above the items it groups. It does not currently provide an interaction of its own.

Multi-combo box - Grouping (desktop)
Multi-combo box - Grouping (desktop)
Multi-combo box - Grouping (mobile, Size S)
Multi-combo box - Grouping (mobile, Size S)

Behavior for Mobile Devices

The following sections describe how the multi-combo box interacts on mobile devices.

Tapping the Arrow

Tapping the arrow opens the option list in a full screen dialog (1) with a title displayed in the header (2). The Close button (3) closes the dialog and cancels any selection changes in the option list. Clicking the label of an entry (4) closes the option list and creates a token of the selected option. By selecting a checkbox (5), the option list remains open and allows multi-selection. The OK button (6) takes over the selection and closes the dialog.

Left: Filter bar with multi-combo box; Right: Full screen multi-combo box selection
Left: Filter bar with multi-combo box; Right: Full screen multi-combo box selection
Developer Hint

The title of the full-screen dialog could be customized by adding a label as ariaLabelledBy to the multi-combo box. If no label is associated with the multi-combo box, the default title “Select” is set.

As the user types into the input field (7), the list is filtered using the default “starts with per term” approach. Pressing the button next to the input field (8) toggles the view between all options and the selected options only.

Left: Option list, filtered by user input; Right: Selected options from the list
Left: Option list, filtered by user input; Right: Selected options from the list

Input Field on Collapsed List

If items have already been selected, the input field remains functional and the tokens remain visible (1). Tapping the Remove icon   in a token removes it (2). When the user taps on the input field, the list opens in full screen (3). Tapping the input field sets the focus on it (4) and the mobile device keyboard opens (5). When the user starts typing, the list is filtered (6) using the “starts with per term” approach. The input field only lets the user type characters that match the items in the list.

Left: Multi-combo box with token in the input field; Right: List for selection filtered by a character
Left: Multi-combo box with token in the input field; Right: List for selection filtered by a character

Multiple Selected Items

Not all the selected tokens can be displayed at the same time because the space is limited to the size of the input field (6). Swiping to the side scrolls horizontally to reveal a cropped token (7).

Swiping to display tokens
Swiping to display tokens

Copying and Pasting Data from a Spreadsheet or Text File

The control for the multi-combo box can handle paste actions containing, for example, multiple items that have been selected in a column of a spreadsheet or text file. The user simply selects an entire column in the spreadsheet and copies it. When items are entered into the multi-combo box, the user just pastes them from the clipboard and each item is then represented as a token. Only items that are part of the list are displayed as tokens.

Information
For information on how to manage leading and trailing whitespace (blanks) when copying and pasting text into input controls, please see removing leading and trailing whitespace.

Styles

The following images show how the states of the multi-combo box are styled.

Unselected
Unselected
Unselected with predefined placeholder
Unselected with predefined placeholder
Unselected on hover
Unselected on hover
In focus
In focus
Expanded
Expanded
Hover highlighting in list
Hover highlighting in list
Expanded selection
Expanded selection
Expanded multi-selection
Expanded multi-selection
Selected items shown as tokens
Selected items shown as tokens
Error
Error
Warning
Warning
Success
Success
Information
Information

For more information on how to use the different semantic states of the control, see How to Use Semantic Colors.

Guidelines

Label

The multi-combo box control can be displayed with or without a label. If the field is attached to another field, you don’t need to define a second label. For more information about labels in SAP Fiori, see the label guidelines.

Placeholder

Don’t use the placeholder attribute as an alternative to a label. This is important because the placeholder text will be overwritten as soon as the form is filled out. Labels are necessary because they indicate the meaning of the form fields if the placeholders are no longer visible. Show a placeholder only if the user needs a hint about what data to enter. Don’t repeat the content of the label. A hint could be a sample value or a brief description of the expected format. For more information about how to use the placeholder, see input field.

Option List

Keep the label of an entry in the select option list as short as possible because the list uses single lines only. Values that are too long may be truncated. If you need to indicate that none of the selection options are selected, show a blank input field. Define a default selection whenever possible. The multi-combo box cannot display columns. If you want to show two values in the option list, show the leading information first, followed by the secondary information in parentheses, such as Walldorf (Germany).

Sorting

The option list contains all available items that the user can choose from. Choose one of the following styles depending on how you want the content to be arranged:

  • Logical: Sort items into a meaningful order. Group related options together and show the most common options first followed by less common options.
Logical multi-combo box
Logical multi-combo box
  • Alphabetical: Sort currencies, names, and so on into alphabetical order. We recommend this for lists with more than eight items.
Alphabetical multi-combo box
Alphabetical multi-combo box
  • Numeric: Sort numeric values into a sequential order with the lowest number first.
Numeric multi-combo box
Numeric multi-combo box
  • Chronological: Sort time-related information into chronological order with the most recent first (if applicable).
Chronological multi-combo box
Chronological multi-combo box

Width

You can adjust the width of the option list to some extent. The multi-combo box control is usually used in forms, where the width is determined by the form element or container in which it is embedded. Therefore, we don’t recommend defining a fixed width, but rather working with proper layout containers such as the form, simple form, or responsive grid layout, and with the layout data property, where the width is defined. If you need to restrict the width to a defined value, set the width accordingly. Keep in mind that there’s no horizontal scrolling in the option list. Entries that are too long are truncated and users won’t be able to read them.

Information
If localized text isn’t an issue, such as with currency codes, use a smaller width.

Unit of Measurement

You can use the layout options of the form to add the unit of measurement (UoM) after the multi-combo box. Apps can use the label-field ratio to show the UoM after the field. However, you must make sure that the UoM is properly visualized and doesn’t wrap to the next row.

Developer Hint

For accessibility purposes, you can use “ariaDescribedBy” from the input control.

Multi-Combo Box in a Filter Scenario

The multi-combo box can serve as a filter. For example, if the multi-combo box is offered in a table toolbar, and is empty (no tokens selected), the table shows all items. If the user selects picks something in the multi-combo box, the table shows only the matching items.

In addition, users can select or deselect all items from the option list in the multi-combo box using the keyboard. This is done by focusing somewhere in the list and pressing Ctrl+A / Ctrl+Shift+A.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Input Field

A text input field allows users to enter and edit text or numeric values in one line. To help users enter a valid value, you can enable the autocomplete suggestion feature and the value help option.

Usage

Use the input field if:

  • The user needs to enter a short, single-line text or number.
  • The user needs to enter a password, URL, phone number, or email address.
  • The user needs to select a single item from a large amount of data (for example, more than 200 items).
  • The user needs to find an object by searching for more than one attribute, such as an ID, city, and customer name. Use this control in combination with the autocomplete suggestion feature and value help option. For a small set of values (for example, fewer than 20 items), consider using the select control. Otherwise, use the combo box (for 20-200 items).

Do not use the input field if:

Information
For more information on which selection control to choose, see the selection control overview.

Responsiveness

In the examples below, the input field is shown in combination with the tabular autocomplete feature for different device sizes.

Size S (Smartphones)

Cozy mode:

When the user clicks or taps the input field, a new full screen dialog opens in which suggested items can be selected. Here, the pop-in feature of the responsive table is used.

Tabular autocomplete suggestion feature on a smartphone
Tabular autocomplete suggestion feature on a smartphone

Size M (Tablets)

Cozy mode:

The pop-in feature of the responsive table is used here, and defined columns are wrapped into a new line due to the limited space available.

Tabular autocomplete suggestion feature on a tablet
Tabular autocomplete suggestion feature on a tablet

Size L (Desktops)

Compact mode:

The full table is shown by the suggest feature.

Tabular autocomplete suggestion feature on a desktop
Tabular autocomplete suggestion feature on a desktop

Types

Six input types are currently supported (API). Be sure to select the correct type for your use case. Depending on the input type, a different keyboard layout is displayed on a mobile device (see some sample input types).

Note: The control does not provide validation based on the type. The app development team must carry out format validation. If binding is used, validation is carried out by the model, but the error handling still needs to be taken care of on the UI.

URL

Input type URL – Keyboard layout on a smartphone
Input type URL – Keyboard layout on a smartphone

Telephone Number

Input type telephone number – Keyboard layout on a smartphone
Input type telephone number – Keyboard layout on a smartphone

Password

Input type password – Keyboard layout on a smartphone
Input type password – Keyboard layout on a smartphone

Some types, such as number or telephone number, can be used together with mask input for better guidance.

Examples of input with different number masks
Examples of input with different number masks

Behavior and Interaction

Entering Text Using the Autocomplete Feature

Have a look at the interaction flow below:

Entering Text Using the Value Help Dialog

Have a look at the interaction flow below:

Information
For information on how to manage leading and trailing whitespace (blanks) when copying and pasting text into input controls, please see removing leading and trailing whitespace.

Styles

An input field can have five value states: default (neutral), warning, error, success, or information.

Default
Default
Error
Error
Information
Information
Warning
Warning
Success
Success

Properties

Value State and Value State Message

The input control offers the five value states listed below. For the error, warning, and information states you can show an additional value state text when the focus is on the input field.

  1. None (default): No value state message is shown.
  2. Warning
  3. Error
  4. Success: No value state message is shown.
  5. Information

For more guidance on when to use which state, see How to Use Semantic Colors.

Default
Default
Error
Error
Information
Information
Warning
Warning
Success
Success

Required

Use this property to indicate that user input is required. Set the property for the specific input field to ensure that the asterisk is shown in front of the label.

Required input field
Required input field

Maximum Length

Use this property to set the maximum number of characters allowed. There is no limit by default.

Placeholder

The placeholder, or input prompt, is a short hint (a word or short phrase) to help the user with data entry. A hint can be a sample value or a brief description of the expected format.

Placeholder
Placeholder

Description

You can provide an additional description on the input field, for example, for units or currency. The width of the input field and description is distributed equally by default. Although the default setting is 50%, you can change this with the fieldWidth property.

Input description
Input description

Width

The width of the input field is set to 100% by default. Input fields are usually used in forms, where the width is determined by the form element or container that the input field is embedded in. Therefore, we do not recommend defining a fixed width, but rather working with proper layout containers, like the form, simple form, and responsive grid layout, and with the layout data property, where the width is defined by the 12-column approach.

Editable and Enabled States

The input field has three states (see examples of input states):

  1. Enabled: This is the default setting.
  2. Read-only: The input field is not shown; only the value is shown. This is used in display-only forms.
  3. Disabled: The input field is shown with a visual indication that an edit is not possible, for example, due to missing editing rights.
Editable and enabled input states
Editable and enabled input states

Text Alignment

The input field offers six types of alignment for text values (API):

  • Begin
  • Center
  • End
  • Initial (default): Browser-configured alignment is used
  • Left
  • Right

Value Help

To help the user find the correct value, you can enable the value help option (propertyshowValueHelp). By enabling this option, a small value help icon is displayed in the input field on the right-hand side. Once this option is enabled, the click event can be registered and one of the following displayed:

If you want to force the user to select only existing values, you can enable the value-help-only option (see an example of the value-help-only option). In this case, the user cannot enter text in the input field. Instead, the value must be selected from the list of suggestions, or chosen using the select dialog or value help dialog.

Value help option
Value help option

The values can also be pasted into the input field by copying and pasting, or dragging and dropping, if the user prefers this. In this case, the values will be automatically transformed into conditional expressions. Example: Copying values “1234” and “5678” leads to the token generation “=1234” and “=5678”. Additionally, these values will be found within the conditions tab of the value help dialog.

Input Assistance

Intelligent systems can help users by recommending appropriate content or suggesting an action or input the user may “prefer”. The system assists the user by entering data or filtering data. Typical examples might be a search phrase suggestion, an appropriate form template, or a set of suggested default values for certain fields, based on the user input and interaction history.

For more information, see Designing Intelligent Systems – Input Assistance.

Autocomplete Suggestions

The input control offers three different types of autocomplete suggestions: single, two-value, and tabular. The width of the suggestion box and the input field are set by default, but you can change them using the maxSuggestionWidth property. The position of the suggestion box depends on the space available below the control. If there is not enough space, the suggestion box is shown above the control.

As the user types, the first suggestion item that matches the characters entered is autocompleted in the input field. The typed characters are matched against the beginning of the suggestion items, based on the “starts with” filter. The user can accept the autocompleted value by pressing ENTER. The autocomplete property is set by default if suggestions are available, but can also be switched off.

Single Value with Autocomplete

Displays a list of suggestions with one left-aligned value. As a base for the aggregation suggestionItemssap.ui.core.Item is used.

See live example of single-value autocomplete suggestions.

Single-value autocomplete suggestion feature
Single-value autocomplete suggestion feature

Two Values with Autocomplete

The two-value autocomplete suggestion feature displays two attributes of a business object, such as an ID and a name.  As a base for the aggregation of suggestionItemssap.ui.core.ListItem is used.

The text property is displayed first, and is left-aligned. The additionalText property is right-aligned. The first text property is autocompleted in the input field.

See this live example of two-value autocomplete suggestions.

Two-value autocomplete suggestion feature
Two-value autocomplete suggestion feature

Tabular Autocomplete

This autocomplete feature displays the values in a table layout. The width of the columns is distributed equally by default.

To use the tabular autocomplete feature, use the suggestionColumns aggregation to define the columns and the correct responsive behavior for the pop-in. For more information, see the article on the responsive table.

With the showTableSuggestionValueHelp property, you can offer a Show All Items button at the end of the suggest result list. Because the number of results in the suggest functionality is limited, this option helps the user find the relevant item via an alternative dialog:

See a live example of tabular autocomplete suggestions.

Tabular autocomplete
Tabular autocomplete

Guidelines

Always provide a meaningful label for any input field, and use the least complex control (such as select instead of value help). Use more intricate controls only if the use case really requires it. Where appropriate, help users by providing mask input or placeholder texts.

Maximum Columns

For input fields in a tabular view, we recommend using a maximum of 4 columns.

Maximum Length

Limit the length of the input field. For example, if you don’t want users to enter more than 5 characters, set the maximum length to 5. The maximum permissible character length is not defined by default. If the back-end system has a limit, ensure that you set this property accordingly.

Note that this parameter is not compatible with the input type sap.m.InputType.Number. If the input type is set to Number, the value of the maxLength property is ignored.

Placeholder

Avoid using the placeholder attribute as an alternative to a label. This is important because the placeholder text is overwritten as soon as the form is filled out. Labels are necessary to indicate the meaning of the form fields when the placeholders are no longer visible.

Description

The description field should be used, for example, for displaying units or currency. Do not use a description for help text or as a label replacement. Note that the description is not placed in a new line in size S. Therefore, only use the description property for small input fields with a short description.

Width

  • Avoid setting a fixed width, but rather embed it in a proper layout (such as a form, simple form, or grid layout) and use the layout data property to define the responsive behavior for sizes S, M, and L:
  • Ensure an appropriate width for the range of values to be entered for the sizes S, M, and L. Keep in mind that word length can vary between languages, so take localization into account.

Editable and Enabled States

Editable

Property settings: editable = true, enabled = true

The input control is enabled and editable by default. Set the control to editable to allow the user to enter a value.

Not Editable

Property settings: editable = false, enabled = true

Use this state, for example, to display data only.

Disabled

Property settings: editable = not relevant, enabled = false

Set the control to disabled in an edit scenario to indicate that the user cannot change the control, for example, due to missing access rights or previous conditions not having been fulfilled or selected.

Text Align

Align left if:

  • Text is used. Also use left alignment for a phone number, URL, password, and email address.

Align right if:

  • Amounts and decimal numbers are used.
  • Values need to be added and compared.

Value Help

Show the value help option to help the user select the correct value (such as a customer ID) from a large dataset via the:

Use this option in combination with the autocomplete suggestion feature.

When the user clicks or taps the value help icon, the data entered into the input field must be transferred to the processing dialog so that the user does not have to enter the search term again. Likewise, data entered in the processing dialog must be transferred back to the input field.

Autocomplete Suggestion

Use the autocomplete suggestion feature to display real-time suggestions and to help the user enter information more accurately and efficiently. If you expect the suggest values to be longer than the input field itself, you can change the width via the maxSuggestionWidth property.

Single Value with Autocomplete

Use the single-value autocomplete feature if you want to search by only one attribute, such as an ID or a customer name.

Two Values with Autocomplete

Use the two-value autocomplete feature if you want to search by two attributes, such as a customer name and an ID. This ensures that the search is carried out for both attributes.

Tabular Autocomplete

If you need to display more than two attributes, use the tabular autocomplete feature. Try to keep the number of columns to a minimum, and focus on the columns that are really relevant for the use case. Define appropriate responsive behavior for sizes S and M. For more information, see responsive table.

The width of the columns is distributed equally by default. To avoid truncation, accurately estimate the primary attribute length and set a minimum width for this column.

Creating and Editing Objects

Sometimes a new object needs to be created if the user cannot find a specific item via autocomplete or value help. In this case, we recommend that you place the New action next to the input field.

If you want the user to be able to edit a selected object directly, you should place the Edit link next to the input field.

If both actions are needed, they should be toggled based on the content of the input field. If a valid object is selected, you should display Edit. If the input field is empty or the object is not valid, you should display New. This pattern can also be applied for the multi-input fieldcombo boxmulti-combo box, and select controls.

Input field – New action
Input field – New action
Input field – Edit action
Input field – Edit action

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Dialog

The dialog control (sap.m.dialog) interrupts the current app process to prompt the user for information or for a response. It forces a decision or a confirmation that needs to be signed off by the user.

Usage

Use the dialog if:

  • You want to display complex content (that is not a floorplan), but don’t want the user to navigate away from the current page.
  • You want to display an additional step or process that needs to be confirmed by a user action.
  • You want to enable the user to create an object with a small number of fields (up to 8 fields).

Do not use the dialog if:

  • You want to display a simple message. Use the message box instead.
  • You just want to confirm a successful action.
  • You do not want to interrupt the user.
  • You want to enable users to create an object with more than 8 fields. Use an object page instead.
  • You want to display a floorplan. Floorplans are not meant to be displayed inside a dialog.

Responsiveness

The dialog provides different behavior on a smartphone than on a tablet or desktop. We distinguish between “cozy” and “compact” dialogs. For more information, see content density.

The buttons in the toolbar are aligned differently on the various devices. On a smartphone, they extend across the entire footer toolbar, but on a tablet or desktop device, they are right-aligned.

Size S (Smartphone)

Full Screen Dialog

We recommend displaying dialogs in S size in full screen mode to help users focus on the content of the dialog (property stretch = “true”). The toolbar containing the actions is positioned at the bottom of the dialog.

Full screen dialog - Size S
Full screen dialog - Size S

Position of the Action Buttons

By default, a dialog can have one or two actions, which extend across the entire footer on smartphones.

Alignment of footer actions - Size S
Alignment of footer actions - Size S

When to Open Full Screen or Modal

Always display message dialogs as modals. There is no need to display a simple message in a full screen dialog. If you want to display a simple message, use the message box instead.

If you use standard dialogs, such as value help, open them in full screen mode to help the user can focus on the content of the message. The dialog control offers a stretch property for full screen behavior.

Size M (Tablet)

By default, the dialog can have up to two action buttons in the footer. The action buttons in the toolbar are right-aligned. Use cozy mode on tablet devices.

If the content height increases or is set to more than the screen height, the dialog height stops at 4 rem from the top and bottom. The user can then scroll through the content area.

Size L (Desktop)

By default, the dialog can have one or two actions. The action buttons on a desktop device are right-aligned. Use compact mode to ensure that the padding and margins are optimized for desktop devices.

If the content height increases or is set to more than the screen height, the dialog height stops at 4 rem from the top and bottom. The user can then scroll through the content area.

Dialog in compact mode - Size L
Dialog in compact mode - Size L

Layout

Position on the Screen

The dialog is positioned in the center of the screen. It opens in a modal window to ensure that it attracts the user’s attention when it displays emergency states.

On a smartphone, the stretch property allows you to achieve full screen behavior.

Behavior and Interaction

Navigation in a Dialog

You can let users navigate to another page within the dialog. On the second page, an arrow at the top of the dialog allows users to navigate back to the first page.

Navigation Pattern List - Size L
Navigation Pattern List - Size L
Navigation Pattern Detail - Size L
Navigation Pattern Detail - Size L

 

Resizable

You can let users change the size of the dialog (property resizable = “true). The resizable indicator then shows in the bottom-right corner of the dialog.

Resizable indicator in the bottom right-hand corner - Size L
Resizable indicator in the bottom right-hand corner - Size L

Draggable

By clicking and holding on the heading, users can drag the dialog to another position (property draggable = “true”).

Dialog can be moved by dragging the title - Size L
Dialog can be moved by dragging the title - Size L

 

Messaging Within a Dialog

Do not show message popovers within dialogs. Use highlighting to show issues with content fields. For more information, see form field validation.

 

Editing and Saving Content

If a dialog is used for editing, keep it simple. If you need more than 8 editable fields, consider other solutions instead, such as navigation to a detail page.

The data in the dialog is only saved when the user click or taps Create or Save. Use form field validation within the dialog to make users aware of any errors.

The data in the dialog is lost if the page is refreshed during the editing process (also in the draft scenario), or if the user chooses Cancel.

Highlighted form fields in a dialog - Size S
Highlighted form fields in a dialog - Size S

 

Types

Standard Dialog

Use the standard dialog unless you need one of the specialized dialogs below. The standard dialog has a header with a grey background, and no icon.

Message Box

The message box is a special type of dialog that is used to display messages quickly. For each type of message, you can decide when to use a dialog. Use the message toast (sap.m.MessageToast) for success messages. For more information, see Message Box.

Components

The dialog contains the following sections and options:

Title: Title text appears in the dialog header.

Subheader (optional): Subheaders appear below the main header. Since the subheader is not part of the content area, it is not scrollable.

Content: This area contains the actual content of the dialog.

Footer with actions: The footer can contain up to two buttons (optional). If no buttons are defined, the default Close button is shown.

Example of a dialog structure (Cozy example)
Example of a dialog structure (Cozy example)

Emphasized Buttons in a Dialog

Always use an emphasized button for the the standard action. Emphasizing the main action in the dialog toolbar helps users to focus on the most likely choice. This saves users time and gives new users a sense of orientation.

Never use an emphasized button for Cancel.

Emphasized button in the dialog toolbar
Emphasized button in the dialog toolbar

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

 

 

 

 

 

 

Value Help Dialog

The value help dialog is a UI pattern that helps the user find and select single and multiple values. The user can also define and select multiple ranges. The value help dialog is generally called from an input field or a multi-input field by clicking the selection icon (value help icon) of the input field.

Usage

Use the value help dialog if:

  • The user needs to use different attributes (such as city, company name, and so on) to find an object.
  • The user is searching within a dataset containing more than 200 items.
  • The user needs to define and select ranges and exclusions.

Do not use the value help dialog if:

  • The user only needs a few items to filter the dataset. Always start with the least complex control (for example, use select instead of value help if the user needs to select only one item from a short list).
Information
For more information on which selection control to choose, see the selection control overview.

Responsiveness

The behavior of the value help dialog on a phone differs from its behavior on a tablet or desktop device. Both the navigation and the positioning of the selection area differ depending on the device.

Value help dialog - Size S
Value help dialog - Size S
Value help dialog - Size M
Value help dialog - Size M
Value help dialog - Size L
Value help dialog - Size L

Components

The value help dialog contains the following components:

1) Header bar
2) Icon tab bar / list control (phone)
3) Search template (optional)
4) Basic search
5) Advanced search
6) Result list
7) Items row (selected items, excluded items)
8) Footer toolbar
9) Include/exclude areas for range selection

Header Bar (1)

The header bar contains the dialog title. For guidelines on the dialog title, see the Guidelines section of this article.

Icon Tab Bar on Tablet/Desktop and List Control on Phone (2)

Depending on the device, the following controls are used to display the content of the value help dialog:

  • Smartphones: The start dialog provides a list (sap.m.List) with the standard list items (sap.m.StandardListItemSelect from List and
    Define Conditions to navigate between the different dialogs.
  • Tablet and desktop devices: The value help dialog contains an icon tab bar (sap.m.IconTabBar) to navigate between the Select from List and the Define Conditions tab.

Search Template (3)

Search templates allow the user to display different or additional fields in the advanced search field and the results list. Depending on the use case, the user can switch between the different search templates in order to use different fields when searching. For example, the search template “Customer (by company code)” displays the additional field “Company code” in the advanced search and result list.

Basic Search (4)

The basic search finds all results that are somehow related to the input. For example, the search term “A” returns all the results containing the letter “A”.

Always offer the basic search in the value help dialog. Position the basic search to the right of the search template control. If there is no search template control, left-align the basic search.

Advanced Search (5)

The advanced search offers a search field for each column in the result list.

Value help dialog - Advanced search
Value help dialog - Advanced search

For implementation of the basic and advanced search, the filter bar (sap.ui.comp.filterbar.FilterBar) is used in advanced mode. Advanced mode differs from basic mode in the following ways:

  • There is no Filters link or a dialog to make additional filter fields visible. All filter fields/advanced search fields are added automatically to the advanced search area.
  • There is a toggle link to show and hide the advanced search.
  • On desktops, the advanced search should be expanded by default.
  • On tablets, the advanced search should be collapsed by default.
  • In each of the filter fields, users can use operators like “between” or “lower than” to define ranges.

Note that the value help icon of the business object ID field and description field for the business object that opened the current value help dialog will open only the Define Conditions screen. The entire value help dialog is not shown in order to prevent endless loops. For example, the value help icon of the customer ID or description field in a Select: Customer value help dialog will navigate directly to the Define Conditions screen.

How the Advanced Search Works

The user can include operators (such as “=“) to define the ranges directly within the field without moving to the fields of the Define Conditions tab.

The user must type the following to get results:

Operator Input Notation Example
between valuevalue 000100
equal to =value =0001
contains *value* *1*
starts with value* 001*
ends with *value *5
less than <value <100
less than or equal to <=value <=200
greater than >value >0300
greater than or equal to >=value >=0500
not equal to* !(=value) !(=0)

* Note that there isn’t an explicit “not equal to” operator. Instead, you need to use “Exclude” (!) in conjunction with the “equal to” operator (=).

Advanced search using operator
Advanced search using operator

Result List (6)

  • You can prefill the result list of the value help dialog by default.
  • If you transferred values from the input field to the basic search field of the value help dialog, the results are filtered accordingly.
  • If available, display the ID and description of the business object in the first and second columns. Display additional information in the next columns.
  • We recommend a maximum of five columns in the results list.

Selected/Excluded Items Row (7)

The row for Selected Items / Excluded Items is displayed in the panel container (see panel for more information). Each item or range that is selected or excluded is displayed as a token in the selected or excluded item row.

  • On desktops, the selection area with the selected and excluded items row is initially expanded.
  • On tablets and phones, the selection area with the selected and excluded item row is initially collapsed.

Footer Toolbar (8)

The footer bar offers the OK and Cancel buttons.

Include/Exclude Areas for Range Selection (9)

In the Include and Exclude areas of the Define Conditions tab, you can define single and multiple ranges with the following operators:

  • equal to
  • between
  • less than
  • less than or equal to
  • greater than
  • greater than or equal to

Each range is displayed as a token in the selected or excluded item row.

Developer Hint
For information on how to manage whitespace characters (blanks) when users copy and paste text into input controls, see Removing Leading and Trailing Whitespace.

Behavior and Interaction

Basic and Advanced Search

  • The basic search (mandatory) and advanced search (optional) are triggered by clicking or tapping the Go button. The search results are shown in the result list.
  • If the input field where the user is coming from contains data, this data is transferred to the basic search of the value help dialog and the results are then filtered accordingly.
  • The basic search performs a search across all fields that are displayed in the advanced search and the result list.

Item and Range Selection

Depending on your use case, the value help dialog can offer different selection options:

  • Select a single item
  • Select a single range
  • Select multiple items
  • Select/exclude multiple ranges

Users open the value help dialog by clicking or tapping the value help icon of the input field. The next steps depend on the use case and form factor (smartphone or desktop/tablet).

The different use cases are described in the sections below.

Select a Single Item (Smartphone)

Tapping the value help icon opens the Select from List tab. As soon as an item is selected, the value help dialog closes automatically.

Single item selection on a smartphone
Single item selection on a smartphone

Select a Single Item (Desktop/Tablet)

Clicking the value help icon opens the Select: [Object]  screen (for example, Select: Company). The icon tab bar and the Selected Items / Excluded Items row are hidden. As soon as an item is selected, the value help dialog closes automatically.

Single item selection on a desktop/tablet device
Single item selection on a desktop/tablet device

Select a Single Range (Smartphone)

Tapping the value help icon opens the Define Condition tab.

Single range selection on a smartphone
Single range selection on a smartphone

Select a Single Range (Desktop/Tablet)

Clicking the value help icon opens the Define Condition: [Object] tab (for example, Define Condition: Company).

The icon tab bar and the Selected Items / Excluded Items row are hidden. The Add and Delete icons for adding and deleting ranges are also hidden.

Single range selection on a desktop/tablet device
Single range selection on a desktop/tablet device

Select Multiple Items | Select/Exclude Multiple Ranges (Smartphone)

Tapping the value help icon displays the start dialog.

  • The Select from List tab is used to select multiple items
  • The Define Conditions tab is used to select and exclude ranges.

Both are added as tokens to the Selected Items / Excluded Items row at the bottom of the start dialog.

Start dialog for multi-item and multi-range selection on a smartphone
Start dialog for multi-item and multi-range selection on a smartphone
Multi-range selection on a smartphone
Multi-range selection on a smartphone
Multi-item selection on a smartphone
Multi-item selection on a smartphone
Advanced search on a smartphone
Advanced search on a smartphone

Select Multiple Items | Select/Exclude Multiple Ranges (Desktop/Tablet)

Clicking the value help icon displays the icon tab bar with the Select from List and Define Conditions tabs.

  • The Select from List tab is used to select multiple items
  • The Define Conditions tab is used to select and exclude ranges.

Both are added as tokens to the Selected Items / Excluded Items row at the bottom of the screen.

Multi-item and multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device
Multi-item and multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device
Multi-item and multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device
Multi-item and multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device

Select/Exclude Multiple Ranges (Smartphone)

Tapping the value help icon opens the start dialog with the Define Conditions tab.

The selected values are added as tokens to the Selected Items / Excluded Items row at the bottom of the start dialog.

Start dialog for multi-range selection on a smartphone
Start dialog for multi-range selection on a smartphone
Multi-range selection on a smartphone
Multi-range selection on a smartphone

Select/Exclude Multiple Ranges (Desktop/Tablet)

Clicking the value help icon opens the Define Conditions: [Object] tab (for example, Define Conditions: Company). The icon tab bar is hidden and the Selected Items / Excluded Items row is displayed.

Multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device
Multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device

Selected Items / Excluded Items

  • Each item that is selected from the result list on the Select from List tab is displayed as a token in the Selected Items row.
  • Each range that is selected or excluded on the Define Conditions tab is displayed as a token in the Selected Items / Excluded Items row.

Copying and Pasting Multiple Values

The Include and Exclude areas on the Define Conditions tab allow the user to enter multiple values at once (copied from the clipboard) .

In both areas, users can paste more than one value into the value input field. In this case, the condition row repeats with the previously selected condition and shows one value per row.

If there are more than 10 rows of conditions in either the Include or Exclude area, pagination is added to top of the respective area. A token appears next to each pasted value on the Selected Items / Excluded Items row at the bottom of the value help dialog.

Copying and pasting multiple values
Copying and pasting multiple values
Copying and pasting multiple values
Copying and pasting multiple values

Guidelines

Dialog Title

The dialog title differs depending on the device and whether multiple or single selection is used.

For smartphones:

  • Starting dialog: [Object] (for example, Company)
  • Select from list dialog: Select from List
  • Advanced search dialog: Advanced Search
  • Single range selection: Define Condition
  • Multiple range selection: Define Conditions

For tablet and desktop devices:

  • Multiple items combined with selection of multiple ranges: [Object] (for example, Company)
  • Single item selection: Select: [Object] (for example, Select: Company)
  • Single range selection: Define Condition: [Object] (for example, Define Condition: Company)
  • Multiple range selection: Define Conditions: [Object] (for example, Define Conditions: Company)

Advanced Search

If necessary, also provide value help for fields offered in the advanced search. However, do not provide the full value help dialog for the ID and description fields of the business object that is being selected. For these two fields, make sure that the value help icon opens only the Define Conditions screen (range selection).

For example, in a value help dialog for selecting the customer, do not offer full value help for the Customer ID and Customer Name fields. Instead, try to use the value help in combination with a helpful suggestion.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

 

Micro Chart

Micro charts help you visualize a small number of data points in a small, non-interactive way. They can be embedded in tiles, SAP Smart Business drilldowns, and any SAPUI5 container (such as SAPUI5 tables).

Usage

Use the micro chart if:

  • You want to provide tracking at a glance.
  • You want to display changes in the data in an easy and condensed way.

Do not use the micro chart if:

  • You are looking for interactive analytics. Use the analytical card instead.
  • You want to display extensive data. Use the vizFrame chart instead.

Responsiveness

All micro charts are fully responsive. The size of the control adapts automatically to the size of the parent container and does not have a defined width or height.

Types

The following micro charts are currently available:



Choosing the Correct Chart Type

Charts are used to visually represent the relationships between numeric values. In order to choose the correct chart type, it’s important to define the type of relationship you want to illustrate.

Ranking

If you want to rank items from highest to lowest, or vice versa, we recommend using the comparison (bar) micro chart. For time-based categories, the column micro chart is more appropriate.

Micro charts for ranking
Micro charts for ranking

Comparison

To compare items that don’t have a particular order, you can use the comparison micro chart (offering category and value labels for each part) or the column micro chart.

Sometimes it can also be useful to show when a certain value reaches or exceeds a reference point (for example, when an actual value is compared to a target or forecast). In such cases, use a bullet micro chart. Keep in mind that the bullet micro chart shows data points for given points in time. Do not use it to show a time series.

To compare value totals within and across different categories, you can use the stacked bar micro chart.

Micro charts for comparison
Micro charts for comparison

Variation over Time

By convention, time is represented horizontally from left to right which means it’s best to use the horizontal axis to represent the time in chart visualizations.

To show changes in measures over time, you can use the line micro chart, the column micro chart, and the area micro chart. The exact chart type depends on the type of change you want to visualize.

If you want to emphasize the trend over time, use the area micro chart (which provides information for actual and target values, visualized and compared to threshold areas) or the line micro chart. If you want to emphasize the values themselves, use the column micro chart.

Micro charts for variation over time
Micro charts for variation over time

Part to Whole

You can use several chart types that depict the contribution of individual values to a whole.

The typical chart for visualizing part of a whole is the Harvey ball micro chart. This is most suitable if you want to display a single value compared to its total. To show a single percentage value, use the radial micro chart.

The stacked bar micro chart works best for visualizing different values as part of one whole; its bars are shown next to each other. The comparison micro chart is better if you want to compare parts to each other and display category labels and value labels associated with each part.

Micro charts for part to whole
Micro charts for part to whole

Deviation

These chart types visualize the difference or variance between two values (or two sets of values).

To show a time-related deviation between sets of values, use the area micro chart (for example, to show the difference between actual expenses and target expenses), or the line micro chart.

If you want to emphasize the deviating values, use the column micro chart (suitable for showing variances), or the comparison micro chart (offering category and value labels).

The bullet micro chart shows the difference between two values (actual and target) or three values (actual, target, and forecast) at a given point in time.

The delta micro chart helps to visualize a delta value (difference) between two main key figures, which can be time-related or category-based.

Micro charts for deviation
Micro charts for deviation

Distribution

To visualize how values are distributed within a set, we recommend using the column micro chart or the comparison micro chart (offering category and value labels). The stacked bar micro chart shows the distribution of values as part of a whole.

If you want to emphasize the shape of the distribution over time, use the line micro chart.

Micro charts for distribution
Micro charts for distribution

Behavior and Interaction

Clicking (Optional)

The micro charts include one interaction: a click event that can be switched on or off.

“No data” Text

When data is missing, a white rectangular placeholder with the text “No data” is shown instead of the chart. The size of the placeholder depends on the size of the chart. No labels and tooltips are shown. The “No data” placeholder can be focused, but it’s not possible to attach a click event to it.

Area micro chart without data
Area micro chart without data
Comparison micro chart without data
Comparison micro chart without data
Line micro chart without data
Line micro chart without data
Bullet micro chart without data
Bullet micro chart without data
Delta micro chart without data
Delta micro chart without data
Radial micro chart without data
Radial micro chart without data
Column micro chart without data
Column micro chart without data
Harvey Ball micro chart without data
Harvey Ball micro chart without data
Stacked bar micro chart without data
Stacked bar micro chart without data

Guidelines

Truncation

Never truncate numeric labels, as this could be misleading for the user. If there is not enough space for the label, hide it.

“No data” Text

If the micro chart is placed in the cell of a table and there is no data for the chart, leave the cell blank (empty).

Micro charts without data in table cells
Micro charts without data in table cells

If the chart is used in the micro chart facet of the object page header and data is missing, make sure the footer of the facet is removed as well if it doesn’t add any value for the user.

Micro charts without data in the object page header
Micro charts without data in the object page header

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Single Planning Calendar

The single planning calendar is a scheduling control that displays the calendar of a single person or resource over a day, work week, or week. Users can view appointments, create new appointments, and delete appointments.

Single planning calendar
Single planning calendar

Usage

Use the single planning calendar if:

  • You want to enable users to schedule or monitor the calendar of a single person or resource.
  • You want to offer multiple calendar views (day, work week, week).

Do not use the single planning calendar if:

  • You want to compare objects of the same type over a given period (for example, appointments for multiple persons or resources). In this case, use the planning calendar.
  • The main use case is to schedule all-day appointments, and you don’t need to see an hour axis. In this case, use the planning calendar.
  • You need a complex graphical representation or planning application involving activities, resources, hierarchical project structures, relationships, and so on. In this case, use the Gantt chart.

Responsiveness

The single planning calendar is responsive and supports the cozy and compact density modes.

Overflow Behavior

On smaller screens, the custom toolbar utilizes the overflow behavior of the standard SAP Fiori toolbar.

If the available actions do not all fit into the available space on the toolbar, an overflow menu button appears on the right of the toolbar. The rightmost actions move into the overflow menu first.

Single planning calendar - Size L
Single planning calendar - Size L
Single planning calendar - Size M
Single planning calendar - Size M
Single planning calendar - Size S
Single planning calendar - Size S

Components

The single planning calendar consists of the following components:

  1. Header
  2. Toolbar
  3. View switch
  4. Navigation
  5. Date strip
  6. All-day appointment
  7. Timeline
  8. Appointment
  9. Calendar grid
  10. Now marker
Components of the single planning calendar
Components of the single planning calendar
Developer Hint
To prevent waiting time, app developers should load the sap.ui.unified library.

1. Header

The header contains the toolbar and the navigation.

2. Toolbar

The toolbar consists of the calendar title (optional) and the toolbar actions, including a default view switch. You can add other app-specific actions that are relevant for your use case (such as adding an appointment, search, filter, settings, showing the calendar legend, and so on). Always place actions that affect the entire calendar in the toolbar.

3. View switch

The view switch allows the user to switch between different time intervals. The default views are day, work week, and week. The app developer can choose which views to include, depending on the use case. Currently, the single planning calendar does not support custom views.

Developer Hint
If no view is set by the application developer, the single planning calendar renders the week view. If the application developer sets only the day view, the week view is not visible.

4. Navigation

The navigation area contains back and forward arrows, the Today button, a date interval link, and the date strip. Clicking the Today button takes the user to the period containing the current day.

5. Date strip

The date strip is the horizontal axis of the calendar grid, showing the currently visible day or days. Non-working days are a darker color.

6. All-day appointment

All-day appointments are appointments that take up 24 hours. They are located in a dedicated area below the date strip and above the first hour of the timeline.

The option to create all-day appointments must be added at application level. Consider using a switch or checkbox that automatically sets the start and end time of the appointment to 00:00. We recommend reflecting this in the UI for creating the appointment as well. For example, offer a date picker instead of a date/time picker for selecting the start and end of the appointment (as shown in the sample dialog).

There is no limit of the height of the all-day appointments area. However, if your use case involves a lot of all-day appointments (and their area takes up most of the screen), consider using the planning calendar instead.

7. Timeline

The timeline is the vertical axis of the calendar grid, showing the hours.

8. Appointment

Each appointment can have an icon or image, a title, and a subtitle. If there is not enough horizontal space for the text, it is truncated. If an appointment has an icon, the icon remains visible as long as there is space for it, even if that does not leave enough space for the title. If there is not enough vertical space, the subtitle is not shown.

Appointments vary in height, depending on their duration, and in width, depending on how many appointments take place simultaneously. The minimum height of an appointment corresponds to a 30-minute appointment.

The app can set up to 20 types of appointments. Each type has its assigned color. Always choose appointment types with contrasting colors. Make sure that each type is also represented as a text, and not only by the color.

9. Calendar grid

The calendar contains the appointments and all-day appointments, and is controlled by the currently selected view. Non-working days have a darker background color in the calendar grid.

10. Now marker

The now marker is a horizontal line through the calendar grid, which indicates the current time. The current time is visible on the timeline. If the current time falls within 15 minutes of a full hour, it replaces the full hour.

Appointment structure
Appointment structure
Now marker - Current time replaces the full hour
Now marker - Current time replaces the full hour

Behavior and Interaction

Date Picker

The visible period is indicated with the date interval link in the navigation. Clicking the link opens a date picker, which helps the user to navigate quickly to a specific day or week.

Creating an Appointment

We recommend offering a Create action in the toolbar. Use the generic   icon button.

The UI for creating the appointment must be implemented at app level. The control provides only the underlying functionality for creating appointments. For most use cases, a dialog works best and is recommended (see sample dialog below).

Viewing Appointment Details

The UI for viewing appointment details must be implemented at app level. The control provides only the underlying functionality for displaying appointment details. We recommend using a popover to keep the context for the user (see sample popover below).

Sticky Header

To keep the context when the user scrolls down the calendar, the header area of the single planning calendar can remain fixed at the top of the screen (property: stickyMode).

At app level, you can choose to have the entire header area sticky (value: All) or only the Navigation area (value: NavBarAndColHeaders).

Drag and drop

You can enable drag and drop for moving appointments (property: enableAppointmentDragAndDrop). Moving an appointment changes its start and end times (for example, if an appointment is scheduled from 1:00-2:00 PM, the user can drag it and change the time slot to 2:00-3:00 PM). When dragged, the appointment is shown as a ghost element on the mouse cursor. A placeholder indicates the target drop area.

Appointments can also be dragged from or to the area for all-day appointments. When the user drags an all-day appointment to the planning area, a placeholder shows the duration of the appointment after dropping (default = 1 hour). Similarly, dragging a regular appointment to the all-day appointments area transforms it into an all-day appointment (default = 1 day).

For desktop devices, you can also enable the following options:

  • Allow users to create new appointments by clicking, dragging, and releasing on an empty space in the content area (property: enableAppointmentsCreate).
  • Allow users to change the duration of an appointment by clicking and dragging one side of the appointment (property: enableAppointmentsResize).
Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Drag and drop from the all-day appointments area
Drag and drop from the all-day appointments area
Drag and drop into the all-day appointments area
Drag and drop into the all-day appointments area

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Delta Micro Chart

The delta micro chart helps to visualize a delta value (difference) between two main key figures. The delta can be a positive or negative value. Configured thresholds define the semantic coloring of the delta bar. The left-aligned labels can be omitted, whereas the right-aligned labels with the values are always shown.

Different delta charts
Different delta charts

Usage

The delta micro chart can be embedded into a table, list, tile, or header.

Responsiveness

The delta micro chart is fully responsive. The size adjusts dynamically based on the dimensions of the parent container. In addition, there are four fixed sizes: L, M, S and XS. Each fixed size is a snapshot of the fully responsive micro chart for specific dimensions.

Delta micro chart - Size L
Delta micro chart - Size L
Delta micro chart - Size M
Delta micro chart - Size M
Delta micro chart - Size S
Delta micro chart - Size S
Delta micro chart - Size XS
Delta micro chart - Size XS

You can use size XS to embed the delta micro chart in the cells of a grid tableanalytical table, or tree table (also in condensed mode). Left-align the delta micro chart in the table cell.

Delta micro chart in size XS in a grid table
Delta micro chart in size XS in a grid table

Maximum and Minimum Sizes

The delta micro chart can have the following dimensions:

Width Height
Maximum 320 px 94 px
Minimum 64 px 18 px

If the chart height is less than 56 px, all labels are hidden but the delta value is still visible.

With the minimum chart height, the labels are not shown.

Components

Labels

The delta micro chart has two main labels, which refer to two data points:

  • The main key value labels indicate the actual data points that are used to calculate the delta.
  • The delta value is the difference between these two data points and is displayed in a semantic color.

In the wide mode, the labels are placed before and after the chart. If the width is not sufficient to show all labels, the values are hidden first, followed by the date labels.

Delta micro chart - components
Delta micro chart - components

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Radial Micro Chart

The goal of the radial chart is to display a single percentage value. The chart consists of a colored radial bar with a percentage value inside.

The radial micro chart can be embedded into a table, list, tile, or header.

Different radial charts
Different radial charts

Usage

Use the radial micro chart if:

  • You want to display a single value in a table.
  • You want to show a percentage value; the proportion of the total is always calculated and displayed as a percentage.
  • You want to emphasize the visualization; the circular shape is more prominent.
  • You want to use colors from the chart color palettes.

Do not use the radial micro chart if:

  • You want to display a single value in the form of a fillable shape or group of shapes that describe their context. Use the status indicator instead.
  • You want to make it easier to compare better two or more values visually. Use the progress indicator instead.
  • You want to display custom values and not only percentages. Use the progress indicator instead.

Responsiveness

The radial micro chart is fully responsive. The size adjusts dynamically based on the dimensions of the parent container. In addition, there are four fixed sizes: L, M, S and XS. Each fixed size is a snapshot of the fully responsive micro chart for specific dimensions.

Radial micro chart - Size L
Radial micro chart - Size L
Radial micro chart - Size M
Radial micro chart - Size M
Radial micro chart - Size S
Radial micro chart - Size S
Radial micro chart - Size XS
Radial micro chart - Size XS

You can use size XS to embed the radial micro chart in the cells of a grid tableanalytical table, or tree table (also in condensed mode). Left-align the radial micro chart in the table cell.

Radial micro chart in size XS in a grid table
Radial micro chart in size XS in a grid table

Maximum and Minimum Sizes

The radial micro chart can have the following dimensions:

Width Height
Maximum 320 px 94 px
Minimum 64 px 18 px

If the chart height is less than 56 px, only the slice label is visible.

Components

Labels

If the micro chart is smaller than size S, the label moves to the right (outside the radial chart). If there is no space to the right of the chart, no label is displayed.

Radial micro chart - components
Radial micro chart - components

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Radial Micro Chart (SAPUI5 samples)